THE ORIGINAL AND MOST POPULAR AROUND THE WORLD

SUCCESS
SERIES

CLASS 10 PHYSICS MCQ BOOK FOR BOARD EXAMS

YOUR ONE-STOP SOLUTION FOR EXAM SUCCESS!

DESIGNED FOR KNOWLEDGE TEST

MCQ EDITION

NARAYAN CHANGDER
 Coverage of all important topics.

 The excellent aid for better rank.

 Perfect for all competitive exam.

 Use this book with your main text.

 Toppers 3FIRST3 choice I G

B RD
 Over 5532+ questions. M A
E A H
R K
D R
O
W
USEFUL FOR

□STUDENTS ✔
✔ □TEACHERS ✔
□RESEARCHERS ✔
□MIDTERM EXAM
□ENTRANCE EXAM ✔
✔ □COMPETITIVE EXAM ✔
□QUIZZES ✔
□OTHER
 Disclaimer

The aim of this publication is to sup-

ply information taken from sources be-
lieved to be valid, reliable and authen-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ticate. The author bear no responsibil-
ity for any damage arising from inad-
verent omissions, negligence or inac-
curacies (typographical or factual) that
♣
may have found their way into this PDF
booklet.
Due care has been taken to ensure that
the information provided in this book
is correct. Author is not responsible
for any errors, omissions or damage
arising out of use of this information.

nt
Importa inter-
s , s e a rch the de
er to inclu -
i t h t h e answ w a n t
w u au
atisfied . If yo ontact
If not s rrect answers klet, please c t s:
p
net for
co
i n t h is boo F a c e b ook ht
estions on
tact him arayanchangd
er/
new qu a n c o n n
ou c om/
thor. Y acebook.c
. f
//www
 Contents

1 Light – reflection & refraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1 Reflection of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.3 Spherical mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.4 Spherical mirrors image formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.5 Sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.6 Mirror formula derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.8 Refraction of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1.11 Image formation by spherical lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
1.12 Lens formula derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

2 The human eye and the colourful world . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

2.1 The human eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
2.2 Power of accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.3 Defects of vision and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4 Defects of vision and correction numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.5 Dispersion of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.6 Atmospheric refraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
2.7 Scattering of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2.8 Tyndall effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1

3 Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.1 Electric current & circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.2 Electric potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
3.3 Electric potential difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends on . . . . . . . . . . 390
3.6 Series and parallel resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

4 Magnetic effects of electric current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current . . . . . 523
4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
4.4 Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
4.5 Electromagnetic induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
4.7 Domestic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
NARAYAN CHANGDER
 1. Light – reflection & refraction

1.1 Reflection of light

1. Which term is used to refer 4. The angle of incidence will
to the scattering of light by be the angle of reflection.
a rough surface?
(A) 10◦ less than
(A) Diffuse reflection (B) 10◦ more than
(B) Specular reflection (C) equal to
(C) Regular reflection (D) The opposite obtuse angle to
(D) none of above
5. How does the light travels?
2. The Laws of reflection are, (A) in parallel
(A) The normal is imaginary (B) in a straight line
(B) The angle of incidence is (C) on its own orbit
equal to the angle of reflection (D) on its own path
(C) The image is virtual
6. When distance of object
(D) The incident ray, the reflected from a mirror is gradu-
ray and the normal at the point of ally increased then image
incidence lie in the same plane. formed by it becomes in-
verted which was erect in
3. the image of an object the beginning. Which type
formed by a plain mirror is of mirror is this?
(A) virtual (A) Plane mirror
(B) real (B) Concave mirror
(C) diminished (C) Convex mirror
(D) upside-down (D) none of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

7. What is reflection of light? (C) Real image

(A) Reflection is the bouncing of (D) inverted image
light off the surface that it strikes
on. 12. When you look in a mir-
ror, which of these is correct
(B) Reflection is the absorbing of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
about the image?
light off the surface that it strikes
on. (A) further away than the object
(C) Reflection is the bending of (B) real
light off the surface that it strikes (C) same size as the object
on. (D) flipped upside down
(D) Reflection is the scattering of
light off the surface that it strikes 13. Name of the straight lines
on. that represent light waves
(A) Rays
8. The velocity of light in vac-
uum is m/s (B) image
(A) 3x108 (C) lines
(B) 3x1012 (D) visible light
(C) 3x106 14. If you are wearing a yel-
(D) 3x1010 low shirt, what is true of the
light that strikes it?
9. What is the name of the an-
(A) Yellow is absorbed; everything
gle between the incident ray
else is reflected
and the normal?
(B) Yellow is reflected; everything
(A) angle of incidence
else is absorbed
(B) angle of reflection
(C) All colors are reflected
(C) angle of convergent
(D) All colors are absorbed
(D) angle of divergent
15. What is a ray of light?
10. Which optical device bends
(A) A curved line of light
light inward?
(B) A type of fish
(A) convex lens
(B) concave lens (C) A straight beam of light

(C) plane mirror (D) The entire spectrum of colors

within white light
(D) convex mirror
16. MCQ 04 Tracing paper is an
11. Which of the following example for object.
characteristic of an image
formed for a convex mir- (A) a transparent
ror? (B) a translucent
(A) Enlarged size (C) an opaque
(B) virtual image (D) a luminous

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 5

17. What are luminous ob- 21. Light exhibits

jects?
(A) Ray nature only
(A) objects that generate their
own light (B) Wave nature only
(B) objects that do not generate (C) Dual nature ( ray & wave both
their own light )
(C) objects that do not reflect any (D) particle nature only
light
(D) objects that let light pass 22. A student wants to investi-
through them gate the reflection of light.
Which objects can be used to
18. A ray is reflected in turn by reflect light?
three plain mirrors mutually
at right angles to each other. (A) Clear glass
The angle between the inci- (B) Paper
dent and the reflected rays
(C) Silver Plate
is
(A) 60◦ (D) Black cloth
(B) 90◦
23. When light bounces back it
(C) 150◦ is
(D) 180◦ (A) Reflected
19. Which of the following cor- (B) Refracted
rectly describes the image
produced by a plane mir- (C) Absorbed
ror? (D) Optical Density
(A) The image is real and upright.
24. The point on the spherical
(B) The image will move twice as
mirror at the middle of the
fast towards the plane of the mir-
surface is called
ror as the object moves.
(C) The image is the same size (A) focus
as the object with no lateral inver- (B) centre of curvature
sion.
(C) pole
(D) The image undergoes vertical
inversion. (D) radius of curvature

20. The angle produced as a 25. MCQ 05 Light is a form of

source of light bounces off a energy produced by a
reflecting surface is called
(A) luminous object
(A) angle of crookedness
(B) angle of reflection (B) transparent object

(C) angle of incidence (C) non-luminous object

(D) angle of bounce (D) opaque object

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
6 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

26. Ray diagramming tech- (B) R=2/f

niques involves the drawing (C) R=1/2f
of the principal , focal ray,
and the central ray. (D) f=2R
(A) axis 31. What particles make up

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) ray light?
(C) vertex (A) Photons
(D) length (B) Neutrons
27. What is the angle between (C) Protons
the normal and the incident (D) none of above
ray know as?
(A) angle of reflection 32. When does the light is re-
fracted?
(B) angle of incidence
(A) When light travels in a straight
(C) right angle line
(D) angle of deviation
(B) When light is bounced
28. Which of the following is (C) When light travels in two dif-
an example of diffuse re- ferent mediums
flection? A. Reflection off
(D) When light cannot pass
a still pondB. Reflection off
through an opaque object
a gravel roadC. Reflection
off the sand on a beachD. 33. The splitting of sunlight into
Reflection from a window seven constituent colours is
pane called
(A) A and D
(A) refraction
(B) B and C
(B) dispersion
(C) A and B
(C) deviation
(D) C and D
(D) reflection
29. The reflection by the rough
surfaces is called 34. What is the correct formula
in determining the num-
(A) regular reflection
ber of images between two
(B) irregular reflection plane mirrors?
(C) reflection (A) N= 1-(360/angle between
(D) lateral inversion mirrors)
(B) N= (360/90o)-1
30. What is the relation be-
tween radius of curvature R (C) N= (360/angle between
and focal length f of a mir- mirrors)-1
ror? (D) N= (180/angle between
(A) R = 2f mirrors)-1

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 7

35. What surface best reflects (C) 90◦

light? (D) 60◦
(A) dull
40. How big will the angle of re-
(B) shiny flection be if the angle of in-
(C) clear cidence is 30 ◦ ?
(D) black (A) 20 ◦

36. If the angle between the re- (B) 30 ◦

flected ray and the surface (C) 40 ◦
is 50 degree, then what is (D) 60 ◦
the angle of incidence?
(A) 90 degree 41. What is the mirror for-
mula?
(B) 50 degree
(A) 1/f = 1/v + 1/u
(C) 40 degree
(B) 1/f = 1/u-1/v
(D) 30 degree
(C) 1/u = 1/f + 1/v
37. What is incident ray?
(D) 1/f = u + v
(A) the ray which forms 90 degree
with surface 42. A positive sign in the value
of magnification indicates
(B) the ray which passes through
that the image is
the surface
(A) real
(C) the ray which strikes any sur-
face (B) virtual
(D) the ray which is deflected by a (C) enlarged
smooth surface (D) near
38. The is the angle between 43. The Angle between the re-
the normal and the incident flected ray and the normal
ray. line is known as the
(A) Angle of incidence (A) Angle of Incidence
(B) Angle of reflection (B) Angle of Reflection
(C) Angle of coincidence (C) Normal Line
(D) Angle of direction (D) none of above
39. A ray of light is seen to be 44. What do you call a flat mir-
reflected from a plane mir- ror?
ror at an angle of 30◦ with
the mirror.The angle of inci- (A) plane mirror
dence must be (B) convex mirror
(A) 30◦ (C) concave mirror
(B) 120◦ (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
8 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

45. A transparent material (B) radiation

(A) Allows no light to pass (C) reflection
through it
(D) none of above
(B) Allows some light to pass
through it 50. a copy of an object formed

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Allows light to pass through it by reflected or refracted
rays of light
(D) Allows light to pass through it,
but depending on how bright it is (A) image
(B) reflection
46. The imaginary line perpen-
dicular to a reflecting sur- (C) regular reflection
face is called (D) diffuse reflection
(A) crooked line
51. Which of the following is
(B) parallel line NOT a property of the im-
(C) angular line age formed by a plane mir-
(D) normal line ror?
(A) virtual and upright
47. Why the rear-view mirrors
in vehicles are convex mir- (B) object size = image size
rors? (C) object distance = image dis-
(A) These mirrors give virtual erect tance
image and slightly diminished im- (D) real and inverted
age
(B) Concave mirror also gives vir- 52. An object is placed at a dis-
tual erect image but these are tance of 12cm in front of
highly magnified a concave mirror.It forms a
real image four times larger
(C) Both of these than the object.calculate the
(D) None of these distance of the image from
the mirror?
48. If the angle between the an-
gle of incidence and the an- (A) v =-53cm
gle of reflection is 100 de- (B) v =-48cm
gree then, what is the an-
(C) v = 53cm
gle between the angle of in-
cidence and the normal? (D) v = 48cm
(A) 50 degree
53. When light hits an area and
(B) 100 degree bounces back it is called:
(C) 40 degree (A) echo
(D) 90 degree (B) refraction
49. Light is a form of (C) reflection
(A) energy (D) absorbing

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 9

54. The image formed in a (B) concave

plane mirror is (C) convex
(A) real image
(D) achromatic
(B) the same size as the object
59. Objects which emit their
(C) bigger than the object
own light are described as:
(D) virtual image
(A) Luminous
(E) in front of the mirror.
(B) Non-luminous
55. MCQ 011 According to the (C) Transparent
laws of reflection, if i = an-
(D) Translucent
gle of incidence and r = an-
gle of reflection, 60. What is the name of a line
(A) i = r drawn at 90◦ to the surface
(B) i > r of a material?

(C) r > i (A) Boundary

(D) i is not equal to r (B) Incident

(C) Normal
56. Which of the following can
make a parallel beam of (D) none of above
light when light from a point
61. Why can you see most ob-
source is incident on it?
jects?
(A) (a) Concave mirror as well as
(A) they emit light
convex lens
(B) light refracts through them
(B) (d) Concave mirror as well as
concave lens (C) light reflects off them
(C) (b) Convex mirror as well as (D) they absorb light
concave lens
62. Power of the lens is-5D, its
(D) c) Two plane mirrors placed at focal length is
90◦ to each other
(A) 4m
57. What is the main light and
(B) -40m
heat source?
(C) -0.2m
(A) sun
(D) -25m
(B) rain
(C) light bulb 63. Apart from a prism, light
can also be separated by
(D) none of above
(A) air
58. A lens that is thicker in the
(B) plastic
middle than on the outside
is called (C) metal
(A) diverging (D) rain drop

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
10 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

64. Which of the following are 68. What is the distance of your
examples of specular reflec- image from you if you stand
tion? A. Reflection off a mir- 1.5 m in front of a plane mir-
rorB. Reflection off a flow- ror?
ing riverC. Reflection off a (A) 1.5 m

NARAYAN CHANGDER
glass tabletopD. Reflection
off a carpet (B) 2.0 m

(A) A and C (C) 3.0 m

(B) B and D (D) 4.5 m

(C) A and B 69. A ray of light that strikes a

(D) C and D plane mirror PQ at an an-
gle of incidence of 30o, is re-
65. Which term means to flected from the plane mir-
bounce off the surface of ror and then strikes a sec-
something? ond plane mirror QR placed
at right angles to the first
(A) Refract mirror. The angle of reflec-
(B) Absorb tion at the second mirror is:
(C) Reflect (A) 30o
(D) prism (B) 45o
(C) 60o
66. is a from of energy that
we can see with our eyes. (D) 90o
(A) shadow 70. Why can you see non-
(B) light luminous objects?
(C) energy (A) They emit light
(D) reflection (B) Light travels through them
(C) Light reflects off them
67. Which of the following
statements is true? (D) They absorb light

(A) A convex lens has 4 dioptre 71. When light hits a barrier
power having a focal length 0.25 that is solid/opaque what is
m usually created?
(B) A convex lens has-4 dioptre (A) a hot object
power having a focal length 0.25 (B) a shadow
m
(C) nothing
(C) A concave lens has-4 dioptre
power having a focal length 0.25 (D) none of above
m 72. If the angle of incidence is
(D) A concave lens has 4 dioptre 45o, what is the angle be-
power having a focal length 0.25 tween the incident ray and
m reflecting surface

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 11

(A) 45o 77. Light travels through a liq-

uid at 2.25 x 108 m/s.
(B) 90o
What is the absolute refrac-
(C) 180o tive index of the liquid?
(D) none of the above (A) 1.33
(B) 1.0
73. Which of the following is an
example of the use of a con- (C) 1.523
cave mirror (D) 2.45
(A) shaving mirrors
78. If the angle of incidence is
(B) security cameras 30 degree, then the angle of
reflections is?
(C) side mirrors of automobiles
(A) 30 degree
(D) optical instruments
(B) 90 degree
74. A copy of an object formed (C) 60 degree
by reflected or refracted
(D) 120 degree
rays of light is called an
(A) image 79. Zed stands 1.5-m tall in
front of a plane mirror.
(B) reflection What is the height of his im-
(C) regular reflection age?
(D) diffuse reflection (A) 4.5 m
(B) 3.0 m
75. An insect is sitting 80 cm in
front of a plane mirror m if (C) 2.0 m
the mirror is now moved 0.2 (D) 1.5 m
m away from the insect how
does the image of the insect 80. An object is placed at the
from its previous image centre of curvature of a con-
cave mirror.The distance be-
(A) 0.2 m tween the object and its im-
(B) 0.4 m age is

(C) 0.6 m (A) Equal to f

(B) Equal to 2f
(D) 1.2 m
(C) Zero
76. MCQ 06 An example for (D) Equal to 4f
non-luminous object is
(A) a candle 81. Glasses have a , which is
a curved piece of glass or
(B) the sun plastic that will refract light.
(C) an electric bulb (A) medium
(D) the moon (B) prism

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
12 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) lens 86. straight lines that represent

(D) none of above light waves
(A) rays
82. When light passes at an an-
(B) image
gle to the normal from one

NARAYAN CHANGDER
material into another mate- (C) reflection
rial in which its speed is (D) visible light
higher
87. Which of the following char-
(A) it is bent toward the normal.
acteristics are correct for the
(B) it always lies along the nor- image formed in a plane
mal. mirror? I. Upright II. Inverte-
(C) it is unaffected. dIII. Real IV. Same size as
the objectV. Virtual
(D) it is bent away from the nor-
mal. (A) I, II, III
(B) I, III, IV
83. Which of the following does
not have light of its own? (C) I, IV, V

(A) a torch (D) III, IV, V

(B) a lamp 88. Name the colors in the visi-

ble spectrum.
(C) the moon
(A) red, orange, yellow, green,
(D) the sun
blue, indigo, violet
84. List the characteristics of im- (B) red, orange, blue, violet,
age formed by a plane mir- green
ror (C) red, yellow, indigo, orange
(A) Real, Erect, Small (D) red, blue, green, yellow, pur-
(B) Virtual, Erect, Same size ple, brown, pink
(C) Real, Inverted, Large 89. The law of states that the
(D) Virtual, Inverted, large incident and reflected rays
lie in the same plane with
85. what is the difference be- the normal and that the an-
tween convergent and diver- gle of reflection equals the
gent lens? angle of incidence.
(A) convergent-focus light to- (A) Refraction
gether, divergent-refracts light
(B) Concave
into different directions
(C) Convex
(B) convergent-focus light into
different directions, divergent- (D) Reflection
refracts light together
90. You can see an object like a
(C) no difference book because the book
(D) none of above (A) glows

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 13

(B) reflects light (A) 8 cm

(C) is a light source is a light (B) 16 cm
source (C) 24 cm
(D) absorbs light (D) 36 cm
91. What “color” do we sense 96. How is a rainbow created?
when there is no light in a
room? (A) All colors are reflected off of
an object.
(A) Black
(B) White light is refracted
(B) White
through a prism.
(C) Rainbow
(C) White light is reflected off of a
(D) Periwinkle mirror.
(E) Gray (D) All colors are absorbed by a
prism.
92. Light behaves like both a
particle and a 97. You are given water, mus-
(A) Mass tard oil, glycerine and
kerosene. In which of these
(B) Wave
media a ray of light inci-
(C) Current dent obliquely at same an-
(D) none of above gle would bend the most
(A) kerosene
93. Best regular reflection of
light takes place when it (B) water
strikes (C) mustard
(A) Smooth opaque surface (D) glycerine
(B) Rough opaque surface
98. The radius of curvature of
(C) Smooth transparent surface a mirror is 20cm the focal
(D) Smooth & silvered opaque length is
surface (A) 20 cm
94. Name the type of mirror (B) 10 cm
used as a back-view mirror. (C) 40 cm
(A) Plane mirror (D) 5 cm
(B) Concave mirror
99. Why can’t you see your
(C) Convex mirror face on the pages of your
(D) None of these lecture notebook? When
light hits paper,
95. A lens of focal length 12 cm
forms an erect image, three (A) the waves are reflected in only
times the size of the object. one direction.
The distance between the (B) the waves are reflected in all
object and image is: directions.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
14 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) . the waves are refracted. (B) Smooth, shiny surfaces

(D) the waves are dispersed. (C) Dark coloured surfaces
100. what is reflections (D) Medium coloured surfaces
(A) is a form of energy 105. If the image is formed in

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) takes place on a new moon front of the mirror, then the
day image distance will be
(C) when light bounces off an ob- (A) positive or negative depend-
ject ing on the size of the object
(D) travelling in a straight line (B) neither positive nor negative
101. Light emerging from wa- (C) positive
ter to air will bend due (D) negative
to the speed as it crosses
the boundary. 106. The reflectivity of a mirror
(A) toward the normal, increases coating can be measured us-
ing a:
(B) toward the normal, decreases
(A) Reflectivator
(C) away from the normal, in-
creases (B) Laws of Reflection
(D) away from the normal, de- (C) Concave and Convex mirrors
creases (D) Reflectometer
102. what is the angle between 107. What instruments use
the incident ray and the nor- lenses or mirrors to collect
mal called as and focus light from distant
(A) angle of incidence objects?
(B) angle of reflection (A) Microscopes
(C) angle of convergent (B) Optical fibers
(D) angle of divergent (C) Telescopes
103. The angle between the (D) Lasers
mirror and the incident ray
is 30 degree, the angle of re- 108. What is a property of a
flection is? transparent object?
(A) 30 (A) Almost all of the light rays that
reach it are scattered.
(B) 45
(B) Almost all of the light rays that
(C) 60
reach it are absorbed.
(D) none of above
(C) Almost all of the light rays that
104. Objects that reflect well reach it are reflected.
are (D) Almost all of the light rays that
(A) Matte surfaces reach it pass through it.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 15

109. These are straight lines 114. Law of reflection is

that represent light waves: (A) incident angle = reflected an-
(A) Rays gle
(B) Image (B) incident angle > reflected an-
gle
(C) Luminous
(C) incident angle < reflected an-
(D) Visible light
gle
110. First law of reflection (D) mirror are cool
states that the angle of in-
cidence is angle of reflec- 115. No matter how far you
tion. stand from a spherical mir-
ror, your image appears
(A) Greater than erect. The mirror may be
(B) Less than (A) only plane
(C) Equal to (B) only concave
(D) None of these (C) either plane or convex
111. The angle of incidence for (D) only convex
a ray of light having zero re-
flection angle is: 116. A point object is placed at
a distance of 20 cm from
(A) 0 a convex mirror of focal
(B) 30◦ length 20 cm. The image
will form at
(C) 45◦
(A) at infinity
(D) 90◦
(B) at focus
112. Linear Magnification Pro- (C) at the pole
duced By A Concave Mirror
May Be: (D) behind the mirror

(A) Less than 1 or equal to 1 117. Light hitting a mirror and

(B) More than 1 or equal to 1 bouncing off is an example
of
(C) Less than 1, more than 1 or
equal to 1 (A) reflection
(B) refraction
(D) Less than 1 or more than 1
(C) transmission
113. Light passing through a
(D) absorption
lens and bending is an ex-
ample of 118. An object at a distance of
(A) reflection 30 cm from aconcave mirror
gets its image at the same
(B) refraction
point. The focal length of the
(C) transmission mirror is
(D) absorption (A) -30 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
16 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) 30 cm 123. Where will be the images

(C) -15 cm of the Sun or the moon are
formed by a concave mir-
(D) +15 cm ror?
119. A mirror is a curved mir- (A) Focus

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ror wherein the reflecting
(B) Pole
surface is on the outer sur-
face of the sphere so that the (C) centre of curvature
center of the mirror bulges (D) beyond centre of curvature
towards the viewer.
(A) plane 124. Smooth surfaces a lot of
light.
(B) Concave
(A) reflect
(C) Convex
(B) bend
(D) Diffused
(C) absorb
120. When the object is at infin-
ity, a point sized image is (D) twist
formed at by the convex 125. Absolute refractive index
mirror of any medium is always
(A) focus behind the mirror (A) less than 1
(B) focus in front of the mirror
(B) greater than 1
(C) radius of curvature
(C) 1
(D) principal axis
(D) 0
121. Which one of the follow-
ing is true according to laws 126. The relation between focal
of reflection? length and radius of curva-
ture is
(A) angle of incidence > angle of
reflection (A) R = 2f
(B) angle of incidence < angle of (B) 1/f = 2R
reflection (C) f = R/2
(C) angle of incidence = angle of (D) R = 2/f
reflection
(D) angle of incidence can be 127. Which of the following
both more or less than angle of would be an example of us-
reflection ing a convex mirror effec-
tively?
122. Images in a plane mirror
(A) Satellite dishes for collecting
are
radio waves
(A) real
(B) Otoscopic mirror for concen-
(B) larger trating light
(C) smaller (C) Dental mirror for closer exam-
(D) same size ination

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 17

(D) Security mirror in store to in- 133. An object 8cm in length

crease range of view is placed at a distance of
40cm in front of a concave
128. Why the rainbow forms in mirror of radius of curva-
the nature? ture 30cm.Find the position
(A) Because of refraction of the image and its size
(B) Because of dispersion (A) v =-24cm, h =-4.8cm
(C) Because of reflection (B) v = 24cm, h = 4.8cm
(D) Because of colours (C) v =-32cm, h =-5.2cm
(D) v-32cm, h = 5.2cm
129. The unit of power of lens
is 134. The law of reflection states
(A) Metre that when a ray of light re-
flects off a surface
(B) Centimetre
(A) the angle of incidence is not
(C) Diopter
equal to the angle of reflection
(D) M-1
(B) the angle of incidence is
130. A concave mirror gives greater than angle of reflection
real, inverted and same size (C) the angle of incidence is equal
image if the object is placed to the angle of reflection
(A) At F (D) the angle of incidence is less
(B) At infinity than angle of reflection
(C) At C 135. What happens when light
(D) Beyond C hits an object you can see?
(A) The light turns corners.
131. Regular reflection of light
takes place when it strikes (B) The light curves around the ob-
ject.
(A) Smooth opaque surface
(C) The object reflects the light.
(B) Rough opaque surface
(D) The light and the object do not
(C) Smooth transparent surface form a shadow.
(D) Smooth & silvered opaque
surface 136. Which phrase best com-
pletes the following sen-
132. Which of the following tence? We see things be-
waves in the electromag- cause:
netic spectrum has the high- (A) light from our eyes shines on
est energy? them.
(A) Radio Waves (B) they are luminous.
(B) Ultraviolet Rays (C) the Sun shines on them.
(C) Gamma Rays (D) light from them enters our
(D) Infrared Waves eyes.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
18 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

137. In order to see a picture it 142. To get real magnified im-

must age in convex lens, the ob-
ject position is
(A) produce light
(A) in between lens and F
(B) reflect light

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) in between F and 2F
(C) absorb light
(C) at 2F
(D) none of above
(D) beyond 2F
138. Swimming pools and the
ocean look shallower than 143. As wavelength decreases
they really are due to: in the electromagnetic spec-
trum the frequency
(A) reflection
(A) decreases
(B) dispersion
(B) stays the same
(C) refraction
(C) increases
(D) total internal reflection
(D) doubles
139. What does transparent
mean? 144. Is the parallel light rays re-
flect in parallel.
(A) some light is able to pass
through (A) Spectacular Reflection
(B) no light is able to pass through (B) Specular Reflection
(C) all light is able to pass through (C) Incident Ray
(D) none of above
(D) none of above
145. If you stand 3 m in front
140. The image formed by a of a plane mirror, how far
mirror is upright and magni- away would you see your-
fied. The mirror is self in the mirror?
(A) plane (A) 1.5 m
(B) concave (B) 3 m
(C) convex (C) 6 m
(D) obtuse (D) 12 m

141. What do we call a ma- 146. The is the angle be-

terial that light can travel tween the normal and the
through? reflected ray.
(A) air (A) Angle of incidence
(B) water (B) Angle of reflection
(C) medium (C) Angle of coincidence
(D) pathway (D) Angle of direction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 19

147. What occurs when light (C) to form or reproduce an im-

hits a medium with a differ- age by mirroring it
ent optical density? (D) to bend something, almost al-
(A) reflection ways light
(B) optical density reaction
151. The angle of incidence and
(C) electromagnetic spectrum the angle of reflection are:
(D) refraction (A) both negative
148. What is reflection? (B) not equal
(A) Reflection is the bouncing of (C) opposite
light off the surface that it strikes (D) equal
on.
(B) Reflection is the absorbing of 152. Which of the following
light off the surface that it strikes uses the principle of reflec-
on. tion of light?
(C) Reflection is the bending of (A) Glasses
light off the surface that it strikes (B) Magnifying glass
on.
(C) Mirror
(D) Reflection is the scattering of
light off the surface that it strikes (D) Binoculars
on.
153. Light travels in straight
149. Which of the following is line paths called , and
true with respect to mag- travels a path which uses
nification of spherical mir- the shortest time which is an
rorsa. It is the ratio of height idea of Fermat’s principle of
of object to height of im- least time.
ageb. It can be also ex- (A) Rays
pressed as negative ratio of
(B) Concave
image distance to object dis-
tancec. Magnification is al- (C) Convex
ways greater than zero (D) Reflection
(A) a and c
154. The law of reflection states
(B) a and b
that
(C) b and c
(A) Angle of incidence = Angle of
(D) All are true reflection
150. What does it mean to re- (B) Angle of incidence = Angle of
flect? incidence
(A) a polished surface which re- (C) Angle of reflection = Angle of
flects an image translucence
(B) a transparent crystal used to (D) Angle of reflection = Angle of
separate light reflection

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
20 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

155. A child is standing in front 159. MCQ 01Which of the fol-

of a magic mirror. She finds lowing is the speed of
the imageof her head big- light?
ger, the middle portion of (A) 3 metres per second
her body of the same size
(B) 30 metres per second

NARAYAN CHANGDER
and that of the legs smaller.
The following is the order of (C) 300 metres per second
combinations for the magic (D) 300 000 000 metres per sec-
mirror from the top. ond
(A) Plane, convex and concave
160. Irregular reflection can
(B) Convex, concave and plane take place on-
(C) Concave, plane and convex (A) plane mirror
(D) Convex, plane and concave (B) shined steel plate
(C) uneven ground
156. A lens makes objects
(D) polished marble floor
appear bigger.
(A) concave 161. The image formed by a
concave mirror when the ob-
(B) convex ject is placed between the
(C) prism pole and the focus is

(D) flat (A) virtual, erect and magnified

(B) virtual, erect and diminished
157. When we look in the plane (C) real, inverted and magnified
mirror, we will have our
own image. What is the (D) real, inverted and diminished
phenomenon involved?
162. A mirror is a curved
(A) Refraction mirror wherein the reflect-
ing surface is on the inner
(B) Reflection
surface of the sphere.
(C) Light travels in bent position (A) Refraction
(D) Inferens (B) Concave
(C) Convex
158. What is the reflected ray?
(D) Reflection mirror is a curved
(A) The ray which forms 90 de-
mirror wherein the reflecting sur-
gree angle with the surface
face is on the inner surface of the
(B) The ray which gets deflected sphere.
from the surface
163. If the angle of incidence is
(C) The ray which passes through 45 degree, what is the an-
the surface gle between the incident ray
(D) The ray which strikes the sur- and reflecting ray
face (A) 45

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 21

(B) 90 (A) 2
(C) 180 (B) 3
(D) none of the above (C) 4
164. The focal length of a spher- (D) infinite
ical mirror or radius of cur-
vature 30 cm is: 169. The normal or norm is:
(A) 10 cm (A) an imaginary line at right an-
(B) 15 cm gles to a reflecting surface
(C) 20 cm (B) where light enters and leaves
a mirror during reflections
(D) 30 cm
(C) at the same angle as the re-
165. Which of the following flected ray of light
best describes the image
formed by a plane mirror? (D) always the same for all flat
surfaces
(A) virtual, inverted and enlarged
(B) real, inverted and reduced 170. A light ray meets a plane
(C) virtual, upright and the same mirror at 60◦ . What is the
size as object angle of reflection?

(D) real, upright and the same (A) 60◦

size as object (B) 30◦
166. Another name for light (C) 120◦
bending is
(D) none of above
(A) Reflaction
(B) Absorbing 171. Refraction is the bending
of a wave disturbance as it
(C) Refraction
passes from one into an-
(D) mirror other.
167. Which of the following fac- (A) glass
tors contributes to the bend- (B) medium
ing of light?
(C) area
(A) Change of speed of light
(D) boundary
(B) Change of density of light
(C) Change of colour of light 172. Types of Reflection are
(D) Change of energy of light and specular reflection.

168. When an object is placed (A) Diffuse

between two mirrors kept (B) concave
perpendicular to each other,
(C) convex
the number of images
formed is (D) focal

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
22 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

173. A ray of light is reflected glass n=1.60crown glass

from a plane mirror. The an- n=1.523water n=1.33diamond
gle of incidence is 20o. The n=2.45
angle between the incident (A) diamond
and the reflected ray is

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) water
(A) 10o
(C) flint glass
(B) 20o
(D) barium glass
(C) 30o
(D) 40o 178. A student obtains a blured
image of a distant object
174. the band of colours that is on a screen using a convex
produced when white light lens.To obtain a distinct im-
splits up is called age on the screen he should
(A) spectrum move the lens
(B) dispesion (A) away from the screen
(C) refraction (B) towards the screen
(D) reflection (C) to a point very far away from
the screen
175. What is regular reflection
of light? (D) either towards or away from
the screen depending upon the
(A) A beam of light falls on a very position of the object.
smooth surface and get reflected
in only one direction. 179. MCQ 017When a parallel
(B) A beam of light falls on an ob- beam of light falls on pol-
ject with an uneven surface and ished silver,
get reflected in different direc- (A) the light will be scattered
tions.
(B) a convergent beam of light will
(C) The point at which the incident be reflected
ray strikes the surface.
(C) a divergent beam of light will
(D) none of above be reflected
176. Which of the following (D) a parallel beam of light will be
may happen to light if it reflected
strikes different materials?
180. The angle of incidence of a
(A) absorbed ray of light passing through
(B) transmitted the centre of curvature of a
concave mirror is degree
(C) reflected
(A) 105
(D) all choices are possible
(B) 180
177. Light has the highest ve-
locity in which medium? (C) 90
flint glass n=1.70barium (D) 0

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 23

181. What occurs when paral- 185. The bouncing off of light
lel rays of light hit a rough rays from the surface of an
or bumpy surface? object such as a mirror or
other shiny surface is called:
(A) Regular Reflection
(A) mirror
(B) Diffuse Reflection
(B) laser
(C) Refraction
(C) reflection
(D) Diffraction
(D) refraction
182. The created images in con- 186. The bouncing back of light
vex mirrors are always lo- that strike a clear surface.
cated behind the mirror-
virtual, upright and dimin- (A) Refraction
ished, than the object. (B) Reflection
(A) bigger (C) Radiation
(B) Smaller (D) Vibration

(C) blurred 187. An object which allows

light to pass through it par-
(D) diffused
tially is described as:
183. An object is at a distance (A) Opaque
of 25 cm in front of a plane (B) Translucent
mirror.The mirror is shifted
(C) Transparent
5 cm away from the ob-
ject.Find the new distance (D) Reflection
between the object and it’s
188. How are we able to see
image.
the color white?
(A) 30 cm (A) All colors except red are ab-
(B) 60 cm sorbed
(C) 20 cm (B) All colors are absorbed
(D) 40 cm (C) All colors are reflected
(D) All colors except red are re-
184. A plane mirror is ap- flected
proaching you at a speed
of 10 cm/sec .You can see 189. When you stand 3 m in
your image in it. At what front of a full length mirror,
speed will your image ap- your image is
proach you (A) real and 1 m behind the mir-
(A) 20 cm/sec ror
(B) real and 3 m behind the mir-
(B) 15 cm/sec
ror
(C) 10 cm/sec
(C) virtual and 2 m behind the
(D) 5 cm/sec mirror

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
24 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(D) virtual and 3 m behind the (C) Angle of coincidence

mirror
(D) Angle of direction
190. Light travels
195. When a small object is
(A) around corners placed on the principal axis

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) in a straight line of a concave mirror be-
(C) in waves tween the focus and the
pole, the image formed is
(D) in circles
(A) erect, diminished and real
191. What is the name of the
(B) inverted, magnified and real
angle between the reflected
ray and the normal? (C) erect, magnified and virtual
(A) angle of incidence (D) inverted, diminished and vir-
(B) angle of reflection tual
(C) angle of convergent 196. Non-luminous objects can-
(D) angle of divergent not
192. A pin is placed 40cm in (A) bend light
front of a concave mirror of (B) bury light
focal length 15 cm. Choose
the correct characteristics of (C) stop light
the image formed by the (D) emit light
mirror.Choose all answers
that apply: 197. When the object is in be-
(A) The image forms between F tween the centre of curva-
and P. ture (C) and focus (F) of a
concave mirror, then the po-
(B) The image is virtual and erect.
sition of the image is
(C) The image is magnified in
size. (A) At focus

(D) The image forms between C (B) At the centre of curvature

and F (C) at infinity
193. the bouncing of light (D) beyond the centre of curva-
(A) refraction ture

(B) reflection 198. Which statement is true?

(C) absorption (A) Light travels faster than sound.
(D) shadow
(B) Light and sound travel at the
194. the angle between the same speed.
normal and the incident ray. (C) Sound will not travel. Only
(A) Angle of incidence light can travel.
(B) Angle of reflection (D) Sound travels faster than light.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 25

199. The Law of Reflection (B) 50 degrees

states that the angle of the (C) 90 degrees
incident light ray is equal to
(D) 25 degrees
(A) the angle of the refracted light 204. MCQ 03Objects that al-
ray low only some light to pass
(B) the angle of the reflected light through them are consid-
ray ered
(C) 90 degrees (A) transparent
(D) the angle of the normal line (B) translucent
(C) opaque
200. Dispersion of light re-
ferred to as (D) solid
(A) Bending of light 205. When light hits an area
(B) Splitting of light in seven and it bounces back its
colours called
(C) Splitting of light in primary (A) echo
colours (B) reflection
(D) Bouncing back of light (C) refraction
201. Which would you rather (D) absorbing
walk on barefoot if the sun
206. MCQ 02Why can you see
is out all day long?
most objects?
(A) grass
(A) they emit light
(B) black top
(B) light refracts through them
(C) sand at the beach
(C) light reflects off them
(D) concrete sidewalk
(D) they absorb light
202. Which of the following op-
207. In regular reflection all re-
tical equipment applies the
flected rays are
principle of Full Reflection?
(A) binocular (A) irregular

(B) periscope (B) parallel

(C) telescope (C) transversals

(D) projector (D) none of above

203. MCQ 013A ray of light is 208. We can see the objects
incident on a plane mirror only when:
and the angle of incidence is (A) The objects absorb all the
25 degrees. What is the an- light.
gle of reflection? (B) Reflected light from the object
(A) 0 degrees reaches our eye.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
26 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) When the objects allow all the 214. Shadows are cast when:
light to pass through them. (A) an object blocks the path of
(D) None of these light rays
209. A lens makes objects (B) the Sun sets in the east

NARAYAN CHANGDER
appear smaller and further (C) light reflects off a mirror
away.
(D) light passes from one material
(A) convex into another
(B) concave
215. A smooth shining surface,
(C) prism which rebounds the light
(D) flat back in same or in different
direction, is called
210. Opaque means
(A) a mirror
(A) No light passes through it
(B) a lens
(B) All light passes through it
(C) Some light passes through it (C) reflection of light

(D) none of above (D) point of incidence

211. A ray of light coming par- 216. Convex mirror is also

allel to the principal axis called as
after passing through a (A) converging mirror
convex lens, has passed
(B) diverging mirror
through its
(A) optical centre (C) plane mirror

(B) focus (D) silver mirror

(C) center of curvature 217. If a man’s face is 25 cm

(D) mid point in front of concave shaving
mirror producing erect im-
212. Luminous objects can age 1.5 times the size of
(A) bend light face, focal length of the mir-
ror would be
(B) emit light
(A) 75 cm
(C) cancel light
(D) bury light (B) 25 cm
(C) 15 cm
213. What are Luminous Ob-
ject? (D) 60 cm
(A) Objects that give off light of 218. This is a reflection of light
their own on smooth surfaces such as
(B) Objects that do not give the mirrors or a calm body of
light of their own water.
(C) None of them above (A) Regular
(D) none of above (B) Irregular

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 27

(C) Diffused (C) Between P and F

(D) none of above (D) At E
219. Fire fly is a 224. A plane mirror produces
(A) Non-living luminous body a/an
(B) Plant body (A) a small, real image
(C) Living luminous body (B) a large, real image
(D) Heavenly body (C) a small, virtual image
220. a reflection that occurs (D) a same sized, virtual image
when parallel rays of light
hit an uneven surface 225. Light is refracted and
spread out by a
(A) regular reflection
(A) concave lens
(B) diffuse reflection
(B) convex mirror
(C) real image
(C) concave mirror
(D) virtual image
(D) convex lens
221. which of the following is
not a property of the image 226. Your light-sensing organ is
formed by a [lane mirror? your
(A) virtual and erect (A) ear
(B) Object size = image size (B) finger
(C) object distance = image dis- (C) brain
tance
(D) eye
(D) Real and inverted
227. Beam of light striking the
222. A light ray is incident 40
reflecting surface is called
degrees from the surface of
the mirror. What is the an- (A) reflecting ray
gle of reflection? (B) refracted ray
(A) 40 degrees
(C) normal ray
(B) 50 degrees
(D) incident ray
(C) 90 degrees
(D) 100 degrees 228. A person is in a room
whose ceiling and two adja-
223. A concave mirror gives vir- cent walls are mirrors. How
tual, refract and enlarged many images are formed
image of the object but im-
(A) 5
age of smaller size than the
size of the object is (B) 6
(A) At infinity (C) 7
(B) Between F and C (D) 8

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
28 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

229. MCQ 019Which of the fol- 234. Law of reflection state

lowing is used to make a that-The angle of incidence
cheap periscope? is to the angle of reflec-
(A) Concave mirror tion.
(A) equal

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Convex mirror
(C) Plane mirror (B) double
(D) Lens (C) half
(D) none of above
230. When light passes from air
to water, what happens to 235. An image that you can see,
the speed of the light? but does not really exist is
(A) speeds up called which of the follow-
(B) slows down ing?

(C) stays the same (A) Real Image

(D) none of above (B) Fake Image

(C) Virtual Image
231. The ray of light that re-
flects from surface is called (D) Digital Image

236. A mirror always forms

(A) Refracted ray same size image irrespec-
(B) Incident ray tive of the position of the ob-
ject in-front of it, then the
(C) Reflected ray
mirror is:-
(D) Accident ray
(A) Plane mirror
232. Which is a natural source (B) concave mirror
of light?
(C) convex mirror
(A) flashlight
(D) not possible
(B) cell phone
(C) lightning 237. If an object is placed at 12
cm from the pole of mirror
(D) headlights
and F is 6 cm. Calculate the
233. Magnification produced size of the image and it’s na-
by a rear view mirror fitted ture if the mirror is concave
in vehicles (A) 6 cm and real, diminished
(A) is less than one (B) 12 cm and real, larger than
(B) is more than one the object
(C) is equal to one (C) 12 cm and real, same size as
the object
(D) can be more than or less than
one depending upon the position (D) 6 cm and virtual, erect and
of the object in front of it. same size as the object

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 29

238. An object which allows 243. An object of size 5 cm is

light to pass through it kept 20cm away from a con-
clearly is described as: cave mirror of focal length
(A) Opaque 15 cm . Size of its image
shall be
(B) Translucent
(A) + 5 cm
(C) Transparent
(B) -10 cm
(D) Reflection
(C) -15 cm
239. What happens to blue (D) -5 cm
light when it hits a shirt that
appears blue? 244. What is the size of the im-
(A) The light is reflected. age formed when an object
is kept at the focus in front
(B) The light is absorbed. of concave mirror?
(C) The light is refracted. (A) enlarged
(D) The light is blocked. (B) diminished
240. The image formed in a (C) highly enlarged
plane mirror is (Select (D) highly diminished
more than 1)
(A) real image 245. What are Non-luminous
object?
(B) the same size as the object
(A) Object that give off light of
(C) bigger than the object their own
(D) virtual image (B) Object that do not have their
(E) in front of the mirror. own light

241. Light travels through air, (C) None of these above

water, glass and many (D) none of above
other materials.What path
does it travel to get from one 246. In order for an object to be
place to another? seen, it must either give off
its own light (be a source of
(A) sideways light) or it must reflect light.
(B) straight (A) Spectrum
(C) back and forth (B) Energy
(D) up and down (C) Visible
242. Image formed by plane (D) none of above
mirror is
247. is a copy of the object
(A) Real and erect formed by reflected or re-
(B) Real and inverted fracted rays of light
(C) Virtual and erect (A) reflection
(D) Virtual and inverted (B) refraction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
30 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) object (B) real image

(D) image (C) Inverted Image
248. bouncing of a polished sur- (D) Pizza
face by a ray of light is
253. What happens to light af-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
called
ter it hits a mirror?
(A) reflecton
(A) It goes through the mirror and
(B) dispertion bend.
(C) human eye
(B) It goes straight through the
(D) excretion mirror.
249. Characteristics of the im- (C) It goes around the mirror.
age formed by a plane mir- (D) It bounces off the mirror.
ror
(A) virtual 254. A copy of an object formed
by reflected rays of light is
(B) upright
called the:
(C) same size as the object
(A) Image
(D) laterally inverted
(B) Mirror
(E) same distance behind the mir-
ror as the object in the front of it (C) Translucent
(D) Transparent
250. Convex lens focus a real,
point sized image at focus, 255. Which device is used in
the object is placed submarines to see objects
(A) At focus above the surface of wa-
ter?
(B) Between F and 2F
(C) At infinity (A) Kaleidoscope

(D) At 2F (B) Stethoscope

(C) Periscope
251. Value of Magnification (m)
of a mirror is always + 1, (D) Binoculars
then the mirror is definitely
256. MCQ 012A ray of light is
(A) a concave mirror incident on a plane mirror
(B) a plane mirror and the angle of reflection is
(C) a convex mirror 50 degrees. What is the an-
gle between the incident ray
(D) none of the above and the reflected ray?
252. An image that forms (A) 50 degrees
where light seems to come
(B) 25 degrees
from a point but light rays
don’t actually meet is a (C) 90 degrees
(A) virtual image (D) 100 degrees

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 31

257. When light goes from (B) Plane mirror

one material(medium) to an- (C) Concave mirror
other it becomes bent, what
(D) Combination of convex and
term means bent?
concave mirror
(A) reflected
262. Two plane mirrors are
(B) refracted
placed parallel and facing
(C) absorbed each other.A light ray inci-
(D) turned dent on one of the plane mir-
ror at an angle of 45◦ after
258. A pin is placed between reflection from it strikes the
the focus F and pole P of other mirror.What is the an-
a concave mirror.Choose the gle between the incident ray
correct characteristics of the and final reflected ray
image formed by the mir- (A) 45◦
ror.Choose all answers that
apply: (B) 60◦
(C) 90◦
(A) The image forms between F
and P (D) 75◦
(B) The image is erect. 263. What relationship exists
(C) The image is real. between the number of im-
ages formed and the angle
(D) The image is diminished in between two mirrors?
size.
(A) As the Angle between two mir-
259. An object that produces its rors decrease, the number of im-
own light is ages also decrease.
(A) luminous (B) As the Angle between two mir-
rors decrease, the number of im-
(B) non luminous
ages increase.
(C) artificial
(C) As the Angle between two mir-
(D) none of above rors increase, the number of im-
ages also increase.
260. Light rays bend when they
go from air to water be- (D) none of above
cause of a change in 264. Which one is the correct
(A) color answer?
(B) wavelength (A) Incident light perpendicular to
the Reflected ray
(C) density
(B) Rough surface is specular re-
(D) speed
flection
261. Which of the following (C) Specular Reflection are scat-
mirror is used by a dentist tered in different directions
to examine a small cavity? (D) Rough surface is like Wavy
(A) Convex mirror Water

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
32 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

265. Which is true of a green (B) A = cos θ

grape?
(C) θr = θr
(A) It absorbs green light.
(D) θb = θa
(B) It absorbs white light.
271. A dentist uses a small den-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) It reflects green light.
tal mirror to help magnify
(D) It reflects white light.
teeth in your mouth. What
266. light travels in what lines type of mirror is this?
(A) vertical (A) a convex mirror
(B) straight (B) a concave mirror
(C) horizondal (C) a plane mirror
(D) circular (D) a plano-convex mirror
267. The formula to calculate 272. MCQ 09When you look at
the refractive index is your face in a mirror, where
(A) n=cv does your face appear to
(B) n=v/c be?

(C) n=c/v (A) an equal distance behind the

mirror to what you are in front
(D) v=nc
(B) a long way behind the surface
268. Which color shirt would of the mirror
you rather wear outside on
a sunny 90 degree day? (C) on the surface of the mirror

(A) black (D) just in front of the mirror

(B) white 273. what is the angle between
(C) gray the reflected ray and the
(D) navy blue normal called as
(A) angle of incidence
269. What is the law of reflec-
tion? (B) angle of reflection
(A) Angle of incidence = angle of (C) angle of convergent
reflection (D) angle of divergent
(B) Angle of incidence < angle of
reflection 274. The name of the straight
lines that represent light
(C) Angle of incidence > angle of
waves on diagrams
reflection
(D) none of above (A) rays
(B) images
270. What is the formula for
Law of Reflection (C) reflection
(A) θr = θi (D) beams

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 33

275. Light travels in lines 280. Which of the following

(A) wavy best describes the image
formed by a convex mir-
(B) bent ror when the object distance
(C) straight from the mirror is less than
the absolute value of the fo-
(D) backwards
cal length (f)?
276. If ‘R’ is radius of curva- (A) virtual, upright and enlarged
ture and ‘f’ is focal length of (B) real, inverted and reduced
a spherical mirror then the
correct relation between the (C) virtual, upright and reduced
two is (D) real, inverted and enlarged
(A) R = f 281. What tool is use to reflect
(B) R = f/2 the rays of the torch
(C) f = 2R (A) comb
(D) f = R/2 (B) headphone
(C) plane mirror
277. To get the best reflection
from a mirror you need (D) car
(A) a very shiny surface to reflect 282. The type of refection com-
lots of light ing from ‘your face’ is:
(B) to stand right in front of it (A) a clear reflection
(C) to shine a bright light on it (B) a specular reflection
(D) it to produce light (C) a diffuse reflection

278. If the angle of incidence is (D) non-existant. Your face does

45◦ , what is the angle be- not reflect.
tween the incident ray and 283. Which of these best
the normal? demonstrates the reflection
(A) 45◦ of light? (5.6C)
(B) 90◦ (A) Looking through the glass of a
(C) 180◦ large window
(B) Looking at an image formed
(D) none of the above
on a silver spoon
279. is when a surface di- (C) Looking at a lightbulb that is
rects light beams in many glowing
different directions.
(D) Looking at a star on a clear
(A) Refraction night
(B) Scattering
284. Angles are always mea-
(C) Absorption sured from the:
(D) Transmission (A) Boundary

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
34 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Normal 290. which is best reflector iof

(C) Incident Ray ight
(D) Reflected Ray (A) platinum
(B) silver
285. The image in a plane mir-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ror is always (C) aluminium
(A) erect but reversed. (D) gold
(B) erect but not reversed. 291. Which of the following is a
(C) inverted and reversed. beneficial result of left-right
reversal characteristic of the
(D) inverted but not reversed.
image in a plane mirror?
286. Three mirrors inclined at (A) the image is larger than the
an angle of 600 is used in object
a
(B) the use of eyeglasses to im-
(A) periscope prove vision
(B) kaleidoscope (C) the use of side mirror for driv-
(C) solar heater ing
(D) barber’s shop (D) the word ambulance written in
reverse
287. Light is a kind of
292. What is light?
(A) reflection
(A) clear or easy to see through
(B) energy
(C) heat (B) to put forth or send out

(D) matter (C) a type of energy that makes

things visible
288. A divergent lens will pro- (D) a transparent crystal used to
duce separatelight
(A) always real image
293. a clear, triangular device
(B) always virtual image made up of plastic or glass
(C) both real and virtual image that refracts light
(D) none of these (A) medium
289. What is the relation be- (B) prism
tween angle of incidence (C) lens
and angle of refraction (D) none of above
when light goes from opti-
cally rarer to denser 294. A mirror having focal
(A) Angle I is equal to angle r length-15 cm is
(B) Angle I is greater than angle r (A) Plane mirror
(C) Angle I is less than angle r (B) Concave mirror
(D) No relation between these an- (C) Convex mirror
gles (D) None of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 35

295. Which is transparent? (A) lenses in glasses

(A) a wooden fence (B) solar cookers
(B) clean water (C) dental mirrors
(C) aluminum foil (D) telescopes
(D) a purple balloon
301. Which of the following
296. The speed of light in vac- images can be formed by
uum is m/s a concave mirror? I. real,
(A) 3 x 106 inverted, and enlargedII.
virtual, upright, and en-
(B) 3 x 108
largedIII. real, upright, and
(C) 3 x 1010 reducedIV. virtual, inverted,
(D) 3 x 1012 and enlarged
(A) I and II
297. When light hits a smooth
surface, it is (B) I and III
(A) bent around corners (C) I, III, and IV
(B) polarized (D) II and IV
(C) reflected
302. When the Sun is behind
(D) refracted
you, your shadow is
298. Which term describes (A) behind you
when light bounces off of a
smooth surface? (B) in front of you

(A) Refraction (C) at the side of you

(B) Transmission (D) not there
(C) Absorption
303. Which term is used to refer
(D) Reflection to an incoming light ray?
299. According to laws of re- (A) Refracted
flection, (B) Incident
(A) angle of incidence > angle of
(C) Reflected
reflection
(B) angle of incidence < angle of (D) none of above
reflection
304. The bouncing of light off
(C) angle of incidence = angle of an object is
reflection
(A) a mirror
(D) both 1 and 2
(B) absorption
300. Which of the following is
(C) reflection
an example of the use of
convex mirrors? (D) refraction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
36 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

305. Which of the following 310. Which of these statements

would be described as LUMI- is true?
NOUS? (A) Light travels in straight lines.
(A) Earth (B) Light is stopped when it meets
a solid object.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Wind
(C) Fire (C) Light does not travel in
straight lines.
(D) Water
(D) Light will only travel for about
306. When the image of an ob- 2000km before it stops.
ject is seen in a plane mirror, 311. What happens when light
the image is passes from air into water?
(A) real and upright. (A) The light speeds up
(B) real and inverted. (B) The light continues at the
(C) virtual and upright. same speed
(C) The light slows down
(D) virtual and inverted.
(D) The light forms a mirage
307. Fill in the blank with
312. When light reflects off of a
the best answer:After light
completely smooth surface
passes through a convex
it reflects in which way?
lens the light comes together
at a (A) Regular Reflection
(A) Spot (B) Diffuse Reflection

(B) Focal point (C) Refraction

(D) Color Reflection
(C) point
(D) Local Point 313. A full length image of a
distance tall building can
308. Lens formula is given as definitely be seen by using
(A) 1/v-1/u = 1/f (A) a concave mirror

(B) 1/v + 1/u = 1/f (B) a convex mirror

(C) a plane mirror
(C) 1/u-1/v = 1/f
(D) both palane and concave mir-
(D) None of these ror
309. The image of an object 314. An imaginary line that can
formed by a plane mirror is: be drawn perpendicular to
(A) virtual the surface of the mirror at
the point of incidence where
(B) real the ray strikes the mirror.
(C) diminished (A) Incident Ray
(D) upside down (B) Reflected Ray

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 37

(C) Normal Line (C) they are reflected

(D) none of above (D) they are bent

315. What are illuminated ob- 320. A reflection is when en-

jects? ergy
(A) objects are objects that gener- (A) bounces
ate their own light (B) falls
(B) objects that are capable of re- (C) twists
flecting light (but don’t generate it)
(D) bends
(C) objects that do not reflect any
light 321. How the pond appears to
(D) objects that let light pass be, when it is seen from out-
through them side?
(A) Seems Deeper
316. Concave mirrors have sur-
faces that are (B) Seems shallower

(A) curved inwards (C) Seems very deep

(B) bulging outwards (D) No change is there

(C) flat 322. Why do we see objects as

(D) rectangular white?
(A) They absorb all light
317. If an object is placed at
infinity where is the image (B) They reflect all light
formed if the mirror is con- (C) They absorb some light and
vex? reflect some light
(A) At C (D) they transmit all light
(B) At F 323. Which of the following sit-
(C) At P uations illustrates a diffuse
(D) between F and C reflection?
(A) image of a mountain on a
318. An object which does not calm water in a lake
allow light to pass through
it is described as: (B) sunlight illuminating a a room
inside the house
(A) Opaque
(C) light striking a plane mirror
(B) Translucent
(D) light passing through a trans-
(C) Transparent parent glass
(D) Reflection
324. Which description is NOT
319. When light rays strike a applicable to an image
dull or rough surface formed by a plane mirror?
(A) they are absorbed (A) virtual
(B) they do not form an image (B) left-right reversal

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
38 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) larger than the object (C) It bends towards the normal
(D) same orientation as the object (D) It continues to be the normal
325. Which of these describes
330. Tick all the characteristics
how light travels through an
true for a real image

NARAYAN CHANGDER
empty space?
(A) It travels straight but may (A) can be obtained on a screen
change direction to avoid objects. (B) inverted with respect to the ob-
(B) It changes direction often even ject
if there are no objects.
(C) formed by a concave mirror
(C) It comes to a stop after it trav- for a distant object
els a certain distance.
(D) cannot be obtained on a
(D) It travels in a straight line with- screen
out stopping.
(E) formed by the actual intersec-
326. Which of the following is tion of the reflected rays
NOT a luminous object?
(A) Sun & stars 331. How does light travel
(B) The moon within the same medium?

(C) Lamp (A) It curves around corners

(D) Candle flame (B) Really slow

327. The two kinds of reflection (C) In a straight line

are (D) In circles
(A) transparent and translucent
(B) opaque and translucent 332. A convex mirror has a fo-
cal length 12 cm. Then its ra-
(C) regular and diffuse dius of curvature is cm
(D) none of above
(A) 24
328. Which word means to
(B) 12
bend light rays toward each
other? (C) 6
(A) Converging light (D) 1.2
(B) Diverging light
333. MCQ 010 When light is in-
(C) Virtual Light
cident on a polished surface
(D) Real Light reflection takes place.
329. When the light passes out (A) regular
of the glass, back into the
air (B) irregular

(A) It bends away from the normal (C) diffused

(B) It does not bend (D) normal

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 39

334. An object is placed at a dis- (D) The incident ray, the reflected
tance of 10cm from a con- ray and the normal all lie in same
vex mirror of focal length plane
15cm.find the position and
nature of the image 338. ....the angle between the
normal and the reflected
(A) v =-6cm, real & inverted ray.
(B) v =-3cm, real & inverted (A) A, Angle of incidence
(C) v = +6cm, virtual & erect (B) B. Angle of reflection
(D) v = +15cm, virtual & erect (C) C. Angle of coincidence
335. A 10 mm long awl pin is (D) D. Angle of direction
placed vertically in front of
a concave mirror. A 5 mm 339. Why can we sometimes
long image of the awl pin is see only parts of the moon?
formed at 30 cm in front of (A) The path of light can only
the mirror. The focal length reach half of the moon at a time.
of this mirror is (B) The path of light from Earth to
(A) 30cm the Sun is blocked.
(B) 20cm (C) The moon is partially eaten by
(C) 60cm giant zombie rodents, but it can re-
grow.
(D) 40cm
(D) Our brain just wants to make
336. When an object is kept be- things up to confuse us.
tween two mirrors parallel
to each other, the number of 340. Objects that light can eas-
images formed is ily pass through are said to
be:
(A) 2
(A) apparent.
(B) 3
(B) opaque.
(C) 4
(C) oblong.
(D) infinite
(D) transparent.
337. Second law of reflection
states that? 341. Bouncing of a light ray
when it strikes a reflecting
(A) The incident angle, the re- surface is called
flected angle and the normal all
(A) Refraction
lie in same plane
(B) Dispersion
(B) The incident ray, the reflected
ray and the surface of object all lie (C) Reflection
in same plane (D) Diffraction
(C) The incident angle, the inci-
dent ray and the normal all lie in 342. Real images are:
same plane (A) Always inverted

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
40 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Magnified or Diminished 347. Light enters the eye

(C) can be obtained on screen through
(A) cornea
(D) all the above
(B) eye lens
343. Laws of reflection hold

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) pupil
good for
(D) retina
(A) plane mirror only
348. Where will the image be
(B) concave mirror only formed if the object is placed
(C) convex mirror only at C (concave mirror)
(D) all mirror irrespective of their (A) At F
shape (B) virtual image
344. Which of the following are (C) At C
the properties of a plane (D) At infinity
mirror image? 1. The im-
age is the same size as the 349. The phenomenon by
object.2. The image is vir- which the light falling on a
tual.3. The image is in- surface is sent back into the
verted.4. The image is later- same medium is known as
ally inverted.
(A) polarization
(A) 1
(B) reflection
(B) 1, 2 and 4
(C) refraction
(C) 1, 2 and 3
(D) absorption
(D) 2 and 4
350. White light can be sepa-
345. Which of the following rated into different colors by
would not reflect light? using a
(A) Mirror (A) microscope
(B) Water (B) prism
(C) Glasses (C) mirror

(D) Brick Wall (D) convex lens

351. What is the definition of
346. Define ‘Normal’ ‘normal’
(A) light ray striking the reflecting (A) The Ray of light from the sur-
surface face that strikes a given surface
(B) perpendicular drawn to the (B) The point at which the incident
surface at the point of incidence ray strike the surface
(C) light ray obtained after reflec- (C) The perpendicular to the sur-
tion face at the point of incidence
(D) none of above (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 41

352. When the image of an ob- mirror image? 1. The im-

ject is seen in a plane mirror, age is the same size as the
the distance from the mirror object.2. The image is vir-
to the image depends on(a) tual.3. The image is in-
the wavelength of light used verted.
for viewing. (b) the distance
(A) 1
from the object to the mirror.
(c) the distance of both the (B) 1 and 2
observer and the object to (C) 1 and 3
the mirror.
(D) 1, 2, and 3
(A) Only a
(B) Only b 357. The focal length of a plane
(C) Only c mirror is

(D) Both b and c (A) infinite

(B) zero
353. How many colours does
the white light consist of? (C) 1m
(A) 5 (D) 100m
(B) 6
358. Objects that gener-
(C) 7 ate/emit their own light are
(D) 8 called:
(A) luminous objects.
354. A mirror always form di-
minished image irrespective (B) shiny objects.
of the position of the object
(C) non-luminous objects.
in-front of it, then the mirror
is:- (D) reflective objects.
(A) Plane mirror
359. Which object allows you to
(B) concave mirror see your reflection?
(C) convex mirror (A) rock
(D) not possible (B) mirror
355. The ray of light that strikes (C) paper
a reflecting surface is called
(D) none of above

(A) incident ray 360. Through what kind of mat-

(B) reflected ray ter does light move fastest?

(C) normal ray (A) liquids

(D) none of the above (B) air
(C) matter that is lighter in color
356. Which of the following are
the properties of a plane (D) matter that is in larger objects

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
42 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

361. When light cannot pass 366. the angle between the
through an object, we say normal and the reflected
that that object is ray.
(A) opaque (A) Angle of incidence

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) transparent (B) Angle of reflection
(C) translucent (C) Angle of coincidence
(D) translated (D) Angle of direction
362. A ray of light is incident 367. The Angle between the in-
normally on a plane mirror. cident ray and the normal
The angle of reflection will line is known as the
be
(A) angle of incidence
(A) 0◦
(B) angle of reflection
(B) 90◦
(C) normal line
(C) Will not be reflected
(D) none of above
(D) can not be determined
368. What does the F on a ray
363. We can see objects be-
diagram represent?
cause of
(A) The focal point
(A) reflection
(B) The location of the virtual im-
(B) refraction
age
(C) transmission
(C) The location of the objecthe
(D) diffraction location of the object
364. It is the bouncing off (D) The centre of the mirror
of light rays when it hits
smooth or rough surfaces 369. How does light travel
like plane mirrors, paper, (A) It curves around corners
concrete walls, etc.
(B) Really slow
(A) Reflection
(C) In a straight line
(B) Refraction
(D) In circles
(C) Dispersion
(D) Diffraction 370. THINK FAST!
(A) Specular Reflection = Diffuse
365. Convex Mirrors produce Reflection
(B) Specular Reflection almost
(A) only virtual images equal to Diffuse Reflection
(B) virtual or real images (C) Specular Reflection ̸= Diffuse
(C) only real images Reflection
(D) inverted images (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.1 Reflection of light 43

371. If a man wishes to use a 375. Focal length of plane mir-

plane mirror on a wall to ror is
view both his head and his (A) At infinity
feet as he stands in front
of the mirror, the required (B) Zero
length of the mirror (C) Negative
(A) is equal to the height of the (D) None of these
man.
376. A student who is standing
(B) is equal to one half the height 0.5 meters from a plane mir-
of the man. ror moves at a velocity of
(C) is equal to double the height 0.75 meters per second for
of the man. 3 seconds away from the
mirror. How much further is
(D) depends on the distance the the student from her image
man stands from the mirror. than when she first started
moving?
372. If the angle of incidence is
45o, what is the angle of re- (A) 5 meters
flection? (B) 3 1
meters
4
(A) 45o (C) 2 1
meters
4
(B) 90o (D) 4 1
meters
2
(C) 180o
377. Which mirror is used as a
(D) none of the above make-up mirror?
(A) Convex mirror
373. For a real object, which of
the following can produce a (B) plane mirror
real image? (C) concave mirror
(A) Plane mirror (D) plano-concave
(B) concave mirror 378. The Law of reflection
(C) Concave lens states that “The angle of in-
cidence is the angle of
(D) Convex mirror
reflection”.
374. This is a reflection of light (A) equal to
on rough surfaces such as (B) double
clothing, paper, wavy wa-
ter, and the asphalt road- (C) half
way. (D) a lot like
(A) Regular 379. In which of the follow-
(B) Specular ing, the image of an ob-
ject placed at infinity will be
(C) Irregular or Diffused
highly diminished and point
(D) none of above sized?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
44 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(A) concave mirror only the object is placed at a dis-

(B) convex mirror only tance of 19 cm from the lens,
the image formed is slightly
(C) convex lens larger than the object. The
(D) concave mirror, convex mir- approximate focal length of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ror, concave lens and convex lens. the lens is:

380. An object is kept 30cm (A) 20 cm

away from the pole of a mir- (B) 18 cm
ror. Its inverted image at
the same position as that of (C) 10 cm
object then it is (D) 5 cm
(A) a concave mirror of focal
length 15 cm 384. A 5 feet tall student stands
two meters in front of a
(B) a convex mirror of focal length
plane mirror. How far is the
15 cm
image from the student?
(C) a plane mirror
(A) 2 meters
(D) a concave mirror of focal
length 30 cm (B) 4 meters

381. If an object is placed be- (C) 5 meters

tween F and C where is the (D) 10 meters
image formed if the mirror
is concave? 385. The two types of spherical
(A) At C mirrors are
(B) beyond C (A) flat and plane
(C) between F and P (B) concave and plane
(D) between F and C (C) convex and concave
382. MCQ 07The phenomenon (D) plane and rectangular
by which the incident light
falling on a surface is sent 386. What is the angle of reflec-
back into the same medium tion?
is known as
(A) The angle formed between the
(A) polarization normal and the surface.
(B) reflection
(B) The and formed between the
(C) refraction incident ray and the normal.
(D) absorption (C) The angle formed between
the incident ray and the reflected
383. If an object is placed 21
ray.
cm from a converging lens,
the image formed is slightly (D) The angle between the nor-
smaller than the object. If mal and the reflected ray.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 45

387. Which position of the ob- (A) 10 cm

ject will produce a magni- (B) 20 cm
fied virtual image, if a con-
cave mirror of focal length (C) 30 cm
15 cm is being used? (D) 35 cm

1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications

1. Which mirror concept ex- the optical centre of the con-
plains why the word AMBU- vex lens, the image pro-
LANCE is written in reverse duced is
in an ambulance car? (A) real, diminished, and inverted
(A) Multiple image (B) real, enlarged, and inverted
(B) Lateral inversion (C) virtual, enlarged, and erect
(C) Virtual image and real image (D) virtual, diminished and erect
(D) All of the above
5. A converging lens is also
known as a lens.
2. A beam of light strikes a
mirror at a 27◦ to the nor- (A) convex
mal. What is the angle be- (B) concave
tween the incident and re-
flected beams? (C) double
(D) refracted
(A) 13.5◦
(B) 27◦ 6. What is the main function of
your lens and cornea?
(C) 54◦
(A) They transmit images from
(D) 41.5◦ your eyes to your brain.
3. a real image is (B) They focus light onto the backs
of your eyes.
(A) produced by virtual rays and
can be projected on a screen (C) They resolve random colors
and shapes into images.
(B) produced by real rays and
CANNOT be projected on a (D) They allow you to see ob-
screen jects in three dimensions instead
of two.
(C) produced by virtual images
and CANNOT be projected on a 7. ) Dentists mirror, eye-
screen glasses, telescopes, cam-
eras and make-up mirrors
(D) produced by real rays and
useful and helpful optical in-
can be projected on a screen
struments in our daily lives
4. When an object is placed be- that uses mirror.
tween the focal point and (A) Concave Mirrors

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
46 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Convex Mirrors 12. Why does light refract

(C) Plane Mirrors when it encounters the glass
in a lens?
(D) none of above
(A) because it speeds up, which
8. ) Banks, groceries, depart- causes it to bend

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ment store and ATM’s uses
mirrors because it gives (B) because it slows down, which
a wide area of view thus causes it to bend
shoplifters and robberies (C) because it hits a dense
should be avoided. medium, which causes it to
(A) Concave Mirrors bounce off
(B) Convex Mirrors (D) because it gets absorbed,
(C) Plane Mirrors which causes it to lessen in inten-
sity
(D) none of above

9. What kind of mirror is used 13. An object is situated be-

in automobiles and trucks to tween a concave mirror’s
give the driver a wider area surface and its focal point.
and smaller image of traffic The image formed in this
behind him? case is
(A) plane mirror (A) real and inverted.
(B) convex mirror (B) real and erect.
(C) concave mirror
(C) virtual and erect.
(D) none of the above
(D) virtual and inverted
10. Where is the angle of inci-
dence located? 14. What type of image is pro-
(A) Between the mirror and the in- duced by a flat mirror?
cident ray (A) Real and upright
(B) Between the mirror and the re-
(B) Real and inverted
flected ray
(C) Between the normal line and (C) Virtual and upright
incident ray (D) Virtual and inverted
(D) Between the normal line and
reflected ray 15. Which term describes lenses
that are thinner at the edges
11. A flat mirror is an example than at the center?
of a
(A) converging lenses
(A) plane mirror
(B) concave mirror (B) diverging lenses

(C) convex mirror (C) concave lenses

(D) spherical mirror (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 47

16. The image you see in a to produce a reduced and in-

plane mirror is called a verted image of a distant ob-
image because it is not a ject?
real, physical object. (A) camera
(A) imaginary (B) projector
(B) physical (C) microscope
(C) reflected (D) refracting telescope
(D) virtual
21. Which of the following uses
17. In a spherical concave mir- concave lens?
ror, light that is parallel to (A) Magnifying glasses
the optical axis will be re- (B) Person with hyperopia
flected
(C) Nearsighted corrective eye-
(A) parallel to the optical axis glasses
(B) through the center of curva- (D) All of the above
ture
22. Which type of mirror has
(C) through the focal point
a surface that curves in-
(D) back to the origin ward?

18. All rays that are parallel to (A) convex mirror

the principle axis in a con- (B) concave mirror
cave mirror reflects (C) plane mirror
(A) Towards the focal point (D) none of above
(B) Away from the focal point
23. What is the position of the
(C) Towards the center of curva- image when an object is
ture placed between the centre
(D) Away from the center of curva- of curvature and the focus of
ture a concave mirror?
(A) At the focus
19. Which describes a concave
lens? (B) At the centre of curvature

(A) more transparent in the mid- (C) Beyond the centre of curva-
dle ture
(D) Between the focus and the
(B) thinner in the middle than on
centre of curvature
the edges
(C) thinner on the edges than in 24. Vehicle’s side mirrors are
the middle (A) plane mirror
(D) triangular in shape (B) concave mirror

20. Which of the following opti- (C) convex mirror

cal instruments will be used (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
48 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

25. ) Which of the following (A) Incident ray

is NOT an optical instru-
(B) Reflected ray
ments that converges light
towards the inner side of a (C) Normal line
curved mirror giving a focus (D) Source ray

NARAYAN CHANGDER
point of an object
(A) Eye glasses 30. occurs when light hits an
(B) Shaving mirror irregular surface.

(C) Opthalmoscope (A) diffuse reflection

(D) Rear View Mirror (B) regular reflection

26. if the object is beyond C (2F) (C) no reflection

(A) image is real, smaller and up- (D) none of above

right
31. Where would an object be
(B) image is real, smaller and up- placed to get an image at
side down the centre of the curvature
(C) image is virtual, smaller and of a concave mirror?
upside down (A) At the Focus point (F)
(D) image is real, bigger and up-
(B) Very far away
right
(C) At the Centre of Curvature (C)
27. Where is the image located
if an object is 30 cm in front (D) Between F and C
of convex mirror with a fo-
cal length of 20 cm? 32. How much larger will your
classroom seem to appear
(A) between F and V if the entire two adjacent
(B) between C and F walls of your classroom con-
sist of plane mirrors?
(C) in front of the mirror
(D) can’t be determined (A) 2x larger
(B) 3x larger
28. An object is placed 10 m
from a convex mirror. The (C) 4x larger
image formed is 5 m behind (D) can’t be determined
the mirror. What is the focal
length? 33. If a person is nearsighted
(A) -5 cm what devices can correct
his/her eye defects?
(B) 5 cm
(C) 10 cm (A) convex lens

(D) -10cm (B) concave lens

(C) concave mirror
29. A light ray that bounces off
of the mirror is known as (D) convex mirror

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 49

34. The mirror which forms vir- (A) virtual, reduced, inverted
tual, up-right and magnified (B) real, enlarged, inverted
image is
(C) virtual, enlarged, inverted
(A) Converging Mirror
(D) No image
(B) Convex Mirror
39. In ray diagrams for spher-
(C) Plane Mirror
ical mirrors, which term
(D) Diverging Mirror refers to the distance be-
tween the mirror and the fo-
35. If a candle is placed at 2f
cal point?
in front of a converging lens,
the image (A) focal length
(A) will appear at f on the oppo- (B) principal axis
site side of the lens (C) radius of curvature
(B) the image will appear at 2f on (D) vertex
the opposite side of the lens
40. If the object is beyond C (2F)
(C) the image will appear be-
tween f and 2f on the opposite
side of the lens (A) image is real, smaller and in-
verted
(D) the image will not appear
(B) image is real, smaller and up-
36. If you wish to have a mag- right
nified image of your face for (C) image is virtual, smaller and
applying makeup or shav- inverted
ing, the mirror you will use
(D) image is real, bigger and up-
must be:
right
(A) Convex mirror
41. Why does your eye have a
(B) Concave mirror convex lens in it?
(C) Plane mirror (A) To make light spread out on
(D) any of these the retina

37. A Shiny spoon can create (B) To make light focus on the
retina
(A) erect image
(C) To collect all the possible light
(B) inverted image
(D) To create a larger upright real
(C) both erect and inverted im- images
ages
42. How much does a flat mir-
(D) neither inverted nor erect im-
ror magnify an image?
age
(A) 1x
38. An object is placed on the (B) 2x
focal point in front of a con-
vex lens. What image is pro- (C) 3x
duced? (D) 4x

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
50 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

43. What Does a Concave Lens 48. What kind of mirror is

Do? used by department stores
(A) Make things bigger to give a wider area and
smaller image of the shop-
(B) Make things smaller pers?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Make things closer (A) Plane mirror
(D) Make things happy
(B) Convex mirror
44. What does the word “di- (C) Concave mirror
verging” mean?
(D) None of the above
(A) to spread apart
49. When light travels through
(B) to come together
a lens and the image pro-
(C) parallel duced from the lens cannot
(D) perpendicular be projected onto the screen,
which type of image is pro-
45. What is the focal length of a duced?
convex mirror that has a ra-
dius of curvature of 64cm? (A) real

(A) -32cm (B) refracted

(B) 32cm (C) virtual

(C) 128cm (D) inverted
(D) 8cm 50. a mirror with a surface that
curves inward like the in-
46. plane mirror image size
side of a bowl
(A) same
(A) concave mirror
(B) smaller
(B) convex mirror
(C) bigger
(C) plane mirror
(D) none of above
(D) flat mirror
47. If the angle of incidence is
51. Which of the following is
60 degrees from the normal
NOT a use of a concave mir-
line, what is the angle of re-
ror?
flection and the total angle
between the incident and re- (A) car lights
flected ray? (B) torches
(A) Angle of reflection = 30Total (C) security mirrors
angle = 90
(D) mirrors used by dentist
(B) Angle of reflection = 60Total
angle = 90 52. What is the radius of cur-
(C) Angle of reflection = 30Total vature of a concave mirror
angle = 120 with a focal length 22cm

(D) Angle of reflection = 60Total (A) 12cm

angle = 120 (B) 44cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 51

(C) 11cm (B) regular reflection

(D) 34.5cm (C) no reflection
(D) none of above
53. A real image having a size
of 10 cm is formed by a con- 58. What kind of mirror is used
cave mirror. The size of the by dentists in examining
object is 5 cm. The magnifi- tooth cavities?
cation of the object is
(A) Plane mirror
(A) -5
(B) Concave mirror
(B) 5 (C) Convex mirror
(C) 2 (D) None of the above
(D) -2
59. Laser surgery:
54. Which lens is used to mag- (A) changes the shape of your
nify objects and refract cornea
light? This type of lens is
(B) changes the distance between
curved outward.
your cornea and retina
(A) concave lens
(C) changes the size of your lens
(B) convex lens
(D) places an invisible lens in
(C) parabolic lens front of your eye
(D) plane lens 60. Which of the following let-
55. The focal length is equal to ters will look the same in the
the: mirror?

(A) Curve of Curvature (A) A

(B) B
(B) double the Curve of Curvature
(C) C
(C) half the Curve of Curvature
(D) D
(D) point where all the lines meet
that run perpendicular from the 61. convex mirrors are
mirror (A) plane mirrors
56. Makeup and tweezer mir- (B) converging mirrors
rors use which type of mir- (C) diverging mirrors
ror?
(D) smaller than concave mirrors
(A) Concave
62. As an object moves to-
(B) Diverging
wards a flat mirror, its im-
(C) Convex age
(D) Refracting (A) moves closer to the mirror
57. occurs when light hits a (B) moves further from the mirror
smooth surface. (C) flips upside down
(A) diffuse reflection (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
52 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

63. Which of the mirrors is used (C) convex mirror

as rear view mirror in vehi- (D) solid mirror
cles?
(A) Concave 68. If an object is placed at f in
front of a concave mirror

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Convex
(A) the image forms at f
(C) Plane
(B) the image forms at 2f
(D) none of above
(C) the image forms at 3f
64. An object is placed at a dis- (D) no image forms
tance of 27.0 cm away from
a thin convex mirror with 69. A material or substance
a focal length of 9.00 cm. that a matter wave travels
How far from the mirror is through is
the image located and what (A) a block
type of image is formed?
(B) a wall
(A) 13.5 cm and real (C) a medium
(B) 6.7 cm and real (D) an electromagnetic spectrum
(C) 13.5 cm and virtual
70. A light ray that goes into
(D) 6.7 cm and virtual the mirror is known as
65. A white sheet of paper can- (A) Incident ray
not act as mirror because it (B) Reflected ray
the rays of light.
(C) Normal line
(A) diffracts
(D) Source ray
(B) diffuses
71. A light ray, travelling par-
(C) interferes
allel to a concave lens’ axis
(D) refract and strikes the lens, will re-
fract and
66. Refraction occurs when
(A) pass through the lens’ focal
(A) the wave’s speed changes by point
entering a new medium
(B) travel parallel to the principal
(B) a wave bounces off of a axis
boundary
(C) continue to travel in the same
(C) waves parts meet each other direction
(D) waves bend around a barrier (D) travel at right angles to the
principal axis
67. a flat sheet of glass that
has a smooth, silver-colored 72. What does the word “con-
coating on one side verging” mean?
(A) plane mirror (A) to separate
(B) concave mirror (B) to come together

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 53

(C) parallel (C) 17.5cm

(D) perpendicular (D) 8.75cm
73. The focal length is one-half 78. The point in the middle way
the distance from the vertex between a curved mirror
to the and the center of curvature
(A) center of curvature is the
(B) principal axis (A) principle point
(C) radius of curvature (B) focal point
(D) none of the above (C) center of curvature
74. What is the name of the per- (D) principle axis
pendicular line that we use
to measure angles? 79. Which of the following
statements is true of near
(A) Incident ray
sighted people?
(B) Reflected ray
(A) their retinas are slightly mis-
(C) Normal line shapen
(D) Source ray (B) they have trouble seeing
75. The point at which rays par- nearby objects
allel to the optical axis meet (C) their vision problems can be
is called the corrected with convex lenses
(A) focal point (D) the lenses of their eyes focus
(B) virtual point light in front of their retinas
(C) real point 80. The center of curvature is
(D) optic point denoted by letter
76. Which of the following is (A) c
true of a concave mirror? (B) C
(A) It will never form a real image. (C) o
(B) An inverted image will be
(D) O
formed if the object distance is
greater than the focal length. 81. What could the manager of
(C) An object can be magnified if a store hang on the wall
placed at F. in order to see a wider im-
(D) none of above age of his store and his cus-
tomers?
77. A reflecting globe is 35.0 (A) a convex mirror
cm in diameter. What is the
focal length of the globe? (B) a concave mirror
(A) 70.0cm (C) a plane mirror
(B) 35.0cm (D) a spherical mirror

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
54 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

82. a real image (C) Working of optical fiber

(A) is produced by virtual rays and (D) Working of stethoscope
can be projected on a screen
(B) is produced by real rays and 87. An object is placed BE-
cannot be projected on a screen TWEEN the focal point and a

NARAYAN CHANGDER
convex lens. What image is
(C) is produced by virtual images produced?
and cannot be projected on a
screen (A) real, reduced, and inverted
(D) is produced by real rays and (B) real, enlarged, and upright
can be projected on a screen (C) virtual, enlarged, and upright
83. Which of the following is a (D) No image
diverging lens?
88. The reflection by the rough
(A) concave lens
surfaces that tend to reflect
(B) convex lens light in all directions is called
(C) parabolic lens
(D) plane lens (A) diffuse reflection

84. The 2 reflected rays that (B) glossy reflection

meet. (C) regular reflection
(A) ray of incident (D) specular reflection
(B) reflected image is produced
89. An incident ray that is par-
(C) focal point allel to the principal axis
(D) image is not produced
(A) will reflect parallel to the prin-
85. Where should the object be cipal axis
placed in front of a concave (B) will refract through the focal
mirror to form a virtual and point
magnified image?
(C) will reflect through the center
(A) at the focus of curvature
(B) at the center of curvature
(D) will continue along the same
(C) between the focus and the ver- path through the lens
tex
(D) between the center of curva- 90. What type of mirror do
ture and focus dentists usually use to see
clearly the images of our
86. Which of the following ap- teeth?
plications is not an applica- (A) plane mirror
tion of total internal reflec-
tion of light? (B) convex mirror
(A) Brilliance of diamond (C) concave mirror
(B) Formation of rainbow (D) none of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 55

91. Which type of mirror con- (A) 65 degrees

verges light rays? (B) 45 degrees
(A) concave
(C) 35 degrees
(B) convex
(D) 25 degrees
(C) plane
(D) none of above 96. In a concave mirror, if an
incident ray passes through
92. Passenger side view mir- F and hits the mirror then it
rors say “objects in the mir- will reflect
ror are closer than they ap- (A) Towards C
pear.” How can this be a
safety concern when driving (B) Towards F
a car? (C) Parallel
(A) The cars behind you look like (D) Away from the mirror
they are in the wrong lane.
(B) The cars look bigger than they 97. If the object is between f
really are and the mirror, the image is
(C) The cars look closer than they
really are. (A) image is real, smaller, and in-
verted
(D) The cars look farther away
then they appear. (B) image is virtual, larger, and
upright
93. What do we call light rays
(C) image is virtual, smaller, and
that are drawn behind a
inverted
mirror
(A) Real (D) image is real, bigger, and in-
verted
(B) Virtual
(C) Made up 98. Spherical mirrors are part
of a
(D) Does not exist
(A) Rectangle
94. If you wish to get enlarged
image of any object, which (B) Cube
mirror will u select? (C) Sphere
(A) Convex mirror (D) Biryani
(B) Plane mirror
99. The image of an object is
(C) None of these placed one meter in front of
(D) Concave mirror a plane mirror. Where will
the image be and what will
95. If the angle of incidence be- it look like?
tween the incident ray and
the normal line is 25 de- (A) behind the mirror and re-
grees, what is the angle of versed
reflection? (B) behind the mirror and upright

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
56 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) in front of the mirror and re- (C) passes through the mirror’s
versed center of curvature.
(D) in front of the mirror and up- (D) passes through the mirror’s
right focal point.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
100. When does the angle of re- 104. What kind of image is
fraction increase? formed by concave lenses?
(A) when a wave’s speed in-
(A) always real
creases
(B) when a wave’s speed de- (B) always virtual
creases (C) could be real or virtual; de-
(C) when a wave’s speed is con- pend on the distance of the object
stant from the focal point
(D) when a light wave stops (D) could be real or virtual, but
always real when the object is
101. Your vehicle has a side placed at the focal point
view mirror in which we get
smaller, virtual and erect im- 105. An object is located 15 m
ages for all positions, what from a converging lens with
may be the type of mirror? focal length 10 m.If the ob-
(A) Concave ject is 2 cm tall, find the im-
age height if the image is lo-
(B) Convex
cated at 30 m.
(C) None of these
(A) 4 m
(D) Plane mirror
(B) -4m
102. Diffuse Reflection is pro-
duced by surfaces that (C) 1m
tend to reflect light in all di- (D) -1m
rections.
(A) rough 106. focal length =

(B) semi rough (A) radius of curvature

(C) semi smooth (B) diameter of curvature
(D) smooth (C) half the radius of curvature
103. A light ray, traveling par- (D) half the diameter of curvature
allel to a concave mirror’s
principal axis, strikes the 107. Which type of mirror is on
mirror’s surface. After re- the side of a car?
flection, this ray (A) concave mirror
(A) again travels parallel to the (B) convex mirror
mirror’s axis.
(C) flat mirror
(B) travels at right angles to the
mirror’s axis. (D) lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 57

108. If your vision problems 112. What does The law of re-
can be corrected by a con- flection state?
vex lens, you: (A) the angle the incident ray
(A) have trouble seeing nearby makes with a line drawn perpen-
objects dicular to the surface of the mir-
(B) have trouble seeing far away ror.
objects (B) shows how rays change direc-
(C) have trouble telling whether tion when they strike mirrors and
objects are close up or far away pass through lenses.
(D) have blind spots at the edges (C) The angle of reflection is
of your vision equal to the angle of incidence.
(D) none of above
109. this type of mirror is
used in supermarkets to see 113. An object is placed at a cer-
around bends tain distance from a convex
(A) concave mirror. What is the possible
magnification of the image
(B) convex
of this object?
(C) plane
(A) +0.7
(D) window
(B) + 1.2
110. Which of the following (C) -1.6
correctly describes the im-
age characteristics formed (D) -0.4
in plane mirrors?
114. A real image has a size
(A) virtual, upright, diminished of 10 cm, formed by a con-
(B) virtual, upright, same size cave mirror. The actual size
of the object is 5 cm.What is
(C) real, inverted, diminished
the magnification of the ob-
(D) real, upright, same size ject?
111. An incident light ray (A) -5
strikes a flat mirror at an (B) 5
angle of 30◦ from the nor-
mal. The reflected light ray (C) 2
reflects off the mirror (D) -2
(A) at an angle of 30◦ from the
115. What type of image is
mirror edge
formed when light rays
(B) at an angle of 60◦ from the meet?
normal
(A) virtual image
(C) at an angle of 30◦ from the
(B) real image
normal
(D) at an angle of 90◦ from the (C) no image
mirror edge (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
58 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

116. A real image is always 121. ) Which type of mirror re-

(A) erect flects the inner side of the
curved mirror?
(B) upright
(A) Plane Mirror
(C) inverted

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) none of above (B) Concave Mirror
(C) Convex Mirror
117. You see the reflection of
the clock without numbers (D) none of above
in your plane mirror. The
image formed by the hands 122. The focal length is denoted
of the clock shows the time by the letter
of 3:30. What is the real (A) f
time?
(B) F
(A) 3:30
(C) P
(B) 8:30
(D) p
(C) 9:30
(D) 10:30 123. The image of an object,
which is placed one foot in
118. ) Which of the following front of a plane mirror, will
optical instruments diverges be
light when it hits the outer
side of the curve mirror? (A) behind the mirror and re-
versed, left to right.
(A) Telescope
(B) behind the mirror.
(B) Camera
(C) Microscope (C) in front of the mirror and re-
versed, left to right.
(D) Headlights
(D) in front of the mirror.
119. Which of the following de-
vices applies the properties 124. Identify the mirror which
of reflection? forms always a virtual and
(A) magnifying glass diminished image.

(B) periscope (A) Concave mirror

(C) telescope (B) Convex mirror
(D) binoculars (C) Converging mirror

120. What is it called when (D) Plane mirror

light travels through a mate-
125. Virtual images are
rial and bends?
(A) Diffraction (A) always upright
(B) Reflecting (B) can be obtained on screen
(C) Refraction (C) always smaller
(D) none of above (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 59

126. A converging lens has a fo- 131. Concave mirrors will pro-
cal length of 30 cm. A 5 cm duce
tall candle is placed at a dis-
(A) Real, erect images
tance of 10 cm in front of the
lens. Determine the image (B) Virtual, inverted images
distance. (C) Real, inverted images
(A) -45 cm
(D) no images form
(B) -30 cm
(C) -15 cm 132. Farsightedness is cor-
rected by a:
(D) 6 cm
(A) convex mirror
127. When an object is placed
between the focal point and (B) convex lens
the convex lens, the image (C) concave mirror
produced is
(D) Concave lens
(A) real, reduced, and inverted
(B) real, enlarged, and inverted 133. The image formed by a
(C) virtual, enlarged, and upright concave mirror will

(D) virtual, reduced, and upright (A) always be real

128. The distance between the (B) always be virtual

focal point and the mirror is (C) be either real or virtual
(A) raduis (D) will always be magnified
(B) diameter
134. How to you decide that a
(C) focal point
mirror is concave or convex
(D) focal length without touching it?
129. Which mirror forms al- (A) By observing the surface
ways a virtual image and
(B) By keeping them in sunlight so
same size as an object?
that surfaces can be clearly seen
(A) Concave mirror
(C) By keeping them in front of
(B) Convex mirror your face and observing the kind
(C) Converging mirror of image we obtain
(D) Plane mirror (D) By moving mirrors here and
there
130. Concave mirror
(A) bulges out toward the light 135. Image behind the mirror is
source
(A) virtual
(B) curves towards the center
(B) real
(C) diverge light ray
(C) upside down
(D) creates smaller image of an
object (D) upright

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
60 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

136. Why is light refracted? (C) A lens has no focal point

(A) Light speeds up (D) A lens reflects light and light
(B) Light slows down passes through mirrors

(C) Light speed stays the same 141. A light ray, travelling par-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) Light can either slow down or allel to a concave mirror’s
speed up axis, strikes the mirror’s sur-
face. The reflected ray
137. The line that passes (A) passes through the mirror’s fo-
through the center of a cal point
curved mirror is called
(B) again travels parallel to the
(A) focal point mirror’s axis
(B) center of curvature (C) travels at right angles to the
(C) principle axis mirror’s axis
(D) light ray (D) passes through the mirror’s
center of curvature
138. You see the reflection of
analog type of clock without 142. convex mirror image
numbers in your plane mir- size
rors. The image formed by (A) same
the hands of the clock shows
the time of 10:00. What is (B) bigger
the real time? (C) smaller
(A) 2:00 (D) none of above
(B) 1:00
143. an image that forms
(C) 7:00 where light seems to come
(D) Still 10:00 from
(A) virtual image
139. The distance from the focal
point to the vertex is called (B) real image
(C) diffuse reflection
(A) center of curvature (D) regular reflection
(B) focal length
144. An object is placed be-
(C) focal point tween a concave mirror and
(D) vertex its focal point. What is the
type and orientation of the
140. What is the difference be- image formed?
tween a lens and a mirror?
(A) virtual and inverted
(A) A mirror reflects light and light
passes through lenses (B) real and inverted

(B) A mirror refracts light and light (C) virtual and erect
passes through lenses (D) real and erect

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 61

145. A photocopy “Xerox” ma- What type of mirror is street

chine produces an image light?
that is of equal size as the (A) Concave Mirror
object. Considering the loca-
tion of an object in a convex (B) Plane Mirror
lens, where is the object lo- (C) Convex Mirror
cated or placed to produce (D) none of above
an image that is of equal
size to the object? 150. A candle is placed on the
principal axis of a convex
(A) at F’
lens at a distance of 30 cm
(B) at 2F’ from the lens. The focal
(C) between F’ and V length of the lens is 10 cm.
The image formed will be
(D) between 2F’ and F’
(A) Real, inverted, and reduced
146. optical instrument that use (B) Real, inverted, and enlarged
concept of reflection (C) Real, upright, and enlarged
(A) kaleidoscope (D) Virtual, upright, and enlarged
(B) periscope
151. ) What characteristic or
(C) candle property of light that deter-
(D) torch light mines mirror in their use in
optical instruments such as
147. A virtual image is formed cameras and binocular
when rays of light intersect (A) Reflection
(A) True (B) Refraction
(B) False (C) Size
(C) Sometimes (D) Location
(D) none of above 152. To correct nearsighted-
ness, a person is prescribed
148. Which describes a convex with what of lenses?
lens?
(A) Converging lens
(A) triangular in shape
(B) Diverging lens
(B) more transparent in the mid-
(C) Focusing lens
dle
(D) None of the above
(C) thicker on the edges than in
the middle 153. An image that forms when
light rays actually meet
(D) thicker in the middle than on
the edges (A) virtual image
(B) real image
149. ) Street lights used reflec-
tor because it diverges rays (C) diffuse reflection
of light over large area. (D) regular reflection

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
62 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

154. Seeing your face in a mir- 159. Images in a kaleidoscope

ror is an example of are example of a
(A) Refraction (A) multiple image
(B) Fiber Optics (B) convex mirror

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Reflection (C) concave mirror
(D) Absorption (D) lateral inversion

155. An image behind the mir- 160. If you stand in front of a

ror is concave mirror, exactly at
(A) virtual its focal point,

(B) real (A) you won’t see your image be-

cause it is formed at infinity
(C) inverted
(B) you won’t see your image be-
(D) upright cause it’s focused at a different dis-
tance.
156. When a small object is
placed on the principal axis (C) you will see your image, and
of a concave mirror be- you will appear smaller.
tween the focus and the mir- (D) you will see your image and
ror, the image formed is you will appear larger.
(A) erect, magnified, and virtual
161. What is the distance be-
(B) inverted, magnified, and real tween the focal point and
(C) inverted, reduced, and real the mirror called?
(D) erect, reduced, and real (A) Herbert

157. What type of images is (B) diameter of radius

formed by the concave side (C) curvature point
of the spoon when the
(D) focal length
object is arm-length away
from it? 162. Which of the following
(A) Upright and bigger statement is TRUE about vir-
tual image?
(B) Upside down and bigger
(A) virtual image seems to appear
(C) Upright and smaller
behind the mirror and is upside
(D) Upside down and smaller down

158. A flat mirror is also known (B) virtual image seems to appear
as a behind the mirror and is seen in
an upright position.
(A) plane mirror
(C) virtual image formed after the
(B) concave mirror light rarys are reflected from the
(C) convex mirror mirror
(D) spherical mirror (D) All of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 63

163. What word means to bend (C) Mirage

light rays away from each
(D) Refraction
other?
(A) Converging light 168. The side view mirrors on
(B) Diverging light your car help shrink the im-
age on both sides of the car,
(C) Virtual Light allowing you to see a larger
(D) Real Light field of view. What type of
mirror is this?
164. the imaginary line per-
pendicular to the surface. (A) a convex mirror
(A) Normal (B) a concave mirror
(B) Angle of incidence (C) a convex lens
(C) Angle of reflection (D) a concave lens
(D) none of above
169. If the object is between f
165. the usage of plane mirror and the concave mirror, the
image is
(A) makes a livingroom look spa-
cious. (A) image is real, smaller, and in-
(B) used by a dentist to seethe verted
patient’s teeth so that the image (B) image is virtual, larger, and
formedlooks bigger and closer. upright
(C) helps tomagnify the image to (C) image is virtual, smaller, and
makeit easier for someone toap- inverted
ply make up.
(D) image is real, bigger, and in-
(D) canhelp a shopkeeper to see verted
every cornerof the supermarket to
prevent theft. 170. What type of mirror can
be used to magnify a small
166. A convex lens has a focal object?
length of f. If the object is
placed at 2f, what distance (A) a convex mirror
will the image appear? (B) a concave mirror
(A) 2f (C) a flat mirror
(B) f
(D) a spherical mirror
(C) between f and 2f
(D) it will not appear 171. Convex lenses can pro-
duce
167. is when light trav- (A) Real, erect images
els through a material and
bends. (B) Virtual, inverted images
(A) Diffraction (C) Real, inverted images
(B) Dispersion (D) no images form

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
64 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

172. Which of the following (A) It gets smaller

tells the difference between (B) It bulges outward
lenses and mirrors?
(C) It becomes elastic
(A) Lenses refract light, mirrors re-
flect light. (D) It becomes harder and thicker

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Lenses make object appear 177. A student is 2.50m away
larger, while mirrors give exact from a convex mirror while
copy of object. her image is 1.80m from
(C) Lenses reflect light, mirrors re- the mirror, what is the focal
fract light. length?
(D) Lenses produce virtual image; (A) 1.05m
mirrors make real image. (B) 2.50m
173. This optical instrument (C) 6.42 m
uses two convex lenses (D) 0.72m
to make a smaller object
larger. 178. Looking through a con-
(A) camera cave lens, arm-length away
can make object appear
(B) microscope
(A) smaller and upright
(C) oscilloscope
(B) smaller and upright down
(D) telescope
(C) larger and upright
174. An object is placed 10 cm
from a concave mirror. Its (D) larger and upside down
image is formed 5 cm in 179. If the object is between C
front of the mirror. The mag- and f, the image is
nification of the given con-
cave mirror is (A) image is real, smaller, and in-
verted
(A) -0.5
(B) image is real, smaller, and up-
(B) 0.5
right
(C) 2
(C) image is virtual, smaller, and
(D) -2 inverted
175. image above the principal (D) image is real, bigger, and in-
axis (PA) is verted
(A) virtual 180. Which of the following
(B) real bends light inward?
(C) upright (A) convex lens
(D) upside down (B) concave lens

176. What happens to the lens (C) plane mirror

of your eye as you age? (D) spherical mirror

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.2 Concave & convex mirrors and their applications 65

181. Eyeglasses bend light to the mirror. The focal length

help the image form prop- of the given convex mirror is
erly on the retina. The bend- (A) -5
ing of light as it passes from
one medium to another is (B) 5
called (C) -10
(A) diffraction (D) 10
(B) interference 186. Virtual Images are
(C) reflection (A) Always erect
(D) refraction (B) can be obtained on screen
182. Which of the following (C) magnified or diminished
parts of the eyes function (D) all the above
like the aperture and iris di-
aphragm of a camera? 187. When an object is placed
on the focal point in front
(A) eyelid and cornea
of a convex lens, the image
(B) pupil and eyelid produced is
(C) retina and cornea (A) real, reduced, and inverted
(D) pupil and iris (B) real, enlarged, and inverted
(C) real, true, and inverted
183. Where is the angle of re-
flection located? (D) There is no image
(A) Between the mirror and the in- 188. The sun’s rays are ob-
cident ray served to focus at a point be-
(B) Between the mirror and the re- hind a lens. What kind of
flected ray lens was used?
(C) Between the normal line and (A) converging lens
incident ray (B) diverging lens
(D) Between the normal line and (C) focusing lens
reflected ray (D) none of the above
184. What Does a Convex Lens 189. Telescopes mainly use
Do? which type of lens?
(A) Make things bigger (A) Converging
(B) Make things smaller (B) Diverging
(C) Make things closer (C) Concave
(D) Make things sader (D) Reflecting

185. An object is placed 10 cm 190. You are standing 5.0m in

from a convex mirror. Its im- front of a mirror and your
age is formed 5 cm behind dog is standing 3.0m in

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 66 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

front of you. What distance (B) convex mirror

should you focus your cam- (C) curved mirror
era to take a photo of your
sister in the mirror? (D) none of the above
(A) 7.5 m 194. How fast does the dis-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 8.0 m tance between yourself and
(C) 7.0 m your mirror image decrease
if you walk directly toward
(D) 5.0 m the mirror at 3.5 m/s?
191. Sara is using a magnify- (A) -3.5 m/s
ing glass to closely examine
(B) 3.5 m/s
her stamp collection. Which
type of lens is found in a (C) 7.0 m/s
magnifying glass. (D) -7.0 m/s
(A) bifocal
195. An image that points be-
(B) concave
low the principal axis is
(C) convex (choose 2)
(D) prismatic (A) virtual
192. Outwardly curved mirror (B) real
is (C) upright
(A) Plane mirror
(D) inverted
(B) None of these
(C) Concave mirror 196. The image seen in a plane
mirror is
(D) Convex mirror
(A) real and inverted
193. A spherical mirror with re-
(B) real and upright
flecting surface curved in-
wards is called (C) virtual and inverted
(A) concave mirror (D) virtual and upright

1.3 Spherical mirrors

1. In a concave mirror, which formed by which of the fol-
side is polished? lowing mirrors?
(A) Outer side (A) Concave Mirror
(B) Inner side (B) Convex Mirror
(C) No side (C) Plane Mirror
(D) All sides (D) Curved Mirror
2. If the image is virtual, erect 3. if an object is placed at a
and diminished, then it is distance of 0.5 m in front of

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.3 Spherical mirrors 67

a plane mirror, the distance 7. Which among the following

between the object and the characterize the image of an
image formed by the mirror object in a convex mirror?
will be (A) virtual, upright, smaller than
(A) 2m the object
(B) 1 m (B) virtual, upright, bigger than
the object
(C) 0.5 m
(C) real, upright, smaller than the
(D) 0.25 m object
(D) vitrual, inverted, smaller than
4. No image is formed when
the object
the object is placed at a dis-
tance from the concave 8. A 1-cm high object is placed
mirror. 10 cm from a concave mir-
(A) equal to radius of curvature ror with the focal length, f =
15 cm. Determine image dis-
(B) more than radius of curvature tance
(C) less than radius of curvature (A) -30cm
but more than focal length
(B) -10cm
(D) equal to focal length (C) -5cm
5. A candle is kept between F (D) 30cm
and P of a concave mirror.
9. For a spherical mirror, the
Can this image be projected
focal length is equal to
on a screen?
(A) the radius of curvature
(A) Yes it can be
(B) the diameter of curvature
(B) No it cannot be
(C) half radius of curvature
(C) Cannot be predicted
(D) half diameter of curvature
(D) none of above
10. For a spherical/curve mir-
6. The focal length of a con- ror, what is the value of the
cave mirror is 5 cm. A stu- focal length equal to?
dent got an image of the (A) the radius of curvature
same size as the object at
(B) four times the radius of curva-
one position. What is the
ture
position of the object in this
case? (C) half the radius of curvature
(A) 5 cm (D) twice the radius of curvature

(B) 10 cm 11. The radius of curvature of a

spherical mirror is 20 cm. At
(C) between 5 and 10 cm
what position do we get an
(D) beyond 10 cm image at infinity?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
68 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(A) 20 cm 16. Name a mirror that can give

(B) 10 cm an erect and diminished im-
age of an object.
(C) between 10 cm and 0
(A) Convex mirror
(D) between 20cm and 10cm

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Concave mirror
12. A person kept an object at
beyond ‘C’ of a concave mir- (C) Plane mirror
ror. Where should a screen (D) none of above
be kept if he needs to project
the image on it? 17. The reflecting surface of
(A) At F plane mirror is
(B) At C (A) curved inward
(C) Between F and P (B) curved outward
(D) Between C and F (C) flat
13. A mirror which always (D) three dimensional
gives a virtual image is tr-
respective of the position of 18. An object is positioned be-
the object tween a concave mirror’s
(A) concave mirror center of curvature and its
focal point. The image pro-
(B) convex mirror duced by the mirror is lo-
(C) plane mirror cated
(D) parabolic mirror (A) beyond the center of curva-
ture.
14. The centere of a lens is
called (B) at the center of curvature.

(A) optical centre (C) between the center of curva-

ture and the focal point.
(B) principal axis
(D) at the focal point.
(C) principal focus
(D) focal length 19. A normal human eye has a
focal length of about 0.023
15. What is an Astigmatism?
m. If you look at the tip of
(A) a very contagious condition a pencil, 0.553 m from your
caused by a bacterial infection eye, how far is the image
(B) a substance that hardens your from the lens of your eye?
teeth (A) 0.024 m
(C) a hard substance that gives (B) 0.033 m
nails their strength
(C) 0.045
(D) persons vision is distorted due
to a irregular shaped eye (D) 0.055

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.3 Spherical mirrors 69

20. A student is 20 cm away screen(c) is formed only by

from a concave mirror hav- a plane mirror(d) is formed
ing focal length 10 cm. only by the convex mirror
What is the position of im-
(A) a
age formed?
(B) b
(A) 20 cm
(B) 10 cm (C) c

(C) 15 cm (D) d
(D) 40 cm 25. What is the center of curva-
ture of a spherical mirror?
21. An object 8.5 cm high is
placed 28 cm from a con- (A) the center of the sphere of
verging lens. The focal which given mirror is a part
length of the lens is 12 cm.
(B) the radius of the sphere of
Determine the height of the
which given mirror is a part
image.
(C) the diameter of the sphere of
(A) 6.38 cm
which given mirror is a part
(B) 8.5 cm
(D) a chord of the sphere of which
(C) 12cm given mirror is a part
(D) 21 cm
26. Which mirror is used as rear
22. The ray parallel to the prin- view mirror in cars?
cipal axis, after reflection
(A) Concave Mirror
from a concave mirror will
(B) Convex Mirror
(A) pass through C (C) Plane Mirror
(B) pass through P (D) Curved Mirror
(C) pass through F
27. A converging (concave) mir-
(D) retrace its path ror with a focal length of 27
23. The image position of an ob- cm is held 14 cm from your
ject placed beyond C in front face. Determine the location
of a concave mirror is and magnification of the im-
age.
(A) Beyond C
(A) 29.07 cm behind the mirror,
(B) At C
magnification of 2.08
(C) Between F and C
(B) 29.07 cm in front of the mir-
(D) At F ror, magnification of-2.08
(E) Between P and F (C) 19.7 cm behind the mirror,
magnification of 3.08
24. A virtual image(a) can be
formed on the screen(b) (D) 19.7 cm in front of the mirror,
cannot be formed on the magnification of-3.08

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
70 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

28. Which part of a spherical (C) 40 cm

mirror is situated midway (D) 1/20 cm
between the center of curva-
ture and the vertex? 33. When the object is placed at
(A) CENTER OF CURVATURE infront of a concave an

NARAYAN CHANGDER
equal image is fomred.
(B) PRINCIPAL FOCUS
(A) centre of curvature
(C) PRINCIPAL AXIS
(B) focus
(D) VERTEX
(C) less than focal length
29. A single concave spherical (D) more than radius of curvature
mirror produces an image
which is 34. A ray of light is incident at
400, what is its angle of re-
(A) always virtual.
flection?
(B) always real.
(A) 200
(C) real only if the object distance
(B) 400
is less than f.
(C) 600
(D) real only if the object distance
is greater than or equal to f (D) 800

30. The characteristics of image 35. The position of an object

formed by plane mirror which when placed in front
of a concave mirror of fo-
(A) upright, virtual and larger cal length 20cm produces a
than the object virtual image which is twice
(B) upright, virtual and smaller the object
than the object (A) -19cm
(C) upright, virtual and with the (B) -10cm
same size as the object
(C) -20cm
(D) none of above
(D) -25cm
31. If the outside of the spheri-
36. The distance from the pole
cal mirror is silvered, it is a
to the focus of the spherical
(A) concave mirror mirror is called
(B) convex mirror (A) Radius of curvature
(C) plane mirror (B) centre of curvature
(D) none of above (C) Focus
32. The radius of curvature of (D) Focal length
a spherical mirror is 20 cm, 37. The point mid way between
What is its focal length? a curved mirror and center
(A) 20 cm of curvature is the
(B) 10 cm (A) principal point

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.3 Spherical mirrors 71

(B) focus (A) a

(C) center of focus (B) b
(D) principal focus (C) c
38. The path of the light is(a) (D) d
always a straight line(b)
a curved line(c) a zig-zag 43. The reflecting surface of the
line(d) depends on the convex mirror is
medium
(A) part of inner sphere
(A) a
(B) part of outer sphere
(B) b
(C) part of straight line
(C) c
(D) part of square
(D) d

39. At which position of the 44. Name the mirror that can
object, will a concave mir- give an erect and enlarged
ror produces magnified and image of an object.
erect image? (A) Convex mirror
(A) At C (B) Concave mirror
(B) Between F and P
(C) Plane mirror
(C) Between C and F
(D) none of above
(D) At F
45. The radius of curvature of
40. The size of the image for an
spherical mirrors is times
object at infinity in front of a
its focal length.
concave mirror is
(A) Thrice
(A) Enlarged
(B) Same size (B) Four
(C) Point size (C) Twice
(D) None (D) Five

41. The distance used a mir- 46. An image formed when the
ror to get a bigger image. light rays pass through the
(A) flat image location, and could
appear on paper or film
(B) concave
placed at the that location is
(C) convex referred to as a
(D) transparent (A) real image.
42. Which one shows lateral (B) virtual image.
inversion? (a) Plane mir-
(C) source image.
ror(b) Convex mirror(c) Con-
cave mirror(d) All of these (D) original image.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
72 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

47. A 5-cm-high object is placed 51. The size of an object and its
in front of a concave mirror image are the same in this
with a radius of curvature of type of mirror
20 cm. Determine the image
(A) CONCAVE
height if the object distance

NARAYAN CHANGDER
is 5 cm (B) CONVEX
(A) -20 cm (C) OPTICAL
(B) 10 cm (D) PLANE
(C) -10 cm 52. Which of the following can
(D) 2cm produce an upright image
that is smaller than the ob-
48. Characteristics of the image ject?
formed when the object is (A) CONCAVE MIRROR
placed at C in front of a con-
cave mirror (B) CONVEX MIRROR

(A) Erect (C) OPTICAL MIRROR

(B) Real (D) PLANE MIRROR

(C) Inverted 53. The of the reflecting sur-

face of a spherical mirror is
(D) Virtual
called the pole.
49. n object is placed at a dis- (A) length
tance of 15cm from a diverg-
(B) area
ing (convex) mirror and the
image is formed at a dis- (C) centre
tance of 5cm from the mir-
(D) aperture
ror, the radius of curvature
of the mirror 54. What is the ray of light that
(A) 10 cm strikes the surface?
(B) 15cm (A) Incident ray

(C) 29cm (B) reflected ray

(D) none (C) normal ray

(D) normal
50. A is a piece of glass
or transparent material with 55. The image which is ob-
curved surface tained on a screen
(A) lens (A) upright
(B) concave mirror (B) impression
(C) convex mirror (C) virtual image
(D) none of above (D) real image

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.3 Spherical mirrors 73

56. What can be said when an 61. The is the distance the
image is in front of any mir- pole of the mirror and the
ror? principal focus.
(A) The image is real. (A) focal length
(B) The image is virtual. (B) principal axis
(C) The image is smaller than the (C) The pole
object. (D) none of above
(D) The image is bigger than the
object. 62. which of the following lies
on the mirror?
57. What is the mid point of a (A) Centre of curvature.
spherical mirror called?
(B) Principal axis
(A) Focus
(C) Pole
(B) Pole
(D) None
(C) Centre of curvature
63. The bowl of a shiny spoon
(D) Radius of curvature forms an enlarged, upright
image similar to that of a
58. Absolute refractive index is
mirror.
least for
(A) wide-angle
(A) air
(B) convex
(B) mica
(C) concave
(C) vacuum
(D) refracting
(D) water
64. The inner surface of a steel
59. If the image is virtual, erect spoon acts as a mirror.
and enlarged, then it is
formed by which of the fol- (A) plane mirror
lowing mirrors? (B) convex mirror
(A) Concave Mirror (C) concave mirror
(B) Convex Mirror (D) convex lens
(C) Plane Mirror 65. An object is located 35.0 cm
(D) Curved Mirror from a convex lens. The lens
forms a real image at a dis-
60. Which of the following best tance of 15.0 cm. What is
relates R and f? the focal length?
(A) R=f/2 (A) 0.0953 cm
(B) R=2f (B) 10.5 cm
(C) R=4f (C) 26.2 cm
(D) R=f/4 (D) 0.0678 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
74 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

66. A ray directed towards the (C) glass

principal focus of a convex (D) mercury
mirror, after reflection, will
emerge 71. Concave spherical mirrors
(A) parallel to the principal axis produce images which

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) perpendicular to the principal (A) are always smaller than the
axis actual object.
(C) through the focus (B) are always larger than the ac-
tual object.
(D) through the pole.
(C) are always the same size as
67. The focal length of a con- the actual object.
cave mirror is
(D) could be smaller than, larger
(A) negative than, or the same size as the
(B) positive actual object, depending on the
placement of the object.
(C) some times positive some-
times negative 72. Mirrors, whose reflecting
(D) none surfaces are curved, are
called
68. Which of the following al- (A) Concave mirrors
ways diverge light rays?
(B) Convex mirrors
(A) Convex mirror and plane mir-
ror (C) Plane mirrors
(B) Concave lens and convex mir- (D) Spherical mirrors
ror
73. A tree 20 m high is lo-
(C) Concave mirror and convex cated 40 m from the con-
lens verging lens of focal length
(D) Concave lens and convex mir- 0.08 m.Calculate the dis-
ror tance from the lens to the im-
age.
69. Velocity of light when it
(A) 0.08 m
passes from optically denser
to optically rarer medium (B) 0.01 m
(A) decreases (C) 0.10 m
(B) increases (D) 0.20 m
(C) does not change 74. The ocean is blue because it
(D) none of above is reflecting
(A) all colors of light except blue
70. Absolute refractive index is
maximum for (B) blue light
(A) water (C) yellow light
(B) diamond (D) no colors of light.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.3 Spherical mirrors 75

75. Which of the following is (B) 3.00 cm and real

TRUE about spherical mir- (C) 0.33 cm and virtual
rors?
(D) 0.15 cm and virtual
(A) They don’t obey the Law of Re-
flection. 79. An erect and enlarged im-
age can be formed by
(B) They have a flat, planar sur-
face. (A) only a convex mirror
(C) Their surface either bulges (B) only a concave mirror
outward or inward. (C) only a plane mirror
(D) They always give images that (D) Both convex and concave mir-
are of the same size as the object. rors

76. An image an by a concave 80. An object is placed at a con-

mirror is 4 times greater cave mirror’s center of cur-
than the object. If the ra- vature. The distance be-
dius of curvature 20 cm, de- tween its image and the
termine the object distance pole is
in front of the mirror (A) equal to f
(A) 12cm (B) equal to 2f
(B) 20cm (C) between f and 2f
(C) 15cm (D) greater than 2f
(D) 12.5cm 81. what are the uses of convex
mirror?
77. An image formed when the
light rays do not actually (A) magnifying glass
pass through the image lo- (B) traffic mirrors
cation, and would not ap-
(C) rearview mirror
pear on paper or film placed
at that location is referred to (D) plane mirror
as a 82. THE DISTANCE FROM THE
(A) real image. VERTEX OF A CURVE MIRROR
(B) virtual image. TO THE CENTER OF CURVA-
TURE
(C) source image.
(A) focal length
(D) original image.
(B) principal axis
78. An object is placed at a dis- (C) radius of curvature
tance of 27.0 cm away from
(D) vertex
a thin convex lens with a fo-
cal length of 9.00 cm. How 83. In torches, search light and
far from the lens is the im- headlights ofvehicles the
age located and what type bulb is placed
of image is formed? (A) Between the pole and focus of
(A) 13.5 cm and real thereflector

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
76 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Very near to or at the focus of the nature, position and size
the reflector of the image formed.
(C) Between the focus and centre (A) virtual, v = 6cm, hi = 3cm
ofcurvature of the reflector (B) virtual, v = 3cm, hi = 7cm
(D) At the centre of curvature of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) real, v = 6cm, hi = 3cm
thereflector
(D) real, v= 5cm, hi = 10cm
84. A converging lens produces
88. what are the uses of con-
an image twice the size of
cave mirror
the original. If the object is
placed 0.40 m from the lens, (A) makeup mirrors
and the image produced is (B) car headlight mirrors
0.80 m from the lens. What (C) spy hole in the door
is the focal length of the
lens? (D) microscope
(A) 0.351 m 89. mirror is used as rear
(B) 0.267 m view mirrors in vehicles.
(A) Convex
(C) 0.416 m
(B) Concave
(D) 0.112 m
(C) Plane
85. Spherical mirrors are part
(D) none of above
of
(A) cones 90. A negative magnification
for a mirror means
(B) spheres
(A) the image is inverted, and the
(C) circles mirror is concave.
(D) cylinders (B) the image is inverted, and the
86. An index of refraction less mirror is convex.
than one for a medium (C) the image is inverted, and the
would imply mirror may be concave or convex.
(A) that the speed of light in the (D) the image is upright, and the
medium is the same as the speed mirror is convex.
of light in vacuum.
91. A convex lens focusses the
(B) that the speed of light in the light from a bacterium that
medium is greater than the speed is 0.030 cm from the lens. If
of light in vacuum. the focal length of the lens is
(C) refraction is not possible. 0.040 cm, how far from the
lens is the image?
(D) reflection is not possible.
(A) 0.21 cm
87. If an object 5cm high is (B) 0.12 cm
placed at a distance of 10cm
from a convex mirror of ra- (C) -0.21 cm
dius of curvature 30cm find (D) -0.12 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1.4 Spherical mirrors image formation 77

92. The of a spherical mirror (A) focal length

is the line joining the pole (B) principal focus
and the centre of curvature
of the mirror (C) principal axis
(D) The pole

1.4 Spherical mirrors image formation

1. An object with height of 2. An object is placed at 15cm
20cm is placed at 5cm away away from a concave mirror
from a convex mirror with a with a focal length of 10cm.
focal length of 10cm. Find Find the distance of the im-
size image formed. age formed from the centre
of the concave mirror.
(A) 6.33cm
(A) 15cm
(B) 13.33cm
(B) 20cm
(C) 10cm (C) 25cm
(D) 20cm (D) 30cm

1.5 Sign convention

1. What is the magnification (A) 0.1 cm
when an object which is 5 (B) 90 cm
cm tall produces an image
which is 10 cm tall? (C) 30 cm
(A) 50 (D) 10 cm
(B) 2 3. Lens formula
(C) 0.5 (A) 1/q+ 1/f= 1/p
(D) 10
(B) 1/f+ 1/p= 1/q
2. An image which is 30 cm tall (C) 1/q-1/f= 1/p
is produced by a lens with
magnification 3. What is the (D) 1/p+ 1/q= 1/f
height of the object? (E) 1/p-1/q= 1/f

1.6 Mirror formula derivation

1. Mr. Serafin sells textbooks. $15, 500, what would he
He receives 4% on his first earn in commission?
$5, 000 in sales and 15% on
the balance of his sales. If (A) $1, 775
his sales in one month were
(B) $1, 557

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
78 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) $1, 275 6. Rays from Sun converge at a

point 15 cm in front of a con-
(D) $1, 575
cave mirror. Where should
2. If the focal length is negative an object be placed so that
a mirror is being used size of its image is equal to

NARAYAN CHANGDER
the size of the object?
(A) concave (diverging)
(A) 15 cm in front of the mirror
(B) convex (converging)
(B) 30 cm in front of the mirror
(C) concave (converging)
(C) more than 30 cm in front of
(D) convex (diverging) the mirror
(D) between 15 cm and 30 cm in
3. If the object is beyond C
front of the mirror
(A) image is real, smaller and in-
verted 7. An object at a distance of +
15 cm is slowly moved to-
(B) image is real, smaller and up- wards the pole of a convex
right mirror. The image will get
(C) image is virtual, smaller and (A) shortened and real
inverted
(B) enlarged and real
(D) image is real, bigger and up-
(C) enlarged and virtual
right
(D) diminished and virtual
4. An object is placed 20 cm
from a concave mirror with 8. If di is a negative number,
a focal point of 15 cm. this means that the image is:
Where will the image be lo- (A) upright
cated.
(B) inverted
(A) 15 cm (C) real
(B) 20 cm‘ (D) virtual
(C) 60 cm
9. An object is located 5 cm
(D) -8.6 cm from a concave mirror with
a focal point of 15 cm. What
5. Kim and Kanye have been is the location of the im-
approved for a $400, 000 age?
15-year mortgage with an
APR of 6.5%. How much of (A) -7.5 cm
their first monthly payment (B) -3.75 cm
will go to interest? (C) 7.5 cm
(A) $2, 166.67 (D) there is no image
(B) $2, 546.67
10. Dashed lines on a ray dia-
(C) $1, 966.67 gram symbolize rays.
(D) $2, 366.67 (A) parallel

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.6 Mirror formula derivation 79

(B) virtual (B) $1, 207.52

(C) distant (C) $15.09
(D) inverted (D) $1, 215.09
11. Rob is choosing a cell phone
plan. One plan costs $55 15. A real image having a
a month and includes 500 height of-10 cm is formed
minutes. The charge for by a concave mirror. The
each minute over 500 is height of the object is 5
$0.15. The company also cm.The magnification of the
offers an unlimited calling object is
plan with a $75 monthly (A) -5
charge. At how many min-
utes would the cost of the (B) 5
two plans be the same? (C) 2
(A) 633 (D) -2
(B) 577
16. The Mirror Equation relates
(C) 755
object of a spherical mir-
(D) 677 ror.
12. If hi is a negative number, (A) distance (p)
this means it is:
(B) mirror radius (r)
(A) upright
(C) focal length (f)
(B) inverted
(D) image distance (q)
(C) real
(D) virtual 17. What type of image is pro-
duced by an object that is
13. A is a mirror whose re-
far from a concave spherical
flecting surface is outward-
mirror?
curved segment of a sphere.
(A) uniform spherical mirror (A) smaller and upside down
(B) parabolic spherical mirror (B) larger and upright
(C) concave spherical mirror (C) smaller and upright
(D) convex spherical mirror (D) larger and upside down
)nt
14. A = P 1 + nr Tyler deposited
(
18. An image drawn above the
$1, 200 into an account principal axis (PA) is
that pays 1.25% interest,
compounded daily. Deter- (A) virtual
mine the amount of inter- (B) real
est earned at the end of six
months. (C) upright
(A) $7.52 (D) upside down

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
80 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

19. All of the following descrip- (C) $832

tions about images formed (D) $8.32
by convex spherical mirrors
are true except which one? 23. An object of 2cm height is
placed 32cm in front of a
(A) They are formed from con-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
concave mirror. If the image
verging rays.
formed on a screen is 3 cm
(B) They are smaller than the ob- find the focal length of the
jects from which they are formed. mirror
(C) They are always virtual. (A) +19.2 cm
(D) Their image distance is always (B) -19.2 cm
negative. (C) -48 cm
20. A is an image formed (D) +48 cm
when rays of light actually
pass through a point on the 24. Karina works part-time at a
image. bakery earning $11.50 an
hour. In the last five days,
(A) real image her time card shows that she
(B) imaginary image worked 3.3, 2.9, 4.0, 3.5,
and 2.1 hours. What is her
(C) virtual image
gross pay for the five days?
(D) inverted image
(A) $181.70
21. A virtual erect enlarged im- (B) $151.80
age is formed by a concave (C) $145.30
mirror of radius of curvature
30 cm. The object is placed (D) $163.20
at 25. Material that allows all
(A) 13 cm light through
(B) 17 cm (A) Translucent
(C) 21 cm (B) Transparent
(D) 27 cm (C) Opaque
(E) All the options are correct (D) none of above
)nt 26. For an object placed 30 cm
22. B = P 1 + nr You have
(
from the pole of a mirror a
$2500 to put in to a sav-
virtual image is formed 60
ings account for 10 years
cm from the pole of the mir-
at 4.2% interest compound-
ror. Find the focal length of
ing quarterly. B = Pert
the mirror
How much more would you
have if the interest was com- (A) + 60 cm
pounded continuously? (B) -60 cm
(A) $796.58 (C) -30 cm
(B) $804.90 (D) +30 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.6 Mirror formula derivation 81

27. eliminate spherical aber- the angle between the ob-

ration such that all parallel ject and the image? (be
rays converge at the focal careful on this one)!
point of (A) 60 degrees
(A) Convergentmirrors (B) 90 degrees
(B) Parabolic mirrors (C) 120 degrees
(C) Hyperbolic mirrors (D) 180 degrees
(D) Divergent mirrors
32. If a person is standing 10
28. An object is placed at a con- m in front of a plane mirror,
cave mirror’s center of cur- how far away from the mir-
vature. The image produced ror is his image?
by the mirror is located (A) 10m
(A) out beyond the center of cur- (B) 5m
vature.
(C) 20m
(B) at the center of curvature.
(D) 30m
(C) between the center of curva-
ture and the focal point. 33. A concave mirror of focal
(D) at the focal point. length 20 cm forms an im-
age having twice the size of
29. If the magnification (m) is a object. For the virtual posi-
positive number, this means tion of object, the position of
that the image is: object will be at:
(A) larger (A) 25 cm
(B) smaller (B) 40 cm
(C) upright (C) 10 cm
(D) inverted (D) At infinity

30. An image is formed upside 34. Images created by spheri-

down in front of mirror and cal mirrors suffer from
seems bigger by 2 times that occurs when parallel
from the actual size. What rays far from the principal
might be the type of mirror axis converge away from
uses? the mirrors focal point.
(A) concave mirror (A) Uniform aberration
(B) convex mirror (B) Conjunctal aberration
(C) plane mirror (C) Spherical aberration
(D) concave lens (D) Symmetrical aberration

31. If the angle of incidence for 35. Outside rear-view mirrors

an object and a plane mir- on automobiles are gener-
ror is 30 degrees, what is ally

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
82 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(A) concave 1.85%. What should be the

(B) convex finance charge on the state-
ment?
(C) plane
(A) $25.44
(D) real images
(B) $35.44

NARAYAN CHANGDER
36. If the power of a lens is-2 D, (C) $30.44
what is its focal length?
(D) $40.44
(A) +50 cm
(B) -100 cm 40. How much does a plane
mirror magnify an image?
(C) -50 cm
(A) 1x
(D) +100 cm
(B) 2x
37. You are given three media (C) 3x
A, B and C of refractive in-
dex 1.33, 1.65 and 1.46. (D) 4x
The medium in which the 41. Tyler deposited $1, 200 into
light will travel fastest is an account that pays 1.25%
(A) A interest, compounded daily.
(B) B Determine the ending bal-
ance at the end of six
(C) C months.
(D) Equal in all media (A) $7.52
38. Nichole just rented an (B) $1, 207.52
apartment for $850 a
(C) $15.09
month. She was told that
the rent will increase 6.5% (D) $1, 215.09
each year. Using the ex-
42. If the heigh of the image
ponential growth formula,
is a negative number, this
about how much will her
means it is:
rent be in 7 years?
(A) Upright
(A) $1320
(B) Real
(B) $1240
(C) Virtual
(C) $1150
(D) Inverted
(D) $980
43. A concave mirror has a ra-
39. Jackson and Alexandria
dius of curvature of 24 cm.
McFakename do not pay
A 6.4 cm tall object is held
their credit card in full each
26cm from the mirror. Cal-
month, so they incur finance
culate the distance between
charges. On their last credit
the image and the mirror.
card statement, the average
HINT. use : f = 2r xi = xof −
xo
daily balance is $1, 375 and f
the monthly periodic rate is (A) 22.3 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.6 Mirror formula derivation 83

(B) 23.2 cm 47. In diffuse reflection, why

are the reflected rays not
(C) 32.2 cm
parallel to each other?
(D) 23.3 cm (A) because the light is of various
)nt wavelengths
44. A = P 1 + nr Larissa de-
(

posits $450 into a savings (B) because this only happens in

account that earns 3.5% in- plane mirrors
terest compounded quar- (C) because the incident rays are
terly. Using the compound not parallel
interest formula, what is the (D) because the surface is not
balance after 7 years? smooth
(A) $574.32
48. mirrors can produce both
(B) $475.32 real and virtual images.
(C) $521.35 (A) Concave
(D) $695.36 (B) Parabolic
(C) Convex
45. If an image in a curved mir-
ror is virtual, you can say (D) Flat
that the mirror is: 49. If you are walking at a
(A) definitely convex speed of 2.0m/s towards
a plane mirror, how fast
(B) definitely concave is your image walking to-
(C) could be concave or convex wards the mirror?
(D) none of above (A) 2.0 m/s
(B) 4.0 m/s
46. The McLemores pay a
(C) 1.0 m/s
monthly mortgage payment
of $1238. They also pay (D) none of above
a semi-annual property tax
50. The distance of the radius of
bill of $4, 865 and semi-
curvature is equal to:
annual homeowner’s insur-
ance of $1, 650. The prop- (A) C
erty tax and insurance are (B) F
paid monthly into an es-
(C) 2F
crow account to their lender.
What is their monthly pay- (D) V
ment to their lender?
51. If you are walking towards
(A) $1, 238 a plane mirror at a speed of
(B) $2, 323.85 1.0 m/s, how fast are you
and your image approach-
(C) $1, 085.85 ing each other?
(D) $3, 232.58 (A) 1.0 m/s

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
84 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) 0.50 m/s 56. Darian is verifying the ac-

curacy of her paycheck.
(C) 2.0 m/s
She earns $13.50 an hour
(D) 4.0 m/s and works 40 hours each
week. Her biweekly de-
52. An image behind the mirror

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ductions are Social Secu-
is (choose 2) rity 6.2%, Medicare 1.45%,
(A) virtual federal withholding tax
$84.75, state withholding
(B) real tax $29.60, and health in-
(C) inverted surance $52.85. What is
her net pay if she is paid
(D) upright
biweekly?
53. Light rays that hit a con- (A) $830.18
vex mirror as they are re- (B) $941.52
flected.
(C) $785.16
(A) magnify
(D) $879.56
(B) diverge
57. A student is 2.50m away
(C) disappear
from a convex lens while
(D) unite her image is 1.80m from
the lens, what is the focal
54. The distance from the center length?
of a concave mirror to the fo-
(A) 1.05m
cal point is called the
(B) 2.50m
(A) optical axis
(C) 1.39m
(B) focal length
(D) 0.72m
(C) plane
58. A 4.0 cm tall light bulb is
(D) reflection
placed at a distance of 35.5
55. A concave mirror has a fo- cm from a convex mirror.
cal length of 12 cm. A 6.4 The image distance is deter-
cm tall object is held 26cm mined to be-9.1 cm. What
from the mirror. The dis- is the size of the image? (i.e.
tance from the image to the the height)?
object is 22.3 cm. What (A) 1.02 cm
is the height of the image.
(B) 7.23 cm
HINT. use : hhoi = − xxoi
(C) 5.78 cm
(A) -5.5 cm
(D) 2.98 cm
(B) 3.3 cm
59. Malena purchased $9, 568
(C) 5.5 cm
worth of stock and paid her
(D) -3.3 cm broker a 0.5% fee. She sold

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.6 Mirror formula derivation 85

the stock when the stock 63. Moe’s car is worth $14, 160.
price increased to $13, 928, When he bought it new 7
using an online broker that years ago, it cost $25, 000.
charged $7 per trade. What What was the depreciation
are her net proceeds? rate?
(A) $3, 874.60 (A) 6.8%
(B) $4, 785.23 (B) 5.8%
(C) $2, 859.36 (C) 4.8%

(D) $3, 523.36 (D) 7.8%

64. When constructing ray dia-

60. A ray of light is travelling
grams on a curved mirror,
from a rarer medium to a
incident rays going parallel
denser medium. While en-
to the PA reflect back:
tering the denser medium at
the point of incidence, it: (A) on themselves
(A) goes straight into the second (B) through F
medium (C) parallel to the PA
(B) bends towards the normal (D) none of above
(C) bends away from the normal 65. An object of 2cm height is
(D) does not enter at all placed 16cm in front of a
concave mirror. If the height
61. Rick shops around for a of the image formed on a
new muffler for his car and screen is 3 cm find the focal
gets these estimates:$135, length of the mirror
$178, $152, $149, $169,
(A) +9.6 cm
$211, and $160. What are
Q1, Q2, and Q3? (B) -9.6 cm

(A) 135, 160, 211 (C) -24 cm

(B) 149, 160, 178 (D) +24 cm

(C) 149, 160, 211 66. When constructing ray di-

agrams on a curved mir-
(D) 135, 160, 178
ror, incident rays directed to-
62. When constructing ray dia- wards the center of curva-
grams on a curved mirror, ture reflect:
incident rays going towards (A) back on themselves
the F will reflect back: (B) through F
(A) along themselves (C) parallel to the PA
(B) through F (D) none of above
(C) parallel to the PA
67. Larissa deposits $450 into a
(D) none of above savings account that earns

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
86 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

3.5% interest compounded APR of 4.3%. Determine her

quarterly. Using the com- monthly payment.
pound interest formula, (A) $110.46
what is the balance after 7
years? (B) $98.53

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) $574.32 (C) $125.33

(B) $475.32 (D) $137.54

(C) $521.35 72. An insurance company sells

a twenty-year term life in-
(D) $695.36
surance policy with a face
68. Ray diagrams can be used value of $300, 000 to a 45-
for checking values calcu- year old woman. Her an-
lated from the mirror and nual premium is $1850. If
magnification equations for the woman dies after pay-
ing premiums for 8 years,
what is the insurance com-
(A) flat mirrors. pany’s gain or loss?
(B) parabolic mirrors. (A) loss of $285, 200
(C) concave spherical mirrors. (B) loss of $14, 800
(D) convex spherical mirrors. (C) gain of $14, 800

69. For an object placed 30 cm (D) gain of $314, 800

from a mirror, a real im- 73. An object of size 4cm is
age is formed 60cm from place 15 cm in front of a con-
the pole of the mirror. Find cave mirror of focal length
the position of the object to 10 cm. Find the position and
get an image at 40 cm from magnification of the image
the pole of the mirror
(A) image is formed 30 cm in
(A) 20 cm front of the mirror, m =-2
(B) 40 cm (B) image is formed 30 cm in
(C) 10 cm front of the mirror, m =-8cm
(D) 30 cm (C) image is formed 30 cm be-
hind the mirror, m =-2
70. An image behind the mirror (D) image is formed 30 cm be-
is considered: hind the mirror, m =-8cm
(A) virtual
74. An object of size 2 cm is
(B) real placed at 25 cm in front of a
(C) upside down concave mirror. If the mag-
nification produced by the
(D) upright
mirror is 4, what is the size
71. Katie borrowed $8, 000 for of the image.
a car for 7 years at an (A) 8 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 87

(B) 4 cm (C) 30 cm
(C) 16 cm (D) -30 cm
(D) 2 cm
77. A = P (1 − r)n Moe’s car is
75. An object placed in front of worth $14, 160. When he
a mirror of radius of cur- bought it new 7 years ago,
vature 30cm forms a real it cost $25, 000. What was
inverted image magnified the depreciation rate?
three times. Find the posi-
(A) 6.8%
tion of the object and the im-
age (B) 5.8%
(A) u =-20 cm, v =-60 cm (C) 4.8%
(B) u =-60 cm, u =-20 cm (D) 7.8%
(C) u =-20 cm, v = + 60 cm
78. An object is placed at 100
(D) u =-60 cm, u = +20 cm
mm in front of a concave
76. An object of 5.0 cm in size mirror which produces an
is placed at a distance of upright image (erect image).
20.0 cm from a concave mir- The radius of curvature of
ror of focal length 15.0 cm. the mirror is:
At what distance from the (A) Less than 100 mm
mirror, should a screen be
placed to get the sharp im- (B) Between 100 mm and 200
age? mm
(A) -60 cm (C) Exactly 200 mm
(B) 60 cm (D) More than 200 mm

1.7 Mirror formula & magnification

1. What two things do all tele- creases?
scopes need to do. (A) The image will get bigger and
(A) Gather light and magnify ob- become closer to the focal point.
jects (B) The image will get smaller and
(B) Gather light and reduce ob- become closer to the focal point.
jects. (C) The image will get smaller
(C) Magnify objects and separate and become farther from the fo-
colors. cal point.
(D) Magnify objects and filter at- (D) The image will get bigger and
mospheric interference. become farther from the focal
point
2. What happens when the
distance between and ob- 3. What is spherical aberra-
ject and a convex mirror in- tion?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
88 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(A) The light from a concave mir- (B) -11 cm

ror doesn’t pass through the focal (C) -6.3 cm
point.
(D) -4.8 cm
(B) The light from a convex mir-
ror doesn’t pass through the focal (E) all/none/same

NARAYAN CHANGDER
point. 8. A negative magnification in-
(C) The light from a concave mir- cidicates that the image is:
ror passes through the focal point. (A) inverted
(D) The light from a convex mirror (B) smaller that the object
passes through the focal point.
(C) real
4. What is the size and posi- (D) upright
tion of an image formed by
a plane mirror? 9. Determine the focal length
(A) same size, closer to the mirror and magnification of a
curved mirror that produces
(B) larger size, closer to the mirror an image that is 16.0 cm be-
(C) same size, same distance hind the mirror when the ob-
away from the mirror ject is 28.5 cm from the mir-
ror. What type of curved
(D) reduced, farther from the mir-
mirror was used?
ror
(A) f= 36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Convex
5. What kind of mirror is used
(B) f= 36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Concave
in a reflector telescope?
(C) f=-36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Concave
(A) Plane
(D) f=-36.5 ; M=0.56 ; Convex
(B) Convex
(C) Concave 10. Concave lenses, like the
ones found in the peepholes
(D) Parabolic
of a door, always produce
6. What is the period of a 1.4m images that are
pendulum? (A) Virtual, upright, smaller
(A) 1.4 s (B) Real, inverted, larger
(B) 16.6 s (C) Real, inverted, smaller
(C) 3.2 s (D) Virtual, upright, larger
(D) 2.4 s 11. A normal human eye has a
7. A convex mirror is used to focal length of about 0.023
produce an image that is m. The tip of a pencil
three-fourths the size of an is 0.553 m from your eye.
object and located 8.4cm be- What does the 0.553 m rep-
hind the mirror. What is the resent?
focal length of the mirror? (A) do
(A) -24 cm (B) di

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 89

(C) f 16. If an object is placed 0.25

m from the lens, and the
(D) 1/f
image produced is 0.15 m
12. A convex mirror produces from the lens. What is the
an image that is 27.5 cm focal length of the lens?
behind the mirror when the (A) 0.094 m
object is 54.8 cm in front (B) 0.230 m
of the mirror. What is the
focal length of the mirror? (C) 0.012 m
(Round to the right amount (D) 0.032 m
of SigFigs)
17. Plane waves have
(A) -55.2
(A) Spherical wavefronts and par-
(B) -45.5 allel rays pointing in the same di-
(C) 55.2 rection
(D) 49.6 (B) Flat wavefronts parallel rays
pointing in different directions
13. If an object is outside of the (C) Spherical wavefronts parallel
focal length, then the image rays pointing in different direc-
formed is tions
(A) virtual, inverted (D) Flat wavefronts parallel rays
(B) virtual, upright pointing in the same direction

(C) real, inverted 18. A converging lens produces

an image twice the size of
(D) real, upright
the original. The object is
14. If the image reflected off of placed 0.40 m from the lens,
a plane mirror is 2cm what and the image is produced
is the object’s height? 0.80 m from the lens. What
does the 0.40 m represent?
(A) 2m
(A) do
(B) 2km (B) di
(C) 2cm (C) f
(D) 2mm (D) 1/f
15. An upright image is 3 cm 19. A dentist uses a spherical
from a lens. If the focal mirror to produce an upright
length is 5 cm, what kind of image of a patient’s tooth
image is produced? that is magnified by a factor
(A) Virtual Upright of 4.5 when placed 1.8 cm
from the tooth. What is the
(B) Real Upright focal length of the mirror?
(C) Virtual Inverted (A) 8.1 cm
(D) Real Inverted (B) 6.3 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
90 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) 4.5 cm 24. A concave mirror has a fo-

cal length 12 cm. What is its
(D) 2.3 cm
radius of curvature?
(E) 0.43 cm
(A) 6.0 cm
20. In ray diagram for con- (B) 3.4 cm

NARAYAN CHANGDER
cave mirrors, if an incident (C) -6.0 cm
ray passes through the fo-
(D) -3.4 cm
cal point, how does the re-
flected ray look like? 25. For light passing across the
(A) It reflects back on itself. boundary from higher to
lower index of refraction
(B) The reflected ray bounces ver- medium, the angle of refrac-
tically upward. tion is always
(C) The reflected ray will be paral- (A) greater than the angle of inci-
lel to the principal axis. dence
(D) The reflected ray gets pro- (B) less than the angle of inci-
jected vertically downward. dence
(C) equal to the angle of inci-
21. What is NOT an example of
dence
a lens being used in an ob-
ject. (D) none of above
(A) Glasses 26. As the light travels the
(B) Projector points in the same direction
(A) Rays
(C) Spoon
(B) Wave fronts
(D) Camera
(C) Beams
22. Lenses use the principle of (D) Arrows
(A) Refraction 27. What type of mirror is used
(B) Motion to give a wide field of vision
in a hallway?
(C) Reflection
(A) Parabolic
(D) Inertia
(B) Concave
23. If an image formed by a (C) Convex
convex lens is inverted, it is
(D) Specular
most likely what type of im-
age? 28. Convex mirrors, like those
(A) Real found on the side of a car,
produce images that are al-
(B) Virtual ways
(C) None of the above (A) Real, larger and inverted
(D) none of above (B) Virtual, larger, and inverted

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 91

(C) Virtual, smaller and upright (C) is constant

(D) Of equal size and position as (D) all answers are correct
the original object
33. COLOUR WHICH IS HAVING
29. What is the focal point? MAXIMUM ANGLE OF DEVI-
ATION IS
(A) The center of the spherical
shell with radius R of which the (A) RED
curved mirror is a section (B) VIOLET
(B) Where the rays reflect from (C) GREEN
the surface of the mirror and con- (D) YELLOW
verge
34. Which waves are the type
(C) The distance from the surface that can give us suntans and
of the mirror to the focal point sunburns?
(D) A straight line drawn through (A) Infrared radiation
the center of curvature and the
(B) Ultraviolet radiation
midpoint of the mirror
(C) Radio waves
30. Which statement describes (D) X-rays
what happens when green
light passes from air into a 35. The focal length of the lens
new material with an index in your eye is about 0.015
of refraction of 1.5? m. The object is 1 m from
your eye. What does the
(A) Its speed increases by a factor
0.015m represent?
of 1.5
(A) do
(B) Its speed decreases by a factor
of 1.5 (B) di

(C) It direction must change (C) f

(D) 1/f
(D) Its color changes
36. A convex mirror has a ra-
31. If you stand three feet in dius of curvature of 28 cm.
front of a plane mirror, how What is its focal length?
far away would you see
yourself in the mirror? (A) -14 cm
(B) 14 cm
(A) 1.5 ft
(C) 18 cm
(B) 3.0 ft
(D) 13 cm
(C) 6.0 ft
37. Jennie looks at herself
(D) 12.0 ft
through the caved in side of
32. Speed of light in a vacuum her silver spoon. The spoon
is acts as a concave mirror
with a 2.59-cm focal length.
(A) represented by the symbol “c” Determine the image size
(B) 3.00 X108 m/s of Jennie’s 24.8-cm tall face

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
92 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

when placed 12.8 cm from distance from you to your

the spoon’s surface. brother’s image?
(A) -6.3 cm (A) 1.8 m
(B) 6.3 cm (B) 2.3 m

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 4.2 cm (C) 13.6 m
(D) -4.2 cm (D) 6.8 m

38. The point half way between 42. An image located at 2F in

the mirror and the radius of front of a converging lens is
curvature is called the 15 cm tall. If the temper-
ature outside is 32 degrees
(A) center point CELCIUS how tall is the in-
(B) focal point verted image?
(C) radius of curvature (A) 7.5 cm
(D) object distance (B) 15 cm
(C) 22.5 cm
39. Mirrors in your home create
(D) No image
(A) Diffuse reflections which re-
flect light in a variety of directions 43. Which of the following best
(B) Specular reflections which re- describes the image formed
flects light back in a single direc- by a concave mirror when
tion. the object distance from the
mirror is less than the focal
(C) Diffuse reflections which re- point (F) distance?
flects light back in a single direc-
tion. (A) virtual, upright and enlarged

(D) Specular reflections which re- (B) real, inverted and reduced
flect light in a variety of directions (C) real, inverted and reduced
(D) none of above
40. Water waves in a lake
travel 3.4m in 1.8s. What 44. If you’re standing 12 me-
is the speed of the water ters in front of a plane mir-
waves? ror, how far away is your
(A) 2.4 m/s image
(B) 3.4 m/s (A) 6
(C) 1.9 m/s (B) 12
(D) 0.85 m/s (C) 18
(D) 24
41. You stand 4.3 m in front of
a plane mirror. Your little 45. How rapidly does the dis-
brother is 2.5 m in front of tance between you and
you, directly between you your mirror image decrease
and the mirror. What is the if you walk directly towards

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 93

a mirror with a speed of 2.3 (D) The image is larger than the
m/s original object.
(A) You mirror image going fast
50. What happens to the period
(B) At the same rate of a wave as the frequency
(C) You going faster than your increases?
mirror image
(A) decreases
(D) none of above
(B) increases
46. What is the height of an ob- (C) remains same
ject with a magnification of
2 that appears 9m tall? (D) no change
(A) 18m
51. Individuals that are far-
(B) 9m sighted need to have pre-
(C) 4m scription lenses that are
(D) 4.5m (A) convex

47. If an incident ray passes (B) concave

through C and hits a con- (C) plane
cave mirror then it will re-
flects (D) flat
(A) Parallel
52. A smooth surface will cre-
(B) Towards F ate what type of reflection?
(C) Towards C (A) Diffuse
(D) Away from the mirror (B) Specular
48. A light ray hits a plane sur- (C) Imaginary
face at 20 degrees. What is
the angle between the inci- (D) none of above
dent and reflected rays.
53. A concave mirror with a fo-
(A) 20o cal length of 16.0cm pro-
(B) 40o duces an image located
(C) 70o 38.6 cm from the mirror.
What is the distance of the
(D) 30o object from the front of the
mirror?
49. An image is created whose
di =-5 cm. What does this (A) 2.4 cm
indicate?
(B) 11.3 cm
(A) The image is virtual.
(C) 22.6 cm
(B) The image is smaller than the
original object. (D) 27.3 cm
(C) The image is inverted. (E) all/none/same

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
94 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

54. Plane mirrors (select all (B) 2cm

that apply) (C) 8m
(A) increase the size of an object (D) -2cm
(B) keep the image upright, but re-
58. A farsighted eye focuses an

NARAYAN CHANGDER
verse left and right
image
(C) creates a diffuse reflection all
(A) behind the retina
the time
(B) in front of the lens
(D) keeps the mirror image the
same distance behind the mirror (C) in front of the retina
as the object in front of the mirror (D) on the retina
55. A cup sits 17 cm from a 59. What problem can be cor-
concave mirror. The image rected with a parabolic mir-
of the cup appears 34 m in ror?
front of the mirror. What (A) Spherical aberration
are the magnification and
orientation of the cup’s im- (B) Chromatic aberration
age? (C) Diffuse reflections
(A) 0.5, inverted (D) Atmospheric scattering
(B) 0.5, upright 60. The normal to a reflecting
(C) 2.0, inverted surface is a line drawn to
the surface. SELECT ALL THAT
(D) 2.0, upright
APPLY!
(E) all/none/same
(A) Parallel
56. The concave side of a shiny (B) 270◦
metal spoon has a focal (C) 90◦
length of f = 9.34 cm. Find
the image distance for this (D) Perpendicular
“mirror” when the object 61. STARS TWINKLE BCOZ OF
distance is 53.0 cm. Round
to the nearest hundredth. (A) DISPERSION

(A) d = 11.34 cm (B) ATMOSPHERE REFRACTION

(C) REFLECTION
(B) d = 10.54 cm
(D) SCATTERING
(C) d = 12.20 cm
(D) d = 9.34 cm 62. A dentist uses a spherical
mirror to produce an upright
57. A convex mirror produces image of a patient’s tooth
an image with the radius of that is magnified by a factor
curvature of 4cm. What is of 4.5 when placed 1.8 cm
the focal length of the con- from the tooth. What type
vex mirror? of mirror is being used?
(A) -2mm (A) plane

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 95

(B) concave 67. A concave mirror has a ra-

dius of curvature of 40 cm.
(C) convex
An object is placed 20cm
(D) obtuse from the mirror. Where will
(E) all/none/same the image be located?
(A) 20 cm
63. Which light color combina-
(B) -20 cm
tion is incorrect?
(C) 40 cm
(A) Red plus green produces yel-
low. (D) there is no image
(B) Red plus yellow produces ma- 68. There are certain angles of
genta. incidence for which the an-
(C) Blue plus green produces gle of refraction is close to
cyan. 90◦ . What is this angle
called?
(D) Blue plus yellow produces
white. (A) Total internal angle
(B) Critical angle
64. How far is the image with
a magnification of 6 and an (C) Reflection angle
object distance of 4m? (D) Refracted angle
(A) 2.4m 69. PHENOMENON RESPONSI-
(B) -24m BLE FOR FORMATION OF
RAINBOW
(C) 2.5m
(A) REFRACTION
(D) -10m
(B) DISPERSION
65. Which mirror type can pro- (C) T.I.R
duce real and virtual im-
ages? (D) ALL THE ABOVE

(A) plane 70. A light ray strikes a plane

mirror at an angle of 23◦
(B) concave
to the normal. What is the
(C) convex angle between the reflected
(D) none of above ray and the mirror?
(A) 23◦
66. This is the example of dis-
(B) 46◦
persion of light
(C) 67◦
(A) sky looks bright orange in the
evening (D) 134◦
(B) shadow 71. Mirrors use the principle of
(C) Pool seems shallower (A) Polarization
(D) rainbow (B) Reflection

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
96 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) Refrection object that is placed 30 cm

(D) none of above from the mirror?
(A) -42 cm
72. Where might you find a con-
(B) -26 cm
vex mirror?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) -8.4 cm
(A) car headlights
(D) 8.4 cm
(B) the corner of a convenience
store (E) all/none/same
(C) inside a microscope 77. A real image forms 10cm in
(D) in your eyeball front of a mirror that has a
focal length of 5cm. What
73. You hold a small spoon type of image is produced.
arm’s length and look at (A) A real upright image.
yourself on the concave side,
(B) A real inverted image.
is your image
(C) A virtual inverted image
(A) Invert/inverted/Virtual
(D) A virtual upright image
(B) Upright/Inverted/real
(C) Invert/Reduced/Real 78. The danger signals installed
at the top of tall buildings
(D) Upright/Reduced/real are red in colour. These
74. If M= 2.5 and the image dis- can be easily seen from a
tance is-10 cm, what is the distance because among all
object’s distance? other colours, the red light
(A) is scattered the most by smoke
(A) 4 cm
or fog
(B) 6 cm
(B) is absorbed the most by
(C) 10 cm smoke or fog
(D) 40 cm (C) is scattered the least by smoke
or fog
75. An object is placed 9.6 cm in
front of a convex lens with (D) moves fastest in air
a focal point of 4.4 cm. Find 79. an image that is made of fo-
the location and magnifica- cused light
tion of the image. Round to
the nearest hundredth (A) virtual image
(B) real image
(A) di = 9.13, m =-0.74
(C) diffuse reflection
(B) di = 8.13, m =-0.84
(D) regular reflection
(C) di = 8.12, m =-0.85
(D) di = 9.12, m =-0.75 80. Light passes from air into
benzene with an angle of
76. What is the focal length of a incidence of 76◦ . The re-
concave mirror that magni- fracted beam make an an-
fies, by a factor of +3.2, an gle of 34◦ with the normal.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 97

Calculate the index of refrac- (B) Red, Yellow, Green, Orange,

tion of benzene. Round to Violet, Blue, Indigo
the nearest hundredth. (C) Red, Orange, Yellow, Green,
(A) 1.54 Blue, Indigo, Violet
(B) 1.98 (D) none of above
(C) 1.74 85. The first laser was built in
(D) 1.24
(A) 1920
81. What is a Index of Refrac-
tion? (B) 1940
(A) An index which tells you how (C) 1960
light refracts off material, which (D) 1980
shows how light would have a dif-
fuse reflection or specular reflec- 86. What type of image is
tion. formed when rays of light
actually intersect?
(B) A material’s factor that re-
duces the speed of light. (A) real
(C) A material’s factor that in- (B) virtual
creases the speed of light. (C) projected
(D) none of above (D) curved
82. What is the speed of light in 87. What is the purpose of a
a substance whose index of corner reflector?
refraction is 1.62?
(A) To see around corners.
(A) 2.14 ∗ 10−8
(B) To place at a corner to give a
(B) 2.14 ∗ 104 large field of vision.
(C) 2.14 ∗ 105 (C) To reflect a beam of light di-
(D) 2.14 ∗ 108 rectly back at something.
(D) To give infinite images.
83. When magnification is neg-
ative, it creates 88. When an object is far away
(A) Inverted images from a Convex Mirror, the
image appears
(B) Bigger images
(A) Smaller and Upright
(C) Upright images
(B) Smaller and Upside Down
(D) Smaller images
(C) Bigger and Upright
84. Put the visible light colors (D) Bigger and Upside Down
in order from longest wave-
length to shortest wave- 89. What kind of mirror always
length gives an image that is the
(A) Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green, same size as the object.
Orange, Yellow, Red (A) Plane

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
98 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Convex (C) absorption

(C) Concave (D) translucent
(D) Virtual 94. Where is the object located
90. The critical angle for light if the image that is pro-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
passing from a certain mate- duced by a concave mirror
rial into air is 57.32◦ . What is smaller than the object?
is the index of refraction of (A) at the mirror’s focal point
this material? Round to the
(B) between the mirror and the fo-
nearest hundredth.
cal point
(A) 1.12
(C) between the focal point and
(B) 1.43 center of curvature
(C) 1.20 (D) past the center of curvature
(D) 2.2 (E) all/none/same
91. Which of the following best 95. A concave lens has a focal
describes the image formed length of-65 cm. Find the im-
by a concave mirror when age distance and the mag-
the object is located some- nification that result when
where between the focal an object is placed 43 cm in
point (F) and the center of front of the lens. Round to
curvature (C) of the mirror? the thousandth.
(A) virtual, upright and enlarged (A) -0.602
(B) real, inverted and reduced (B) -0.394
(C) virtual, upright and reduced (C) -0.527
(D) real, inverted and enlarged (D) -0.413
92. An image is created whose 96. From which point does a
magnification is m = +0.5. ray of light pass after reflec-
What does this value signify tion when incident parallel
about the image? to Principal axis
(A) A. It is virtual. (A) Focal point
(B) B. It is upright. (B) center of curvature
(C) C. It is smaller than the origi- (C) pole of mirror
nal object
(D) all of the above
(D) All of the above
97. If a light ray is shown on a
93. When light bends through a plane mirror with an angle
new medium, what is hap- of incidence of 45 degrees,
pening? what is the angle of reflec-
(A) reflection tion?
(B) refraction (A) 15

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 99

(B) 30 102. Light waves reflect

(C) 45 (A) Perpendicular to the light
(D) 90 source
(B) Perpendicular to the angle of
98. When the image of an ob-
incident
ject is seen in a plane mirror,
the image is (C) Perpendicular to the reflecting
surface
(A) real and upright.
(D) none of above
(B) real and inverted.
(C) virtual and upright. 103. An object located at the ra-
(D) virtual and inverted. dius of curvature (C) of a
concave mirror will always
99. Diamond has a index of appear
refraction than air. (A) upright
(A) Equal
(B) smaller
(B) Greater
(C) same size
(C) Less
(D) larger
(D) none of above
104. The lowest point in the
100. At noon the sun appears wave is known as
white as
(A) crest
(A) light is least scattered
(B) trough
(B) all the colours of the white
light are scattered away (C) amplitude
(C) blue colour is scattered the (D) wavelength
most
105. What is the difference(s)
(D) red colour is scattered the between a mirror and
most lense? Select All That Apply.
101. What is the principle (A) Lenses let light pass through
axis? them and mirrors reflect light.
(A) The center of the spherical (B) Mirrors let light pass through
shell with radius R of which the them and lenses reflect light.
curved mirror is a section
(C) Lenses have two focal points
(B) Where the rays reflect from and mirrors only have one
the surface of the mirror and con-
(D) Lenses have one focal point
verge
and mirrors have two
(C) The distance from the surface
of the mirror to the focal point 106. What is the focal length?
(D) A straight line drawn through (A) The center of the spherical
the center of curvature and the shell with radius R of which the
midpoint of the mirror curved mirror is a section

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
100 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Where the rays reflect from 111. A microwave oven emits
the surface of the mirror and con- radiation at a wavelength
verge of 0.00500 m. What is the
(C) The distance from the surface frequency of this radiation?
of the mirror to the focal point (A) 6.67 x 10-7 Hz

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) A straight line drawn through (B) 2.00 Hz
the center of curvature and the
midpoint of the mirror (C) 1.50 x 106 Hz
(D) 6.00 x 1010 Hz
107. A line drawn perpendicu-
lar to the surface is
112. Sam places a 4.25-cm tall
(A) Reflecting eraser a distance of 36.2 cm
(B) Unusual from a concave mirror. If
the mirror has a focal length
(C) Normal of 19.2 cm, then what is the
(D) none of above image height and image dis-
tance?
108. A real image that has a
size of 15 cm is formed by a (A) di=-40.9 cm ; hi= 4.80 cm
concave mirror. The size of (B) di= 40.9 cm ; hi=-4.80 cm
the object is 5 cm.The mag-
nification of the object is (C) di=-12.5 cm ; hi=-1.46 cm

(A) -5 (D) di= 12.5 cm ; hi= 1.46 cm

(B) 5 113. which of the following
(C) -3 does NOT belong in the elec-
(D) 3 tromagnetic spectrum:
(A) X-ray
109. All electromagnetic waves
have the same (B) sound wave
(A) frequency (C) ultra violet rays
(B) speed (D) microwaves
(C) wavelength
114. An object is placed 10 m
(D) energy from a convex mirror. Its im-
age is formed 5 m behind
110. In a ray diagram, which
the mirror. What is the fo-
term refers to the distance
cal length of the convex mir-
from the vertex to the center
ror?
of curvature?
(A) focal point (A) -5 m

(B) focal length (B) 15 m

(C) radius of curvature (C) 50 m
(D) diameter (D) -10 m

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 101

115. You hold a small plane (B) di

mirror 0.50 m in front of
(C) f
your eyes. In mirror is 0.32
m high, and in it you see the (D) 1/f
image of a tall building be-
hind you. If the building is 120. An image with magnifica-
95 m behind you, what ver- tion of M =-3
tical height of the building.
(A) is formed by a convex mirror,
(A) 75.5m beyond 3f and it is virtual
(B) 33.1m (B) is formed by a concave lens,
(C) -75.1m between f and 2f and it is real
(D) 61.1m (C) is formed by a convex lens be-
tween f and 2f and it is virtual
116. An object located on 2F
of a concave mirror will al- (D) is formed by a concave mirror
ways appear beyond 3f and it is real
(A) upright
121. How far is the object
(B) smaller if the image reflected off
(C) same size of a plane mirror is 4.0m
away?
(D) larger
(A) 4.0mm
117. If you stand 3.1 meters in
front of a plane mirror what (B) 4km
is the distance between you (C) -4.0m
and your mirror image?
(D) 4.0m
(A) -3.1
(B) 5.0 122. In visible light, which
(C) 6.2 color has the longest wave-
length?
(D) -3
(A) Red
118. What type of lens do you
(B) Violet
have in your eye?
(A) Concave (C) Yellow

(B) Prismatic (D) Green

(C) Objective
123. The process of light bounc-
(D) Convex ing off a surface
119. A tree is located 40 m from (A) refraction
the converging lens of focal (B) reflection
length 0.08 m. What does
the 0.08 m represent? (C) diffraction
(A) do (D) diffusion

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
102 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

124. Acronym for LASER is 46◦ with respect to the nor-

mal to the surface of the wa-
(A) Light Absorption by Stimu-
ter. What is the angle of re-
lated Emission of Radiation
fraction of the beam in the
(B) Light Amplification by Stimu- water. (The refractive index

NARAYAN CHANGDER
lated Emission of Radiation for water is 1.33)
(C) Light Alteration by Stimulated (A) 18◦
Emission of Radiation (B) 30◦
(D) Light Attenuation by Stimu- (C) 33◦
lated Emission of Radiation
(D) 44◦
125. Hamilton wants to change 128. A refraction is
lanes and is looking through
his mirror at the other lane. (A) A change is speed due to a
His convex side mirror has change in light
a focal length of-88.4 cm. (B) A change in direction due to a
What is the image height change in speed
of a 4.59-meter tall truck (C) A change in light due to a
when located 12.6 meters change in speed
away from the mirror?
(D) none of above
(A) 34.6 cm
129. Why does scattering of
(B) -34.6 cm
light occur?
(C) 30.1 cm (A) Light rays are reflected by at-
(D) -30.1 cm mospheric molecules and scatter
in all directions
126. What is the center of cur- (B) Light rays are blocked and re-
vature? fracted to all directions by the
(A) The center of the spherical clouds or particles in the air
shell with radius R of which the (C) Light rays are transmitted and
curved mirror is a section refracted in all directions by the
(B) Where the rays reflect from clouds or particles in the air
the surface of the mirror and con- (D) none of above
verge
130. The point where the rays
(C) The distance from the surface meet is known as
of the mirror to the focal point
(A) the focal length
(D) A straight line drawn through
(B) the focal point
the center of curvature and the
midpoint of the mirror (C) refraction
(D) magnification
127. A flash light beam is di-
rected at a swimming pool 131. A concave mirror produces
in the dark at an angle of an inverted image 8.5cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.7 Mirror formula & magnification 103

tall, located 34.5 cm in front 24 cm what is the height of

of the mirror. If the fo- the image?
cal point of the mirror is (A) -16 cm
24.0 cm, then what is the
height of the object that is re- (B) 16 cm
flected? (C) 32 cm
(A) 2.3cm (D) -32 cm
(B) 3.5cm 136. The index of refraction is
(C) 14cm based off of

(D) 19cm (A) how well a material speeds up

light
(E) all/none/same
(B) how well a material changes
132. Sunlight reflects from a the direction of light
concave mirror and con- (C) how well a material slows
verges to a point 30 cm from down light
the mirror’s surface. What (D) how well a material magnifies
is the radius of curvature of light
the mirror?
(A) 15 cm 137. Diffraction is
(A) The distortion of a wave by
(B) 0.3 m
passing through an object
(C) 30 cm
(B) The reflection of a wave from
(D) 60 cm a mirror

133. electromagnetic waves (C) The bending of a wave

with the longest wave- around a barrier
lengths are (D) The slowing down of a wave
when entering a new medium
(A) gamma rays
(B) x-rays 138. Where do virtual images
form?
(C) infrared waves
(A) In the mirror
(D) radio waves
(B) In front of the mirror
134. Red-light laser contain a (C) Behind the mirror
long crystal made of
(D) none of above
(A) agate
139. Which color of light in the
(B) tourmaline visible light spectrum has
(C) coral the most energy?
(D) ruby (A) Red
(B) Yellow
135. An object has a height of 8
cm when it is 12 cm from the (C) Violet
lens. If the image distance is (D) Green

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 104 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

140. An object is located 35.0 143. Why are the mirrors on

cm from a convex lens. The the Webb telescope coated
lens forms a real image with gold?
at a distance of 15.0 cm.
(A) Because gold is heavy.
What does the 15.0 cm rep-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
resent? (B) Because it looks cooler.
(A) do (C) Because gold does a good job
(B) di reflecting infrared light.
(C) f (D) Because gold reflects visible
light well.
(D) 1/f
141. When any type of wave 144. An argon ion laser emits
off a surface it bounces off in light at 488 nm. What is the
a different direction frequency of this radiation?
(1m = 1.0 x 109 nm)
(A) Bounce
(A) 6.15 x 105 Hz
(B) Reflects
(C) Reverberate (B) 6.15 x 1014 Hz
(D) Mirror (C) 3.00 x 1020 Hz

142. An object is 1 meter in (D) 2.05 x 106 Hz

front of plane mirror. The
145. What is the condition in
image is
which the focal length of the
(A) virtual, inverted, and 1 m be- eye is too short to focus light
hind the mirror on the retina?
(B) virtual, inverted, and 1 m in (A) Farsightedness
front of the mirror
(B) Nearsightedness
(C) virtual, uprignt, and 1 m be-
hind the mirror (C) long sight
(D) none of the above (D) Hyperopia

1.8 Refraction of light

1. Light is incident on a plastic 2. The basic cause of refraction
block of refractive index 1.5. is
The angle of incidence is 50◦ .
What is the angle of refrac- (A) When light is incident on a
tion? boundary

(A) 31o (B) When refractive indices of two

media are equal
(B) 33o
(C) Change in the speed of light
(C) 40o
is going from one medium to an-
(D) 75o other

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 105

(D) When refractive indices of two (C) 16/9

media are not equal (D) 9/16
3. A ray of light travels from 7. vertical shift of a slab is
glass to airs with an angle 0.5cm; and thickness of the
of incidence of 45o. If the slab is 2 cm; then the refrac-
critical angle is 42o what tive index of the slab is
will happen at the bound-
ary? (A) 3/4

(A) refraction takes place (B) 1/2

(B) total internal reflection takes (C) 4/3

place (D) 2/3
(C) travel along the boundary 8. Critical angle of diamond is
(D) can’t say
(A) 240
4. The nature of the image
formed by concave mirror (B) 24.40
when the object is placed be- (C) 23.40
tween the focus (F) and cen-
(D) 26.40
tre of curvature (C) of the
mirror observed by us is 9. How many components of
(A) real, inverted and diminished white light?
(B) virtual, erect and smaller in (A) 5
size (B) 6
(C) real, inverted and enlarged (C) 7
(D) virtual, upright and enlarged (D) 8
5. The ratio of sin (x ◦ ) of the 10. A ray of light passes from
angle of incidence to sin (x glass into air. The angle of
◦ ) of the angle of refraction
refraction will be
is
(A) equal to the angle of inci-
(A) Gravitational law dence
(B) Reflection law (B) greater than the angle of inci-
(C) Snell’s law dence
(D) refraction law (C) smaller than the angle of inci-
dence
6. The refractive index of (D) 450
medium 1 relative to
medium 2 is 4/3. Then the 11. Swimming pools and the
refractive index of medium ocean look than they re-
2 relative to medium 1 is ally are due to refraction
(A) 4/3 (A) deeper
(B) 3/4 (B) shallower

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
106 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) wider (C) Change in velocity of light

(D) darker (D) All the above

12. Convex lens is also called 17. Light from the Sun falling on
a convex lens will converge
(A) Converging lens

NARAYAN CHANGDER
at a point called
(B) Diverging lens
(A) centre of curvature
(C) Bifocal lens
(B) focus
(D) Cylindrical lens
(C) radius of curvature
13. The distance between cen- (D) optical centre
tre of curvature and curved
surface is called 18. Refractive index of water is
(A) Focal length (A) 1.44
(B) Radius of curvature (B) 1.00
(C) Diameter (C) 1.5
(D) None of these (D) 1.33

14. Critical angle with in- 19. Light travels at 1.76 EE

crease in temperature of the 8 m/s through an op-
medium tical medium. What
is the medium? dia-
(A) Stays the same mond n=2.45flint glass
(B) Increases n=1.70barium glass n=1.60crown
(C) Decreases glass n=1.523
(A) Crown Glass
(D) Increases then decreases
(B) Barium Glass
(E) None of the above
(C) Flint Glass
15. WHEN A RAY OF LIGHT,
(D) Diamond
PROPAGATING IN 1 TRANS-
PARENT MEDIUM, ENTERS 20. Relative refractive index
ANOTHER TRANSPARENT n21 =
MEDIUM, IT IS OBSERVED TO
(A) n1 / n2
(B) n2 / n1
(A) REFRACTION OF LIGHT
(C) n12 / n21
(B) CONCAVE LENS
(D) c/v
(C) CONVEX LENS
(D) REFLECTION 21. While passing from one
medium to the other if
16. Cause of refraction is light speeds up the second
(A) Change in speed of light medium is said to be

(B) Change in distance travelled (A) Optically rarer

by light (B) Optically denser

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 107

(C) None of the above (B) The speed decreases and the
(D) none of above frequency remains the same
(C) The speed increases and the
22. The refractive index of a frequency increases
medium is generally defined
(D) The speed increases and the
with respect to vacuum and
frequency remains the same
is called
(A) Refraction of light 27. Which of the following is
value of 1 micrometer?
(B) Absolute refractive index
(A) 10-8 m
(C) Total internal reflection
(B) 10-4 m
(D) Angle of deviation
(C) 10-9 m
23. Paraxial rays are those
(D) 10-6 m
which pass
(A) through centre of curvature 28. Lateral displacement is NOT
dependent of which of the
(B) through focus following factors
(C) close to principal axis (A) Thickness of the medium
(D) All of the above (B) Wavelength of light
24. The brilliance of diamond is (C) Colour of light
due to (D) Intensity of light
(A) Reflection (E) Refractive index
(B) Refraction
29. In order for a rainbow
(C) Interference to form, which two are
(D) Total internal reflection the most important factors?
(mark 2)
25. When light travels from air
(A) Refraction of light
into water, the light bends
(B) Reflection of light
(A) towards the normal line (C) Transparency
(B) away the normal line (D) Partial reflection
(C) perpendicular to the normal 30. Refraction is when light
line
(A) Is bounced by an object or ma-
(D) in an odd shape terial.

26. What happens to the speed (B) Changes speed as it travels in

and frequency of a light ray different materials which causes
when it passes from air into bending.
water? (C) When light speeds up to over
(A) The speed decreases and the 300, 000 km/s
frequency increases (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
108 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

31. Which of the following has (A) The image size is dimin-
the highest refractive in- ished(smaller) than the object
dex?
(B) The image size is magnified
(A) Glass than the object size
(B) Water

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) The image is not formed
(C) Kerosen (D) The image is same size as the
(D) Diamond object size

32. The refractive index of a 37. A single reflection of sound

denser medium with respect is called a(n) , multiple
to a rarer medium is echos are referred to as
(A) 1 (A) reverberation / echos
(B) greater than 1 (B) echo / reverberations
(C) smaller than 1 (C) refraction / reflection
(D) negative (D) reflection / refraction
33. THE INITIAL RAY, FALLING
38. The unit of refractive index
ON A GLASS SLAB, IS
is
KNOWN AS THE
(A) m/s
(A) INCIDENT RAY
(B) REFRACTED RAY (B) m/s2

(C) EMERGENT RAY (C) kg/m3

(D) QUESTION IS WRONG (D) no unit

34. Refractive Index of Ruby 39. Critical angle is the angle of

(A) 1.72 incidence that produces an
angle of refraction at
(B) 1.71
(A) 180 degrees
(C) 1.81
(B) 90 degrees
(D) 1.55
(C) 20 degrees
35. When angle of incidence is
(D) 120 degrees
equal to critical angle, angle
of refraction is equal to 40. When a light ray trav-
(A) 00 els from denser medium to
(B) 900 rarer medium, the refracted
ray from normal.
(C) 450
(A) moves towards
(D) 300
(B) bends away
36. An absolute value of magni-
(C) passes along the normal
fication M is less than 1, in-
dicates that (D) None of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 109

41. when light travels from 46. The quantity which does not
rarer medium to denser changes during refraction is
medium it bends
(A) direction
(A) away from the normal (B) speed
(B) towards the normal (C) frequency
(C) doesnt change direction (D) wavelength
(D) travels at 1800
47. When object moves closer
42. The formula to calculate the to convex lens, the image
refractive index is(c = speed formed by it shift
in vacuum, v = speed in (A) away from the lens
medium)
(B) towards the lens
(A) n=cv
(C) first towards and then away
(B) n=v/c from the lens
(C) n=c/v (D) first away and then towards
(D) v=nc the lens

48. When white light enters a

43. micrometer =
glass prism from air, the an-
(A) 10-8 m gle of deviation is least for
(B) 10-4 m (A) blue light
(C) 10-9 m (B) yellow light
(D) 10-6 m (C) red light
(D) violet light
44. Which of the following is
the value of ‘Sin C’, if ‘C’ is 49. A convex lens is-
the critical angle, then ‘r’ be-
comes 900? (A) Thicker at the middle thinner
at the edges
(A) n1/n2
(B) Thicker at the edges thinner at
(B) n2/n1 the middle
(C) n1 (C) Uniform thickness everywhere
(D) n2 (D) none of above

45. which color has least refrac- 50. Brilliance of diamond is due
tive index? to
(A) blue (A) Refraction
(B) red (B) Reflection
(C) yellow (C) Interference
(D) none of above (D) Total internal reflection

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
110 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

51. The ratio of sin i (angle of (A) Reflection

incidence) to sin r (angle of (B) Refraction
refraction) is
(C) Critical angle
(A) Gravitational law
(D) None of these
(B) Reflection law

NARAYAN CHANGDER
56. What do we call this tool
(C) Snell’s law that separates white light
(D) refraction law into the colors of the Visible
Spectrum?
52. A small air bubble in a
glass block when seen from (A) prism
above appears to be raised (B) cylinder
because of (C) microscope
(A) refraction of light (D) Stethoscope
(B) reflection of light 57. The S.I. unit of refractive in-
(C) reflection and refraction of dex is
light (A) m-1
(D) none of the above (B) ms-1
53. A:the diamond shines due (C) s-1
to Total internal reflec- (D) no unit
tion.R:the critical angle for
diamond is 24.40 58. What is the power of a
concave lens of focal length
(A) Both A and R are true; and R 2m?
is correct explanation of A
(A) +0.5 D
(B) Both A and R are true;but R is
(B) -0.5 D
not correct explanation of A
(C) +1.0 D
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) -1.0 D
(D) A is false and R is true
59. The distance between the
54. Atmospheric refraction of focal point and pole is
light rays is responsible for
(A) Radius of curvature
which of the following ef-
fects? (B) Chord
(A) spherical abberation (C) Focal length
(B) mirages (D) None of these

(C) chromatic abberation 60. What does it mean to re-

fract?
(D) total internal reflection in a
gemstone (A) bounce off
(B) to bend
55. Which of the following is a
result of change in speed of (C) curve outward
light at the interface? (D) reflect

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 111

61. A spherical mirror and a (A) Is refracted towards the nor-

thin spherical lens have fo- mal
cal length of-20 cm. The mir-
(B) Is refracted away from the nor-
ror and lens will be:
mal
(A) both concave
(C) Goes along the boundary
(B) mirror is concave and lens is
convex (D) Does not get refracted
(C) both convex
66. The net deviation produced
(D) mirror is convex and lens is by a rectangular glass slab
concave is
62. Which device uses total in- (A) equal to angle of incidence
ternal reflection?
(B) greater than angle of inci-
(A) magnifying glass dence
(B) optical fibre (C) less than angle of incidence
(C) photographic enlarger
(D) zero always
(D) projector
67. What form does light travel
63. If the angle of incidence of in?
light traveling through air,
and then striking water is (A) Curved line
30 degrees what is the an-
(B) Zig-Zag
gle of refraction? (n=1 air,
n=1.33 water) (C) Straight Line
(A) 15 degrees (D) none of above
(B) 22 degrees
68. Twinkling of stars is due to
(C) 43 degrees
(A) Total Internal Reflection
(D) 17 degrees
(B) Dispersion
64. Which prism deviates a
light ray through less than (C) Scattering
60o (D) Atmospheric Refraction
(A) Equilateral prism
(B) Total reflecting prism 69. A ray passing through
of a convex lens will take a
(C) Right angled prism path parallel to the principal
(D) Right angled isosceles prism axis after refraction.
(E) All of the above (A) centre of curvature
65. A ray of light is travel- (B) focus
ling from a denser to rarer
(C) pole
medium along a normal
boundary: (D) parallel to principal axis

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
112 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

70. Light emerging from water (C) n/Sin C = 1

to air will bend due to (D) none
the change of speed as it
crosses the boundary. 75. One cannot see through the
(A) toward the normal fog, because

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) away from the normal (A) refractive index of the fog is
very high
(C) not at all
(B) light suffers total reflection at
(D) none of above droplets
71. If light travels through a (C) fog absorbs light
piece of glass at 2.1 x 108 (D) light is scattered by the
m/s, what is the index of re- droplets
fraction of the glass?
(A) 1.14 76. Which of the following are
true of images formed by a
(B) 1.43 plane (flat) mirror? (mark
(C) 2.10 all which are correct!)
(D) 6.3 (A) They are virtual images.
(B) They are upright images
72. Unit of refractive index
(C) The images appear the same
(A) m
distance behind the mirror as the
(B) mgh object is in front.
(C) J (D) They are inverted images
(D) None
77. Which of the following de-
73. Refraction is the phe- scribes what will happen
nomenon when light to a light ray incident on
a glass-to-air boundary at
(A) is bounced by an object or ma- greater than the critical an-
terial. gle?
(B) changes speed as it travels (A) total internal reflection
in different medium which causes
bending. (B) total external transmission
(C) When light travels in a straight (C) partial reflection, partial trans-
line in the dark. mission
(D) is blocked by an object or ma- (D) partial reflection, total trans-
terial. mission

74. the relation between critical 78. When light travels from a
angle and refractive index rarer to denser medium, the
of the medium is speed of light , refracted
ray the normal, the angle
(A) n = Sin C of incidence is the angle
(B) n = 1/Sin C of refraction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 113

(A) decreases, bends toward, (A) yellow

greater than (B) red
(B) increases, bends toward, (C) violet
greater than
(D) white
(C) decreases, bends away, less
than 83. Under minimum deviation,
(D) none of above which of the following does
NOT occur?
79. The refractive index of (A) r1 = r2
glass with respect to air is
3/2 and the refractive index (B) i1= i2
of water with respect to air (C) The refracted ray(inside the
is 4/3. The refractive index prism) is parallel to the base
of glass with respect to wa- (D) The incident ray and emer-
ter will be: gent ray are parallel
(A) 1.525 (E) none of the above
(B) 1.225
84. An object is placed at a dis-
(C) 1.425 tance of 0.25 min front of a
(D) 1.125 plane mirror. The distance
between the object and im-
80. The refracted ray moves age will be
towards the normal. So
the light ray is propogating (A) 0.25m
from to (B) 1m
(A) denser, rarer (C) 0.5m
(B) rarer, denser (D) 0.125m
(C) rarer, rarer 85. When light ray travels from
(D) denser, denser denser medium to rarer
medium, the relation be-
81. The absolute refractive in- tween ∠i and ∠r
dex of water and glass re-
spectively are 4/3 and 3/2. (A) ∠i = ∠r
Then the relative refractive (B) ∠i < ∠r
index of glass with respect (C) ∠i > ∠r
to water is
(D) no relation between them
(A) 2
(B) 9/8 86. A ray of light passes from
air into carbon disulfide (n =
(C) 8/9 1.63) at an angle of 28.0◦ to
(D) 17/6 the normal. What is the an-
gle of refraction?
82. Which colour of light travels
fastest in any medium ex- (A) 20.250
cept air? (B) 180

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
114 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) 140 92. The line joining centre of

(D) 16.730 curvature and pole is called

87. When light passes at an

(A) Optical axis
angle to the normal from

NARAYAN CHANGDER
one medium into another in (B) Principal axis
which its speed is higher
(C) X-axis
(A) it is bent toward the normal.
(D) Y-axis
(B) it always lies along the nor-
mal.
93. A doctor has prescribed
(C) it is unaffected. a corrective lens of power
(D) it is bent away from the nor- +1.5D. The prescribed lens is
mal. (A) Diverging lens
88. Refractive index of water is (B) Converging lens
(C) Concave lens
(A) 1.0003
(B) 1.31 (D) A type of medicine

(C) 1.33 94. The nature of image formed

(D) 1.44 by a convex mirror when
the object distance from the
89. Speed of Light mirror is less than the dis-
(A) 2 x 109 m/s tance between pole and fo-
cal point (F) of the mirror
(B) 3 x 108 m/s
would be
(C) 3 x 109 m/s
(A) real, inverted and diminished
(D) none of above in size
90. Refractive index depends (B) real, inverted and enlarged in
on following factors size
(A) Nature of material (C) virtual, upright and dimin-
(B) Wave length of light used ished in size
(C) Both (D) virtual, upright and enlarged
(D) None of the above in size

91. Mirages are an example for 95. The speed of light in air is:
(A) 3x108 cm/s
(A) critical angle
(B) total internal reflection (B) 3x108 mm/s

(C) refraction (C) 3x108 km/s

(D) multiple reflection (D) 3x108 m/s

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 115

96. When an object is kept be- (B) parallel to principal axis

tween optical centre (O) &
(C) parallel rays making some an-
focus F1 of a convex lens
gle with principal axis
then the position & nature of
image is: (D) through centre of curvature
(A) At infinity & Real lnverted
101. Thanks to this physics phe-
(B) At 2F2 & Virtual errect nomenon, we can read print
(C) On the same of object & Vir- on the paper from any direc-
tual errect tion and we can see lines on
the highway from any direc-
(D) Between 2F2 & Infinity & Real tion.
Inverted
(A) refraction
97. Which of the following is
the reason for twinkling of (B) diffuse reflection
stars? (C) secular reflection
(A) Reflection (D) optical echo
(B) Total internal reflection
102. The factor on which refrac-
(C) Refractive index tive index does not depend
(D) Random refraction

98. A beam of parallel rays af- (A) nature of the material

ter falling obliquely on a (B) wavelength
plane refracting surface
(C) density of the material
(A) diverges
(D) none of these
(B) converges
(C) remains parallel but gets devi- 103. In optics an object which
ated has higher refractive index
(D) remains parallel without any is called
deviation (A) Optically rarer
99. In any medium in which the (B) Optically denser
velocity is comparatively is (C) Optical density
more then the medium is
(D) Refractive index
(A) Denser
(B) Rarer 104. If angle of incidence in-
(C) Both creases, then angle of emer-
gent
(D) None
(A) increases
100. Rays incident on di-
(B) decreases
verges from a focal plane of
concave lens. (C) no change
(A) focus (D) can’t say

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
116 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

105. THE RADII OF THE 2 110. The broad wavelength

SPHERES, OF WHICH THE range of visible spectrum
LENS SURFACES ARE A PART is-The broad wavelength
OF range of visible spectrum is
(A) RADII (A) (10000-20000) A

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) RADII OF LENS (B) (4000-7000) A
(C) RADII OF PRINCIPLE (C) (2000-4000) A
(D) RADII OF CURVATURE (D) None of these
106. Formula of snells law 111. The laws of reflection hold
(A) Sin i /sin r = constant good for
(B) n2/n1 (A) PLANE MIRROR
(C) Both (B) CONVEX MIRROR
(D) None (C) CONCAVE MIRROR
107. Light travelling from a (D) ALL OF THE ABOVE
denser medium to rarer
medium along a normal to 112. When light passes from
the boundary a denser medium to rarer
medium it bends
(A) is reflected towards the nor-
mal (A) Towards normal
(B) is reflected away from the nor- (B) Away from normal
mal (C) Goes undeviated
(C) goes along the boundary (D) Depends upon medium
(D) is not refracted
113. A light ray does not bend
108. The light follows which at a boundary between two
law during refraction? media of different optical
(A) Fermat’s law densities, if its angle of inci-
dence is
(B) Refractive index
(A) 180o
(C) Total internal reflection
(D) Snell’s law (B) 45o
(C) 0o
109. When light enters from
rarer to denser then re- (D) 90o
fracted ray bends towards
114. The image formed by con-
the normal then angle i
cave mirror is real, inverted
angle r
and of the same size as that
(A) Lessthan of the object. The position of
(B) Greaterthan object should be
(C) Equal (A) at the focus
(D) None (B) at the centre of curvature

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 117

(C) between focus and centre of 119. Absolute refractive index,

curvature n=
(D) beyond centre of curvature (A) c/v
(B) v/c
115. Image formed in a photo-
graphic camera is (C) 1/c

(A) virtual and diminished (D) 1/v

(B) real and magnified 120. Effect of refraction of light

on frequency
(C) real and diminished
(A) Increases
(D) sometimes real and some-
times virtual (B) Decreases
(C) Does not change
116. Refractive index of a
medium depends on (D) None

(A) Nature of the medium 121. When an object is placed

at principal focus, the image
(B) Physical condition
formed due to convex lens is
(C) Colour or wavelength of light
(D) All the above (A) enlarged
(B) diminished
117. A ray of light of wave-
length 5400 A◦ suffers re- (C) highly enlarged
fraction from air to glass. (D) point sized
The refractive index of glass
with respect to air is 3/2 find 122. Angle of incidence is an-
the wavelength of light in gle of refraction.
glass. (A) equal to
(A) 3500 A◦ (B) not equal to
(B) 3800 A◦ (C) always greater than
(C) 3600 A◦ (D) always lesser than
(D) 5200 A◦
123. Laws of Refraction were
given by
118. When the angle of refrac-
tion is 900 the angle of inci- (A) Willebrod Snell
dence is called as (B) Albert Einstein
(A) Angle of incidence (C) Newton
(B) Critical angle (D) Aristotle
(C) Angle of total internal reflec-
124. THE ANGLE, BETWEEN THE
tion
INCIDENT RAY AND THE
(D) Angle of refraction NORMAL AT THE POINT OF

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
118 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

INCIDENCE IS KNOWN AS (C) 4.2

(D) 3.75
(A) ANGLE OF INCIDENCE
(B) ANGLE OF REFRACTION 129. In an experiment to trace
the path of a ray of light

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) PRISM through a glass prism for
(D) LENS different values of angle of
incidence a student would
125. One half of a convex lens find that the emergent ray:
is covered with black paper.
Will this lens produce a com- (A) is parallel to the refracted ray
plete image of the object? (B) is parallel to the incident ray
(A) Yes
(C) bends at an angle to the direc-
(B) No tion of incident ray
(C) Only half image will be (D) none of above
formed
(D) Depends upon the size of the 130. Refractive index of glass is
object 3/2. Then the speed of light
in glass is
126. While passing from one
medium to the other if (A) 3 x 108 m/s
light slows down the second (B) 2 x 107 m/s
medium is said to be
(C) 3 x 106 m/s
(A) Optically rarer
(D) 2 x 108 m/s
(B) Optically denser
(C) None of the above 131. When white light enters a
(D) none of above glass prism from air, the an-
gle of deviation is maximum
127. Light travels through a liq- for
uid at 2.25x108ms-1. What
(A) blue light
is the index of the liquid?
(A) 1.33 (B) yellow light

(B) 1.0 (C) red light

(C) 1.523 (D) violet light
(D) 2.45
132. The type of mirror used
128. The speed of light in sub- in reflector in automobile
stance X is 1.25x108 m/s lights is
and that in air is 3x108 m/s. (A) Plane mirror
The refractive index of this
substance will be: (B) Concave mirror
(A) 2.4 (C) Convex mirror
(B) 0.4 (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 119

133. angle of incidence is criti- (C) 3.0 x 108 m/s

cal angle when angle of re- (D) 1.3 x 108 m/s
fraction is
(A) 45 138. The speed of light in vac-
uum is 3x108m/s. its speed
(B) 60 in ruby of index of refrac-
(C) 90 tion 1.54 is
(D) 0 (A) 1.95 x 108m/s
(B) 5.1 x 10-9m/s
134. If convex lens is placed in
water, its focal length (C) 4.62 x 108m/s
(A) increases (D) none of above
(B) decreases 139. Light travels through a liq-
(C) remains constant uid at 1.4x108 m/s. What
is the liquid’s index of refrac-
(D) none of these tion?
135. In any medium in which (A) 2.14
the velocity is comparatively (B) 2.50
is less then it is medium
(C) 1.78
(A) Denser
(D) 3.31
(B) Rarer
140. The refractive index of
(C) Both
transparent medium is
(D) None greater than one because

136. A boy uses blue colour of (A) Speed of light in vacuum

light to find the refractive in- < speed of light in tansparent
dex of glass. He then re- medium
peats the experiment using (B) Speed of light in vacuum
red colour of light.How will > speed of light in tansparent
the refractive index of glass medium
be? (C) Speed flight in vacuum =
(A) the same speed of light in tansparent
medium
(B) µ decreases
(D) Frequency of light wave
(C) µ increases
changes when it moves from rarer
(D) same as speed of light to denser medium
137. If a material has an index 141. Light passing from air to
of refraction of 2.3, how glass will bend due to
fast will light travel through the change of speed as it
that material? crosses the boundary.
(A) 2.3 x 108 m/s (A) toward the normal
(B) 6.9 x 108 m/s (B) away from the normal

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
120 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) not at all (B) Concave-positiveConvex-

(D) none of above negative
(C) Both-positive
142. What causes refraction?
(A) A rigid boundary which (D) Both-negative

NARAYAN CHANGDER
causes the wave to bounce back.
147. Refractive indices of wa-
(B) The change of speed of the
ter, sulphuric acid, glass
light as it travels from one medium
and carbon disulphide are
to another.
1.33, 1.43, 1.53, 1.63. The
(C) Multiple reflections of sound. light travels slowest in
(D) more than one reflection (A) Sulphuric acid
143. Why is a total reflect- (B) Glass
ing prism preferred over a
plane mirror (C) Water
(A) There is no loss in intensity of (D) Carbon disulphide
the light after reflection
(B) Only reflection takes place 148. Speed of light of a medium
depends upon of the
(C) No light is absorbed/ re- medium.
flected
(A) Optical density
(D) All of the above
(B) Material
144. Light passing from air to
glass will cause the light to (C) Length
(A) maintain its original speed (D) Density
(B) accelerate while it is in glass
149. Refractive index of a
(C) increase its speed medium doesn’t depend on
(D) reduce its speed

145. What action of prism is (A) Nature of the material

used in a binocular?
(B) Wavelength of incident light
(A) Deviation through 90o
(C) Frequency of incident light
(B) Inversion of prism without de-
viation (D) All of the above
(C) Deviation through 60o
150. The refractive index of wa-
(D) Deviation through 180o ter is:
(E) None of the above
(A) 1.33
146. What is the sign of power (B) 1.50
of a lens
(C) 2.42
(A) Convex-positiveConcave-
negative (D) 1.36

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 121

151. When a ray of light trav- 156. Refractive Index of sap-

els from a rarer medium to phire
a denser medium it (A) 1.77
(A) Bends away from the normal (B) 1.72
(B) Passes undeviated (C) 1.73
(C) Bends towards the normal (D) 1.88
(D) None
157. A concave lens always
152. Refractive√ index of a produces:
medium is 2, then its crit- (A) Real Inverted & Enlarged Im-
ical angle is age
(A) 220 (B) Virtual Erect & diminished im-
(B) 450 age
(C) 600 (C) Real Inverted & diminished im-
(D) 150 age
(D) Virtual Erect & Enlarged im-
153. When a ray of light travels age
from a denser medium to a
rarer medium it 158. Which of the following
(A) Bends towards the normal lenses would you prefer
to use while reading small
(B) Bends away from the normal found in a dictionary?
(C) Passes undeviated (A) A convex length of focal
(D) None length 50cm
154. When light falls on a (B) A concave lens of focal length
smooth polished surface, 50cm
most of it (C) A convex lens of focal length
(A) is reflected in the same direc- 5cm
tion (D) A concave lens of focal length
(B) is reflected in different direc- 5cm
tions 159. Why are mirages more
(C) is scattered likely to occur in summer
(D) is refracted into the second than in winter?
medium (A) The Sun is higher in the sky in
summer.
155. Light travels through a liq-
uid at 2.25 EE 8 m/s. What (B) The air in the summer is more
is the index of the liquid? likely to be hot near the ground

(A) 1.33 (C) Air currents travel in different

directions in winter and in sum-
(B) 1.0 mer.
(C) 1.523 (D) The Sun is brighter in summer
(D) 2.45 than in winter

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
122 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

160. For light to pass from (C) when one medium is glass
medium (1) of index n1 to and air
medium (2) of index n2 (D) none
where n2 < n1, the angle
of incidence must be than 165. When object moves closer

NARAYAN CHANGDER
the refracted angle. to a concave lens the image
(A) greater by it shift
(B) smaller (A) away from the lens on the
same side of object
(C) equal
(B) toward the lens
(D) none of above
(C) away from the lens on the
161. Refractive Index (n)= other side of lens
(A) n=v/c (D) first towards and then away
(B) n=c/v from the lens
(C) n=c.v 166. What happens to the
(D) n=c+v speed of a light ray when
it passes from air into wa-
162. The process of changing ter?
speed when light travels
(A) The speed increases
from one medium to an-
other is called (B) The speed decreases
(A) Reflection (C) The speed remains the same
(B) Refraction (D) none of above
(C) Diffraction 167. Which quantity is equiva-
(D) Interface lent to the product of the ab-
solute index of refraction of
163. When angle of incident (i) water and the speed of light
equals to critical angle (c), in water?
if light is traveled from a
(A) wavelength of light in a vac-
denser medium to a rarer
uum
medium, then
(B) frequency of light in water
(A) total internal reflection occurs.
(C) sine of the angle of incidence
(B) angle of refraction is equal to
900 (D) speed of light in a vacuum
(C) light is refracted out 168. The refractive index of a
(D) light travel in straight line glass prism is 1.9. Deter-
mine its critical angle.
164. what is absolute refractive
index (A) 23o

(A) when one medium is vacuum (B) 30o

(B) when one medium is water (C) 32◦

and other is glass (D) 35o

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 123

169. What makes objects visi- (C) GLASS PRISM

ble? (D) LENS
(A) the absorption of light by ob-
jects 174. The number of telephone
signals transmitted through
(B) the reflected light from the ob- optical fibre is
ject
(A) 4000
(C) the total internal reflection tak-
ing place in an object (B) 3000

(D) none of above (C) 2000

(D) 1000
170. The bending of light as it
moves from one transparent 175. Name the factors that af-
material to another fect the lateral displacement
(A) reflection of light as it passes through
a rectangular glass slab.
(B) refraction
(A) thickness of block
(C) spectrum
(B) angle of incidence
(D) pitch
(C) refractive index of glass
171. The midpoint of lens is (D) wavelenght of light
called
(A) Centre of curvature 176. If refractive index of
a medium increases, the
(B) Optical centre speed of light in that
(C) Centroid medium
(D) Orthocentre (A) increases

172. A ray of light travelling in (B) decreases

air goes into water. The an- (C) does not change
gle of refraction will be: (D) none of these
(A) 90o
177. Can you take the photo of
(B) Smaller than the angle of inci- a mirage?
dence
(A) no
(C) Equal to the angle of inci-
dence (B) yes

(D) Greater than the angle of inci- (C) some times

dence (D) can’t say

173. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN 178. A concave mirror of radius

THE OPTICAL CENTRE AND 30 cm is placed in water. It’s
PRINCIPAL FOCUS OF THE focal length in air and water
LENS IS KNOWN AS differ by
(A) CONCAVE LENS (A) 15
(B) CONVEX LENS (B) 20

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
124 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) 30 (B) Wavelength

(D) 0 (C) Frequency
179. Which of the following is a (D) Intensity
natural phenomenon which

NARAYAN CHANGDER
is caused by the dispersion 184. In a glass slab, refraction
of sunlight in the sky? takes place times.
(A) Twinkling of stars (A) 1
(B) Stars seem higher than they (B) 2
actually are
(C) 3
(C) Rainbow
(D) 4
(D) Advanced sunrise and de-
layed sunset 185. The critical angle of dia-
mond is
180. Mirages are
(A) virtual image (A) 24.40
(B) real image (B) 25.40
(C) virtual image of the sky (C) 26.40
(D) secret of nature (D) 27.40
181. Which is more optical 186. A total reflecting prism is
denser medium preferred over a plane mir-
(A) Cold air ror in which of the follow-
(B) Hot air ing?

(C) Both cold and hot air have (A) A periscope

same optical density (B) A binocular
(D) Can’t say (C) A camera
182. Which statement describes (D) All of the above
monochromatic light?
(E) None of the above
(A) light that does not diffract
(B) light that has a single fre- 187. Suppose you are inside
quency the water in a swimming
pool, your friend is stand-
(C) light that spreads out when
ing on the edge of the swim-
shone through a glass prism
ming pool. Your friend ap-
(D) light that travels at the same pears to be
speed in all materials
(A) Shorter
183. Which one of the follow- (B) Taller
ing characteristics of light is
not altered by refraction? (C) Same size
(A) Speed (D) Stout

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 125

188. The separation of white 192. Which of the two-glass

light into its component col- and water is optically
ors is known as: denser?
(A) polarization (A) glass
(B) refraction (B) Water
(C) reflection (C) Both
(D) dispersion (D) None

189. Light travels through a liq- 193. The basic of refraction is

uid at a speed 2.25 x 108
m/s. What is the refractive (A) when light is incident on a
index of the liquid? boundary
(A) 1.33 (B) when refractive indices of two
media are equal
(B) 1.0
(C) change in speed of light is go-
(C) 1.523
ing form one medium to another
(D) 2.45
(D) when refractive indices of two
190. Why is the component of media are not equal
colour in a rainbow can 194. A ray of light traveling
be seen when light passes from air into glass strikes
through a glass prism? the surface at an angle of
(A) phenomena of scattering of 30◦ with the surface. What
light is the angle of refraction?
(air n=1, glass n=1.5)
(B) phenomena of dispersion of
light (A) 19.2◦
(C) phenomena of reflection of (B) 35.2◦
light (C) 19.26◦
(D) phenomena of diffraction of (D) 20◦
light
195. The distance between in-
191. A ray of light traveling cident and emergent ray is
from air into crown glass called
strikes the surface at an an-
(A) Horizontal Shift
gle of 30 degrees. What is
the angle of refraction? (air (B) Vertical Shift
n=1, crown glass n=1.532) (C) Lateral Shift
(A) 39.7 degrees (D) None of these
(B) 19.2 degrees
196. Angle of deviation is
(C) 59.1 degrees
(A) angle by which incident ray
(D) 12.3 degrees deviates through prism

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
126 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Angle between the incident ray 201. The angle of refraction for
and the emergent ray is called the critical angle is
angle of deviation. (A) 450
(C) angle between incident ray (B) 600
and the normal

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 900
(D) angle between incident ray
and refracted ray (D) 1200

197. THE CENTRES, OF THE 202. The air bubbles in water

2 SPHERES OF WHICH behaves like lens.
THE 2 SURFACES OF THE (A) concave
GIVEN LENS, ARE A PART IS
(B) convex
KNOWN AS
(C) concavo convex
(A) CENTRES OF PRINCIPLE
(D) bi-convex
(B) CENTRES OF RADII
(C) CENTRES OF CURVATURE 203. Which of the following
(D) CENTRES OF LENS best describes what hap-
pens to an incident ray
198. A convex mirror of light on a glass-to-air
(A) Curves inwards boundary at an angle
greater than the critical an-
(B) Curves outwards gle?
(C) Curves sideways (A) Partial reflection, total trans-
(D) Curves in multiple directions mission

199. The line joining the centre (B) Total internal reflection
of curvature and the pole is (C) Partial reflection, partial trans-
called mission
(A) Optical axis (D) Total external transmission
(B) Principal axis
204. Refractive index of glass
(C) X-axis
(A) 1.33
(D) Y-axis
(B) 1.5
200. When will total internal re- (C) 1.7
flection occur?
(D) 31
(A) When light travels from a less
dense to a more dense medium 205. The angle of incidence i
(B) When the angle of incidence is and refraction r are equal in
smaller than the critical angle a transparent slab when the
value of i is
(C) When the angle of incidence
is greater than the critical angle (A) 00

(D) When the light cannot pass (B) 450

through a medium (C) 900

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 127

(D) depend on the material of the (B) Image-Virtual & errect

slab (C) Image-Real & errect
206. A magnified real image is (D) Image-Virtual & Inverted
formed by a convex lens
when the object is at 211. refraction index is depend
on
(A) F
(A) Sin i / sin r
(B) between F and 2F
(B) Sin r / sin i
(C) 2F
(C) 1 / sin r
(D) (a) and (b) both
(D) 1 / Sin i
207. When there is a refraction
through a rectangular glass 212. Reason for twinkling of
slab then, the extended in- stars in the sky is
cident ray & emergent ray (A) Distance
are:
(B) Different densities in air
(A) Perpendicular to each other
(C) Refraction of light from stars
(B) Intersect each other
(D) All of the above
(C) Make angle 45◦ with each
other 213. Refractive index of a trans-
(D) Parallel to each other parent medium is always
(A) Lesser than 1
208. What is the speed of light
in a material that has an in- (B) Greater than 1
dex of refraction of 1.88? (C) Equal to 1
(A) 3.0 x 108 m/s (D) None
(B) 1.88 x 108 m/s 214. Which of the following is
(C) 1.6 x 108 m/s not a condition for total in-
(D) 5.64 x 108 m/s ternal reflection
(A) The light ray must pass from a
209. A TRANSPARENT MEDIUM, denser to rarer medium
BOUNDED BY 2 SURFACES,
OH WHICH AT LEAST 1 IS (B) The angle of incidence must
SPHERICAL IS KNOWN AS be greater than critical angle

(A) FOCAL LENGTH (C) The striking of light must hap-

pen at the hypotenuse of the prism
(B) LENS
(D) none of the above
(C) GLASS PRISM
(D) CONVEX LENS 215. When light passes from
one medium into another,
210. What is the significance of refraction occurs. This is be-
+ve sign of magnification? cause of
(A) Image-Real & Inverted (A) reflection of light.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
128 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) a change in color of the light. (C) water

(C) a change in velocity of the (D) a diamond
light.
221. The ratio of the speed of
(D) the absorption of light.
light in vacuum to the speed

NARAYAN CHANGDER
216. The ray which passes of light in that medium is
through is undeviated. called
(A) Focus (A) Refractive index
(B) Pole (B) Refraction
(C) Centre of curvature (C) Absolute refractive index
(D) None of these (D) Reflection

217. Refraction is the change in 222. What direction does the

of light when light travels ray bend when entering a
through two medium of dif- more optically dense mate-
ferent densities rial, where the wave travels
(A) direction more slowly?

(B) illustions (A) Towards the normal.

(C) situation (B) Away from the normal.

(D) densities (C) No change.
(D) Answer is not listed above.
218. Twinkling of stars is due to
atmospheric 223. A ray of light is incident on
(A) refraction of light by different one of the parallel faces of
layers of refractive indices. a rectangular glass slab. It
emerges out of the opposite
(B) dispersion of light.
parallel face making angle
(C) internal refraction by clouds of emergence
(D) none of above (A) equal to angle of incidence
219. How is light affected by an (B) greater than angle of inci-
increase in the refractive in- dence
dex? (C) smaller than angle of inci-
(A) Its frequency increases dence
(B) Its frequency decreases (D) equal to zero
(C) Its speed increases 224. When white light enters a
(D) Its speed decreases prism, it gets split into its
constituent colours. This is
220. A beam of light travels due to
fastest in
(A) different refractive index for
(A) a vacuum different wavelength of each
(B) air colour

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 129

(B) each colours has same veloc- 229. In dispersion the splitting
ity in the prism. of white light into colours
(C) prism material have high den- (A) 8
sity.
(B) 6
(D) Scattering of light
(C) 9
225. The refractive index of a (D) 7
medium is greater than 1.
Then the velocity of light in 230. Virtual images of distant
that medium is high objects cause optical il-
(A) greater than the velocity of lusion called
light in vacuum (A) Density
(B) less than the velocity of light in (B) Refraction
vacuum
(C) Total internal reflection
(C) equal to the velocity of light in
(D) Mirage
vacuum
(D) None of these 231. A ray of light is traveling
in a direction perpendicular
226. Applications of total inter- to the boundary of a paral-
nal reflection lel glass slab. The ray of
(A) Mirage light:
(B) Refraction (A) Is refracted towards the nor-
(C) OFC mal
(D) 1 and 3 (B) Does not get refracted

227. Twinkling of stars is due to (C) Is reflected along the same

path
(A) Total internal reflection (D) Is refracted away from the nor-
mal
(B) Dispersion
(C) Scattering 232. The parallel rays to princi-
pal axis after refraction con-
(D) Atmospheric refraction
verge at
228. A ray of light travels from (A) Pole
glass to air with an angle of
incidence of 35o. If the crit- (B) Centre of curvature
ical angle is 42o, what will (C) Beyond C
happen at the glass airinter- (D) Focus
face?
(A) refraction take place 233. Net deviation produced by
the glass slab
(B) total internal reflection
(A) 00
(C) light travels along the bound-
ary (B) 900
(D) reflectiontakes place (C) 450

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
130 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(D) depends on the angle of inci- 239. THE LINE JOINING THE
dence CENTRES OF CURVATURE OF
THE 2 SURFACES OF A LENS
234. Light travels in a path. IS KNOWN AS ITS
(A) straight (A) OPTICAL CENTRE

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) cury (B) OPTICAL DENSER
(C) bent (C) PRINCIPAL AXIS
(D) winding (D) RADII

235. Value of The Index of Re- 240. Which medium has maxi-
fraction of Air mum optical density
(A) 1 (A) Glass
(B) 1.33 (B) Diamond
(C) 1.56 (C) Water
(D) none of above (D) Air

236. The relation between re- 241. Which of the following is

fractive index and optical the reason for the formation
density is of mirage?
(A) inversely proportional (A) Reflection
(B) directly propotional (B) Total internal reflection
(C) equal (C) Refraction
(D) no relation (D) Scattering of light

237. Shortest distance between 242. n1 sin i = n2 sin r is called

incident and emergent rays law.
is of the glass slab.
(A) Huygen’s
(A) Virtual shift
(B) Newton’s
(B) Lateral shift
(C) Fermat’s
(C) Parallel shift
(D) Snell’s
(D) Perpendicular shift
243. is used to examine the
238. A convex lens can form inner parts of nose, stomach
by doctors.
(A) Real image only
(A) Stethoscope
(B) Virtual image only
(B) Endoscope
(C) Both Real & Virtual image
(C) Kaledioscope
(D) Depends upon focal length of
the lens (D) Microscope

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 131

244. Lateral displacement de- (C) v1+v2

pends on (D) None
(A) Angle of incidence
249. Refractive index of dia-
(B) Physical condition mond
(C) Thickness of medium (A) 2.45
(D) Refractive index (B) 2.41
245. Which of the following fac- (C) 1.76
tors change as light waves (D) 1.43
pass from one transparent
medium into another? 250. When a ray of light en-
ters from one medium to an-
(A) wavelength and speed
other having different opti-
(B) wavelength and frequency cal densities it bends. bea-
(C) frequency and speed cuse
(D) frequency, speed and wave- (A) of different optical densities
length (B) speed of light changes

246. If the convex lens is placed (C) obstruction of light changes

in water, its focal length is (D) frequency of light changes

251. Where should an object be

(A) increases placed in front of a convex
(B) decreases lens to get a real image of
(C) remains constant the size of the object
(A) At the principal focus of the
(D) either increase or decrease
lens
247. Light is travelling through (B) At twice the focal length
air. The light strikes a glass
(C) At infinity
block at an angle of inci-
dence of 45◦ . The glass (D) Between optical centre of the
has a refractive index of lens & it’s principal focus
1.4.What is the angle of re-
252. is the main reason for
fraction of the light as it en-
brilliance of diamonds
ters the glass?
(A) Total internal reflection
(A) 29o
(B) OFC
(B) 30o
(C) Mirage
(C) 32o
(D) Critical angle
(D) 82o
253. Which of the following is
248. Relative refractive index = an example for Total inter-
(A) v1/v2 nal reflection?
(B) v1.v2 (A) Mirage

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
132 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(B) Brilliance of diamond 258. What is the index of re-

(C) Optical fibre fraction of a refractive liquid
if the angle of incidence in
(D) All of the above the air is 35 degrees and the
angle of refraction is 14 de-
254. The deflection of light

NARAYAN CHANGDER
grees?
by minute particles and
molecules of the atmo- (A) 1.33
sphere in all direction is (B) 2.21
called of light.
(C) 2.37
(A) dispersion
(D) 1.72
(B) scattering
259. What is S.I unit of refrac-
(C) interference tive index
(D) tyndell effect (A) Newton
255. Object should be placed (B) Joule
at a distance of from (C) m/s
the convex lens whose focal
length is 5 cm to get a real (D) No unit
image.
260. The angle made by the
(A) Approximately 10 cm incident ray and normal
(B) Above 5 cm drown at the point of inci-
dence is called
(C) Below 10 cm
(A) Refracted angle
(D) Not sure
(B) Reflected angle
256. The angle of deviation pro- (C) Incident angle
duced by glass slab i s
(D) None of the above
(A) 00
261. Concave lens is also called
(B) 200
(A) Converging lens
(C) 300
(B) Diverging lens
(D) 900
(C) Bifocal lens
257. As the ray of light passes (D) Cylindrical lens
from air to glass, state
how the wavelength of light 262. The point at which the in-
changes. cident ray touches the plane
(A) wavelength increases is called

(B) wavelength decreases (A) Refracted point

(C) wavelength remains constant (B) Reflected point

(D) wavelength decreases and (C) Incident point

then increases (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 133

263. The separation of light into (C) decreased wavelength

its individual frequencies is (D) both (b) and (c)
(A) refraction
269. A concave mirror
(B) reflection
(A) Curves inwards
(C) transparency
(B) Curves outwards
(D) dispersion
(C) Curves sideways
264. Which color of light is most (D) Curves in multiple directions
refracted during dispersion
by a prism and why? 270. A lens is bounded by two
spherical surfaces inward is
(A) red and µ violet > µ red
called
(B) yellow and µ yellow > µ red
(A) plane convex lens
(C) green and µ violet > µ green
(B) plane concave lens
(D) violet and µ violet > µ red (C) double convex lens
265. Which of the following fac- (D) double concave lens
tors change when light re-
fracts? 271. The air layer of atmo-
sphere whose temperature
(A) Frequency only is less then the hot layer be-
(B) Wavelength only have as optically
(C) Speed and frequency (A) denser medium
(D) Wavelength and speed (B) rarer medium

266. of air increases with (C) inactive medium

density (D) either denser or rarer medium
(A) Refractive Index 272. Angle of deviation does
(B) OFC not depend on
(C) Total internal reflection (A) frequency of light
(D) None (B) angle of incidence
(C) angle of prism
267. Optical fibres work on
(D) none of above
(A) Reflection
(B) Refraction 273. choose the conditions
where light does not bend
(C) Total internal reflection
when entering a medium of
(D) Multiple reflections different optical density,
268. As light travels from a (A) incident ray is normal to the re-
rarer to a denser medium it fracting surface
will have (B) any obliquely incident ray
(A) increased velocity (C) angle of incidence is 90◦
(B) decreased velocity (D) angle of incidence is 0◦

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
134 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

274. The critical angle for the (C) water

glass-air interface is- (D) a diamond
(A) 45o
279. The lens formula is
(B) 32o
(A) 1/v + 1/u = 1/f

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 42o
(B) 1/v-1/u = 1/f
(D) None of the above (C) 1/u-1/v = 1/f
275. If a pulse of red light and (D) 1/v + 1/u = 1/R
a pulse of blue light travel in
280. If angle of incidence is
vacuum
greater than critical angle,
(A) The red pulse travels faster then takes place.
because its index of refraction is
(A) Refraction
smaller
(B) Diffraction
(B) The blue pulse travels faster
(C) Total internal reflection
(C) The two pulses travel at the
same speed (D) Interference

(D) The relative speed depends 281. As light leaves air and en-
on the exact wavelengths of the ters water or glass it
red and blue pulses (A) gets faster and bends towards
the normal
276. Which are NOT correct for
total internal reflection to (B) gets faster and bends away
take place from the normal
(A) The incident angle should be (C) gets slower and bends to-
less than the critical angle wards the normal
(B) The incident angle should be (D) gets slower and bends away
greater than the critical angle from the normal
(C) Light should travel from a 282. For which colour, refrac-
rarer to a denser medium tive index of glass is maxi-
(D) both 1 and 3 mum?
(A) red
277. Mirage is an
(B) violet
(A) optical disturbance
(C) green
(B) real image (D) yellow
(C) optical illusion
283. The bending of light is
(D) none of these called
278. A beam of light travels (A) a rainbow
slowest in (B) refraction
(A) a vacuum (C) reflection
(B) air (D) absorption

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 135

284. Mirages is an example of 289. When a red light ray trav-

(A) Refraction els from air into a glass
block, its
(B) Reflection
(A) velocity increases and its
(C) Total Internal reflection
wavelength decreases
(D) none of the above
(B) velocity decreases and its fre-
285. The speed of light in vac- quency stays the same
uum is 3x108m/s. its speed (C) velocity decreases and its fre-
in ruby of refractive index quency increases
1.54 is
(D) velocity remains the same and
(A) 1.95 x 108 m/s its wavelength decreases
(B) 5.1 x 10-9 m/s
290. The classic mirage of wa-
(C) 4.62 x 108 m/s
ter on the highway on a hot
(D) 3 x 108 m/s day occurs when
286. The object distance (x) (A) the light refracts due to a layer
from sphere in order to form of hot air over cooler air on the
a real image of the object on roadway.
the other side is
(B) the light refracts due to a layer
(A) x = R / (n-1) of hot air right over on the road-
(B) x = (n-1) / R way.
(C) x = R / (n+1) (C) The sky reflects from the hot
(D) x = (n+1) / R pavement.
(D) none of above
287. A ray of light passes from
a medium X to another 291. When light ray trav-
medium Y. No refraction of els from rarer medium to
light occurs if the ray of denser medium, refracted
light hits the boundary of ray the normal.
medium Y at an angle of:
(A) moves towards
(A) 1200
(B) passes away from
(B) 900
(C) bends away from
(C) 450
(D) None of these
(D) 00
288. The distance between the 292. When light passes from a
parallel rays through the rarer medium to a denser
glass slab is called medium it bends
(A) lateral shift (A) Towards normal
(B) incident ray (B) Away from normal
(C) emergent ray (C) Goes undeviated
(D) refracted ray (D) Depends upon the medium

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
136 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

293. The refractive indices of 298. Among the following,

four materials A, B, C, D Twinkling of stars is due to
are 1.33, 1.43, 1.71 and
1.52 respectively. When (A) Total internal reflection
the speed of light rays pass
(B) Dispersion

NARAYAN CHANGDER
from air into these materi-
als, they refract they maxi- (C) Scattering
mum in: (D) Atmospheric refraction
(A) Material A
299. Which of the following is
(B) Material B true regarding the index of
(C) Material C refraction of a substance?
(D) Material D (A) n=c/v
(B) n=v/c
294. Sin i/ sin r= constant this
law is also called as? (C) n=cv

(A) newtons law (D) n=c+v

(B) refraction law 3 300. Large number of thin

stripes of black paint are
(C) snells law
made on the surface of a
(D) gravitational law convex lens of focal length
20 cm to catch the image of
295. Which of the following ma-
a white horse. The image
terials can not be used to
will be
make a lens
(A) a zebra of black stripes
(A) Water
(B) a horse of black stripes
(B) Glass
(C) a horse of less brightness
(C) Plastic
(D) a zebra of less brightness
(D) Clay
301. The S.I unit of power of
296. Fiber optic cables work be- Lens is
cause of the principle of
(A) Joule(J)
(A) total internal refraction
(B) centimetre (cm)
(B) incomplete internal refraction (C) Watt(W)
(C) total internal reflection (D) dioptre (D)
(D) partial internal reflection
302. Object should be placed at
297. Snell’s law a distance of from lens
whose focal length is 5 cm
(A) n1 sini = n2 sinr
to get a real and same size
(B) n2 sini = n1 sinr image.
(C) n1 / n2 = sini / sinr (A) at 10 cm
(D) none of the above (B) above 5 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 137

(C) below 10 cm (C) Total internal reflection

(D) not sure (D) Critical angle

303. Refraction is 307. Which of the following is

(A) the bending of light as it the basic principle behind
passes into new medium and working of optical fibre?
changes speed (A) Reflection
(B) the bending of light around (B) Total internal reflection
or through a barrier and changes (C) Refraction
speed
(D) Scattering of light
(C) when light bounces off a
boundary and changes speed 308. Which are two laws of re-
(D) the bending of light as it fraction
crosses a boundary into a new (A) The incidenct ray
medium with the same speed (B) Refracted ray
304. are used for some tem- (C) The incidenct ray and Re-
perature measurement op- fracted ray
erators and also in detection (D) refractive index and Refracted
sensors ray
(A) OFC
309. n= c/v is the equation of
(B) Mirage
(C) Brilliance of diamonds (A) Law of Diffraction
(D) Refractive Index (B) The Index of Refraction
305. nA = 1.08 ; nB = 1.008 ; nC (C) Law of Reflection
= 2.4; nD = 2.15. So which (D) Law of Refraction(Snell’s Law)
of the following is true?
(A) Speed of light is minimum in 310. Mr. A is going on a road at
medium C 12 noon. He saw a mirage
on the road. Imagine why it
(B) Light speed is minimum in B happens.
(C) Speed of light is maximum in (A) Due to reflection
medium A
(B) Due to refraction
(D) None of the above
(C) Due to total internal reflection
306. The change in the direc- (D) None of these
tion of the path of light
when it passes from one 311. The clear sky appears blue
transparent medium to an- because
other transparent medium is (A) blue light gets absorbed in the
called atmosphere.
(A) Reflection (B) ultraviolet radiations are ab-
(B) Refraction sorbed in the atmosphere.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
138 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) violet and blue lights get scat- (B) Chord

tered more than lights of all other
(C) Focal length
colours by the atmosphere.
(D) light of all other colours is (D) None of these
scattered more than the violet and

NARAYAN CHANGDER
blue colour lights by the atmo- 317. A Band of color in a rain-
sphere. bow, or from a light passing
through a prism is know as:
312. The medium which has the
speed of light is more is (A) rainbow

(A) optically denser (B) spectrum

(B) optically rarer (C) refraction
(C) Normal (D) none of above
(D) None of the above
318. Name the subjective prop-
313. f = 1/v-1/u is the formula erty of light related to its
of wavelength.
(A) Mirrors (A) refractive index
(B) Magnification
(B) frequency
(C) Lens
(C) colour
(D) Lens maker
(D) velocity
314. The return of light into the
same medium after striking 319. The speed of light in vac-
a polished surface is called uum is 3x108m/s and the
(A) Refraction speed of light in diamond
is 1.24x108m/s. the refrac-
(B) Reflection
tive index of diamond is
(C) Total internal reflection
(A) 2.42
(D) Deviation
(B) 0.42
315. which one of the following
is not an application of total (C) 1
internal reflection (D) 3.72
(A) mirages
(B) rainbow 320. The ray of light incident
normally on the surface sep-
(C) optical fibre arating the two media
(D) shining of diamond
(A) Passes undeviated
316. The distance between fo- (B) Bends towards the normal
cal point and pole is called
(C) Bends away from the normal
(A) Radius of curvature (D) None

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.8 Refraction of light 139

321. The critical angle for a (D) none of the above

medium with respect to air
is 450 , then the refractive in- 326. The speed of light in vac-
dex of that medium with re- uum is 3x108m/s and the
spect to air is speed of light in diamond is
√ 1.24x108m/s. the index of
(A) 2
refraction in diamond is
(B) √1
2 (A) 2.42
(C) √2
3 (B) 0.42
√
(D) 2
3 (C) 1

322. The best definition of re- (D) none of above

fraction is
327. (i) Light changes its direc-
(A) passing through a boundary tion when it is refracted.(ii)
(B) changing direction when Light changes its speed
crossing a boundary when it travels in different
mediums.
(C) changing speed at a bound-
ary (A) (i)-right ; (ii)-wrong
(D) bouncing off a boundary (B) (i), (ii)-correct ; But (ii) is not
correct reason for (i)
323. Patient’s stomach can be
viewed by inserting pipe. (C) (i), (ii)-correct ; But (ii) is cor-
rect reason
(A) vacuum
(D) Both are wrong
(B) water
(C) light 328. What is the refractive in-
(D) none of these dex of a fibre optic pipe, if
the critical angle is 300?
324. THE PHYSICAL QUANTITY (A) 2.0
WHICH IS AN INDICATOR
OF THE SPEED OF LIGHT (B) 1.7
THROUGH A GIVEN MEDIUM (C) 2.4
IS KNOWN AS
(D) 0.5
(A) OPTICAL CENTRE
(B) OPTICAL DENSITY 329. The refractive index of
glass for light going from
(C) PRINCIPAL AXIS air to glass is 3/2. The re-
(D) LENS fractive index for light going
from glass to air will be:
325. A bunch of thin fibres form
a (A) 1/3
(A) cable pipe (B) 4/5
(B) light pipe (C) 4/6
(C) mirage (D) 5/2

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 140 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

330. Refraction of light by the (A) maintain its original speed

earth’s atmosphere due to (B) accelerate while it is in glass
variation in air density is
called (C) increase its speed
(A) atmospheric reflection (D) reduce its speed

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) atmospheric dispersion 333. An erecting prism is used
(C) atmospheric scattering in a
(D) atmospheric refraction (A) Slide projector
331. What color has the short- (B) Periscope
est wavelength and highest (C) Binocular
frequency?
(D) Camera
(A) Violet
(B) Orange 334. The bluish colour of water
in deep sea is due to
(C) Red
(A) the presence of algae and
(D) Blue
other plants found in water
332. According to Willebord (B) reflection of sky in water
Snell, light passing from air
to glass will cause the light (C) scattering of light
to (D) absorption of light by the sea

1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index

1. A ray of light travels from 3. The refractive index of dia-
air into glass at an incident mond is 2.42. A ray of light
angle of 30o. Find the angle passing from inside of a dia-
of refraction. (The refractive mond into air makes an an-
index of glass is 1.5) gle of incidence of 20o. Find
the angle of refraction.
(A) 19.7o
(A) 54.9 degrees
(B) 19o
(B) 55.9 degrees
(C) 19.5o
(C) 56.9 degrees
(D) 19.3o
(D) 57.8 degrees
2. What is the speed of light in
ice (n=1.309) 4. A person saw the bottom of
the pool with the real depth
(A) 2.29 ∗ 108 m/s is 2 meters. If the refractive
index of water is 4/3, then
(B) 2.43 ∗ 108 m/s
find the depth of the pool
(C) 4.36 ∗ 10−9 that the person saw.
(D) 4.36 ∗ 108 m/s (A) 1, 8

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index 141

(B) 1, 7 9. A block of amber is placed

(C) 1, 6 in water and a laser beam
travels from the water
(D) 1, 5 through the amber. The an-
5. A ray of light leaves a dia- gle of incidence is 35◦ while
mond and enters air. The the angle of refraction is 26◦ .
angle of refraction is 15o. If What is the index of refrac-
diamond has n=2.42, what tion of amber? If the refrac-
is the angle of incidence tive index of water is 1.33

(A) 51.2 degrees (A) 1.74

(B) 42.6 degrees (B) 1.88

(C) 1.47
(C) 38.8 degrees
(D) 1.50
(D) 36.8 degrees
10. refractive index is least for
6. An object is placed in front
of two mirrors which form
an angle of 600. How many (A) air
images are formed? (B) mica
(A) 2 (C) vacuum
(B) 3 (D) water
(C) 4 11. The refractive index of the
(D) 5 lens of the human eye is
1.41. If a ray of light goes
7. A ray of light enters air from from the air into the lens at
glass. The angle of inci- an angle of incidence of 55◦ ,
dence is 35.0◦ and the angle what is the angle of refrac-
of refraction is 68.9◦ . Find tion?
the refractive index of the
glass. (A) 3.5◦
(B) 35.0◦
(A) 37.9
(C) 35.5◦
(B) 1.63
(D) 30.5◦
(C) 37.6
(D) 1.68 12. A diver saw an object stand-
ing 1.2 m above the water
8. The refractive index of surface. If the refractive in-
honey is 1.47. Calculate the dex of the water is 4/3, then
speed of light when it enters what was the imaginary dis-
honey from air. tance that the diver saw?
(A) 2.04 x 108 m/s (A) 1, 2 m
(B) 1.04 x 108 m/s (B) 1, 4 m
(C) 2.4 x 108 m/s (C) 1, 6 m
(D) 4.4 x 108 m/s (D) 1, 8 m

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
142 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

13. What is the angle of re- 17. A light ray with an angle
fraction in a medium if the of incidence of 30◦ passes
angle of incidence in wa- from water to air. Find
ter (n=1.33) is 48◦ and the the angle of refraction using
index of refraction of the Snell’s Law. Refractive in-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
medium is 1.58? dex of water is 1.33.
(A) 0.63 (A) 41.70
(B) 29 degrees (B) 45.70
(C) 39 degrees (C) 430
(D) 45 degrees (D) 39.70
14. A light ray comes from
18. Light travelling from a
medium A to medium B with
transparent medium to air
incident ray of 30◦ and is
undergoes total internal re-
refracted with angle of 45◦ ,
flection at an angle of inci-
find the relative index( of ) dence of 450. The refractive
medium A to medium B. nnba
( √ ) index of the medium may
. Sin 300 = 12 ; sin 450 = 21 2 be (sin 45 = 0.7, sin 90 =
1)
(A) 1
2
√ (A) 1.42
(B) 1
2 2
√ (B) 1.4
(C) 1
2 3
√ (C) 1.5
(D) 2
(D) 1.6
15. A pool of water appears
to be 0.8 m deep when 19. The angle of incidence on a
it is viewed perpendicularly material with a refractive in-
from above. What is its ac- dex of 1.8 is 340. If the
tual depth? Refractive index angle of refraction is 450
of water = 1.33 what is the refractive index
of the medium the light was
(A) 1.07 m initially in? (sin 340 = 0.56,
(B) 2 m sin 450 = 0.71)
(C) 1.08 m (A) 1.4
(D) 1.09 m (B) 1.9
16. When light passes from air (C) 1.3
into water at an angle of 60◦
(D) 0.8
from the normal, what is the
angle of refraction? 20. The refractive index of wa-
(A) 60◦ ter is 1.33. A ray of light en-
tering water from air makes
(B) 40.6◦
an angle of incidence of
(C) 40 ◦ 30.0◦ . Find the angle of re-
(D) 4.6◦ fraction.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.9 Absolute & relative refractive index 143

(A) 20.4◦ (B) 20◦

(B) 41.7◦ (C) 22◦
(C) 22.1◦ (D) 22.9◦
(D) 40.8◦ 25. The relative index of ben-
zena is 1, 5. Find the speed
21. A ray of light enters glass of light in benzena.
from air. The angle of inci-
dence is 25o, and the angle (A) 1, 0 x 108 m
s
of refraction is 16o. What is (B) 8
1, 5 x 10 sm

the refractive index of glass (C) 2, 0 x 108 ms

(A) 1.5 (D) 4, 5 x 108 ms
(B) 1.4
26. The angle of incidence on a
(C) 1.6 material with a refractive in-
(D) 1.7 dex of 1.8 is 340. If the
angle of refraction is 450
22. The refractive index of wa- what is the refractive index
ter is 1.33. A ray of light of the medium the light was
enters water from air and initially in?
makes and angle of inci- (A) 2.3
dence of 20 degrees. What
is the angle of refraction (B) 1.9

(A) 20.4 degrees (C) 1.3

(D) 0.8
(B) 21.2 degrees
(C) 22.1 degrees 27. The wavelength of a light is
6, 0 x 10−5 cm that comes from
(D) 23.1 degrees air to the glass prism with
23. A ray of light enters air the refractive index of 1.5.
from glass. The angle of in- Find the wavelength of light
cidence is 35o and the angle in the prism.
of refraction is 69o. Find the (A) 9, 0 x 10−5 cm
refractive index of the glass. (B) 7, 5 x 10−5 cm
(A) 1.62 (C) 6, 0 x 10−5 cm
(B) 1.63 (D) 4, 0 x 10−5 cm
(C) 1.64 28. What is the index of refrac-
(D) 1.65 tion for a material that al-
lows light to travel at 2.8
24. When light passes from wa- *108 m/s?
ter into diamond at an an-
(A) 1.07
gle of 45◦ from the normal,
what is the angle of refrac- (B) .67
tion? (C) 1.5
(A) 20.9◦ (D) not possible

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
144 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

29. The refractive index of dia- 33. Which colour bends the
mond is 2.42. A ray of light maximum in the prism?
passing from the inside of a Info-The index of refraction
diamond into air makes an is greater for shorter wave-
angle of incidence of 20.0◦ . lengths

NARAYAN CHANGDER
Find the angle of refraction. (A) Violet
(A) 57.8◦ (B) Indigo
(B) 55.9◦ (C) Red
(C) 8.12◦ (D) Green
(D) 7.93◦
34. A ray of light enters glass
30. A ray of light approaches a from air. The angle of inci-
jar of honey at an angle of dence is 25◦ and the angle
30◦ . If the angle of refrac- of refraction is 16.4◦ . Calcu-
tion is 19.5◦ , what is the re- late the refractive index of
fractive index of honey? glass.
(A) 1.49 (A) 1.5
(B) 1.50 (B) 1.7
(C) 1.05 (C) 1.3
(D) 1.51 (D) 1.2

31. Which one of the following 35. Light travels from glass
statements is incorrect? (n=1.66) to water, what is
(A) The light only can travels in the critical angle for these
straight line two mediums?

(B) Light is an electromagnetic (A) 53.2

wave. (B) 48.8
(C) Light cannot travel in vacuum (C) 37
(D) Light can be dispersed, ab- (D) not possible
sorbed, reflected, and refracted.
36. A ray of light enters air
32. A pool of water is 10m from glass. The angle of in-
deep. If the bottom of the cidence is 35o and the angle
pool is viewed perpendicu- of refraction is 69o. Find the
larly from air, how deep refractive index of the glass.
does it appear? (refractive (sin 350 = 0.57, sin 690=
index of water = 1.33) 0.93)
(A) 7 m (A) 1.62
(B) 7.52 m (B) 1.63
(C) 6.6 m (C) 1.64
(D) 5.52 m (D) 1.65

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 145

37. refractive index is maxi- ones are consider as refrac-

mum for tion?
(A) water (A) 1 and 4
(B) diamond (B) 2 and 4
(C) glass (C) 2 and 3
(D) mercury (D) 1 and 3
38. A ray of light leaves a rect- 41. Calculate the refractive in-
angular diamond and en- dex for a substance, if the
ters air. It makes an an- speed of light in that sub-
gle of refraction of 15o. If stance is 2.1 x 108 m/s.
the refractive index of a dia-
(A) 0.70
mond is 2.42, find the angle
of incidence. (B) 1.43
(A) 6.3 degrees (C) 5.10
(B) 6.2 degrees (D) 6.30
(C) 6.1 degrees 42. A pencil that is placed in
(D) 6 degrees front of 2 identical plane
mirrors and form an angle
39. A ray of light leaves a rect- of 400 creates some images.
angular diamond and en- If the angle is enlarged by
ters air. It makes an angle x0, the total images will be
of refraction of 15◦ in the air. 2 less than previous. Find X.
If the refractive index of dia-
mond is 2.42, find the angle (A) 600
of incidence. (B) 200
(A) 39◦ (C) 51, 40
(B) 37◦ (D) 300
(C) 6.1◦
43. When light passes from air
(D) 7.0◦ to glass with an angle of in-
cidence of 30◦ , the angle of
40. Refer to the following state-
refraction is 20◦ .What is the
ments:1) A straw looks
refractive index of this glass
bend when it’s put inside the
block?
glass full of water.2) The im-
age formed by a plane mir- (A) 0.68
ror.3) The depth of the pool (B) 1.46
looks shallow than the real
depth. 4) The image formed (C) 1.50
by the car’s rear view.Which (D) 2

1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
146 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

1. a plane mirror forms 6. What is the relation be-

tween angle of incidence (i)
(A) virtual
and angle of emergence (e)
(B) erect when a ray of light passes
(C) same size through a glass slab

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) real (A) i = e
(B) δ + A= i +e
2. In which of the following
does light travel fastest? (C) i > e
(D) none of above
(A) kerosene
(B) turpentine 7. When you see a “wet spot”
mirage on the road in front
(C) water
of you, you are most likely
(D) ice seeing

3. A concave lens forms the im- (A) water

age of an object which is (B) hot air
(A) virtual, inverted and dimin- (C) figment of your imagination
ished (D) sky
(B) virtual, erect and diminished
8. Velocity of light is maximum
(C) virtual, inverted and enlarged in
(D) virtual, erect and enlarged (A) In air

4. For a wave to undergo total (B) In glass

internal reflection, which of (C) In water
the following is true:-
(D) In seawater
(A) light moves from rarer to
denser medium and i> c 9. What is the relation be-
tween angle of prism(A), an-
(B) light moves from denser to gle of incidence(i), angle of
rarer medium and i> c emergence(e) and angle of
(C) light moves from rarer to deviation, when light ray
denser medium and i< c passes through a prism.
(D) light moves from denser to (A) i = e
rarer medium and i< c (B) δ + A = i + e
5. Prisms usually have (C) i > e
faces. (D) none of above
(A) Square
10. A ray of light falling nor-
(B) Triangular mally on a glass slab will
(C) Rectangular (A) bend towards the normal
(D) Circular (B) bend away from the normal

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 147

(C) travel undeviated (C) passing parallel to the princi-

(D) none of above pal axis after refracion
(D) can’t pass
11. When light bends it is
(A) Reflection 16. lens is thin at the middle
and thicker at the edges.
(B) Absorption
(C) refraction (A) Biconvex

(D) optical density (B) plano convex

(C) Biconcave
12. The magnification of an ob-
ject placed 10 cm from a con- (D) glass slab
vex mirror of radius of cur-
vature 20 cm will be- 17. Two objects A and B when
placed in turn in front of
(A) (A) 0.2
a concave mirror of focal
(B) (B) 0.5 length 7.5 cm, give images
(C) ( C) 1 of equal size. If A is three
times the size of B and is
(D) (D) infinity
placed 30 cm from mirror,
13. What is the reason of split- what is the distance of B
ting of white light? from the mirror-

(A) Change of speed of all (A) 10 cm

colours (B) 12.5 cm
(B) Breaking down of colours (C) 15cm
(C) Falling obliquely on the sur-
(D) 17.5 cm
face
(D) Falling on the normal of the 18. Magnifying power of a con-
surface cave lens is

14. The speed of light in vac- (A) can have any value
uum is (B) always = 1
(A) 3 × 108 m/s (C) always < 1
(B) 2.8 × 108 m/s (D) always > 1
(C) 3 × 107 m/s
(D) 3 × 109 m/s 19. Which is the worst (most en-
ergetic and ionizing) type of
15. Any ray which is passing radiation?
along principal axis of a (A) gamma rays
lens is
(B) x-rays
(A) passing through focus after re-
fraction (C) ultraviolet waves
(B) un deviated (D) visible light

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
148 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

20. The angle between incident 24. What is the relation be-
ray and refracted ray on tween refractive index and
plane mirror is 700, the an- the optical density?
gle of incident is
(A) More refractive index more is
(A) 700 the density.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 350 (B) More refractive index less is
the density
(C) 300
(C) Less refractive index more is
(D) 200
the density
21. A spherical mirror and a (D) No relation between refractive
thin spherical lens have index and optical density
each a focal length of-15 cm.
The mirror and the lens are 25. What is the angle of the nor-
likely to be: mal line compared to the flat
surface?
(A) both concave
(A) 40◦
(B) both convex
(B) 50◦
(C) the mirror is concave, but the
lens is convex (C) 90◦
(D) the mirror is convex, but the (D) 180◦
lens is concave
26. Light travels from oil
22. angle of deviation will be (n=1.48) to water at an an-
maximum for colour gle of 60 degrees relative to
the normal. What will hap-
(A) red
pen to the light?
(B) violet
(A) reflect back at an angle of 60
(C) green degrees
(D) none of above (B) refract through at an angle of
74.5 degrees
23. When a light travels from
denser medium to less (C) refract through at an angle of
dense medium, the light will 51.1 degrees
be refracted (D) reflect back at angle of 30 de-
(A) towards normal and its grees
speed increases.
27. Which colour has the maxi-
(B) away from normal and its mum speed in the prism?
speed increases.
(A) Violet
(C) towards normal and its
(B) Yellow
speed decreases.
(C) Orange
(D) away from normal and its
speed decreases. (D) Red

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 149

28. What we call the final ray 33. An object 5.0 cm in length
coming out of the glass is placed at a distance of 20
slab? cm in front of a convex mir-
(A) Incident ray ror or radius of curvature 30
cm. The position of the im-
(B) Refracted Ray age is
(C) Reflected ray (A) 8.57 cm
(D) Emergent Ray (B) 9.10 cm
29. Which is faster light waves (C) 8.15 cm
or sound waves? (D) 7.15 cm
(A) light
34. A light ray falls on a mirror
(B) sound and deviates by 60◦ then the
(C) same angle of reflection will be
(D) none of above (A) 30◦
(B) 90◦
30. Which colour bends the
maximum in the prism? (C) 60◦
(A) Violet (D) 180
(B) Indigo 35. Particles of light energy are
(C) Red called
(D) Green (A) beams
(B) photons
31. You are given three media
A, B and C of refractive in- (C) thermograms
dex 1.43, 1.25 and 1.6. The (D) dots
medium in which the light
will travel fastest is 36. if magnification by a lens is-
(A) A 5, then

(B) B (A) lens is concave

(C) C (B) image is virtual

(D) Equal in all three medium (C) lens is magnified

(D) image is real and diminished
32. The minimum distance be- by a convex lens
tween an object and its real
image formed by a convex 37. Power of a lens is the of
lens of focal length f is- its focal length.
(A) f (A) value
(B) 2f (B) reciprocal
(C) 3f (C) 2 times
(D) 4f (D) half

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
150 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

38. A clock hung on a wall has (B) Oppenheimer, Quantum Me-

marks instead of numbers chanics
on its dial. On the opposite (C) Einstein, Photoelectric Effect
wall there is a mirror, and
the image of the clock in the (D) Einstein, Theory of Relativity

NARAYAN CHANGDER
mirror if read, indicates the
43. Focal length of a lens de-
time as 8.20. What is the
pends on which of the fol-
time in the clock-
lowing factor?
(A) 3.40
(A) Radii of curvature
(B) 4.40
(B) material of the lens
(C) 5.20
(C) medium inwhich the lens is
(D) 4.20 placed

39. In refraction of light (D) all the above

through a glass slab, the di-
44. A spherical mirror and a
rections of the incident ray
spherical lens each have a
and refracted ray are:
focal length of-10 cm. The
(A) perpendicular to each other mirror and the lens are
(B) parallel to each other likely to be

(C) intersecting each other (A) the mirror is convex and the
lens is concave
(D) non parallel to each other
(B) the mirror is concave and the
40. A concave mirror produces lens is convex
a magnification of +4. The (C) both convex
object is placed:
(D) both concave
(A) At F
(B) Between F and C 45. What is the correct order of
the EM spectrum from low
(C) Beyond C energy to high energy?
(D) Between F and P (A) UV, visible, infrared, mi-
crowaves
41. Which color of light is most
refracted during dispersion (B) Infrared, microwave, UV, x-
by a prism? rays
(A) red (C) UV, visible violet, visible red,
infrared
(B) yellow
(D) radio, microwave, UV,
(C) green
gamma
(D) violet
46. The ratios of the speeds of
42. won his Nobel Prize in light in a given pair of me-
1905 for dia gives us
(A) Newton, Speed of Light (A) Absolute refractive index

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 151

(B) Relative refractive index 51. Which of the following elec-

(C) Optical density tromagnetic waves do hu-
mans sense as heat?
(D) None of these
(A) ultraviolet light
47. A ray of light incident on a (B) x-rays
glass slab suffers refraction
(C) gamma rays
(A) at two inclined faces of the
glass slab (D) infrared rays
(B) at two parallel faces of the 52. An object is placed 20 cm
glass slab in front of a plane mirror.
(C) at none of the faces of the The mirror is moved 5 cm to-
glass slab wards the object. The dis-
tance between the positions
(D) none of above
of the object and final im-
48. If the magnification pro- ages seen in the mirror is:
duced by a lens has a neg- (A) 10 cm
ative value, the image will
(B) 5 cm
be
(C) 30 cm
(A) real and inverted
(D) 15 cm
(B) real and erect
(C) virtual and erect 53. The refractive index of
(D) virtual and inverted glass is 1.5. The speed
of light in glass will be (
49. When a ray of light passes speed of light in free space
through a prism, in each ( is 3x108m/s.)
face of prism) refraction, the (A) 2x108m/s
light ray
(B) 3.5x108m/s
(A) bends towards the base of the
prism (C) 4.5x108m/s
(B) bends away the base of the (D) 2.25x108m/s
prism
54. When a ray of light enters a
(C) bends towards the angle of glass slab from air-
the prism
(A) Its wavelength decreases.
(D) none of above
(B) Its wavelength Increases.
50. If magnification is +1.5, the (C) Its frequency increases
image is
(D) Neither wavelength nor fre-
(A) erect quency changes.
(B) diminished
55. A ray of light incident on
(C) real one of the parallel faces
(D) inverted of rectangular glass slab,

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
152 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

emerges out of the opposite (A) 3 ∗ 109 m/s

parallel face, (B) 3 ∗ 107 m/s
(A) Inclined to the incident ray (C) 3 ∗ 108 m/s
(B) Along the same straight line as (D) 3 ∗ 106 m/s
the incident ray

NARAYAN CHANGDER
60. How is light affected by an
(C) Parallel to the incident ray but increase in the index of re-
laterally displaced fraction?
(D) Gets absorbed into the body (A) Its frequency increases
of the glass slab and does not
(B) Its frequency decreases
emerge out of it.
(C) Its speed increases
56. In projectors which lenses (D) Its speed decreases
are used?
(A) Convex lens 61. The rear view mirror of a
car is a plane mirror. A
(B) Concave lens driver is reversing his car at
(C) Bipolar lens a speed of 2 m/s. The driver
sees in his rear view mirror
(D) Both (a) and (b)
the image of truck parked
57. What is the correct order behind his car. The speed
of the EM spectrum from at which the image of the
low frequency to high fre- truck appears to approach
quency? the driver will be-
(A) UV, visible, infrared, mi- (A) 1 m/s
crowaves (B) 2 m/s
(B) Infrared, microwave, UV, x- (C) 4 m/s
rays (D) 8 m/s
(C) UV, visible violet, visible red, 62. The source of all electro-
infrared magnetic waves is
(D) radio, microwave, UV, (A) magnetic fields
gamma
(B) electric fields
58. A ray of light is incident nor- (C) vibrating charges
mally on a rectangular piece
(D) heat
of glass. The value of angle
of refraction will be- 63. No matter how far you
(A) 180◦ stand from a mirror, your
Image appears erect. The
(B) 90◦ mirror is likely to be
(C) 45◦ (A) plane
(D) 0◦ (B) concave
59. what is the speed of light in (C) convex
vacuum (D) Either plane or convex

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 153

64. What is a convex lens? (C) absorbs the light more when
(A) triangular in shape wet.

(B) more transparent at the mid- (D) scatters light in all directions.
dle 68. When a ray of light en-
(C) thicker at the edges than at ters from one medium to an-
the middle other, its velocity is doubled.
(D) thicker at the middle than at The critical angle for the ray
the edges for total internal reflection
will be
65. What is refraction (A) 30o
(A) phenomenon of change in the (B) 60o
path of light in going from one
medium to another. (C) 90o

(B) phenomenon of bouncing (D) incomplete information

back of light in the same medium 69. Which statement is true for
on striking the surface of any ob- the reflection of light?
ject
(A) The angle of incidence and re-
(C) reflecting surface
flection are equal.
(D) electromagnetic wave that
(B) The reflected light is less bright
can be seen by the typical human.
than the incident light.
66. David is observing his im- (C) The sum of angle of incidence
age in a plane mirror. The and reflection is always greater
distance between the mirror than 90 degree.
and his image is 5m. If
(D) The beams of incident light af-
he moves 1m towards the
ter reflection diverge at unequal
mirror, then the distance be-
angles.
tween David and his image
will be- 70. The power of a lens having
(A) 3 m focal length 50 cm is-
(B) 5 m (A) 0.5D
(C) 6 m (B) 2D
(D) 8 m (C) 3D
(D) 0.2 D
67. It is difficult to see the road-
way from a car on a rainy 71. Absolute refractive index is
night because the road sur- always
face
(A) less than 1
(A) is obscured by the rain itself.
(B) greater than 1
(B) what is normally a diffuse re-
flector when dry becomes a mirror (C) equal to 1
surface when wet. (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
154 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

72. A ray of light travelling in (A) reflection

a rarer medium meets the (B) refraction
surface of another denser
medium. While entering the (C) dispersion
second medium at the point (D) echo

NARAYAN CHANGDER
of incidence, it
77. Focal plane is the plane
(A) Goes straight into the second which is to the principla
medium axis
(B) Bends towards the normal (A) parallel; at focus
(C) Bends away from the normal (B) parallel; at optic centre
(D) Does not enter at all (C) perpendicular; at focus
73. Focal length of a concave (D) perpendicular; at optic center
mirror is 78. Light waves travel as
(A) negative (A) waves
(B) positive (B) particles
(C) depends on the position of ob- (C) waves or particles
ject
(D) sound
(D) depends on the position of im-
age 79. Refractive index is property
of
74. If an incident ray passes
(A) a pair of media
through the focus, the re-
flected ray will (B) a medium
(A) pass through the pole (C) a vacuum
(B) be parallel to the principal axis (D) none of above
(C) retrace its path 80. If the sun were to disappear
(D) pass through the center of cur- right now, we wouldn’t
vature know about it for 8 minutes
because it takes 8 minutes
75. A full length of image of a (A) to operate receiving equip-
distant tall building can def- ment in the dark.
initely be seen using:
(B) for light to travel from the sun
(A) a concave mirror to Earth.
(B) a convex mirror (C) for the sun to disappear.
(C) a plane mirror (D) none of above
(D) both concave as well as plane 81. Assume a light ray travel
mirror from a glass block to the air.
76. Light waves bounce off at Which statement is correct?
many of angles because the (A) The light refracts towards nor-
surface is uneven. mal as it enters the air.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 155

(B) the incident angle is bigger 86. Refractive index of glass

than the refracted angle with respect to air is 1.5
(C) The light travels faster as it en- and refractive index of wa-
ters the air. ter with respect to air is 4/3
. What will be the refractive
(D) The brightness of light in- index of glass with respect
creases as it travels in the air. to water?
82. The magnification produced (A) 1
by a concave mirror- (B) 1.5
(A) is always more than one (C) 1.125
(B) is always less than one (D) -10
(C) is always equal to one
87. Number of images formed
(D) may be less than or greater by a lens made up of three
than one different materials
83. What do a prism, a mag- (A) 1
nifying glass, a microscope, (B) 2
and eyeglasses ALL have in (C) 3
common
(D) o
(A) They are opaque
(B) They refract light 88. Total internal reflection can
only occur if
(C) That are translucent
(A) Angle of incident, i = Angle of
(D) They reflect light critical angle, c
84. Refraction of light takes (B) Angle of incident, i < Angle of
place because critical angle, c
(A) change in frequency of light in (C) Angle of incident, i > Angle of
different medium critical angle, c
(B) change in speed of light in dif- (D) none of above
ferent medium
89. A student conducts an ex-
(C) change in speed and fre- periment using a convex
quency of light lens. He places the object at
(D) none of above a distance of 60 cm in front
of the lens and observes
85. The light ray passing that the image is formed at
through the focus will be a distance of 30 cm behind
after refraction form a lens the lens. What is the power
(A) pass through centre of curva- of the lens?
ture (A) 0.005 dioptre
(B) parallel to the principal axis (B) 0.05 dioptre
(C) pass through optic centre (C) 5 dioptre
(D) undeviated (D) 50 dioptre

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
156 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

90. When seen from an air- (B) at the centre of curvature

plane, a rainbow some- (C) beyond the centre of curva-
times forms a complete cir- ture
cle. When this happens, the
plane’s shadow is (D) between the pole of the mirror
and the focus

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) in the center of the rainbow.
95. When the object is placed
(B) Nowhere. There is no
between f and 2f of a con-
shadow.
vex lens, the image formed
(C) totally outside the rainbow. is
(D) in the lower part of the rain- (A) at f
bow. (B) at 2f
91. Angle of deviation does not (C) beyond 2f
depend on (D) between O and f
(A) angle of incidence
96. Magnification for image
(B) angle of prism is always
(C) frequency of light (A) real, positive
(D) none of above (B) real, negative
92. lens is also called as con- (C) virtual, negative
verging lens (D) any, negative
(A) convex 97. what happens to the angle
(B) concave of refraction when light hits
a boundary at critical inci-
(C) both concave and convex
dent angle
(D) can’t say
(A) it becomes smaller
93. The of light can change (B) it becomes 90 degrees
when light is refracted be- (C) it becomes greater than 90
cause the medium changes. degrees
(A) frequency (D) none of above
(B) medium
98. An image of an object pro-
(C) wavelength duced on a screen which is
(D) transparency about 36 cm using a convex
lens.The image produced is
94. The image formed by a con- about 3 times the size of the
cave mirror is observed to object. What is the size of
be virtual, erect and larger the object?
than the object. then the
(A) 12 cm
position of the object should
be- (B) 33 cm
(A) between the focus and the cen- (C) 39 cm
tre of curvature (D) 108 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 157

99. light travelling from a trans- (A) Refractive index

parent medium to air under- (B) Optical density
goes total internal reflection
at an angle of incidence of (C) Dispersion
45degree. THe refractive in- (D) None of these
dex of the medium may be
104. A rainbow is an example
(A) 1.4
of
(B) 1.3
(A) Dispersion
(C) 1.1
(B) White being separated into a
(D) 1.0 spectrum

100. Which mirror can produce (C) Refraction

a virtual, erect and magni- (D) All of these options are true
fied image of an object?
105. Light has the lowest ve-
(A) Both concave and convex mir- locity in which medium?
rors barium glass n=1.60crown
(B) Plane mirror glass n=1.523water n=1.33diamond
(C) Convex mirror n=2.45

(D) Concave mirror (A) diamond

(B) water
101. What we call the portion
of a transparent refracting (C) crown glass
medium bounded by two (D) barium glass
surfaces?
106. All the distances are mea-
(A) Glass sured from
(B) Mirror (A) principal focus
(C) Lens (B) centre of curvature
(D) Beads (C) optic centre
102. what is position size and (D) any where
nature of image when ob-
ject is at c (concave mirror ) 107. An object is placed at a
distance of 40cm in front of
(A) at infinity large real inverted a concave mirror of focal
(B) behind screen enlarged virtual length 20cm.The image pro-
erect duced is:
(C) at c, same size, real and in- (A) virtual and inverted
verted (B) real and erect
(D) none of above (C) real, inverted and of the oppo-
103. Speed of light in a given site size as that of the object
medium is the indicator of (D) real, inverted and of the same
its size as that of the object

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
158 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

108. Light travels slowest (C) reflected ray

through which of the follow- (D) Index of refraction
ing materials?
(A) diamond 113. Light changes speed as
it travels through various

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) water mediums. What are exam-
(C) glass ples of mediums that light
(D) kerosene can travel through.
(A) snow and ice
109. The image formed by a
convex lens can be (B) air and water

(A) virtual image is not formed (C) cloth and wood

(B) virtual and of same size (D) glass and wood

(C) virtual and diminished 114. what is mirror magnifica-

(D) virtual and magnified tion formula
(A) (m) = h/h’
110. What is the correct order
of the EM spectrum from (B) m=h’/h
short wavelength to long (C) m=distance + object
wavelength?
(D) m=-v/u
(A) UV, visible, radio, microwaves
115. Which characteristic is the
(B) Infrared, microwave, UV, x-
same for all photons?
rays
(A) Speed of the photons
(C) UV, visible violet, visible red,
infrared (B) energy stored in the photons
(D) radio, microwave, UV, (C) wavelength of the photons
gamma (D) all of the above
111. The ratio of the refractive 116. The magnification power
index of red light to blue of plane mirror
light in air is
(A) one
(A) Less than unity
(B) infinite
(B) Equal to unity
(C) less then one
(C) Greater than unity
(D) more then one
(D) Less as well as grater than
unity depending upon the experi- 117. How does the refractive in-
mental arrangement dex of a medium depend
on the wavelength of light
112. The measure of how much used?
light refracts is called
(A) Refractive index of a medium
(A) Refraction decreases with increase in wave-
(B) Law of reflection length of light.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 159

(B) Refractive index of a medium 121. The deviation of light ray

increases with increase in wave- from its path when it trav-
length of light. els from one transparent
medium to another trans-
(C) Refractive index of a medium
parent medium is called
does not depend on the wave-
length of light . (A) reflection
(D) none of above (B) refraction
(C) dispersion
118. A metal coin is at bottom
of a beaker filled with a liq- (D) scattering
uid of refractive index =4/3
122. A concave mirror has ra-
to height of 6cm.To an ob-
dius of curvature 40 cm. An
server looking from above
object of 5 cm tall is placed
surface of liquid, the coin
10 cm in front of a concave
will appear at a depth
mirror. The nature of image
(A) 1.5cm formed is:
(B) 6.75cm (A) Virtual and inverted
(C) 4.5cm (B) Real and erect
(D) 7.5cm (C) Real and inverted
(D) Virtual and erect
119. A lens of power +2.0D is
placed in contact with an- 123. Light travels through a liq-
other lens of power-1.0D, uid at 2.25 × 108 ms−1 . What
the combination will behave is the index of the liquid?
like:-
(A) 1.33
(A) A converging lens of focal
(B) 1.0
length 100 cm
(C) 1.523
(B) A diverging lens of focal
length 100 cm (D) 2.45

(C) A converging lens of focal 124. The refractive index of a

length 50 cm rarer medium with respect
(D) A diverging lens of focal to a denser medium is
length 50 cm (A) 1
(B) greater than 1
120. The path along which light
travels in a homogeneous (C) smaller than 1
medium is called a- (D) negative
(A) beam of light
125. Image formed by a con-
(B) ray of light vex spherical mirror is:
(C) pencil of light (A) virtual
(D) none of these (B) real

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
160 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

(C) enlarged 131. The principle behind work-

(D) inverted ing of optical fibres is:-
(A) total internal reflection
126. Image formed by reflec-
tion from a plane mirror is (B) total external reflection

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) real and inverted (C) total internal refraction
(B) virtual and erect (D) diffraction
(C) real and erect
132. A glass cube having edge
(D) virtual and inverted 4cm is kept on a printed
page. If the refractive index
127. when the light travels
of glass material is 1.5, then
from glass slab to air its
by what amount will the
speed and bends from
printed letters appear to be
the normal .
shifted, while viewed from
(A) stays the same, away the top?
(B) decreases, closer (A) 1.33cm
(C) stays the same, closer (B) 2.33cm
(D) increases, away
(C) 0.6cm
128. The focal length of plane (D) 1.66cm
mirror is
(A) zero 133. The rainbow is a natural
phenomenon that appears
(B) infinite
in the rainy sky. It is caused
(C) one by the
(D) non of these (A) reflection of sunlight by rain
droplets
129. Equation for refraction
oflight at curved surface is (B) refraction of sunlight by rain
droplets
(A) n1/u-n2/v = (n2-n1)/R
(C) magic
(B) n2/u-n1/v = (n2 + n1)/R
(C) n2/v-n1/u = (n2-n1)/R (D) leprechauns

(D) 1/f = 1/v-1/u 134. A thick lens will have

130. Myopia can be removed (A) shorter focal length
by using a lenses of
(B) larger focal length
(A) concave lens
(C) shorter focal length, deviates
(B) convex lens more
(C) cylindrical lens (D) larger focal length, deviates
(D) by surgical removal less

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.10 Refraction of light through glass slab 161

135. When a plane mirror is ro- 139. Which of the following can
tated through a certain an- be ionizing radiation? Mark
gle, the reflected ray turns all that apply.
through twice as much and (A) visible light
the size of the image.
(B) microwaves
(A) is doubled
(C) ultraviolet
(B) is halved
(D) x-rays
(C) becomes infinite
(E) gamma rays
(D) remains the same
140. The optical phenomena,
136. The time taken by the light twinkling of stars, is due to
to cross a glass slab of thick-
(A) Atmospheric reflection
ness 4 mm and refractive in-
dex =3, will be (B) Total reflection
(A) 4x 10-11sec (C) Atmospheric refraction
(B) 16 x 10-11sec (D) Total refraction
(C) 8 x 10-11sec 141. Concave lenses always
(D) 24 x 10-11sec cause light rays to spread
out and can only form
137. A light incident on one of (A) virtual images
the parallel face of a rect-
angular glass slab, emerges (B) real images
out of the opposite parallel (C) concave lens
face
(D) concave mirror
(A) inclined to the incident ray
142. Suppose you stand 2 m in
(B) along the same line as the in-
front of a plane mirror. How
cident ray
far away from you is your
(C) parallel to the incident ray but image?
laterally displaced
(A) 1/2 m
(D) none of above
(B) 1 m
138. A child walks towards (C) 2 m
a fixed plane mirror at a (D) 4 m
speed of 5 km h-1. The ve-
locity of the image with re- 143. Distance between the lens
spect to mirror is- and focal point is called?
(A) 5 km h-1 (A) Focal Point
(B) -5 km h-1 (B) Lens
(C) 10 km h-1 (C) Focal Length
(D) -10 km h-1 (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
162 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

144. Which spherical lens is (A) the image will be shifted back-
also known as converging ward
lens?
(B) the image will not be shifted
(A) Double convex lens
(C) the intensity of the image will
(B) Double concave lens

NARAYAN CHANGDER
decrease
(C) Plano concave (D) both (B) and (C)
(D) None of these
149. Distances measured oppo-
145. is when a rough surface site to the direction of the in-
directs light beams in differ- cident ray are taken as
ent directions.
(A) positive
(A) Refraction
(B) negative
(B) Diffuse reflection
(C) either positive or negative
(C) Absorption
(D) depends on lens
(D) none of above
150. The angle of the incoming
146. When a light ray passes
rays of light are also called
from water (n=1.333) into
the
diamond (n=2.419) at an
angle of 45◦ , its path is (A) Angle of reflection
(A) bent towards the normal (B) Angle of refraction
(B) bent away from the normal (C) Angle of incidence
(C) parallel to the normal (D) Wave angle
(D) not bent
151. Which of the following
147. A ray of white light, in- instruments uses concave
cident upon a glass prism, lens?
is dispersed into its various (A) flashlight
color components. Which
one of the following col- (B) human eye lens
ors experiences the greatest (C) magnifying glass
amount of refraction?
(D) microscope
(A) orange
(B) violet 152. How will you describe the
size of the image formed by
(C) red a convex lens if the object is
(D) green located beyond 2F point?

148. A convex lens forms a (A) point size

real image of a point object (B) diminished
placed on its principal axis.
(C) same size as the object
If the upper half of the lens
is painted black. (D) enlarged

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1.11 Image formation by spherical lenses 163

153. which wavelength gives (A) (A) Angle of incidence is equal

you sunburn? to the angle of reflection
(A) radio (B) B) Angle of incidence is less
(B) microwaves than the angle of reflection
(C) infra red (C) (C) Angle of incidence is
greater than the angle of reflec-
(D) Ultra violet tion
154. When the object is placed (D) (D) None of these
at infinity of a concave lens,
the size of the image formed 157. Why is refractive index
is in a transparent mediun
greater than one?
(A) Diminished
(A) speed of light in vaccum is al-
(B) same size
ways less than speed in a transpar-
(C) Highly diminished, point sized ent medium
(D) Enlarged (B) speed of light in vaccum is al-
(E) highly enlarged ways greater than speed in a trans-
parent medium
155. When white light passes
(C) frequency of wave changes
through a prism, which
when it crosses medium
color of light bends the
most? (D) none of the above
(A) Red 158. The emergent ray and inci-
(B) Green dent ray are
(C) Blue (A) Parallel
(D) Violet (B) Collinear

156. According to laws of re- (C) Laterally displaced

flection of light- (D) Both a and b

1.11 Image formation by spherical lenses

1. If you stand in front of the 2 duced by the lens of the hu-
large plane mirrors at 750 man eye.
angle, how many images
(A) real, inverted, smaller
will you see?
(B) virtual, upright, smaller
(A) 1
(C) real, inverted, bigger
(B) 2
(D) virtual, upright, bigger
(C) 3
(D) 4 3. What kind of mirror is used
in the security mirrors of
2. Describe the image pro- ATM machines to enables

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 164 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

you to see that someone is mirror, strikes the mirror’s

behind your back? surface. The reflected ray
(A) Plane mirror (A) passes through the mirror’s fo-
cal point.
(B) Convex mirror
(B) travels parallel to the mirror’s

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Concave mirror axis.
(D) Converging mirror (C) travels at right angles to the
mirrors’ axis.
4. A light ray, passing through (D) passes through the mirror’s
the focal point of a concave center of curvature.

1.12 Lens formula derivation

1. A 15.0 m object is placed 4. You are asked to design
60.0 m from a convex lens, an astronomical telescope
which has a focal length of at normal adjustment using
15.0 m. Use the thin lens two convex lenses P and
equation to find the distance Q.The power of lens P is 5 D
of the image. and lens Q is 25 D.Calculate
the distance between lenses
(A) 10
P and Q.
(B) 20 (A) 2.04 cm
(C) 30 (B) 20.0 cm
(D) 40 (C) 24.0 cm
(D) 30.0 cm
2. A magnifying glass is an ex-
ample of what type of lens? 5. Focal length of a concave
(A) convex lens is 12cm. Determine the
linear magnification when
(B) concave the object distance is 4cm.
(C) mirror (A) 0.57
(D) Cylinder (B) 0.72
(C) 0.75
3. Focal length of a convex
(D) 0.78
lens is 10cm. Determine the
image distance if the object 6. A 15.0 m object is placed
distance is 14cm 15.0 m from a convex lens,
(A) 30cm which has a focal length of
15.0 m. Find distance of im-
(B) 35cm age.
(C) 45cm (A) No Image
(D) 53cm (B) 10

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens 165

(C) 20 8. Which is the correct formula

(D) 30 for thin lens?

7. convex lens form (A) 1

f + u1 = 1
v

(A) real images (B) 1

− 1v = 1
u f
(B) virtual images
(C) 1
− 1u = 1
(C) both f v

(D) none of above (D) none of above

1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens

1. An object placed between F (D) All of these
and 2F of a convex lens will
produce an image 5. When a lens of focal length
f is cut in two pieces trans-
(A) beyond 2F versely, the focal length of
(B) enlarged each part will become
(C) real and inverted (A) twice
(D) All of these (B) thrice

2. While looking at nearby ob- (C) half

jects, the eiliary muscles (D) infinite
the eyelens so as to its fo-
cal length. 6. The middle vascular coat
that darkens the eye cham-
(A) contract, increase ber and prevents reflection
(B) contract, decrease by absorbing the light rays
(C) expand, increase is

(D) expand, decrease (A) choroid

(B) selera
3. When light passes through a
convex lens, it does this (C) retina

(A) Diverge, or spread apart (D) cornea

(B) Converge, or come together 7. Which of the following state-

(C) Reflect, or bounce off ment is correct?

(D) Create a rainbow (A) A person with myopia can see

distant objects clearly
4. An object placed at F of a (B) A person with hypermetropia
convex mirror will produce can see nearby objects clearly
an image
(C) A person with myopia can see
(A) Behind the mirror nearby objects clearly
(B) Diminished (D) A person with hypermetropia
(C) Virtual and erect cannot see distant objects clearly

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
166 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

8. An object is placed at a dis- from the lens be placed so

tance 2f from the pole of that it forms an erect and vir-
a convex mirror or focal tual image at 10cm from the
length f. The linear magni- lens?
fication is (A) 30 cm

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) 1
3 (B) 15cm
(B) 2
3 (C) 60cm
(C) 3
4 (D) 10cm
(D) 1
13. The combined power of two
9. . An optician prescribes lenses in contact is + 10 D.
spectacles to a patient with When they are separated by
a combination of a convex 20 cm, their power becomes
lens of focal length 40 cm 6.25 D. Find the power of in-
and a concave lens of 25 cm dividual lenses.
focal length. What will be
(A) 7.5, 2.5
the power of spectacles
(B) 8, 7
(A) -1.5
(C) 9, 5
(B) 2.5
(D) 7.5, 2.4
(C) -1.4
(D) 1.54 14. The surface of retina has
about 125 million light sen-
10. The power of a lens is +2.0D sitive
find its focal length and
state the kind of a lens (A) rods only

(A) 50 and convex (B) cones only

(B) 50 and concave (C) rods and cones
(C) 90 and convex (D) neither rods nor cones
(D) 90 and concave 15. A man uses lens of power
+2.0 D in his spectacles. His
11. If a person can see on ob-
son takes out the lens from
ject clearly when it is placed
the spectacles and keeps it
at 25 cm away from him, he
between a small pencil and
is suffering from:
a wall. He observes an in-
(A) myopia verted image on the wall,
(B) hyper metropia which has the same size as
the pencil.
(C) asitfmatism
(A) 50 cm
(D) none of these
(B) 75 cm
12. A concaved lens lens has fo-
cal length of 15cm. At What (C) 100 cm
distance should the object (D) 150 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
1.13 Dioptres & power of a lens 167

16. The eyelens light rays (A) 4

to form real, inverted and (B) 2
highly diminished image on
the (C) 5
(A) converges, retina (D) 9
(B) diverges, retina 21. A convex lens has a fo-
(C) converges, pupil cal length of 0.5m. It has
to combined with a second
(D) diverges, pupil
lens, so that the combina-
17. A person cannot see dis- tion has a power of 1.5
tinctly objects kept beyond diopter. Which of the fol-
2m. This defect can be cor- lowing could be the second
rected by using a lens of lens?
power (A) A concave lens of focal length
(A) +0.5D 2 m.
(B) -0.5D (B) A convex lens of focal length
0.5 m
(C) +0.5D
(C) A concave lens of focal length
(D) -0.2D 0.5 m.
18. The distance between a (D) A convex lens of focal length
spherical lens and the image 2 m.
is-15cm. The lens is
22. An object placed at 2F of a
(A) concave lens
convex lens will produce an
(B) convex lens image
(C) either of the two irrespective of (A) at 2F
the object distance
(B) same size
(D) either concave lens or convex
(C) real and inverted
lens with object between O and F.
(D) All of these
19. A convex lens of power +4
D and a concave lens of 23. The distance between a con-
power 3 D are placed in vex lens and its focal point is
contact. What is equivalent called what?
power of the combination? (A) The focus
(A) 1 (B) The focal length
(B) 2 (C) The wave length
(C) 3 (D) The amplitude
(D) 4
24. An optician prescribes spec-
20. A convex lens has focal tacles to a patient with a
length of 20 cm. find its combination of a convex
power in Dioptres. lens of focal length 40 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
168 Chapter 1. Light – reflection & refraction

and concave lens of 25 cm. (D) All focal length convex lenses
The power of spectacles is are possible.
(A) 6
26. A material that partial
(B) -6 transmission of incident

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 1.5 light is called
(D) -1.5 (A) Semi-permeable
25. A concave lens always (B) Transducer
gives a virtual image. In op-
tical lenses worn by humans (C) Transparent
which of the following state- (D) Translucent
ments is true?
(A) The lens can never be con- 27. The thicker the convex lens,
cave. the its focal length.
(B) In some cases the lens can be (A) Shorter
concave if the focal length is much (B) Longer
larger than 2.5 cm.
(C) Thicker
(C) All focal length concave
lenses are possible. (D) Thinner

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 2. The human eye and the colourful
world

2.1 The human eye

1. Colored part in the human 4. What part of your eye is a
eye is called muscle?
(A) Iris (A) iris
(B) Pupil (B) sclera

(C) both a and b (C) pupil

(D) retina
(D) none of these
5. The image formed by retina
2. The light sensitive cell of human eye is
present on retina and is sen-
sitive to the intensity of light (A) Real and inverted
is: (B) Virtual and inverted
(A) Cones (C) Virtual and erect
(B) Both rods and cones (D) Real and erect
(C) Rods 6. Regulates the amount of
(D) none of above light entering the eye and
gives the eye its color.
3. Which of the following lens (A) Iris
is used to correct the defect
(B) Lens
of hypermetropia?
(C) Pupil
(A) Bi-concave
(D) Retina
(B) Bi-convex
7. The change in focal length of
(C) Bi-focal
an eye lens is caused by the
(D) Plano-convex action of the

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
170 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(A) Pupil 13. Which of the following is

(B) Retina the reason for when the
ice breaks into pieces, the
(C) Ciliary muscles pieces shine brightly?
(D) Iris
(A) Refraction

NARAYAN CHANGDER
8. What is the purpose of the
vitreous humor? (B) Scattering of light

(A) Bend the light (C) Dispersion

(B) inverse the image (D) Total internal reflection
(C) maintain pressure
14. The type of spectacles worn
(D) protect the eye
by a person suffering from
9. The innermost sensory layer the eye defect of myopia is
of the eye that contains pho-
(A) concave lens
toreceptors
(A) Choroid (B) plane lens
(B) Retina (C) convex lens
(C) Sclera (D) none of these
(D) Cornea
15. Name the scientist who was
10. What happens when you fo- the first to use a glass prism
cus on a distant object? to obtain the spectrum of
(A) The lens becomes more sunlight.
round.
(A) Isaac Newton
(B) The radial muscle contracts.
(B) Einstein
(C) The suspensory ligaments be-
come loose. (C) Kepler
(D) The ciliary muscle relaxes. (D) Hans Christian Oersted
11. Following is far-sightedness
16. Which of the following cor-
(A) Myopia
rectly lists the order of the
(B) Hypermetropia parts through which light
(C) Presbyopia passes as it enters the eye?
(D) All of the above (A) cornea, aqueous humor, lens,
vitreous humor
12. This part of the eye fo-
cuses light/images onto the (B) aqueous humor, cornea, lens,
retina. vitreous humor
(A) lens (C) vitreous humor, lens, aque-
(B) cornea ous humor, cornea
(C) cones (D) lens, aqueous humor, cornea,
(D) vitreous humor vitreous humor

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 171

17. For young age children the 22. Rod cells of retina corre-
least distance of distinct vi- sponds to
sion is
(A) Light sensitivity
(A) 1-2 metres
(B) Colour sensitivity
(B) 25 centimetres
(C) Size sensitivity
(C) 7-8 metres
(D) All of these
(D) 7-8 centimetres

18. What part of your eye 23. The sensory organ that in-
sends the messages to and volved in the mechanism of
from your brain? sight
(A) retina (A) ear
(B) optic nerve (B) eye
(C) iris (C) skin
(D) vitreous humor (D) nose
19. Referring to the roundness (E) tongue
of the eye:
(A) Iris 24. A short-sighted person fo-
cuses their image-where?
(B) Choroid
(A) In front of the retina
(C) Vitreous body
(B) Behind the retina
(D) Cornea
(C) On the retina
20. The term “accommodation”
as applied to the eye, refers (D) In front of the lens
to its ability to:
25. This part of the eye allows
(A) Control the light intensity light into the eye.
falling on the retina
(A) pupil
(B) Erect the inverted image
formed on the retina (B) optic nerve
(C) Adjust the focal length of the (C) sclera
lens
(D) lens
(D) Vary the distance between the
lens and retina 26. What is the lens?
21. What part of the eye con- (A) Focuses image of object (on
trols lens shape? retina)
(A) choroid (B) Transmits information to the
(B) lens brain
(C) iris (C) Controls size of pupil.
(D) ciliary body (D) Contains cells that detect light

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
172 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

27. a hypermetropic person (B) Iris

uses spectacles with lens (C) Pupil
to see distinct object
(D) Retina
(A) concave
(B) convex 32. What part of the eye fo-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
cuses light on the retina?
(C) bifocal
(D) none of above (A) lens
(B) retina
28. are 4 requirements
needed to see (C) pupil

(A) Light, Shadow, Dimension, (D) ciliary body

Object
33. Far objects appear blurry
(B) Eyes, Object, Light, Dimen- but close objects appear
sion clear
(C) Light, Eyes, Clear Path, Di- (A) Myopia
mension
(B) Hyperopia
(D) Light, Eyes, Clear Path, Object
(C) Both
29. Which of the following is (D) none of above
the correct order in which
light travels through the 34. Which of the following is
eye? age related?
(A) Pupil, Optic Nerve, Cornea, (A) Myopia
Lens
(B) Hypermetropia
(B) Pupil, Lens, Retina, Optic
Nerve (C) Night blindness

(C) Optic Nerve, Cornea, Retina, (D) Presbyopia

Lens
35. We have 2 forward facing
(D) Cornea, Iris, Pupil, Lens, eyes-because..?
Retina, Optic Nerve
(A) We can see clearer
30. Which eye disease has (B) We can magnify more
blurred images and cloud-
ing of the lens? (C) We can see further

(A) Myopia (D) We can judge distance

(B) Pink Eye 36. Our eyes recognize colours
(C) Cataracts because of
(D) Hypermyopia (A) Cones
(B) Rods
31. The human eye forms the
image of an object at its (C) Nerves
(A) Cornea (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 173

37. When the light rays enters 42. The change of focal length
the eye, most of the refrac- of an eye lens to focus the
tion occurs at the image of the objects at vary-
ing distance is done by the
(A) crystalline lens
action of-
(B) outer surface of cornea
(A) Pupil
(C) iris (B) Retina
(D) pupil (C) Ciliary Muscles
38. During refraction, will (D) Blind Spot
not change.
43. Farsightedness can be
(A) wavelength caused by
(B) frequency (A) A cornea that is flat
(C) speed of light (B) A cornea that is too curved
(D) all of these (C) A cornea or lens that is
smooth and unevenly curved
39. It is a thin, transparent tis- (D) A lens that is less flexible, so
sue that lines along the sur- the light entering the eye con-
face of the eyelids. verges at a point behind the retina
(A) Conjunctiva
44. a mirror that curves in-
(B) Retina wards is
(C) Optic Nerve (A) concave
(D) Cornea (B) conver
(C) convex
40. Which of the following re-
ceptors in the retina of an (D) plain mirror
eye identify the intensity of 45. A:Astigmatism usually is
light? caused by an irregularly
(A) Rods shaped cornea. B:Rainbow
is the natural phenomenon
(B) Cones
in which dispersion takes
(C) Optic nerve place.
(D) All of the above (A) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ are true state-
ments
41. Select the odd one out? (B) Both ‘A’ and ‘B’ are false state-
(A) Excessive curvature of the eye ments.
lens (C) ‘A’ is true while ‘B’ is false.
(B) Elongation of the eyeball (D) ‘A’ is false while ‘B’ is true
(C) Concave lens
46. when we see the nearby ob-
(D) Farsightedness jects the eye lens will

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
174 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(A) become thin What can be the defect with

(B) become thick his/her eyes?

(C) remains same (A) Myopia

(D) none of above (B) Hypermetropia

NARAYAN CHANGDER
47. Refraction of light by the (C) Presbyopia
earth’s atmosphere due to (D) Cataract
variation in air density is
called 52. The type of lens present in
(A) atmospheric reflection our eye is
(B) atmospheric dispersion (A) Concave
(C) atmospheric scattering (B) Convex
(D) atmospheric refraction (C) Both Convex and Concave
48. Bi-focal lens are required to (D) none of above
correct
(A) presbyopia 53. The amount of light enter-
ing human eye is controlled
(B) astigmatism
by
(C) coma
(A) Cornea
(D) myopia
(B) Iris
49. A student has difficulty
reading the blackboard (C) Pupil
while sitting in the last row (D) Ciliary muscles
.What could be the defect
the child is suffering from? 54. The property of persistence
(A) Myopia of vision is used in-
(B) Hypermetropia (A) Colour Vision
(C) Presbyopia (B) Myopia
(D) Astigmatism (C) Presbyopia
50. The least distance of distinct (D) Cinematography
vision for a normal eye is
(A) infinity 55. The convex lens is not used
(B) 25 cm
(A) in camera
(C) 2.5 cm
(D) 25 m (B) as glasses to correct for short
sight
51. A person is unable to see
(C) as glasses to correct for light
distant object clearly. S/he
sight
also finds it difficult to
read newspaper sometimes. (D) all the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 175

56. When an object is placed 61. regulates how much light

closer to eye enters the eye
(A) the ciliary muscles contract (A) cornea
(B) curvature of the eye lens in- (B) iris
creases
(C) eye lens
(C) Eye lens become thicker
(D) retina
(D) All of the above
62. What is another name for
57. What do the lens and
Myopia
cornea have in common?
(A) Asthma
(A) They both can change shape.
(B) Far-sightedness
(B) They both send messages to
the brain. (C) Near sightedness
(C) They both bend light into a fo- (D) Presbyopia
cused beam.
63. What part of the eye are the
(D) none of above
cones located
58. What type of image is (A) Iris
formed by the eye lens on
the retina? (B) lens
(A) Real and erect (C) retina
(B) Virtual and inverted (D) pupil
(C) Real and inverted 64. What is the innermost layer
(D) Virtual and erect and most delicate layer of
the eyeball where photore-
59. Which nerve transmits in- ceptors are located?
formation from the eye to
the brain? (A) Sclera
(A) Optic (B) Choroid
(B) Olfactory (C) Retina
(C) Occulomotor (D) Cornea
(D) Trigeminal 65. The defect of vision in which
60. Cones are light sensitive the person is able to see
cells in the retina that distant object distinctly but
cannot see nearby objects
(A) give you color vision in bright clearly is called
light
(A) far-sightedness
(B) respond in dim light
(B) near-sightedness
(C) give you color vision in dim
light (C) presbyopia
(D) respond in bright light (D) All of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
176 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

66. Least distance of distinct vi- 71. Hypermetropia can be cor-

sion for age group 50-60 is rected by
(A) concave mirror
(A) 50 cm (B) convex mirror

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 100-200 cm (C) concave lens
(C) 70-90 cm (D) convex lens
(D) 7-8 cm 72. When excess aqueous hu-
mor puts too much pressure
67. When proteins build up in on the optic nerve
the lens, causing cloudy vi-
sion (A) Cataracts

(A) Cataracts (B) Glaucoma

(C) Myopia
(B) Glaucoma
(D) Astigmatism
(C) Astigmatism
(D) Myopia 73. The maximum power of ac-
comodation for a person
68. is made up of millions of having normal vision(D=25
little rods and cones cm) in D is

(A) Iris (A) 5

(B) 2
(B) Sclera
(C) 3
(C) Retina
(D) none of these
(D) Optic Nerve
74. is age related.
69. If light is not focused per-
(A) Myopia
fectly on the retina, what
would be the result (B) Hypermetropia

(A) Image will be blurry (C) Night blindness

(D) Presbyopia
(B) No Image will be seen
(C) Image being too bright or two 75. A person cannot see dis-
dark tinctly any objet placed
beyond 40 cm from his
(D) Image being in black or white eye.Calculate the power of
the lens which will enable
70. allows you to see colors
him to see distant stars
(This is a tricky one)
clearly.
(A) Rods and Cones (A) -2.5m
(B) The Retina (B) -2.5cm
(C) Retina and Rods (C) -2.5D
(D) Retina and Cones (D) none of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 177

76. The power of accommoda- (A) 120 million

tion for normal eye is
(B) 6 million
(A) 400 D
(C) 10, 000
(B) 40 D
(D) 100 billion
(C) 4 D
(D) 44 D 82. Following is true for Hyper-
metropia
77. The black opening between
the aqueous humour and (A) It can be corrected by using a
the lens is called convex lens

(A) retina (B) It may arise when focal length

of eye lens is too long
(B) iris
(C) it may arise when eyeball has
(C) cornea
become too small
(D) pupil
(D) all of above
78. What are rods and cones?
83. Which of the following
(A) Rods see in black and white
turns to gray colour, when
cones see in color.
silver bromide exposed in
(B) Cones see in black and white, sunlight?
rods see in color
(A) Silver
(C) Cones see motion, Rods see
images (B) Bromine
(D) Rods see movement, Cones (C) Silver bromide
see images (D) Silver bromine
79. Farsighted
84. Which wave can be trans-
(A) Hyperopia mitted through empty
(B) Myopia space?
(C) Emmetropia (A) electromagnetic
(D) none of above (B) mechanical
80. Which of the following is (C) sound
natural optical lens? (D) tidal
(A) Camera
85. There are approximately
(B) Microscope
cones in the human eye.
(C) Telescope
(A) 6 million
(D) eye lens
(B) 100 billion
81. There are rods in the hu-
(C) 120 million
man eye. Far more than
there are cones. (D) 10, 000

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
178 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

86. If the position of an object (C) Choroid

is it distinct vision, the focal (D) Cornea
length of eye lens is
(A) 2.5 centimetres 92. The retina contains special
sensitive cells. The cells
(B) 2.27 centimetres

NARAYAN CHANGDER
help us see colors and de-
(C) 25 centimetres tails.
(D) 22.7 centimetres (A) rod
87. A + d = i1 + i2 here i1 and (B) eyelashes
i2 refers to , angles. (C) cone
(A) incident, refract (D) iris
(B) refract, incident
93. what is the cornea?
(C) refract, emergence
(A) anterior transparent coat
(D) incidence, emergence
(B) white fibrous tissue that covers
88. What is the ciliary muscle? most of the eye
(A) Transmits information to the (C) regulates amount of light that
brain goes into the light
(B) Controls shape of the eye. (D) none of above
(C) Opening to the inner eye. 94. Having two eyes facilitates
(D) Controls size of pupil. in A:Increasing the field
of viewB:Bringing three-
89. The lens used for correction dimensional viewC:Developing
of hypermetropia is the concept of distance/sizeThen
(A) Concave the correct option is/are
(B) Convex (A) A only
(C) Diverging (B) A and B only
(D) none of above (C) B only

90. Which of these is true? (D) A, B and C

(A) Cone cells detect light and 95. These photoreceptors have
dark three different pigments.
(B) Rods focus light Each receptor is associated
with its own neuron result-
(C) Cones detect color ing in crisp, clear color vi-
(D) Rods detect color sion
(A) hair cells
91. The outer layer of the eye is
the (B) rods
(A) Sclera (C) cones
(B) Retina (D) lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 179

96. What is the iris? 101. Two lenses of power-

(A) Controls size of pupil. 1.75D and +2.75D are
placed in contact. What is
(B) Focuses image of object (on the focal length of the com-
retina). bination?
(C) Transmits information to the (A) 50cm
brain.
(B) 100cm
(D) Contains cells that detect
light. (C) 75cm
(D) 125cm
97. Power of a lens is ex-
pressed in 102. What is the correct route
(A) Millimetre that light rays take as they
enter the eye?
(B) Metre
(A) Cornea => conjunctiva =>
(C) Centimetre
pupil => retina
(D) Dioptre
(B) Cornea => lens => pupil =>
98. What is the function of the retina
lens? (C) Conjunctiva => cornea =>
(A) clear structure that bends light lens => retina
to focus on the retina (D) Conjunctiva => lens =>
(B) thin structure that controls the pupil => retina
pupil
103. The white part of the eye
(C) clear, watery fluid is the
(D) where the optic nerve attaches (A) Sclera
99. What is the cornea? (B) Retina
(A) clear structure that bends light (C) Choroid
to focus on the retina (D) Cornea
(B) white outer layer of the eyeball
104. The pupil of an eye
(C) clear layer that forms front of
changes in size to adjust for
the eye
(D) gel that fills space
(A) objects at different distances
100. Cataract: (B) objects of different sizes
(A) infammation of the transpar- (C) different colours
ent membrane that lines your lids
(D) different amounts of light
(B) eye condition that damage op-
tic nerve 105. A colored muscle that con-
(C) a condition in which the eye trols the size of the pupil
lens become opaque (A) retina
(D) none of above (B) cornea

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
180 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) iris (C) hypermetropia

(D) choroid (D) none of these

106. The angle of vision for a 111. The image properties on

healthy human being is retina of eye (i) real,

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(ii) inverted, (iii) virtual, (iv)
(A) About 30 degrees
erect
(B) About 60 degrees (A) (i) and (ii)
(C) About six degrees (B) (i), (ii) and (iv)
(D) About 90 degrees (C) (ii) and (iv)
107. Sound is initially collected (D) (i), (ii) and (iii)
by the outer ear, also called
112. When the eyeball is too
the-
long causing Nearsighted-
(A) Melleus ness
(B) Pincus (A) Myopia
(C) Eardrum (B) Hyperopia
(D) Auricle or pinna (C) Asigmatism
(D) Presbyopia
108. Collects the image on the
back of the eye and sends 113. An eye chart used to ana-
the image to the optic nerve. lyze the condition of the eye
(A) optic nerve (A) Snell chart
(B) Retina (B) Snellen chart
(C) Neuron (C) Nell chart
(D) cornea (D) Smelling chart

109. What is the function of the 114. The eye lens forms im-
pupil? age of an object on the
retina.
(A) Sends messages picked up by
the retina to the brain (A) Real and inverted
(B) The hole that controls the dif- (B) Real and erect
ferent amounts of light (C) Virtual and inverted
(C) the colored part of the eye that (D) Virtual and erect
controls the size of the pupil
115. Search 1 Questions
(D) transparent jelly like fluid that Change Question Order
fills the eye and refracts light Question 1 Q.
110. What is the other name of (A) a
old hypermetropia? (B) b
(A) myopia (C) c
(B) contradict (D) d

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 181

116. Rainbow is formed due to 121. What works as the screen

of light in the eye, where the image
lands?
(A) refraction
(A) cornea
(B) reflection
(B) lens
(C) dispersion
(C) retina
(D) none of above
(D) optic nerve
117. At the angle of minimum
122. is the unit of power of
deviation (D), the angle of in-
lens?
cidence is equal to the angle
of (A) metre
(A) reflection (B) centimetre

(B) refraction (C) dioptre

(D) hertz
(C) emergence
(D) critical angle 123. The gel-like substance that
reinforces the eyeball and
118. Which of the following prevents it from collapsing
lenses are used to correct inward is the
presbyopia of a person? (A) vitreous humor
(A) Bi-concave (B) scleral venous sinus (canal of
(B) Bi-convex Schlemm)
(C) Bi-focal (C) ciliary body

(D) Plano-convex (D) choroid

(E) aqueous humor
119. The power of lens is-2D, its
focal length is 124. Which of the following is
the back part of the human
(A) -2m
eye
(B) 0.5 m (A) Retina
(C) -0.05 cm (B) Lens
(D) -0.50 m (C) Cornea

120. A person with can see (D) Pupil

distant objects clearly but 125. Type of photoreceptor that
cannot see objects at near is active in bright light and
distance. perceives color?
(A) Myopia (A) fovea centralis
(B) Hypermetropia (B) cones
(C) Presbyopia (C) rods
(D) None (D) optic disk

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
182 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

126. The value of least distance 131. When a beam of white

of clear vision is about light falls on a glass prism,
cm. the colour of light which will
deviate least is:
(A) 55
(A) Violet

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 40
(B) Red
(C) 20
(C) Green
(D) 25
(D) blue
127. Which of the following is
wrong statement 132. The Pupil is:

(A) Iris is a very thin layer (A) Sensitive membrane

(B) Image forms on retina (B) The opening in the center of

the iris
(C) Cones identify the colour
(C) tear glands
(D) Rods doesn’t identify the inten-
sity of light (D) lines the eyelid

133. The retina contains these

128. The whites of your eyes is
cells which are sensitive to
called the
light and convert light to
(A) pupil nerve impulses. These cells
(B) cornea are called

(C) sclera (A) optic nerves

(D) lens (B) ciliary muscles

(C) photoreceptors
129. transports light to the
(D) lens
brain to make an image
(A) Pupil 134. The distance between eye-
lens and retina is
(B) Optic Nerve
(A) 2.5 centimetres
(C) Rods and Cones
(B) 25cm
(D) Retina
(C) 25 metres
130. When white light enters a (D) 25 millimetres
glass prism from air, the an-
gle of deviation is least for 135. The Vitamin essential for
healthy eyes is
(A) Blue light (A) Vit.A
(B) yellow light (B) Vit.B
(C) violet light (C) Vit.C
(D) red light (D) Vit.D

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 183

136. What is the name of the (A) iris

tough, white outer layer of
(B) retina
the eye?
(A) Sclera (C) cornea

(B) Choroid (D) choroid

(C) Cornea
141. What is the relation-
(D) Conjunctiva ship between eyesight and
light?
137. The bundle of fibers that
carry information from the (A) light shines on all object allow-
retina to the brain is called ing people to see them
the (B) Light shines through all ob-
(A) optic nerve jects allowing people to see them
(B) blind spot (C) Light enters the eye before
(C) vitreous humor striking an object, allowing people
to see the object
(D) aqueous humor
(D) light reflects off an object and
138. The vitreous humor is then enters the eye allowing peo-
a liquid inside of your ple to see the object
eye. When light passes
from the lens into the vit- 142. The ability of the eye lens
reous, the light changes to adjust its focal length is
medium. What happens to called
light because of this medium
change? (A) Accommodation
(A) Light is transmitted. (B) Accomplish
(B) Light is reflected. (C) Composition
(C) Light is refracted. (D) None of the above
(D) Light is absorbed.
143. Which of the following
139. Which lens is thicker at phenomena of light are in-
the middle and thinner at its volved in the formation of a
edges? rainbow?
(A) convex lens (A) Reflection, refraction and dis-
(B) concave lens persion
(C) Plano concave (B) Refraction, dispersion and to-
(D) plano convex tal internal reflection
(C) Refraction, dispersion and in-
140. What part of the eye is
ternal reflection
a clear protective structure
that allows light to enter the (D) Dispersion, scattering and to-
eye? tal internal reflection

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
184 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

144. The stars in sky appears 149. Which part of the eye is
closer than actually are due just behind the pupil?
to (A) Lens
(A) diffraction of light (B) Macula

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) scattering of light (C) Nerves
(C) reflection of light (D) Iris
(D) refraction of light
150. Name the corrective lens
used for hypermetropia
145. Retina:
(A) Concave lens
(A) delicate membrane lining the
eyeball (B) convex lens
(B) respond to bright color (C) Bifocal lens

(C) carries visual info to brain (D) Diverging lens

(D) lines the eyelids 151. Nearsightedness is also

known as
146. The star appear shifted
(A) Myopia
from their actual position
due to the phenomenon of: (B) Hyperpopia
(A) Diffraction of light (C) Presbyopia

(B) Scattering of light (D) none of the above

(C) Refraction of light 152. When ALL of the light is

blocked
(D) Reflection of light
(A) translucent
147. Which part of the eye is (B) opaque
the outer white part of the
eye? (C) transparent

(A) cornea (D) none of above

(B) iris 153. The atmospheric refrac-

tions of light causes the twin-
(C) ciliary body
kling of
(D) sclera
(A) planets only
148. The least distance of dis- (B) stars only
tinct vision for a young adult (C) planets and stars
with normal vision is about
(D) stars and satellites
(A) 25m
154. Choose the odd one out.
(B) 2.5cm
(A) Twinkling of stars is due to
(C) 25cm
the atmospheric refraction of
(D) 2.5m starlight.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 185

(B) The path of the rays of light 159. Astigmatism:

varies, the apparent position of
(A) Eye with poor vision
star fluctuates.
(C) The atmospheric refraction (B) a defect in the eye or in a lens
occurs in the medium of constant (C) where eye lens becomes
refractive index. opaque
(D) The starlight, on entering the (D) damages optic nerve
earth’s atmosphere, undergoes
refraction before it reaches the 160. When the eyeball is too
earth. short, causing Farsighted-
ness
155. Accomodation of the eye
is the ability of to adjust (A) Hyperopia
itself
(B) Myopia
(A) eye lens
(C) Glaucoma
(B) cornea
(D) Astigmatism
(C) pupil
(D) iris 161. Lazy Eye:
156. This jelly like fluid helps (A) An eye with poor vision that is
the eye maintain it’s shape. mainly caused by under use
(A) Cytoplasm (B) A defect in the eye or in a lens
(B) Bile (C) inflammation of the mem-
(C) Pancreatic Juices brane that lines your eyelid
(D) Vitreous Humor (D) damages optic nerve
157. the ability of the lens to
162. When light rays enter the
change shape
eye, most of the refraction
(A) chiasma occurs at the
(B) macula lutea (A) iris
(C) refraction
(B) pupil
(D) accomodation
(C) crystalline lens
158. At noon the sun appears
(D) outer surface of the cornea
white as [NCERT Exemplar
Problems] 163. Which structure changes
(A) light is least scattered shape to focus light on the
(B) all the colours of the white retina?
light are scattered away (A) iris
(C) blue colour is scattered the (B) lens
most
(C) pupil
(D) red colour is scattered the
most (D) sclera

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
186 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

164. What is the aqueous hu- by the cornea and the lens is
mor? called the
(A) fibers that hold the lens in (A) blind spot
place
(B) sclera
(B) thin structure that controls

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) retina
pupil
(D) optic nerve
(C) clear, watery fluid
(D) helps refract light to the retina 169. This part protects the eye,
especially the iris, pupil and
165. When white light enters a lens.
prism, it gets split into its
constituent colours. This is (A) rods
due to (B) cornea
(A) different refractive index for (C) optic nerve
different wavelength of each
colour (D) retina

(B) each colours has same veloc- 170. In the visible spectrum
ity in the prism. (VIBGYOR), the colour hav-
(C) prism material have high den- ing the shortest wavelength
sity. is
(D) Scattering of light (A) Green
(B) Red
166. On what factor does the
heat genetrated in a conduc- (C) Violet
tor depend upon? (D) Blue
(A) Directly proportional to time
171. What is the fluid portion
(B) Inversely proportional to time
on the inside of the eye
(C) Directly proportional to den- called?
sity
(A) Aqueous humor
(D) Inversely proportional to mass
(B) Vitreous humor
167. With both eyes open, a (C) Fovea Centralis
person’s field of view is
about (D) Anterior humor

(A) 3600 172. The maximum and mini-

(B) 1500 mum focal length of eye lens
are
(C) 1800
(A) 25 cm / 22.7 cm
(D) 900
(B) 2.5 cm / 2.27 cm
168. The layer of light-sensitive
(C) 2.5 m / 22.7 m
cells at the back of the eye
that detects images focused (D) 25 cm / 50 cm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 187

173. This part of the eye carries 178. Blue colour of the sky is
the message from your eye due to the phenomenon of:
to the part of your brain that (A) Reflection of light
controls vision.
(B) Refraction of light
(A) cornea
(C) Dispersion of light
(B) lens
(D) Scattering of light
(C) optic nerve
(D) retina 179. What is/are the defect(s)
of eye?
174. What part of the eye is the (A) Myopia
colored, muscular portion of
the eye which controls pupil (B) Hypermetropia
size? (C) Presbyopia
(A) iris (D) All of the above
(B) lens 180. Far point of a normal eye
(C) choroid is situated at
(D) ciliary body (A) 25 cm
(B) Infinity
175. Rods respond to:
(C) 50 cm
(A) dim light
(D) 400 cm
(B) smell
(C) food 181. The connects the eyes to
the brain
(D) Bright color
(A) retina
176. To see an object comfort-
(B) cornea
ably and distinctly, we must
hold it about cm from our (C) optic nerve
eyes. (D) pupil
(A) 10
182. What is the outer tough
(B) 25 layer of the eye?
(C) 15 (A) Lens
(D) infinity (B) iris
177. Splitting of white light into (C) pupil
seven colours on passing (D) Sclera
through the glass prism is
called- 183. Most of the refraction of
light rays entering the eye
(A) Reflection occurs at the outer surface
(B) Refraction of
(C) Dispersion (A) Cornea
(D) Scattering (B) Iris

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
188 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) Retina 189. What part of the eye

(D) Ciliary muscles bends light to focus it on the
retina?
184. Following controls and (A) Retina
regulates the amount of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
light entering the eye (B) Iris

(A) Iris (C) Optic Nerve

(B) Pupil (D) Lens

(C) Retina 190. A person having a myopic

(D) Corena eye used the concave lens of
focal length of 50 cm. Calcu-
185. What is pink eye? late the power of a lens.
(A) and eye condition that dam- (A) +2 D
ages the optic nerve (B) +0.2 D
(B) an eye with poor vision
(C) -0.2 D
(C) An inflammation of the trans-
(D) -2 D
parent membrane that lines your
eyelid 191. These are hair-thin
(D) your face:) threads of glass that trans-
mit laser light that has been
186. The largest sensory organ encoded with messages
(A) eye (A) Optic fibers
(B) tongue (B) Optic nerve
(C) ear (C) Optometrist
(D) skin (D) Ophthalmologist
(E) nose
192. What is the far point and
187. What is the far point of hu- near point of the human eye
man eye with normal vision with normal vision?
(A) Infinity (A) 1km & 2.5m
(B) 25cm (B) 25m & 25cm
(C) 2.5 m (C) 250m & 25cm
(D) 25 m (D) Infinity & 25cm

188. Human eye forms image 193. What is the first clear part
of an object at its of the eye
(A) cornea (A) sclera
(B) iris (B) pupil
(C) retina (C) cornea
(D) pupil (D) lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 189

194. What part of the eye has (C) receives light and sends it to
the highest concentration of brain
rods and cones? (D) transmits light rays to retina
(A) optic nerve
199. Which layer inside the eye
(B) fovea centralis contains rods and cones?
(C) optic disk (A) Choroid
(D) iris (B) Sclera
195. When the eye is focussed (C) Retina
on an object very far away, (D) Optic nerve
the focal length of the eye
lens is 200. This part of the eye
changes shape to control the
(A) maximum amount of light that enters
(B) minimum the eye. It is also known as
(C) equal to that of the crystalline the colored part of the eye.
lens What is it called?

(D) half of its maximum focal (A) pupil

length (B) lens
(C) iris
196. Due to atmospheric refrac-
tion of sunlight, the time (D) retina
form sunrise to sunset is
201. Near and far points of a
lengthened by
young person normal eye
(A) 6 minutes respectively are
(B) 2 minutes (A) 0 and infinity
(C) 4 minutes (B) 0 and 25 cm
(D) 5 minutes (C) 25 cm and infinity

197. The muscular diaphragm (D) 25 cm and 150 cm

that controls the size of pupil 202. What part of the eye are
is most of the cones located
(A) Retina (A) Iris
(B) Cornea (B) lens
(C) Iris (C) retina
(D) Ciliary muscle (D) pupil
198. What does the optic nerve 203. The following controls the
do? light entering the human
(A) transmit impulses from retina eye
to brain (A) Iris
(B) helps the eye focus (B) Retina

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
190 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) Pupil 209. What does the retina do?

(D) Cornea (A) transmit impulses from retina
204. The image formed on to brain
retina is (B) helps the eye focus

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Erect and Magnified (C) receives light and sends it to
(B) Erect and Diminished brain
(C) Inverted and Diminished (D) transmits light rays to retina
(D) none of above
210. Which of the following re-
205. A person can see far ob- ceptors in the retina identify
jects clearly but can not see the colour?
near objects clearly. What
defect that person have? (A) Cones
(A) Myopia (B) Rods
(B) Hypermetropia (C) Optic nerve
(C) Cataract
(D) Iris
(D) Presbyopia
206. Eardrum AKA- 211. Which flow is correct
to see the nearby objects
(A) tympanic membrane clearly?
(B) middle ear
(A) Ciliary muscles relaxed-lens
(C) auricle becomes thinner-focal length in-
(D) pinna creases

207. The muscular diaphragm (B) Ciliary muscles contracts-lens

that controls the size of the becomes thicker-focal length de-
pupil is creases
(A) cornea (C) Ciliary muscles relaxed-lens
(B) ciliary muscles becomes thicker-focal length in-
creases
(C) Iris
(D) retina The muscular di- (D) Ciliary muscles contracts-lens
aphragm that controls the size of becomes thinner-focal length de-
the pupil is creases

208. Which colour deviates the 212. The muscles of iris control
least when it passes through
a prism?
(A) focal length of eye lens
(A) Violet
(B) opening of pupil
(B) Blue
(C) Red (C) shape of crystalline lens
(D) Green (D) optic nerve

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 191

213. Near and far points of a 218. What does the iris do?
young person normal eye
(A) transmits light rays to retina
respectively are
(B) helps the eye focus
(A) 0 and infinity
(C) allows light to enter eye
(B) 0 and 25 cm
(D) regulates how much light en-
(C) 25 cm and infinity
ters the eye
(D) 25 cm and 150 cm.
219. It is composed of layers
214. This structure controls the of blood vessels and connec-
size of the lens tive tissues . Nourishes the
back of the eye
(A) Cilliary Muscles
(A) Retina
(B) Choroid Layer
(B) Choroid
(C) Biceps
(C) Optic nerve
(D) Cones
(D) Sclera
215. For a young adult with
normal vision, the near 220. What is the retina?
point is
(A) Contains cells that detect light
(A) 10 cm
(B) Controls shape of the eye
(B) 20 cm
(C) Outermost transparent layer
(C) 25 cm of eye. Begins focusing process.
(D) 35 cm (D) Transmits information to the
brain
216. How many layers does the
human eye consist of? 221. The is the dark circle in
the center of your iris that
(A) 2
lets light into the inner eye.
(B) 3
(A) retina
(C) 4
(B) cornea
(D) 5
(C) iris
217. This part of the eye has (D) pupil
photoreceptors called rods
and cones. They help us to 222. What does the middle ear
see color and see at night. It consist of?
is called:
(A) incus, eardrum, middle ear
(A) optic nerve
(B) melleus, Incus, and stapes
(B) brain
(C) mellus, incus, and auricle
(C) retina
(D) mellus, incus, and tympanic
(D) cornea membrane

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
192 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

223. Farsightedness 228. The maximum angle, at

(A) Myopia which we able to see the
whole object is degrees.
(B) Hyperopia
(C) Both (A) 40

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) none of above (B) 50

224. What might happen if the (C) 60

lens of your eye became
(D) 100
damaged?
(A) Your eyes wouldn’t be able to 229. This is the structure that
focus properly. transmits images to the
(B) You wouldn’t be able to see in brain.
color.
(A) Blind Spot
(C) All the images you would see
would be upside down. (B) Retina
(D) none of above (C) Aqueous Humor
225. The function of the human (D) Optic Nerve
eye is to
(A) focus light rays to produce im- 230. short sightedness can be
ages of objects corrected by lens
(B) capture sound waves and con- (A) convex
vert them to images
(B) bi focal
(C) capture electrical energy and
transform it to brain waves (C) concave
(D) capture light waves and con- (D) none
vert them to mechanical energy
226. The deviation of which 231. Different types of waves
colour light is taken as mean on the electromagnetic spec-
deviation? trum have different applica-
tions. Which statement is
(A) Red
correct?
(B) Orange
(A) The human body radiates in-
(C) Yellow
frared waves.
(D) Blue
(B) Sunburn on human skin is a re-
227. bifocal lens is used to cor- sult of microwaves.
rect this defect.
(C) Information is commonly
(A) Myopia transmitted with gamma waves.
(B) hypermetropia
(D) Images of bones for medical
(C) cataract treatment are taken with ultravio-
(D) presbyopia let waves.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 193

232. The human eye len’s focal 236. What do tears do?
length range between (A) The allow the eye to feel sad-
(A) 0 to 2.5 centimetres ness
(B) 2.5 to 25 centimetres (B) They relieve pressure in the
eye
(C) 2.5 to 2.27 centimetres
(C) They wash away any dirt and
(D) None of the above provide moisture to the eye
233. What part of the eye sits (D) They don’t do anything
on the outer surface of the
cornea and lines the eyelids. 237. The coloured light having
This structure produces mu- the maximum speed in glass
cous prism is

(A) iris (A) blue

(B) green
(B) lens
(C) violet
(C) retina
(D) yellow
(D) conjunctiva
238. changes shape to allow us
234. An increase in ocular pres- to focus near and far and
sure may develop into near again
for a patient. The patient
may have mild visual distur- (A) lens
bances and little to no pain. (B) cornea
(A) cataract (C) iris
(B) glaucoma (D) none of above
(C) conjunctivitis 239. Accommodation of eye
(D) astigmatism lens is maximum at the age
group of
235. The white light dispersed (A) 7-8
into a spectrum of seven col-
ors. What will happen if (B) 10-15
a second identical prism is (C) 16-40
placed in an inverted posi-
(D) 40-100
tion?
(A) Seven colors will further break 240. A convex lens forms a vir-
down into 49 colors tual magnified image when
the object is kept
(B) Spectrum will recombine into
the white light (A) At 2F

(C) No change (B) Between F and 2F

(D) Spectrum will recombine and (C) At F

become blue light (D) Between F and optical center

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
194 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

241. Which of the following 246. A camera employs lens

colour of white light is least to form images.
deviated by the prism?
(A) diverging, real
(A) Green
(B) diverging, virtual

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Violet
(C) converging, real
(C) Indigo
(D) converging, virtual
(D) Yellow
247. If the optic nerve is sev-
242. Opens and closes to adjust ered, what would be the re-
the total amount of light en- sult
tering the eye.
(A) Image will be blurry
(A) Pupil
(B) No Image will be seen
(B) Sclera
(C) Image being too bright or two
(C) Cornea dark
(D) Human lens (D) Image being in black or white
243. send signals to the
248. What is the sclera?
brain
(A) clear structure that bends light
(A) Optical nerve
to focus on the retina
(B) Aqueous Humour
(B) white outer layer of the eyeball
(C) Viterous humour
(C) clear layer that forms front of
(D) Eye lens the eye

244. The place where the op- (D) gel that fills space
tic nerve leaves the retina,
where there are no light- 249. The iris in a human can be
sensitive cells is the (A) brown
(A) lens (B) green
(B) cornea (C) blue
(C) blind spot (D) all of the above
(D) sclera
250. Myopia and Hyperme-
245. Light enters the eye tropia can be corrected by
through a transparent mem- (A) Concave and plano-convex
brane known as lens
(A) Cornea (B) Concave and convex lens
(B) Pupil (C) Convex and concave lens
(C) Retina
(D) Plano-concave lens for both
(D) Iris defects.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 195

251. The farthest point upto (C) Black hole

which the eye can see ob-
(D) Optic spot
jects clearly is for a nor-
mal eye. 256. What happens when the
(A) 25 cm radial muscle contracts?
(B) 15 cm (A) The pupil constricts.
(C) infinity (B) The pupil dilates.
(D) 1 km (C) The lens is stretched thin.
252. The far point of a myopic (D) The lens becomes more
person is 60 cm in front of round.
the eye. What is the nature
of the lens and power of the 257. Human eye acts like a
lens required to correct the (A) endoscope
problem?
(B) microscope
(A) P = +1.67 DConvex lens
(B) P =-1.67 DConcave lens (C) telescope

(C) P = + 0.0167 DConvex lens (D) camera

(D) P =-0.0167 DConcave lens 258. the black opening be-
253. The thick, tough, white tween the aqueous humour
outer covering of the eye- and the lens is called
ball is called the (A) retina
(A) sclera (B) iris
(B) lens (C) cornea
(C) pupil (D) pupil
(D) cornea
259. the black opening at the
254. in order to correct the de- back of cornea is called
fect because of the weak-
ening of ciliary muscles we (A) retina
need lens (B) iris
(A) concave (C) sclera
(B) convex (D) pupil
(C) bifocal
260. This part of the eye sends
(D) none of above
messages to the brain
255. Name the spot where no (A) rods
image is formed on the
retina (B) retina
(A) Greenspot (C) optic nerve
(B) Black spot (D) cones

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
196 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

261. Choroid: (C) 2 hours

(A) transparent coat (D) 20 minutes
(B) Blood supply
267. The blind spot on the
(C) eye color retina has

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) roundness of eye
(A) numerous nerve endings
262. When white light passes (B) no nerve endings
through a prism, it splits into
its component colours. This (C) few nerve endings
phenomenon is called (D) nerve ending which increase
(A) Spectrum in number as age advances
(B) Reflection
268. The ability of eye lens to
(C) Refraction adjust its focal length to
(D) Dispersion form a sharp image of the
object at varying distances
263. on the tongue are the on the retina is called
receptors for taste (use the
exact word) (A) Power of observation of the
eye
(A) Taste receptors
(B) Power of accommodation of
(B) Olfactory Receptors
the eye
(C) Taste Buds
(C) Power of adjustment of the eye
(D) Olfactory Buds
(D) Power of enabling of the eye
264. this problem arises due to
foggy or cloudy lens . 269. The human eye can focus
(A) presbyopia on objects at different dis-
tances by adjusting the focal
(B) myopia legnth of the eye lens. This
(C) cataract is due to
(D) hypermetropia (A) presbyopia
265. The shape of eye-ball is (B) accommodation
nearly (C) near-sightedness
(A) Elliptical
(D) far-sightedness
(B) Oval
(C) Circular 270. Where does the image
form in a human eye?
(D) Spherical
(A) Cornea
266. We can see Sun before ac-
tual sunrise by about (B) Retina
(A) 2 seconds (C) Pupil
(B) 2 minutes (D) Iris

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 197

271. What will be the colour (C) spherical

of the emergent light when (D) conical
white light is incident on
a thin walled hollow glass 276. If the Iris can’t dilate prop-
prism. erly, what would be the re-
(A) white sult?
(B) green (A) Image will be blurry
(C) red (B) No Image will be seen
(D) could not be predicted (C) Image being too bright or two
dark
272. As light from a far off star
comes down towards the (D) Image being in black or white
earth 277. In human eye, the image
(A) it bends away from the normal is formed
(B) it bends towards the normal (A) Behind Retina
(C) it does not bend at all (B) In Front of Retina
(D) it is reflected back (C) On Retina
273. a student has difficulty (D) In Between Lens and Retina
in reading the black board
while sitting in the last row. 278. Near point for the eye is
what could be his defect of situated at
vision (A) 400 cm
(A) short sightedness (B) Infinity
(B) long sightedness (C) 25 cm
(C) astigmatism (D) 100 cm
(D) none of above
279. The colour of sky is due to
274. This is when some light
passes through, but some (A) reflection
light does NOT pass
through. (B) refraction

(A) opaque (C) dispersion

(B) translucent (D) scattering
(C) transparent 280. Attached to the crystalline
(D) none of above lens and responsible for
changing its shape
275. The shape of rainbow as
(A) Ciliary muscle
seen from an airplane dur-
ing midday is (B) Crystalline Lens
(A) semicircle (C) Retina
(B) circle (D) Iris

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
198 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

281. The splitting up of white (A) Dispersion of light

light into 7 colours on pass- (B) Scattering of light
ing through a glass prism is
(C) Total internal reflection of light
called
(D) Reflection of light from the
(A) refraction

NARAYAN CHANGDER
earth View Answer
(B) deflection
286. Type of photoreceptor that
(C) dispersion functions in low light and
(D) scattering creates shades of gray
(A) retina
282. Out of the following, the
colour of light having max- (B) rod
imum wavelength is (C) cone
(A) violet (D) choroid
(B) indigo 287. The clear tissue that covers
(C) green the front of the eye.
(D) orange (A) Lens
(B) Pupil
283. The focal length of the
eye lens increases when eye (C) Iris
muscles (D) Cornea
(A) are relaxed and lens becomes 288. Function of eyelids in-
thinner cludes
(B) contract and lens becomes (A) tears are spread over eye
thicker
(B) dust particles are wiped off
(C) are relaxed and lens becomes (C) dust particles are cleared off
thicker
(D) all of these
(D) contract and lens becomes
thinner 289. which colour bends the
most on refraction through a
284. Which of the following is triangular prism?
the coloured part that we
(A) red
see in an eye?
(B) blue
(A) Pupil
(C) green
(B) Cornea
(D) violet
(C) Iris
290. A person with a myopic
(D) Retina
eye cannot see objects be-
285. Which of the following yond 1.2 metres distinctly .
phenomena contributes sig- What should be the type of
nificantly to the reddish ap- corrective lens used to re-
pearance of the sun at sun- store proper vision
rise or sunset? (A) Concave lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 199

(B) Convex lens 296. Which of the following is

(C) Bifocal lens true about the lens of the hu-
man eye?
(D) Concave mirror
(A) Clear tissue that covers the
291. Which part of the eye eye.
opens in dark places and (B) Opening of the eye.
closes in bright places?
(C) Focuses light on the retina.
(A) Cornea
(D) Regulates amount of light.
(B) Retina
297. What is the black hole
(C) Pupil
at the center of your eye
(D) Lens called?
292. An object is placed at the (A) Macula
centre of the curvature of a (B) Iris
concave mirror. What is the
(C) Pupil
distance between its image
and the pole? (D) Cornea
(A) Equal to f 298. One cannot see through
(B) Between f and 2f the fog, because
(C) Equal to 2f (A) refractive index of the fog is
very high
(D) Greater than 2f
(B) light suffers total reflection at
293. What does the sclera do? droplets
(A) protects the eye (C) fog absorbs light
(B) helps the eye focus (D) light is scattered by the
(C) allows light to enter eye droplets

(D) transmits light rays to retina 299. The phenomenon of light

responsible for the working
294. Cones respond to: of human eye is
(A) Dim light (A) Refraction
(B) Food (B) Reflection
(C) Smell (C) Persistence of vision
(D) Bright colors (D) Power of accommodation
295. The colored light that re- 300. A concave lens of suitable
fracts most while passing focal length is used for cor-
through a prism is recting a-
(A) Red (A) Myopic eye
(B) Yellow (B) Hypermetropic eye
(C) Blue (C) Both a and b
(D) Violet (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
200 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

301. How are rods different (C) cornea

than cones? (D) blind spot
(A) rods are only located at the
306. What is the space inside
side of the eye
the iris called?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) cones are see color whereas
(A) pupil
rods cannot
(B) ciliary body
(C) there are many more cones
than rods (C) lens
(D) rods are more sensitive in (D) choroid
bright light 307. This structure is the black,
center part of the eye. Light
302. Light entering the eye is fo-
enters the eye here.
cused behind the retina in-
stead of directly on it, ob- (A) Iris
jects close to the eye look (B) Optic Nerve
blurry
(C) Pupil
(A) Iris
(D) Lens
(B) Near Sighted
308. when ciliary muscles con-
(C) Astigmatism tract it the curvature of
(D) Far Sighted eye lens
(A) increases
303. The image formed on
retina of human eye is (B) decreases
(A) real and inverted (C) none of the above
(B) virtual and erect (D) none of above
(C) real and erect 309. For an eye lens, itf focal
(D) virtual and inverted length is
(A) increasable
304. The focal length of con-
(B) both reducible and in-
cave lens is 1000mm then
creasable
it’s power will be
(C) fixed
(A) 0.5D
(D) reducible
(B) -0.5D
(C) 1D 310. This type of light sensi-
tive (photosensitive) cell de-
(D) -1D tects movement and black &
white
305. The is a muscle that con-
trols how much light enters (A) Sclera
the eye. (B) Cornea
(A) iris (C) Cones
(B) pupil (D) Rods

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 201

311. This part focuses light onto 316. This is a spot that you can’t
the retina see
(A) lens (A) Peripheral Vision
(B) cornea (B) Pupil
(C) Cornea
(C) pupil
(D) Blind Spot
(D) iris
317. Hypermetropia is cured by
312. This phenomenon is re- using
sponsible for rainbow for-
(A) concave lens spectacle
mation.
(B) Bifocal lens spectacle
(A) refraction
(C) convex lens spectacle
(B) dispersion
(D) Binoculars
(C) internal reflection
318. This structure focuses the
(D) all of these images in the environment

313. Why does sky appear to (A) Sclera

be blue? (B) Lens
(A) Due to dispersion of light (C) Retina
(B) Due to scattering of light (D) Cones

(C) Due to refraction of light 319. A white colour object

(D) Due to diffraction of light (A) absorbs all colours
(B) reflects all the colours
314. Gathers information
(C) transmits all colours
about color, shape, and size
of eye and sends to the optic (D) scatters all colours
nerve. 320. The persistence of vision
(A) optic nerve for human eye is
(B) Retina (A) 1/10th of a second

(C) Neuron (B) 1/6th of the second

(C) 1/16th of a second
(D) cornea
(D) 1/18th of a second
315. Cornea is abnormally
321. What are the functions of
curved, causes blurry vision
eyelids and eyelashes
because it is unable to focus.
(A) to protect and rehydrate the
(A) Temporarily Blind
eyes
(B) Blindness (B) keep dirt out of the eyes
(C) Eye (C) keep debris out of the eys
(D) Astigmatism (D) all of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
202 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

322. When the light is very (C) pupil

bright, the diameter of pupil (D) retina
(A) Expends
327. How many tiny bones are
(B) Contract there in the middle ear?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Remain same (A) 2
(D) All of these (B) 3
323. The image formed on the (C) 4
retina of the human eye is (D) 5

(A) virtual and inverted 328. Rods are responsible for

our ability to see
(B) real and inverted
(A) Movement
(C) real and erect
(B) Red
(D) virtual and erect
(C) Blue
324. The colored portion of the (D) Green
eye that controls the amount
of light reaching the retina is 329. We see reddish color sky
known as during sunset and sunrise.
(A) Cornea Select the incorrect state-
ment.
(B) Pupil
(A) Light travels more in the atmo-
(C) Retina sphere
(D) Iris (B) Sun is near the horizon
325. The sound waves travel (C) Red color is scattered most
from a medium of to a (D) Blue color is scattered by the
medium of particles
(A) the ocean; air
330. What is the colour part
(B) air; bones that we see in an eye
(C) water; liquid (A) Iris
(D) air; liquid (B) Rods
326. A clear, flexible structure (C) Cones
that makes an image on the (D) None of the above
eye’s retina. The is flex-
ible so that it can change 331. What role does the brain
shape, focusing on objects play in seeing?
that are close up and objects (A) It puts blurry images into fo-
that are far away. cus.
(A) lens (B) It puts black and white images
(B) cornea into color.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 203

(C) It flips upside down images 337. Variable focal length of

right side up. eye is responsible for-
(D) none of above (A) Accomadation of eye

332. What is the optic nerve? (B) Persistence of vision

(A) Opening to the inner eye (C) Colour blindness

(B) Transmits information to the (D) Least distance of distinct vi-

brain sion

(C) Outermost transparent layer 338. Which animal has better

of eye. Begins focusing process eyesight than humans?
(D) Controls shape of the eye. (A) Bat

333. Phenomenon of hap- (B) Horse

pens in eyes. (C) Eagle
(A) Reflection (D) Elephant
(B) Refraction
339. What part of the eye sends
(C) None of above nerve impulses to the brain
(D) Data Missing (A) optic nerve

334. what is the sclera? (B) iris

(A) gelatinous substance that fills (C) cornea

eyeball (D) sclera
(B) regulator of the eye
340. Which of the following
(C) tough white fibrous tissue that parts of the eye provides re-
covers most of the entire eye fraction of light?
(D) anterior transparent coat (A) Cornea

335. What does the pupil do? (B) Eye lens

(A) protects the eye (C) Iris

(B) helps the eye focus (D) Both Cornea and Eye lens
(C) allows light to enter eye 341. angle of deviation in a tri-
(D) regulates how much light en- angular prism is angle be-
ters the eye tween
(A) incident ray and refracted ray.
336. Nearsightedness
(B) refracted ray and emergent
(A) Myopia ray.
(B) Hyperopia (C) extended incident and emer-
(C) Both gent ray
(D) none of above (D) none of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
204 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

342. This type of light sensitive 347. Which part of the eye is
cell detects color. most like the film in a cam-
era?
(A) Sclera
(B) Cornea (A) Iris

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Rods (B) Pupil

(D) Cones (C) Retina

(D) Lens
343. The cornea is
(A) The white of your eye 348. In an eye, the position of
the image on the retina is
(B) A thin protective layer of tissue adjusted by changing the
that protects the eye
(A) position of the lens
(C) The color of your eye
(B) diameter of the pupil
(D) The sensor
(C) focal length of the lens
344. How many receptors
(D) length of the eye ball
called rods and cones are
there in the retina of an
349. Another Name for near-
eye?
sightedness is
(A) 125 million
(A) Myopia
(B) 225 million
(B) Hypermetropia
(C) 325 million
(C) Cataract
(D) 425 million
(D) none of above
345. Which muscle controls the
shape of the lens? 350. Lens

(A) Radial muscle (A) Clear tissue that covers the eye

(B) Circular muscle (B) Opening of the eye

(C) Ciliary muscle (C) Focuses the light

(D) none of above (D) Regulates amount of light

346. A condition where an in- 351. The defect of vision in

crease in intraocular pres- which the person is able to
sure can damage the optic see distant object distinctly
nerve, ultimately resulting but cannot see nearby ob-
in loss of vision. jects clearly is called
(A) Glaucoma (A) Long-sightedness
(B) Herpes Simplex (B) Far-sightedness
(C) Keratitis (C) Hypermetropia
(D) Conjunctivitis (D) All above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 205

352. Astigmatism can be 357. very fine particles mainly

caused by scatter
(A) A cornea that is flat (A) red colour
(B) A cornea that is too curved (B) blue colour

(C) A cornea that is unevenly (C) white colour

curved (D) none of above
(D) A lens that is less flexible, so 358. The person who is suffer-
the light entering the eye con- ing from requires bi-focal
verges at a point behind the retina lens.
353. The colour of eye is due to (A) (a) Hypermetropia
(B) (b) Myopia
(A) Cornea (C) both option(a) and (b)
(B) Retina (D) none of these
(C) Iris 359. The part of your eye that
(D) none of above gives it its color. It is a mus-
cle that controls the size of
354. Light travels in waves your pupil.

(A) transverse (A) cornea

(B) lens
(B) compressional
(C) pupil
(C) longitudinal
(D) iris
(D) sound
360. Where does the optic
355. What part filters the nerve attach to the eye?
amount of light entering (A) Fovea
your eye
(B) Ciliary muscle
(A) Iris
(C) Choroid
(B) Pupil
(D) Blind spot
(C) Iris and Pupil
361. Scattering of light by col-
(D) Cornea loidal solution is known as
356. For people with myopia, (A) Scattering
the maximum focal length is (B) Dispersion
less than
(C) Tyndall effect
(A) 2.5 m (D) Stability
(B) 2.27 cm
362. When the cornea is not
(C) 2.5 cm shaped correctly
(D) 2.72 cm (A) Astigmatism

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
206 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(B) Claucoma 368. The image formed on the

(C) Cataracts retina of the human eye is

(D) none of above (A) virtual and inverted

(B) real and inverted
363. We are able to see be-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
cause of the of light (C) virtual and erect
(A) refraction (D) real and erect
(B) reflection
369. Due to which molecule the
(C) transmission sky appears white on sum-
(D) absorption mer days?
(A) N2
364. What is the job of the
lens? (B) O2
(A) To protect the eye (C) N2 and O2
(B) to open or shrink the pupil (D) H2O
(C) let light into the eye
370. Glaucoma-
(D) focuses the light onto the
retina at the back of the eye (A) eye with poor vision
(B) condition in which eye lens be-
365. Power of lens is 4D then its
comes opaque
focal length is?
(C) Eye condition that damages
(A) -25cm
the optic nerve
(B) Infinity
(D) defect in eye
(C) -0.25cm
(D) 0.25m 371. The variation of focal
length to form a sharp im-
366. Myopic eye can be cor- age on retina is called
rected by suitable lens
(A) Accommodation
(A) Convex
(B) Aperture
(B) Concave
(C) Retina Control
(C) Bifocal
(D) Shutter
(D) Plane

367. The tough, clear covering 372. What part of the brain
over the iris and pupil that puts together the 3 colors
helps protect the eye is the the cones detect to make all
over colors we see?

(A) retina (A) Auditory Cortex

(B) lens (B) Olfactory Cortex
(C) sclera (C) Visual Cortex
(D) cornea (D) Insular Cortex

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 207

373. Which part of the eye ab- (B) Retina

sorbs light from the sides of (C) Vitreous Humor
the eye?
(D) Optic humor
(A) lens
(B) ciliary body 379. Movies in cinema halls use
which principle?
(C) choroid
(A) dispersion of light
(D) pupil
(B) persistence of vision
374. Which layer of tissue pre-
(C) multiple reflection
vents light being reflected
back out of the eye? (D) none of above
(A) Cornea 380. Area of the retina that
(B) Choroid doesn’t contain any photore-
ceptors
(C) Sclera
(A) Optic Nerve
(D) Blind spot
(B) Blind spot
375. What two parts of the eye
(C) Ciliary body
work as lenses?
(D) Yellow spot
(A) iris and lens
(B) retina and lens 381. Twinkling of stars is due to
atmospheric
(C) cornea and lens
(A) dispersion of light by water
(D) aqueous humor and lens
droplets
376. Which two parts of the eye (B) refraction of light by different
help to focus light rays? layers of varying refractive indices
(A) Lens & retina (C) scattering of light by dust par-
(B) Cornea & iris ticles
(C) Iris & retina (D) internal reflection of light by
clouds.
(D) Lens & cornea
382. The first part of the eye
377. which one of the follow-
that light hits.
ing colours has scattered the
least (A) lens
(A) blue (B) cornea
(B) red (C) pupil
(C) orange (D) retina
(D) none of above 383. choose three outside parts
378. Gel-like fluid behind the of eye?
lens (A) eyelid
(A) Aqueous Humor (B) lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
208 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) eyelashes 388. What is the pupil?

(D) tear duct (A) Controls size of pupil.
(E) optic nerve (B) Opening to the inner eye

384. he defect of vision in (C) Contains cells that detect

NARAYAN CHANGDER
which the image of nearby light.
objects is formed behind the (D) Controls shape of the eye
retina, is
389. When ALL of the light goes
(A) Myopia
though an object
(B) Presbyopia
(A) opaque
(C) Hypermetropia
(B) transparent
(D) Short sightedness
(C) translucent
385. Which of the following (D) none of above
statements is correct regard-
ing the propagation of light 390. name the layers of the
of different colours of white eye:
light in air? (A) posterior cavity;anterior cav-
(A) Red light moves fastest itycornea;pupilcilary body;optic
nerve
(B) Blue light moves faster than
green light (B) sclera;corneairis;vitreous
bodyretina;optic nerve
(C) All the colours of the white
light move with the same speed (C) retinasclerachoroid
(D) Yellow light moves with the (D) cornea;pupilsclera;irisretina-
mean speed as that of the red and vitreous body
the violet light
391. The Least distance of dis-
386. Which lens have negative tinct vision is
power (A) 25 metres
(A) Concave (B) 2.5 centimetres
(B) Convex (C) 25 centimetres
(C) Plane (D) 2.5 metres
(D) Both 1 and 2
392. This is the gooey material
387. The blue colour of sky is that is clear and helps to
due to give the eye its shape:
(A) reflection (A) aqueous humor
(B) refraction (B) vitreous humor
(C) dispersion (C) pupil
(D) scattering (D) ciliary muscles

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 209

393. Which part of the eye 398. What does the lens do?
is where images are con- (A) transmits light rays to retina
verted to nerve impulses?
(B) helps the eye focus
(A) Retina
(C) allows light to enter eye
(B) Cornea
(D) regulates how much light en-
(C) Optic Nerve ters the eye
(D) Lens 399. The color of the eyes are
the
394. The white of your eye is
called the (A) Pupil
(B) Sclera
(A) Iris
(C) Iris
(B) Pupil
(D) Cornea
(C) Sclera
(D) Cornea 400. you smell food because of
the-
395. The thin transparent layer (A) taste buds
that protects the eye (B) taste receptors
(A) lens (C) olfactory receptors
(B) cornea (D) olfactory buds
(C) retina 401. Function of the optic nerve
(D) pupil is is
(A) Transfer the signals to brain
396. What is the function of the
retina? (B) Image formation

(A) helps with night vision (C) sensation of vision

(D) Controls the light entering the
(B) back of eye, has rods and
human eye
cones
(C) blood supply 402. which one of the follow-
ing colours has longer wave-
(D) gel that fills space length
397. What part of the human (A) blue
eye opens and closes to ad- (B) red
just the total amount of light
(C) violet
entering the eye.
(D) none of above
(A) Human lens
403. At which angle of scatter-
(B) Cornea
ing, the intensity is maxi-
(C) Scelera mum?
(D) Iris (A) 00

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
210 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(B) 300 (B) cornea

(C) 450 (C) pupil
(D) 900 (D) retina

404. We can see the sun before 409. elongation of eye balls

NARAYAN CHANGDER
the actual sunrise by about leads to whereas shrink-
ing if eye balls leads to
(A) 5 minutes (A) myopia and hypermetropia
(B) 2 minutes (B) hypermetropia and myopia
(C) 2 hours (C) myopia and presbyopia
(D) 20 minutes (D) none of above

405. the scattering of light by 410. These are the structures in

colloidal particles present in the eye that perceives color
the medium is known as (A) Rods
(A) dispersion (B) Cones
(B) tyndall effect (C) Blind Spot
(C) refraction of light (D) Pupil
(D) none of above
411. Which part of the eye con-
406. The defect of the eye in tains the highest concentra-
which the eyeball becomes tion of light receptor cells?
too long is (A) Fovea
(A) hypermetropia (B) Blind spot
(B) myopia (C) Optic nerve
(C) cataract (D) Choroid
(D) presbyopia
412. What part is like a thin
407. Complete lack of 20/200 protective layer?
or less, with the best correc- (A) Cornea
tion possible .
(B) Iris
(A) Half Blindness
(C) Lens
(B) Legal Blindness
(D) Optic Nerve
(C) Retina
(D) Far Sighted 413. In which order does light
travel through the eye
408. The back of the eye; (A) cornea, retina, lens, pupil
an upside-down image of
whatever you are looking (B) lens, retina, pupil, cornea
at is projected here. (C) cornea, pupil, lens, retina
(A) lens (D) iris, pupil, retina, lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 211

414. Near point of an healthy (C) Sclera

human eye (D) Iris
(A) 25 m
419. What part of the eye is
(B) 2.5 cm
the inner layer of the eye-
(C) 2.5 m ball and contains the pho-
(D) 25 cm toreceptors?
(A) sclera
415. What does the cornea
do? (B) retina
(A) transmit impulses from retina (C) choroid
to brain (D) conjunctiva
(B) helps the eye focus
420. What part of the eye has
(C) receives light and sends it to NO photoreceptors
brain
(A) fovea centralis
(D) transmits light rays to retina
(B) optic disk
416. The focal length of the
(C) retina
eye lens increases when eye
muscles (D) none of above
(A) are relaxed and lens becomes 421. The part of the eye that is
thinner sensitive to light is called the
(B) contract and lens becomes
thicker (A) Cornea
(C) are relaxed and lens becomes (B) Lens
thicker
(C) Sclera
(D) contract and lens becomes
thinner (D) Retina

417. If you were to acciden- 422. The structure helps you to

tally scratch the outermost see in dim light
part of the eye, which part (A) Cones
would you damage?
(B) Tapetum Lucidum
(A) Cornea
(C) Rods
(B) Lens
(D) Cornea
(C) Pupil
(D) Retina 423. The fluid between the
retina and the lens is called
418. Which part of the eye con-
(A) Aqueous Humour
tracts and dilates based on
the environment? (B) Vitreous Humour
(A) Pupil (C) Aqua
(B) Cornea (D) Humus

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
212 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

424. Which of the following 429. Among the following

lenses are needed to correct lenses are used to correct
one’s myopia? presbyopia of a person.
(A) Bi-concave (A) Bi-concave

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Bi-convex (B) Bi-convex
(C) Bi-focal (C) Bi-focal

(D) Plano-convex (D) Plano-convex

430. what is the iris

425. The amount of light enter-
ing the human eye is con- (A) the colored part of the eye that
trolled by controls the size of the pupil
(A) Ciliary muscles (B) Tranparent jellylike fluid that
fills the eye and refracts light.
(B) Pupil
(C) Sends messages picked up by
(C) Cornea the retina to the brain
(D) Iris (D) Hole passes different
amounts of light
426. Pupil
(A) Focuses light 431. Which of the following is
not a condition that effects
(B) Clear tissue that covers the the human eye
front of the eye
(A) colorblindness
(C) Opening through which light
(B) cataracts
enters the eye
(C) glaucoma
(D) Layer of receptor cells
(D) deafness
427. Which part of the eye re-
fracts light onto the lens? 432. Concave lens is used to
correct
(A) Cornea
(A) Astigmatism
(B) Pupil
(B) Myopia
(C) Retina
(C) Hypermetropia
(D) none of above
(D) Presbyopia
428. If a person eye lens form- 433. These are the photorecep-
ing image infront of retina tors that are sensitive to dif-
then he is suffering from ferent colours.
(A) Myopia (A) Rods
(B) Hypermetropia (B) Cones
(C) Presbyopia (C) Blind Spot
(D) Catraract (D) Pupil

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.1 The human eye 213

434. How many sensitive cells (C) hypertension

does retina contains? (D) tetanus
(A) 1000
440. Light sensitive screen of
(B) 2000 eye is known as
(C) millions (A) Iris
(D) lakhs (B) Pupil
435. Light enters the eye (C) retina
through a thin membrane (D) none of above
called the
441. What is the distance be-
(A) Iris tween the lens and retina of
(B) Pupil an eye?
(C) Retina (A) 2.5 m
(D) Cornea (B) 2.5 cm
(C) 2.27 cm
436. The white part of our eye
that contains small blood (D) 25 cm
vessels 442. The defect of vision in
(A) cornea which a person cannot see
the distant objects clearly
(B) sclera
but can see nearby objects
(C) iris clearly is called
(D) pupil (A) Myopia
437. What is the second clear (B) Hypermetropia
part of eye? (C) Bifocal eye
(A) cornea (D) Presbyopia
(B) lens 443. In human eye, image is
(C) retina formed on
(D) iris (A) Iris
(B) Cornea
438. What is a cataract?
(C) Retina
(A) Shortening of the eyeball
(D) Lens
(B) Cornea has too little curvature
444. The lens is:
(C) Double vision
(A) an eye with poor vision
(D) Clouding of the lens
(B) tear glands
439. The person who is suffer- (C) Transparent convex body that
ing from the following dis- focuses light rays entering the
ease cannot donate eyes. pupil
(A) diabetes (D) mucous membrane lining the
(B) asthma eyelid

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 214 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

445. Mechanism of sight trol the amount of light that

(A) light→lens→brain→ retina enters the eye. What is it
called?
(B) light→retina→brain→lens
(A) pupil
(C) light→brain→retina→lens

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) light→lens→retina→ brain (B) lens
(C) iris
446. This colored part of the
eye changes shape to con- (D) retina

2.2 Power of accommodation

1. The ability of eye lens to ad- eye
just its focal length to form
(B) Power of adjustment of the eye
a sharp image of the object
at varying distances on the (C) Power of accommodation of
retina is called the eye
(A) Power of observation of the (D) Power of enabling of the eye

2.3 Defects of vision and correction

1. Which one is the common vi- (D) Asigmatism
sion defect.
4. People with this type of vi-
(A) hypermetropia sion can see things clearly
(B) astigmatisme when they are up close, but
things are blurry far away.
(C) color blindness
(A) Emmetropia
(D) blind spot
(B) Hyperopia
2. The disability of the eye (C) Myopia
to form distinct images of
nearby objects on its retina (D) Far sighted
at a young age is known as 5. What does farsighted
(A) nearsightedness mean?
(B) farsightedness (A) You can see far away well.
(C) presbyopia (B) You can see close up well.
(D) stress (C) You have perfect sight.
(D) You are blind.
3. What is nearsightedness
called? 6. What is the type of lens that
(A) hyperopia suitable to make a correc-
tion for person who expe-
(B) myalgia rience a short nearsighted-
(C) myopia ness vision?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 2.4 Defects of vision and correction numerical 215

(A) curved lens (C) inverted

(B) convex lens (D) virtual
(C) bifocal lens 10. What are the causes of
(D) concave len short sightedness

7. A condition that makes it dif- (A) eye ball too short

ficult to distinguish colors: (B) eye lens too thick
(A) color blindness (C) eye lens too thin
(B) night blindness (D) cornea not even
(C) macular degeneration 11. Where is the position of im-
(D) none of above age form for farsightedness
vision?
8. What is the method that
tests for eye color called? (A) on the retina

(A) ishiara (B) behind the retina

(B) igloo (C) in front of retina

(C) ipad (D) no image form

(D) none of above 12. With both eyes open, a per-

son’s field of view is about:
9. State the characteristic of im-
age form for person with (A) 90o
normal vision. (B) 150o
(A) upright (C) 180o
(B) same size with object (D) 360o

2.4 Defects of vision and correction numerical

1. When looking at far objects, 3. When you are reading a
the eyes book, your eyes’ lenses be-
(A) Relax come more

(B) Stretch (A) Concave

(C) Contract (B) Convex
(D) shrink (C) Relaxed

2. When we look at far objects, (D) none of above

our eyes become
4. Which of the following
(A) LESS CONVEX causes NEAR-SIGHTEDNESS?
(B) MORE CONVEX
(C) NO CHANGE (A) A rough lens
(D) none of above (B) A less-flexible lens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 216 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) The cornea is too curved. (A) CELLS

(D) none of above (B) MUSCLES

5. The shape and convexity of (C) TISSUES

the eye is controlled by (D) LIGHT

NARAYAN CHANGDER
2.5 Dispersion of light
1. When dispersion of white (C) the wave can vibrate in all
light occurs in a prism, planes
which colour deviates the
(D) the wave cannot vibrate at all
most?
(A) Red 5. White light forms a colored
(B) Violet spectrum. The 7 colors cover
all but White light forms a
(C) Green
colored spectrum. The 7 col-
(D) Yellow ors include all but
2. The primary colours of light (A) red / red
are:red, blue, yellow (B) red, (B) blue / blue
blue, green (C) red, yel-
low, green (D) yellow, blue, (C) kuning / yellow
greenThe primary colours of (D) orange / orange
light are:
(E) pink / pink
(A) red, blue, yellow
(B) red, blue, green 6. Which color refracts the
(C) red, yellow, green least from the 7 colors of the
rainbow?
(D) yellow, blue, green
(A) Red
3. Rainbow is formed due to
(B) Yellow
(A) Natural dispersion
(B) Sunlight passing through rain- (C) Green
drops (D) Black
(C) Refraction of light
7. these are examples of phe-
(D) All of the above nomenon of scattering of
4. Polarization is the restriction light except
of a transverse wave so that (A) Sky appears blue at midday
(B) Sky appears reddish in the
(A) the wave can only vibrate in evening
one plane
(C) Rainbow after rain
(B) the wave can only vibrate in
two planes (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.5 Dispersion of light 217

8. How does a red object ap- (C) Indigo

pear in white light? (D) Blue
(A) white (E) Yellow
(B) black
14. enable you to see a rain-
(C) green
bow, sun should be posi-
(D) red toned
9. Objects that reflect ALL col- (A) infront of you
ors will appear ? (B) behind you
(A) Black (C) on your left side
(B) White (D) on your right side
(C) Gray
15. Which of the following is an
(D) Multi-colored example of a luminous ob-
ject?
10. Why is the sky blue?
(A) a candle
(A) Blue light is scattered by the air
molecules in the sky. (B) a mirror
(B) Blue light is absorbed by (C) the Moon
Earth. (D) a prism
(C) Blue light is reflected by the
clouds. 16. When does light get re-
fracted?
(D) Blue light is better than red.
(A) When light travels in a straight
11. Which of the following col- line
ors has the lowest energy? (B) When light is bounced
(A) Green
(C) When light travels in two dif-
(B) Blue ferent mediums
(C) Indigo (D) When light cannot pass
(D) Violet through an opaque object

12. The primary colours of light 17. What is a Spectrum?

are: (A) A band of 7 colors
(A) red, blue, yellow (B) A group of 10 colors
(B) red, yellow, green (C) A band of 10 colors
(C) red, blue, green (D) A mixture of 7 colors
(D) yellow, blue, green
18. In white light, a blue car
13. Which color is refracted the can reflects the following
most in a rainbow? colour(s):
(A) Red (A) red
(B) Violet (B) blue

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
218 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) green (C) The fastest / the fastest

(D) all colours (D) none of above

19. In physics what are the 24. When light enters a

three secondary colours? medium and changes direc-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Purple tion it is called
(A) Reflection
(B) Cyan
(B) Refraction
(C) Yellow
(C) Dispersion
(D) Magenta
(D) Diffraction
20. A rainbow is formed when
sunlight is , and 25. Light is able to pass through
materials
(A) refracted
(A) transparent
(B) reflected
(B) shiny
(C) dispersed
(C) dull
(D) scattered
(D) opaque
21. What happens when white
light is passed from air to 26. Warna cahaya yang
glass prism? banyak diserakkan ialah
/The light colors that are
(A) bends towards the normal scattered a lot are
(B) bends away from the normal (A) biru blue
(C) reflects back (B) hijau / green
(D) moves straight (C) merah /red
22. Which two things below (D) kuning / yellow
can cause dispersion?
27. Which of the following are
(A) A dark room a pair of complementary
(B) Prism colours?
(C) A plane mirror (A) Blue and green
(D) Diffraction grating (B) Red and green
(C) Cyan and red
23. At noon, the sky appears
blue because blue light has (D) Blue and magenta
a wavelength that is ab-
28. The splitting of white light
sorbed by gas molecules. /
in to its component colours
At noon, the sky looks blue
is called
because the blue light has
a wavelength that is ab- (A) reflection
sorbed by the gas molecule. (B) refraction
(A) The longest / The longest (C) tyndall effect
(B) Short / short (D) dispersion

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.5 Dispersion of light 219

29. How many components are 34. Which of the statements

there in white light? about light are true?
(A) 5 (A) Light is a form of energy
(B) 6 (B) Light cannot travel through a
vaccum
(C) 7
(C) Nothing can travel faster than
(D) 8 light
(D) Light is a form of radiation
30. How many colours in the
spectrum of white light? 35. Which of the following col-
(A) 5 ors is NOT found in the spec-
trum of white light?
(B) 6
(A) BlackHitam
(C) 7 (B) YellowKuning
(D) 8 (C) IndigoIndigo
31. When the left side of an ob- (D) VioletUngu
ject appears as the right side 36. Approximately how much
of the image and vice versa, light is blocked by two po-
this phenomenon is called larizing filters that are per-
(A) Literally inversion pendicular to each other?
(B) Lateral Invasion (A) 0%
(B) 50%
(C) Lateral Inversion
(C) 75%
(D) Literally Invasion
(D) 100%
32. Light is unable to pass
37. waves on top of spectrum
through objects
are
(A) opaque (A) infrared waves
(B) coloured (B) gamma rays
(C) blunt (C) ultraviolet rays
(D) dark (D) none of above
38. Predict the colour of the sky
33. We see lightning before we
when it is seen from the
hear the thunder because:
Moon.Jangkakan warna
(A) light waves are stronger than langit apabila dilihat dari-
sound waves pada bulan.
(B) sound travels faster than light (A) RedMerah
(C) light travels faster than sound (B) BlueBiru
(D) sound waves are stronger (C) White Putih
than light waves (D) BlackHitam

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
220 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

39. The natural phenomena as- (B) Dispersion of light

sociated with light scatter-
(C) Reflection of light
ing are
(A) Rainbow / Rainbow (D) Diffraction of light
(B) Blue sky / Blue sky

NARAYAN CHANGDER
45. Which processes are in-
(C) Redness of the setting sun cluded when a rainbow
(D) none of above forms?

40. A black object appears (A) Reflection

black because it all wave- (B) Refraction
lengths of light.
(C) Reflection, dispersion and re-
(A) absorbs
fraction
(B) reflects
(D) Refraction and Reflection
(C) scatters
(D) transmits 46. Properties of waves areI.
polarizationII. diffractionIII.
41. A plane mirror always pro-
refractionWhich of these
duce images.
properties apply to sound
(A) virtual waves?
(B) real (A) I and II
(C) ideal
(B) II and III
(D) refracted
(C) I and III
42. white light is a mixture of
(D) All of them
(A) six colours
(B) seven colours 47. These are all colours of spec-
(C) eigth colours trum except
(D) none of above (A) indigo

43. A rainbow is produced by (B) blue

the
(C) purple
(A) scattering of light
(D) green
(B) dispersion of light
(C) reflection of light 48. What colour passes through
(D) deviation of light a red filter

44. Why are the components of (A) none

colour in a rainbow seen (B) all
when light passes through a
glass prism? (C) blue
(A) Scattering of light (D) red

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.5 Dispersion of light 221

49. What is dispersion? (C) purple

(A) The combination of two rays (D) green
of light
54. Which colour is a mix of
(B) The separating of light into
blue and green light?
perpendicular beams
(A) Magenta
(C) The reflection of light off a
smooth surface (B) Cyan
(D) The separating of light into its (C) Yellow
component colours (D) none of above
50. Berapakah warna pada 55. What is the spectrum?
pelangi / how many colour
of rainbow? (A) A disturbance that transfers
energy from place to place
(A) 6
(B) The ability to do work
(B) 7
(C) What we see when specific
(C) 8
light reflects off of an object
(D) 9
(D) The range of visible color
51. Two processes occur during
scattering of light. 56. What happen when sun-
light enters rain drops in the
(A) Reflection and Refraction of sky?
light
(A) The light will reflected
(B) Reflection and Scattering of
light (B) The light will refracted
(C) Refraction and Scattering of (C) The light will absorbed
light (D) The light will dispeared
(D) Scattering and Dispersion of
57. When two primary colours
light
combine in equal intensity
52. When dispersion of white they produce
light occurs with a diffrac- (A) tertiary colours
tion grating, which colour
deviates the most? (B) a secondary colour

(A) Red (C) a new primary colour

(B) Violet (D) nothing
(C) Green 58. Which color absorbs ALL col-
(D) Yellow ors?
(A) yellow
53. These are all colours of the
spectrum except for (B) white
(A) indigo (C) black
(B) blue (D) red

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
222 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

59. A transparent object that 64. light waves can be polar-

bends light into rainbow col- ized as they are:
ors. (A) transverse
(A) prism (B) of high frequency
(B) mirror

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) longitudinal
(C) convex lens (D) reflected
(D) concave lens
65. What is the full form of VIB-
60. what causes ligth to refrect GYOR
off of certain objects? (A) Violet, Irish grey, blue, green,
(A) when the beam of light goes yellow, black
through the object, the light (B) Violet, Irish grey, blue, black,
bounces off because the light is green, yellow
pointed at an angle
(C) Violet, Indigo, Black, green,
(B) the object is not transparent yellow, orange, red
(C) the object is transparent (D) Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green,
(D) none of above Yellow, Orange, Red

61. Light bends the normal 66. When a ray of light enters a
line when it travels from glass block at 90 it:
glass to air. (A) speeds up
(A) towards (B) is not refracted
(B) away from (C) bends away from the normal
(C) along (D) bends towards the normal
(D) none of above
67. Why can we see a spec-
62. Which is the factor that in- trum of colours when white
fluences the scattering of light passes through a glass
light? prism?
(A) The speed of the light (A) phenomenon of scattering of
light
(B) The wavelength of the light
(B) phenomenon of dispersion of
(C) The wave frequency of the
light
light
(C) phenomenon of reflection of
(D) The velocity of the light light
63. How many colours make (D) phenomenon of diffraction of
up white light? light
(A) 5 68. Which color has the longest
(B) 6 wavelength?
(C) 7 (A) Red
(D) 8 (B) Blue

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.5 Dispersion of light 223

(C) Green (C) Visible spectrum

(D) Violet (D) Energy waves

69. What is the phenomenon of 74. Why does red light get de-
Dispersion? viated the most when white
light is dispersed using a
(A) Scattering of a spectrum
diffraction grating?
(B) Scattering of white light
(A) Because it has the longest
(C) Distribution of a spectrum wavelength
(D) Light maintaining its proper- (B) Because it has the shortest
ties wavelength
70. Warna cahaya yang ku- (C) Because it’s unlucky
rang diserakkan ialah (D) none of above
/The color of light that is less
75. Which tool is used to sepa-
scattered is
rate white light to different
(A) indigo / indigo colors?
(B) biru / blue (A) Mirror
(C) merah / red (B) Hammer
(D) putih / white (C) Camera
71. When the three primary (D) Prism
colours are combined in 76. Which body organ detects
equal intensity they produce visible light?
(A) Ears
(A) A spectrum
(B) Nose
(B) White light (C) Eyes
(C) Nothing (D) Skin
(D) none of above
77. What is being blocked
72. What can be observed when a shadow is formed?
when a light passed though (A) Light Source
a prism?
(B) Light Path
(A) the mass of the prism (C) Object
(B) the white light is actually a mix- (D) Eye
ture of different colors
78. How are the colours of the
(C) the original source of light
rainbow formed?
(D) the prism absorbs the light
(A) from the sun hitting water
73. The colors that make up (B) From light hitting objects
white light is called (C) Trought different wavelenghts
(A) Wavelength of refracted light
(B) Prism (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
224 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

79. The specturm of white light (C) is reflected once

consists of: (D) none of above
(A) three colours
85. The substance in the sky
(B) seven colours which is involved in the for-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) five colors mation of rainbow
(D) nine colours (A) Air particle
(B) Dust
80. which colours of the rain-
bow have the longest wave- (C) Raindrop
length? (D) soot
(A) violet
86. Which waves can be po-
(B) indigo larised?
(C) red (A) Transverse waves
(D) none of above (B) Longitudinal waves
81. Optically denser medium:- (C) Both transverse and longitudi-
nal waves
(A) Lower speed of light
(D) Neither transverse and longi-
(B) Higher speed of light tudinal waves
(C) Medium speed of light
87. When glass or plastic is
(D) none of above bent or stressed, you can
82. Apakah cahaya berwarna see interference patterns us-
yang paling banyak dibi- ing a polarising filter. This is
askan? / What is the most an example of
refracted colored light? (A) Bend polarisation
(A) Cahaya bir u / blue light (B) Rage polarisation
(B) Cahaya merah / red light (C) Stress polarisation
(C) Cahaya ungu / purple light (D) Street polarisation
(D) Cahaya kuning / yellow light 88. Objects that generate their
own light are called:
83. Which of the following is
NOT a source of light? (A) luminous objects.
(A) eyes (B) non-luminous objects.
(B) lit candle (C) shiny objects.
(C) sun (D) reflective objects.
(D) firefly 89. angle which is formed
between normal ray and
84. inside rain droplet, light ray entering a medium is
(A) is refracted twice known as
(B) is refracted thrice (A) critical angle

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.5 Dispersion of light 225

(B) angle of refraction 94. Afshan is wearing a blue

(C) angle of reflection dress with red flowers on
it. She stands under a red
(D) none of above lamp. The dress will ap-
90. Berikut merupakan con- pear:
toh zarah-zarah halus di (A) completely red
atmosfera yang menyer-
akkan cahaya.(Lebih dari (B) black with red flowers
satu jawapan)/ Here is an (C) completely blue
example of fine particles in
the atmosphere that scat- (D) blue with red flowers
ter light.(More than one an-
swer) 95. Visible light is a combina-
tion of different colors with
(A) Debu / Dust
different wavelengths trav-
(B) Titisan air / Water droplet eling together. These wave-
(C) Daun / Leaf lengths are represented by
which colors?
(D) Molekul gas / Gas molecule
(A) red, orange, yellow, green,
91. How does a green object blue, indigo, violet
appear in green light?
(B) red, orange, yellow, grey,
(A) white
blue, indigo, violet
(B) black
(C) red, orange, yellow, green,
(C) green
black, indigo, violet
(D) blue
(D) red, orchid, yellow, green,
92. In physics, what are the blue, indigo, violet
three primary colours? (Se-
lect the three correct an- 96. Objects that ABSORB all col-
swers below) ors of light will appear
(A) Red (A) white
(B) Blue
(B) black
(C) Yellow
(C) multi-colored
(D) Green
(D) gray
93. Apakah cahaya berwarna
yang paling kurang dibi- 97. We are able to see the
askan? /What is the least moon because it
refracted colored light?
(A) gives out light
(A) Cahaya hijau / green light
(B) Cahaya biru / blue light (B) glows

(C) Cahaya ungu / purple light (C) reflects light from the sun
(D) Cahaya merah / red light (D) reflects light from the earth

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
226 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

98. The splitting of light into (C) dispersionpenyebaran

colours of the rainbow is (D) scatteringpenyerakan
called
(A) refraction 103. Which color has the high-
est frequency?
(B) dispersion

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) internal reflection (A) Violet

(D) seperation (B) Blue

(C) Indigo
99. Why does an apple appear
red? (D) Green
(A) All colors are absorbed & 104. An example of dispersion
none are reflected of light
(B) All colors are absorbed except
(A) sky looks bright orange in the
for blue, which is reflected
evening
(C) All colors are reflected and
(B) shadow
none are absorbed
(C) Pool seems shallower
(D) All colors are absorbed except
for red, which is reflected (D) rainbow

100. How does a blue object ap- 105. Which phenomenon

pear in red light? shows the effect of the dis-
(A) white persion of light?
(B) black (A) Blue sky Blue sky
(C) blue (B) Formation of rainbow
(D) red (C) Red sunset. Red sunset
101. When is a rainbow mostly (D) Stage lightning Stage lighting
formed? (Select all that ap-
106. When a ray of light enters
ply)
a glass block it:
(A) mostly after rainfall
(A) speeds up
(B) mostly after a bright rainy day
(B) slows down
(C) mostly when its a foggy day
(C) goes at the same speed
(D) mostly when it is a bright
sunny day (D) spreads out

102. The splitting of white light 107. Which color has the short-
into its component is called- est wavelength?
Pemisahan cahaya putih
(A) Red
kepada komponennya di-
panggil (B) Green
(A) reflectionpantulan (C) Violet
(B) refractionpembiasan (D) Blue

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.5 Dispersion of light 227

108. Jethro is sitting near the (D) Hitam / Block

window on a sunny day.
When he closes the curtain, 112. What is process that oc-
the room becomes darker. cur when white light travels
What property of the curtain through a prism?
allows it to make the room (A) Reflection and dispersion of
darker? light
(A) The curtain absorbs light. (B) Refraction and dispersion of
(B) The curtain is brightly colored. light

(C) The curtain folds easily. (C) Reflection and scattering of

light
(D) The curtain is rectangular
shape. (D) Refraction and scattering of
light
109. What happens to light
rays when they pass 113. There are all colours of
through one transparent spectrum except “Its my
material to another? favourite color you have to
know it!!”
(A) bend
(A) indigo
(B) disappear
(B) blue
(C) bounce
(C) purple
(D) split
(D) green
110. It is the process of separat-
ing of visible light into its dif- 114. A pair of complimentary
ferent colors. colours consist of such
that when combined they
(A) Reflection produce white light.
(B) Refraction (A) two primary colours
(C) Dispersion (B) two secondary colours
(D) Absorption (C) a primary and a secondary
111. If the atmosphere is pol- colour
luted with more dust and (D) none of above
smoke, the sunset looks
more /If the atmosphere 115. How is a rainbow
is polluted with more dust formed?
and smoke, the sunset looks (A) The air during rain reflects all
more the colors of the rainbow?
(A) yellowish, orange or reddish / (B) The raindrops absorb the
yellowing, redness or redness light.
(B) blue and indigo / blue and in- (C) Light rays bend as they pass
digo from air through drops of water.
(C) purple and red / purple and (D) The light is absorbed by the
red clouds.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 228 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

116. The coloured light having 118. If a 2.5 m object is placed

the maximum speed in glass in front of a plane mirror,
prism among the following the height of its image is
is
(A) less than 2.5 m
(A) blue

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 2.5 m
(B) green
(C) violet (C) more than 2.5 m

(D) yellow (D) 0

117. What do you call the phe- 119. How many components of
nomena which results to the white light? [Think]
formation of rainbows?
(A) 8
(A) scattering
(B) diffraction (B) 6

(C) reflection (C) 4

(D) dispersion (D) 7

2.6 Atmospheric refraction

1. The splitting of white light (D) 1 min
into different colours on
passing through a prism is 4. Atmospherics refraction ex-
called plains the natural phenom-
ena
(A) reflection
(A) twinkling of stars
(B) refraction
(B) Sky appears blue
(C) dispersion
(C) Refraction of light through a
(D) deviation prism
2. If Earth had no atmosphere (D) rainbow formation
at all, what would the sky
mostly look like? 5. The angle between angle of
incidence and the angle of
(A) red, with a very bright star emergence is called
(B) violet, with a very bright star (A) angle of emergence
(C) blue, with a very bright star (B) angle of prism
(D) dark, with a very bright star (C) angle of deviation
3. We can see the sun before (D) critical angle
the actual sunrise about
6. Complete the sentence
(A) 5 mins When a light ray is incident
(B) 2 mins normally
(C) 4 mins (A) It changes its direction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.6 Atmospheric refraction 229

(B) It does not change its direction (C) Light from star travel faster
and not get refracted than planets
(C) Its a reaction of light (D) None of these
(D) none of above
11. What is it called when light
7. What is the reason behind passes through a colloid
twinkling of stars? and scatters/spreads out

(A) Refraction of starlight while (A) tyndall effect

passing through layers of earth’s (B) spreading out effect
atmosphere
(C) fog effect
(B) Earth’s atmosphere is not
(D) substance effect
steady and so there is change in
refractive index
12. choose the answer that best
(C) Both A and B completes the sentence:The
(D) None of these gas molecules in the atmo-
sphere scatter shorter wave-
8. Refractive index is symbol- length light, the longer
ize by wavelength light is largely
unaffected by the atmo-
(A) n sphere.
(B) N
(A) but
(C) R
(B) similarly
(D) none of above
(C) then
9. Which is true for stars? (D) therefore
(A) Stars can be seen in presence
13. Which of the following is
of the sun.
not the phenomenon of re-
(B) Stars are self luminous and fraction of light
can be seen in the absence of the
(A) Twinkling of stars
sun
(C) Stars can’t be seen in absence (B) Rainbow
of the sun. (C) image in the mirror
(D) none of above (D) none of above

10. Stars twinkle but planets 14. As light from a far off star
can’t. Why? comes down towards the
(A) Closer planets are not point earth
source, but due to long distance (A) it bends away from the normal
stars appear as point source
(B) it bends towards the normal
(B) Stars have ability to transmit
(C) it does not bend
light in fragments while planet
transmit light continuously (D) it is reflected back

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 230 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

15. The Tyndall effect is used to 18. Assertion:Planets do not

distinguished between. twinkleReason:Light rays
(A) solvents and solutes do not come from planet
(B) liquid and gasses (A) Assertion and reason are true.
Reason is the correct explanation

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) electrolytes and non elec-
of Assertion
trolytes
(D) solution and colloids (B) Assertion and reason are false
(C) Assertion is false, but reason
16. Following is the phe-
is true
nomenon of the refraction
of the light (D) Assertion is true, but reason is
false
(A) Having reflection in the pobd
water
19. Formation of rainbow is
(B) Having reflection in the mirror due to
(C) Mirage (A) refraction of light
(D) none of above (B) scattering of light
17. The stars twinkle but the (C) dispersion of light
planets do not twinkle at
night because (D) atmospherics refraction

(A) The stars are small but the 20. What color might short
planets are large wavelength light appear to
(B) The stars are large but the us?
planets are small (A) green
(C) The stars are much nearer but
(B) blue
the planets are far away
(C) red
(D) The stars are far away but the
planets are much nearer (D) orange

2.7 Scattering of light

1. Which of the following (A) Red light travels slower
is a natural phenomenon
(B) Blue light is scattered away
caused by the scattering of
light? (C) Red light travels faster
(A) Star twinkles (D) Particles help the colour red to
(B) The sky is blue reach first red reach first

(C) Rainbow after Rain 3. Scattering of light depends

(D) none of above upon
(A) wavelength of light
2. Redding of Sun at sunrise
and sunset appears due to (B) frequceny of light

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.7 Scattering of light 231

(C) speed of light 8. At sunset, sunlight shines

(D) size of particle (A) straight

4. Here is an example of fine (B) bright

particles in the atmosphere (C) horizontally
that scatter light.(More than (D) none of above
one answer)
(A) Dust 9. light is scattered the least
by the suspended particles
(B) Water droplet because it has a wave-
(C) Leaf length.
(D) Gas molecule (A) blue / long
(B) red / long
5. these are examples of phe-
nomenon of scattering of (C) blue / short
light EXCEPT (D) red / short
(A) Sky appears blue at midday
10. The color of light that is less
(B) Sky appears reddish in the scattered is
evening
(A) indigo
(C) Rainbow after rain
(B) blue
(D) none of above
(C) red
6. Which of the following (D) white
is a natural phenomenon
caused by the scattering of 11. . One cannot see through
light? /Which of the fol- fog because:
lowing is a natural phe-
(A) light suffers total internal re-
nomenon caused by the
flection at the droplets of fog.
scattering of light?
(B) light is scattered by the
(A) Star twinkle / Star twinkles
droplets of fog.
(B) The sky is blue / The sky is blue
(C) the refractive index of fog is in-
(C) Rainbow after Rain / Rainbow finity.
after Rain
(D) fog absorbs light.
(D) none of above
12. Which of the below the im-
7. What will be the colour of portant role in giving colour
sky if there is no atmo- to the sky.
sphere on the earth? (A) atmosphere of the earth and
(A) Dark Blue sunlight
(B) Black (B) rainbow
(C) Red (C) sea
(D) White (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 232 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

13. If the atmosphere is pol- (A) Red light is the least scattered
luted with more dust and and travel the longer distance.
smoke, the sunset looks
(B) Red light is the most scattered
more
and travel the shorter distance.
(A) yellowing, redness or redness

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Red light is the least scattered
(B) blue and indigo and more blue light are scattered.
(C) purple and red (D) All the components of white
(D) black light are absorbed by the atmo-
sphere except red light.
14. tiny paticles only scatter
18. If a surface is rough, what
(A) shorter wavelength particles.
will most of the light do
(B) longer wavelength particles when it reaches the object?
(C) both of them (A) reflect in the same direction
(D) none of above (B) scatter in many directions
15. Which of the following phe- (C) Tiktok
nomena is the effect of light (D) there is no way to predict
scattering?
(A) The blue sky 19. The phenomenon of scatter-
ing of light by the colloidal
(B) The dark sky at night
particles is called
(C) The formation of a rainbow
(A) Dispersion of light
(D) The formation of white light
(B) Tyndall effect
16. At dusk, the sun shines (C) Atmospheric scattering
brightly /At dusk, sun-
light shines (D) Atmospheric refraction

(A) lurus / straight 20. The light colors that are scat-
(B) bright / bright tered a lot are
(C) horizontally (A) blue
(D) none of above (B) green
(C) red
17. Why does the Sun appear
red at sunset? (D) yellow

2.8 Tyndall effect

1. Which colloid has both pro- (B) paint
tective and decorative func- (C) creams
tion?
(D) insecticide spray

(A) ink 2. A colloidal system hav-

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 233

ing a solid substance as 7. Which of these is a mix-

the dispersed phase and ture?
a liquid as the dispersion (A) Uncooked chocolate chips
medium.Identify the col- and cookie dough blended to-
loidal type that best de- gether with a spoon.
scribes the system above.
(B) Distilled water
(A) Gel
(C) A nugget of gold
(B) Emulsion
(D) A molecule of Oxygen
(C) Solid Sol
8. Which of the following is
(D) Sol the definition for an unsatu-
rated solution?
3. Stirring increases the rate of
dissolution because it (A) A detailed sequence of reac-
tion steps.
(A) raises the temperature
(B) A solution that contains less
(B) lowers the temperature than the optimal amount of solute.
(C) brings fresh solvent into con- (C) When all reactants and prod-
tact with the solute. ucts are in the same phase.
(D) decreases the surface area of (D) The major component (retains
the solute. phase).

4. What type of mixture sepa- 9. Which of the following mix-

rates upon standing? tures is not an example of a
suspension?
(A) Solution
(A) salt and water
(B) Alloy
(B) oil and water
(C) Colloid
(C) sand and water
(D) Suspension
(D) mud and water
5. Which of these is a colloid? 10. After a while, a suspension
(A) paint does not scatter light (tyn-
dall effect doesn’t happen).
(B) salt water
Why is that?
(C) air (A) Because the particles have set-
(D) gasoline tled down
(B) Because a suspension is unsta-
6. Micelles are ble
(A) ideal solutions (C) All the above
(B) associated colloids (D) none of above
(C) adsorbed surfaces
11. What causes Brownian mo-
(D) macromolecular colloids tion in colloids?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
234 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(A) collisions between particles of 16. Each mixture below has

the dispersed phase and the dis- particles dispersed in water.
persion medium. Which list has the particles
increasing in size?
(B) coagulation and settling of
particles of the dispersed phase (A) solution, colloid, suspension

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) absorption of energy from (B) solution, suspension, colloid
light. (C) suspension, colloid, solution
(D) variation in particle size within (D) colloid, solution, suspension
the colloid
17. Which of the following fac-
12. Which will dissolve the tors DO NOT affect reaction
slowest rates?
(A) powdered sugar in hot water (A) Nature of reacting species

(B) Powdered sugar in cold water (B) State of reactants

(C) Density
(C) sugar cubes in hot water
(D) Temperature
(D) sugar cubes in cold water
(E) Concentration
13. An example of a solution is
18. Which is the example of hy-
(A) Sugar and water drophilic colloid?
(B) Sand and water (A) milk
(C) Milk (B) gel
(D) Whipped cream (C) gold sol
(D) mayonnaise
14. Fruit Loops, pizza, and Skit-
tles are examples of mix- 19. The following colloids are
tures. used for food or food prepa-
ration EXCEPT
(A) heterogeneous
(A) milk
(B) homogeneous
(B) gelatin
(C) pure
(C) silica gel
(D) none of above
(D) whipped cream
15. Which of the following mix- 20. Which one is a homoge-
ture does NOT belong to the neous mixture?
group?
(A) Milk dissolved in water
(A) vinegar
(B) Whipped Cream
(B) soy sauce
(C) Blood dissolved in water
(C) perfume spray
(D) Sodium Hypochlorite dis-
(D) tomato sauce solved in water

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 235

21. Define colloidal dispersion. (C) deposition

(A) A true solution with particles (D) freezing
suspended in the solvent.
26. This method is commonly
(B) Small particles suspended in used for destruction of col-
solvent; not a true solution. loid..
(C) A heterogenous mixture of an (A) Addition of electrolytes
immiscible solute and solvent.
(B) Condensation
(D) none of above
(C) Dialysis
22. Gold number is a measure (D) Filtration by animal mem-
of brane
(A) Stability of colloidal system
27. Which of the following is
(B) Coagulation power of a col- the definition of solute?
loid
(A) A species formed and used up;
(C) Size of colloidal particles will not appear in rate law.
(D) Efficiency of the protective col- (B) The minor component (is dis-
loid solved).
23. Emulsifying agents and sur- (C) Small particles suspended in
factants both have solvent, not true solution.
(A) one polar end (D) A solid catalyst in an aqueous
reaction.
(B) one nonpolar end
(C) two polar ends 28. What is an Alloy?
(D) one polar and one nonpolar (A) Mixture of Metals and Non-
end metals
(B) Mixture of two Metals
24. How are suspensions and
colloids different? (C) Mixture of Two Non-metals
(A) Suspensions settle out and col- (D) Mixture of plastic and wood
loids do not settle.
29. system are formed when
(B) Colloids settle out and suspen- one system is dispersed in
sions do not settle. the other system but do not
(C) Suspensions dissolve and col- combine to form solution.
loids do not. (A) colloidal
(D) Colloids dissolve and suspen- (B) suspension
sions do not. (C) true solution
25. When a solid changes (D) homogeneous
straight to a gas.
30. If a spoonful of sugar is
(A) condensation mixed in a glass of water,
(B) sublimation what is the water called?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
236 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(A) solute 35. If the amount of solute

present in a solution is more
(B) solution
than the maximum than can
(C) solvent be dissolved, the solution is
(D) element (A) saturated

NARAYAN CHANGDER
31. Physical adsorption of (B) unsaturated
a gaseous species may (C) supersaturated
change to chemical adsorp-
(D) colloidal
tion with
(A) decrease in temperature 36. At high concentration of
soap in water, soap be-
(B) increase in temperature
haves as
(C) increase in surface area of ad-
(A) multimolecular colloid
sorbent
(B) macromolecular colloid
(D) decrease in surface area of
adsorbent (C) associated colloid
(D) Solution
32. Which of the following is
NOT a colloid? 37. Temperature above which
(A) milk micelles formation takes
place is called as
(B) mud
(A) Critical temperature
(C) butter
(B) Kraft temperature
(D) boric acid
(C) Freezing point
33. Which of the following inter- (D) None of these
face cannot be obtained?
(A) liquid-liquid 38. A method of preparing col-
loids consists of clustering or
(B) solid-liquid coming together.
(C) liquid-gas (A) Homogeneous
(D) gas-gas (B) Heterogeneous
34. The movement of colloidal (C) Dispersion
particles towards the oppo- (D) Condensation
sitely charged electrodes on
passing electric current is 39. Zig Zag movement of col-
known as loidal particles is known as
(A) Tyndall Effect (A) Brownian motion
(B) Brownian Motion (B) U Brownian motion
(C) Electrophoresis (C) Both
(D) Coagulation (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 237

40. Method by which lyophobic (B) Sus, Sus, Col

sol can be protected. (C) Sus, Col, Sol
(A) By addition of oppositely (D) Col, Sus, Sol
charged sol.
46. Extent of physisorption of a
(B) By addition of an electrolyte.
gas increases with
(C) By addition of lyophilic sol.
(A) increase in temperature.
(D) By boiling.
(B) decrease in temperature.
41. A is a substance that (C) decrease in surface area of
has definite physical and adsorbent.
chemical properties such as (D) decrease in strength of van
appearance, melting point, der Waals forces.
and reactivity.
47. At high concentration of
(A) mixture
soap in water, soap be-
(B) pure substance haves as
(C) compound (A) molecular colloid
(D) element (B) associated colloid
42. which one is correct? (C) macromolecular colloid
(A) Solutions are clear (D) lyophilic colloid
(B) suspensions are clear 48. Which of the following is an
(C) colloids settle electrolyte?
(A) pure water
(D) Solutions settle
(B) glass
43. The most commonly used
(C) sodium chloride
solvent in food is
(D) sugar
(A) sodium chloride
(B) vinegar 49. Which one from these phe-
nomenons that is not related
(C) water to the colloidal system?
(D) citric acid (A) Dialysis
44. The colloidal solution has a (B) Tyndall Effect
particle size of (C) Absorption
(A) 1nm (D) Electrophoresis
(B) 1000 nm
50. An apparatus for testing
(C) 1nm to 1000nm conductivity is placed in a
(D) more than 1000 nm solution. The power supply
is turned on and the light
45. Coffee beans, Powdered bulb glows brightly. This in-
milk, Powdered coffee dicates that the solution
(A) Sol, Sus, Col (A) is heterogeneous

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
238 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(B) contains an electrolyte (B) its make up

(C) is saturated (C) its density
(D) is supersaturated (D) hydrogen bonding

51. A mixture that never settles 56. What is a substance that

NARAYAN CHANGDER
into layers, but does show is dissolved in another sub-
the Tyndall effect stance?
(A) Alloys (A) solution
(B) Colloids (B) solute
(C) Compounds (C) solvent
(D) Elements (D) compound

52. What is the Tyndall effect? 57. Which of the following is a

set of mixtures?
(A) The inability of oil to mix with
water. (A) air, water, wood

(B) How the tides effect a solu- (B) wood, salt sand
tion’s ability to mix. (C) salt, sand, water
(C) The scattering of light due to (D) wood, air sand
colloids.
58. An example of a universal
(D) none of above indicator is
53. Which of the following is an (A) juice
aerosol? (B) water
(A) smoke (C) milk
(B) milk (D) none of above
(C) cheese 59. It shows a Tyndall ef-
(D) butter fect when light is passed
through
54. Water and Kool-Aid are
mixed together. Hot water, (A) Solution
coffee and sugar are mixed (B) Suspension
together. Which substance (C) Colloid
is the solvent in both?
(D) Both b and c
(A) Water
60. What kind of mixture is
(B) Coffee
formed when larger par-
(C) Kool-aid ticles settle out when left
(D) Sugar undisturbed?
(A) colloid
55. Most of waters unique prop-
erties are due to (B) suspension
(A) the shape of the water (C) solution
molecule (D) solvent

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 239

61. An is made up of one (C) chex mix

or more of the same kind of
(D) air
atom chemically combined.
(A) atom 66. A mixture characterized by
(B) element the settling of particles
(C) molecule (A) solution
(D) compound (B) colloid

62. When do you say that a (C) suspension

mixture is heterogeneous? (D) none of above
(A) The particles are evenly dis-
tributed. 67. Which one is a solution
(B) The components are easily (A) Salt and water
identified.
(B) paint
(C) The components cannot be
identified. (C) pizza
(D) The particles are completely (D) Mustard
dissolved in the other substance.
68. The ability to dissolve in a
63. Freshly prepared precipi- solvent
tate sometimes gets con-
verted to colloidal solution (A) solute
by (B) solubility
(A) coagulation (C) pure substance
(B) electrolysis (D) colloid
(C) diffusion
(D) peptisation 69. Amount of solute in a given
amount of solvent or solu-
64. ‘Greater the valency, the tion
higher is the ciagulating
(A) Concentration
power of ion’. This rule was
introduced by (B) Miscible
(A) Hardy Schulz (C) Solute
(B) Maxwell (D) solubility
(C) Kisses lewis
70. Which is True?
(D) Faraday
(A) Suspensions do not settle
65. Which of the following is a
heterogeneous mixture (B) suspension settle
(A) water (C) colloids settle
(B) Salt dissolved in water (D) Solutions settle

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
240 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

71. Which of the following is (C) Electrophoresis

the definition for the sol-
(D) Electro-osmosis
vent?
(A) A detailed sequence of reac- 76. Which mixture is made up
tion steps. of the smallest particles?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) A solution that contains less (A) milk
than the optimal amount of solute.
(B) muddy water
(C) When all reactants and prod-
ucts are in the same phase. (C) salt water

(D) The major component (retains (D) shaving cream

phase).
77. SOFTDRINKS AND ICE
72. Which one is the example (A) SOL
of colloidal system when
solid is dispersed in gas? (B) SUS
(A) fog (C) COL
(B) foam (D) none of above
(C) smoke
78. A solid solution of one
(D) pumice stone metal melted into another
73. Particles in this state of mat- metal
ter are moving the slowest. (A) Alloys
(A) solid (B) Colloids
(B) gas (C) Compounds
(C) liquid (D) Elements
(D) none of above
79. No definite shape or vol-
74. Why do colloid particles ume
seem to float in solution?
(A) solid
(A) They are too small to settle out
by gravity. (B) liquid
(B) They are anti-gravitational (C) gas
particles. (D) solid, liquid and gas
(C) They disperse so that they are
equidistant from each other. 80. Why is milk a hetrogeneous
mixture?
(D) none of above
(A) It’s particles settle down after
75. The random motion of col- a while
loidal particle in colloidal so-
lution is called as (B) It scatters light
(A) Tyndall effect (C) It’s particles are very small
(B) Brownian Motion (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 241

81. In a , one substance is 86. Movement of dispersion

dissolved in another sub- medium under the influence
stance. of electronic field is called
(A) solution as-

(B) suspension (A) Electro-osmosis

(C) colloid (B) Electrophoresis
(D) none of above (C) Electrodialysis
82. Identify the property of col- (D) Cataphoresis
loid related to Tyndall effect.
(A) Mechanical property 87. Which of the following is
(B) Colligative property TRUE about colloids?
(C) Optical property (A) All colloids are liquid.
(D) Electrical property (B) All colloids are artificial.
83. The smallest piece of an ele- (C) The particles in colloid settle
ment is a(n) down after some time.
(A) Molecule
(D) Colloids may come in any of
(B) Atom the three states:solid, liquid or
(C) Liquid gas.
(D) Compound
88. What does a catalyst do?
84. Which of the following is
(A) Increases the rate of reaction
the definition for solution?
without undergoing a permanent
(A) Energy which reacting species change.
must have to form the transition
state. (B) Decreases the rate of reaction
and undergoes a permanent phys-
(B) The slowest step in a reaction. ical change.
(C) A homogenous mixture.
(C) It does nothing. They are
(D) A substance that speeds up pointless.
rate without permanent change.
(D) none of above
(E) When solids and liquids are
not included in the equilibrium
constant. 89. Which of the following solu-
tions will be transparent to
85. It is the dissolved substance bright source of light?
in the solution
(A) Soil and Water
(A) solvent
(B) Sugar solution
(B) solute
(C) powder (C) Milk
(D) solids (D) Corn Starch

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
242 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

90. are mixtures in which its 95. Which are different types of
particles are too big to stay mixtures
mixed without being stirred (A) suspension
or shaken.
(B) solution
(A) Solutions

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) colloid
(B) Colloids
(D) all the above
(C) Suspensions
96. a solute whose water so-
(D) none of above
lution conducts electricity is
91. What is happening when called a(n)
my ice cream changes from (A) electrolyte
a solid to a liquid?
(B) non electrolyte
(A) freezing
(C) molecular compound
(B) melting (D) non conductor
(C) burning
97. If homogenous solution
(D) evaporation when viewed from a spe-
cific angle appears perfectly
92. A type of mixture where
dark, angle is
the particles are larger than
those in a solution but not (A) 30 Degrees
heavy enough to settle out. (B) 45 Degrees
(A) Homogeneous mixture (C) 60 Degrees
(B) Colloid (D) 90 Degrees
(C) Suspension
98. Which of the following elec-
(D) Compound trolytes will have maxi-
mum coagulating value for
93. How do we seperate par- AgI/Ag+ sol?
ticles from colloidal solu-
tions? (A) Na2S

(A) Distilation (B) Na3PO4

(B) Sedimantation (C) Na2SO4

(C) Evaporation (D) NaCl

(D) Centrifugation 99. Which is not true for

chemisorption?
94. The part of a solution that
(A) It involves high activation en-
does the dissolving
ergy
(A) solute
(B) It is highly specific
(B) solvent
(C) It involves chemical bond for-
(C) mixer upper thing mation
(D) surfactant (D) It is reversible

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 243

100. A mixture whose parti- 104. Fog is an example of

cles are larger than the size (A) Liquid in gas
of a molecule but smaller
than particles that can be (B) Gas in liquid
seen with the naked eye is (C) Solid in liquid
known as a (D) Liquid in liquid
(A) solution
105. The dispersal of a precipi-
(B) suspension tated material into colloidal
(C) colloid solution by the action of
(D) solvent an electrolyte in solutionis
called
101. is a type of heteroge-
(A) Coagulation
neous mixture inwhich the
dispersed particles do not (B) dialysis
settle down. Theinsoluble (C) peptization
particles in the mixture are (D) ultra-filtration
microscopic, with particle
sizes between 1 and 1000 106. A mixture that appears to
nanometer. be evenly mixed through-
(A) SOLUTION out:
(B) COLLOID (A) an atom
(C) SUSPENSION a collection of (B) a compound
solid particles or liquid droplets (C) a homogeneous mixture
dispersed in air. (D) a heterogeneous mixture
(D) none of above
107. Which of the following is
102. These are colloidal system not a method for coagula-
that the dispersed phase is tion of lyophobic sols?
liquid, except
(A) By electrophoresis
(A) milk
(B) By mixing oppositely charged
(B) soap foam sols
(C) margarine (C) By adding electrolyte
(D) fog (D) By adding a protective colloid
103. Define adsorbate. 108. Which statement below
(A) The removal of adsorbed par- does NOT describe a col-
ticles. loid?
(B) A solid material on which ad- (A) A colloid is a type of heteroge-
sorption occurs. neous mixture
(C) A substance in the adsorbed (B) A colloid is a type of solution.
phase. (C) The particles in a colloid do
(D) The study on the interaction not settle like they do in a suspen-
phenomena on the surface. sion.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
244 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(D) The particles in a colloid do (C) soap solution

not dissolve-they are just too small (D) kerosene
to be seen.
114. A saturated solution is
109. Peptisation is a process of
(A) No more solute can be dis-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Precipitation of colloid solved
(B) Dispersion of precipitate (B) More solute can be dissolved
(C) purification of colloids (C) The solvent and solution
(D) Movement of colloid under (D) none of above
electric potential
115. amount of solute that can
110. What is the composition of dissolve in a given amount
collodian? of solvent at a given temper-
ature
(A) Ethanol and water
(A) saturated solution
(B) Ethanol
(B) solubility
(C) Water and ether
(C) pure substance
(D) Ethanol and ether
(D) colloid
111. An emulsion is which type 116. Colloid preparation from
of mixture? molecules or ions to form
(A) suspension colloidal particles is called
(B) colloid
(C) solution (A) coagulation
(B) condensation
(D) gaseous
(C) Mechanical dispersion
112. Which of the following ap- (D) Peptization
pear to be clear (are not
cloudy)? 117. In which of the following
(A) solution do particles sit at the bottom
(A) Solution
(B) suspension
(B) Suspension
(C) colloid
(C) None of the above
(D) alloy
(D) Colloid
113. Coconut oil is non po-
118. heterogeneous mixture in
lar, while water is polar.
which some of the particles
They can not be mixed
settle out of the mixture
and will not dissolve each
upon standing
other.Emulsion is produce
when oil-water mixture is (A) solution
shaken and is added by (B) colloid
(A) hot water (C) solvent
(B) salt solution (D) suspension

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 245

119. Which of the following is (C) 3

an example of colloid? (D) 4
(A) milk (E) 5
(B) sugar solution
124. In what type of phase
(C) muddy water might you find colloidal dis-
(D) water in oil persion?

120. According to Hardy- (A) Solid

Schulze rule, the coagulat- (B) Liquid
ing power of cation follows (C) Gas
the order:
(D) Mixture
(A) Na+ > Ba2+ > Al 3+
(B) Al 3+ > Ba2+ > Na+ 125. Which mixture shows high
homogeneity?
(C) Ba2+ > Al 3+ > Na+
(A) Fruit Salad
(D) Al 3+ > Na+ > Ba2+
(B) Lemmonade
121. A pure substances that (C) Horlicks mixed on milk
can’t be broken down by
chemical or physical means (D) Paint mixed in water
is a(n) 126. Which of the following has
(A) Atom components in a uniform ar-
(B) Molecule rangement?

(C) Compound (A) Heterogeneous mixture

(D) Element (B) Colloids

(C) Suspensions
122. Two classifications of a
pure substance are (D) Solutions

(A) homogeneous and heteroge- 127. Milk is a

neous (A) solution
(B) atoms and elements (B) suspension
(C) elements and compounds (C) colloid
(D) solutions and colloids (D) none of above
123. These are the properties of 128. A colloidal solution con-
colloid.ElectrophoresisTyndall sists of
EffectCoagulationBrownian
movementDialysisWhich (A) a dispersed phase
number that is applied in (B) a dispersion medium
purification of water using (C) a dispersed phase in a disper-
alum? sion medium
(A) 1 (D) a dispersion medium in a dis-
(B) 2 persed phase

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
246 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

129. Which of the following is a 134. Which of the following is

slow process? an example of absorption?
(A) Dialysis (A) Water on silica gel
(B) Electrolysis (B) Water on calcium chloride

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Ultrafiltration (C) Hydrogen on finely divided
nickel
(D) Electro-Dialysis
(D) Oxygen on metal surface
130. A beam of light is visible
through a colloid. This is 135. Which of the following is
called ? NOT an example of col-
loids?
(A) Tyndall Effect
(A) milk
(B) Homogenization
(B) jelly
(C) Suspended light
(C) tincture of iodine
(D) Colloidal Dispersion
(D) fog
131. The process of settling of
136. A suspension is formed
colloidal particle is called
from uniform particles of
(A) Peptization solid, of diameter 10 Mm
(B) Caogulation suspended in a solvent.
What is the best description
(C) Dialysis of this system?
(D) Emulsification (A) Polydisperse and coarse
132. Henry’s law relates (B) Monodisperse and coarse
(A) pressure to temperature (C) Polydisperse and colloidal
(B) pressure to gas-liquid solubil- (D) Monodisperse and colloidal
ity (E) None of the above
(C) temperature to gas-liquid sol- 137. Fog in an example of col-
ubility loidal system of
(D) pressure to solid-liquid solu- (A) liquid in gas
bility
(B) gas in liquid
133. In this state of matter, (C) solid in gas
the molecules can move
(D) gas in solid
around each other, but can-
not break the force of attrac- 138. The colloidal solution of
tion between them. liquid in liquid is called as
(A) liquid (A) Sol
(B) gas (B) Emulsion
(C) solid (C) Aerosol
(D) none of above (D) Solid sol

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 247

139. The term ‘sorption’ stands (C) not stirring the solution
for (D) decreasing the contact area
(A) absorption between solvent and solute
(B) adsorption 144. If you shine a light into a
(C) both absorption and adsorp- liquid and the light is scat-
tion tered, this is called
(D) desorption (A) the tyndall effect
(B) suspension
140. Select the CORRECT state-
ment regarding adsorption (C) colloid
process. (D) a suspension or colloid
(A) A substance is encapsulated in
145. Milk and Cornstarch are
the solid or liquid form.
examples of
(B) A substance is distributed
(A) colloidal solution and suspen-
throughout the solid or liquid
sion respectively.
form.
(B) both colloidal solutions.
(C) A substance becomes at-
tached to the surface of a solid (C) suspension and colloidal solu-
or a liquid. tions respectively.
(D) It may involve chemisorption (D) both are suspension
only.
146. It is made of either ele-
141. Milk and gelatin are ex- ments or compounds that
amples of are physically combined
(A) suspensions (A) atom

(B) colloids (B) element

(C) solutions (C) mixture

(D) none of above (D) compound

147. When a solution reaches

142. Which is NOT a colloid
the point where it cannot
(A) Blood dissolve any more solute it
(B) Paint is considered
(C) Detergent (A) Soluble
(D) Milk of magnesia (B) Diluted
(C) Concentrated
143. Which of the following
decreases the average ki- (D) Saturated
netic energy of solvent 148. This solution has no Tyn-
molecules? dall Effect and is not filter-
(A) decreasing the temperature able
(B) decreasing the pressure (A) solution

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
248 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(B) suspension 154. Which substance that in-

(C) colloid cludes in aerosol system?
(D) heterogeneous (A) soap foam

149. Recognize the method in (B) paint

NARAYAN CHANGDER
preparing lyophilic sol. (C) colored glass
(A) Chemical reduction (D) smoke
(B) Peptization
(C) Mechanical dispersion 155. Which has the largest par-
ticles?
(D) Direct mixing of the solid with
the liquid (A) Solution

150. which one is a suspen- (B) Colloids

sion? (C) Suspension
(A) Vinegar (D) None of the above
(B) Foam
156. Which of the following
(C) Fog
would leave particles on fil-
(D) oil spill in the ocean ter paper?
151. Dispersion method is used (A) Solution
to produce colloid from sus-
(B) Suspension
pension. Which process is
not dispersion method? (C) Colloid
(A) mechanical dispersion (D) none of above
(B) hydrolysis
157. Extent of physisorption in-
(C) Bredig’s Arch method creases with
(D) Peptization
(A) decrease in surface area
152. Which one is not a colloid (B) increase in temperature
(A) Foam
(C) decrease in temperature
(B) Gel
(D) decrease in strength of van
(C) Emulsion der waal forces
(D) Coffee
158. When dispersed phase
153. In the expression “like dis- is liquid and dispersion
solves like, “ the word like medium is gas, the colloidal
refers to similarity in molec- system is called:
ular
(A) Aerosol
(A) mass
(B) weight (B) Emulsion
(C) polarity (C) Smoke
(D) energy (D) Gel

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 249

159. Tyndall effect occurs when 164. Which of the following

the colloidal particle best describes a mixture?
(A) adsorbs the light (A) It is a physical combination of
two or more substances.
(B) passes the light
(B) It is a homogeneous system.
(C) scatters the light
(C) It has different combinations
(D) is able to do brownian motion
of solid and liquid.
160. Electro-Dialysis can be (D) It exhibited by the use of Tyn-
made faster, provided it is dall Effect.
an electrolyte. How?
165. A type of mixture that falls
(A) Applying an electric field in between suspensions and
(B) Increasing the temperature solutions are called
(C) Adding a catalyst (A) solutions
(D) Adding more electrolyte (B) colloids
(C) suspensions
161. type of mixture that
doesn’t separate on its (D) pure substances
own but still contains undis-
166. Cloud or fog is an example
solved particles ( looks
of colloidal system of:
cloudy)
(A) solid disperesed in gas
(A) solution
(B) gas dispersed in gas
(B) colloid
(C) liquid dispersed in gas
(C) suspension
(D) solid dispersed in liquid
(D) none of above
167. The following is the colloid
162. type of mixture that synthesis.metal solFe(OH)3
doesn’t separate on its solAs2S3 solSulphur solAgCl
own but still contains undis- solWhich are occupying con-
solved particles densation method?
(A) solution (A) 1, 2, 4
(B) colloid (B) 1, 4, 5
(C) suspension (C) 1, 3, 4
(D) none of above (D) 2, 3, 4
163. When boiling water cre- 168. substance that dissolves
ates steam. the solute
(A) condensation (A) solution
(B) melting (B) solvent
(C) freezing (C) saturation
(D) vaporization (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
250 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

169. Particles of a homoge- (B) homogeneous

neous mixture is smaller
(C) pure substance
than
(A) 1nm (D) none of above

(B) 0.5nm

NARAYAN CHANGDER
174. Which of the following ma-
(C) 2nm terial can produce a solu-
tion?
(D) 1.5nm
(A) Common salt
170. A solute crystal is dropped
into a solution containing (B) Garden soil
dissolved solute. It falls to (C) Boiled starch
the bottom of the beaker
and does not dissolve af- (D) Corn flour
ter vigorous stirring. What
does this indicate about the 175. ‘’ A substance is first
solution? ground to coarse particles
and then mixed with the dis-
(A) probably unsaturated
persion medium to produce
(B) probably saturated a suspension. “Name the
(C) probably supersaturated method to produce sol as
mentioned above.
(D) not at equilibrium
(A) Double decomposition
171. What is the one property
of a suspension that is dif- (B) Mechanical dispersion
ferent from a solution or a (C) Bredig’s arc
colloid?
(D) Peptization
(A) If left to rest, the particles of a
suspension will settle down. 176. The tyndall effect can be
(B) The particles of a suspension seen in
reflect light.
(A) Suspension
(C) A suspension is always clear.
(B) Solution
(D) Suspensions are colourless.
(C) Colloids
172. An surfactant
(D) All of the above
(A) increases surface tension
(B) creates hydrogen bonds 177. How can we prove a sub-
stance is homogeneous or
(C) decreases surface tension
heterogeneous?
(D) is a solvent
(A) Tyndall effect
173. A mixture is one where (B) Common Sense
the substances are evenly
spread throughout. (C) We cant prove it.
(A) heterogeneous (D) None of the above.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 251

178. Which is an example of an can be separated by physi-

emulsifying agent cal means is known as a
(A) soap/detergents (A) Element
(B) salt (B) compound
(C) water (C) Mixture
(D) oil (D) Solid

179. Muddy water is an exam- 184. are the smallest unit of

ple of what type of mix- an element that maintains
ture? the properties of that ele-
ment.
(A) colloid
(A) Atoms
(B) solution
(B) Elements
(C) suspension
(C) Compounds
(D) homogeneous
(D) Mixtures
180. What type of mixture sep-
arates upon standing (like 185. Carbon dioxide dissolved
the oil and water in the lava in water is an example of
lamp)? which solute-solvent combi-
nation?
(A) Solution
(A) liquid in liquid
(B) Alloy
(B) liquid in gas
(C) Colloid
(C) gas in liquid
(D) Suspension
(D) cannot be determined
181. A snow globe would be an
example of a 186. Why do we need soap to
wash oil off of things?
(A) colloid
(A) We need soap because soap
(B) solution has both hydrophilic and hy-
(C) suspension drophobic parts.
(D) none of above (B) We need soap because water
is not strong enough to wash off
182. A suspension is a kind oil.
of mixture.
(C) We need soap because oil is
(A) Homogeneous hydrophobic (water-fearing).
(B) Hetrogeneous (D) We need soap because soap
(C) I don’t know particles are larger than water.

(D) none of above 187. What is foam?

183. A physical blend of two or (A) solid is dispersed in gas

more pure substances that (B) gas is dispersed in solid

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
252 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

(C) gas is dispersed in liquid 193. type of mixture that

(D) liquid is dispersed in liquid doesn’t separate on its own;
exhibits tyndall effect.
188. Sol Fe(OH)3 synthesis is (A) solution
carried out by

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) colloid
(A) Mechanical dispersion
(C) suspension
(B) Peptization
(D) none of above
(C) Double decomposition
(D) Hydrolysis 194. Which of these is a com-
pound?
189. A cloudy liquid that con-
(A) Aluminium (Al)
tains insoluble particles
(B) Carbon Dioxide (CO2)
(A) suspension
(B) solvent (C) Nitrogen (N)

(C) solute (D) Sand

(D) salt 195. The movement of sol par-

ticles under an applied elec-
190. The particles of a matter tric potential is called
which can’t be separated by
filter paper but undergoes (A) Electrophoresis
Tyndall Effect (B) electro-osmosis
(A) None of these (C) electrofiltration
(B) Solution (D) none of these
(C) Suspension
196. Which of the following is
(D) Colloidal soluble in water, which is a
191. the substance that dis- very polar solvent
solves (A) potassium nitrate
(A) solvent (B) nail polish remover (acetone)
(B) solution (C) gasoline (octane)
(C) solute (D) carbon tetrachloride (CCl 4)
(D) unsaturated
197. Which of the following
192. Bredig’s arc method is would be a hydrophilic
used for the preparation of aqueous colloidal disper-
colloidal soln of: sion?
(A) Metal like silver, gold, etc (A) Oil
(B) Organic compounds (B) Protein
(C) Two liquids (C) Salt Water
(D) Inorganic compounds (D) Dichloromethane

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 253

198. Sugar water is a (B) Water

(A) solution (C) Alcohol
(B) suspension (D) Detergent
(C) colloid
204. Which of the following
(D) none of above
mixture can make bread?
199. The colloidal particles in (A) water, milk, coffee
the a colloid form the
(B) water, sugar, milk, yeast
(A) dispersed phase
(B) dispersion medium (C) water, sugar, milk, yeast,
flour
(C) solute
(D) water, sugar, milk, creamer,
(D) solvent
yeast
200. The state of matter in
which the atoms are locked 205. Substance that dissolves
and vibrate in place. the solute
(A) solid (A) solution
(B) liquid (B) solvent
(C) gas (C) saturation
(D) none of above (D) so
201. Which of these is a pure
substance? 206. A type of mixture that al-
ways looks cloudy because
(A) bread clumps of insoluble particles
(B) table salt remain suspended through-
out it-they do not settle as
(C) garden soil
sediments after a period of
(D) sea water time
202. The colloidal solution (A) colloid
formed when dispersed
(B) sedimentation
phase is liquid; dispersed
medium is gas (C) suspended
(A) Foam (D) crystallisation
(B) Aerosol
207. Which of the following will
(C) Gel
show ‘’Tyndall Effect”?
(D) Sols
(A) Salt solution
203. Which of the following is (B) Milk
commonly known as a uni-
versal solvent? (C) Copper Sulphate Solution
(A) Petrol (D) Starch Solution

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
254 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

208. Take a look at the follow- (B) Physical adsorption occurs

ing properties.Able to ad- due to Van der Waals’forces.
sorb ionscatters the light- (C) Chemical adsorption de-
the particles move ran- creases at high temperature and
domlyAbe to have charge- low pressure.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
Which are the colloidal prop-
erties? (D) Physical adsorption is re-
versible.
(A) 1, 2, and 3
(B) 1 and 3 213. Which form of matter does
not take the shape of its con-
(C) 2 and 4
tainer?
(D) all corrects
(A) liquid
209. Which of the following is (B) gas
the best description of a so-
(C) solid
lution? (Choose all the cor-
rect answers) (D) air
(A) can not be separated using a 214. Which of the following will
filter show Tyndall effect?
(B) doesn’t scatter light
(A) Aqueous solution of soap be-
(C) a solute dissolved in a solvent low critical micelle concentration.
(D) homogeneous (B) Aqueous solution of soap
above critical micelle concentra-
210. If there is a lot of solute in tion.
a solution, then it is
(C) Aqueous solution of sodium
(A) Soluble chloride.
(B) Diluted (D) Aqueous solution of sugar.
(C) Concentrated
215. Type of mixture which
(D) Pure Solution doesn’t separate on its own
211. As temperature increases, (A) Suspension
solubility of solids in liquids
(B) Colloid
(A) usually decreases
(C) None of the above
(B) usually increases
(D) All of the above
(C) always decreases
216. What is the universal sol-
(D) always increases
vent?
212. Select the FALSE statement (A) Oil
about adsorption.
(B) Vinegar
(A) The value of adsorption en-
thalpy of physical adsorption is (C) Water
less than chemical adsorption. (D) Soup

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 255

217. The scattering of light by 222. Particles are large enough

the dispersed phase is called to scatter light beam.
(A) Brownian Movement (A) colloid
(B) Tyndall Effect (B) solution
(C) adsorption (C) suspension
(D) none of these (D) heterogeneous mixture

218. Pressure has the greatest 223. A colloid that contains tiny
effect on the solubility of droplets of a liquid dis-
persed in another liquid.
(A) gasses in gasses
(A) Sol
(B) gasses in liquids
(B) Gel
(C) liquids in liquids
(C) Emulsion
(D) solids in liquids
(D) Aerosols
219. Formation of micelles
224. Which of the following has
takes place only above
the largest particles?
a particular concentration,
known as (A) Solution
(A) Critical micelles concentration (B) Suspension
(B) Normal concentration (C) Colloid
(C) Both (D) none of above
(D) None of the above 225. The movement of the dis-
persion medium under the
220. How much percentage influence of applied poten-
of of collodian solution is tial is known as
needed?
(A) Osmosis
(A) 2%
(B) electro-osmosis
(B) 3%
(C) electrophoresis
(C) 4%
(D) none of these
(D) 4.5%
226. What is essential for the
221. Peptization denotes: stability of the colloidal so-
(A) Digestion of food lution?

(B) Hydrolysis of protein (A) Excessive amounts of elec-

trolytes
(C) Breaking and dispersion into
colloidal state (B) Some other soluble impurities
(C) Traces of electrolytes
(D) Precipitation of solid from col-
loidal dimension (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
256 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

227. Which of the following (A) Electron capture by sol parti-

process is responsible for cles.
the formation of delta at a (B) Adsorption of ionic species
place where rivers meet the from solution.
sea?
(C) Formation of Helmholtz elec-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Emulsification trical double layer.
(B) Colloid formation (D) Absorption of ionic species
(C) Coagulation from solution
(D) Peptisation 232. Electrolyte excess in a col-
loidal system can be re-
228. When a small amount of moved by process
FeCl3 is added to a freshly
precipitated Fe(OH)3, b red- (A) Electrophoresis
dish brown colloidal solu- (B) Ultrafiltration
tion is obtained. This phe- (C) Dialysis
nomenon is known as
(D) Peptization
(A) dialysis
(B) peptization 233. What happens to the solu-
bility of most solutes as the
(C) protection temperature increases?
(D) dissolution (A) increases

229. Which of the following (B) decreases

is dispersing medium foe (C) stays the same
emulsion? (D) can’t predict
(A) gas
234. Substances which behave
(B) liquid as normal electrolytes so-
(C) solid lution at low concentration
and exhibit colloids proper-
(D) solid and liquid
ties at higher concentration
230. *These are colloids which are called
consist of liquid dispersed in (A) lyophilic colloids
solid. (B) lyophobic colloids
(A) aerosol (C) macromolecular colloids
(B) emulsion (D) associated colloids
(C) foam
235. Which of the following
(D) gels properties of colloids does
not depend on the charge on
231. Which of the following particles?
process is not responsible
for the presence of electric (A) Coagulation
charge on the sol particles? (B) Electro-osmosis

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 257

(C) Electrophoresis 241. mixture that does NOT ap-

(D) Tyndall effect pear to be evenly mixed
throughout:
236. The part of the solution (A) an atom
that is being dissolved (B) a compound
(A) solute (C) a homogeneous mixture
(B) solvent (D) a heterogeneous mixture
(C) solubility 242. Which of the following is
(D) miscible always homogeneous?
(A) Solution
237. A is one that does
not have a uniform compo- (B) Suspension
sition. (C) Colloid
(A) heterogeneous mixture (D) none of above
(B) homogenous mixture 243. A mixture is one that
(C) pure substance does not have a uniform
composition.
(D) none of above
(A) heterogeneous
238. These are colloids which (B) homogenous
consists of gas dispersed in
(C) pure substance
liquid or solid .
(D) none of above
(A) aerosol
(B) emulsion 244. What kind of mixture is
formed when oil is mixed
(C) foam with water?
(D) gel (A) suspension

239. Butter is the example of (B) solvent

colloidal system (C) solution
(A) solid in liquid (D) colloids
(B) liquid in solid 245. Foam is a colloidal sys-
(C) liquid in liquid tem which consists of a dis-
persed phase and a disper-
(D) gas in liquid sion medium. Indicate the
dispersed phase and disper-
240. Which the following is not sion medium of foam, re-
a colloidal system spectively.
(A) Latex (A) Liquid and liquid
(B) Hard water (B) Solid and gas
(C) Ink (C) Liquid and solid
(D) Pumice stone (D) Gas and liquid

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
258 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

246. Which of the following will 251. The diameter of particles

dissolve most rapidly? in colloidal system is
(A) sugar cube in cold water (A) 10-9 m to 10-6 m
(B) sugar cube in hot water (B) 10-10 m to 10-4 m

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) powdered sugar in hot water (C) 10-12 m to 10-9 m
(D) powdered sugar in cold water
(D) 10-7 m to 10-5 m
247. It is a process of remov-
ing a dissolved substance 252. Which one is a colloid?
from a colloidal solution by (A) sea water
means of diffusion through
(B) air
a suitable membrane
(A) Electrophoresis (C) river water

(B) Dialysis (D) milk

(C) Precipitation 253. Which is a colloid?
(D) Peptization
(A) Air
248. The following are emul- (B) Rice in water
sions EXCEPT
(C) Fog
(A) butter
(D) Rain water
(B) facial cream
(C) mayonnaise 254. mixture of two or more
(D) whipped cream substances; dissolved par-
ticles are spread evenly
249. Sand floating in water, throughout the mixture
but most of the sand is set- (A) solvent
tled at the bottom this an ex-
ample of which type of mix- (B) solute
ture? (C) mixture
(A) solution (D) solution
(B) suspension
(C) colloid 255. Which of the following
does not increase the rate
(D) none of above of dissolving a solid in a liq-
uid?
250. A is made up of differ-
ent kinds of atoms chemi- (A) stirring the solution
cally combined.
(B) crushing up the solute
(A) element
(C) raising the temperature of the
(B) compound water
(C) mixture (D) lowering the temperature of
(D) molecule the water

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
2.8 Tyndall effect 259

256. Coagulation process is 261. A contains a variety

shown in of elements and compounds
that are not chemically com-
(A) fog in a mountain
bined with each other.
(B) delta precipitation
(A) compound
(C) textile coloring
(B) element
(D) sugar whitening
(C) molecule
257. A liquid made up of a sol- (D) mixture
vent with a solute dissolved
in it 262. What substance is called
the universal solvent
(A) solution
(A) oil
(B) soluble
(B) air
(C) solidified
(C) water
(D) solar
(D) all of the above
258. Exhibits the Tyndall effect
263. The substance that does
(more than one answer is
the dissolving is known as
possible)
the
(A) homogeneous mixture
(A) solute
(B) colloid
(B) solvent
(C) suspension
(C) soluble
(D) solution
(D) insoluble
259. Which of these is an ele- 264. The Tyndall Effect is not vis-
ment? ible in which of the follow-
(A) Salt (NaCl) ing?
(B) Water (H20) (A) Solution
(C) Oxygen (O) (B) Suspension
(D) Carbon Dioxide (CO2) (C) Colloid
(D) Heterogeneous Mixture
260. A substance in which the
atoms of two or more differ- 265. Coffee, mouthwash, and
ent elements are combined vinegar are examples of
in a fixed proportion. mixtures.
(A) molecule (A) heterogeneous
(B) compound (B) homogeneous
(C) element (C) pure
(D) mixture (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
260 Chapter 2. The human eye and the colourful world

266. These are the example of (B) not filterable

colloids.GelPaintMilkStarchGelWhich
(C) none of the above
number is emulsion?
(D) none of above
(A) 1
(B) 2 268. What is the process in

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 3 which colloid will coagulate
due to the opposite charge
(D) 4
presence?
(E) 5
(A) Tyndall effect
267. If a mixture goes through
(B) Brownian motion
the filter paper, it is said to
be (C) Electrophoresis
(A) filterable (D) Dialysis

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 3. Electricity

3.1 Electric current & circuit

1. is a measure of how difficult 4. This type of circuit only has
it is for an electric current to one path for current to flow.
flow in a material.
(A) series
(A) electric current
(B) parallel
(B) electric circuit
(C) combination
(C) electric resistance
(D) split
(D) none of above
5. an object or type of mate-
2. In the equation I = V/R, V is rial that allows the flow of
expressed in an electrical current in one
or more directions.
(A) volts
(A) conductor
(B) ohms
(B) insulator
(C) amperes
(C) spark
(D) none of above
(D) grounding
3. Three resistors, RA = 10 Ω,
RB = 20 Ω, and RC = 25 Ω, 6. What happens when elec-
are connected in SERIES. The tricity flows through anob-
total resistance of this setup ject?
is equal to
(A) A magnetic field is destroyed.
(A) 0.19 Ω
(B) Protons are pulled away from
(B) 5.26 Ω their atoms.
(C) 18.33 Ω (C) A magnetic field is created.
(D) 55 Ω (D) Electrical charge is equalized.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
262 Chapter 3. Electricity

7. In a simple circuit consisting (A) induction

of a single lamp and a sin- (B) conduction
gle battery, when current in
the lamp is 2 amperes, the (C) friction
current in the battery is (D) none of above

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) half, 1 A. 12. Metals such as copper, iron,
(B) 2 A. gold, and silver are
(C) dependent on internal battery (A) conductors
resistance. (B) brittle
(D) Not enough information to (C) insulators
say.
(D) resistors
8. When a dry cell is connected
in a series, the flow of elec- 13. is the potential difference
trons moves from the ter- across it’s terminals when
minal to the terminal. cell is in closed circuit.
(A) positive, negative (A) Emf
(B) negative, positive (B) Terminal potential difference
(C) positive, positive (C) Work

(D) negative, negative (D) Lost volt

9. What would happen if you 14. current is measured in

add more batteries to an (A) volts
electrical circuit containing (B) amps
light bulbs?
(C) watts
(A) No charge
(D) mph
(B) The bulbs will dim.
(C) The bulbs will be brighter. 15. An electric current is made
up of charged electrons
(D) The bulbs will last longer.
(A) neutral
10. In a parallel circuit which of (B) negative
the following varies based
on the amount of resistance (C) positive

(A) Voltage (D) balanced

(B) Current 16. How does resistance affect

(C) Ohms Law current?

(D) Charge (A) less resistance-less current

(B) more resistance-less current
11. the charging of an object by
the contact of a charged ob- (C) more resistance-more current
ject to a neutral object (like (D) resistance does not affect cur-
touching a door knob) rent

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 263

17. In a circuit, the current flow 22. We use to measure elec-

is 1.0 A. If the potential dif- tric current.
ference across the resistor is (A) voltmeter
1.0 V and the e.m.f. of the
cell is 1.5 V, what is the in- (B) ammeter
ternal resistance of the cell? (C) ohmmeter
(A) 0.2 Ω (D) rheostat
(B) 0.5 Ω 23. An electric current can pro-
(C) 1.2 Ω duce
(D) 1.5 Ω (A) heating effect only.

18. How many Volts would we (B) chemical effect only.

need to produce a current of (C) magnetic effect only.
8 Amps through a 6 Ohm re- (D) chemical, heating, and mag-
sistor? netic effects.
(A) 1.33 volts
24. An example of an insulator
(B) 24 volts is:
(C) 0.75 (A) iron
(D) 48 volts (B) silver
19. A light bulb is an example (C) copper wire
of a (D) rubber
(A) current
25. Which type of material
(B) resistor DOES NOT allow electric cur-
(C) battery rent to flow through it?
(D) none of above (A) An insulator

20. The amount of energy used (B) A magnet

to move one coulomb of (C) A conductor
electrons through the circuit (D) A metal
is its
(A) current 26. A glowing filament will be
at a
(B) voltage
(A) Low temperature
(C) resistance
(B) High temperature
(D) none of above
(C) Atmospheric temperature
21. AC stands for (D) Temperature of a ice
(A) Alternating current
27. amount of resistance to the
(B) Air conditioning flow of current within the
(C) Alphabetical c voltage source
(D) none of above (A) electromotive force (emf)

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
264 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) equivalent resistance 32. causes the electrons to

(C) internal resistance flow.

(D) three-wire system (A) Electricity

(B) EMF or electromotive force.
28. Name the instrument used

NARAYAN CHANGDER
to measure the emf of a cell (C) Magnetism

(A) Multimeter (D) Resistance

(B) Ammeter 33. What is the effective resis-
(C) Potentiometer tance for two resistors that
each has 15ohm resistance
(D) Galvanometer
and they are connected in
29. An electric current is passed parallel?
through a conducting so- (A) 7ohm
lution. Following are the
(B) 7.5ohm
some observations:(i) De-
posits of metal may be seen (C) 7.2ohm
on electrodes(ii) Solution
(D) 7.25ohm
may get heated(iii) Bubbles
of gas may be formed on 34. Full form of MCB is
the electrodes
(A) miniature circuit breaker
(A) Only (ii) is true
(B) most circuit breaker
(B) Only (i) and (ii) are true
(C) maximum circuit breaker
(C) Only (i) and (iii) are true
(D) minimum circuit breaker
(D) All (i), (ii) and (iii) are true.
35. When the switch is off the
30. change sunlight into elec-
circuit is broken and current
tric energy.
doesn’t flow through it, it is
(A) batteries called
(B) generators (A) A closed circuit
(C) solar cells (B) An open circuit
(D) none of above (C) A fused circuit
31. A circuit with 3 resistors, 20 (D) none of above
Ohms, 10 Ohms, and 20
Ohms are in series. What is 36. One ampere equals about 1
the total resistance? of electrons
(A) 43 Ohms (A) voltage
(B) 50 Ohms (B) watt
(C) 60 Ohms (C) ohm
(D) 33 Ohms (D) coulomb

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 265

37. What is the formula for cur- 42. As resistors are added in se-
rent? ries to a circuit, the total re-
(A) I = t/Q sistance will
(B) I = W/Q (A) increase
(C) I = Q/t (B) decrease
(D) I = W/t (C) stay the same
(D) none of above
38. In the equation I = nAvq,
what does v represent? 43. The voltage-current graph
(A) The speed of the electrons for a non-ohmic resistor is
curve.
(B) The average speed of the elec-
trons (A) A graph cant be curve
(C) The velocity of the electrons (B) True statment
(D) The average velocity of the (C) The resistor should be ohmic
electrons (D) none of above
(E) the fastest speed of all elec-
44. What is resistance mea-
trons
sured in?
39. What is a Parallel circuit? (A) Amps
(A) Has only one path (B) Ohms
(B) Has more than one path (C) Volts
(C) Allows energy to travel (D) none of above
through easily
45. Ms Jo Jo rubbed two bal-
(D) Has only one light bulb
loons with a piece of wool.
40. Energy transferred per unit What will happen when the
charge is balloons are brought near
(A) e.m.f each other?

(B) current (A) The balloons will repel each

other.
(C) potential difference
(B) The balloons will attract each
(D) conventional current other.
41. An electrical junction has (C) The balloons will become pos-
three wires A, B and C con- itively (+) charged.
nected to it. Wire A carries (D) The balloons will pop.
4.2 A going in, wire B car-
ries 2.6 A going out. What 46. A battery is measured by its
does wire C carry?
(A) 1.6 A going in (A) Voltage
(B) 1.6 A going out (B) Current
(C) 6.8 A going in (C) Electricity
(D) 6.8 A going out (D) Chemical Charge

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
266 Chapter 3. Electricity

47. This circuit has multiple (C) Lose protons

branches for the electric (D) Lose electrons
charges to flow.
(A) Parallel Circuit 52. Amps are used as a unit
of measure for which con-
(B) Open Circuit

NARAYAN CHANGDER
cept?
(C) Short Circuit
(A) Power
(D) Series Circuit
(B) Volts
48. Q= which of the following (C) Resistance
situation has 1) the greatest
electric current 2) the small- (D) Current
est electric current? Where 53. How do you measure po-
a:is the flow of 3C in 1 s, tential difference in a cir-
b:a person walking 8m in 4 cuit?
s and c:the flow of 6C in 3 s.
(A) Voltmeter
(A) a, 2) b
(B) Ammeter
(B) c, 2) a
(C) Thermistor
(C) a, 2) c
(D) Battery pack
(D) b, 2) c

49. A potential difference of 24 54. Which one of the follow-

V is applied to a 150 re- ing solutions will not con-
sistor. How much current duct electricity?
flows through the resistor? (A) lemon juice
(A) 0.15 A (B) vinegar
(B) 3600 A (C) tap water
(C) 6.25 A (D) vegetable oil
(D) 0.16 A
55. Thicker wires have resis-
50. how many electrons pass tance than thinner wires.
through a lamp in 1 minute (A) more
if the current is 300 mA
(B) less
(A) 1.125 X 1020
(C) the same
(B) 1025
(D) none of above
(C) 1.6 X 10−19
(D) none of above 56. A device for making or
breaking an electric circuit.
51. What would have to hap-
(A) Cell
pen for an atom to become
positively charged? (B) Filament
(A) Gain protons (C) Electric switch
(B) Gain electrons (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 267

57. Which statement about elec- 61. A high resistance light bulb
tric curent is correct? and a low resistance light
bulb are connected in series
(A) It always flows clockwise
to a 6-Volt pack of batteries.
(B) It gets used as it goes around Which of the two light bulbs
the circuit will shine the brightest?
(C) It flow in many directions at (A) They will have the same bright-
the same time ness.
(D) It always flows from the point (B) The low-R bulb will shine more
where the electrical potential is brightly.
highest to the point where it is low- (C) The high-R bulb will shine
est more brightly.
58. What is a fuse? (D) None of the above

(A) a small piece of metal that 62. What happens when you
melts if current becomes too high add a second bulb to a se-
ries circuit?
(B) contains two or more
branches for currents to move (A) The first bulb gets brighter
through (B) The second bulb will be as
(C) contains a small piece of bright as the first because they
metal that bends when it gets hot both get full power
and causes a switch to flip and (C) The circuit will no longer work
opens the circuit (D) Both bulbs will be half as
(D) none of above bright because the voltage is di-
vided by two now
59. The difference in electrical
potential energy between 63. What is Resistance?
two places is called (A) the degree to which a circuit
(A) resistance component opposes the passage
of an electric current, causing en-
(B) friction ergy dissipation
(C) induction (B) How hard the energy is
(D) voltage pushed
(C) The amount of charges that
60. What is a superconductor? pass by a given point per second
(A) a material with a lot of resis- (D) None of the above
tance
64. What is the equivalent re-
(B) a material with no or zero re- sistance of a series circuit
sistance with three identical resistors
(C) a material with an unlimited of value 2 ohms?
amount of resistance (A) 6 ohms
(D) none of above (B) 1.5 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
268 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) 2/3 ohms 69. Electric bulb converts electri-

cal energy into
(D) 8 ohms
(A) sound energy
65. As current flows through a
(B) mechanical energy
wire, the number of stays

NARAYAN CHANGDER
the same (C) light energy
(A) circuits (D) magnetic energy

(B) particles 70. Distilled water is

(C) current (A) Good conductor
(D) electrons (B) Bad conductor
(C) Who cares?
66. Conventional current is
(D) I am done. I cannot answer
(A) the direction that positive
any more questions!
charges move through a circuit.
(B) a fictional idea. 71. If the Voltage is increased
and the resistance stays the
(C) the direction that negative same, Current will
charges move through a circuit.
(A) Increase
(D) is not the standard way of de-
scribing the direction of current. (B) Decrease
(C) Stay the same
67. What is Electric Current
(D) Not enough info
(A) flow of electric current through
a conductor 72. There are 6.23 ×1024 free
electrons per cm3 in a wire.
(B) flow of electric charges
The average drift veloc-
through a conductor
ity of the electrons is 1.1
(C) flow of electric charges ×10−3 m s−1 . Calculate the
through an insulator current density in the wire.
(D) flow of electric current (A) 1.0 ×103 A m−2
through an insulator
(B) 6.9 ×106 A m−2
68. How does the thickness of a (C) 2.1 ×109 A m−2
wire affect resistance? (D) 1.1 ×109 A m−2
(A) A thicker wire has more resis-
tance 73. Which of these materials is
a conductor?
(B) A thinner wire has more resis-
tance (A) Rubber

(C) Thickness of a wire does not (B) Plastic

affect resistance (C) Glass
(D) none of above (D) Copper

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 269

74. Six identical cells, each of 78. Crane has a strong at-
emf of 6V, are connected in tached to it.
parallel, The net emf across (A) Artificial magnets
the battery is
(B) Electromagnets
(A) 6V
(C) Magnets
(B) 36V
(D) none of above
(C) 0 V
(D) Between 6v and 36 v 79. The length of four wires A,
B, C and D are 30 cm, 20
75. Which of these is an exam- cm, 10 cm, and 5 cm, re-
ple of current electricity? spectively. Which of the fol-
lowing has the maximum re-
(A) Placing a lightning rod on the
sistance, provided all other
roof of a house to attract lightning
conditions are the same?
(B) Rubbing a plastic pipe with
(A) A
a piece of wool to attract small
pieces of paper (B) B
(C) Building a circuit using copper (C) C
wire and a D cell battery (D) D
(D) Using a sheet of fabric softner
in the dryer to help reduce static 80. Which part of a circuit starts
cling and stops the flow of electri-
cal current?
76. Select the correct statement: (A) battery
(A) The current in parallel resis- (B) light bulb
tors is always equal.
(C) wire
(B) The current is the same across
(D) switch
resistors connected in series.
(C) The sum of the currents in a 81. In the equation I = V/R, I
closed loop is zero. stands for
(D) The sum of the voltages at a (A) potential difference
junction is zero. (B) current
77. A charge of 60 Coulomb (C) resistance
flows in a wire for 45 min- (D) none of above
utes. If the diameter of the
wire is 1.0 mm, what is the 82. The two types of current are
current density in the wire?
(A) 2.2 ×104 A m−2 (A) AC/DC
(B) 2.8 ×104 A m−2 (B) Alternating Current
(C) 7.6 ×107 A m−2 (C) Direct Current
(D) 5.6 ×108 A m−2 (D) All of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
270 Chapter 3. Electricity

83. The fuse in a circuit melts (B) Power

when: (C) Resistance
(A) An appliance isn’t earthed (D) Work
(B) Too much current flows (E) Current

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Too much voltage flows
89. Unscramble the word”HOTCR”
(D) none of above
(A) ORTHC
84. If current flow in a bulb
(B) OHRCT
is 1.5A. What is the charge
flow in 5 minutes? (C) CRHTO
(A) 4.5x10exp-2 C (D) TORCH
(B) 4.5x10exp-2 A 90. What would have to hap-
(C) 2.4x10exp-2 C pen for an atom to become
negatively charged?
(D) 2.4x10exp-2 A
(A) Gain protons
85. In electroplating, the object
(B) Gain electrons
to be electroplated is made
(C) Lose protons
(A) anode
(D) Lose electrons
(B) cathode
(C) none 91. What is The Law of Conser-
vation of Charge?
(D) both
(A) The strength of the force is de-
86. What is the unit of power? termined by the size of the charge.
(A) Ohms (B) Electric charge can neither be
(B) Volts created nor destroyed
(C) Amps (C) There is an opposite and
equal force to all charges
(D) Watts
(D) Electric charge is transferred
87. As the diameter of a wire and transformed
increases, the resistance of
the wire will 92. Current density formula is
(A) increase (A) Electric Current per unit length
(B) decrease (B) Electric Current per unit area
(C) stay the same (C) Electric Current per unit vol-
(D) none of above ume
(D) None of above
88. The amount of charge
flowing through a cross- 93. What instrument is used to
sectional area of a wire per measure the electric current
unit of time is called: that flows through a wire?
(A) Voltage (A) voltmeter

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 271

(B) galvanometer (B) the resistance of a unit length

(C) ammeter per unit cross-sectional area of the
material
(D) electric meter
(C) the capacitance of a unit
94. If the current through a cir- cross-sectional area per unit
cuit is 2 A and the resistance length of the material
of a light bulb in the circuit (D) the resistance of a unit cross-
is 10 Ohms, what is the volt- sectional area per unit length of
age difference across the the material
light bulb?
99. The flow of electrons is
(A) 5 V counted and is referred to
(B) 12 V as the
(C) 0.2 V (A) in quantities, ampere
(D) 20 V (B) in quantities, SI unit
(C) one by one, ampere
95. As the resistance of a circuit
increases, the current will (D) one by one, SI unit

(A) increase 100. Which of the following is

NOT a conductor?
(B) decrease
(A) Wood
(C) stay the same
(B) Wire
(D) none of above
(C) Metal
96. A car battery is an example (D) Water
of a cell.
101. When electric current is
(A) dry
passed through a conduct-
(B) wet ing solution, there is a
(C) no change of colour of the so-
lution. This indicates
(D) none of above
(A) the chemical effect of current.
97. What is the SI unit of electric (B) the heating effect of current
current?
(C) the magnetic effect of current.
(A) Watts (D) the lightning effect of current.
(B) Voltage
102. The tendency for a mate-
(C) Joules rial to oppose the flow of
(D) Ampere electrons is called
(A) voltage
98. Resistivity is defined as
(B) resistance
(A) the capacitance of a unit
length per unit cross-sectional (C) current
area of the material (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
272 Chapter 3. Electricity

103. How do you calculate re- (C) 0.3333 Ohms

sistance? (D) 2 Ohms
(A) Divide voltage by current
108. Shorter wire offers re-
(B) Divide charge by current sistance compared to longer

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Multiply current by voltage wire of the same diameter.
(D) Multiply voltage and current (A) more
104. Materials that are not met- (B) less
als, such as glass, plastic, (C) equal
wood, and Styrofoam are
(D) none of above

(A) conductors 109. The free electrons are re-

sponsible for
(B) brittle
(A) Resistance
(C) insulators
(B) Free electron
(D) resistors
(C) Element
105. If the power source was
(D) Electrical current
set on 4.0 V and there was
1 light bulb, what would the 110. The resistance for the
voltage be across the light heater of an electric oven is
bulb? 40 Ω . What is the current
(A) 4.0 V flowing through the oven
when it is connected to a
(B) 2.0 V
240 V electricity supply?
(C) 1.0 V
(A) 0.167A
(D) 0.0 V
(B) 6.00A
106. A simple device used for (C) 9600A
making and breaking the
(D) not sure
electric circuit is called
(A) electric cell 111. When the wire length in-
creased, the electric current
(B) electric generator
(C) electric wire
(A) Increases
(D) electric switch
(B) Decreases
107. What would the circuit re- (C) Stays the Same
sistance be if a 7.5 Amp
draw was present with the (D) Stops
engine running and the 112. During a lab a balloon
charging system producing was rubbed with a wooly
15 Volts fabric. This is an example of
(A) 15 Ohms which type of charging?
(B) 4 Ohms (A) conduction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 273

(B) friction 117. The tendency of a material

(C) induction to oppose the flow of elec-
trons is called
(D) none of above
(A) current
113. What is the function of a
(B) potential difference
power source in a circuit?
(C) resistance
(A) It provides a steady source of
static electricity. (D) power
(B) It provides a means through 118. What is the definition of
which the circuit can be broken. electrical current?
(C) It provides a path along which (A) The opposition to the flow of
the electricity can flow. electrons
(D) It provides a steady flow of (B) The rate of flow of charge
electrons.
(C) The work done on each
114. Two resistors, R1 and R2 coulomb of charge
are connected in SERIES. If (D) Electrons moving around
R2 > R1 , which among the
statements is TRUE about the 119. In the U.S most electrical
electric currents that passes outlets supply a voltage of
thru each resistor?
(A) I1 > I2 (A) 240 Volts
(B) I1 = I2 (B) 120 Volts
(C) I1 < I2 (C) 100 watts
(D) none of above (D) 60 amps
115. Which of these below 120. What is an electrical cir-
would prevent the flow of cuit?
electricity?
(A) a whole bunch of wires
(A) Copper wire
(B) a broken path that electric
(B) Screwdriver with plastic han- charges can flow
dle
(C) a circuit board
(C) Metal rod
(D) a complete, unbroken path
(D) Puddle of water
through which electric charges
116. A lit lightbulb is an exam- flow
ple of the of electrical en-
121. Which quantity describes
ergy to another forms of en-
the measure of the rate of
ergy
delivery of electrical energy,
(A) movement or the rate of work done by
(B) conversion an electrical component?
(C) transfer (A) Voltage
(D) fluctuation (B) Electric Current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
274 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) Electric Resistance 126. Which material(s) offer

least resistance?
(D) Electrical Power
(A) Copper
122. A car battery causes a cur- (B) Nichrome
rent of 4.0A through a lamp

NARAYAN CHANGDER
and produces 12V across it. (C) Tungsten
What is the power used by (D) none of above
the lamp?
127. A material that does not
(A) 48 W allow heat or electrons to
(B) 1/3 W move through it easily.

(C) 3 W (A) Insulator

(B) Induction
(D) 3/4 W
(C) Conductor
123. two objects with opposite (D) Calculator
charges will move towards
each other 128. A conductor is?
(A) attract (A) material that current can pass
through easily
(B) repel (repulsion)
(B) material that current cannot
(C) conduct pass through easily
(D) insulate (C) magnet

124. Electrical current DOES (D) electric current

NOT flow in 129. Combination of 2 or more
(A) an open circuit cells
(B) a closed circuit (A) Button cell
(C) an electromagnet (B) Battery

(D) a complete circuit (C) Electric cell

(D) Truck battery
125. How does rubber differ
from most metals? 130. What type of circuit is the
most efficient?
(A) Rubber is a good conductor,
most metals are good insulators. (A) Combination circuit
(B) Series circuit
(B) Rubber conducts electrons;
most metals conduct protons. (C) Parallel circuit
(C) Rubber is a good insulator; (D) Isometric circuit
most metals are good conductors.
131. The current flowing
(D) Rubber is a good power through the resistor is 3A.
source; most metals are good con- How much charge flows
ductors. through the resistor in 4s?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 275

(A) 1.33 C (A) positive

(B) 7.00 C (B) negative
(C) 12.0 C (C) neutral
(D) not sure (D) imaginary
132. A kilowatt-hour is a unit of 137. In a series circuit, which
of the following is the same
(A) Power throughout the circuit?
(B) Resistance (A) Resistance
(C) Current (B) Voltage
(D) Energy (C) Current
(D) Power
133. Current flow requires a(n)
and a(n) 138. If two 10-ohm resistors
(A) potential difference / circuit are connected in parallel,
breaker what is the total resistance
(B) static charge / switch of these resistors?

(C) solar cell / generator (A) 100 ohms

(D) potential difference / closed (B) 20 ohms

path (C) 5 ohms
134. What ‘flows’ in a wire? (D) 1 ohm
(A) Protons 139. All of the following can be
(B) Neutrons picked up by a magnet EX-
CEPT:
(C) Atoms
(A) aluminum
(D) Electrons
(B) cobalt
135. Why is static electricity not
(C) nickel
useful as a power source?
(D) iron
(A) Because electrons aren’t trans-
ferred in bursts of static electricity 140. The diameter of four wires
(B) Because all energy is released A, B, C and D are 5 mm, 4
at once in static electricity. mm, 3 mm, and 2 mm, re-
spectively. Which of the fol-
(C) Because static electricity is not
lowing has the maximum re-
a real form of electricity.
sistance, provided all other
(D) Because static electricity only conditions are the same?
occurs in lightning.
(A) A
136. If an element has 6 pro- (B) B
tons, 7 neutrons, and 6 elec-
trons, what type of charge (C) C
does the element have? (D) D

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
276 Chapter 3. Electricity

141. The amount of charge that 146. Quantity of charge can be

flows through a component measured in
in 5 minutes is 600 C. What (A) time (s)
is the current through the
component? (B) Ampere (A)

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) coulombs (C)
(A) 0.5 A
(D) Joule (J)
(B) 2 A
(C) 120 A 147. As the resistance of a cir-
cuit increases, the current
(D) 3000 A will
142. Resistance is (A) increase
(B) decrease
(A) What “slows down” electrons
(C) stay the same
(B) What “speeds up” electrons
(D) none of above
(C) Moving electrons
148. How much CURRENT does
(D) What “pushes” electrons
a 1200 W bread maker
143. Electrons flow in a circuit draw from a 110 V outlet?
from (A) 132000 amps
(A) A high to a low electrical po- (B) 0.09 amps
tential (C) 1200 amps
(B) A low to a high electrical po- (D) 10.9 amps
tential
149. One way to prevent over-
(C) From a positive to a negative loading in your home circuit
potential is to
(D) none of above (A) operate fewer devices at the
same time.
144. The direction of current
flow is taken from (B) change the wiring from paral-
lel to series for troublesome de-
(A) negative to positive terminal vices.
(B) Positive to negative terminal (C) find a way to bypass the fuse
(C) Both or circuit breaker.

(D) none of above (D) All of these

150. he drift speed of electrons
145. Thin metal wire inside the
that make up current in a cir-
electric bulb
cuit is
(A) Fiber (A) near the speed of light.
(B) Terminal (B) near the speed of sound.
(C) Filament (C) about a snail’s pace.
(D) none of above (D) imaginary.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 277

151. Defining tungsten 156. The force between

charged objects
(A) a very hard grey metallic el-
ement with a very high melting (A) Electric Force
point
(B) Electric Field
(B) the wire inside the glass case
(C) Electron
is made of tungsten
(D) Electricity
(C) functional bulb
(D) happy bulb 157. The terminal of a dry
cell identifies the location of
152. Closed path in which cur- the carbon rod.
rent flows is called a
(A) +
(A) path
(B) -
(B) current
(C) 0
(C) circuit
(D) none of above
(D) none of above
158. A(n) is a closed, or com-
153. The strength of an electro-
plete, path in which an elec-
magnet can be increased by
tric current flows.
(A) electric current
(A) increasing the number of turns
of conducting wires (B) electric circuit
(B) decreasing the number of (C) electric resistance
turns (D) potential difference
(C) decreasing the strength of cur-
rent 159. The movement of electri-
cally charged particles is
(D) all of the options
(A) electric current
154. Which of the following af-
(B) electric circuit
fects resistance?
(C) electric resistance
(A) length
(B) cross sectional area (D) none of above

(C) material 160. a method of giving elec-

(D) all of the above tricity the most effect way
to return to ground, usually
155. What is one volt equal to? through a wire or grid
(A) 1 j/c (A) conduction
(B) 2 j/c (B) friction
(C) 3 j/c (C) induction
(D) 4 j/c (D) grounding

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
278 Chapter 3. Electricity

161. If the voltage remains the (B) mica

same and resistance is in-
(C) silver
creased, current will
(A) Increase (D) copper

(B) Decrease

NARAYAN CHANGDER
167. is defined as the prop-
(C) remains the same erty of a conductor by virtue
of which it opposes the flow
(D) Not enough info
of electric current through it.
162. What is electricity? (A) Resistance
(A) Flow of atoms
(B) Capacity
(B) Resistor
(C) Inductance
(C) Insulator
(D) Voltage
(D) Flow of electric charge

163. What is the amount of en- 168. Electrons passing through

ergy a source uses to move a lamp some potential en-
one coulomb of electrons ergy as they light the lamp.
through a circuit? (A) gain
(A) Voltage (B) lose
(B) Attraction
(C) share
(C) Magnetic
(D) none of above
(D) Electric Resistance

164. Which is NOT an insula- 169. Who invented MAGNETIC

tor? EFFECT OF ELECTRIC CUR-
RENT?
(A) Rubber
(A) Hans Zimmer
(B) Wood
(B) Hans Christian Oersted
(C) Glass
(D) Copper (C) Hans Christian Andersen
(D) none of above
165. Which device is used to
convert ac to a fairly steady
170. A negatively charged ob-
dc?
ject has electrons with po-
(A) Diode tential energy to move and
(B) Capacitor do work than an object that
is neutral.
(C) Both of these.
(A) more
(D) None of these.
(B) less
166. Which of the following is
NOT a good conductor? (C) the same
(A) aluminum (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 279

171. How is electricity able to (C) Capacity

pass through the wire in an
(D) Both length and material
electromagnetic?
(E) All of these
(A) the wire is a conductor
(B) the wire is a source 177. Connection of more than
(C) the wire is a device one device/ appliance to a
single socket is called-
(D) none of above
(A) Overloading
172. The opposition to electron
movement (B) Short circuit
(A) Voltage (C) Both
(B) Static electricity (D) none of above
(C) current
178. A form of energy caused
(D) Resistance by the movement of elec-
trons
173. The movement of electri-
cally charged is called (A) electricity
electric (B) voltage
(A) particles, transport
(C) electric current
(B) ions, current
(D) parallel circuit
(C) particles, current
(D) ions, transport 179. What is the advantage of
having a safety switch or
174. What is the SI unit for Elec- fuse in the electric circuits of
tric Current? your house?
(A) a (A) Safety switches break the cir-
(B) A cuit when there is no fault
(C) v (B) Safety switches switch the elec-
(D) V trical current
(C) It prevents the circuit from
175. Which of these are the ap-
overheating and starting the fire
plications of electrolysis?
(A) Metal Extraction (D) Fuses are fused together with
electrical wires
(B) Electroplating
(C) Electrorefining 180. What variable is a
Coulomb the unit for?
(D) All these
(A) Charge
176. The amount of heat in a
wire depends on (B) Force
(A) Length (C) Distance
(B) Material (D) Mass

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
280 Chapter 3. Electricity

181. is the potential differ- 186. What is the symbol for the
ence across the terminals of SI unit for Electric Current?
a dry cell when the switch is
open. (A) a

(A) Emf (B) A

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Terminal potential difference (C) v
(C) Lost volt
(D) V
(D) Work
182. The continuous flow of 187. Which of the follow-
electric charges through a ing represents the rate of
material the flow of electricity, ex-
pressed in unit of amps?
(A) Electron
(B) Electric Force (A) current
(C) Electric Field (B) circuit
(D) Electric Current
(C) voltage
183. What characteristics im-
(D) resistance
pact resistance of a mate-
rial?
188. When 110 volts are im-
(A) Thickness
pressed across a 22-ohm re-
(B) Temperature sistor, the current in the re-
(C) Length sistor is a) 5 A. b) 10 A. c)
132 A. d) 2420 A.
(D) All of these
(A) 5 A.
184. Electroplating is not done
for which of the following (B) 10 A.
reasons?
(C) 132 A.
(A) To increase the beauty of jew-
ellery (D) 2420 A.
(B) To save metals from rusting
(C) To make metals easily react to 189. AC
gases (A) Voltage and current that
(D) None of the above change.
185. What are the three compo- (B) Steady voltage and current.
nents of a circuit?
(C) A system or a machine that
(A) Pathway, source, and battery. treats air in a defined, usually en-
(B) Energy source, conductor, closed area via a refrigeration cy-
and receiver. cle.
(C) Battery, bulb, and plastic. (D) Voltage and current that does
(D) Wire, electron, and charge. not change

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 281

190. If I were to try to connect 195. Which statement best de-

the North pole of one mag- scribes static Electricity?
net to the North pole of an-
(A) It is caused by positively
other magnet, the two poles
charged particles that flow.
would:
(A) attract (B) It is caused by separating pos-
itively or negatively charged parti-
(B) repel cles
(C) neither
(C) It is caused by only negatively
(D) none of above charged particles on a surface.
191. Battery cells are connected (D) It is caused by positively and
in series to negatively charged particles gath-
(A) Increase voltage output ered together.
(B) Decrease voltage output
196. A series circuit has
(C) Increase current capacity path(s) that the electric cur-
(D) Decrease current capacity rent can take.
(A) One
192. What are the two poles of
a magnet called? (B) Two
(A) Up and down (C) Three
(B) East and west
(D) Four
(C) Left and right
(D) North and South 197. What is a current?

193. Voltage is a measure of (A) A steady flow of electricity.

the between two places. (B) A short burst of electricity
(A) resistance potential (C) A wire along which electricity
(B) potential differnce flows.
(C) current flow (D) A power source that supplies
(D) none of above electricity.

194. a material whose internal 198. What happens if you dis-

electric charges do not flow connect a circuit from its pos-
freely; very little electric cur- itive terminal?
rent will flow through it un-
der the influence of an elec- (A) The electrons shoot out from
tric field. the negative terminal
(A) conductor (B) The electrons stop flowing,
(B) insulator and the current stops

(C) ground (C) The current reverses direction

(D) spark (D) Nothing happens

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
282 Chapter 3. Electricity

199. Voltage is simply defined (B) a circuit

as
(C) flood
(A) what ‘pushes’ electrons
(D) none of above
(B) what ‘stops’ electrons

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) moving electrons 205. How much current flows
through a wire moving 100
(D) none of above
C of charge in 2 minutes?
200. Electric current is calcu- (A) 50 A
lated by
(B) 0.83 A
(A) dividing charge by time
(B) multiplying potential differ- (C) 200 A
ence by charge (D) 0.02 A
(C) dividing work by charge
206. A circuit with 3 resistors
(D) multiplying power by potential
in series, R1 = 10 Ohms,
difference
R2 = 30 Ohms and R3 =20
201. In solid conductors, elec- Ohms. What is the total re-
tric current is the flow of sistance?
(A) positive and negative charges (A) 30 Ohms
(B) electrons (B) 50 Ohms
(C) negative ions (C) 60 Ohms
(D) protons (D) 100 Ohms
202. Copper has resistance
to electron flow than alu- 207. The complete path through
minum. which an electric current is
flowing is called
(A) higher
(A) Open circuit
(B) lower
(B) Closed circuit
(C) the same
(D) none of above (C) Both
(D) none of above
203. The unit for resistance is
(A) volts 208. When current is switched
(B) ampere on in an electric bell, it con-
verts energy into en-
(C) ohms
ergy.
(D) watts
(A) Electrical, light
204. The flow of electrons (B) Electrical, sound
through a wire or any con-
ductor is called (C) Electrical, heat
(A) current (D) Mechanical, sound

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 283

209. Apply heat to a copper (C) NO MAN

wire and the resistance of (D) Only the God knows
the wire
(A) decreases. 214. What is the current in a
circuit with 6 ohms of resis-
(B) remains unchanged. tance and a battery contain-
(C) increases. ing 24 Volts?
(D) vanishes with enough heat. (A) 1/4 A
(B) 144 A
210. This is related to the force
that causes electric charges (C) 4 A
to flow (D) 0.4 A
(A) Voltage 215. What is voltage differ-
(B) Current ence?
(C) Resistance (A) push/pull that causes charges
(D) Circuit to move and is measured in volts
(B) electrical pressure that pushes
211. A closed path through and pulls charges
which electrons can flow is
(C) continuous flow of charges
through a conductor
(A) voltage
(D) none of above
(B) a circuit
216. What is the symbol used
(C) circus
for amperes (amps)?
(D) none of above (A) A
212. If you double both the cur- (B) B
rent and the voltage in a cir- (C) W
cuit, the power a) remains
unchanged if resistance re- (D) V
mains constant. b) halves. 217. The opposition to the flow
c) doubles. d) quadruples. of electrons
(A) remains unchanged if resis- (A) current
tance remains constant.
(B) resistance
(B) halves.
(C) voltage
(C) doubles.
(D) power
(D) quadruples.
218. Kirchhoff’s loop rule is a
213. Kirchoff’s Current law is statement of
also known as the law of (A) the law of conservation of mo-
conservation of energy. mentum.
(A) YES IT IS (B) the law of conservation of
(B) Is it? charge.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
284 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) the law of conservation of en- 223. Which of the following alu-
ergy. minum wires would have
(D) the law of conservation of the greatest resistance?
ohms. (A) 3 cm in length and 2 cm in di-
ameter

NARAYAN CHANGDER
219. Firemen shut off the elec-
(B) 6 cm in length and 2 cm in di-
tricity supply for the area be-
ameter
fore using water hoses to
douse a fire. Why? (C) 9 cm in length and 2 cm in di-
ameter
(A) To prevent the fireman from
being electrocuted because ordi- (D) 12 cm in length and 2 cm in
nary water is a conductor electric- diameter
ity
224. Potentiometer consist of
(B) To prevent electrical devices
from being spoilt.
(A) a piece of resistance wire
(C) To reduce electricity usage
(B) a fixed resistor with high resis-
(D) To prevent the fire from tance value
spreading (C) 2 variable resistors
220. To have a complete electric (D) 3 batteries
circuit, the path must be
225. The safety device used for
(A) small electrical appliances is
(B) closed (A) fuse
(C) big (B) resistance
(D) open (C) connecting wire
221. Name the instrument used (D) none of these
to measure accurately emf
226. When the source of elec-
of a cell.
tricity, such as cell, bulb
(A) Voltmeter and wires join together in
(B) Ammeter a way that the current can
flow along a closed loop is
(C) Potentiometer known as
(D) Galvanometer (A) positive terminal
(E) Multimeter (B) electric circuit
222. Unscramble the word (C) electric current
“SNTEUNTG” (D) negative terminal
(A) GETUNSTN
227. Resistance is measured in
(B) NGNESTUT units called
(C) TUNGSTEN (A) volts
(D) SHTBFDK (B) ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 285

(C) amperes 233. Which resistor will prevent

(D) none of above the most current flow?
(A) 1 ohm
228. Surrounding every mag-
net is a (B) 100 ohms
(A) magnetic field (C) 1000 ohms
(B) electrical current (D) 0.5k ohms
(C) another magnet 234. A lamp with a current of
(D) none of above 10 A connected to 120 volts
consumes a power of
229. A material in which elec-
(A) 10 W.
trons are not able to move
easily (B) 12 W.
(A) Circuit (C) 120 W
(B) Insulator (D) 1200 W.
(C) Resistance 235. Why is it better to use
(D) Conductor a light-emitting diode (LED)
rather than a light bulb
230. instrument which trans- when testing the electrical
fers energy to electric conductivity liquids?
charges in a circuit is
(A) An LED glows even when a
(A) battery weak electric current flows in a cir-
(B) voltmeter cuit
(C) ammeter (B) LEDs do not melt even when a
(D) galvanometer high electric current flows in a cir-
cuit
231. The resistance of a wire (C) LEDs are environment friendly
decreases with an increase
in its (D) LEDs are cheap
(A) length 236. A flow of electrons
(B) temperature through a conductor is
called:
(C) length and temperature
(A) A river
(D) diameter
(B) A spark
232. A material that does NOT
(C) An electron flow
let electricity pass through it
is called (D) A current
(A) An electrical conductor 237. When the switch is closed,
(B) An electrical insulator the light
(C) An electrical source (A) comes on
(D) An electric appliance (B) stays off

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
286 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) burns out (C) Nikola Tesla is the first one

(D) none of above who suggested usnig DC in house-
hold electricity.
238. What happens to the cur-
(D) Thomas Edison is the first one
rent in a parallel circuit?
who suggested usnig AC in house

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) The current stays the same hold electricity
(B) The current is added
243. A path that is made for an
(C) The current is reduced electric current is?
(D) The current is split between (A) Static electricity
the light bulbs
(B) conductor
239. Ohm’s Law is a mathe-
(C) A circuit
matical equation that de-
scribes the relationship be- (D) resistor
tween what three values?
244. When you turn off the
(A) voltage
TV, you stop the flow of
(B) mass charged
(C) current (A) particles
(D) resistance (B) amperes
240. When you double the volt- (C) voltages
age in a simple electric cir-
(D) ohms
cuit, you double the
(A) current. 245. In a Whetstone’s bridge,
(B) resistance. all the four arms have equal
resistance R. If resistance
(C) Both of these. of thegalvanometer arm is
(D) None of these. also R, then equivalent resis-
tance of the combination is
241. Electric power is related to
(A) R
(A) current in component
(B) 2R
(B) potential difference
(C) electrical resistance (C) R/2
(D) both current in component (D) R/4
and potential difference
246. DC current is found in ,
242. Select the true statments which means the current
(A) Thomas Edison is the first one flows in direction
who suggested usnig DC in house- (A) Batteries, one
hold electricity.
(B) Wall outlet, one
(B) Nikola Tesla is the first one
(C) Batteries, both
who suggested usnig AC in house-
hold electricity (D) Wall outlet, both

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 287

247. A combination of 2 or 252. Define:Static Electricity

more cells is called a? (A) a stationary electric charge
(A) Electric cell built up on an insulating material
(B) Battery (B) the force field created by elec-
(C) None of these trons
(D) All of these (C) when two objects are at-
tracted to each other
248. When there is only one
(D) the charging of an object by
path for electrons to move
the contact of a charged object to
through it is called a
a neutral object.
When one light goes out,
they all go out. 253. A coulomb is the charge
(A) closed circuit carried by 6.24 electrons.
(B) parallel circuit (A) million
(C) series circuit (B) billion
(D) open circuit (C) billion billion

249. What is an electric circuit (D) none of above

with only one closed path
254. “The sum of all voltage
of an electric current to fol-
drops in a series circuit
low?
equals the total applied volt-
(A) Series Circuit age.” This can be correctly
(B) Parallel Circuit related to
(C) Electromagnet (A) Ohm’s Law
(D) Voltage (B) Kirchhoff’s Second Law
(C) Kirchhoff’s First Law
250. To complete a circuit the
switch must be (D) Coulomb’s Law
(A) unattached 255. Dimensional form
(B) open (A) M −1 L−3 T 3 A2
(C) closed (B) M 1 L−3 T 3 A2
(D) none of above (C) M −1 L3 T 3 A2
251. An electric current that has (D) M −1 L−3 T −3 A2
constant magnitude and di-
rection over time is known 256. The continuous flow of
as a(n) electrons is
(A) direct current (A) Current
(B) alternating current (B) Static electricity
(C) simple current (C) Voltage
(D) none of above (D) Resistance

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
288 Chapter 3. Electricity

257. Kirchhoff’s 1st Law (Junc- 262. When a current flows into
tion Rule) is a consequence a wire, such as a wire that
of the law of conservation of connects a battery to a light,
(A) Energy the wire stays electrically

(B) Charge (A) unbalanced

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Momentum (B) charged
(D) Power (C) neutral

258. How many children (D) uncharged

madam? 263. Choose the parts of the
(A) 1 bulb
(B) 2 (A) inert gas
(C) 3 (B) filament
(D) 4 (C) metal casing
(E) 5 (D) electric wire
259. In a circuit with two lamps (E) glass case
in parallel, if the current in
one lamp is 2 amperes, the 264. The amount of “push”
current in the battery is available to move electrons
is
(A) half, 1 A.
(B) 2 A. (A) Current

(C) more than 2 A. (B) Resistance

(D) Not enough information to (C) Voltage
say. (D) Static Electricity
260. the tendency for a mate- 265. What travels at about the
rial to oppose the flow of speed of light in an electric
electrons circuit?
(A) current (A) Electric charges
(B) circuit
(B) Electric current
(C) resistance
(C) Electric field
(D) difference
(D) All of these.
261. The potential difference
between the two holes in a 266. Positively charged elec-
wall socket is trode is called
(A) 12 volts (A) Cathode
(B) 60 volts (B) Anode
(C) 120 volts (C) Cation
(D) none of above (D) Anion

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 289

267. Devices in a parallel circuit 272. Voltage is measured in

receive (A) volts.
(A) equal current but different volt- (B) watts.
age
(C) coulombs.
(B) equal voltage but different cur-
rent (D) none of above
(C) equal voltage and equal cur- 273. In a metre bridge experi-
rent ment, resistance box (withR
(D) different voltage and different = 2ohm) is connected in the
current left gap andthe unknown re-
sistance S in the right gap. If
268. A flash of lightning is an balancing length be 40 cm,
example of an electric calculate value of S.
(A) watt (A) 2 ohm
(B) voltage (B) 3 ohm
(C) current (C) 4 ohm
(D) resistance (D) 2.5 ohm
269. a flow of electric charge 274. If the potential difference
(A) static electricity across a resistor is 5.0 Vand
(B) electrical field the current through it is 1.5
A. What’s the resistance in
(C) electric current the circuit?
(D) electrical charge (A) 0.33 ohms
270. APA FULL NAME MADAM? (B) 3.3 ohms
(A) NOR AZAH BINTI MAT ZALI (C) 7.5 ohms
(B) NOR AZAH BINTI MOHD ZALI (D) 5.7 ohms
(C) NOOR AZAH BINTI MAT ZALI
275. When a switch is open
(D) NOOR AZAH BINTI MOHD
(A) the circuit is working and gives
ZALI
energy
271. What is the function of a (B) the circuit is broken and
dry cell? charges cannot flow
(A) A conductor that connect the (C) the circuit is turning lights on
components together.
(D) I don’t know ask Ms. Ced-
(B) A method of opening or clos- nick
ing the circuit.
(C) A source of electromotive 276. The amount of current in a
force that drives electric charges circuit depends on the
around the circuit. (A) voltage across the circuit.
(D) A load in which moving (B) electrical resistance of the cir-
charges can do a useful job. cuit. c

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
290 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) Both of these. (D) The flow of electrons through

(D) None of these. a complete path.

277. Voltmeter should always 282. DC stands for

have a (A) The capital of the US

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) high resistance (B) Unknown
(B) low resistance (C) Direct current
(C) low reading (D) directly currency
(D) high reading 283. Select all the examples of
an electromagnet.
278. Ammeter should always
have a (A) Speaker
(A) high resistance (B) Motor
(B) low resistance (C) Hard Drive
(C) low voltage (D) Junkyard Magnet
(D) high voltage (E) Refrigerator Magnet

279. Resistance of a conductor 284. What quantity describes

depends upon- the opposition to the flow of
electrons in an electrical cir-
(A) Length of conductor
cuit?
(B) Cross sectional area of con-
(A) Voltage
ductor
(B) Electric Current
(C) Resistivity of material
(C) Electric Resistance
(D) All of the above
(D) Electrical Power
280. What is the current if 7
Coulombs of charge flow in 285. When too much electric
60 seconds? current flows through an ob-
ject, the object can heat up.
(A) 0.117 A What might this cause?
(B) 420 A (A) your computer will turn on
(C) 67 A (B) a fire
(D) 8.6 A (C) the circuit to open
281. Voltage is (D) carry information from the
(A) the number of occurrences of brain
a repeating event per unit of time. 286. Which is a conductor?
(B) The electric potential differ- (A) Rubber
ence.
(B) Wood
(C) Time needed for one com-
plete cycle of vibration to pass in (C) Glass
a given point. (D) Copper

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 291

287. What is the SI unit for 292. Every working circuit has
power? at least three parts:1) a
power source, 2) a conduc-
(A) watts
tor, usually wire and 3)
(B) amps
(A) insulator
(C) joules (B) an object that uses electric cur-
(D) ohms rent like a light bulb
(C) series circuit
288. If the Voltage stays the
same and Resistance is in- (D) rock
creased, Current will
293. If the current increases it
(A) Increase could be because of
(B) Decrease (A) increasing voltage
(C) Stay the same (B) decreasing resistance
(D) Not enough info (C) both
(D) none of above
289. If a circuit has 12 amps of
current and the resistance is 294. The electric current in a
20 ohms, the applied volt- copper wire is normally
age is composed of
(A) 120V (A) electrons.
(B) 240V (B) protons.

(C) 270V (C) ions.

(D) All or any of these.
(D) 380V
295. The difference between dc
290. What is a formula to calcu- and ac in electrical circuits
late Current is that in dc the electrons a)
(A) I=q/t flow steadily in one direc-
tion only. b) flow in one di-
(B) I=q*t
rection only. c) steadily flow
(C) I =V*R to and fro. d) flow to and
fro.
(D) I = R/V
(A) flow steadily in one direction
291. Which of the following ap- only.
pliances does not use the (B) flow in one direction only.
heating effect of current?
(C) steadily flow to and fro.
(A) electric heater
(D) flow to and fro.
(B) electric bell
296. In a series circuit, which
(C) electric geyser
of the following will vary
(D) electric bulb based on the resistor?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
292 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) Power (A) attraction

(B) Voltage (B) repel (repulsion)
(C) Current (C) conduct
(D) None of the above (D) insulate

NARAYAN CHANGDER
297. During discharging, poten- 302. Substances through which
tial difference across a cell is electric charges flow easily
(A) E are called
(B) E+ir (A) Wire
(C) E-ir (B) Metal
(D) Either option 2 or option 3. (C) Conductors
298. filament of a bulb is usu- (D) Insulators
ally made up of
303. current consisting of
(A) nickel charges that move back and
(B) chromium forth in a circuit
(C) cobalt (A) alternating current
(D) tungsten (B) direct current
299. All of the follow are true (C) parallel current
EXCEPT (D) electric current
(A) Electric current can pass
through your body. 304. Positively charged ions
are called
(B) Electricity can cause burns and
injuries. (A) Cation
(C) power cords are made of plas- (B) Anion
tic covered in metal. (C) Cathode
(D) The heat from electrical cur- (D) Anode
rent can damage the insulation on
wires. 305. The potential difference
across a component is 50 V,
300. Which equation defines
and the charge that flows
Ohm’s Law?
through the component is
(A) V=IV 25 C. What is the work
(B) R=VI done to drive these charges
through?
(C) I=VR
(A) 0.5 J
(D) V=IR
(B) 2 J
301. two objects with the same
(C) 50 J
charge will move away
from each other (D) 1250 J

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 293

306. The heating effect of an 311. The materials that do not

electric current is used in allow electric current to pass
through them are called
(A) Hair dryer
(A) dynamo
(B) A fan
(B) sorry i don’t know
(C) A computer
(C) insultors
(D) none of above
(D) conductors
307. What is the resistance of a
light bulb that has 3 A flow 312. A student is building a cir-
through when it is placed cuit that will convert electri-
across 9 V? cal energy into light energy.
What materials does the stu-
(A) 1/3 ohms dent need to complete his
(B) 3 ohms circuit?
(C) 27 ohms (A) Wire, battery, and bulb

(D) 9 ohms (B) Battery, switch, and wire

(C) Switch, bulb, and battery
308. Volts are used as a unit
(D) Bulb, wire, and switch
of measure for which con-
cept? 313. Drift velocity vd varies with
(A) Power the intensity of electric field
in the relation
(B) Voltage
(A) inversely proportional to E
(C) Resistance
(B) directly proportional to E
(D) Current
(C) remains constant with E
309. When the wire tempera- (D) directly proportional to E 2
ture increased, the electric
current 314. What runs on fuel such as
diesel?
(A) Increased
(A) generator
(B) Decreased
(B) please wait let me go check
(C) Stayed the same the text book
(D) Stopped (C) inert gas
310. A closed loop through (D) tungsten
which electrical charges can (E) dynamo or electric generator
move
315. To receive an electric shock
(A) circuit
there must be
(B) resistor
(A) current in one direction.
(C) fuse
(B) moisture in the electrical de-
(D) circuit breaker vice being used.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
294 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) a difference in potential 320. The difference in electrical

across part or all of the body. potential energy per charge
between two places is called
(D) high voltage and low body re-
sistance. (A) resistance
(B) friction

NARAYAN CHANGDER
316. A battery is also known as
a (C) induction
(D) voltage
(A) resistor
(B) dry cell 321. Wires made from some
special materials melt
(C) switch quickly and break when
(D) none of above large electric currents are
passed through them. These
317. A resistor of 5ohm is con- wires are used for making
nected in series with two ?
other resistors that is con- (A) Electric switch
nected in parrallel, each has
3ohm resistance. Calculate (B) Electric bulb
the effective resistance for (C) Electric shock
this combination of resis- (D) Electric fuses
tors.
322. An atom gains an electron.
(A) 60ohm
What type of charge does it
(B) 12ohm have now?
(C) 6.5ohm (A) positive
(D) 13.45ohm (B) negative
(C) No charge
318. A voltmeter is described as
(D) none of above
a device that can be used to
measure 323. Defining electric cell
(A) Voltage (A) has a metal cap, which is
(B) Current the positive terminal and a metal
base, which is the negative termi-
(C) Resistance nal
(D) Power (B) doesn’t have a metal cap,
which is the positive terminal and
319. A combination of two or a metal base, which is the nega-
more cells is called ( ) tive terminal
(A) Battery (C) a simple device used for mak-
ing and breaking the electric cir-
(B) A Button cell
cuit
(C) An Electric cell
(D) one sec my mom is there be-
(D) Truck Battery side me so let me ask her

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 295

324. The energy within a bat- 329. Select the right statments
tery is called related to resistance
(A) voltage (A) Ohm is the SI unit
(B) circuit (B) It is the measure of how diffi-
cult it is for electric current to pass
(C) filament
through a conducter.
(D) conductor
(C) R is the SI unit
325. Unit for resistance (D) It is the measure of how diffi-
(A) Ampere cult it is for electric voltage to pass
through a conducter.
(B) Ohm
330. Suppose that a 1.5 V power
(C) Volt
supply is used in a circuit
(D) Watt with a lone 25 Ω resistor.
What would be the magni-
326. Resistivity is
tude of the electrical power
(A) the capacitance of a unit dissipated by the resistor in
length per unit cross-sectional this circuit?
area of the material (A) 0.09 W
(B) the resistance of a unit length (B) 16.67 W
per unit cross-sectional area of the
material (C) 37.50 W

(C) the capacitance of a unit (D) 56.25 W

cross-sectional area per unit 331. Bonus Question:who
length of the material made this quiz?
(D) the resistance of a unit cross- (A) Bashayer Faisal
sectional area per unit length of
(B) Mariam Khalid
the material
(C) Shahad Alnaqbi
327. We use to measure po-
(D) Sara Alnaqbi
tential difference.
(A) voltmeter 332. An electric bell works on
the effect of electric cur-
(B) ammeter rent.
(C) ohmmeter (A) electric
(D) rheostat (B) heating
328. What is a common energy (C) magnetic
source for a circuit? (D) chemical
(A) A battery
333. Electric current can flow
(B) A bulb through
(C) A wire (A) mercury
(D) A appliance (B) wood

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
296 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) graphite 339. A bulb that lights up when

(D) PVC(polivinyl chloride) it is switched on

(E) human body (A) electric cell

334. A common household de- (B) bulb

NARAYAN CHANGDER
vice, that do not use an elec- (C) torch
tromagnet in its working, is-
(D) battery
(A) The electric bell
(B) Geyser (E) switch
(C) Telephone
340. ampere of current is de-
(D) Loud speaker fined as
335. If the voltage stays the (A) one coulomb of current pass-
same, but the resistance ing through the surface area in
goes up, the current will one second.
(A) increase (speed up) (B) one coulomb of charge pass-
(B) decrease (slow down) ing through the conductor in one
(C) stay the same second

(D) none of above (C) one coulomb of charge pass-

ing through the surface area in
336. allows electricity to one second
flow.
(D) one coulomb of currrent pass-
(A) A conductor ing through the conductor in one
(B) An insulator second.
(C) A magnet
341. What is the name of the
(D) none of above
force that attracts or repels
337. Which of the following materials?
processes produces energy (A) current
in cells?
(A) Electric reaction (B) magnetism

(B) Chemical reaction (C) electricity

(C) Thermal reaction (D) none of above
(D) Nuclear reaction
342. An ampere is measured in
338. Electrical potential in all
parts of a circuit.
(A) milliseconds
(A) varies
(B) seconds
(B) is the same
(C) is not (C) minutes
(D) none of above (D) hours

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 297

343. Electric power is defined 348. An electric current flows

as, unless it is disrupted in some
(A) the rate of conversion of tem- way
perature (A) continuously
(B) the rate of conversion of cur- (B) in spurts
rent
(C) unevenly
(C) the rate of conversion of elec-
tric energy (D) drop by drop
(D) none of the above
349. The difference in electrical
344. Which are the components potential energy between
required for the circuit? two places in a circuit is
called
(A) Switch
(A) resistance
(B) Dollar bill
(C) Conducting wires (B) friction

(D) Cell/ battery (C) induction

(E) Bulb (D) voltage

345. An electric current that 350. Unit for current is

continually reverses direc-
(A) ohm
tion over time is known as
a(n) (B) ampere
(A) direct current (C) volt
(B) alternating current (D) watt
(C) simple current
351. A tiny, negatively charged
(D) none of above
particle that moves around
346. Resistance is measured in the nucleus of an atom.
(A) Electron
(A) watts. (B) Protron
(B) amps.
(C) Neutron
(C) ohms.
(D) Electricity
(D) none of above
352. Rate of flow of electric
347. What is electric current?
charge is
(A) A flow of electric charges
(A) electric current
(B) static electricity
(B) conventional current only
(C) two objects repelling from
each other (C) electronic current only
(D) batteries (D) potential difference

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
298 Chapter 3. Electricity

353. A toaster oven is plugged 358. A light circuit is operating

into an outlet that provides at 75 Volts. What is the
a voltage difference of 120 circuit’s current if the resis-
V. What power does the tance is 5 Ohms?
oven use if the current is 10 (A) 375 Amps

NARAYAN CHANGDER
A?
(B) 50 Amps
(A) 0.083 W
(C) 15 Amps
(B) 1200 W
(D) 0.07 Amps
(C) 12 W
(D) 130 W 359. Which component of a cir-
cuit converts chemical en-
354. Which of the following is ergy into electrical energy?
NOT a formula for calculat- (A) electric cell
ing the electrical power dis-
(B) electric bell
sipated by a resistor in a cir-
cuit? (C) connecting wire
(A) P = V I (D) electric switch
V2
(B) P = R 360. Current flows through the
I2 circuit when the circuit is in
(C) P = R the condition. ( )
(D) P = I2R
(A) Broken
355. What is the unit for cur- (B) Closed
rent? (C) Open
(A) Amps (D) Incomplete
(B) Voltage
361. Calculate the quantity of
(C) Ohms charge, Q, obtained when a
(D) None of the above current of 25 amps runs for
1 minute
356. Current is measured in
(A) Q = 1, 800 C
(A) amperes
(B) Q = 1, 500 C
(B) ohms
(C) Q = 1000 C
(C) volts
(D) Q = 3000 C
(D) seconds
362. The conductivity of copper
357. What is the equation used is 6.0 ×107 Ω−1 m−1 . The free
to calculate Ohm’s Law? electron density copper is
(A) I=v/r 8.45 ×1028 m−3 . Estimate
the mean time between col-
(B) v=i*r lisions of free electrons and
(C) V=1 j/c positive ions in copper.
(D) both A & B (A) 2.52 ×10−14 s

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 299

(B) 4.04 ×10−33 s 367. Which mark is necessary

on electric appliances?
(C) 4.04 ×10−14 s
(A) AGMARK
(D) 7.10 ×10−22 s
(B) ISI
363. A student is planning to (C) FICCI
make changes to a circuit.
(D) CFL
Which change will increase
the voltage? 368. What is the shape of the
(A) Add another lightbulb be- magnet used in an electric
tween the battery and the switch. bell?
(A) cylindrical
(B) Add another switch between
the lightbulb and the battery (B) bar

(C) Remove the existing lightbulb (C) horseshoe

from the circuit. (D) square
(D) Replace the existing battery 369. Which of the following
with a larger battery states the correct flow of
electron flow in a circuit?
364. Rate at which electrical en-
(A) positive to positive terminal
ergy is converted to heat,
light, mechanical work etc is (B) positive to negative terminal
called (C) negative to positive terminal
(A) Potential Difference (D) negative to negative terminal
(B) Electric Current 370. The flow of charge in an
(C) Electric Power electric circuit is much

(D) Resistance (A) like the flow of water in a sys-

tem of pipes.
365. What are the 2 poles of a (B) different than water flow in
magnet? pipes.
(A) south and west (C) like an electric valve.
(B) north and east (D) like an electric pump

(C) north and south 371. Joe set up an electrical cir-

cuit to determine whether
(D) none of above
certain materials would con-
duct electricity. Which of
366. What does an ammeter
these items would complete
measure?
Joe’s circuit?
(A) Current
(A) A metal pin
(B) Voltage (B) A plastic bag
(C) Resistance (C) A rubber ball
(D) none of above (D) A wooden block

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
300 Chapter 3. Electricity

372. When current is switched 377. As the length of a wire

‘on’ of a bulb it converts increases, the resistance of
energy into energy. the wire will
(A) Electrical, heat (A) increase
(B) Electrical, light

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) decrease
(C) Electrical, mechanical
(C) stay the same
(D) Electrical, sound
(D) none of above
373. If Georgia Power charges
$0.0712/kWhr, how much 378. What device opens and
would it cost to run a 9 kW closes an electric circuit?
garage heater for 3 days (A) A switch
(72 hours)?
(B) A power source
(A) $1.92
(B) $46.14 (C) A load
(C) $0.21 (D) A current
(D) $0.01
379. Current consisting of
374. What does power mean? charges that move back and
forth in a circuit is known as
(A) Joules transferred per second
(B) Electron flow per second (A) alternating current
(C) Speed of electrons (B) direct current
(D) Electron energy (C) parallel current
375. What is the symbol used (D) electric current
with volts
380. In most electrical circuits,
(A) V
the pathway is made of:
(B) A
(A) Metal
(C) T
(B) Plastic
(D) W
(C) Static
376. Choose the correct answer
(D) Wood
(A) bakelite, ebonite, impure wa-
ter, pencil lead 381. A wire of 10 ohm resis-
(B) plastic scale, plastic box, rub- tance is stretched to thrice its
ber pipe original length . Calculate
(C) mica, wood, cotton, distilled the new resistivity
water (A) 3 times
(D) I don’t care whether I get (B) 9 times
marks never mind
(C) no change
(E) PVC(polivinyl chloride), bat-
tery, eraser, silk (D) 10

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 301

382. Turning off an electric light (C) Semiconductors

creates a(n) path (D) Insulators
(A) open
387. How much charge must
(B) divided pass by a point in 10 s for
(C) continuous the current to be 0.50 A?
(D) broken (A) 0.05C
383. Following “conventional (B) 5.0C
current” in an electric circuit (C) 20C
means
(D) 2.0C
(A) imagining positive charge car-
riers flowing from low potential to 388. In a dry cell, the carbon
high potential rod releases electrons and
becomes the terminal.
(B) imagining positive charge car-
riers flowing from high potential to (A) positive
low potential (B) negative
(C) the current is always defined (C) neutral
as exactly one ampere
(D) none of above
(D) the current always flows clock-
wise 389. We use alloy for making
of resistors, because they
384. If the voltage stays the have
same and resistance is in-
(A) Temp. coefficient Resistivity(a)
creased, current will
Low low
(A) Increase
(B) High High
(B) Decrease
(C) High LOW
(C) Stay the same
(D) Low High
(D) Not enough info
390. Why voltage is impor-
385. If too much electric current tant?
passes through a circuit, the
wires can (A) Because it is the pressure
that causes the electrons to move
(A) make batteries around in a circuit and make the
(B) cool down current flow and make appliances
(C) conductor work

(D) overheat (B) To supply energy to be able to

make the current flow in electric
386. Which of the following circuit and make appliances work
have zero resistance below (C) To control the resistance in the
critical temperatures? circuit
(A) Conductors (D) To reduce the current in the cir-
(B) Superconductors cuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
302 Chapter 3. Electricity

391. Kirchhoff’s II law for the (C) Light-emitting diode

electric network is based on: (D) All about the same.
(A) Law of conservation of charge
396. What is the formula for
(B) Law of conservation of energy to calculate voltage differ-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Law of conservation of angu- ence?
lar momentum (A) I=v/r
(D) Law of conservation of mass (B) V=I*r
392. Devices in a series circuit (C) V=1 j/c
receive (D) none of above
(A) Equal current but different volt-
age 397. Suppose that a 1.5 V power
supply is used in a circuit
(B) Equal voltage but different cur- with a lone 25 Ω resistor.
rent What would be the magni-
(C) Equal voltage and equal cur- tude of the electric current
rent flowing in this circuit?
(D) different voltage and different (A) 37.5 A
current (B) 26.5 A
393. What are the factors that (C) 16.67 A
affect resistance? (D) 0.06 A
(A) Surface area, Concentration
398. Our body is a of electric-
and Temperature
ity?
(B) Length, Thickness (cross-
(A) Conductor
sectional area), Temperature, Ma-
terial (B) Insulator
(C) Pressure and temperature (C) None of these
(D) Material and pressure (D) none of above

394. An electric current flowing 399. Kirchhoff’s 2nd Law (Loop

in one direction only Rule) is a consequence of the
law of conservation of
(A) voltage
(A) Energy
(B) parallel current
(B) Charge
(C) direct current
(C) Momentum
(D) electric current
(D) Power
395. Which of these lamps is
the longer lasting in a com- 400. The amount of energy
mon circuit? used to move a of elec-
trons through the circuit is
(A) Incandescent lamp the of an electric energy
(B) Compact fluorescent lamp source. (choose two)

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 303

(A) Hertz (B) Electric Force

(B) coulomb (C) Electric Field
(C) voltage (D) Electric Current
(D) watt 406. In an electrolytic cell, the
electrode which is connected
401. Kirchhoff’s junction rule is
to the positive terminal of
a statement of
the battery is called:
(A) the law of conservation of mo-
(A) cation
mentum.
(B) anion
(B) the law of conservation of en-
ergy. (C) cathode
(C) the law of conservation of (D) anode
charge.
407. What is the total resis-
(D) the law of ohms. tance of a 5 ohm, 10 ohm,
and 15 ohm resistor hooked
402. The resistance of a wire in-
up in PARALLEL?
creases with an increase in
its (A) 10 ohms
(A) length (B) 0.5 ohms
(B) temperature (C) 30 ohms
(C) length and temperature (D) 2.7 ohms

(D) diameter 408. A coil refers to

403. Find the odd one (A) fuse

(A) Silver (B) an electric wire

(C) wire twisted in the form of a
(B) Copper
circle
(C) Bakelite
(D) none of these
(D) none of above
409. Electrons flow from areas
404. Electric wires are made up of potential energy to ar-
of plastic because eas of potential energy.
(A) they do not burn (A) higher, lower
(B) they look so cute (B) lower, higher
(C) they are kind (C) higher, higher
(D) they burn (D) lower, lower
405. a region around a charged 410. What size resistor would
object where the object’s produce a current flow of 5
electric force is exerted on Amps with a battery voltage
other charged objects of 12.6 volts
(A) Electron (A) 60 Ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
304 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) 2.52 Ohms 415. Two resistors, R1 and R2

(C) 1.71 ohms are connected in SERIES. If
R2 > R1 , which among the
(D) 5.04 Ohms statements is TRUE about the
voltage that is used up by
411. The movement of electrons

NARAYAN CHANGDER
each resistor?
from atom to atom in a line
results in a flow of (A) V1 > V2
(A) amperage. (B) V1 = V2

(B) electric current. (C) V1 < V2

(D) none of above
(C) electromagnetic connectors.
(D) none of above 416. An example of a conduc-
tor is:
412. The following are the use (A) a glass paperweight
of potentiometer EXCEPT
(B) a plastic cap
(A) measure the length of a wire (C) a metal screw
(B) compare the emfs of two cells (D) a wooden handle
(C) measure an unknown emf of
417. the charging of an object
a cell
through rubbing.
(D) measure the internal resis- (A) friction
tance of a cell
(B) induction
413. This circuit has only one (C) conduction
pathway for the electric
(D) neutralization
charges to flow.
(A) Parallel Circuit 418. When you buy a water
pipe in a hardware store,
(B) Open Circuit the water isn’t included.
(C) Short Circuit When you buy copper wire,
electrons
(D) Series Circuit
(A) must be supplied by you, just
414. What can be reason for as water must be supplied for a
one sided deflection in a po- water pipe.
tentiometer experiment? (B) are already in the wire.
(A) Emf of a cell in the primary cir- (C) may fall out, which is why
cuit may be less than that in sec- wires are insulated.
ondary circuit
(D) None of these.
(B) Cells in the primary and sec-
ondary circuit are connected with 419. Based on Ohm’s law,
opposite terminals which of the following state-
ments explains what must
(C) connections may be loose happen when the voltage
(D) length of the wire may be too across a resistor is de-
long creased?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 305

(A) The current through the resis- (B) 2. finding internal resistance
tor increases. of a cell
(B) The resistance of the resistor (C) 3. can be used as a variable
decreases. resistor
(C) The resistance of the resistor (D) 1 & 2
increases. (E) 1, 2 & 3
(D) The current through the resis-
tor decreases. 424. Which of these can supply
current to an electrical cir-
420. Thin wires have re- cuit?
sistance compared to thick (A) A battery
wires of the same length.
(B) A light bulb
(A) more
(C) A switch
(B) less
(D) Wire
(C) equal
(D) none of above 425. Conventional current in a
DC circuit flows from the
421. Current in a circuit when
(A) Positive side of the battery to
a charge of 180 C passes a
the negative side of the battery
point in a circuit in2 minutes
is (B) negative side of the battery to
the positive side of the battery
(A) 1:00 AM
(C) No way to determine
(B) 2:00 AM
(D) none of above
(C) 3:00 AM
(D) 1.5 A 426. What are the two ends of
a battery called?
422. The temperature coeffi-
(A) south and north
cient of resistance of a wire
is 0.00125 per degree cel- (B) positive and negative
sius . At 300 K temperature (C) Santa and Reindeer
its resistance is 1 ohm. The
(D) none of above
resistance of the wire will
be 2 ohm at: 427. The device used to make
(A) 1154 K or break an electric circuit is
(B) 1100 K (A) Resistors
(C) 1400 K (B) Battery
(D) 1127 K (C) Switch

423. What is the use of a poten- (D) Ammeter

tiometer? 428. Current does not flow
(A) 1. comparison of emf’s of two through the circuit when the
primary cells circuit is in the condition.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
306 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) Closed (A) infinity

(B) No change (B) very small
(C) Open (C) zero
(D) All of the above
(D) unknown

NARAYAN CHANGDER
429. Current is measured with
434. Materials that cut down or
resist the flow of charges
(A) an ammeter are called?
(B) a voltmeter
(A) conductor
(C) an electroscope
(B) insulator
(D) none of above
(C) resistor
430. What effect do electrons
(D) circut
flowing through a resistor
have on the resistor.
435. Which of the following is
(A) make it glow not a safety device in a cir-
(B) reduce it’s resistance cuit?
(C) increase it’s resistance (A) Fuse
(D) heat it up (B) Circuit Breaker

431. What quantity describes (C) Resistor

the rate of flow of charges (D) Ground Wire
or the total amount of
charges moving past a point 436. The potential difference
in a conductor? between the two ends of the
(A) Voltage wires is equal to the
(B) Electric Current (A) resistance
(C) Electric Resistance (B) energy source current
(D) Electrical Power (C) Potential difference between
432. If a current of 1 A passes the two terminals of the battery
through a point in 1 s then (D) the parallel end of the compo-
charge passes thatpoint is nent
(A) 2 C
437. Which of the following has
(B) 3 C
the greatest resistance?
(C) 1 C
(A) long, thin wires
(D) 6 C
(B) Short, thick wires
433. The resistivity of supercon-
(C) long, thick wires
ductor at the critical temper-
ature is (D) short, thin wires

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 307

438. When a negatively 443. Wheat Stone Bridge ex-

charged object is used to periment is most sensitive,
charge a neutral object, the when:
neutral object will (A) :All four resistances are ap-
(A) remain neutral proximately equal
(B) become positive (B) One of the resistances is very
high as compare to others
(C) become negative
(C) One of the resistances is very
(D) none of above
low as compare to others
439. A material that conducts (D) Any two resistances are equal
heat well. 2. A material to infinity.
that allows electric charges
to flow. 444. The internal resistance of a
cell is the resistance of
(A) Conductor
(A) Material used in the cell
(B) Insulator
(B) Electrolyte used in the cell
(C) Instructor
(C) Electrodes of the cell
(D) Calculator
(D) vessel of the cell
440. Unit for electric power is
445. The movement of electri-
(A) amperes cally charged particles is
(B) ohms known as
(A) electric current
(C) volts
(B) electric circuit
(D) watts
(C) electric resistance
441. Within a circuit, the num-
(D) none of above
ber of electrons flowing
from a power source is 446. Which type of electricity
the number of returning moves along a pathway to
to the source make a light turn on?
(A) much less than, paths (A) Static electricity
(B) the same as, electrons (B) Lightning electricity
(C) much less than, electrons (C) Turbine electricity
(D) the same as, paths (D) Current electricity

442. Electrons flow only in 447. All things have a natural

tendency to move
(A) series ciruits
(A) from high potential energy to
(B) parallel circuits
low potential energy.
(C) closed circuits
(B) from low potential energy to
(D) open circuits high potential energy.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
308 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) from medium potential en- 452. The resistance of a conduc-

ergy to low potential energy. tor does not depends up on
(D) not at all unless someone
pushes on it. (A) its dimensions
(B) the nature of the material it is

NARAYAN CHANGDER
448. Electric charge will flow in
made up of
an electric circuit when
(C) its temperature
(A) electrical resistance is low
enough. (D) its colour
(B) a potential difference exists. 453. Potential difference is
(C) the circuit is grounded. measured in
(D) electrical devices in the circuit (A) volts
are not (B) amperes

449. In the analogy of ‘flow (C) ohms

of river’ for ‘flow of cur- (D) none of above
rent’, which of following
quantities is represented by 454. Fuse works based on the
‘height of the mountains’? (A) heating effect of electric cur-
(A) Current rent
(B) magnetic effect of electric cur-
(B) Potential
rent
(C) Resistance
(C) Lighting effect of electric cur-
(D) Charge rent
450. The current in a circuit is (D) none of above
measured in 455. In the equation, I = V/R, I
(A) volts ex expressed in
(B) amperes (A) ohms
(C) ohms (B) amperes
(D) none of above (C) volts
(D) none of above
451. Also known as ‘electric
potential difference’, what 456. The symbol for 1 is A
quantity describes electri-
(A) acceleration
cal potential energy per
coulomb of charge in a cir- (B) current
cuit? (C) ampere
(A) Voltage (D) coulomb
(B) Electric Current
457. Unsramble the word
(C) Electric Resistance “GEVIETNA MTLINTREA”
(D) Electrical Power (A) TERMALIN GANETIVE

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 309

(B) NEGATIVE TERMINAL 462. Thin wires have resis-

(C) LANIMRET EVITAGEN tance to electron flow than
do thicker wires.
(D) TERNEGAI MINALTVE
(A) greater
458. Which word means how (B) lesser
hard it is for electrons to (C) the same
flow?
(D) none of above
(A) Current
(B) Voltage 463. Injuries from electric shock
may include which of the fol-
(C) Resistance lowing? Select 2 answers
(D) Power (A) Thermal burns

459. how many types of re- (B) Cardiac arrest

sistors are needed in the (C) Hypothermia
wheatstone bridge? (D) Indigestion
(A) 1
464. What size resistor would
(B) 2 produce a 3 Amp current
(C) 3 flow with a 12 Volt battery
(D) 4 (A) 1 Ohm
(B) 3 Ohms
460. A student is planning to
make changes to a circuit. (C) 4 Ohms
Which change will increase (D) 12 Ohms
the resistance?
465. What causes the shock
(A) Replace the wire with one that youreceive when you touch
is longer. adoorknob?
(B) Replace the wire with one that (A) Electrons being pulled from
is shorter. one surface to another
(C) Swap the positions of the bat- (B) Protons being pulled from one
tery and the switch. surface to another
(D) Swap the positions of the light- (C) Neutrons being pulled from
bulb and the switch. one surface to another
(D) Positrons being pulled from
461. Which of the following ma-
one surface to another
terials is an electrical con-
ductor? 466. LED stands for
(A) Silver spoon (A) Light Emission Diode
(B) Silver-colored plastic spoon (B) Light Emitting Diode
(C) cooper spoon (C) Light Electric Diode
(D) wooden spoon (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
310 Chapter 3. Electricity

467. The rate at which charges 473. In order for a circuit to

flow is called work you need to have
(A) current (A) A voltage source
(B) flow (B) A complete pathway with no

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) circuit breaks in the circuit
(D) none of above (C) A resistor
468. According to Ohm’s Law, (D) A voltage source and a com-
plete pathway with no breaks in
(A) I = V/R the circuit

(B) V = I/R 474. Current is

(C) R = V*I (A) moving protons
(D) none of above
(B) moving electrons
469. A buildup of charges on (C) measured in volts
an object.
(D) measured in ohms
(A) Static Electricity
(B) Conductor 475. One watt is equal to,
(C) Inductor (A) one meter per second
(D) Electric Current (B) one Joule per second
470. Resistance is measured in (C) One ampere per second
what unit?
(D) one farad per second
(A) ohms
(B) amps 476. What might happen if
wires weren’t insulated?
(C) watts
(D) volts (A) The power source would no
longer provide a flow of electrons.
471. What measures current?
(B) We’d be in danger of harm
(A) Electroscope from electric shocks.
(B) Meter (C) Current electricity would be-
(C) Ammeter come static electricity.
(D) All of the above (D) The circuit would be broken.
472. What is static electricity?
477. Which of the following liq-
(A) build up of charges that pass uids conduct electricity?
QUICKLY to another object
(A) Distilled water
(B) build up of charges that pass
SLOWLY to another object (B) Milk
(C) None of the above (C) Salt solution
(D) none of above (D) Both a and b

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.1 Electric current & circuit 311

478. What is voltage? 482. The equation I = V/R math-

ematically expresses
(A) The amount of electric poten-
tial energy per one coulomb of (A) Ohm’s law
charge (B) current law
(B) The amount of 1 coulomb of (C) Newton’s law
charge per unit of potential en-
(D) none of above
ergy
(C) The number of volts per 483. Lets start with an easy one
coulomb . A combination of 2 or
more cells is known as
(D) The amount of electric poten-
(A) an electric cell
tial energy per volt
(B) a battery
479. Ken wanted to make a (C) a switch
light bulb glow. Which
set of materials would he (D) a bulb
need? 484. The algebraic sum of volt-
(A) Paper cup, paper clip, and a ages around any closed
popsicle stick path in a network is equal
to
(B) battery, wire, and light bulb
(A) Infinity
(C) Button, cell battery, and rub-
ber glove (B) 1

(D) cell battery, paper, and bulb (C) 0

(D) Negative Polarity
480. What is a switch’s function
in a circuit? 485. find the incorrect state-
ment.
(A) to make the current hotter or
colder (A) Closed circuit means a com-
plete electrical connection around
(B) turn on and off the flow of cur- which current flows or circulates.
rent
(B) A key or a switch can be
(C) the pathway that current flows placed only at a specific place in
(D) to add more power to the cir- a circuit
cuit (C) Never touch a lighted electric
bulb connected to the mains .
481. When the switch is on and
(D) one reason for excessive cur-
the bulb doesn’t glow, what
rents in electrical circuits is the di-
do you call?
rect touching of wires
(A) smart bulb
486. heating effect of electric
(B) bulb that doesn’t glow current is used in
(C) filament problem bulb (A) checking temperature
(D) fused bulb (B) pan

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
312 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) room heaters (C) amperes

(D) none of the above (D) voltages
487. Which type of elements 492. Electric potential differ-
make up semiconductors? ence is

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Metals (A) the product of kinetic energy
(B) Non-metals and charge
(C) Metalloids (B) the product of potential energy
(D) Noble Gases and charge
(C) the change in kinetic energy
488. A circuit has more than per unit of charge
one loop. When one light
goes out, the others stay on. (D) the change in potential energy
What type of circuit matches per unit of charge
the description?
493. When an electric current
(A) closed circuit flows through a conduct-
(B) series circuit ing solution, it can produce
which of the following ef-
(C) parallel circuit
fects?
(D) open circuit
(A) Bubbles of gas on the elec-
489. If the power source was trodes
set on 4.0V and there were (B) Deposits of metal on the elec-
1 lights, what would the trodes
voltage be across the light?
(C) A change in the colour of the
(A) 4.0 V solution
(B) 2.0 V (D) All the above.
(C) 1.0 V
494. WHo discovered the mag-
(D) 0.0 V
netic effect of current?
490. What is the power con- (A) Galileo Galilei
sumed by a 25 ohm resistor
(B) Newton
when it carries a current of
3.0 A? (C) Marconi
(A) 225 W (D) H C Oersted
(B) 1875 W
495. Which one of the follow-
(C) 75 W ing is based on the heating
(D) 0.36 W effect of current?
(A) Geyser
491. Electric can travel long
distances (B) Hair dryer
(A) circuits (C) Immersion rod
(B) currents (D) All of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 3.2 Electric potential 313

496. Which of the following is (C) CFL

property of material (D) none of above
(A) Resistivity
500. Why is a bulb brighter
(B) Resistance
when it is powered by two
(C) Both batteries rather than one?
(D) None (A) Because the flow of electricity
497. What does lightning have in the circuit is less
in common with theshock (B) Because the flow of electricity
you receive when you touch in the circuit is the same
a doorknob?
(C) Because the flow of electricity
(A) They both involve protons be- in the circuit is greater
ing pulled away fromatoms
(D) Because the flow of electricity
(B) They’re both forms of static will go backward
electricity
(C) They’re both forms of current 501. A car battery is an exam-
electricity ple of a

(D) Neither of them has anything (A) wet cell

to do with electricity (B) dry cell
498. Which of these materials is (C) jail cell
an insulator? (D) none of above
(A) glass
502. Energy transformations
(B) aluminum occur when current flows
(C) copper through a circuit that has
(D) steel
(A) voltage
499. Which of the following is
most ecofriendly? (B) electric current
(A) Incandescent bulb (C) electric resistance
(B) LED (D) coulomb

3.2 Electric potential

1. What is 1 volt equivalent 2. How much kinetic energy
to? will be gained by an α parti-
cle in going from a point at
(A) 1J/C 70 V to another point at 50
(B) 1C/J V

(C) 1A/s (A) 40eV

(D) 1J/V (B) 40KeV

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
314 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) 40MeV 7. The electric potential at a dis-

(D) 0eV tance r from a positive point
charge is 45 V. The potential
3. Calculate the current when increases to 50 V when the
100 micro ampere flows in distance from the charge de-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
a circuit i 1 milli second? creases by 1.5 m. What is
(A) 10 A the value of r?

(B) 1A (A) 1.3 m

(C) .1 A (B) 1.5 m

(D) .01 A (C) 7.9 m

(D) 15 m
4. A 2-C charge experiences a
force of 40 N when put at 8. A repulsive force exists be-
a certain location in space. tween which two particles?
The electric field at that loca- (A) Two neutrons
tion is .
(B) An electron and a neutron
(A) 2 N/C.
(C) An electron and a proton
(B) 20 N/C
(D) Two electrons
(C) 30 N/C.
(D) 40 N/C. 9. Two capacitors C1= 3 µ F and
C2 = 6 µ F arranged in se-
5. Two protons, each with a ries are connected in paral-
charge of 1.6 x 10-19 C, are lel with a third capacitor C3
2.0 x 10-5 m apart. What is = 4 µ F. The arrangement is
the change in electrical po- connected to a 6V battery.
tential energy between the Calculate the total energy
charges? stored in the capacitors.
(A) 1.1 x 10-23 J (A) 108 x 10-6 J
(B) 3.2 x 10-19 J (B) 10.8 x 10-6 J
(C) 3.2 x 10-16 J (C) 1.08 x 10-6 J
(D) 1.6 x 10-14 J (D) 108 x 10-7 J

6. Suppose an electric poten- 10. Two parallel plates are op-

tial is given as V(x, y, z) = positely charged. The right
3x2 + xy + z in volts. Which plate is negative and the left
of the following is magni- plate is positive. In which di-
tude of electric field at (3, 1, rection does the electric field
0)? point?
(A) 21 (A) to the left
(B) 22 (B) to the right
(C) 0 (C) up
(D) 18 (D) down

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 315

11. Suppose the magnitude of (A) higher

a charge placed in a field (B) lower
were doubled. How much
would the electric potential (C) zero
energy change? (D) none of above
(A) It would double 16. It is a property of a charged
(B) It would decrease by half object, by virtue of its loca-
tion in an electric field.
(C) It would have no effect
(A) Electric Potential
(D) It would quadruple
(B) Electric Potential Energy
12. What is the energy given
(C) Potential Energy
off by a 20V bulb which has
10C passing through it? (D) none of above
(A) 200J 17. The earth can receive as
(B) 2J well as give out quite a num-
ber of
(C) 0.5J
(A) protons
(D) 250J
(B) electrons
13. In the direction of an electric (C) neutrons
field line, which of the fol-
lowing must be true? (D) none of above

(A) the electric field strength must 18. The physical quantity
increase whose S.I. unit is coulomb/volt
(B) the electric field strength must is
decrease (A) Electric field intensity
(C) the potential must increase (B) Electric potential
(D) the potential must decrease (C) Capacitance
(D) Dipole moment
14. The expression for Electric
potential due to a point 19. The magnitude of polarisa-
charge at a distance ‘r’ from tion vector is given by
it is
(A) P = χo E
q2
(A) 1
4πε 0 r (B) P = χo E 2
q
(B) 1
4πε 0 r (C) P = χo2 E
χo
(C) 1 q2 (D) P = E
4πε 0 r2
(D) 1
4πε
q 20. In their Physics lesson,
r2
Yagami find it difficult to un-
0

15. If an electron moves from derstand the problem. Help

point P to Q in an electric him answer the following
field, point P will have po- problem:How much work is
tential. required to move a-700uC

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
316 Chapter 3. Electricity

charge across a potential (A) 0.333 V

difference of 100V?
(B) 3 V
(A) W = 0.70J
(C) 300 V
(B) W = 0.07J
(D) none of above

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) W = 0.7J
(D) W = 0.007J 25. Which is a characteristic of
most electrical conductors?
21. Three charges 2q, -q, -q are
located at the vertices of an (A) They can be cut easily.
equilateral triangle. At the
(B) Positive charges move easily
centre of the triangle
through them.
(A) The field is zero but potential
is non-zero (C) Negative charges move easily
through them.
(B) Both field and potential are
zero (D) They are soft and flexible.
(C) Both field and potential are
26. assume a rubber rod is
non-zero
rubbed against a rabbit
(D) The field is non-zero but po- fur and gains 5 electrons.
tential is zero which of the following is
true?
22. Which of the following is
not the correct expression (A) The fur lost 5 electrons
for the energy stored in a ca-
(B) the fur gained 5 electrons
pacitor.
(A) U = 12 CV 2 (C) the fur gained 5 protons
Q2 (D) The fur lost 5 protons
(B) U = 2C
(C) U = 12 QV 27. The diagram shows the
(D) U = 21 C2V field lines in a region of an
electric field created by a
23. An electron has charge-e positive charge.Which one
and mass me . A proton has of the following statements
charge e and mass 1840 me is correct? When moving
. A “proton volt” is equal to: from X to Y
(A) 1eV (A) the electric potential is con-
(B) 1840eV stant.
(C) (1/1840)eV (B) the electric potential in-
(D) sqrt(1840)eV creases.
(C) the electric potential de-
24. What is the voltage across
creases.
the plates of the capacitor if
the capacitance is 10 uF and (D) the electric potential changes
the Charge stored is 30 uC? from positive to negative.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 317

28. what is the meaning of (A) neutrons

“Electric Dipole”? (B) electrons
(A) Two equal point charges Q, of (C) protons
same signs, separated by a dis-
tance “d” (D) none of above

(B) Two equal point charges Q, of 33. How is the capacitance (C)
opposite, separated by a distance of a parallel-plate capacitor
“d” affected by the charge on
the plates?
(C) Two unequal point charges Q,
of opposite, separated by a dis- (A) C depend on the charge on
tance “d” the plates
(D) Two unequal point charges Q, (B) C is vanished when there are
of opposite, stick together. plates
(C) C does not depend on the
29. In batteries, energy is charge on the plates
stored in the form of
(D) C is accumulated on one side
(A) kinetic energy only
(B) chemical potential energy
34. What is the symbol for Elec-
(C) electrical potential energy tric Potential Energy?
(D) heat (A) V
30. Electric field lines between (B) Va
two oppositely charged par- (C) U
allel metal plates will be
(D) none of above
(A) straight lines, randomly
spaced 35. How much work does it
take to transfer 0.15 C of
(B) curved lines grouped together charge through a potential
in small bunches. randomly difference of 9.0 v?
spaced.
(A) W = 60 J
(C) straight lines, evenly spaced
(B) W=1.4 J
(D) curved lines, evenly spaced
(C) W = 0 N
31. The term “joule per (D) W =-1.4 N
coulomb “ is the same as
36. Calculate the Electric Poten-
tial of a +7.8 x 109 C
(A) watt
charge with Electric Poten-
(B) ohm tial Energy of 750 J
(C) volt (A) 9.6 x 10-3 V
(D) none of above (B) 6.5 x 10-7 V
32. Which subatomic particles (C) 8.7 x 109 V
have a positive charge? (D) 9.6 x 10-8 V

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
318 Chapter 3. Electricity

37. The electric field around an 41. If you use 20 J of work to

isolated electron has a cer- push a 2-C charge into an
tain strength 1 cm from the electric field, its voltage with
electron. The electric field respect to its starting posi-
strength 2 cm from the elec- tion is

NARAYAN CHANGDER
tron is (A) 10 V.
(A) half as much. (B) less than 10 V.
(B) the same. (C) more then 10 V.
(C) twice as much. (D) none of above
(D) d. four times as much.
42. One Coulomb charge is
38. Electric potential energy of equivalent to the charge
an electric dipole in a uni- contained in
form electric field is given by (A) 2.6 x 1019 elecrons
→
− (B) 6.2 x 1019 elecrons
(A) U = →−
p ×E
→
− −
(B) U = E × →p (C) 2.65 x 1018 elecrons
→
− (D) 6.25 x 1018 elecrons
(C) U = −→
−p .E
43. A charge of +1 Coulomb
( −→)
→
−
p .E
(D) U = − εo is moved through a voltage
difference equal to +600
39. An electron moves 4.5 m Volts. How much does
in the direction of an elec- its electric potential energy
tric field of strength 325 change?
N/C. Determine the change
(A) 0.00167 Joules
in electrical potential energy
associated with the electron. (B) 6 Volts
qe = 1.9x10−19 (C) 600 Joules
(A) 2.3x10−16 J (D) 100 Joules
(B) 3.2x10−16 J
44. work done in an equipoten-
(C) 4.3x10−16 J tial surface is
(D) 6.3x10−16 J (A) positive
(B) negative
40. Electric field lines always
point from potential to (C) zero
potential (D) none of above
(A) Higher, Lower
45. A region of influence sur-
(B) Lower, Higher rounding an object is best
(C) Not enough information to defined as:
determine (A) An electric field
(D) none of above (B) A field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 319

(C) A force (A) 0

(D) A gravitational field (B) negative infinity
46. Electric potential difference (C) positive infinity
is measured in: (D) 200
(A) V
51. An uncharged body has
(B) C
electric potential.
(C) F
(A) no
(D) N/C
(B) volt
(E) V or J/C
(C) infinite
47. The ratio of the magnitude
of charge on one capacitor (D) none of above
plate to the electric poten-
52. Work done is independent
tial difference between the
of the taken by the
plates; the slope of the line
charge.
of a net charge versus po-
tential difference graph. (A) path
(A) Capacitance (B) method
(B) Capacitor (C) force
(C) Electroscope (D) none of above
(D) Electrostatics
53. Two spheres A and B of ra-
48. Electric potential as dis- dius ‘a’ and ‘b’ respectively
tance increases. are at same electric poten-
(A) Increases tial. The ratio of the surface
charge densities of A and B
(B) Decreases
is
(C) Remains Constant a2
(A) b2
(D) Is 0
b2
(B)
49. The electric potential due to a2

a source point charge can (C) a

b
be solved using which for- (D) b
mula? a

(A) V = kq1q2/r2 54. If each of the charges dou-

bles, what happens to the
(B) V = kqs/r2
electric force?
(C) V = kqs/r
(A) It quadruples
(D) V = qsE
(B) It doubles
50. The magnitude of electric
(C) It stays the same
potential is at an infinite
distance. (D) It is reduced by half

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
320 Chapter 3. Electricity

55. The correct expression for 59. The ratio of the magnitude
the capacitance of a parallel of charge on one capacitor
plate capacitor is plate to the electric poten-
(A) C = εo d tial difference between the
plates.
A
εoV
(B)

NARAYAN CHANGDER
C = Ad
(A) Capacitor
(C) C = εodA
εo (B) Capacitance
(D) C = Ad
(C) Voltage potential difference
56. If the charge on an metal
(D) Volt
sphere is doubled, the elec-
tric potential inside the 60. The work needed to move
sphere is a positive test charge from
(A) doubled one point to another, di-
(B) quadrupled vided by the magnitude of
the test charge.
(C) remains the same
(A) Equipotential
(D) none of above
(B) Electric potential difference
57. A positive test charge of 5.0
x 10-6 C is in an electric (C) Electric field
field that exerts a force of (D) Voltage
2.0 x 10-4 N on it. What is
the magnitude of the electric 61. A charge of 5 C experiences
field at the location of the a force of 5000 N when it
test charge? is kept in a uniform electric
field. What is the poten-
(A) 0.4 N/C
tial difference between two
(B) 4x101 N/C points separated by a dis-
(C) 1x10−9 N/C tance of 1cm
(D) 1x109 N/C (A) 10 V
58. At point X which distance (B) 250 V
is r1 from a point charge, (C) 1000 V
the electric potential is VX.
At point Y which distance (D) 2500 V
is r2 from the same point 62. The charge Q is midway
charge, the electric poten- between two other charges
tial is VY.How much work is (Each a distance of 10 cm
done to bring a proton (with away from the center.) If
a charge of e) from point X Q=-7.5 nC what must be the
to point Y in joules? charge q1 so that charge q2
(A) e(VX-VY) remains stationary as Q and
(B) e(VY-VX) q1 are held in place?
(C) e(VX-VY)/r (A) 30 nC
(D) e(VY-VX)/r (B) 7.5 nC

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 321

(C) 15 nC 67. The electric lines of force are

(D) 60 nC to the equipotential sur-
faces.
63. What is the electrical poten- (A) parallel
tial energy like when same
charges are far apart? (B) perpendicular
(A) high (C) none of these
(B) low (D) none of above
(C) the same as when they are 68. When an electron (e =-1.6
close x 10-19 C) moves 0.10 m
(D) none of above along the direction of an
electric field with a strength
64. As the resistance in a circuit of 3.0 N/C, what is the mag-
increases, the electric cur- nitude of the potential differ-
rent ence between the electron’s
(A) increases initial and ending points?
(B) decreases (A) 4.8 x 10-19 V
(C) stays the same (B) 0.30 V
(D) none of above (C) 0.03 V

65. Which one of the follow- (D) 30 V

ing statements about elec-
69. An object whose posi-
tric field strength and elec-
tive charges are exactly
tric potential is incorrect?
balanced by its negative
(A) Electric potential is a scalar charges.
quantity.
(A) Conductor
(B) Electric field strength is a vec-
tor quantity. (B) Neutral

(C) Electric potential is zero when- (C) Coulomb’s Law

ever the electric field strength is (D) Insulator
zero.
70. The potentials at points R
(D) The potential gradient is pro-
and S due to the +5.0 nC
portional to the electric field
charge are 375 V and 450
strength.
V respectively. How much
66. A material, such as glass, work is done when a +2.0
through which a charge will nC charge is moved from R
not move easily. to S?
(A) Insulator (A) 0.12 µ J
(B) Capacitor (B) 0.15 µ J
(C) Grounding (C) 0.19 µ J
(D) Conductor (D) 0.38 µ J

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
322 Chapter 3. Electricity

71. (1) Electric potential differ- (C) Electrostatics

ence is measured in (D) Grounding
(A) ampere
76. The electrical force on a 2-C
(B) watt charge is 20 N. What is the

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) volt value of the electric field at
(D) none of above the location of the charge?
(A) 2 N/C
72. When work is done on a
positive test charge by an (B) 10 N/C
external force to move it (C) 20 N/C
from one location to an-
(D) 40 N/C
other, potential energy
(increases, decreases) and 77. A positive charge of 1.5x10−8
electric potential (in- C experiences a force of
creases, decreases). 0.025 N to the left in an elec-
(A) increases, increases tric field. What is the magni-
tude of the field? E = F/q’
(B) increases, decreases
(A) 1.7x106 N/C
(C) decreases, increases
(B) 2.0x106 N/C
(D) decreases, decreases
(C) 3.4x106 N/C
73. A material, such as copper,
(D) 1x106 N/C
through which a charge will
move easily. 78. After you rub a balloon on
(A) Insulator your hair, the balloon will
likely be charged
(B) Capacitor
(A) to less than 10 volts.
(C) Grounding
(B) to several hundred volts.
(D) Conductor
(C) to several thousand volts.
74. A line that indicates the di-
(D) not at all.
rection of the force due to
the electric field on a posi- 79. What variable do Coulombs
tive test charge represent?
(A) Electric fields (A) Electrostatic Charge
(B) Electric field lines (B) Force
(C) Equipotential (C) Distance
(D) Electric potential difference (D) Mass
75. The unit of electric poten- 80. Inside a hollow charged
tial difference; equal to one spherical conductor, the po-
joule per coulomb. tential
(A) Volt (A) Varies directly as the distance
(B) Coulomb from the centre

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 323

(B) Varies inversely as the distance (D) -5, 124 Volts

from the centre
85. An electron, initially at rest
(C) Varies inversely as the square
is accelerated through a po-
of the distance from the centre
tential difference of 450 V.
(D) Is constant What is the speed of the elec-
tron due to this potential dif-
81. The capacitance of a
ference?
parallel-plate capacitor can
be increased by: (A) 1.44x106 m/s
(A) increasing the charge (B) 1.59x106 m/s
(B) decreasing the charge (C) 18.7x106 m/s
(C) increasing the plate separa- (D) 12.6x106 m/ s
tion
86. Electric potential energy
(D) decreasing the plate separa- and Gravitational potential
tion energy are similar in the fact
82. The process of removing ex- that BOTH depend on
cess charge by touching an (A) mass
object to Earth
(B) charge
(A) Electrostatics
(C) position
(B) Charging by Conduction
(D) none of above
(C) Grounding
(D) Equipotential 87. Each of the following pairs
of charges are separated by
83. The correct expression for a distance d. Which pair
the capacitance of a parallel has the highest potential en-
plate capacitor is filled with ergy?
a dielectric of dielectric con- (A) +5 C and +3 C
stant κ
(B) +5 C and-3 C
(A) C = κ εAo d
(C) -5 C and-3 C
(B) C = κ εAd
oV

εo (D) -5 C and +3 C
(C) C = κ Ad
(E) All pairs have the same poten-
(D) C = κ εodA tial energy.
84. A proton has a velocity of
88. The electric potential differ-
3, 000 m/s. What is the dif-
ence between two point can
ference in electric potential
be also called
needed to bring the proton
to a complete stop? (A) resistance
(A) +0.047 Volts (B) friction
(B) +5, 124 Volts (C) induction
(C) -0.047 Volts (D) voltage

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
324 Chapter 3. Electricity

89. Moving an electron within 93. Which of these options

an electric field would would make an electric field
change the the electron. weaker?
(A) mass of (A) Increasing the distance be-
(B) amount of charge on tween charges

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) potential energy of (B) Increasing the strength of the
charges
(D) none of above
(C) Lowering the distance be-
90. Two protons are released tween charges
from rest, with only the elec-
(D) Adding more charges to the
trostatic force acting. Which
field
of the following statements
is NOT true about them as 94. An electric field gets the
they move apart? closer it is to the charge
(A) Their electric potential energy (A) Stronger
keeps decreasing.
(B) Weaker
(B) Their electric potential energy
keeps increasing. (C) Maximal
(C) Their acceleration keeps de- (D) Minimal
creasing.
95. Electric current is measured
(D) Their kinetic energy keeps in- in
creasing.
(A) Watts
91. What is the unit for Electric (B) Volts
Potential Energy?
(C) Amperes
(A) V
(D) none of above
(B) J
(C) PE 96. The unit (units) of electric
field:
(D) none of above
(A) V/m
92. Two oppositely charged
(B) N/C
particles are held in place
near each other. When the (C) J/C
particles are released, what (D) N/V
will most likely happen?
97. The electrical force between
(A) They will accelerate towards
charges is strongest when
each other
the charges are
(B) They will move towards each
(A) close together
other at a constant speed
(C) They will accelerate away (B) far apart
from each other (C) the electric force is constant
(D) They will move away from everywhere.
each other at a constant speed (D) there is no pattern

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 325

98. A property of the space 102. If a unit positive charge is

around a charged object taken from one point to an-
that exerts forces on other other over an equipotential
charged objects surface, then
(A) Electric fields (A) Work is done on the charge
(B) Electric field lines (B) Work is done by the charge
(C) Electric potential difference
(C) Work done is constant
(D) Equipotential
(D) No work is done
99. A point charge Q is far from
all other charges. At a dis- 103. In a region where the
tance of 2 m from Q, the electric field is uniform and
electric field is 20 N/C. What points in the +x direction,
is the force a charge of 5 the electric potential is-2000
Coulombs feels? V at x = 8 m and is +400 V
(A) 4 N at x = 2 m. What is the mag-
nitude of the electric field?
(B) 100 N
(A) 500 V/m
(C) 40 N
(D) 10 N (B) 600 V/m

100. Two plates are 0.2 m (C) 200 V/m

apart, a potential difference (D) 400 V/m
of 10 V is applied between
them, the electric field be- 104. If the distance doubles,
tween the plates is what happens to the force?
(A) 20 N/C (A) Reduced by half
(B) 50 N/C
(B) Reduced by 1/4
(C) 5 N/C
(C) Stays the same
(D) 250 N/C
(D) Quadruples
101. A negatively charged par-
ticle revolves in a clock- 105. Two charged spheres of
wise direction around a pos- radii 10 cm and 15 cm are
itively charged sphere. The connected by a thin wire.
work done on the nega- No current will flow, if they
tively charged particle by have
the electric field of the
sphere is (A) The same charge on each
(A) zero. (B) The same energy
(B) negative (C) The same potential
(C) positive (D) The same field on their sur-
(D) none of above faces

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
326 Chapter 3. Electricity

106. An electric dipole is placed 110. Which is the correct for-

at an angle of 300 with mula for electric potential
an electric field of intensity difference?
2x105 N/C. It experiences a (A) ∆V = ∆EPE
torque equal to 4 Nm. If the
qo
(B) ∆V = qo ∆EPE

NARAYAN CHANGDER
dipole length is 2cm, charge
on the dipole is:- (C) ∆V = qo
∆EPE
(A) 8mC (D) ∆V = ∆EPE qo
(B) 4mC 111. the potential difference of
(C) 2µ C zero between two or more
positions in an electric field
(D) 2mC
(A) Electrostatics
107. a device used to store an (B) Grounding
electric charge, consisting of
one or more pairs of conduc- (C) Equipotential
tors separated by an insula- (D) Elementary Charge
tor.
112. The correct relationship
(A) Conductor between Capacitance (C),
(B) Capacitor charge (Q) and potential (V)
is
(C) Electroscope
(A) C=QV
(D) Insulator
(B) Q=CV
108. Direction of electric field is (C) V=QC
(A) From positive charge to nega- (D) C=V/Q
tive charge
113. The electric field lines
(B) From charge negative to posi-
between two oppositely
tive charge
charge plates are mostly
(C) From higher potential to lower
(A) parallel
potential
(B) curved
(D) From lower potential to higher
potential (C) 0
(D) repelling
109. In which cases (points) the
electric potential (V) = 0 (E) drawn from low potential to
high potential
(A) When there are no charges in
the region. 114. Which of the following
materials conducts electric-
(B) At Infinity. (r= Infinity)
ity the best?
(C) At a point near + and-
(A) plastic
charges and their potential cancel
each other (B) rubber
(D) At the midpoint of 2 positive (C) metal
charges. (D) glass

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 327

115. The Earth’s electric field (C) 2

creates a potential that in- (D) 1/2
creases 100 V for every me-
ter of altitude. If an ob- 119. On an equipotential sur-
ject of charge +4.5 mC and face, the charges are
mass 68 g falls a distance (A) moving
of 1.0 m from rest under the
(B) stationary
influence of the Earth’s elec-
tric and gravitational fields, (C) none of these
what is its final kinetic en- (D) none of above
ergy?
120. If you use 17 J of work to
(A) 0.22 J push a charge into an elec-
(B) 0.45 J tric field and then release
the charge, as the charge
(C) 0.67 J
flies past its starting posi-
(D) 1.1 J tion, its kinetic energy is
116. Every proton in the uni- (A) more than 17 J.
verse is surrounded by its (B) less than 17 J.
own (C) 17 J.
(A) gravitational field (D) none of above
(B) electric field
121. When a negative charge is
(C) both gravitational and electric moved from a low potential
field to a point of high potential,
(D) none of the above its potential energy
(A) increases
117. What quantity remains
the same everywhere be- (B) decreases
tween two parallel plates? (C) stays the same
(A) Electric Field (D) increases and then decreases
(B) Electric Potential 122. The energy stored in the
(C) Electric Potential Energy capacitor is equal to
(D) Speed (A) Q2/C
(B) CV/2
118. Two capacitors having
equal capacitance( say C), (C) QV/2
when connected in series (D) Q2/2V
have a net capacitance C1
and when connected in par- 123. Two parallel oppositely
allel have a net capacitance charged plates are 5.1 cm
C2. What is the value of apart.The potential differ-
C1/C2? ence, in volts, between the
plates is 44.6 v.Find the elec-
(A) 4 tric field strength between
(B) 1/4 them.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
328 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) E = 8.7 x 10 2 N.C (C) 4000 N/C

(B) E = 8.7 x 10 2 N / C (D) 5000 N/C
(C) E = 8.7 x 10 2 C 128. An electrical device used
(D) E = 8.7 x 10-2 N / C to store electrical energy.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Capacitance
124. If two balloons have the
same charge, what will hap- (B) Capacitor
pen if you place them close (C) Voltmeter
to each other?
(D) Equipotential
(A) Nothing
129. electric potential is ex-
(B) They will be attracted pressed as
(C) They will pop (A) V= q.Ue
(D) They will push each other (B) V= Eq
away.
(C) V= Ed
125. Calculate the work done in (D) V=Ue/E
bring 10 C charge across po-
tential difference of 4 V? 130. A device that is used to de-
tect electric charges and con-
(A) 80 J
sists of a metal knob con-
(B) 0.4 J nected by a metal stem to
(C) 75 J two thin metal leaves.
(D) 40 J (A) Capacitor
(B) Electroscope
126. Two charges, each of + 0.8
nC, are 40 mm apart. Point (C) Electric Field
P is 40 mm from each of the (D) Electric Field Line
charges.What is the electric
potential at P? 131. Which of the following is a
polar molecule?
(A) zero
(A) H2
(B) 180 V
(B) Cl2
(C) 360 V
(C) O2
(D) 4500 V
(D) HCl
127. A charge of 5 C experi-
132. How many volts are in a
ences a force of 5000 N
circuit with a battery that
when it is kept in a uniform
has a resistance of 10 Ohms
electric field. What is the
and a current of 2 Amps?
electric field between two
points separated by a dis- (A) .5 Volts
tance of 0.2 m (B) 5 Volts
(A) 1000 N/C (C) 20 Volts
(B) 3000 N/C (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 329

133. The potential difference (C) 200 V

between two points is 100 V. (D) 400 V
If a particle with a charge of
2 C is transported from one 137. How far from a charge
of these points to the other, of 1.0 microcoulomb is a
the magnitude of the work point with an electric poten-
done is: tial value of 10KV?
(A) 200 J (A) 0.90m
(B) 100 J (B) 90m
(C) 50 J (C) 9000cm
(D) 2 J (D) 0.9km
134. If an electron is brought to-
138. The direction of electric
wards another electron, the
field lines shows the
electric potential energy of
the system (A) direction of the force on a test
positive charge.
(A) increases
(B) decreases (B) size of the field.

(C) becomes zero (C) strength of the field.

(D) remain the same (D) all of the above

135. Two charge +Q and-Q are 139. The electric field in a given
situated at a certain dis- region of space is defined by
tance. At the point exactly E(x) = 100 + 10x. Which an-
midway between them swer below best defines the
electric potential in this re-
(A) Electric field and potential
gion of space?
both are zero
(A) 10 Volts (Constant throughout
(B) Electric field is zero but poten-
the space)
tial is not zero
(B) 100x Volts
(C) Electric field is not zero but po-
tential is zero (C) 100 Volts (Constant through-
(D) Neither electric field nor po- out the space)
tential is zero (D) −100x − 5x2 Volts
136. The electric potential at a 140. A metal sphere having
distance of 4 m from a cer- an excess of +5 elementary
tain point charge is 200 V charges has a net electric
relative to infinity. What is charge of
the potential (relative to in-
(A) 8.0 x 10-19 C
finity) at a distance of 2 m
from the same charge? (B) 8.0 x 1019 C
(A) 600 V (C) 1.6 x 10-19 C
(B) 50 V (D) 5.0 x 10-19 C

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
330 Chapter 3. Electricity

141. The electric field lines be- (C) V = 122 v

tween two charges curve in (D) V = 150V
space. The direction at a
particular point on a curved 145. an electric potential at a
line is the direction of the point in space exists if:

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) strongest field. (A) there is a test charge at that
(B) average straight line joining point in space
the charges. (B) there is a source charge at that
(C) resultant vector of the fields of point in space
the two charges at that point. (C) there is a source charge/s
(D) none of the above nearby
(D) electric potentials never exist
142. Calculate the force ex-
in space.
erted between two charged
objects separated by a dis- 146. Two identical positive
tance of 0.6 m. One object point charges, P and Q, sep-
has a charge of-5 C and the arated by a distance r, repel
other has a charge of +2.0 each other with a force F. If r
C. is decreased so that the elec-
(A) -1.5 x 10-11 N trical potential energy of Q
is doubled, what is the force
(B) 2.5 x 10-11 N
of repulsion?
(C) -2.5 x 1011 N
(A) 0.5 F
(D) -7.5 x 10-10 N
(B) F
143. The energy that is stored (C) 2F
in a capacitor (parallel con-
(D) 4F
ducting plates) is in the form
of 147. During a lightning dis-
(A) the current between its plates. charge, 30 C of charge
move through a potential
(B) the space between its plates.
difference of 1.0 ‘ 108 V in
(C) the electric field between its 2.0 ‘ 10-2 s. The energy re-
plates. leased by this lightning bolt
(D) the battery between its plates. is:
(A) 1.5 ‘ 1011 J
144. If it takes 88.3 J of work
to move 0.721 C of charge (B) 3.0 ‘ 109 J
from a positive plate to a (C) 6.0 ‘ 107 J
negative plate, what is the
(D) 3.3 ‘ 106 J
potential difference(voltage)
between the plates? 148. The correct expression for
(A) V = 0 v the energy density is
(B) V = 1.22 v (A) u = 12 εo2 E

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 331

(B) u = 1 E2
2 εo
153. What is a closed path for
electrons to flow through?
(C) u = 12 εo E 2
2
1 εo
(A) static electricity
(D) u = 2 E
(B) circuit
149. What did Millikan use a
uniform electric field be- (C) amperes
tween two parallel plates to (D) none of above
measure?
(A) charge of an electron 154. Points in space that are
(B) electric fields near conductors closer to a more positive re-
gion have a (higher/lower)
(C) the electric potential differ-
electric potential than points
ence caused by X-rays
in space closer to a more
(D) the terminal velocity of a negative region.
charged oil drop
(A) higher
150. Equal charges are given
(B) lower
to two spheres of different
radii. The potential will (C) it doesn’t matter
(A) Depend on the nature of the (D) none of above
materials of the spheres
(B) Be more on the bigger sphere 155. The energy transferred
(C) Be equal on both the spheres per unit charge is called
(D) Be more on the smaller (A) potential difference
sphere
(B) current
151. How do electric field lines
(C) kinetic energy
represent the magnitude of
an electric field? (D) electrical energy
(A) Length of the line
156. Which statements must be
(B) With arrows
true about the surface of a
(C) Density of lines charged conductor in which
(D) Width of lines no charge is moving?

152. Along a line of equipoten- (A) The electric field is zero at the
tial the voltage surface.

(A) Decreases along the line (B) The electric potential of the
surface is zero.
(B) Is the same along the entire
line (C) The electric potential is con-
(C) Is proportional to the area in- stant over the surface.
side the shape created by the line (D) The electric field is constant at
(D) Changes the surface.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
332 Chapter 3. Electricity

157. The distance between two 161. If a current of 2 A passes

charges doubles at the same through a point in 3 s then
time that the charge on each charge passes thatpoint is
also doubles. What hap- (A) 2 C
pens to the electric force?
(B) 1 C

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Doubles
(C) 3 C
(B) Quadruples
(D) 6 C
(C) Cut in half
(D) No charge 162. The energy that is stored
in a capacitor is in the form
158. When lighting happen, 25 of
C charge is transferred from (A) the current between its plates.
could to the ground and
1.25x1010 J energy is pro- (B) the space between its plates.
duced. Calculate the poten- (C) the electric field between its
tial difference within cloud plates.
and the ground in unit Volt (D) the battery between its plates.
(A) 4.00 x 108
163. The magnitude of the
(B) 2.00 x 108 charge of an electron; ap-
(C) 3.00 x 108 proximately 1.602 x 10-19
C.
(D) 5.00 x 108
(A) Charging by Conduction
159. An electric field strength
(B) Elementary Charge
of 10 N C-1 is measured
around a point charge at (C) Equipotential
a distance of 10 cm. What (D) Electrostatics
is the electric field strength
around the same point 164. is stored energy.
charge at a distance of 20 (A) Potential Energy
cm away?
(B) Kinetic Energy
(A) 2.5 N C-1
(C) None of the above
(B) 5.0 N C-1
(D) All of the above
(C) 20 N C-1
165. Consider a parallel plate
(D) 40 N C-1
system with the top plate be-
160. The relation between elec- ing positive and the bottom
tric field and electric poten- negative. If I move a pos-
tial is itive charge parallel to the
top plate what happens to
(A) E = dV.dr
the energy of the charge?
(B) V = dE.dr
(A) No effect
(C) V = − dE
dr (B) Kinetic Energy increases while
(D) E = − dV
dr Potential Energy decreases

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 333

(C) Kinetic Energy decreases 170. At the centre of an electric

while Potential Energy increases dipole
(D) Impossible to tell (A) Electric field and potential
both are zero
166. The SI unit of electric poten- (B) Electric field is zero but poten-
tial is tial is not zero
(A) Coulomb (C) Electric field is not zero but po-
(B) Volts tential is zero

(C) Ampere (D) Neither electric field nor po-

tential is zero
(D) Ohms
171. The plates of a parallel-
167. What is the magnitude of plate capacitor are 2.50mm
the electric field at a position apart, and each carries
that is 1.2 m from a 4.2x10−6 a charge of magnitude
C point charge? Note:k = 80.0nC. The plates are
9.0x109 N.m2 /C2 in vacuum. The elec-
tric field between the
(A) 2.6x104 N/C
plates has a magnitude of
(B) 2.6x10−4 N/C 4.00x106V/m.what is the
capacitance?
(C) 3.5x104 N/C
(A) zero
(D) 3.5x10−4 N/C
(B) same as potential difference
168. What is the electric field, 4.00pF
E, and electric potential, (C) 8.99pF
V, inside a charge hollow
(D) 8pF
sphere?
(E) 8.00x10-9F
(A) E is zero and V is constant
(B) E is zero and V is zero 172. Two points in space are
separated by a distance of
(C) E is constant and V is constant 1 millimeter (0.001 meters).
(D) E is constant and V is zero If one point has a voltage of
100 V and the other has a
169. If a battery provides a voltage of 300 V, what must
high voltage, it can be the electric field strength
between the two points?
(A) do a lot of work over the
course of its lifetime (A) 300 V/m
(B) 200, 000 V/m
(B) do a lot of work on each
charge it encounters (C) 400, 000 V/m
(C) push a lot of charge through (D) 0.000000 V/m
a circuit
173. The rate of flow of electric
(D) last a long time charge is called

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
334 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) Electricity another, the potential dif-

(B) Electric Current ference between these two
points is:
(C) Voltage
(A) 12.5 V
(D) Potential difference

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 20, 000 V
174. One volt is defined as (C) 0.08 V
(A) one coulomb per second (D) depends on the path
(B) one joule per coulomb
179. The electric potential is
(C) an ampere-second
(A) a property of a test charge
(D) none of above
(B) a property of a source charge
175. When a dielectric of di- (C) a property of space
electric constant K is intro-
duced between the plates (D) the energy of a charged ob-
of a parallel plate capacitor, ject
the field at a point between
180. If a proton is moved from
the plates:
a positive plate to a nega-
(A) increases tive plate then it moves to
(B) remains the same the plate with

(C) becomes K times E (A) lower electric potential (V)

(D) becomes E/K (B) higher electric potential (V)

(C) 0 V
176. The process of charging a
neutral object by touching it (D) none of above
with a charged object.
181. In a parallel plate ca-
(A) Elementary Charge pacitor, the capacitance in-
(B) Charging by Conduction creases from 4µ F to 80µ F,
on introducing a dielectric
(C) Grounding medium between the plates.
(D) Charging by Induction What is the dielectric con-
stant of the medium?
177. It is the charge in elec-
tric potential, also known as (A) 0.05
‘voltage’. (B) 20
(A) Electric Difference (C) 40
(B) Difference Potential (D) 80
(C) Electric Potential Difference 182. The quantity electric poten-
(D) none of above tial is defined as the amount
of
178. If 500 J of work are
required to carry a 40-C (A) electric potential energy
charge from one point to (B) force acting upon a charge

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 335

(C) potential energy per charge at point P in an electric field.

(D) force per charge The magnitude of the electric
field intensity at P is
183. Two point charges are sep- (A) 8 X 102 N/C
arated by a distance of 10
(B) 5 N/C
cm. Charge on point A =+9
µ C and charge on point B =- (C) 2 X 10-2 N/C
4 µ C.[k = 9 x 109 Nm2C-2, (D) 50 N/C
1 µ C = 10-6 C]What is the
electric potential energy be- 187. The electric potential at in-
tween these two charges? finite distance from a point
charge is
(A) 3.24 J
(A) zero
(B) 5.54 J
(B) infinity
(C) 7.23 J
(C) none of these
(D) 6.45 J
(D) none of above
184. What is the electric field
strength and electric poten- 188. What happens to the mag-
tial inside a hollow charged nitude of the electric field
conductor sphere of radius when you halve the distance
r and charge q at a dis- to the source charge?
tance of x from the centre of (A) The electric field decreases by
sphere? a factor of two
(A) 0, kq/r (B) The electric field decreases by
(B) 0, kq/x a factor of four

(C) kq/r2, kq/r (C) The electric field increases by

a factor of two
(D) kq/x2, kq/x
(D) The electric field increases by
185. A hollow metal sphere of a factor of four
radius 5 cm is charged so
189. The electric potential dif-
that the potential on its sur-
ference of zero between two
face is 10 V. The Electric field
or more positions in an elec-
at the centre of the sphere is
tric field.
(A) 0 V
(A) Electric field line
(B) 10 V
(B) Equipotential
(C) Same as at point 5 cm away
(C) Voltage
from the surface
(D) Equilibrium position
(D) Same as at point 25 cm away
from the surface 190. The electron volt (eV) is a
unit of
186. An electrostatic force of 2
X 102. newtons is exerted (A) potential
on a charge of 4 coulombs (B) charge

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
336 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) energy and (0, 0, -a/2) respectively.

(D) none of above The work done by the elec-
tric field when another pos-
191. The difference in electrical itive point charge is moved
potential energy between from (-a, 0, 0) to (0, a, 0) is

NARAYAN CHANGDER
two places is called (A) Positive
(A) resistance
(B) Negative
(B) friction
(C) Zero
(C) induction
(D) Depends on the path connect-
(D) voltage ing the initial and final positions.
192. A proton ( q = 1.60 x 10- 196. When two objects have
19 C) moves 10.0 cm on a opposite charge (+ and-),
path parallel to the direction they are:
of a uniform electrical field
of strength 3.0 N/C. What (A) Attracted to each other
is the electrical potential en- (B) Repelled by each other
ergy?
(C) Have no effect on each other
(A) 4.8 x 10-20 J
(D) none of above
(B) 1.6 x 10-20 J
(C) -4.8 x 10-20 J 197. Consider two parallel
(D) -1.6 x 10-20 J plates with potential dif-
ference of 12V between
193. The SI standard unit of them.How much work is
charge; equal to the magni- done on the proton to move
tude of the charge of 6.24 x it from negative plate to pos-
1018 electrons or protons. itive plate?
(A) Grounding (A) 1.9x10−18 J
(B) Capacitor (B) 1.9x10−19 J
(C) Coulomb (C) 12 J
(D) Equipotential (D) 120 J
194. The unit newton per 198. The electric field inside an
coulomb is the same as uncharged metal ball is zero.
(A) Wm-2 If the ball gains a negative
(B) Vm-1 charge, the electric field in-
side the ball will be
(C) Vm-2
(A) greater than zero.
(D) none of above
(B) less than zero.
195. Positive and negative
(C) zero.
point charges of equal mag-
nitude are kept at (0, 0, a/2) (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 337

199. A proton ( q = 1.60 x 10- (C) semiconductor

19 C) moves 0.1 m on a path
(D) none of above
same direction of a uniform
electrical field of strength
3.0 N/C. What is the electri- 204. Electricity is the flow of
cal potential energy? (A) protons
(A) 4.8 x 10-20 J (B) neutrons
(B) 1.6 x 10-20 J
(C) electrons
(C) -4.8 x 10-20 J
(D) none of above
(D) -1.6 x 10-20 J

200. What is the potential dif- 205. What is an electric field?

ference of a uniform electric (A) A space around a charge
field of 5204 N/C separated where a force is exerted on other
by a distance of 0.834m? charged objects.
Hint : V = Ed
(A) 434V (B) A space around a charge
where no force is experienced by
(B) 0.434V other charged objects.
(C) 43.4V
(C) A space around a charge
(D) 4340V where charged particles are ion-
ized.
201. The radius of a soap bub-
ble whose potential is 16V is (D) A space around a charge
doubled. The new potential where charged particles turn into
of the bubble will be plasma.
(A) 8V
206. Which conditions is the
(B) 2V
highest potential energy?
(C) 4V
(A) Different charge, far apart
(D) 16V
(B) Same charge, far apart
202. The electric potential at the
points equidistant from +Q (C) Different charge, stay close
have (D) Same charge, stay close
(A) same magnitude
(B) zero 207. The electric field between
the plates of a parallel plate
(C) none of these capacitor is
(D) none of above
(A) E = σ
εo
203. The earth is a good of
(B) E = σ
electricity. 2εo

(A) conductor (C) E = σ εo

(B) insulator (D) E = 0

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
338 Chapter 3. Electricity

208. An electron volt is (C) electric potential energy

(A) the force acting on an electron (D) electric force
in a field of 1 N/C
212. Planet N has a gravita-
(B) the force required to move an tional potential-V at its sur-
electron 1 meter

NARAYAN CHANGDER
face. Planet M has dou-
(C) the energy gained by an elec- ble the density and double
tron in moving through a potential the radius of planet N. Both
difference of 1 volt planets are spherical and
have uniform density. What
(D) the energy needed to move an
is the gravitational potential
electron through 1 meter in any
at the surface of planet M?
electric field
(A) -16V
209. Which one of the follow-
(B) -8V
ing statements is correct?
An electron follows a circu- (C) -4V
lar path when it is moving (D) -0.2V
at right angles to
213. potential energy per unit
(A) a uniform magnetic field.
charge
(B) a uniform electric field. (A) electric potential energy
(C) uniform electric and magnetic (B) electron-volt
fields which are perpendicular.
(C) electric potential
(D) uniform electric and magnetic
fields which are in opposite direc- (D) electric potential difference
tions. 214. The SI derived unit of po-
210. A hollow metal sphere of tential difference is the
radius 5 cm is charged so (A) ohm
that the potential on its sur- (B) volt
face is 10 V. The potential at
(C) joule
the centre of the sphere is
(D) coulomb
(A) 0 V
(B) 10 V 215. What is the importance of
the potential difference in
(C) Same as at point 5 cm away
practical settings?
from the surface
(A) It is the charge driving effect
(D) Same as at point 25 cm away
that eventually causes current.
from the surface
(B) The amount of 1 coulomb of
211. The work required to charge per unit of potential en-
move a charge from infin- ergy
ity to a point in an electric (C) The number of volts per
field is called coulomb
(A) electric field strength (D) The amount of electric poten-
(B) electric potential tial energy per volt

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 339

216. How much does a charge’s (A) 45 V

electric potential energy (B) 22.5 V
change as it is moved along
a line of equipotential? (C) 15 V
(A) It depends on the line (D) 5 V
(B) It increases 221. If two negative charges
(C) It decreases are held close together and
then released, the charges
(D) The energy does not change will
along the line of equipotential
(A) accelerate toward each other
217. Which two particles are at- (B) accelerate away from each
tracted to each other? other
(A) Two neutrons (C) not move
(B) A proton and an electron (D) move at a constant speed
(C) Two protons away from each other
(D) An electron and a neutron 222. A 5-C charge is located
218. When you draw the direc- near a positively charged
tion of the electric field you sphere so that it has 50 J of
always use a test charge electric potential energy. Its
electric potential is
(A) positive
(A) 2 V.
(B) negative
(B) 5 V.
(C) neutral
(C) 10 V.
(D) radioactive
(D) 20 V
219. Electric field lines between
two oppositely charged par- 223. Two charges separated by
allel metal plates will be .. a distance of 1 meter exert
a 20-N force on each other.
(A) straight lines, randomly If the charges are pulled to a
spaced 2 meter separation distance,
(B) straight lines, evenly spaced the force on each charge will
be
(C) curved lines grouped together
in small bunches. randomly (A) 10 N
spaced. (B) 5 N
(D) d. curved lines, evenly (C) 2.5 N
spaced. e. curved lines,
(D) 40 N
220. When a charge of 3 C
is moved from infinity to a 224. Equipotential surfaces in
point X in an electric field, an electric field are always
the work done is 15 J. What
is the electric potential at X? (A) spherical

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
340 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) perpendicular to the electric (C) Distance

lines of force (D) Mass
(C) closed surface
229. The dielectric constant is
(D) none of above the

NARAYAN CHANGDER
225. As an electric field be- (A) ratio of permittivity of the
comes stronger, the field medium to permittivity of free
lines should be drawn space.
(A) closer together (B) ratio of force between two
(B) farther apart charges placed in vacuum to force
between them when placed in a
(C) thicker medium.
(D) thinner (C) ratio of capacitance of a ca-
226. If the capacitor is DISCON- pacitor with a dielectric between
NECTED from the battery, the plates to capacitance when
what remains constant if the vacuum is there between the
distance of separation of the plates.
metal plates of the capacitor (D) All of the above
is increased?
230. The equivalent capaci-
(A) Charge stored in the capacitor tance of three capacitors
(B) Voltage across the plates of with capacitance C1 , C2 and C3
the capacitor connected in series is
(C) Capacitance (A) C = C1 +C2 +C3
(D) Energy of the capacitor (B) 1
C = C11 + C12 + C13

227. A 4.0-g bead carries a (C) C = C11 + C12 + C13

charge of 20 µ C. The bead
(D) 1
= C11 × C12 × C13
is accelerated from rest C

through a potential differ- 231. The potential difference

ence V, and afterward the between the terminals of a
bead is moving at 2.0 m/s. connection wire is
What is the magnitude of
the potential difference V? (A) Zero

(A) 400 V (B) greater than zero

(B) 200 V (C) Less than zero

(C) 400 kV (D) infinity

(D) 800 kV 232. a property of the space

around a charged object,
228. What variable do meters where the effect of its
represent? charge can be felt by other
(A) Electrostatic Charge objects
(B) Force (A) Electric Field Line

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 341

(B) Electrostatics 236. A 900 pF capacitor is

charged by a 100 V battery.
(C) Electric Field
How much electrostatic en-
(D) Electroscope ergy is stored by the capaci-
tor?
233. The electric field inten-
(A) 4.5x10-6 J
sity between two oppositely
charged parallel plates (B) 4.5x10-6 eV
(A) varies inversely as the distance (C) 4.5x10-5 J
(B) varies as the square of the dis- (D) 4.5x10-7J
tance
237. Which is not the equation
(C) is uniform of finding the electrical po-
(D) none of above tential.
(A) V = U/q
234. from question 20:The
plates of a parallel-plate ca- (B) V = PE/q
pacitor are 2.50mm apart, (C) V= Qr/PE
and each carries a charge
(D) none of above
of magnitude 80.0nC. The
plates are in vacuum. The 238. The device which transfers
electric field between the energy to electric charges in
plates has a magnitude of a circuit is
4.00x106V/m.What is the
area of each plates? (A) battery

(A) 2.26x10-3cm2 (B) voltmeter

(B) 2.26x10-3m2 (C) Ammeter

(D) Electric switch
(C) 22.6m2
(D) 2.26cm2 239. What is the potential dif-
ference between the two
(E) none of the above
ends of a connecting wire?
235. Which one of the fol- (A) Zero
lowing statements is cor- (B) 1 V
rect? The force between two
charged particles (C) Infinity

(A) is always attractive (D) none of above

(B) can be measured in C2 F-1 m- 240. One way to think about

1 electric potential is
(C) is directly proportional to the (A) Electric potential is the electric
distance between them power per unit charge
(D) is independent of the magni- (B) Electric potential is the electric
tude of the charges potential energy per unit charge.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
342 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) Electric potential energy is the 245. The work needed to move
electric field strength per unit a positive test charge from
charge one point to another, di-
(D) Electric potential is the electric vided by the magnitude of
force per unit charge the test charge; also called

NARAYAN CHANGDER
potential difference.
241. Approximately how much (A) Electric Potential Difference
force would be generated
by two charged objects held (B) Electroscope
2 m apart, if q1 has a (C) Electric Field Line
charge of 3.0 C and q2 has
(D) Electric Field
a charge of 4.0 C?
(A) 0.5 N 246. The process of charging an
(B) 150 N object without touching it,
which can be accomplished
(C) 270 N by bringing a charged ob-
(D) 300 N ject close to a neutral ob-
ject, causing a separation
242. Which quantity and unit of charges, then separating
are correctly paired? the object to be charged,
(A) electric field strength and N/C trapping opposite but equal
(B) electricity and Coulombs charges.
(C) electrostatic force and elec- (A) Charging by Conduction
trons (B) Grounding
(D) electric field strength and E (C) Charging by Induction
243. How much work is done (D) Capacitance
in moving a charge of 2
Coulomb across two points 247. What is the Electric Poten-
having a potential differ- tial Energy of a 6.7 x 109
ence of 12 Volt C charge with an Electric Po-
tential of 240 V?
(A) 14 J
(A) 1.61 x 1012 J
(B) 24 J
(B) 2.42 x 1012 J
(C) 6 J
(C) 1.34 x 1011 J
(D) 10 J
(D) 2.7 x 1011 J
244. Which of the following is
not the correct relation for 248. What is the SI unit for
the dielectric constant (κ ) charge?
(A) κ = Fo
F (A) Joules
(B) C
κ = Co (B) Coulombs
(C) κ = CCo (C) Newtons
(D) κ = εεmo (D) Meters

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.2 Electric potential 343

249. What is the correct equa- (C) Draw a few field lines, spaced
tion? far apart
(A) potential difference = charge (D) Draw straight lines coming
/ time taken out of a charge
(B) potential difference = work 254. The electric potential en-
done / charge ergy of a system of two pos-
(C) potential difference = work itive point charges of 1 mi-
done / time taken cro C each placed in air 1m
apart is:
(D) potential difference = time
taken / charge (A) 9 x 103 J
(B) 9 x 109 J
250. The Study of electric
charges that can be col- (C) 9 x 10-3 J
lected and held in one place (D) 9 x 10-3eV
(A) Electrostatics
255. Calculate the potential dif-
(B) Insulators ference if the work done by
(C) Electroscope 10 coulombs of charge is 50
joules
(D) Coulomb’s Law
(A) 500 V
251. Where an electric field line (B) 5 V
crosses an equipotential sur-
face, the angle between the (C) 0.5 V
field line and the equipoten- (D) none of above
tial is
256. Two charges separated by
(A) zero a distance of 1 meter exert
(B) between zero and 90 deg a 2-N force on each other.
(C) 90 deg If the magnitude of each
charge is doubled, the force
(D) either zero or 90 deg on each charge is
252. The earth has a plenty of (A) 4 N
(B) 2 N
(A) free neutrons (C) 8 N
(B) free protons (D) .5 N
(C) free electrons
257. When a proton is acceler-
(D) none of above ated through 1V, then its ki-
netic energy will be
253. How would you draw a
strong electric field? (A) 1.6eV

(A) Draw two charges (B) 13.6eV

(B) Draw lots of field lines, spaced (C) 1eV

close together (D) 0.54eV

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 344 Chapter 3. Electricity

258. Electric Field strength de- (D) none of above

pends on what
262. What is the electric po-
(A) charge tential from a 0.00001
(B) distance Coulomb charge a distance
of 5 meters away?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) charge and distance
(D) electric force (A) 5 V
(B) 1.6x10−19 V
259. The SI unit for electric po-
tential is the (C) 180, 000 V
(A) Volen (D) 500, 000 V
(B) Vespa 263. Two point charges are sep-
(C) Volt arated by a distance of
0.008 m. Charge on point
(D) Valspar
A =-8 C and charge on point
260. States that the force be- B =-7 C.[k = 9 x 109 Nm2C-
tween two point charges 2]What is the electric
varies directly with the prod-
264. V = 3x2 the electric field is:
uct of their charge and in-
versely with the square of (A) -6x
the distance between them. (B) 6x
(A) Capacitance (C) −x3
(B) Electroscope (D) x3
(C) Coulomb
265. Angle between equipoten-
(D) Coulomb’s Law tial surface and lines of
261. What is the unit for resis- force is
tance? (A) 0
(A) Volts (B) 180
(B) Amperes (C) 90
(C) Ohms (D) 45

3.3 Electric potential difference

1. What is the rule for voltage 2. Resistance is a ratio of
in a parallel circuit? (A) V:l
(A) stays the same (B) V:C
(B) adds up (C) V:Q
(C) inverse of the sum of the recip- (D) I:t
rocals
3. If I = 2 A and R = 8 Ohms, V
(D) none of above =?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.3 Electric potential difference 345

(A) 4 V (D) 240 J

(B) 16 V 8. Current of 0.5 A flows
(C) 0.25 V through a bulb for 5 min-
utes. Calculate the number
(D) 10 V
of electrical charge flows.
4. An electron is sitting 10 cm (A) 1.5 C
away from a small object
(B) 2.5 C
of charge-5 micro-coulombs.
What is the strength of the (C) 15 C
electric field at this point? (D) 150 C
(A) 720 N/C 9. The thinner wire has low re-
(B) 3100 N/C sistance because electric
charges can flow throuh it.
(C) 1800 N/C
(A) Same number
(D) 4500 N/C
(B) Less
5. What is the electric po- (C) More
tential energy of an elec-
tron located 5.3x10−11 m from (D) none of above
the proton in a hydrogen 10. A proton is moved 5 cm
atom? IF YOU KNOW q = closer to the negative plate
1.6x10−19C, K = 9X109 N.m2 /c2 in an oppositely charged
(A) −8.2x10−8 J parallel plate arrangement.
Ignoring any changes to
(B) −4.3x10−18 J
gravitational energy, find
(C) −2.2x10−18 J the work done in moving
(D) −1.6x10−19 J the proton.
(A) 1.92x10−18 J
6. The unit for resistance is
(B) −4.8x10−18 J
(A) Watts
(C) −1.92x10−18 J
(B) Ohms
(D) 4.8x10−18 J
(C) Amperes
11. What is the shape of the
(D) Volts
electric field between two
7. A tiny sphere carrying a flat charged plates.
charge of 6.5x10−6 C sits in (A) A uniform field between the
an electric field, at a point plates with a curved field at the
where the electric potential ends.
is 240 V relative to ground.
(B) A uniform field between the
What is the sphere’s poten-
plates.
tial energy?
(C) A spherical field increasing to-
(A) 2.7x10−8 J wards infinity.
(B) 6.5x10−6 J (D) A spherical field decreasing
(C) 1.6x10−3 J towards infinity.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
346 Chapter 3. Electricity

12. Factors affecting resistance 17. The electric potential at a

of the constantan wire ex- distance of 4 m from a cer-
cept tain point charge is 200 V .
(A) Temperature What is the potential at a dis-
tance of 2 m from the same
(B) Length

NARAYAN CHANGDER
charge?
(C) Cross-sectional area
(A) 50 V
(D) Type of material
(B) 600 V
(E) Current
(C) 200 V
13. The distance between par- (D) 400 V
allel conducting plates is d.
A charge q is placed near 18. If 30 C of electrical charge
the positive plates. What flows through a wire in 2
is the gain in kinetic en- minutes. Calculate the cur-
ergy on reaching the nega- rent flows.
tive plate? (A) 0.15 A
(A) Vdq (B) 0.25 A
(B) Vq/d (C) 1.5 A
(C) Vq (D) 2.5 A
(D) dq/V
19. How must a voltmeter be
14. What is a capacitor? connected?
(A) A device for storing energy. (A) In series
(B) A device for storing p.d. (B) In parallel
(C) A device for storing charge. (C) To a power supply
(D) A device for storing capaci- (D) none of above
tance.
20. A 30.0 V battery is con-
15. What is the SI, base unit for nected to a resistor of 120
capacitance ohms. Calculate the current
(A) [F] flow.
(B) [s4A2kg-1m-2] (A) 3600 A
(C) [CV-1] (B) 0.25 A
(D) [CV] (C) 4.0 A
16. Potential difference is ac- (D) 2.5 A
quired from the movement
21. A Charging system produc-
of a charge from
ing 14.5 Volts with a current
(A) high to low energy flow of 43.5 Amps, what is
(B) low to high energy the circuit resistance
(C) positive to negative (A) 58 Amps
(D) none of the above (B) 0.33 Amps

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.3 Electric potential difference 347

(C) 13 Amps (B) Potential diffrence

(D) 1 Amp (C) Resistance
22. Equipotential lines sur- (D) Power
rounding an isolated point
charge will be 27. If temperature getting
higher, resistance of conduc-
(A) spherical
tor become
(B) straight lines coming from the
(A) Unchange
particles center.
(C) oblong (B) Increase

(D) parallel to the electric field (C) Decrease

(D) none of above
23. Which of the formulae is
correct about Ohm’s Law? 28. It is work done to move a
(A) V = IR unit of electrical charge from
(B) V =QR one point to another point in
electric field. This refer to
(C) VI = R
(A) Current
(D) I = QR
(B) Potential difference
24. Which of these is unneces-
sary in order to find the volt- (C) Resistance
age created by an isolated (D) Power
point charge?
(A) distance from the point 29. It is the work done to move
charge (r) a unit of electrical charge
from one point to another
(B) couloumb’s constant (k) point in electric field. This is
(C) the charge getting effected by referred to as
the force created by the potential
(A) Current
difference (q)
(B) Potential difference
(D) the charge creating the elec-
tric field supplying the force(Q) (C) Resistance

25. It is a rate of electrical (D) Power

charge flows. This refers to
30. The radius of a soap bub-
(A) Current ble whose potential is 16 V
(B) Potential diffrence is doubled. The new poten-
tial of the bubble will be
(C) Resistance
(D) Power (A) 8 V
(B) 4 V
26. This is a rate of electrical
charge flow. (C) 2 V
(A) Current (D) 16 V

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
348 Chapter 3. Electricity

31. The following are factors af- (B) Work done is constant
fecting capacitance, except. (C) No work is done
(A) Dielectric in between the (D) Work is done by the charge
metal plates
(B) Area of the metal plates 36. If V = 10 V and R = 2 Ohms,

NARAYAN CHANGDER
I =?
(C) Distance of separation of the
metal plates (A) 0.2 A

(D) Voltage across the metal (B) 12 A

plates (C) 5 A

32. The symbol for electric cur- (D) 20 A

rent is 37. It refers to the amount of
(A) I charge flowing in a conduc-
(B) V tor per unit time

(C) R (A) Potential Difference

(D) A (B) Electric Current

(C) Resistance
33. The ratio of potential differ-
ence to current gives a direct (D) Electric Power
linear relation in 38. Equipotential lines always
(A) Coulomb’s Law run to electric field lines.
(B) Newton’s 1st Law (A) parallel
(C) Kepler’s Law (B) perpendicular
(D) Ohm’s Law (C) asymmetrically

34. Which of the following (D) in the opposite direction

could be used to increase 39. The formula for resistance is
the capacitance of a capaci-
tor?
(A) R = I/V
(A) Increase the separation be-
tween each metal plate. (B) R = 1/VI

(B) decrease the area of the plate (C) R = V/I

(C) decrease the voltage (D) R = VI

(D) Increase the permitivitty of the 40. Which of the following

dielectric thus, directly decreasing statements is false about
voltage electric field lines

35. If a unit positive charge is (A) electric field lines cannot cross
taken from one point to an- (B) electric field lines point away
other over an equipotential from positive charge
surface, then (C) electric field lines are always
(A) Work is done on the charge straight lines

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.3 Electric potential difference 349

(D) electric field lines show how a (A) Increases

proton would move in an electric (B) Decreases
field
(C) Remains the same
41. state that the current (D) none of above
flowing through an ohmic
conductor is directly propor- 45. Where can an electric field
tional to the potential dif- be found?
ference across its end, pro- (A) below a force field
vided that its temperature
and the other physical con- (B) in a gravitational field
ditions remain constant. (C) in the space surrounding a
(A) Pressure Law charged object

(B) Ohm’ s Law (D) outside of a magnetic field

(C) Charles Law 46. If 4µ F and 2µ F capacitors

(D) Ohmic Law are connected in series, the
total capacitance is
42. The capacitance of a (A) 1.33µ F
parallel-plate capacitor is:
(B) 0.75µ F
(A) directly proportional to the
(C) 6µ F
plate area
(D) 2µ F
(B) inversely proportional to the
charge stored 47. An electron is sitting 10 cm
(C) independent of any material away from a small object
inserted between the plates of charge-5 micro-coulombs.
What is the force the elec-
(D) directly proportional to the po-
tron experiences?
tential difference of the plates
(A) 7.2x10−16 N, repulsive
43. During a lightning dis-
(B) 4.5x10−20 , attractive
charge, 30 C of charge
move through a potential (C) 7.2x10−16 N, attractive
difference of 1.0 x 108 V. (D) 4.5x10−20 , repulsive
The energy released by this
lightning bolt is: 48. What is the function of rheo-
stat?
(A) 1.5 ‘ 1011 J
(A) To control the resistance in the
(B) 3.0 ‘ 109 J
circuit
(C) 6.0 ‘ 107 J
(B) To control the potential differ-
(D) 3.3 ‘ 106 J ence in the circuit

44. What happens to capaci- (C) To control the current in the cir-
tance if you increase the dis- cuit
tance of separation of the (D) To control the power in the cir-
metal plates? cuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 350 Chapter 3. Electricity

49. The unit of current is 53. If the parallel conducting

plates are connected to a po-
(A) Ampere
tential difference of V and
(B) Ohm the separation of the plate
is d what is the electric field
(C) Volts

NARAYAN CHANGDER
strength across the plate?
(D) Watts Thickness of each plate is x.
(A) Vd
50. The unit for potential differ-
ence is (B) Vx

(A) Ohms (C) V/d

(D) V/x
(B) Volts
(C) Watts 54. Potential difference is di-
rectly proportional to cur-
(D) Amperes rent flows in conductor un-
der standard tempertaure
51. If the dielectric increases, and pressure.This refer to
what happens to the capaci-
tance? (A) Current
(B) Potential difference
(A) increases
(C) Resistance
(B) decreases
(D) Ohm’s Law
(C) stays the same
55. An electron is sitting 10 cm
(D) none of above
away from a small object
of charge-5 micro-coulombs.
52. If V = 12 V and I = 6 A, R
What is the electric potential
=?
at that distance?
(A) 18 Ohms (A) 200 V
(B) 72 Ohms (B) 7.2 x 10−17 J
(C) 0.5 Ohms (C) 450 J/C
(D) 2 Ohms (D) 1.8 x 10−17 J

3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance

1. Power is measured in? measurement are used for
electric current?
(A) Volts
(B) Amps (A) symbol:A; unit:I
(C) Ohms (B) symbol:I; unit:C
(D) Watts (C) symbol:C; unit:A
2. Which symbol and unit of (D) symbol:I; unit:A

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 351

3. The current in an appliance 7. How much time is required

is 3 A and the voltage dif- for 4 C of charge to flow
ference is 120 V. How much through a wire carrying a
power is being supplied to current of 2 A?
the appliance?
(A) 0.5 s
(A) 10000 w
(B) 2 s
(B) 220 w
(C) 8 s
(C) 420 w
(D) 10 s
(D) 360 w
8. This measures the speed of
4. If there is a 4 ohm resistor, 6 the current in a circuit
ohm resistor, and a 8 ohm
(A) voltage
resistor in a parallel circuit,
what is the total resistance? (B) ammeter
(A) 6.43333333 (C) switch
(B) 1.8461538 (D) resistance
(C) 0.3246777777
9. What word means how fast
(D) 1.5321111111 the electrons flow.

5. Increasing the distance be- (A) Current

tween two charges by a fac- (B) Voltage
tor of 9 has what effect on
(C) Resistance
the force?
(D) Power
(A) Increases force by a factor of
9
10. The rate at which energy is
(B) Decreases force by a factor of converted from one form to
9 another
(C) Increases force by a factor of (A) power
81
(B) voltage
(D) Decreases force by a factor of
(C) current
81
(D) none
6. What is the voltage of a cir-
cuit with 4 ohms of resis- 11. A lamp has a current of 2
tance and 3 amps of cur- amps at 6 volts. The resis-
rent? V = I x R tance of the lamp must be
(A) 12 V (A) 1.5 ohms
(B) 21 V (B) 6 ohms
(C) 4/3 V (C) 3 ohms
(D) 3/4 V (D) 12 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
352 Chapter 3. Electricity

12. The unit for electric charge (B) decrease

is ? (C) stay the same
(A) Coulomb (D) none of above
(B) Newtons
17. What is a example of a in-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Kilogram sulator?
(D) Seconds (A) metal
13. If voltage remains the same (B) rubber
and the resistance in a cir- (C) water
cuit decreases, the electric
current (D) none of above
(A) increases 18. The charge of protons and
(B) decreases electrons have a amount
of charge and signs.
(C) stays the same
(A) same, different
(D) none of above
(B) same, same
14. If voltage in a circuit is con-
(C) different, same
stant, the current can be
cut to half of its original (D) different, different
value by changing the resis-
19. A 12 volt battery pushes
tance to its original value.
0.2 amps of current through
Which best completes the
a resistor, what is the resis-
statement?
tance?
(A) one-fourth
(A) 2.4 ohm
(B) one-half
(B) 60 ohm
(C) two times
(C) 11.8 ohm
(D) four times
(D) 12.2 ohm
15. According to Ohm’s Law, if
20. What unit is used to mea-
you were to double the volt-
sure resistance?
age and double the resis-
tance, what would happen (A) Ohms
to the flow of current? (B) Omega
(A) It would stay the same (C) Volts
(B) It would increase 2x (D) Amps
(C) It would increase 4x
21. Which best describes a par-
(D) It would decrease 2x allel circuit?
16. If voltage decrease (but re- (A) Electricity flows along one
sistance stays the same), pathway.
current will (B) The flow of electricity comes
(A) increase from one source.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 353

(C) Electricity flows along more 26. With the engine running the
than one pathway. charging system produces
(D) The flow of electricity comes 14.5 Volts what would the
from more than one source. current flow be if a re-
sistance of 6 Ohms was
22. How many volts would we present
need to produce a current (A) 2.41 Ohms
flow of 8.2 amps through a
(B) 2.52 Ohms
6.5 ohm resistor?
(C) 2.1 Ohms
(A) 14.7 volts
(D) 0.3333 Ohms
(B) 1.7 volts
(C) 1.3 volts 27. Three identical resistors of
46 ohms each are connected
(D) 53.3 volts
in parallel. If the circuit has
23. If the total current in a par- a battery of 12 V, what is
allel circuit is 2601A and all the total current in the cir-
three resistors are identical, cuit?
what is the current through (A) 0.08696 A
R3 if you have a voltage of (B) 0.261 A
12?
(C) 0.7826 A
(A) 867.0
(D) 3.833 A
(B) 205.0
(C) 354.0 28. Voltage divided by Current
equals ? (V / I =? )
(D) 976.0
(A) Current
24. Volt battery with two resis- (B) Power
tors in series 3 Ohms & 4
Ohms what would the cur- (C) Resistance
rent draw be (D) Watts
(A) 2.1 29. if the resistivity of copper is
(B) 1.71 Amps 1.7∗10−8 , how much is its con-
ductivity?
(C) 2.4 Amps
(A) 0.6 ∗ 108
(D) 15 Amps
(B) 0.6 ∗ 10−8
25. What is the current through
(C) 1.7 ∗ 10(−8)
a 4V bulb with a power of
36W? (D) none of above
(A) 9W 30. How much voltage would
(B) 9A be necessary to generate 10
amps of current in a circuit
(C) 60V that has 5 ohms of resis-
(D) 60A tance?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
354 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) 0.5 V (A) .01mA

(B) 2 V (B) 10mA
(C) 5 V (C) 1mA
(D) 50 V (D) .10mA

NARAYAN CHANGDER
31. Aretha measures a circuit at 36. Batteries convert what type
110 V and has a resistance of energy into electricity?
of 240 . Using Ohm’s law, (A) Chemical energy
what can she calculate for (B) Mechanical energy
the circuit?
(C) Both
(A) voltage
(D) Kinetic energy
(B) ohms
37. If I = .25 & V = 110, then P
(C) resistance
=
(D) current
(A) 440 Watts
32. Electrically neutral particles (B) 2.2727 m Watts
(A) repel (C) 27.5 Watts
(B) attract (D) 250 Watts
(C) have no force 38. What is the unit of electric
(D) none of above potential difference?
(A) Coulomb
33. The unit that measures a
battery’s strength is called (B) joule

(A) Voltage (C) volt

(B) Current (D) watt

(C) Amps 39. Choose all that are true:If

you added more light bulbs
(D) Ohms
to an electric circuit, it would
34. What is the unit of measure- (A) increase the voltage.
ment for Power? (B) decrease the voltage.
(A) Joules (C) increase the current.
(B) Newtons (D) decrease the current.
(C) Watts (E) increase the resistance.
(D) Meters
40. What does Volts/Current
35. In a two branch parallel cir- (V/I) equal?
cuit, with a consent 10 Volts (A) Resitance
and one 2K Ohm Resistor on (B) Voltage
each branch, what would
be the current through each (C) Electricity
resistor? (D) Power

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 355

41. Which equation would you 46. Which is the right form of
use to solve for voltage? Ohm’s Law?
(A) V = I/R (A) V=I/R
(B) V = PR (B) V=R/I
(C) V = CI (C) I=V/R
(D) V = IR (D) I=R/V
(E) V = R/I
47. What is the unit for measur-
42. what is the current in a ing the electric current?
toaster of 1200 ohms when
(A) Volt
hooked up to a 100 v out-
let? (B) Coulomb
(A) 0.8333 (C) Amps
(B) 0.0833 (D) Ohms
(C) 0.3333
48. How many Volts would we
(D) 0.0333 need to produce a current
43. The mathematical relation- flow of 8 Amps through a 6
ship among voltage, cur- Ohm resistor? What are the
rent, and resistance is called givens and unknown?
(A) I=8, P=6, V=?
(A) Faraday’s Law (B) R=8, I=6, V=?
(B) Tesla’s Law (C) I=8, R=6, V=?
(C) Edison’s Law (D) P=8, R=6, V=?
(D) Ohm’s Law
49. If the potential difference is
44. If voltage increases, what 12 volts and the resistance
happens to wattage is 5 ohms, what is the cur-
(power)? rent?
(A) decreases (A) 2.4 A
(B) stays the same (B) 60 A
(C) increases
(C) 0.417 A
(D) changes to current
(D) 17 A
45. Which variable in Ohm’s
law represents the flow of 50. Electrostatic force F is di-
electrons? rectly proportional to:

(A) resistance (A) r2 (distance squared)

(B) current (B) q1
(C) voltage (C) q2
(D) none of above (D) both q1 and q2

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
356 Chapter 3. Electricity

51. What is the number value (B) metal

for green in the color code (C) rubber
chart?
(D) rock
(A) 6
57. Voltage divided by Cur-
(B) 4

NARAYAN CHANGDER
rent(V / I)
(C) 2
(A) Current
(D) 5
(B) Power
52. What is Power? (C) Resistance
(A) Shadow Warrior 2 OST (D) Watts
(B) Work divided by Time 58. According to Ohm’s Law,
(C) Work multiplied by Time voltage and current are di-
rectly proportional. There-
(D) of Castle Grayskull
fore, resistance and current
53. If a resistor is added in a are
SERIES circuit, what happens (A) directly proportional
to the voltage in each resis-
(B) inversely proportional
tor?
(C) not related
(A) Increases
(D) none of above
(B) Decreases
(C) Remains the same 59. A kilowatt is
(A) 1000 Amps
(D) none of above
(B) 1000 watts
54. What is the unit for poten-
(C) 1000 volts
tial difference?
(D) none
(A) Ohm
(B) Volt 60. Which variable in Ohm’s
law represents the flow of
(C) Watt electrons (much like the flow
(D) Ampere of a river)?

55. In the illustration of the (A) resistance

dam, what doe the water (B) current
behind the dam represent? (C) voltage
(A) Voltage (D) none of above
(B) Potential Difference
61. An overhead wire has a po-
(C) EMF tential difference of 30, 000
(D) Potential Energy volts. If the current flowing
through the wire is 1, 000
56. What is a example of a con- amperes, what is the resis-
ductor? tance of the wire?
(A) wood (A) 0.033 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 357

(B) 30 ohms 66. What is the charge of an

electron?
(C) 3.0x107 ohms
(A) Positive
(D) 3.0x108 ohms
(B) Negative
62. The ability of a metal to (C) Neutral
allow heat or electricity to
pass through it. (D) none of above
(A) conductivity 67. What does the letter ‘I’
(B) insulator stand for in Ohm’s Law?

(C) mass (A) Resistance

(D) density (B) Inductance

(C) Capacitance
63. Voltage divided by resis-
(D) Voltage
tance(V/R) is
(E) Current
(A) Current
(B) Power 68. What is the current through
a 11V bulb with a power of
(C) Ohms 99W?
(D) Watts (A) 9W
64. A 9V battery powering a re- (B) 9A
mote control car has a resis- (C) 60V
tance of 3 ohms. How much
current is flowing through (D) 60A
the car?
69. DC stands for and is used
(A) 6A in batteries.
(B) 27A (A) Distant Current
(C) 3A (B) Don’t Current
(D) 12A (C) Direct Current
(D) Distributed current
65. In an experiment you hold
your voltage constant and 70. Circuit A is connected with
change your resistance to fill 10 cm wires. Circuit B is con-
out a chart on current. The nected with 5 cm wires. re-
dependent variable would sistance is greater in:
be
(A) Circuit A
(A) number of trials
(B) Circuit B
(B) resistance
(C) length of wires does not im-
(C) current pact resistance
(D) voltage (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
358 Chapter 3. Electricity

71. What is the voltage of a cir- 76. A phone charger that pro-
cuit with 4 ohms of resis- vides a current of 1.5A and
tance and 3 amps of cur- has 6 ohms of resistance
rent? would be equivalent to us-
(A) 12 V ing a battery of how many

NARAYAN CHANGDER
volts?
(B) 21 V
(A) 9V
(C) 4/3 V
(B) 7.5V
(D) 3/4 V
(C) 3V
72. Which variable in Ohm’s (D) 4V
law is like friction that slows
down the flow of electrons? 77. A device that uses electric
(A) resistance current for a specific reason.
(B) current (A) wire
(C) voltage (B) battery
(D) none of above (C) resistor

73. which of the following is (D) switch

commonly used to measure
78. An object with the same
electrical energy consump-
amount of positive and neg-
tion?
ative charge is called:
(A) Amps
(A) statically charged
(B) Volts
(B) negatively charged
(C) Kilowatt-Hours
(C) neutral
(D) Ohms
(D) positively charged
74. Which variable in Ohm’s
law is responsible for push- 79. What is the power of a 3V
ing/forcing the electrons to bulb with 20A through it?
move? (A) 100W
(A) resistance (B) 100V
(B) current (C) 60W
(C) voltage (D) 60A
(D) none of above
80. Materials that conduct elec-
75. What is the Unit of Charge tricity with zero resistance
(A) Ohm (A) Conductors
(B) Coulomb (B) Semiconductors
(C) Ampere (C) Superconductors
(D) Volt (D) Insulators

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 359

81. If the battery produced 12.6 (C) 0.0067 W

Volts what would be the cur-
(D) 0.67 W
rent flow for a 6 Ohm resis-
tor? (V=IR, I=V/R, R=V/I)
87. What types of charges at-
(A) 2.1 Amps tract?
(B) 2.4 Amps (A) Positive and Positive
(C) 1.71 Amps
(B) Positive and Neutral
(D) 15 Amps
(C) Negative and Neutral
82. in Engineering notation.
(D) Positive and Negative
(A) 12H
(B) 12K 88. Something electricity can’t
move through is called a(n)
(C) 1.2M
(D) 1.2K
(A) conductor
83. Which one is an insulator?
(B) wire
(A) Silver
(C) shoe
(B) Copper
(C) Mechanical pencil (D) insulator

(D) plastic 89. What is the current flowing

84. A device that allows current into a microwave oven that
to flow through it in only requires 700 W of power if
one direction is known as a: the voltage difference is 120
V?
(A) Motor
(A) 4.3A
(B) Switch
(C) Diode (B) 6.3 A

(D) none of above (C) 5.83 A

85. Simple circuits must contain (D) none

, , and
90. If doubling the voltage
(A) source, load, switch across a resistor doubles the
(B) device, source, conductor current through the resistor,
(C) source, conductor, load then

(D) device, conductor, load (A) The resistor value decreased

86. What is the power of a 130 (B) The resistor value did not
V bulb with 0.87 A through change
it? (C) The resistor value increased
(A) 113 W (D) It is impossible to determine
(B) 149 W the change in the resistor value

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
360 Chapter 3. Electricity

91. What would happen if in (B) potential difference

a circuit, the resistance in-
(C) difference in elevation
creases but the voltage
stays the same? (D) none of above
(A) The current would decrease

NARAYAN CHANGDER
96. A home’s central air con-
(B) The current would increase ditioner has a power rat-
(C) The voltage would decrease ing of 4kW. The air con-
(D) The voltage would increase ditioner runs 8 hours a
day (201, 600 seconds per
92. If resistivity of iron is 1.6 ∗ week). How much energy
10−8 , how much is the resis- in JOULES does it use per
tance of a wound wire resis- week?
tor made by a wire 1m long
(A) 806, 400J
and area 1mm2 ?
(A) 1.6 ∗ 10−2 (B) 806, 400, 000J
(B) 1.6 ∗ 10−14 (C) 32J
(C) 1.6 ∗ 10−8 (D) 6, 451, 200J
(D) none of above
97. If resistance decreases,
93. In a circuit, the total re- what happens to current?
sistance is greater than the
largest resistance in the cir- (A) stays the same
cuit. (B) increases
(A) Series (C) decreases
(B) Parallel
(D) disappears
(C) Either series or parallel
(D) Neither series nor parallel 98. What is the current through
a 25-ohm resistor connected
94. The length of the legs of an to a 5.0-volt power supply?
LED matter because
(A) 5.0 amps
(A) the longer leg must be con-
nected to the positive terminal in (B) 0.20 amps
order for the light to work. (C) 25 amps
(B) the longer leg must be con-
(D) 30 amps
nected to the negative terminal in
order for the light to work.
99. Resistance and current are
(C) actually they don’t really mat-
ter, it’s totally random. (A) directly proportional
(D) none of above (B) inversely proportional

95. Voltage is the measure of (C) not related

(A) electric current (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 361

100. If a resistor is connected (C) Either series or parallel

in PARALLEL on a circuit, the
(D) A. Neither series nor parallel
current in that branch of the
circuit should 105. If the battery produced 90
(A) remain the same Volts and what would be the
(B) decrease current flow be for a 6 Ohm
resistor?
(C) increase
(A) 2.1 Amps
(D) none of above
(B) 2.4 Amps
101. What is the job of a bat-
(C) 1.71 Amps
tery? (BEST answer)
(A) provide power (D) 15 Amps

(B) provide energy 106. Which statement describes

(C) turns the circuit on the relationship of voltage
and current?
(D) provide energy for the elec-
trons to flow (A) Voltage is directly propor-
tional to current because I = V/R.
102. A light bulb has a resis-
tance of 5 ohms and a max- (B) Voltage is inversely propor-
imum current of 10 A. How tional to current because I = V/R.
much voltage can be ap- (C) Voltage is directly propor-
plied before the bulb will tional to current because I = VR.
break?
(D) Voltage is inversely propor-
(A) 50 Volts tional to current because I = VR.
(B) 5 Volts
107. Which equation is correct
(C) 0.5 Volts
according to Ohm’s law?
(D) 2 Volts
(A) V=IR
103. What slows down the flow (B) I=R/V
of electricity in a circuit?
(C) R=I/V
(A) resistance
(D) R=IV
(B) voltage
(C) current 108. If there are 7 Amps run-
(D) source of electric current ning through a 3 Ohm resis-
tor, what will the voltage be
104. In a circuit, the total re- across the resistor?
sistance is greater than the (A) 0.42 Volts
largest resistance in the cir-
cuit. (B) 14 Volts
(A) Series (C) 21 Volts
(B) Parallel (D) 73 Volts

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
362 Chapter 3. Electricity

109. A walkman uses a stan- 114. Which bulb would have

dard 1.5 V battery. How a larger current flowing
much resistance is in the cir- through it if the voltage
cuit if it uses a current of was the same:An 8-watt LED
0.01A? bulb or a 60-watt incandes-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) 150 ohms cent bulb?
(A) 8W
(B) 15 ohms
(B) 60W
(C) 0.00667 ohms
(C) same
(D) 0.01 ohms
(D) can’t determine
110. Which of these is a funda-
mental property of matter 115. A HID lighting circuit oper-
that comes in two forms? ates at 75 Volts what is the
circuit current flow if the re-
(A) mass sistance is 5 Ohms
(B) electric charge (A) 375 Amps
(C) volume (B) 30 Amps
(D) density (C) 15 Amps
111. A laptop operates on (D) 1.33 Amps
12V current and 2.5 Amps.
116. The best conductors for
What is the resistance in the
electricity are made of
laptop?
(A) wood
(A) 13.5 ohms
(B) plastic
(B) 30 ohms
(C) rubber
(C) 0.21 ohms
(D) metal
(D) 4.8 ohms
117. The property of a material
112. Two types of circuits are that allows charge to flow is
(A) parallel and magnetic
(B) electromagnetic and series (A) Potential difference (voltage)
(C) series and parallel (B) Conductivity
(D) big and small (C) Resistance
(D) none of above
113. is the opposition to the
flow of charges in a mate- 118. Transferring a charge
rial. without touching is
(A) Resistance (A) conduction
(B) Voltage (B) induction
(C) Time (C) grounding
(D) Current (D) current electricity

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 363

119. What is one benefits of us- 124. An analogy for electric re-
ing a parallel circuit? sistance is
(A) It gets confusing. (A) the amount of water flowing in
a river
(B) There are no problems.
(B) the steepness of a rivers path
(C) If one part of the circuit goes
down, it does not affect the others. (C) a waterwheel that is turned by
the rivers flow
(D) I makes the lights go on
(D) none of above
120. In order to electrical cur-
rent to flow through a wire 125. If you increase the size of
the wire must be connected the resistor and keep the
in a that includes a source voltage the same, what will
of electrical current. happen to the current?
(A) averager matter (A) The current will decrease
(B) Complete loop (B) The current will stay the same

(C) In an incomplete loop (C) The current will increase

(D) Interrupted Circuit (D) none of above

121. Amount of current is mea- 126. What happens to total cur-

sured in rent in a series circuit when
the total voltage stays the
(A) amps same, circuit resistance de-
(B) volts creases, current will
(C) ohm’s (A) increase
(D) none of above (B) Stay the same
(C) Decrease
122. A 200-W light bulb is con-
nected across a 100-V dc (D) none of above
power supply. What current 127. If a desktop computer
will flow through this bulb? uses 600 kilowatt-hour per
(A) 0.90 A year and electricity costs
(B) 0.36 A $0.15 per kilowatt-hour,
how much does it cost to run
(C) 0.60 A the computer for the year?
(D) 2.0 A (A) $15
123. What are the color codes (B) $30
for a 210 ohm resistor? (C) $4000
(A) brown, grey, red (D) $90
(B) brown, black, yellow
128. In a parallel circuit the cur-
(C) red, brown, brown rent
(D) brown, black, brown (A) makes one circle

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
364 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) stays in one path (B) RI=E

(C) splits and goes through two (C) V= IR
components
(D) E= MC2
(D) does not move

NARAYAN CHANGDER
129. Find the Energy used to 134. When more bulbs are
power a 80 ohm light with a added in parallel, the resis-
voltage of 120 volts for 8.5 tance of the parallel circuit
hours
(A) Increases
(A) 91800.0 J
(B) Decreases
(B) 5508000 J
(C) 180.0 J (C) Remains the same

(D) 1530.0 J (D) none of above

130. How can you decrease the 135. A circuit has 1200 ohms
amount of resistance in a of resistance with a 12 V
wire? power supply. What is the
(A) Increase the cross sectional current of this circuit?
area
(A) 10 amps
(B) Decrease the length
(B) 0.01 amps
(C) Increase the temperature
(D) Decrease the amount of wires (C) 0.1 amps
(D) 100 amps
131. An example of a parallel
circuit is
136. What is the current flow-
(A) the wiring in a house ing through a 240 V bulb
(B) a flashlight with a power output of
(C) a single circular path 1000 W?
(D) I really don’t know (A) 0.240 A

132. Security alarms are made (B) 4.2 A

of circuits because they (C) 240, 000 A
turn on when the circuit is
broken. (D) 1000 A
(A) Parallel
137. In Ohm’s Law, what does
(B) Series the symbol I represent
(C) Fancy
(A) Current
(D) none of above
(B) Load
133. What is the formula for
Ohm’s law? (C) Power
(A) 1+2=3 (D) Voltage

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 365

138. An electric lamp has a cur- (C) gold ring

rent of 0.50 amps passing
(D) none of above
through it when connected
to a 120-volt electrical out- 143. What is the power out-
let. This lamp will develop a put of a light bulb when
power of a current of 0.75 A and
(A) 5.0 watts 120V electrical potential dif-
(B) 110 watts ference runs through it?

(C) 120 watts (A) 0.00625 W

(D) 60 watts (B) 120 W
(C) 90 W
139. Changing a circuits resis-
tance changes the amount (D) 160 W
of flowing through the cir-
cuit 144. When there is only one
(A) True path for electrons to move
through it is called a
(B) False
(A) closed circuit
(C) Divided by
(B) parallel circuit
(D) Current
(C) series circuit
140. Volt battery in series with
a 7 Ohms resistor, what (D) open circuit
would the current draw be
145. Voltage divided by Resis-
(A) 2.1 tance equals ? (V / R =?
(B) 1.71 Amps )
(C) 2.4 Amps (A) Current
(D) 15 Amps (B) Power

141. What is the name for the (C) Ohms

pressure that forces elec- (D) Watts
trons to flow through a cir-
cuit? 146. Which of the following is
(A) Voltage NOT true about Voltage?
(select all that apply)
(B) Capacitance
(A) A higher voltage means a
(C) Resistance
faster current.
(D) Current
(B) All electricity sources have the
142. Identify the conductor be- same voltage.
low. (C) Voltage is the difference in
(A) cloth rag electrical potential energy.
(B) plastic bottle (D) The unit for voltage is volt (v).

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
366 Chapter 3. Electricity

147. Which of the following is (C) 11.0

NOT a correct form of Ohm’s (D) 7.66667
Law?
152. What is an equation to
(A) V = IR
find V?
(B) I = R/V

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) V=IR
(C) R = V/I (B) R=VI
(D) I = V/R (C) V=I/R
148. What is the voltage source (D) R=IV
for a circuit carrying 2 am-
153. Three resistors, 4 ohms, 6
pere of current through a re-
ohms, and 8 ohms, are con-
sistor of 12 ohm?
nected in parallel in an elec-
(A) 24 volt tric circuit. The equivalent
(B) 2.4 volt resistance of the circuit is
(C) 12 volt (A) between 4 ohms and 8 ohms
(D) 2 volt (B) less than 4 ohms
(C) 18 ohms
149. Electricity costs $0.15 per
kilowatt-hour. If a TV uses (D) between 10. ohms and 18
400 watts and you watch ohms
it for 2 hours a day, how 154. What is the current in a se-
much does it cost to run the ries circuit that has a total
TV for a week? resistance of 3.7 ohms and
(A) $60 uses a 8.9 V battery
(B) $8.40 (A) .817 A
(C) $0.84 (B) 5.33 A
(D) $2.22 (C) 2.405 A
(D) 13.29 A
150. What is the unit for the
electric resistance? 155. I = What?
(A) Current (A) Potential energy
(B) Ampere (B) Resistance
(C) Volts (C) Power
(D) Ohms (D) Current
156. Which the following is a
151. You are given a parallel
correct equation variation of
circuit with three identical re-
Ohm’s law?
sistors of 23 ohms, and two
11V batteries. What is the (A) I = VR
power of the whole circuit? (B) R = I / V
(A) 63.13 (C) I = V / R
(B) 15.78261 (D) R = IV

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 367

157. What is the current (A) Increases

through an 11 V bulb with (B) Decreases
a resistance of 99 ohms?
(C) Remains the same
(A) 9 amps
(D) none of above
(B) 0.1 amps
(C) 0.1 Ohms 163. Current times Resistance
equals (I X R)
(D) 9 Volts
(A) Power
158. What is resistance? (B) Voltage
(A) the amount of push the electri- (C) Amperage
cal source supplies to the circuit
(D) Ohm
(B) how much a given device re-
sists the flow of electric current 164. What is the type of circuit
(C) flow of electric charge that stops working when
one bulb goes out?
(D) none of the above
(A) A broken circuit
159. Factor which does not af- (B) Parallel Circuit
fect the resistance
(C) Series Circuit
(A) Type of material
(D) A metal circuit
(B) Length of material
(C) Mass of the material 165. For a complete circuit the
circuit must be
(D) Area of the material
(A) open
160. How much power does (B) parallel
the lamp in question 1 con-
sume? (C) series
(A) 0.3 Watts (D) closed
(B) 0.75 Watts 166. The two types of circuits
(C) 11.25 Watts are?
(D) none of above (A) parallel and magnetic
(B) electromagnetic and series
161. Electricity that flows in a
closed path is called a (C) series and parallel
(A) path (D) big and small
(B) current 167. A subwoofer needs a
(C) circuit household voltage of 110
V to push a current of 5.5
(D) light A through its coil. What is
162. When bulbs are added to the resistance of the sub-
a parallel circuit, the bright- woofer?
ness of the bulbs (A) 20 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
368 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) 0.05 ohms 172. Which of these objects is

(C) 605 ohms an insulator?

(D) 2 ohms (A) Copper Wire

(B) Paper Clip
168. What is the Electric Poten-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Steel Pole
tial Difference of a circuit
with 23 ohms and a 14V bat- (D) Rubber Gloves
tery
173. When using electricity,
(A) 14.0 what are V, I, and R?
(B) 322.0 (A) Venezuela, India, Republic of
(C) 0.6087 Korea
(D) 1.6429 (B) Variable, Integer, Real Num-
ber
169. What voltage is needed (C) Violet, Indigo, Red
to cause a 2A current flow
through a 10 ohm resistor? (D) Voltage, Current Intensity, Re-
sistance
(A) 5V
(E) Three letters
(B) 0.2V
174. What does an electrical in-
(C) 20V
sulator do?
(D) 200V
(A) Lets electricity flow in one di-
170. P = V2
Based on this vari- rection.
R
ant of the power equation, (B) Does not let electricity flow
what happens to the power through it.
supplied by a circuit when (C) Lets electricity flow through it
you double the voltage on when light shines on it.
the circuit?
(D) Lets electricity flow through it.
(A) x2
(B) x4 175. The formula to find I when
the values of E and R are
(C) Divide by 2 known is
(D) Divide by 4 (A) I = E/R
171. Four identical resistors are (B) I = RV
set up in a parallel circuit (C) V = IR
with 27.5 ohms each. If the
(D) none of above
voltage is 18 volts what is
the current? 176. If a substance has a higher
(A) 4.983 number of electrons than
protons on its surface, what
(B) 2.618 type of charge does it
(C) 2.918 have?
(D) 3.427 (A) A positive charge.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 369

(B) A negative charge. (B) dimmer

(C) A neutral charge (C) stay the same
(D) No charge at all (D) none of above
177. What is the total resis- 182. If I add more light bulbs
tance in a parallel circuit if to a series circuit what hap-
R1:12 ohms R2:7 ohms R3:8 pens?
ohms
(A) The current speeds up and the
(A) 2.847 lights get brighter
(B) 27.0 (B) The current slows down and
(C) 0.02847 the lights dim lower
(D) 0.0027 (C) The current speeds up and the
lights dim lower
178. How to find power
(D) The current slows down and
(A) V=IR the lights get brighter
(B) R+V/I
183. What would you need to
(C) P=VI do to the voltage if you
(D) P= RT wanted to increase the cur-
rent in a series circuit?
179. What size resistor would
produce a 3.7 amp current (A) Increase
flow with a 12.8 volt bat- (B) Greater
tery?
(C) Decrease
(A) 0.3 Ohms
(D) Smaller
(B) 47.4 Ohms
184. To calculate voltage, multi-
(C) 3.5 Ohms
ply and
(D) 12.8 Ohms
(A) current, resistance
180. What word means how (B) volts, current
hard it is for electrons to
flow through. (C) volts, ohms

(A) Current (D) ohms, resistance

(B) Voltage 185. If the battery produced
(C) Resistance 12.6 Volts with a current of
2.1 Amps, what would be
(D) Power
the conductance?
181. In a parallel circuit, when (A) 2.1 S
one light goes out, the oth-
(B) 0.16 S
ers stay on. Would they get
brighter or dimmer? (C) 16 S
(A) brighter (D) 6 S

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
370 Chapter 3. Electricity

186. Power is measured in 191. What is one problem with

what unit? using a series circuit?
(A) amps (A) It has a lot of series.
(B) volts (B) If one light goes down, they all

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) watts go down!
(D) ohms (C) It doesn’t work properly.

187. What is the charge of a (D) There are no problems.

proton? 192. If a resistor is added in a
(A) Postive SERIES circuit, the current on
(B) Negative each resistor should
(C) Neutral (A) Stay the same
(D) none of above (B) increase

188. An electric heater works (C) decrease

by passing a current of 100 (D) none of above
A though a coiled metal
wire, making it red hot. If 193. If a circuit had 4 D-Cell bat-
the resistance of the wire teries (each 1.5 V) and a
is 1.1 ohms, what voltage lightbulb with resistance of
must be applied to it? 2 ohms, what is the current
that flows through the cir-
(A) 110 Volts
cuit?
(B) 11 Volts
(A) 2 A
(C) 0.011 Volts
(B) 3 A
(D) 91 Volts
(C) 6 A
189. Find the current through (D) 8 A
a 12-ohm circuit when 24
volts is applied. 194. What is the voltage of a
(A) 24 amps telephone circuit that draws
0.017 amps through a resis-
(B) 48 amps
tance of 15, 000 ohms?
(C) 2 amps
(A) 882352.9 volts
(D) 8 amps
(B) 1.1 volts
190. If the current in an electri- (C) 2555 volts
cal circuit is constant, what
will happen to the voltage if (D) 255 volts
the resistance is increased?
195. Which equation is correct
(A) The voltage will decrease according to Ohm’s law?
(B) The voltage will be the same Check all that apply.
(C) The voltage will increase (A) V = IR
(D) none of above (B) I = R/V

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 371

(C) R = I/V 200. An analogy for electric cur-

rent is
(D) R = IV
(E) I = V/R (A) the amount of snow stored
high on a mountain
196. The force that pushes the (B) the rate of snow sliding down
electricity through a circuit is the mountain
called
(C) rocks, trees, and houses in the
(A) resistance path of the avalanche.
(B) voltage (D) none of above
(C) current
201. Watts is the unit of
(D) switch
(A) Power
197. Choose all that are true:If (B) Current
you added more batteries to
an electric circuit, it would (C) Voltage

(A) increase the voltage (D) Resistance

(B) decrease the voltage. 202. What does V stand for?

(C) increase the current. (A) Vendetta
(D) decrease the current. (B) Voltage
(E) increase the resistance. (C) Velocity
198. The voltage supplied to a (D) Vector
circuit is 17 V and the cur-
rent running through is 10 203. A circuit consists of a 12 V
A. What is the power gener- battery connected across a
ated? single resistor. If the current
in the circuit is 3 A, calculate
(A) 170 W the size of the resistor.
(B) 170 A (A) 36 ohms
(C) 1.7 V (B) 0.25 ohms
(D) 1.7 W
(C) 4 ohms
199. What type of energy is the (D) 12 ohms
electrical energy from the
battery being converted into 204. What particle has a nega-
in this radio? tive charge?
(A) Heat and light (A) Protons
(B) Sound and light (B) Neutrons
(C) Sound and heat (C) Atoms
(D) Potential energy (D) Electrons

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
372 Chapter 3. Electricity

205. The ability of a substance 210. What uses symbols to rep-

to resist the flow of current resent each part of a cir-
is: cuit?
(A) electrical resistance (A) wiring plan

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) electrically acceptance (B) circuit plan
(C) electrical current (C) circuit diagram
(D) none of above (D) house plan

206. A 10 ohms resistor is pow- 211. Factor which does not af-
ered by a 5-V battery. The fect the resistance of the
current flowing through the electric wire:
source is: (A) Type of material Resistivity.
(A) 10 A (B) Length of the wire
(B) 50 A (C) Mass of the material
(C) 2 A (D) Area of the cross section of the
(D) 0.5 A wire

207. The flow of electricity 212. Ohm’s Law states that:

through a conductor is (A) Current = Voltage x Resis-
called tance
(A) resistance (B) Resistance = Voltage x Cur-
(B) voltage rent
(C) current (C) Power = Voltage x Current
(D) source of electric current (D) Voltage = Current x Resis-
tance
208. How much CURRENT does
a 1200 W bread maker 213. If a circuit is pulling 40
draw from a 110 V outlet? ohms at 200 volts, what is
P = IVP = I2RP = V2/R the power of the circuit?
(A) 132000 amps (A) 5.0
(B) 0.09 amps (B) 1000.0
(C) 1200 amps (C) 200.0
(D) 10.9 amps (D) 40.0

209. I = 24 amps & V = 240 214. What is the total voltage

Volts Then, R = Ohms of the battery if its 5 resis-
tors produce the follwoing
(A) 24 drops:8V, 2V, 5V, 1.5V and
(B) 240 1.5V?
(C) 2.4 (A) 4.5 V.
(D) 10 (B) 9 V.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 373

(C) 18 V. 220. Which of these colors is

(D) 36 V. NOT used in the resistor
value color code?
215. When to use the P=I2R for- (A) white
mula
(B) black
(A) Never
(C) violet
(B) If the question only gives you
current and resistance (D) pink
(C) If the question only gives you 221. The mathematical relation-
voltage ship among Voltage, Cur-
(D) Always rent, and Resistance
(A) Faraday’s Law
216. A complete circuit has
(B) Tesla’s Law
(A) a motor in it
(C) Edison’s Law
(B) a switch in it
(D) Ohm’s Law
(C) two bulbs in it
(D) no breaks in it 222. The statement which cor-
rectly represents Ohm’s law:
217. Current times resistance (A) V = IR
equals(I*R)
(B) V = R/I
(A) Power
(C) R = VI
(B) Voltage
(D) I = R/V
(C) Amperage
(D) Ohm 223. What happens to the cur-
rent in a circuit as the resis-
218. What is the voltage tance decreases?
needed to run a 9.2 ohm (A) Current increases
toaster on a 5.5 amps?
(B) Current Decreases
(A) 9.2 V
(C) Current remains the same
(B) 5.06 V
(D) none of above
(C) 34.14 V
(D) 50.6 V 224. What is the total circuit
resistance of the following
219. How many Volts would five resistors connected in
we need to produce a cur- series? R1 = 27 ohmsR2 =
rent flow of 8 Amps through 33 ohmsR3 = 51 ohmsR4 =
a 6 Ohm resistor (V=IR, 1.2 kohmsR5 = 240 ohmsRt
I=V/R, R=V/I) = Ohms
(A) 12 volts (A) 353.2
(B) 24 volts (B) 1551
(C) 1.3333 (C) 1.9 K
(D) 48 volts (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
374 Chapter 3. Electricity

225. What is the power of a (D) A circuit that takes place in a

10V bulb with 5A through series of events
it?
(A) 2W 230. The current through a
10.0-ohm resistor is 1.2 am-
(B) 2V

NARAYAN CHANGDER
peres. What is the potential
(C) 50W difference across the resis-
(D) 50A tor, to the nearest volt?
(A) 12V
226. If a resistor in a parallel
circuit is increased in value, (B) 13V
the voltage in that branch of
(C) 8.3V
the circuit should
(A) decrease (D) 0.12V
(B) increase 231. You are given a basic se-
(C) remain the same ries circuit with a battery, a
(D) none of above switch, and three identical
resistors. If the circuit is re-
227. An object becomes nega- arranged so that it is now a
tively charged by parallel circuit, what would
(A) losing protons happen to the current?
(B) gaining electrons (A) it would decrease
(C) losing electrons (B) it would stay the same
(D) gaining protons (C) it would increase
228. According to Ohm’s Law, (D) it would react inversely
if you were to triple the
voltage of a circuit with- 232. What unit is used to mea-
out changing the resistance, sure current?
what would happen to the
(A) Ohms
flow of current?
(A) It would stay the same (B) Omega
(B) It would increase by 2x (C) Volts
(C) It would increase by 3x (D) Amps
(D) It would decrease by 3x
233. When bulbs are added to
229. What is a series circuit? a series circuit, the resis-
(A) The transfer of electrons from tance
one object to another (A) Increases
(B) A circuit with a single path the (B) Decreases
current follows
(C) Remains the same
(C) A circuit that goes in multiple
directions (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 375

234. A student uses a length (C) Speed of electrons

of wire as a resistor. He
(D) Energy electrons have
makes a second resistor
from the same material.To 239. A lamp has a resistance of
be certain of making a sec- 23 ohms and is plugged in
ond resistor of higher resis- to a 135 V power supply.
tance, he should use a piece What is the current in the
of wire that is: lamp?
(A) longer and thicker. (A) 112.0
(B) longer and thinner.
(B) 3105.0
(C) shorter and thicker.
(C) 0.17
(D) shorter and thinner.
(D) 5.87
235. The resistance of a 60 watt
bulb operated at 120 volts 240. If the battery produced
is approximately (Hint:use 12.6 Volts and there was a
an equation for Electrical 6 Ohm resistor, what would
Power and Ohm’s Law) P = be the current?
VI and R = V/I (A) 2.1 Amps
(A) 720 ohms (B) 2.4 Amps
(B) 240 ohms
(C) 1.71 Amps
(C) 120 ohms
(D) 15 Amps
(D) 60 ohms
241. What is the current if 3600
236. If there are 10 Volts across C of charge passes a point in
a 5 Ohm resistor, what is 17 min?
the current?
(A) 3.5 A
(A) 0.5 Amps
(B) 2 Amps (B) 13.5 A

(C) 50 Amps (C) 23.5 A

(D) 25 Amps (D) 33.5 A

237. V = What? 242. Electricity costs $0.15 per

(A) Potential energy kilowatt-hour. If a laptop
uses 600 watts and you use
(B) Resistance it for 6 hours a day, how
(C) Power much does it cost to run the
(D) Current laptop for a week?
(A) $0.60
238. What does power really
mean? (B) $540
(A) Joules transferred / second (C) $3.78
(B) Electrons passed / second (D) $25.2

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
376 Chapter 3. Electricity

243. A home’s central air con- the current flow for a 6 Ohm
ditioner has a power rat- resistor?
ing of 4kW. The air con- (A) 2.1 Amps
ditioner runs 8 hours a
day (201, 600 seconds per (B) 2.4 Amps

NARAYAN CHANGDER
week). How many kW*hrs (C) 1.71 Amps
did it use in a week? (D) 15 Amps
(A) 806, 400 kW*h
248. In an experiment you hold
(B) 32 kW*h your resistance constant
(C) 224 kW*h and change your voltage to
fill out a chart on current.
(D) 700 kW*h
The independent variable
244. What do we call the differ- would be
ent bits and pieces that go (A) number of trials
together to make a circuit? (B) resistance
(A) companies (C) current
(B) computers (D) voltage
(C) components
249. Voltage and resistance
(D) compartments in a circuit determine how
much is in the circuit.
245. Volt car battery pushes
charge through the head- (A) resistance
light circuit resistance of 10 (B) current
ohms. How much current is (C) voltage
passing through the circuit?
(D) none of above
(A) 0.8 A
(B) 1.2 A 250. What is the difference in
finding total resistance in a
(C) 22 A series circuit vs. in a Paral-
(D) 120 A lel circuit?
(A) No Difference
246. The ratio of the voltage
across a conductor to the (B) For series use inverse equa-
current in the conductor is tion, for parallel add resistances
called (V/I) is called up.

(A) conductivity (C) For series add up resistances,

for parallel add up resistances
(B) resistance
(D) For series add up resistances,
(C) charge for parallel use inverse equation
(D) power
251. Energy Review:Watts is
247. If the battery produced the same as
12.6 Volts what would be (A) Joules per second

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 377

(B) Voltage per second (C) no change

(C) Current per second (D) none of above
(D) Meters per second 257. Which symbol and unit of
measurement are used for
252. The process of transferring
voltage?
charge between objects by
touching (A) symbol:V; unit:A
(A) charging by induction (B) symbol:R; unit:
(B) static discharge (C) symbol:V; unit:V
(C) charging by contact (D) symbol:R; unit:V
(D) proton 258. unit of resistance
253. Voltage divided by Resis- (A) ohm
tance(V / R) (B) ampere
(A) Current (C) volt
(B) Power (D) joule
(C) Ohms 259. Which statement describes
(D) Watts the relationship of resis-
tance and current?
254. What is the unit for mea-
suring the potential differ- (A) Resistance is directly propor-
ence across a resistor? tional to current because R = V/I

(A) Volts (B) Resistance is inversely propor-

tional to current because R = V/I.
(B) Coulombs
(C) Resistance is directly propor-
(C) Amp tional to current because R = VI.
(D) Volts (D) Resistance is inversely propor-
tional to current because R = VI.
255. In a series circuit, with a
consent 10 volt power sup- 260. Voltage divided by Resis-
ply, what would happen to tance EQUATION (V / R)
the Current if the Resistance equals
is increased?
(A) Current
(A) Go up
(B) Power
(B) Go down
(C) Ohms
(C) Go sideways
(D) Watts
(D) Nothing
261. A parallel circuit is
256. A thicker wire means in (A) A closed circuit that exists in a
resistance. parallel universe
(A) a decrease (B) A closed circuit that follows
(B) an increase one path and completes the circuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
378 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) A closed circuit that divides 266. Which instrument is used

and conquers the electrical power to measure Current in a cir-
of the circuit cuit?
(D) A closed circuit that divides (A) Ammeter
into two or paths before recombin- (B) Multimeter

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ing to complete the circuit
(C) Voltmeter
262. What word means how
(D) None of the above
much energy is given to / re-
moved from the electrons. 267. A great conductor of en-
(A) Current ergy is:
(B) Voltage (A) wood
(C) Resistance (B) plastic
(D) Power (C) metal
263. A panini press with a re- (D) cloth
sistance of 20.6 ohms is 268. How can you increase the
plugged into a 134 V power resistance of a wire?
source. After 17 minutes,
what is the power used by (A) Increasing the temperature of
the circuit? the wire
(A) 14818.05825 (B) Lower the resistivity of the ma-
terial
(B) 889083.4951
(C) Decrease the length of the
(C) 871.6504854
wire
(D) 110.5825243
(D) Increase the cross sectional
264. According to Ohm’s Law (V area
= IR), increasing the resis-
tance 269. When three 20-ohm resis-
tors are wired in parallel
(A) decreases the current and connected to a 10-volt
(B) increases the current source, the total resistance
(C) alternately increasing and de- of the circuit will be
creasing the current (A) less than 20 ohms
(D) does not affect the current (B) 60 ohms
265. What is the name for (C) between 20 and 60 ohms
the potential difference that (D) more than 60 ohms
forces electrons to flow
through a circuit? 270. The battery is 30 volts.
There are 5 amps of electric-
(A) Voltage
ity running through the cir-
(B) Capacitance cuit. How many ohms is the
(C) Resistance resistor?
(D) Current (A) 6 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 379

(B) 2 ohms 275. Point to be kept in mind

for verification of Ohm’s
(C) 150 ohms
Law is:
(D) 50 ohms
(A) Ammeter and voltmeter
should be connected in series
271. Voltage multiplied by elec-
tric Current(V x I) equals (B) Ammeter should be connected
in series and voltmeter in parallel
(A) Current
(C) Ammeter should be con-
(B) Power nected in parallel and voltmeter
(C) Resistance in series
(D) Watts (D) Ammeter and voltmeter
should be connected in parallel
272. How does flipping a
switch turn a light on? 276. move freely throughout
a conductor.
(A) It steps up the voltage
(A) protons
(B) It generates an electromag- (B) neutrons
netic field
(C) electrons
(C) It opens a circuit
(D) atoms
(D) It closes a circuit
277. Compared to the total re-
273. A toaster oven is plugged sistance of two 5-ohm re-
into a 120 V outlet and sistors connected in series,
has a resistance of 12 ohms. the total resistance of two 5-
How much power does the ohm resistors connected in
toaster oven use? (hint:2 parallel is
steps) (A) less
(A) 10W (B) greater
(B) 1200W (C) the same
(C) 132W (D) none of above
(D) 600W 278. A circuit contains a 1.5 volt
battery and a bulb with a re-
274. Ohm’s law describes the sistance of 3 ohms. Calcu-
relationship between which late the current.
quantities?
(A) 0.5 Amps
(A) voltage, resistance, and ohms
(B) 2 Amps
(B) resistance, current, and am-
(C) 20 Amps
peres
(D) 4.5 Amps
(C) current, voltage, and resis-
tance 279. Unit for current
(D) amperes, ohms, and current (A) Ohm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
380 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) Ampere separation of 1/3 meter, the

(C) Volt force on each charge will be

(D) Watt (A) 2 N

280. What will happen to the (B) 6 N

NARAYAN CHANGDER
Electrostatic Force between (C) 3 N
2 objects if the distance be-
tween them is is quadru- (D) 36 N
pled?
285. An alarm clock draws 0.5
(A) the force will decrease to 1/16
A of current when connected
the original strength
to a 120 volt circuit. Calcu-
(B) the force will increase by 1/16 late its resistance.
(C) the force will increase by 4 (A) 0.004 ohms
(D) the force will decrease to 1/4
(B) 60 ohms
the original strength
(C) 120.5 ohms
281. A battery’s voltage is the
amount of (D) 240 ohms
(A) energy
286. The equivalent resistance
(B) charge for a group of parallel resis-
(C) energy per unit of charge tors is
(D) power (A) Less than any resistor in the
group.
282. The unit of voltage is
(B) Equal to the smallest resis-
(A) Watt
tance in the group.
(B) Coulomb
(C) Larger than any resistor in the
(C) Volt group.
(D) Ampere
(D) Equal to the largest resistance
283. What size resistor would in the group.
produce a 3 Amp current
flow with a 12 Volt battery 287. What is the first step to
(V=IR, I=V/R, R=V/I) solving for a Parallel circuite
(A) 1 Ohm (A) Add the currents to find the to-
(B) 3 Ohms tal currents
(C) 4 Ohms (B) Find the current through each
(D) 12 Ohms branch I= v/r for each branch
(C) Use the one current to find the
284. Two charges separated a
voltage drop across each resistor
distance of 1.0 meter exert
a 4-N force on each other. If (D) Check by adding resistors us-
the charges are pushed to a ing inverse law

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 381

288. Equivalent resistance for 293. According to Ohm’s Law,

two 20K Ohm resistors in current equals the voltage
parallel? divided by the
(A) 10 Ohms (A) Resistance
(B) 20K Ohms (B) Inductance
(C) 10K Ohms (C) Capacitance
(D) 40K Ohms
(D) Power
289. Total resistance in a series (E) Conductance
circuit
(A) Rt = R1 + R2 + R3 294. How much current passes
through a 12-ohm circuit
(B) 1/Rt = 1/R1 + 1/R2
operating at 3.0 volts?
(C) Rt = R1 X R2 / R1 + R2 (Hint:think of Ohm’s Law) I
(D) Rt = RN / RV = V/R
(A) 0.25 A
290. As the resistance of a cir-
cuit decrease (voltage re- (B) 0.75 A
mains constant), the current
(C) 3.0 A
will
(A) increase (D) 4.0 A

(B) decrease 295. Ohm’s Law describes how

(C) stay the same Voltage, Current, and Re-
sistance are related by the
(D) none of above
equation I = V/R. Which
291. What unit is used to mea- equation would help us find
sure voltage? resistance?
(A) Ohms (A) R = V x I
(B) Omega (B) R = I / V
(C) Volts (C) R = V / I
(D) Amps (D) none of above
292. If the battery produced 12
296. What current flows
Volts what would be the cur-
through a hair dryer
rent flow for a 6 Ohm resis-
plugged into a 120 Volt cir-
tor? Using the equation V =
cuit if it has a resistance of
I * R, how would you set it
25 ohms?
up?
(A) V = 12 * 6 (A) 0.2 A

(B) V = 12 / 6 (B) 4.8 A

(C) 12 = I * 6 (C) 95 A
(D) 6 = I * 12 (D) 3000 A

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
382 Chapter 3. Electricity

297. In the illustration of the 302. Which subatomic parti-

dam, what does the wa- cle ‘flows’ in a conductive
ter moving across the wheel wire?
(turbine) NOT represent? (A) Protons
(A) Momentum

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Neutrons
(B) Work
(C) Morons
(C) Power
(D) Electrons
(D) Watts
303. An electric iron draws a
298. Two electrons placed near current of 5 amps and has a
each other will resistance of 20 ohms. The
(A) Push away amount of energy used by
(B) Attract the iron in 40 seconds is
(C) Stay in place (A) 100 J
(D) none of above (B) 500 J

299. An insulator is a material (C) 4, 000J

that: (D) 20, 000J
(A) Transfers thermal and electri-
304. If there is a parallel circuit
cal energy
with three resistors that are
(B) Transfers electrical energy and 34ohm each. And with a
slows thermal energy 12v battery what is the cur-
(C) Slows electrical energy and al- rent of this circuit
lows thermal energy to pass (A) 1.0588
(D) Slows thermal and electrical (B) 11.333
energy from transfering
(C) 0.0882
300. If you increase the voltage (D) 1.0
across a resistor, what will
happen to the current? 305. This circuit has more than
(A) The current will decrease. one loop. When one light
goes out, the others stay on.
(B) The current will increase.
(A) closed circuit
(C) The current will stay the same.
(B) series circuit
(D) none of above (C) parallel circuit
301. As the voltage increases, (D) open circuit
the current
306. Ohms Law
(A) increases
(A) I = VR where V=Current and
(B) decreases R is resistance
(C) stays the same (B) V=IR, where I =Voltage and R
(D) none of above is Current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 383

(C) R = V/I where V =Voltage and 311. What is the resistance of

I is resistance a lightbulb that experiences
9 Volts and 3 amps of cur-
(D) V=IR, where I =Current and
rent?
R is resistance
(A) 1/3 ohms
307. An analogy for voltage (B) 3 ohms
would be
(C) 27 ohms
(A) The speed of a rivers flow (D) 9 ohms
(B) The amount of water stored
312. A laptop operates on 12V
behind a dam
and 1.5 Amps. What is the
(C) The rocks and waterwheels in resistance in the laptop?
the river (A) 13.5 ohms
(D) none of above (B) 18 ohms
(C) 6 ohms
308. A 1.5 volt battery is
connected to a 10 ohm (D) 8 ohms
resistor. What current
313. What happens to the volt-
passes through the resistor?
age in a circuit as the resis-
(Hint:think of Ohm’s Law) I
tance decreases?
= V/R
(A) remains the same
(A) 6.7 A
(B) decreases
(B) 150 A
(C) increases
(C) 0.15 A (D) none of above
(D) 15 A
314. If there are 40 Volts and
5 Amps running through an
309. To increase the current in
electrical circuit, what is the
a circuit, which can be in-
resistance of the circuit?
creased?
(A) 6 Ω
(A) voltage
(B) 8 Ω
(B) resistance
(C) 12 Ω
(C) interference (D) 0.06 Ω
(D) ohms
315. What is the resistance of a
310. The flow of electricity re- lightbulb that experiences 9
quires a Volts and 3 amps of current?
R=V/I
(A) complete path
(A) 1/3 ohms
(B) incomplete path (B) 3 ohms
(C) insulated current (C) 27 ohms
(D) complex circuit (D) 9 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
384 Chapter 3. Electricity

316. In Ohms Law, What does 321. resistors are connected to

the “I” Stand For? a 9 V battery n a series cir-
(A) Iridescence cuit, the first resistor uses 6
V, the second uses 2 V. How
(B) Current much voltage does the third

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Voltage resistor use?
(D) Capacitance
(A) 1 V
(E) Resistance
(B) 2 V
317. Resistance is measured
in? (C) 3 V
(A) Volts (D) 9 V
(B) Amps
(C) Ohms 322. In a parallel circuit, when
(D) Watts one light goes out, the oth-
ers stay on. Now that there
318. Ohms law states that are less paths for the elec-
(A) It’s time to end class. trons, is there more or less
total resistance?
(B) a standard color code asso-
ciates each color with a specific (A) more (more backed up elec-
decimal digit (0-10) trons, since there are less options
(C) that current in a circuit is for them to go)
equal to voltage divided by the re-
(B) less
sistance.
(D) a resistor conducts electric cur- (C) the same
rent.
(D) none of above
319. What letter represents Cur-
rent? 323. Circuit A has four 3.0-ohm
(A) A resistors connected in series
(B) I with a 24-volt battery, and
circuit B has two 3.0-ohm
(C) R
resistors connected in series
(D) E with a 24-volt battery. Com-
pared to the total potential
320. The current through a
drop across circuit A, the to-
heater is 12 A when it is
tal potential drop across cir-
plugged into a 120 V source.
cuit B is
What is the resistance of the
heater? (A) four times as great
(A) 0.1 ohms
(B) twice as great
(B) 10 ohms
(C) 132 ohms (C) the same

(D) 1440 ohms (D) one-half as great

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 385

324. If the resistance in a cir- (C) Increase, increase

cuit with constant voltage in- (D) Decrease, decrease
creases, the current will
(A) Increase 329. What is another name for
“potential difference”?
(B) Decrease
(A) current
(C) Its stays the same
(B) voltage
(D) Not eneough information
(C) resistance
325. What would happen if in (D) battery
a circuit the voltage is in-
crease? 330. When a wire carries elec-
tricity it can get hot. This is
(A) The time would increase because:
(B) The current would increase (A) Protons transfer energy to the
(C) The current would decrease metal
(D) The current would stay the (B) Electrons transfer energy to
same the metal
(C) Electrons stop moving ran-
326. Calculate the voltage ap-
domly.
plied when a 60 watt light-
bulb uses a current of 5 (D) Electricity is created by mov-
amps ing heat.
(A) 300 volts 331. When only one lightbulb
(B) 30 volts blows out, an entire string
of decorative lights goes out.
(C) 12 volts
The lights in this string must
(D) 0.08 volts be connected in

327. What is the voltage drop (A) series with multiple current
across one 40 ohm resistor pathways
in parallel with 2 other 40 (B) series with one current path-
ohm resistors if the battery way
on the circuit is 69 volts. (C) parallel with multiple current
(A) 69.0 pathways
(B) 40.0 (D) parallel with one current path-
way
(C) 1.725
(D) 5.175 332. What size resistor would
produce a 3 Amp current
328. As the number of resistors flow with a 12 Volt battery
increase, the total resistance (remember:V = I x R, or I =
and the total current V/R, or R = V/I)
(A) Increase, decrease (A) 1 Ohm
(B) Decrease, increase (B) 3 Ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
386 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) 4 Ohms 337. What is the unit of mea-

surement for resistance?
(D) 12 Ohms
(A) Voltage
333. All of the following would (B) Ampere
make a GOOD conductor of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
electricity except which of (C) Watts
the following (D) Ohms
(A) A silver key 338. What is the power of a
(B) A copper wire 25V bulb with 4A through
it?
(C) A glass window
(A) 100W
(D) none of above
(B) 100V
334. Identify the insulator be- (C) 6.3W
low. (D) 6.3A
(A) aluminum foil
339. If a toaster produces 12
(B) paperclip ohms of resistance in a
120-volt circuit, what is the
(C) rubber eraser
amount of current in the cir-
(D) none of above cuit?
(A) 10 Amps
335. What is the potential dif-
ference? (B) 0.1 Amps
(A) Current (C) 1440 Amps

(B) Power (D) 1 Amp

(C) Voltage 340. What is the voltage differ-

ence in a circuit that uses
(D) Resistance 2420 W of power if 11 A
of current flows into the cir-
336. Three different resistors cuit?
are connected in series in a
circuit containing a battery. (A) 220 v
Which statement is true for (B) 0.004 v
each resistor?
(C) 2431 v
(A) The current through each is (D) 532400 v
the same.
341. The unit of measure for
(B) The power used in each is the
electrical pressure is
same.
(A) volts
(C) The voltage across each is the
same. (B) amps

(D) The capacitance across each (C) watts

is the same (D) ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 387

342. A resistor’s first three (B) The flow of electricity comes

colour bands are brown, from the switch.
black, and red. What is its (C) Electricity flows along many
value? pathways.
(A) 10 ohms (D) The flow of electricity comes
(B) 10 Kohms from the light bulb.
(C) 200 ohms 347. If the voltage across a
(D) 1000 ohms fixed value of resistance is
increased five times, what
343. What is current? does the current do?
(A) the amount of push the electri- (A) It increases by a factor of five.
cal source supplies to the circuit
(B) It decreases by a factor of five.
(B) how much a given device re-
(C) It stays the same.
sists the flow of electric current
(D) Not enough information
(C) flow of electric charge
(D) none of the above 348. While operating at 120
volts, an electric toaster has
344. According to Ohm’s Law (V a resistance of 15 ohms. The
= IR), increasing the voltage power used by the toaster is
(A) decreases the current (A) 8.0 W
(B) increases the current (B) 120 W
(C) alternately increasing and de- (C) 960 W
creasing the current (D) 1800 W
(D) does not affect the current
349. A resistor is connected
345. Which two changes to a across a 50 V source. What
metal wire both increase re- is the current in the resistor
sistance? if the color code is red, or-
(A) decreasing its length and in- ange, orange, silver?
creasing its temperature (A) 2.2 mA
(B) increasing its length and de- (B) 2 mA
creasing its temperature (C) 217mA
(C) decreasing its thickness and (D) none of above
increasing its temperature
(D) increasing its thickness and 350. If you increase the voltage
decreasing its temperature of a circuit, what happens?
(A) Current decreases
346. Which best describes a
simple series circuit? (B) Current increases

(A) Electricity flows along one (C) Electrons disappear

pathway. (D) Bulbs get dimmer

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
388 Chapter 3. Electricity

351. A 3.0-ohm resistor and a 355. Charging by friction re-

6.0-ohm resistor are con- quires rubbing. Charging
nected in series in an op- by contact requires
erating electric circuit. If (A) rubbing
the current through the 3.0-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ohm resistor is 4.0 amperes, (B) touching
what is the potential differ- (C) no contact
ence across the 6.0-ohm re-
(D) none of above
sistor?
(A) 12 V 356. In the illustration of the
dam, what does the wa-
(B) 24 V
ter moving through the pipe
(C) 2.0 V represent?
(D) 8.0 V (A) Power
352. If the battery in a circuit (B) Kinetic energy
is 24 V and the resistance (C) Watts
is 12 ohms, what is the cur-
rent, I? (D) Current

(A) 2A 357. In a flashlight, a battery

(B) 288A provides a total of 3 volts
to a bulb. If the flashlight
(C) 0.5A bulb has an operating resis-
(D) none of above tance of 5 ohms, the current
through the bulb is
353. What is the resistance of
an object that draws 0.24 (A) 0.3 A
A when connected to a 120 (B) 0.6 A
volt circuit? (C) 1.5 A
(A) 0.024 ohms
(D) 1.7 A
(B) 28.8 ohms
358. The rate at which an elec-
(C) 124 ohms
trical device converts energy
(D) 500 ohms from one form to another is
called
354. For which circuit do you
have to inverse the resistors (A) electrical energy
to find the equivalent resis- (B) electrical power
tance?
(C) electrical resistance
(A) series circuit
(D) voltage regulation
(B) parallel circuit
(C) both series and parallel cir- 359. .010 in Engineering nota-
cuits tion.

(D) neither series and parallel cir- (A) 1m

cuits (B) 10m

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.4 Circuits, Ohm’s law & resistance 389

(C) 100m 364. Electric current is the flow

of:
(D) .001m
(A) electrons
360. If voltage in a circuit is con-
(B) protons
stant, the current can be cut
to half of its original value (C) neutrons
by changing the resistance (D) none of these
to its original value.
(A) one-fourth 365. Opposite charges
(A) Attract
(B) one-half
(B) Repel
(C) two times
(C) Don’t exist
(D) four times
(D) none of above
361. How many Volts would it
take to push 1 Amp through 366. Aretha measures a circuit
a resistance of 1 Ohm at 110 V and 240 . Using
Ohm’s law, what can she
(A) 10 volts calculate for the circuit?
(B) 1 volt (A) voltage
(C) 48 volts (B) ohms
(D) 5 volts (C) resistance

362. An object that is positively (D) current

charged contains more pro-
367. If you decreases the resis-
tons than electrons.
tance of a circuit, what hap-
(A) True pens?
(B) False (A) Current decreases
(C) I need more information (B) Current increases
(D) none of above (C) Electrons disappear
(D) Bulbs get brighter
363. When a resistor in a se-
ries circuit is replaced by 368. Why are LEDs being used
another resistor with an so frequently? (Check all
increased resistance value, that apply)
the total circuit current will
(A) They are more efficient than
traditional bulbs.
(A) stay the same
(B) They give off less heat.
(B) decrease
(C) They last longer than tradi-
(C) increase tional bulbs.
(D) double in value (D) They use less energy.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 390 Chapter 3. Electricity

369. Electric power is measured 372. What is the power if

in the electrical potential differ-
(A) Watts ence is 100 V and the resis-
tance is 25 ohms?
(B) Volts
(A) 6.25

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Amperes
(B) 400.0
(D) Ohms
(C) 25.0
370. What is not needed in or- (D) 100.0
der to create a working cir-
cuit? 373. What is the main dif-
(A) battery (power source) ference between conductors
and insulators
(B) lightbulb
(A) Surface
(C) current
(B) Free electrons
(D) closed circuit
(C) Block electrons
371. Which bulb would have (D) Allow flow of electrons.
a SMALLER current flowing
through it if the voltage 374. what is the power of a
was the same:a 20-watt lamp whose current is 6 A
light bulb or a 60-watt light and the voltage across it is
bulb? 120 V?
(A) 20W (A) 120 W
(B) 60W (B) 720 W
(C) same (C) 16 W
(D) can’t determine (D) 10 W

3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends

on
1. Materials that have a high (A) It is increased by a factor of 2.
electrical resistivity (B) It is increased by a factor of 4.
(A) must be at a low temperature
(C) It is reduced by a factor of 2.
(B) must be at a high temperature
(D) It is reduced by a factor of 4.
(C) Examples are copper & silver
3. measure of a material’s abil-
(D) Examples are tungsten &
ity to conduct or transmit
nichrome
electricity
2. The length of a certain wire (A) electrical power
is kept same while its radius
is doubled. What is the new (B) electrical drift
resistance of this wire? (C) electrical conductivity

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends on 391

(D) electrical current 8. The resistance of a piece of

wire does NOT depend on:
4. Consider a wire length L,
(A) material
cross-sectional area A and
a resistance R. A second (B) mass
wire at the same tempera- (C) length
ture has a length 2L and a
cross-sectional are of 1/2A. (D) cross sectional area
What is the resistance of the 9. If the resistance remains the
second wire same in a circuit but the
(A) R current increases, what hap-
pened to the voltage?
(B) 2R
(A) increases
(C) 1/2 R
(B) decreases
(D) 4R
(C) remains the same
5. graphical representation of (D) unknown
a circuit using standard-
ized symbols for compo- 10. The electrical resistance pf
nents and solid lines for the a metallic conductor is in-
wire connecting the compo- versely proportional to its
nents (A) Temperature
(A) resistance (B) Length
(B) circuit (C) Cross-sectional area
(C) resistivity (D) Resistivity
(D) schematic
11. complete path that an elec-
6. Resistivity of a wire de- trical current travels along
pends on: (A) resistance
(A) length (B) circuit
(B) material (C) resistivity
(C) cross sectional area (D) schematic
(D) none of the above 12. In alternating current the
motion of the charges
7. What happens to resistance
when the length of the wire (A) continuously changes in the
increases? forward and reverse directions
(B) is equal to the speed of light
(A) Stays the same
(C) is greater than the speed of
(B) Increases
light
(C) Decreases
(D) in the direction of the electric
(D) none of above field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
392 Chapter 3. Electricity

13. What is the opposition to 18. What is the correct formular

the flow of current in a con- in getting the resistance?
ductor?
(A) V=IxR
(A) power (B) ρ = R AL

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) resistance
(C) I = P
V
(C) power (D) None
(D) potential difference
19. rate of change of energy in
14. The equation for a material an electric circuit per unit of
with circular cross sectional time
area is A= (A) electrical power
(A) π r2 (B) electrical drift
(B) π r (C) electrical conductivity
π d2
(C) 2 (D) electrical current
(D) π r3 20. The length of a certain
conductor of resistance 100
15. nonohmic circuit device that
is doubled and its cross-
allows current flow in only
sectional area is halved. Its
one direction
new resistance is
(A) diode
(A) 100
(B) non-ohmic
(B) 50
(C) circuit (C) 200
(D) ohmic (D) 400
16. flow of charge through a 21. What other factor of a wire
cross-sectional area divided could affect its resistance?
by the area
(A) Material its made of
(A) drift acceleration
(B) How shiny it is
(B) drift velocity
(C) Colour
(C) conventional current
(D) none of above
(D) current density
22. Which of the following is
17. Which one is a poor conduc- NOT included in the factors
tor of electricity? affecting resistance?
(A) Human body (A) Temperature
(B) Dry Wood (B) Length
(C) Sea water (C) Cross-sectional area
(D) Earth (D) Color

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.5 Factors on which resistance of a conductor depends on 393

23. current that flows through a 28. Kirchhoff’s current law is

circuit from the positive ter- due to the conservation of
minal of a battery through (A) charge
the circuit to the negative ter-
minal of the battery (B) energy

(A) drift acceleration (C) mass

(D) momentum
(B) drift velocity
(C) conventional current 29. a measure of how much an
object or circuit opposes the
(D) current density flow of charge
24. The resistance of a piece of (A) current
wire does not depend on (B) circuit
(A) wire material (C) resistance
(B) wire mass (D) difference
(C) wire length 30. Which copper wire has the
(D) wire cross sectional area lowest resistance?
(A) 1 metre of 1 mm diameter
25. The type of current where
wire
charges shake back and
forth in a circuit (B) 0.5 metre of 1 mm diameter
wire
(A) Alternating Current
(C) 0.5 metre of 0.5 mm diame-
(B) Direct Current ter wire
(C) Voltage (D) 1 metere of 0.5 mm diameter
(D) Switchback Current wire

26. The type of current where 31. The unit to measure the re-
charges flow in one direc- sistivity of a wire is
tion (A) ohms
(A) Direct Current (B) Volt
(B) Alternating Current (C) ohms.m
(C) Electron Flow (D) ohms.s
(D) Voltage 32. electric property that im-
pedes current; for ohmic ma-
27. Ampere second could be the terials, it is the ratio of volt-
unit of age to current, R=V/I
(A) power (A) circuit
(B) conductance (B) resistance
(C) charge (C) resistivity
(D) energy (D) schematic

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
394 Chapter 3. Electricity

33. rate at which charge flows, 38. What is the resistance of a

I=dQdt wire when its length is re-
(A) electrical power duced by half?

(B) electrical drift (A) Halved

(B) Quartered

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) electrical conductivity
(D) electrical current (C) Doubled
(D) Quadrupled
34. Pieces of aluminum, copper,
gold, and silver wire each 39. What happens to a resistor
have the same length and when the temperature is in-
the same cross-sectional creased?
area. Which wire has the
(A) Increases
lowest resistance at 20◦ C?
(B) decreases
(A) silver
(C) stay the same
(B) gold
(D) vary randomly
(C) copper
(D) aluminum 40. What property of a wire
could affect its resistivity?
35. What symbol represented
(A) Material its made of
the unit Ohm?
(B) its length
(A) β
(C) its cross-sectional area
(B) α
(D) all of these
(C) Ω
(D) ρ 41. empirical relation stating
that the current I is propor-
36. Materials that have a high tional to the potential differ-
electrical resistance ence V; it is often written as
(A) less length V=IR, where R is the resis-
tance
(B) less tempareture
(A) ohmic
(C) more thickness
(B) nonohmic
(D) less cross sectional area
(C) ohm
37. A 0.686-meter-long wire
has a cross-sectional area of (D) Ohm’s law
meter2 and a resistance of 42. A circuit contains two un-
0.125 ohm at 20◦ Celsius. equal resistances in parallel
This wire could be made of
(A) current is same in both
(A) aluminum
(B) larger current flows in larger
(B) copper resistor
(C) tungsten (C) potential difference across
(D) nichrome each is same

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 3.6 Series and parallel resistors 395

(D) smaller resistance has smaller (A) It is 2 times as large.

conductance.
(B) It is 3 times as large.
43. What is the unit of used to (C) It is 4 times as large.
specify the amount of resis-
tance? (D) It is 1/2 as large.

(A) Resistance 46. Two bulbs marked 200

(B) Ampere watt-250 volts and 100
watt-250 volts are joined in
(C) Volts
series to 250 volts supply.
(D) Ohm Power consumed in circuit is
44. Three 2 Ohm resistors are (A) 33 W
placed in series.What is the
(B) 67 W
total resistance of the cir-
cuit? (C) 100 W
(A) 2 Ohms (D) 300 W
(B) 6 Ohms
47. This device is used to mea-
(C) 24 Ohms sure the resistance of a cir-
(D) Depends on the battery cuit?

45. The length of a certain wire (A) Ammeter

is doubled while its radius (B) Voltmeter
is kept constant. What is
(C) Ohmmeter
the new resistance of this
wire? (D) Power meter

3.6 Series and parallel resistors

1. If a series circuit has a resis- (D) I = V × R
tance of 20 ohms and a volt-
age of 30v is applied the cur- 3. As resistor are added in se-
rent would be? ries to a circuit, the total re-
sistance will
(A) 1.5A
(A) decrease
(B) 0.67A
(B) increase
(C) 60A
(C) stay the same
(D) 6A
(D) none of above
2. The formula used to calcu- 4. Several light bulbs are con-
late Ohms Law is nected in series across a 115
(A) V = I × R V source of emf. What is the
equivalent resistance if the
(B) Uo = VI
current in the circuit is 1.70
(C) P = I ×V A?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
396 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) 79.5 (D) increases for a time and then

(B) 67.6 starts to decrease.

(C) 59.3 9. Suppose you have a 100.

(D) 30.8 ohm resistor parallel to two

NARAYAN CHANGDER
100. ohm resistors in se-
5. If a circuit has 3 resistors in ries. what is their total re-
parallel and R1 is 10 Ohms sistance?
R2 is 3 Ohms and R3 is (A) 66.7 ohms
7 Ohms, if the P.D is 24v,
what would be the total cur- (B) 300. ohms
rent? (C) 69.69 ohms
(A) 22A (D) 600. ohms
(B) 13.8A
10. The third color band is a
(C) 16.3A or
(D) 22.6A (A) Gold or Silver
6. What is the variable with (B) Green or Blue
variable symbol R? (C) 2k or 5k ohms
(A) Current (D) multiplier or number of zeros
(B) Voltage
11. In a parallel circuit which
(C) Resistance
of the following is the same
(D) None of the Above value throughout the cir-
cuit?
7. If a circuit has 3 resistors in
series and R1 is 10 Ohms R2 (A) Voltage
is 3 Ohms and R3 is 7 Ohms, (B) Current
if a current of 2A flows,
(C) Resistance
what would be the voltage
across each resistor? (D) Charge
(A) V1 = 15v, V2 = 9v, V3 = 14v 12. A 2.0-ohm resistor and a
(B) V1 = 20v, V2 = 6v, V3 = 14v 4.0-ohm resistor are con-
(C) V1 = 40v, V2 = 6v, V3 = 14v nected in series with a 12-
volt battery. If the current
(D) V1 = 20v, V2 = 6v, V3 = 16v through the 2.0-ohm resis-
tor is 2.0 amperes, the cur-
8. As more resistors are added
rent through the 4.0-ohm re-
in series to a constant volt-
sistor is
age source, the power sup-
plied by the source (A) 1.0 A
(A) increases. (B) 4.0 A
(B) decreases. (C) 2.0 A
(C) does not change. (D) 3.0 A

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.6 Series and parallel resistors 397

13. How to you calculate the to- (B) 1A

tal resistance in a series cir-
(C) 2A
cuit?
(D) none of above
(A) R1 + R2+ R3
(B) R1-R2-R3 18. If the voltage is increased
(C) 1/R1 + 1/R2 + 1/R3 and the resistance stays the
same, current will
(D) R1 = R2 = R3
(A) Increase
14. What three things are re-
(B) Decrease
quired in an electrical circuit
(C) Stay the same
(A) A source
(B) A load (D) Not enough info

(C) an earth electrode 19. What are the color codes for
(D) A means of transmission a 470k ohm resistor?
(E) An alternator (A) Yellow, Violet, Yellow
(B) Orange, Grey, Orange
15. Ohms law states that the
current and voltage in a cir- (C) Yellow, Violet, Orange
cuit are?
(D) Orange, Grey, Yellow
(A) Inversely proportional
(B) Directly proportional 20. With three 10 resistors con-
nected in series with a 30
(C) Not related volt cell, the total circuit cur-
(D) Of no importance rent will equal
(A) 300 amps
16. A piece of wire of resistance
R is cut into five equal parts. (B) 1 amp
These parts are then con-
(C) 3 amps
nected in parallel. If the
equivalent resistance of this (D) none of above
combination is R’, then the
ratio R/R’ is 21. A battery of 6V is connected
in series with resisters of 0.1
(A) 1/25
ohm, 0.15 ohm, 0.2 ohm,
(B) 1/5 0.25 ohm and 6 ohm. How
(C) 5 much current would flow
through the 0.3 ohm resis-
(D) 25 tor?
17. The voltage across a resis- (A) 20 A
tor of resistance 2 Ohms is
(B) 2.22A
4 V, the current through this
resistor is: (C) 1A
(A) 0.5A (D) none of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
398 Chapter 3. Electricity

22. What is the color code for we would call this the or
a Orange, Black, Red resis- the ?
tor? (A) lost voltage
(A) 3k Ohms (B) voltage drop

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 200 Ohms (C) potential difference
(C) 300 Ohms (D) positive difference
(D) 2K Ohms
27. Thick copper wire used as
23. What is the total resistance connecting wires for study-
of two 5000. ohms in series ing the dependence of cur-
and in parallel to one 5000. rent on voltage across a re-
ohm resistor? sistor because it has
(A) 3300. ohms (A) low resistance
(B) 6666. ohms (B) high resistance
(C) 3333. ohms (C) zero resistance

(D) 6000. ohms (D) infinite resistance

24. When unequal resistors are 28. lamps, each of resistance 8

connected in parallel in a cir- are connected in series with
cuit, a 240 V supply, in order to
decorate a tree. The current
(A) the same current always runs in each lamp is
through each resistor.
(A) 2.0 A
(B) the potential drop is always
(B) 0.75 A
the same across each resistor.
(C) 1.0 A
(C) the largest resistance has the
largest current through it. (D) 1.33 A
(D) the power generated in each 29. With three 10 resistors con-
resistor is the same. nected in series with a 30
volt power supply, the total
25. Two electric bulbs have re-
circuit current will equal
sistances in the ratio 1:2. If
they are joined in series, the (A) 300 amps
energy consumed in them is (B) 1 amp
in the ratio
(C) 150 amps
(A) 2:1
(D) 1 millamp
(B) 1:2
30. What is the total resistance
(C) 1:1
of three 10, 000. ohms in
(D) 4:1 parallel

26. If we were to measure the (A) 33, 333. ohms

voltage lost across the load (B) 3.1 ∗ 107 ohms

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 399

(C) 3.33333 ∗ 1014 ohms 35. Parallel circuits are

(D) 3, 333.3 ohms (A) a circuit that has only one path
for current to travel
31. This circuit has only one
(B) a circuit that does not allow
path for current to flow
electricity to travel through it
(A) series
(C) has more than one path for
(B) parallel current to travel
(C) combination (D) magnets that cause electric
(D) split current

32. If a series circuit has 3 re- 36. It is preferable to connect

sistors and R1 is 10 Ohms bulbs in in domestic cir-
R2 is 3 Ohms and R3 is 7 cuits
Ohms. What would be the (A) Series
total voltage of the circuit if (B) Parallel
a current of 2A flows.
(C) Both series and parallel
(A) 25v
(D) neither series and parallel
(B) 40v
37. Two devices are connected
(C) 30v
between two points say A
(D) 120v and B in parallel. The physi-
cal quantity that will remain
33. What is the tolerance for a the same between the two
Green, Red, Black, Gold re- points is
sistor?
(A) current
(A) 1%
(B) voltage
(B) 20%
(C) resistance
(C) 5%
(D) None of these
(D) 10%
38. What is the resistance for a
34. What does emf stand for Red, Brown, Black resistor?
(A) Electronic magnetic fiel (A) 21 Ohms
(B) Elecrical magnetic field (B) 210 Ohms
(C) Electro motive force (C) 12 Ohms
(D) Electro motive field (D) 120 Ohms

3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors

1. What is your general rule of (A) Above 20v
thumb for a starter voltage
drop test?
(B) Below 9.6v

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
400 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) 9.6amps 7. Two electrically charged

(D) above 9.6v identical-sized metal spheres,
A (charge of-4) and B
2. What is the correct formula (charge of +8). If the
to calculate current? spheres are brought into

NARAYAN CHANGDER
contact, which sphere will
(A) I = V × R
have a net gain of elec-
(B) I = VR trons?
(C) I = R 1
V Req = 1
5
1
+ 20 1
Req = 4
20 + (A) both A and B
1 5 20
20 = 20 Req = 5 = 4Ω (B) neither
(D) none of above (C) only A

3. Batteries convert blank to (D) only B

blank energy 8. Four cylindrical wires of dif-
(A) potential energy ferent sizes are made of the
(B) Electrical potential same material. Which of
the following combinations
(C) chemical electrical of length and cross-sectional
(D) none of above area of one of the wires will
result in the smallest resis-
4. Insulators have very tance?
resistance and conductors
(A) Length:3LArea:3a
have very resistance.
(B) Length:3LArea:6a
(A) high and high
(C) Length:6LArea:3a
(B) high and low
(D) Length:6LArea:6a
(C) low and low
(D) low and high 9. A load is an item that con-
sumes (uses) the power cre-
5. The small particles that ated by a what?
travel through a circuit are (A) the sun
called
(B) a voltage source
(A) electrons
(C) a voltage regulator
(B) dust
(D) a factory
(C) wires
10. A negatively charged plas-
(D) none of above
tic comb is brought close to,
6. Which of the following is an but does not touch, a small
example of a resistor? piece of paper. If the comb
and the paper are attracted
(A) battery
to each other, the charge on
(B) light bulb the paper
(C) wire (A) must be positive
(D) switch (B) must be negative

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 401

(C) may be neutral or negative 15. Which is the correct equa-

(D) may be neutral or positive tion to use when solving for
the total resistance in a SE-
11. The resistance of a conduc- RIES circuit?
tor can be determined if (A) Rt = R1 + R2 + R3
blank are known
(B) Rt = R1 + R2-R3
(A) current and amps
(C) Rt = (R1 + R2 + R3) / 3
(B) voltage and current
(D) Rt = V / I
(C) energy and current
(D) voltage and potential differ- 16. Watt is the same as
ence (A) 1 Coulomb / second
12. A positively charged rod is (B) 1 Joule / Coulomb
held near the knob of a neu- (C) 1 Joule / second
tral electroscope. What best
describes what will happen (D) 1 Volt / Ampere
to the leaves?
17. If you move a +2.0 *10-3
(A) the leaves will spread apart C charge through a 5 V bat-
and be positive tery, how much work was
(B) the leaves will spread apart done?
and be negative (A) 10*10-3 J
(C) the leaves will stay closed and (B) 5*10-3 J
be positive
(C) 20*10-3 J
(D) the leaves will stay closed and
be negative (D) none of above

13. Based on KCL, currents will 18. As the resistance of a resis-

be regarded as negative or tor in series increases, the
vice versa while measured voltage across
that resistor will
(A) Currents entering the node
(B) Currents leaving the node (A) increase

(C) Currents broke the node (B) decrease

(D) Currents have negative value (C) stay the same

(E) all answer is wrong (D) none of above

14. according to Ohm’s law cur- 19. What is the same in a paral-
rent and resistance have an lel circuit?
(A) equal (A) Amps
(B) direct (B) Voltage
(C) indirect (C) Resistance
(D) no relationship (D) Current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
402 Chapter 3. Electricity

20. A fridge has a power rating (C) Checks to be sure electrolyte

of 2.0 kW.If 1 kWh of electri- is not leaking from the battery.
cal energy costs $0.30, how (D) Makes sure that the alternator
much does it cost to use the is constantly charging the battery.
fridge for 24 hours each day

NARAYAN CHANGDER
for 30 days? 25. Metal sphere A has a
(A) $60 charge of +12 elemen-
tary charges and identical
(B) $432
sphere B has a charge of
(C) $4320 +16 elementary charges. Af-
(D) none of above ter the two spheres are
brought into contact and
21. What type of circuit is used separated, the charge on
in your house? sphere A is
(A) Light Circuits (A) +14 elementary charges
(B) The best circuits (B) +28 elementary charges
(C) Series Circuits
(C) +2 elementary charges
(D) Parallel Circuits
(D) -2 elementary charges
22. Below are the type for ref-
erence nodes, except 26. The voltage source of an
electric circuit is called a
(A) Common Ground
(A) ammeter
(B) Chassis Ground
(B) charge inducer
(C) Ground
(C) battery
(D) On the Ground
(E) Ohm Ground (D) voltmeter

23. The simultaneus equations 27. There are four resistors in a

may also be solved using series circuit with an applied
software packages such as voltage of 120V. The volt-
age drops across three resis-
(A) MATLAB
tors is 15V each. What is
(B) Mathcad the voltage drop across the
(C) Maple fourth resistor?
(D) Quattro Pro (A) 15V
(E) All true (B) 45V
24. What does a battery electri- (C) 75V
cal drain test determine? (D) 120V
(A) If a component is causing the
28. A circuit has more than
power to drain from the battery
one path to ground.
(B) Checks to see if the battery is
pushing enough voltage to the ve- (A) series
hicle components. (B) short

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 403

(C) series-parallel 32. Analysis that provide gen-

(D) parallel eral procedure for analyz-
ing circuits using node volt-
29. In an electric circuit, a single ages as the circuit variable
wire is connected to three is
branches that contain resis- (A) Noda analysis
tors. The three branches
(B) Mesh Analysis
then connect back to a sin-
gle wire. The current in (C) Circuit Analysis
each of the single wires (D) KCL
is the same. Conserva-
(E) KVL
tion of which of the follow-
ing best explains this phe- 33. Which object does NOT con-
nomenon? duct electricity?
(A) Mass (A) copper wire
(B) Electric charge (B) iron nail
(C) Momentum (C) salt water
(D) Energy (D) wood

30. Based on KCL, currents will 34. To simply matters, we shall

be regarded as positive assume in nodal analysis
while that circuit don’t contain
(A) Currents leaving the node (A) current circuits
(B) Currents entering and leaving (B) voltages circuit
the node (C) transistor circuit
(C) Currents between the node (D) Resistor Circuit
(D) Currents entering the node (E) Capacitor circuit
(E) Currents beside the node 35. What is a sum (total) in a se-
31. When do we apply both ries circuit?
KCL and KVL to determine (A) Amperage
the node voltages? (B) Current
(A) When the voltage source (C) Voltage
is connected between two non-
(D) None of these
reference nodes
(B) When the voltage source is 36. How do you find voltage
connected between the reference drop across R3 using ohm’s
and non-reference nodes law?
(C) When there is supernodes (A) Vt = R3 (It)
(D) When there are 5 nodes (B) V3 = R3 (It)
(E) When the circuits have 2 (C) V3 = Rt/It
nodes (D) V3= Vt (R3)

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
404 Chapter 3. Electricity

37. The unit for power is (B) power

(A) newton (C) current
(B) joule (D) resistance
(C) watt
43. The type of circuit in which

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) none of above voltage is different across
38. Electrical current is measure each resistor is a
by using (A) parallel circuit
(A) ohmmeter (B) series circuit
(B) galvanometer (C) both a series and parallel cir-
(C) voltmeter cuits
(D) ammeter (D) none of above

39. If a series circuit has 4 re- 44. Voltage can be induced in a

sistors that are 2 ohms each, wire by
the total resistance of the cir-
cuit would be: (A) moving the wire near a mag-
net.
(A) 10
(B) moving a magnet near the
(B) 2 wire.
(C) 6
(C) changing the current in a
(D) 8 nearby wire.
40. Energy is (D) all of these
(A) The ability to do work 45. When is the right time to
(B) Excited electrons use Nodal analysis?
(C) A battery producing electricity (A) When there is circuits with par-
(D) The ability to move things allel connected elements
faster (B) Currents sources
41. A closed conducting loop (C) Supernodes
through which current can (D) When there is circuits with se-
flow when connected to an ries connected elements
energy source is called a
(E) All True
(A) wire
(B) circuit 46. What is the sum (total) in a
(C) terminal parallel circuit?

(D) battery (A) Current

(B) Voltage
42. In the equation P=IV the I
represents (C) Resistance
(A) voltage (D) None of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 405

47. If there are 6 nodes in net- 52. A good insulator has 6 to

work, we can get number 8 in the valance of an
of equations in the nodal atom.
analysis (A) protons
(A) 9 (B) neutrons
(B) 8 (C) electrons
(C) 7 (D) neutrinos
(D) 6
53. Which of the following
(E) 5 would be a good conductor
48. If both the plate area and of electricity?
the plate separation of a (A) plastic
parallel-plate capacitor are (B) rubber
doubled, the capacitance is:
(C) cotton
(A) doubled
(D) iron
(B) halved
(C) unchanged 54. An example of a voltage
source is a
(D) one-fourth the original
(A) voltmeter
49. tools that can be used to de-
(B) battery
termine node analysis is
(C) resistance
(A) KCL
(D) switch
(B) KVL
(C) ohm’s law 55. A computer has a power
rating of 150 W.If it is
(D) Cramer’s Rule
switched on for 5 hours a
(E) Newton Law day, how much energy does
the computer convert in one
50. The current of circuit with a
day?
voltage of 12 V and a resis-
tance of 4 ohms is (A) 0.75 kWh
(A) 48 A (B) 30 kWh
(B) 3 A (C) 750 kWh
(C) 0.3 A (D) none of above
(D) none of these 56. To solve matrix equation,
51. The unit for potential differ- we can use
ence is (A) Elimination
(A) volts (B) Cramer’s rule
(B) ohms (C) Newton Law
(C) watts (D) 1 & 2
(D) amps (E) 2 & 3

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
406 Chapter 3. Electricity

57. What should you disconnect (C) What direction the electric
one at time to find a para- field lines are pointing
sitic drain? (D) How large the charge at the
(A) The battery cables center is drawn
(B) The relays in the circuit.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
62. Amps are represented by
(C) The fuses the letter
(D) the lights in the glove box, (A) E
trunk and under the hood. (B) R
58. The formula V2/R (C) I
(A) Voltage (D) W

(B) Current 63. A voltaic cell produces volt-

age by converting energy
(C) Power
into electrical energy.
(D) Resistance
(A) Chemical
59. when resistors are added to (B) Pressure
a parallel circuit the total cir-
(C) Hydrogen
cuit
(D) Heat
(A) goes up
(B) goes down 64. In a parallel circuit, the total
line current must equal
(C) is unaffected
(A) the branch current divided by
(D) none of above the total resistance
60. What are the basic laws (B) the sum of the branch currents
underlying the principles of (C) the branch current divided by
Nodal Analysis? the number of resistors
(A) HVL (D) zero
(B) KVL 65. Voltage is a
(C) KCL (A) Weight
(D) b and c correct (B) Force
(E) a and b correct (C) Speed
61. How can you determine (D) Light
how strong the electric force
66. What is the power when a
a point charge will experi-
voltage of 120 V drives a 2-
ence at a certain point in an
A current through a device?
electric field?
(A) 120 Watts
(A) The total number of electric
field lines (B) 360 Watts
(B) How close together the electric (C) 240 Watts
field lines are (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 407

67. There are two case in nodal (C) Solve the resulting simultane-
analysis: ous equations to<br />obtain the
unknown node voltages
(A) The voltage source is con-
nected between a nonreference (D) Select Mesh
node and the reference node (E) Apply KCL
(B) The voltage source is con-
71. How do you calculate total
nected between three nonrefer-
resistance in a parallel cir-
enced nodes
cuit?
(C) All true
(A) R1 + R2 + R3
(D) The voltage source is not con- (B) R1-R2-R3
nected between a nonreference
node and the reference node (C) 1/R1 +1/R2 + 1/R3 = 1/RT

(E) no answer (D) R1 = R2 = R3

72. Electrical Field inside a Hol-

68. One amp is defined as the
low Metallic Charges Sphere
rate of charge flow equal to
is:
coulomb per second.
(A) Zero
(A) 3
(B) Same field as the surface of
(B) 2 sphere
(C) 4 (C) Decreasing towards centre of
(D) 1 the sphere
(D) Increasing towards the centre
69. What’s the meaning of of the sphere
node?
73. What will happen to the to-
(A) The point of connection be-
tal current of a parallel cir-
tween two or more voltages
cuit, if a resistor is removed
(B) The point of connection be- from the connection?
tween two or more currents
(A) total current remains the same
(C) The point of connection be- (B) total current decreases
tween two or more branches
(C) total current increases
(D) The point of connection be-
tween two or more cables (D) none of the above

(E) All false 74. In nodal analysis, we are in-

tersted to finding
70. Third Steps to Determine
(A) current circuits
Node Voltages is?
(B) voltages circuit
(A) Select a node as the reference
node (C) transistor circuit

(B) Apply KVL to each of the n-1 (D) Resistor Circuit

nonreference nodes (E) Capacitor circuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
408 Chapter 3. Electricity

75. In the equation for ohm’s 80. Electric potential energy is

law which variable repre- the energy a charged object
sents the ‘’ohms” has because of its
(A) R (A) momentum

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) P (B) location
(C) V (C) mass
(D) I (D) motion

76. Which net charge could be 81. Which of these is an insula-

found on an object? tor?
(A) 4.8 x 10-19 C (A) Rubber

(B) 1.8 x 10-19 C (B) Copper penny

(C) 3.0 x 10-19 C (C) Iron nail

(D) 2.8 x 10-19 C (D) Plastic

(E) Cloth
77. who put forward Kirchoff’s
law 82. If the circuit is continuous
from the battery, through
(A) G.R Kirchoff
all the wires and compo-
(B) Charles Darwin nents, and back to the bat-
(C) Newton tery ground it is said to have

(D) George Ohm (A) Continuity

(E) All answer is wrong (B) a short to voltage

(C) A short to ground
78. to obtain node voltages
(D) High resistance
from matrix, we can use
standar method such as 83. Which procedure below will
(A) subtitution increase the capacitance of
a parallel-plate capacitor?
(B) elimination
(A) Increase the distance of sepa-
(C) cramer
ration between the two plates
(D) matrix inversion (B) Reduce the surface area of the
(E) All true plate
(C) Insert an insulator between
79. How do you disconnect a
the two plates
battery?
(D) Insert a conductor between
(A) Positive first
the two plates
(B) Negative First
84. Why must every electric cir-
(C) Power side first
cuit have a voltage source,
(D) Ground side Last such as a battery?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 409

(A) Without a voltage source, the (B) Connecting the ground cable
resistance would be too high to the negative side of the bad car
(B) Without a voltage source, the (C) Starting the bad car
resistance would be too low
(D) Starting the good car
(C) Without a voltage source,
there would be no electrons in the 89. When a rod is brought
circuit near a neutral electroscope,
the leaves diverge. Which
(D) Without a voltage source,
statement best describes the
there would be no source of cur-
charge on the rod?
rent
(A) It must be positive.
85. Resistance is a measure of
(B) It must be negative.

(A) the energy per unit charge in (C) It may be positive or negative.
a circuit (D) It may be neutral.
(B) how hard it is for electrons to
90. The second step to nodal
move through the circuit
analysis is?
(C) how hard it is for electrons to
(A) Apply KCL to each non-
move through the battery
reference node in the circuit
(D) the number of charge carriers
(B) Select node as reference node
in a circuit
(C) Apply Kirchoff Voltage Law
86. A circuit that is not con-
(D) Select mesh reference
nected is called what kind of
circuit? (E) Apply KCL to ground
(A) closed 91. When the distance between
(B) parallel two charges is halved, the
(C) series electrical force between the
charges
(D) open
(A) quadruples
87. The flow of electric charge (B) reduces to one fourth
is called
(C) halves
(A) meter
(D) doubles
(B) amp
(C) current 92. What is a general rule of
thumb for a Charging Sys-
(D) voltage
tem Voltage?
88. Jump starting a vehicle with (A) 12.6v
battery cables, what is the
(B) Above 9.6v
last step
(A) Connecting the power cable (C) 18.6v
to the good car (D) Above 13v

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
410 Chapter 3. Electricity

93. What stays the same in se- 98. Total series circuit wattage
ries? is equal to source voltage
(A) Resistance (A) multiplied by the voltage value
going through any resistor
(B) Power
(B) multiplied by the current value

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Current going through any resistor
(D) Voltage (C) divided by the current value
going through any resistor
94. A series circuit has how
many pathways for the elec- (D) divided by the voltage applied
trons to flow? to the circuit and the total resis-
tance of the circuit
(A) Two
99. Which of these materials is
(B) One a good insulator?
(C) Many (A) Plastic and metal
(D) Zero (B) Metal and rubber
(C) Plastic and rubber
95. The total resistance in a se-
ries circuit is the of all the (D) none of above
individual resistances.
100. Which of the following is
(A) Quotient considered a voltage rise?
(B) Sum (A) A motor
(C) Remainder (B) A resister
(D) Voltage (C) The source
(D) A diode
96. If a circuit has no continuity
is is said to be 101. electric potential is the
amount of
(A) closed
(A) energy charge
(B) shorted to ground
(B) charge force
(C) open
(C) charge energy
(D) shorted to voltage (D) force charge
97. Which is NOT true of a se- 102. which of the following
ries circuit choices is capasitors equa-
(A) One light bulb can be broken tions
and other lights will still work. (A) V = I.R
(B) All loads are a single loop (B) R = V/I
(C) Adding more loads will lessen (C) q = C.V
the current in the loop (D) W = F.s
(D) none of above (E) P=W/t

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 411

103. A circuit with 4 ohms of re- (A) C is directly proportional to

sistance and 3 amps would the area A of each plate
have volts. (B) C is inversely proportional to
(A) 7 the area A of each plate
(B) 1 (C) C is partially proportional to
the area A of each plate
(C) 12
(D) C is fully proportional to the
(D) 1.33
area A of each plate
104. For determine node volt-
108. An incomplete or broken
ages, we have to apply
circuit.
to each of the n-1 nonrefer-
ence nodes. Then use Ohm’s (A) Closed Circuit
law to express the cur- (B) Open Circuit
rents in terms of node volt-
(C) Cracked bulb Circuit
ages
(D) none of above
(A) KVL
(B) KCL 109. What stays the same in
parallel?
(C) Node
(A) Resistance
(D) Element
(B) Power
(E) Branch
(C) Current
105. The brightness of a light- (D) Voltage
bulb is most closely related
to 110. A voltmeter should be
(A) its resistance. placed in a circuit

(B) the voltage drop across it. (A) in parallel

(C) the current through it. (B) in series

(D) the power dissipated by it. (C) in order

(D) upside down
106. In a series circuit, the re-
ceivers do what with the 111. Metal sphere A has a
electricity? charge of-2 units and an
identical metal sphere, B,
(A) Get rid of it.
has a charge of-4 units. If
(B) Share it. the spheres are brought into
(C) Lose it contact with each other and
then separated, B will
(D) none of above
(A) gain 1 electron
107. How is the capacitance of (B) lose 1 electron
a parallel-plate capacitor af-
fected by the area of each (C) gain 3 electrons
plate? (D) lose 3 electrons

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
412 Chapter 3. Electricity

112. In analyzing node how 117. A parallel-plate capacitor

many nodes are taken as is charged and then dis-
the reference node? connected from the supply.
(A) 2 Which of the following will
increase the capacitance of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 1 the capacitor?
(C) 5 (A) Reduce the area of the plates
(D) 3
(B) Move the plates closer to each
(E) 6 other

113. The reference node is com- (C) Insert a conductor between

monly called? the plates of the capacitor
(A) The ground (D) Increase the potential differ-
ence across the capacitor
(B) The mesh
(C) The current 118. When your digital multi-
(D) The resistors meter reads an open circuit
it will usually have on the
(E) Ohm’s law screen of the multimeter.
114. How many laws are Kir- (A) 0000.
choff
(B) OL
(A) 1
(C) ?
(B) 3
(D) 1.
(C) 4
(D) 2 119. Photo cells create voltage
by converting energy into
(E) 10 electrical energy.
115. The wattage value for any (A) Solar
resistor is equal to
(B) Heat
(A) I X R
(C) Pressure
(B) E/R
(D) Mechanical
(C) I X E
(D) I/R 120. What are the basic laws
we can use in Nodal Analy-
116. In an electrical circuit, elec- sis?
trons move from the
(A) HVL
(A) Negative pole to negative
pole (B) KVL
(B) Negative pole to positive pole (C) KCL
(C) Positive pole to positive pole (D) HCL
(D) none of above (E) KBL

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 413

121. Allow flow in only one di- (A) both the knob and leaves be-
rection come positive
(A) CFL (B) both the knob and leaves be-
(B) LEDS come negative

(C) Diodes (C) the knob becomes negative

and the leaves become positive
(D) Sensors
(D) the knob becomes positive
122. Metal is used to make elec- and the leaves become negative
trical wires because
126. The total voltage in a cir-
(A) It allows an electric current to cuit with voltage drops of
freely flow. 15V, 25V, and 20V is?
(B) It slows electric currents from (A) 20V
flowing.
(B) 60V
(C) It is very cheap.
(C) 120V
(D) It is very expensive.
(D) 180V
123. If the voltage is 12 volts
and the resistance is 2, how 127. A glass rod becomes pos-
many amps do you have? itively charged when it is
rubbed with silk. This net
(A) 4
positive charge accumulates
(B) 3 because the glass rod
(C) 8 (A) gains electrons
(D) 6 (B) loses electrons
124. What must we do next af- (C) gains protons
ter we have selected a refer- (D) loses protons
ence nodes?
(A) we assign voltage designa- 128. Balloon A simultaneously
tions to non-reference nodes touches Balloons B and C.
Balloon A started with a
(B) Apply KCL to each of the non- charge of-4e, Balloon B
reference nodes started with a charge of +2e,
(C) Solve equations and Balloon C started with a
charge of +14e. What will
(D) All false
be the new charge on Bal-
(E) All true loon A after they were all al-
lowed to touch?
125. A negatively charged rod
touches the knob of a neu- (A) +12e
tral electroscope. Which (B) +6e
best represents the distribu-
tion of charge on the electro- (C) +8e
scope. (D) +4e

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
414 Chapter 3. Electricity

129. The formula E2/R 134. An ammeter is a device

(A) Voltage that can be used to measure

(B) Current (A) Current

(C) Power (B) Voltage

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) Resistance (C) Resistance
130. Current that flows with in (D) Power
a circuit connect to a bat-
tery. 135. Insulators are different
(A) Alternating Current than conductors in that in-
sulators
(B) Direct Current
(C) Constant Current (A) do not contain electrons or
protons
(D) Back and Forth Current
(B) do not contain any charge
131. In node analysis assume
the voltage source is consid- (C) have a weaker affinity for elec-
ered as one node is called trons

(A) Supermesh (D) do not allow charge to freely

move Insulators are different than
(B) Supernode
conductors in that insulators
(C) Node
(D) Mesh 136. A fan has a power rating
of 0.08 kW. It is switched on
(E) All answer is Correct
for 8 hours a day.Assuming
132. What basic laws are the that one month is 30 days,
underlying principles of how much energy does the
Nodal Analysis? fan convert in one month?
Give your answer in kWh.
(A) KCL
(A) 0.64 kWh
(B) KVL
(C) HCL (B) 2.4 kWh
(D) HVL (C) 19.2 kWh
(E) A and B true (D) 24 kWh
133. the meeting point of two
137. remains the same in a
or more circuit elements
series circuit.
(A) Mesh
(A) Resistance
(B) Node
(C) Ground (B) Voltage

(D) All answer is correct (C) Current

(E) All answer is wrong (D) Power

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 415

138. Dissolving salt in water in- 142. Nodal analysis produces a

creases the conductivity of compact set of equations for
the solution because the- the network, which can be
(A) salt gives the solution a net solved by
negative charge (A) Manual
(B) salt ions bond with the avail- (B) All true
able water molecules (C) Together with friends
(C) solution has an increase in ki- (D) All false
netic energy
(E) Computer
(D) concentration of ions in the so-
lution increases 143. Nodal analysis have
steps
139. What is the function of a
fuse? (A) 1

(A) To burn a wire. (B) 2

(C) 3
(B) To replace a copper wire.
(D) 4
(C) To protect an electrical appli-
ance. (E) 5
(D) To make a complete circuit. 144. Select the electrical compo-
nent used to measure cur-
140. How is the capacitance of
rent.
a parallel-plate capacitor af-
fected by the distance be- (A) Voltmeter
tween the plates? (B) Vaultmeter
(A) C is directly proportional to (C) Ammeter
the area A of each plate
(D) Ampmeter
(B) C is inversely proportional to
the distance d between the plates 145. A circuit consists of a 10.0-
ohm resistor, a 15.0-ohm re-
(C) C is partially proportional to
sistor, and a 20.0-ohm re-
the area A of each plate
sistor connected in parallel
(D) C is not affected by the area A across a 9.00-volt battery.
of each plate What is the equivalent resis-
tance of the circuit?
141. If two 10-ohm resistors
are connected in series, (A) 45.0 ohms
what is the total resistance (B) 4.62 ohms
of these resistors?
(C) 1.95 ohms
(A) 100 ohms
(D) 0.200 ohms
(B) 20 ohms
146. A negatively charged rod
(C) 5 ohms is brought near a neutral
(D) 1 ohm electroscope, causing the

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
416 Chapter 3. Electricity

leaves to diverge. This is an 151. What is a benefit of using

example of a parallel circuit?
(A) Conduction (A) It gets confusing.
(B) Induction (B) There are no problems.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Insulation (C) If one light goes out, it does
not affect the others.
(D) Friction
(D) If one light goes out, they all
147. An electric generator is go out.
used to convert energy
into electrical energy. 152. the reference point in an
electrical circuit from which
(A) Chemical voltages are measured is
(B) Mechanical (A) Ground
(C) Light (B) electric ground
(D) Hydrogen (C) basis ground
148. Which direction does (D) Plastic ground
charge flow in a circuit? (E) capacitor ground
(A) Negative to positive 153. The amount of current that
(B) Positive to negative flows through a circuit is
(C) in a zigzag blank to the voltage of the
circuit
(D) what
(A) indirectly proportional
149. What is the advantages of (B) direct proportional
using Nodal analysis?
(C) equal
(A) It can reduces the number of
(D) none of above
equations that must be solved
(B) It’s only needs three steps to 154. What is the electric field
complete between two metal plates
that have a change in poten-
(C) it can’t be solved manually tial of 120 V and a distance
(D) it must be solved with a com- of 0.04 meters.
puter programs (A) 48 N/C
(E) it can be solved manually (B) 4.8 N/C
150. Select the electrical compo- (C) 3000 N/C
nent used to measure volt- (D) none of above
age.
155. Resistance in an electrical
(A) Voltmeter
circuit means what?
(B) Vaultmeter
(A) to fight off bad guys
(C) Ammeter (B) to increase electricity and cur-
(D) Ampmeter rent flow

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 417

(C) to oppose or slow down cur- (C) mA

rent flow (D) A
(D) none of above
161. How is the electric force
156. When using a digital mul- between two charges af-
timeter the black lead con- fected when the distance be-
nects to the hole marked tween the charges is dou-
(A) V bled?
(B) A (A) Four times as much.
(C) COM (B) Two times as much.
(D) None of the above (C) Half as much.
(D) One-fourth as much.
157. Which method of charging
does not change the over- 162. Which is NOT a similarity
all charge on any object in- between gravitational force
volved? and electrical force?
(A) Induction (A) They both depend on the dis-
(B) Conduction tance
(C) Reduction (B) The both involve two objects
(either charged or with mass)
(D) Triboelectric
(C) They are both repulsive and
158. A complete circuit that has attractive
only one path to ground is
(D) They both significantly de-
called a circuit
crease with distance
(A) parallel
163. Which of the following is
(B) series-parallel
not a circuit protection de-
(C) short vice?
(D) series (A) Fuse
159. The unit for current is the (B) Circuit Breaker
(A) ohm (C) Relay
(B) amp (D) Fusible Link
(C) watt 164. If both sides of a light
(D) volt bulb are at the same volt-
age, what happens to the
160. When measuring with a light bulb?
digital multimeter on an au-
tomotive vehicle for voltage (A) It glows very brightly
you should select the (B) There is no light
symbol on the selector dial. (C) The brightness of the light will
(A) DC vary over time
(B) AC (D) The bulb will explode

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
418 Chapter 3. Electricity

165. The electric force between 169. The formula I2 * R is used

two or more charged ob- to find what?
jects depends on which of
(A) Current
the following quantities?
(A) charge and distance between (B) Voltage

NARAYAN CHANGDER
the charged objects (C) Resistance
(B) mass and distance between
the charged objects (D) Power

(C) charge and mass of charged

170. Current flows from higher
objects
potential to?
(D) quantity of charges and their
masses (A) lower potential in resistor

166. Ground that used when (B) medium potential in resistor

chassis acts as reference (C) maximum potential in resistor
point for all circuits is
(D) big potential in resistor
(A) chasis ground
(B) electric ground (E) huge potential in resistor
(C) basis ground
171. Three resistors of 20.
(D) ground ohms, 30. ohms, and 60.
(E) capacitor ground ohms are connected in se-
ries with a battery. A cur-
167. As more resistors are rent of 2 amperes will flow
added in parallel across through this circuit when the
a constant voltage source, potential difference of the
the power supplied by the battery is
source
(A) increases. (A) 10. V
(B) decreases. (B) 220 V
(C) does not change. (C) 110 V
(D) increases for a time and then
(D) 20. V
starts to decrease.
168. What does the resistance 172. charges are 20 cm apart
of a wire tell you? and feel a force of 500 N. if
(A) The speed of electron flow the distance between them
through it. becomes 60 cm, what is the
new force
(B) How tough it is for electrons to
flow through it. (A) 4500
(C) The amount of energy given (B) 540
to the electrons.
(C) 1500
(D) The amount of energy taken
away from the electrons. (D) 55.6

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.7 Solving a circuit with series and parallel resistors 419

173. The equation of continuity (B) potential difference

for an incompressible fluid, (C) ionized solution
A1v1 = A2v2, is essentially
an expression of the conser- (D) charge
vation of which of the fol- 178. What happens if there is a
lowing quantities? break at any point in a se-
(A) Energy ries circuit?
(B) Time (A) no current flows
(C) Linear momentum (B) current flows through an alter-
(D) Angular momentum native path

(E) Mass (C) resistance goes to infinity

(D) current reverses direction
174. Copper wire is a good
(A) insulator 179. Pick all the materials that
would be a conductor.
(B) resistor
(A) Metal frying pan
(C) conductor
(B) Rubber
(D) power source
(C) Plastic
175. The total current entering (D) Copper wire
the closed surface is to
(E) Stainless Steel
the total current leaving the
surface 180. What is the total circuit re-
(A) Equal sistance of two 25 ohm re-
sistors and three 75 ohm re-
(B) Similar
sistors connected in series?
(C) Alike
(A) 100 ohms
(D) Suited
(B) 200 ohms
(E) Greater
(C) 275 ohm
176. In what direction will a (D) 175 ohms
negatively charged parti-
cle accelerate in an electric 181. A supernode is formed by
field? enclosing a source con-
nected between two nonref-
(A) In the same direction as field
erence nodes and any ele-
(B) In opposite direction as field ments connected in with
(C) Perpendicular to field it
(D) Impossible to tell (A) voltage
(B) current
177. in order for charge to flow
between two parts of a cir- (C) charge
cuit there must be a (D) series
(A) ampere (E) parallel

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
420 Chapter 3. Electricity

182. Voltage drop stands for 187. The current flowing in an

what? electric circuit is increased
(A) the voltage applied to a circuit by

(B) the voltage flowing through a (A) decreasing voltage or increas-

ing resistance

NARAYAN CHANGDER
resistor
(C) the voltage used by a load (B) increasing voltage or decreas-
ing resistance
(D) none of above
(C) decreasing voltage and resis-
183. What is CCA? tance
(A) Cold Cranking Amps (D) increasing voltage and resis-
(B) Cool Cranking Amps tance
(C) Cold Conductor Amps 188. Which of the following is
(D) Cool Collected Apes an example of a load in a
circuit?
184. A complete, connected cir-
cuit: (A) Battery

(A) Closed Circuit (B) Wire

(B) Conductor Circuit (C) Fuse
(C) Open Circuit (D) Bulb
(D) none of above
189. First Steps to Determine
185. Two identical resistors con- Node Voltages is?
nected in series have an (A) Select a node as the reference
equivalent resistance of 4 node
ohms. The same two resis-
tors, when connected in par- (B) Apply KCL to each of the n-1
allel, have an equivalent re- nonreference nodes
sistance of (C) Solve the resulting simultane-
(A) 8 Ohms ous equations to<br />obtain the
unknown node voltages
(B) 2 Ohms
(D) Select Mesh
(C) 4 Ohms
(E) Apply KVL
(D) 1 Ohms

186. What should be the low- 190. The rate at which elec-
est in a parallel circuit (The- tric energy is transferred is
ory)? called

(A) Total Voltage (A) conventional current

(B) Total Resistance (B) power
(C) Total Current (C) resistance
(D) Ground (D) electric current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current 421

191. What does it take to make (A) Supernode has no voltage of

a computer operate? its own
(A) Power (B) Supernode requires the appli-
(B) Input/Output cation of KCL and KVL
(C) Ground
(C) the voltage source provides a
(D) All of the above constraint equation
192. The following are the (D) Requires only KCL to analyze
properties of a supernode,
except (E) Requires only KVL to analyze

3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current

1. Which one of the following 5. If resistance increases in the
is the most energy efficient circuit then the heat energy
(A) LED
(B) Incandescent bulb (A) increases

(C) CFL (B) decreases

(D) none of above (C) no change

(D) all the above
2. An electric fuse consists of a
thin wire made up of: 6. Heat generated in a cur-
(A) Glass rent carrying conductor is in-
versely proportional to the
(B) Lead
(A) Length of the conductor
(C) Graphite
(B) Thickness of the conductor
(D) Aluminium
(C) Amount of current passing
(E) Zinc
through the conductor
3. An electric fuse is made up (D) Duration of current passing
of: through the conductor
(A) Glass catridge
7. element of an electric iron is
(B) Ceramic catridge made up of
(C) Thin wire (A) nickel
(D) Electromagnet (B) chromium
4. Nichrome contains (C) nichrome
(A) 20% nickel 80% chromium (D) tungsten
(B) 80% nickel 20% chromium 8. traditional bulbs mainly
(C) 40 % chromium 60% zinc transfer
(D) none of above (A) electrical energy to light

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
422 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) electrical energy to heat 13. When an electric current

(C) light energy to resistance pass through by the conduc-
tors, the conductor
(D) heat energy to light
(A) to begin crash
9. When electric current flows (B) going to freeze

NARAYAN CHANGDER
through the metal filament
(C) heats up
of the bulb it gets heated to
very high temperature and (D) going to melt
becomes hot and start
emitting 14. Incandescent bulbs contain
(A) a filament
(A) White, light
(B) an LED
(B) Red, light
(C) a halogen
(C) White, heat
(D) a fluorescent tube
(D) Red, heat
15. According to joules law of
10. Which of the following
heating effect
property of nichrome is not
make to used as heating (A) H ∝ I2RT
coil? (B) H ∝ I 2 RT
(A) high resistivity (C) H ∝ 2RTI
(B) high melting point (D) H ∝ 2IRT
(C) ability to remain in red hot
16. In a bulb there is a thin wire
condition
called(a) filament(b) coil(c)
(D) high ductility element(d) fuse wire

11. Which of the following does (A) filament

not indicate the power of a (B) coil
circuit? (C) element
(A) I2R (D) fuse wire
(B) IV
17. Who discovered heating ef-
(C) IR2 fect of elecric current?
V2
(D) R (A) James Watt
12. An electric bulb is connected (B) Joule-Lenz
to a 220 V generator. The (C) Michael Faraday
current is 2 A. What is the
(D) Thomas Edison
power of the bulb?
(A) 110 watt 18. The material used to make
the coils of an electric heater
(B) 220 watt and an electric bulb are
(C) 440 watt (A) Nichrome and tungsten re-
(D) 330 watt spectively

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current 423

(B) Tungsten and copper respec- (C) heater

tively (D) All of the above
(C) Platinum and copper respec-
tively 24. Which of the following is a
good heating element?
(D) Copper and platinum respec-
tively (A) Copper
(B) Nichrome
19. Unit for expressing power
(C) Plastic
(A) watthour
(D) Wood
(B) watts
(C) kilowatthour 25. How much current is pro-
duced in an electric iron con-
(D) joule sumes energy at a rate of
880 W with the voltage is
20. Two gases filled in filament
220 V?
type electric bulb
(A) 2 ampere
(A) hydrogen, argon
(B) 4 ampere
(B) helium, argon
(C) 6 ampere
(C) nitrogen, argon
(D) 8 ampere
(D) oxygen, argon
26. Why are alloys used in heat-
21. The energy present in elec-
ing appliances?
tric current is
(A) More power
(A) mechanical energy
(B) Less resistivity
(B) light energy
(C) Greater melting point
(C) electrical energy
(D) Cheaper
(D) heat energy
27. Electricity produces effect
22. What do fuse ratings
mean? (A) Magnetic
(A) The number of fuses (B) Electric
(B) Amount of current that can (C) Both
flow through the circuit without the (D) No
fuse melting
28. When the length of a cur-
(C) Amount of resistivity passing rent carrying conductor in-
through the circuit crease twice, the amount of
(D) Watts consumed heat generated will

23. The electric heating is used (A) decrease by half

in (B) increases twice
(A) Fuse (C) remains same
(B) Light (D) increases 4 times

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
424 Chapter 3. Electricity

29. Name the element used for (C) VI

the filament of an electric (D) QV
bulb
(A) Copper 35. Name the gases filled in
bulbs to prolong the life of
(B) An alloy

NARAYAN CHANGDER
the filament
(C) Tungsten (A) Nitrogen
(D) Steel (B) Oxygen
30. Magnetic effect of current (C) Argon
was discovered by
(D) Hydrogen
(A) Oersted
36. electricity causes a filament
(B) Faraday
to
(C) Bohr
(A) change the direction of cur-
(D) Ampere rent
31. An Electric fuse is a de- (B) release a halogen
vice. (C) incandess
(A) Cooling (D) glow white
(B) Dangerous
37. The filament of A bulb, is a
(C) Hot wire of
(D) Safety (A) High resistivity, low melting
point
32. Applications of heating ef-
fect of current (B) Low resistivity, low melting
point
(A) Heating devices
(C) High resistivity, high melting
(B) Electric fuse
point
(C) Phone
(D) Low resistivity, high melting
(D) Electric bulb point
33. In a bulb, electric current 38. What is the power of a bulb
passes through a material that rated 250V & 4A cur-
named: rent?
(A) Coil (A) 100W
(B) Filament (B) 1KW
(C) Electromagnet (C) 200W
(D) None of these (D) 10W
34. The amount of heat H pro- 39. The amount of heat pro-
duced in time t is duced in a wire depends on
(A) VIt its
(B) 1/VIt (A) material

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current 425

(B) length 45. Electric bulbs generate

(C) thickness more heat because?

(D) all of these (A) Tungsten is a heating element

40. Full form of-CFL (B) Glass is good conductor of

heat
(A) Compact Flood Light
(C) Gas inside bulb heats up
(B) Common Full Light
(C) Compact Fluorescent Lamp (D) none of above

(D) Compact Flood Lamp 46. The heating effect of elec-

41. The heating effect of electric tric current depends on the
current is due to length and of the conduct-
ing wire.
(A) collision of electrons with
atoms (A) colour
(B) Heat of surroundings (B) thickness
(C) Fault of device (C) energy
(D) Collision of conductors (D) none of the above
42. The work done in moving
47. The conducting wire offers
the charge Q through a po-
some to the electrons.
tential difference V
(A) Q/V (A) resistance

(B) V/Q (B) help

(C) QV (C) flow
(D) 1/QV (D) energy
43. current in a heating element
48. Wires that are designed to
changes..
heat up are called
(A) electrical to thermal energy
(A) thermistors
(B) the resistance and thus the to-
tal energy (B) incandescent wires
(C) the conductivity of the element (C) thermal components
(D) the electrical energy into (D) heating elements
sound
49. there are types of effects
44. An electric bulb works on of electric current
the property of:
(A) 5
(A) Magnetic effect
(B) Cooling effect (B) 4
(C) Heating effect (C) 3
(D) Solar effect (D) 2

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
426 Chapter 3. Electricity

50. The heating coils/elements (C) potential

of different electrical ap- (D) current
pliances are usually made
from or wires. 1. 55. A combination of 2 or more
Copper 2. Aluminum 3. cells is known as

NARAYAN CHANGDER
Nichrome 4. Tungsten
(A) an electric cell
(A) 1 & 2
(B) a battery
(B) 1 & 4
(C) a switch
(C) 2 & 4
(D) a bulb
(D) 3 & 4
56. The commercial unit of elec-
51. Which fuse requires re-
tric energy is
placement of wire after it
is broken? (A) Kilowatt hour
(A) MCB (B) Watt
(B) Cartridge fuse (C) Joule
(C) Ceramic fuse (D) Kilowatt
(D) none of above 57. which bulb would be the
52. The rate at which electric brightest?
energy is dissipated or con- (A) 100W
sumed in an electric circuit is
(B) 240V
caleed
(C) 230V
(A) Electric Potential
(D) 12W
(B) Electric Resistance
(C) Electric Power 58. The coil of wire contained in
(D) Electric Energy an electric heater is known
as
53. kettles and toasters heat up (A) component
because
(B) element
(A) their element has a low resis-
tance (C) circuit
(B) their element has a high resis- (D) spring
tance
59. In case of thunderstorms,
(C) they are mains powered we use to protect appli-
(D) they have a low current rating ances.
(A) Electric fuse
54. Name the quantity whose
unit is kwh (B) Switch
(A) power (C) Heating element
(B) electric energy (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.8 Electric power and heating effect of current 427

60. A glowing bulb becomes (B) decreases

warm due to the (C) will be the same
(A) heating effect of current (D) will become zero
(B) magnetic effect of current
66. Which of the following pro-
(C) chemical effect of current
duces most heat?
(D) physical effect of current
(A) Long and thick wire
61. Use and throw fuse is? (B) Long and thin wire
(A) MCB (C) Short and thick wire
(B) Cartridge fuse (D) Short and thin wire
(C) Electric fuse
67. Which of the following ap-
(D) Ceramic fuse pliance does not show heat-
ing effect of electric cur-
62. A fuse wire is a wire of-
rent?
(A) High resistivity and low melt-
(A) electric heater
ing point
(B) electric bulb
(B) High resistivity and high melt-
ing point (C) electric stove
(C) Low resistivity and low melting (D) electric bell
point
68. Electric ovens work when
(D) Low resistivity and high melt- the is heated.
ing point
(A) Oven
63. Electric fuse breaks when (B) Wire
(A) Low current passes (C) Tungsten
(B) More current passes (D) None of these
(C) Current is passing constant
69. What is an electric fuse?
(D) none of above
(A) A safety device
64. Substances through which
(B) A light bulb
electric charges cannot
move freely- (C) A resistor
(A) Insulators (D) A conductor
(B) Conductors 70. Which of these are based
(C) Wood on the heating effect of cur-
rent?
(D) Plastic
(A) Geyser
65. As the amount of current
flowing through a conductor (B) Hair dryer
increases, the heating effect (C) Immersion rod
(A) increases (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 428 Chapter 3. Electricity

71. what is Electric coils? (B) earth wire

(A) a type of electrical conductor, (C) neutral wire
wound in the shape of a coil (D) all of above
(B) The iron is the small appliance
73. Battery to Light Bulb?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
used to remove wrinkles from fab-
ric (A) Chemical to Sound
(C) devices used to protect much (B) Chemical to Radiant
more expensive electrical compo- (C) Radiant to Chemical
nents
(D) Kinetic to Radiant
(D) This is the most common type
of fuse 74. CFL means?
(A) Complete fluorescent lamp
72. In all the electrical appli-
ances, the switches are put (B) Compact fluorescent lamp
in the (C) Complete flickering lamp
(A) live wire (D) none of above

3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs

1. When more light bulbs are (B) Insulators have high resis-
added in parallel arrange- tance and conductors have low re-
ment, the light bulbs will sistance.
(A) be brighter (C) Conductors and insulators
both have low resistance.
(B) be dimmer
(D) Conductors have high resis-
(C) be as bright tance and insulators have low re-
(D) none of above sistance.

2. Electrical energy is changed 4. How many different types

to in stoves, toasters, and of circuits are there?
ovens. (A) 1
(A) light energy (B) 3
(B) heat energy (C) 2

(C) sound energy (D) 4

(D) energy of motion 5. What allows electricity to

PASS EASILY THROUGH?
3. Which of the following BEST (A) Conductors
compares insulators and
conductors? (B) Insulators

(A) Conductors and insulators (C) Resistors

both have high resistance. (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 429

6. What allows electricity to 11. Voltage is measured in:

flow through, but SLOWS IT
(A) Amps (A)
DOWN?
(B) Voltrons (V)
(A) Conductors
(C) Volts (V)
(B) Insulators
(C) Resistors (D) Ohms (O)

(D) none of above 12. The flow of electricity in a

circuit-
7. In order for electricity to
flow through a circuit, the (A) current
circuit must be a closed, (B) flow
complete:
(C) circuit
(A) Path, so that the electricity can
make a complete circle. (D) none of above
(B) Donut, because circuits get 13. if resistance of a circuit
hungry. is tripled, and the voltage
(C) Wire, made out of rubber. stays the same, the current
will
(D) Solar panel, because circuits
only work with the sun. (A) double

8. The unit of power was (B) decrease by one third

named after (C) triple as will
(A) James Watt (D) not change
(B) Isaac Newton
14. A ladder made of which
(C) James Joule material would be the most
(D) Renee Descartes dangerous to use if some-
one were working around
9. ELECTRIC CELLS CAN BE AR- power lines?
RANGED IN AND MAN-
NER (A) fiberglass
(A) ZIGZAG, SERIES (B) metal
(B) PARALLEL. SERIES (C) plastic
(C) PARALLEL, ZIGZAG (D) wood
(D) SERIES, COMPLEX 15. Which of the following
10. What are the units for elec- items would best conduct
tric potential? electricity?
(A) amps (A) Copper
(B) ohms (B) Plastic
(C) volts (C) String
(D) kilograms (D) Wood

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
430 Chapter 3. Electricity

16. Which two objects use elec- (C) The bulbs remain the same
trical energy to move an ob- brightness
ject? (D) The bulbs explode and shards
(A) F. A fan and a pencil sharp- of glass get everywhere
ener

NARAYAN CHANGDER
21. What type of circuit connec-
(B) G. A radio and a stove tion should a light bulb be
(C) H. A lamp and a television connected to maintain the
amount of current in the con-
(D) J. A camera and an MP3
ducting wire?
player
(A) series circuit
17. In a parallel circuit is
(B) parallel circuit
split up among the resistors,
while is equal. (C) either series circuit or parallel
circuit
(A) voltage; current
(D) neither series circuit or paral-
(B) current; voltage lel circuit
(C) resistance; voltage
22. This the study of charges in
(D) resistance; current motion.
18. A motor has a current of (A) electrostatics
2.00 A flowing through it (B) electrodynamics
when it is powered with a
(C) gravity
12-volt battery. What is the
power used by the motor? (D) electromotive force
(A) 16 23. These materials are electri-
(B) 6 cal insulators.
(C) 14 (A) aluminium
(D) 24 (B) fabric
(C) diamond
19. What happens to the volt-
age in a series circuit? (D) gold

(A) The voltage stays the same (E) glass

(B) The voltage is added 24. In order to have a function-

ing electric circuit, you must
(C) The voltage is reduced
have (SELECT ALL THAT
(D) The voltage is split between APPLY)
the light bulbs
(A) an electric potential (power
20. As you continue to add light- source)
bulbs in series, what hap- (B) a switch
pens? (C) a conductive pathway
(A) The bulbs get brighter (D) electrical resistance (light, mo-
(B) The bulbs get dimmer tor, heating element, speaker)

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 431

25. Electrical energy is changed 30. Total resistance in a parallel

to in radios and televi- circuit
sions.
(A) Rt = R1 + R2 + R3
(A) light energy
(B) 1/Rt = 1/R1 + 1/R2
(B) heat energy
(C) Rt = R1 X R2 / R1 + R2
(C) sound energy
(D) Rt = RN / RV
(D) energy of motion
31. Potential difference is an-
26. In order to measure the volt-
other term for
age across a bulb in a circuit,
the voltmeter is connected in (A) current
(B) voltage
(A) Not connected in the circuit (C) energy
(B) parallel with the battery
(D) watts
(C) parallel with the bulb
(D) series with the bulb 32. What is an example of a
CONDUCTOR?
27. What are the three parts of (A) Glass
every electric circuit?
(B) Plastic
(A) a conductor, an energy
source, and a load (C) Metal
(B) a track, a loop, and a battery (D) none of above
(C) a conductor, an insulator,
33. As work output increases,
and wires
what happens to efficiency?
(D) a power plant, chemical en- Efficiency=(work output) /
ergy, and mechanical energy (work input) *100

28. What is an example of a IN- (A) increase

SULATOR? (B) decrease
(A) Steel (C) stay the same
(B) Rubber (D) none of above
(C) Human Body
34. If one bulb goes out in a
(D) none of above
series circuit, the remaining
29. To make a circuit complete bulbs
you must have a- (A) also go out
(A) complete path (B) get brighter
(B) switch (C) get dimmer
(C) bulb (D) explode, leaving shards of
(D) none of above glass everywhere

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
432 Chapter 3. Electricity

35. What is the efficiency of a 40. Which one is a conductor?

machine if 55.3 J of work (A) wood
are done on the machine,
but only 14.3 J is produced (B) iron
by the 1machine? (C) plastic spoon

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) 0.25 J (D) paper
(B) 26%
41. Which idea is NOT a trouble-
(C) 386% shooting step to find out
(D) 3.86 J why the electric circuit is not
working?
36. What is a conductor?
(A) Test the wires, are they tightly
(A) A material that allows electric- connected to the fahnestock clips?
ity to flow through it. The circuit is
complete.
(B) Are the batteries lined up neg-
(B) A material that does not allow ative to positive?
electricity to flow through. It stops
(C) Is the lightbulb big enough?
the flow of electricity.
(C) A light switch. (D) none of above

(D) none of above 42. What will happen if you put

too much battery in a cir-
37. A light bulb will shine cuit?
brighter when
(A) The bulb will burn out because
(A) An extra light bulb is added to too much energy
the circuit
(B) The electricity will be less
(B) An additional battery is added
(C) The bulb will remain light up
(C) A smaller battery is used because the bulb can hold the en-
(D) The switch is open in the cir- ergy.
cuit
(D) Nothing happen
38. What is Ohm’s Law?
43. What happens to the cur-
(A) V=W/Q rent in a series circuit if the
(B) Voltage cannot be destroyed resistance is doubled?
(C) V=IR (A) doubles
(D) V = m dot * Ve + (pe-p0) * Ae (B) halves
(C) quarters
39. What BLOCKS THE FLOW of
electricity through it? (D) quadruples
(A) Conductors 44. A complete path through
(B) Insulators which electricity can flow
(C) Resistors (A) insulator
(D) none of above (B) circuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 433

(C) conductor (D) because the power supply is

(D) generator not enough to light the bulb
brighter
45. Rashed builds two circuits
49. A material which electrons
each with three bulbs and a
are able to move through
battery. One circuit he con-
easily:
nects all three bulbs in se-
ries and the other circuit he (A) Circuit
connects the bulbs in paral- (B) Insulator
lel. If he removes one bulb
(C) Resistance
from each circuit, in which
connection will all the bulbs (D) Conductor
go out?
50. What is used to measure
(A) Series circuit the flow of current in a cir-
(B) Parallel circuit cuit?
(C) Both the circuits (A) Ammeter
(D) None of the circuits. (B) Battery
(C) Rheostat
46. Which device provides elec-
trical energy to run an elec- (D) Voltmeter
tric circuit? 51. This is the study of charges,
(A) the wire or charged objects that do
not involve moving charges
(B) the switch
or current.
(C) the battery
(A) gravity
(D) none of above
(B) electrodynamics
47. Which statement describes (C) electrostatics
one feature of a closed cir- (D) insulators
cuit?
(A) charges do not flow 52. If one burned-out bulb
causes all of the lights to fail
(B) bulbs will not shine in a circuit, what might you
(C) the circuit is complete conclude?
(D) none of above (A) It is a parallel circuit.
(B) More batteries are needed.
48. In a simple circuit with long
coiled wire, 1.5 volts and a (C) It is a series circuit.
bulb. Why does the bulb (D) A heavier wire is needed.
getdimmer?
53. Which components do all
(A) because the load is too many
circuits have in common?
(B) because the wire is too long Select three options.
(C) because the wire is too short (A) energy source

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
434 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) voltmeter (A) the wire

(C) wires (B) the switch
(D) ammeter (C) the battery
(E) device that needs electrical en- (D) none of above

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ergy
58. Arlo made a circuit. His
54. What charge does an elec- light bulb did not light up.
tron have? Which of these could NOT be
the cause?
(A) negative (-)
(A) open switch
(B) positive (+)
(B) dead battery
(C) neutral or no charge (0)
(C) closed circuit
(D) none of above
(D) loose connection
55. Jack builds a series circuit
with two cells and a buzzer. 59. Khaled connects a bulb, a
What will happen if he re- cell, an ammeter and a
moves one cell from the cir- switch in a series circuit. He
cuit? switches it ON and the am-
meter shows a current of
(A) The buzzer will make a softer 0.8 A. What will be the cur-
sound. rent if he connects 2 more
(B) The current in the circuit will in- cells in series.
crease. (A) 0.8 A
(C) The buzzer will make a louder (B) 2.8 A
sound.
(C) 1.6 A
(D) The current in the circuit will
(D) 2.4 A
decrease.
60. The following are disad-
56. How can you tell that a cir-
vantages of connecting too
cuit is a series circuit?
many bulbs in parallel EX-
(A) The light bulbs are lit. CEPT:
(B) The is more than one path for (A) Bulb will easily overheat.
charge to flow through.
(B) It is difficult to maintain and in-
(C) There is only one path for stall.
charge to flow through. (C) There will be current overload-
(D) One bulb is lit and the other is ing in the conducting wire.
not lit. (D) There will be equal amount of
57. Roshan describes the basic voltage for every load in a circuit.
parts of an electric circuit us- 61. What is a circuit?
ing a shower as a model.
Which part of a circuit does (A) Provides electricity to the load
the water pipe represent? (B) poor electrical conductor

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 435

(C) path where electricity can flow 67. What type of circuit is ap-
(D) switch and a conductor propriate in connecting ap-
pliances and light bulbs at
62. Insulator is? home?
(A) material that current can pass (A) series circuit
through easily
(B) parallel circuit
(B) material that current cannot
(C) either series circuit or parallel
pass through easily
circuit
(C) magnet
(D) neither series circuit or paral-
(D) static electricity lel circuit
63. The wire is- 68. Which device manages the
(A) an insulator flow of current in an electric
(B) a conductor circuit?

(C) a magnet (A) the wire

(D) none of above (B) the switch
(C) the battery
64. Three bulbs connected in se-
ries (D) the light bulb
(A) are brighter than one bulb 69. The plastic around the wire
(B) are dimmer than one bulb on is
its own (A) conductor
(C) do not light up (B) insulator
(D) are the same brightness as (C) decoration
one bulb
(D) none of above
65. This device is used to open
and close a circuit. 70. In a parallel circuit what
is always the same across
(A) switch each resistor in parallel?
(B) bulb (A) The current.
(C) battery
(B) The resistance.
(D) none of above
(C) The voltage.
66. In this kind of circuit the pos- (D) The charge flow.
itive terminals and the neg-
ative terminals of betteries 71. A material that does NOT
and appliances are wired to- allow electricity to flow is
gether. called
(A) parallel (A) a conductor
(B) series (B) a fuse
(C) short (C) an insulator
(D) long (D) a transformer

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
436 Chapter 3. Electricity

72. The rubber coating on a (C) circuit

wire cord is because it (D) none of above
does not allow electricity to
pass through to you. 77. Watts is the same as
(A) magnetic (A) Joules per second

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) a conductor (B) Voltage per second
(C) an insulator (C) Current per second

(D) a circuit (D) none of above

78. As work increases, what
73. Electrical potential energy is
happens to powerP=W/t
defined as
(A) increase
(A) the potential energy of a mov-
ing electron. (B) decrease
(B) the potential energy of a mov- (C) stay the same
ing proton. (D) none of above
(C) the number of charges pass- 79. A connection that allows
ing a point in a given amount of current to take an unin-
time. tended path is called a(n)
(D) the stored energy in a moving (A) series circuit.
neutron.
(B) parallel circuit.
74. Energy our eyes can see- (C) short circuit.
(A) electromagnetism (D) combination circuit.
(B) electrical energy 80. Why is silver NOT used to
(C) light energy make electrical wires?
(D) none of above (A) Because it is a poor conductor
of electricity.
75. What is the best type of
(B) Because it is cheap and can
circuit to use when putting
tarnish.
lights on a Christmas tree?
(C) Because it is a very good con-
(A) Parallel Circuit ductor of electricity.
(B) Static Electricity (D) Because it is expensive and
(C) Series Circuit can tarnish.
(D) Battery Circuit 81. What is the name of the
material for a material that
76. When one has connected a
electric current cannot pass
conductor, a source of elec-
through?
tricity such as a battery and
an appliance such as a bulb, (A) insulator
one has created an electric (B) conductor
(A) switch (C) closed circuit
(B) insulator (D) short circuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 437

82. The following are advan- and a bulb. When the

tages of bulbs connected in 1.5 volts battery is replaced
series EXCEPT: with a 3 volts battery. What
(A) It does not overheat. will happen?

(B) It is easy to install and main- (A) The bulb gets brighter.
tain. (B) The bulb gets dimmer.
(C) Low current is needed to light (C) Nothing has changed.
all the bulbs. (D) The bulb stays at the same
(D) Large amount of current is level of brightness.
needed to light all the bulbs.
87. There are two acceptable
83. If you decrease the voltage ways electricians and electri-
in a circuit, which of the fol- cal engineers show a switch
lowing will happen? is closed in a circuit diagram.
(A) current decreases What are they? Select 2 an-
swers.
(B) current increases
(A) Draw a line connecting two
(C) the electrons disappear dots
(D) the bulbs will get brighter (B) Write “closed” next to the
switch
84. If one bulb of Christmas
lights, connected in series (C) Draw a circle with an “X” in it
is burned out, what will (D) Draw an arc connecting the
happen to the other light switch to a wire with your pencil
bulbs?
(A) All other bulbs will no longer 88. Where does an electric cur-
work. rent flow?

(B) All other bulbs will continue to (A) in an open circuit

light (B) broken circuit
(C) The brightness of the bulbs (C) in a closed circuit
will increase. (D) in a busted bulb
(D) The brightness of the bulbs
will decrease. 89. A complete circuit can (but
doesn’t necessarily have to)
85. Which would cause an elec- include a-
tric circuit to lack a current? (A) wood block
(A) open switch (B) bulb, switch, and buzzer
(B) closed switch (C) rubber band
(C) lighted bulbs (D) none of above
(D) none of above
90. What is the name of the
86. Imagine a simple circuit material that electric current
with one 1.5 volts battery can pass through?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
438 Chapter 3. Electricity

(A) insulator 95. What does it mean when a

switch is open? Choose all
(B) conductor
that apply.
(C) closed circuit
(A) Current moves through the en-
(D) short circuit tire circuit

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Current cannot move through
91. What is the efficiency of the
the entire circuit
machine if the input is 263 J
and the output is 142 J? (C) The circuit is complete
(A) 6.26% (D) The circuit is incomplete

(B) 54% 96. What type of circuit connec-

tion should a light bulb be
(C) 100%
connected to maintain max-
(D) 260% imum brightness?
(A) series circuit
92. Electric current is defined as
(B) parallel circuit
(A) the opposition to the flow of
electrons (C) either series circuit or parallel
circuit
(B) the amount of voltage in a bat-
tery (D) neither series circuit or paral-
lel circuit
(C) the rate at which protons
move through a wire. 97. A material that does not
allow electricity to flow
(D) the rate at which electrons
through the circuit is known
move through a wire.
as a
93. A series circuit has 1200- (A) Conductor
ohms of total resistance (B) Source
with 12 V as the power sup-
ply. What is the total cur- (C) Transformer
rent of this circuit? (D) Insulator
(A) 100 amps 98. Levi is wanting to light a
(B) .01 amps bulb. What does he need to
get the bulb to light?
(C) 10 amps
(A) A battery and a paper clip
(D) 14, 400 amps
(B) A battery and a wire
94. What is an example of a RE- (C) A paper clip and a wire
SISTOR? (D) A switch and a wire
(A) Light bulb
99. What charge does a proton
(B) Plastic have?
(C) Water (A) negative (-)
(D) none of above (B) positive (+)

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 439

(C) neutral or no charge (0) 105. Compared to a 3-Ohm re-

(D) none of above sistor, a 6-Ohm resistor has
(A) 1/4 the power
100. Which statements describe
an open circuit? Check all (B) 1/2 the power
that apply. (C) 2 times the power
(A) Bulbs will shine. (D) 4 times the power
(B) Bulbs will not shine.
106. The form of energy that
(C) The circuit is incomplete. can produce light, heat, mo-
(D) The circuit is complete. tion, and magnetic force.
(E) Charges flow. (A) electricity
101. The circuit that has only (B) water
one path for electricity to (C) grass
travel around.
(D) none of above
(A) parallel circuit
107. An electrical current is
(B) series circuit
(A) the movement of electric
(C) no circuit
charges through a conductor.
(D) none of above
(B) convert electrical energy into
102. Materials that don’t allow movement energy
electricity to flow throught (C) for controlling whether cur-
them easily are called rent flows in an electric circuit.
(A) insulators (D) none of above
(B) conductors
108. How many volts is pro-
(C) semiconductors
duced by three cells of 3 V
(D) gravity each in series?
103. To complete a circuit path- (A) 3V
(A) paper will work (B) 1.5V
(B) a nail will work (C) 9V
(C) wood will work (D) 27V
(D) none of above
109. The current through a 10
104. When adding light bulbs ohm resistor is 1.2 amperes.
in series, the total resistance What is the potential differ-
and the current (flow ence (voltage) across the re-
rate) sistor?
(A) increases; increases (A) .12 V
(B) increases; decreases (B) 12 V
(C) decreases; decreases (C) 120 V
(D) decreases; increases (D) 8.3 V

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
440 Chapter 3. Electricity

110. allows electricity to (C) A magnet

flow through it. (D) none of above
(A) a conductor
115. Which item uses electricity
(B) an insulator to make heat?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) a magnet (A) radio
(D) none of above (B) toaster
111. Calculate current if a (C) fan
charge of 10 Coulombs
(D) speaker
flows past a point in 5 sec-
onds 116. This measures electromo-
(A) 2 Amps tive force.
(B) 50 Amps (A) ampere
(C) 0.5 Amps (B) coulomb
(D) none of above (C) volt
(D) ohm
112. Which of the following
statements is true about a 117. Chang wants to build a
basic electrical circuit? circuit that will light up
(A) No electricity will flow through the bulb from a flashlight.
a circuit without a light. Which component could
Chang leave out and still
(B) Electricity will flow through a
light up the bulb?
circuit without a source of energy.
(A) the switch
(C) No electricity will flow through
a circuit that has an open switch. (B) the battery
(D) Electricity will flow through a (C) the wire
circuit that forms an incomplete (D) none of above
loop.
118. Imagine a circuit with a
113. Parallel Circuit 1.5 volts battery and a
(A) Electricity has more than one bulb and a similar circuit
way to travel through the circuit. with a 3 volts battery and
The light bulb burns the longest. two bulbs. Which has the
(B) Lightbulb burns the brightest brighter glow?
in this circuit. (A) The bulbs in both circuits will
(C) railroad tracks not lit.

(D) none of above (B) The circuit with 1.5 volts bat-
tery and one bulb.
114. stops the flow of elec- (C) The circuit with 3 volts battery
tricity. and two bulbs.
(A) A conductor (D) The bulbs in both circuits are
(B) An insulator of similar brightness levels.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 441

119. In a circuit diagram, which 124. A device for opening or

item is represented by a closing the flow in a circuit
straight line? is
(A) bulb (A) an insulator
(B) motor (B) a battery charger
(C) wire
(C) a switch
(D) battery
(D) none of above
(E) resistor
120. The accumulation of ex- 125. How does the flow rate of
cess electric charge on an charge (i.e. current) in a
object is called parallel circuit divide if the
branches have different re-
(A) Static electricity sistances?
(B) Electric discharge
(A) Equal, more charge flows
(C) Resistance through bigger resistor
(D) Circuit (B) Equal, more charge flows
121. In order to measure the throught the smaller resistor
current flowing through a (C) Unequal, more charge flows
bulb in a circuit, the amme- through bigger resistor
ter is connected in
(D) Unequal, more charge flows
(A) Not connected in the circuit through smaller resistor
(B) parallel with the battery
(C) parallel with the bulb 126. What type of circuit con-
nection is used in Christmas
(D) series with the bulb lights?
122. Which of these objects is (A) series circuit
an electrical insulator?
(B) parallel circuit
(A) Copper Wire
(C) either series circuit or parallel
(B) Paper Clip
circuit
(C) Steel Pole
(D) neither series circuit or paral-
(D) Rubber Gloves lel circuit
123. In a circuit diagram, which
item is represented by a cir- 127. Which device carries the
cle with an “M” inside? flow of current in an electric
circuit?
(A) bulb
(A) the wire
(B) motor
(C) wire (B) the switch
(D) battery (C) the battery
(E) resistor (D) the light bulb

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
442 Chapter 3. Electricity

128. Voltage divided by Cur- 132. What is a path that electric

rent (V / I) equals currents flow
(A) Current (A) circuit
(B) Power (B) current

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Resistance
(C) voltage
(D) Watts
(D) none of above
129. A student tested different
items to determine which 133. The unit for Power is
items conduct electricity. (A) Joules
Which list below includes
only items that do NOT con- (B) Amperes
duct electricity? (C) Watts
(A) rubber eraser, glass rod, plas-
(D) None
tic button
(B) copper wire, glass rod, steel 134. insulators
paper clip
(A) power source
(C) steel paper clip, plastic button,
glass rod (B) turns energy on and off
(D) rubber eraser, plastic button, (C) let electricity flow through eas-
copper wire ily

130. What holds the filament in (D) stop electricity from flowing
a lightbulb? through easily

(A) glass bulb suport 135. A material that allows

(B) support wires electricity to flow through
the circuit without disrup-
(C) wire attachment point
tion is known as a
(D) none of above
(A) Switch
131. Why are most household
(B) Transformer
circuits parallel, rather than
series? (C) Conductor
(A) Parallel circuits allow some (D) Source
lights and appliances to be used
when others are off. 136. What happens to the volt-
(B) Parallel circuits carry less cur- age in a parallel circuit?
rent than series circuits. (A) The voltage stays the same
(C) Parallel circuits allow no lights (B) The voltage is added
and appliances to be used when
others are off. (C) The voltage is reduced
(D) Parallel circuits don’t require (D) The voltage is split between
fuses or circuit breakers. the light bulbs

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 443

137. What is the main disad- (B) geothermal energy (energy

vantage of parallel circuits? from inside the Earth)
(A) Any break in the circuit stops (C) sound energy
the flow of charges. (D) none of above
(B) They are complicated to de-
142. Circuits in your home,
sign and build.
school, or other buildings
(C) There are multiple paths for are circuits.
charges to flow. (A) series
(D) none of above (B) parallel
138. An electric circuit contains (C) short
a battery, a switch, and a (D) none of above
bulb. Which of the follow-
ing will MOST LIKELY hap- 143. Which statement is correct
pen if you add another bat- about electric current pow-
tery to the circuit? ered by a battery? I. It al-
ways flows clockwise.II. It
(A) The bulb will not shine gets used up as it goes
(B) The bulb will shine brighter around the circuit.III. It does
than it did with one battery not get used up as it goes
(C) The bulb will shine the same around the circuit.
(D) The bulb will shine half as (A) I
bright as it did with one battery (B) III
(C) I and II
139. If V= I*R is rearranged to
solve for I. What is the new (D) I, II and III
equation? 144. How does the resistance
(A) I = V/R change as you add bulbs to
(B) I = R/V a series circuit?

(C) I = R*V (A) The resistance does not

change.
(D) R = V*I
(B) The resistance decreases.
140. It is a closed-loop through (C) The resistance increases.
which current flows.
(D) none of above
(A) circuit
145. Which statements describe
(B) current a closed circuit? Check all
(C) resistance that apply.
(D) voltage (A) Bulbs will shine.
(B) Bulbs will not shine.
141. The flow of electricity in a
circuit can produce- (C) The circuit is incomplete.
(A) solar energy (energy from the (D) The circuit is complete.
sun) (E) Charges flow.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
444 Chapter 3. Electricity

146. Calculate the current for (A) The rest of the bulbs continue
a 120-volt refrigerator that to shine at maximum brightness.
uses 650 watts of power. (B) The rest of the bulbs continue
(A) 0.18 to shine at a lower brightness.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 5.4 (C) The rest of the bulbs stop shin-
ing and shut off.
(C) 120
(D) none of above
(D) 78, 000
151. Circuits in home are usu-
147. The flow of electricity can
ally connected in
produce-
(A) series circuit
(A) biofuel energy (comes from
living matter) (B) parallel circuit
(B) light, heat, and sound (C) either series circuit or parallel
circuit
(C) geothermal energy (comes
from inside the Earth) (D) neither series circuit or paral-
lel circuit
(D) none of above
152. What is the power from a
148. Which statement describes 20 V battery connected to
an open circuit? a light bulb that draws 1.5
(A) The circuit is incomplete and Amps of Current?
broken, and the lights in the circuit (A) 13.33 Watts
shine.
(B) 13.33 Ohms
(B) The circuit is complete and un-
broken, and the lights in the circuit (C) 30 Watts
shine. (D) 30 Ohms
(C) The circuit is incomplete and
153. What supplies energy in
broken, and the lights in the circuit
an electric circuit?
do not shine.
(A) a conductor
(D) none of above
(B) light bulb
149. Find the resistance of a (C) a wire
circuit that draws 0.06 am-
peres with 12 volts applied. (D) a battery
(A) 2 ohms 154. What is the symbol and
(B) 20 ohms units for resistance?

(C) 200 ohms (A) R:ohms

(D) 24 ohms (B) R:volts

(C) R:amps
150. How do the lights in a se-
ries circuit behave when one (D) I:ohms
bulb burns out? (E) I:amps

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 445

155. The unit of work was 159. How much does it cost to
named after run you 70 W TV for 120 hrs
(A) James Watt at $0.10 per kWh
(A) $0.84
(B) Isaac Newton
(B) $840
(C) James Joule
(C) $8.4
(D) Renee Descartes
(D) $0.17
156. Which of the following
best describes a parallel cir- 160. How does flipping a light
cuit? switch off stop the light from
illuminating the room?
(A) Current flows along one path-
way. (A) The switch stops the flow of the
electric current
(B) Current flows along more
than one pathways. (B) The switch increase the flow of
the electric current.
(C) The flow of current comes
(C) The switch sends the electric
from several sources.
current somewhere else.
(D) The flow of current comes
(D) The switch absorbs the electric
from more than one load.
current instead of sending it to the
157. A circuit consist of four light.
light bulbs. If the first light
161. Philip needs to choose an
bulb burns out, what will
item to use to complete a cir-
most likely happen to the
cuit he is making.Which of
other light bulbs?
the following items would
(A) The other light bulbs will be be his BEST choice?
1/3 brighter. (A) metal coin
(B) The other light bulbs will be (B) glass bead
1/4 dimmer.
(C) plastic straw
(C) The other light bulbs will blink
on and off. (D) wooden toothpick

(D) The other light bulbs will go 162. Voltage divided by Resis-
out. tance (V / R) equals
(A) Current
158. The path that the electric-
ity flows from the battery to (B) Power
the light bulb and back to (C) Ohms
the battery is called the
(D) Watts
(A) circuit
163. A circuit with the switch
(B) components
open allows
(C) wires (A) electricity to flow so the device
(D) switch is off

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
446 Chapter 3. Electricity

(B) eectricity to not flow so the de- 169. The Total Resistance of the
vice is on circuit
(C) electricity to flow so the device (A) 2 Ohms
is on
(B) 10 Ohms
(D) electricity to not flow so the de-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 5 Ohms
vice is off
(D) 8 Ohms
164. To move or travel in one
direction- 170. Which one of these is a
(A) path good conductor of electric-
ity?
(B) flow
(A) Paper Tube
(C) circuit
(D) none of above (B) Wax String
(C) Metal Wire
165. What is the symbol and
unit for current? (D) Hot Tacos
(A) I:amps 171. Which materials do you
(B) I:ohms need to build an electric cir-
(C) I:volts cuit?
(D) R:ohms (A) battery holder, light bulb
holder
(E) V:volts
(B) battery, bulb, copper wire,
166. Bulbs convert into switch
(A) solar, light (C) switch, battery and bulb
(B) electrical, light (D) bulb, copper wire and switch
(C) electrical, movement
172. What is the effect of chang-
(D) none of above
ing the wire in a circuit from
167. What supplies the energy a straight short wire to a
in a simple circuit? longer coiled thick wire?
(A) wires (A) Nothing has changed.
(B) battery (B) The bulbs become dimmer.
(C) bulb (C) The bulbs become brighter.
(D) none of above (D) The bulbs stay at the same
168. In a series circuit was is level of brightness.
the same everywhere in the
173. Materials that allow elec-
circuit?
tricity to flow through them
(A) resistance easily such as copper are
(B) electric pressure called
(C) voltage (A) insulators
(D) current (B) semiconductors

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.9 Electric circuit with Bulbs 447

(C) conductors (D) The flow of current comes

(D) none of above from the light bulb.

174. A circuit contains two re- 178. Tammy makes a complete

sistors in series. One is simple circuit with one bulb
5ohms and the other 10 and three batteries. The
ohms. What is the total re- bulb lights for an instant
sistance of the circuit? and then goes out. Why?
(A) 5 ohms (A) Too much electricity flows
(B) 10 ohms through the bulb’s filament
(C) 15 ohms (B) Not enough electricity flows
around the circuit
(D) none of above
(C) The batteries are flat
175. Mrs. Byars is building
a simple circuit with a bat- (D) The batteries are not good
tery, light bulb, and copper
wires. When she connects 179. Power is a measure of
the wires to the battery ter- how much can be done in
minals, the light bulb does a set amount of
not light up. Why doesn’t (A) Work, Time
the bulb light up?
(B) Work, Energy
(A) Copper isn’t a conductor.
(C) Energy, Force
(B) A battery can’t make a light
bulb shine. (D) Force, Work
(C) It isn’t dark outside. 180. Voltage is the measure of:
(D) The circuit is open.
(A) the flow of the current in a cir-
176. Energy from air vibrations- cuit
(B) the change in electrical energy
(A) thermal energy between two points in a circuit.
(B) sound energy (C) the strength of the current in a
(C) heat energy circuit
(D) none of above (D) the electrical energy in a cir-
cuit.
177. Which of the following
best describes a series cir- 181. What are two factors that
cuit? affect the brightness of the
(A) Current flows along one path- bulbs?
way. (A) Number of dry cells
(B) Current flows along many
(B) Number of wires
pathways.
(C) Number of light bulbs
(C) The flow of current comes
from the switch. (D) Number of switches

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
448 Chapter 3. Electricity

182. In a circuit, 3A of current (A) The batteries are not con-

pass through the light bulb. nected properly.
The resistance of the light (B) The batteries are used up or
bulb is 1.5 ohms. What is uncharged
the voltage of the battery?
(C) There is insufficient electricity

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) 1.3 flowing in the circuit.
(B) 3.0 (D) Too much electricity flows
(C) 4.5 through the bulb’s filament and
(D) 6.0 the bulb blows.

183. What will happen if one 187. Which of the following is

light bulb is removed from a usually connected in series
series circuit? circuit?
(A) The other bulbs will not work. (A) Christmas lights
(B) The other bulbs will get dim- (B) appliances at home
mer. (C) light bulbs at home
(C) The other bulbs will get (D) headlight of motorcycle
brighter.
188. An example of a voltage
(D) The battery will become
source is a(n)
stronger.
(A) electrical wire.
184. Any device that uses cur-
(B) electric motor.
rent is a
(C) battery.
(A) switch.
(D) magnet.
(B) voltmeter.
(C) battery. 189. Which best describes a se-
ries circuit?
(D) resistor.
(A) It has two light bulbs.
185. A student added another
(B) The same current flows
light to an electric circuit and
through both light bulbs.
all the lights became dim-
mer. What is most likely the (C) It uses a single battery.
cause of the dimmer lights? (D) The current is divided between
(A) The batteries are weak. the light bulbs.
(B) The light bulbs are hot. 190. What will happen if one
(C) The circuit is a series circuit. light bulb is removed from a
(D) The circuit is a parallel circuit. parallel circuit?
(A) The other bulbs will not work.
186. Why might a bulb have
busted when a 3 pieces 3 (B) The other bulbs will get dim-
volts battery are both con- mer.
nected across in a simple se- (C) The other bulbs will continue
ries circuit? to light.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy 449

(D) Some bulbs will get dimmer 193. How does a parallel cir-
and some will get brighter. cuit change when a branch
is added?
191. Which of the following can (A) The total resistance increases,
you directly relate to bulb so the current in the circuit de-
brightness? creases.
(A) voltage (B) The total resistance decreases,
so the current in the circuit in-
(B) current
creases.
(C) resistance (C) The total resistance increases,
(D) power so bulbs shine at a lower bright-
ness.
192. How much power comes (D) none of above
from a 10 V battery con-
nected to a 2 Ohm resistor? 194. Electrical energy is
changed to in light bulbs.
(A) 50 Watts
(A) light energy
(B) 5 Watts (B) heat energy
(C) 20 Watts (C) sound energy
(D) .5 Watts (D) energy of motion

3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy

1. Which of the following (B) P = IV
lamps has the highest en- (C) P = IR
ergy efficiency?
(D) P = I/V
(A) Compact fluorescent lamp
(B) halogen lamp 4. A toaster, rated 1500 W
240 V, is switched on for 15
(C) Incandescent lamp minutes. Calculate the en-
(D) LED lamp ergy used.

2. How many kilowatts are in (A) 3600 J

80 W (B) 22 500 J
(A) 0.008 kW (C) 216 000 J
(B) 0.08 kW (D) 1 350 000 J
(C) 0.8 kW 5. What quantities do you
(D) 8 kW need to calculate energy?

3. What is the equation for (A) Current and Voltage

power? (B) Power and time
(A) V = IR (C) Resistance and current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
450 Chapter 3. Electricity

(D) Power and Voltage 10. Most atoms have a

charge
6. An air-con, rated 1.8 kW
(A) positive
240 V, is switched on for 10
minutes. Calculate the en- (B) neutral

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ergy used. (C) negative
(A) 1 080 000 J (D) all atoms are different in
(B) 144 000 J charge
(C) 2400 J 11. A 5kW electric cooker is
(D) 18 J used for 55 minutes to cook.
Calculate the cost of electri-
7. W = 500 Joules t = 25 sec- cal energy used if the rate
ondsP =? ? ? per unit is 50 sen.
(A) 0.05 W (A) RM 0.23
(B) 20 W (B) RM 230
(C) 12500 W (C) RM 2.30
(D) 2000 W (D) RM275

8. Which statement best de- 12. What unit of measurement

scribes the relationship be- do we use to measure cur-
tween current, voltage, and rent flow?
resistance? (A) Watts
(A) A circuit’s current decreases (B) Volts
when higher voltage and lower re-
sistance is applied. (C) Amps

(B) A current increases when (D) Ohms

lower voltage and higher resis- 13. What is the total current of
tance is applied. ten 90 W light bulbs con-
(C) A current increases when nected on the same circuit?
higher voltage and lower resis- (A) 0.75 A
tance is applied.
(B) 7.5 A
(D) none of above
(C) 1.33 A
9. When measuring how much (D) 13.3 A
electrons are slowed down
in a circuit by payloads, we 14. How many seconds are in 9
use the unit days
(A) amps (A) 540 s
(B) volts (B) 32400 s
(C) ohms (C) 12960 s
(D) none of above (D) 777, 600 s

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy 451

15. Which sub-particle has a 20. How many hours are in 12

negative charge? min
(A) proton (A) 720 hr
(B) neutron (B) 0.2 hr
(C) electron (C) .12 hr
(D) both a neutron and an elec- (D) 1.2 hr
tron
21. A flashlight bulb with a po-
16. What unit of measurement
tential difference of 4.5 V
do we use to measure elec-
across its filament has a
trical potential difference?
power output of 8.0 W. How
(A) Watts much current is in the bulb
(B) Volts filament?
(C) Amps (A) 3.7 A
(D) Ohms (B) 0.23 A

17. Dean uses rice cooker (C) 1.8 A

which has power rating of (D) 0.56 A
2.2kW twice a day. The pe-
riod for each time he uses 22. How many kilowatts are in
the rice cooker is 15 minutes. 6500 W
How much electrical energy (A) 0.65 kW
is used in kWh?
(B) 6.5 kW
(A) 1.10kWh
(C) 65 kW
(B) 0.67kWh
(D) 6, 500, 000 kW
(C) 0.55kWh
(D) 0.27kWh 23. What unit is the electrical
energy consumption of ap-
18. How many watts are in 2 pliances usually measured
kW in?
(A) 0.2 W (A) watts
(B) 2 W
(B) joules
(C) 200 W
(C) kilo-watt hours
(D) 2000 W
(D) amperes
19. What is the power rating of
an oven that uses 4 kWh of 24. How many seconds are in 4
energy in 2 hours? hours
(A) 0.5 kW (A) 240 s
(B) 8 kW (B) 14400 s
(C) 6 kW (C) 0.067 s
(D) 2 kW (D) 400

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
452 Chapter 3. Electricity

25. Which way do electron 30. What quantities do you

flow? need to calculate power?
(A) Positive to negative (A) Current and Voltage
(B) Negative to positive (B) Power and time

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Negative to Negative (C) Resistance and current
(D) Positive to Positive (D) Power and Voltage
31. identical lightbulbs are con-
26. What is the result of the re-
nected to a circuit. What is
sistance of components in a
the power of each lightbulb
circuit?
if the total current is 15 A?
(A) An increase in the current
(A) 1800 W
(B) A drop (decrease) in the cur-
(B) 300 W
rent
(C) 90 W
(C) An increase in the voltage
(D) 8 W
(D) A drop (decrease) in the volt-
age 32. If the cost 1kWh of electric-
ity is RM0.30, what is the
27. The measurement of the cost of using a 1.5kW oven
force that is needed to move for 4 hours?
electrons across a conduc-
(A) RM1.80
tive material refers to
(B) RM2.50
(A) current
(C) RM2.20
(B) resistance
(D) RM3.20
(C) voltage
33. Copper, silver, and the hu-
(D) none of above
man body are examples of
28. The kilowatt-hour is a unit (A) conductors
of (B) insulators
(A) Energy (C) resistors
(B) power (D) none of above
(C) Charge
34. A 2000W vacuum is used
(D) Voltage for 0.5hours. How long
will it takes a 100 W im-
29. Amount of electrons flow- mersion heater to use the
ing past a point in a circuit. same amount of electrical
Also called current. energy?
(A) ampere (A) 5 hours
(B) voltage (B) 10 hours
(C) wattage (C) 15 hours
(D) recistance (D) 20 hours

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy 453

35. When measuring a circuit through the electric appli-

you get a voltmeter reading ance in 9 minutes?
of 3 volts and an ammeter (A) 2 C
reading of 600 mA. What is
the power being supplied to (B) 8 C
the device? (C) 540 C
(A) 1.8 W (D) 1 080 C
(B) 1800 W 40. A positive ion has elec-
(C) 0.005 W trons than normal.
(D) 5 W (A) more
(B) fewer
36. A current of 4 A flows
through a 20 V car head- (C) the same number
light bulb. Calculate the (D) none of above
electric power. Remem-
ber:P = VI 41. What is the unit for power?
(A) 80 W (A) Ampere
(B) 200 W (B) Watt
(C) 2.5 A (C) Kilowatt hour
(D) 4.55 A (D) Voltage

37. A bulb is labelled 6 V, 0.6 42. What is the electrical en-

A. What is the power of the ergy of a 750 W waffle iron
bulb? that is used for 15 min

(A) 0.6 W (A) 11, 250 kWh

(B) 5W (B) 11.25 kWh

(C) 0.1875 kWh
(C) 3.6W
(D) 50 kWh
(D) 6W
43. How many amps are in
38. How much time did you
800mA?
cook dinner if the oven uses
1.5 kW of power and you (A) 800, 000 A
used a total of 13.5 kWh of (B) 8 A
energy?
(C) 0.8 A
(A) 9 hrs
(D) 80 A
(B) 0.1 hrs
44. In what direction do the
(C) 20.25 hrs
electrons flow in a circuit
(D) 5 hrs with a battery as the energy
source?
39. An electric appliance is la-
belled 2 V, 4 W. How (A) clockwise
much electrical charges flow (B) counterclockwise

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
454 Chapter 3. Electricity

(C) from positive end of the bat- 49. What are the units for en-
tery around the circuit to the neg- ergy?
ative end (A) kWh
(D) from negative end of the bat- (B) Joules
tery around the circuit to the posi-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Both
tive end
(D) Neither
45. What is the power rating of
a space heater that uses 1.2 50. What is the resistance if the
kWh of energy in 45 min? current is 3 A and the Volt-
age 12 V
(A) 0.026 kW
(A) 1 Ohm
(B) 54 kW
(B) 3 Ohms
(C) 0.9 kW
(C) 4 Ohms
(D) 1.6 kW (D) 12 Ohms
46. A fluorescent lamp with a 51. An electric heater is rated
power rating of 40 W pro- 230V, 10 A. Calculate the
duce 36 W of light energy. power of the electric heater
What is the efficiency of the in kW.
lamp?
(A) 2300
(A) 90%
(B) 23
(B) 10% (C) 2.3
(C) 36% (D) 0.23
(D) 40%
52. If the ammeter shows a
47. Device used to measure the reading of 997 mA, how
electromotive force in a cir- many amps of current is
cuit flowing through the circuit?
(A) Ammeter (A) 997 A

(B) Multimeter (B) 99.7 A

(C) 9.97 A
(C) Ohmmeter
(D) .997 A
(D) Voltmeter
53. Why do electrons move
48. What is the potential differ- from one atom to another in-
ence across a resistor that stead of protons?
dissipates 5.00 W of power
and has a current of 5.0 A? (A) they have less mass
(B) they are slower
(A) 1.0 V
(C) they are held with more force
(B) 4.00 V
by the nucleus
(C) 0.20 V (D) they are the only subparticle
(D) 125 V with a charge

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy 455

54. What is the energy used of (C) 8, 400 Baht

a light bulb if it is plugged
(D) 2.94 Baht
into a 120 V outlet for 90 hrs
and has 240 Ohms of resis- 59. What unit of measurement
tance? do we use to measure resis-
(A) 5.4 kWh tance?
(B) 60 kWh (A) Watts
(C) 54 kWh (B) Volts
(D) 0.5 kWh
(C) Amps
55. How much time did you (D) Ohms
play video games if the PS4
uses 110 W of power and 60. The type of current in a cell
you used a total of 16.5 phone is
kWh of energy?
(A) AC
(A) 6.63 hrs
(B) DC
(B) 0.15 hrs
(C) 150 hrs (C) could be either AC or DC

(D) 50 hrs (D) none of above

56. a pair of 15-watt computer 61. An electric appliance la-

speakers are connected to a belled 80 W. What does the
12-volt power supply. what label means?
is the electric current run-
(A) The rate of change of power is
ning through the speakers?
80 W
(A) 1.25 A
(B) The rate of change of energy
(B) 0.8 A is 80 J/s
(C) 12.5 A (C) The rate of change of current
(D) 180 A is 80 A
57. How many hours are in 90 (D) The rate of change of voltage
min is 80 V
(A) 5400 hr
62. What does “Power” de-
(B) 1.3 hr scribe?
(C) .5 hr (A) The strength of electric current
(D) 1.5 hr (B) The size of a potential differ-
58. How much does it cost to ence
run you 70 W TV for 120 hrs (C) The rate at which energy is
at 3.50 Baht per kWh? converted from one form to an-
(A) 8.40 Baht other
(B) 29.40 Baht (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
456 Chapter 3. Electricity

63. What is the electrical en- (B) 2 Light bulbs

ergy of a 70 W TV that is
(C) 12 Light bulbs
used for 110 hr
(A) 0.63 kWh (D) 24 Light bulbs

(B) 7700 kWh

NARAYAN CHANGDER
68. The unit used to measure
(C) 1.57 kWh power is the
(D) 7.7 kWh (A) Watt
64. The characteristic of any (B) Newton
material to resist the flow of (C) Joule
electrons
(D) Newton*meter
(A) Ohms
(B) Resistivity 69. A 200W electric keetle is
(C) Watts used to heat up water for 15
minutes. How much electri-
(D) Amperage cal energy is used?
65. A tool that can be used (A) 0/03kWj
to measure voltage, amper-
age and resistance is called (B) 0.04kWj
a (C) 0.05kWj
(A) ammeter (D) 0.06kWj
(B) ohmmeter
(C) multimeter 70. Ions are atoms that have
lost or gained
(D) voltmeter
(A) protons
66. A current of 5A flows in a
(B) neutrons
heating elements for 10 min-
utes. If the potential differ- (C) electrons
ence across the elements is
(D) any one of these particles
240 V, calculate the electri-
cal energy is used by the el-
71. Jefri just finished watching
ements
television with the power
(A) 12kJ rating 180W. The electrical
(B) 7.2 kJ energy used by the tele-
vision is 0.27kWh. How
(C) 720 kJ
many hours did Jefri watch
(D) 2.4kJ the television?
67. How many 50 W light bulbs (A) 1 hour
can you put on a circuit that (B) 1.5 hours
can hold a maximum of 10
A (C) 2 hours
(A) 5 Light bulbs (D) 3 hours

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
3.10 Commercial unit of electrical energy 457

72. A television is labelled 250 75. Samson washes his long

W, 240 V is used 5 hours per dark locks every day. He
day in one month. If the cost spends half an hour each
of electricity is 24 sen per day drying his hair with an
unit, what is the cost of op- electric hair dryer with a
erating the appliance in the power rating of 1.5 kW. If
month of June? the unit cost of electricity is
(A) RM 5.00 2.75 Baht per kWh, how
much does Samson spend
(B) RM 6.00 on drying his hair each
(C) RM 8.00 week?
(D) RM 9.00 (A) 2.10 Baht
73. Samson washes his long (B) 14.42 Baht
dark locks every day. He (C) 28.90 Baht
spends half an hour each
day drying his hair with (D) 144.20 Baht
an electric hair dryer with 76. How many watts are in
a power rating of 1.5 kW. 0.003 kW
How much total energy will
be used by the hair dryer in (A) 0.3 W
one week? (B) 3 W
(A) 52.5 kWh (C) 300 W
(B) 0.75 kWh (D) 3000 W
(C) 5.25 kWh
77. A filament bulb is labelled
(D) 36 kWh 240 V, 60 W. What is the
74. According to Ohm’s law, Re- current flows through the fil-
sistance is equal to the volt- ament and the resistance of
age divided by: the filament?
(A) potential difference (A) 0.25A, 60Ohm
(B) conduction (B) 0.25A, 960 Ohm
(C) time (C) 4.00 A, 60Ohm
(D) current (D) 4.00A, 240 Ohm

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
NARAYAN CHANGDER
 4. Magnetic effects of electric
current

4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields

1. What does a compass nee- (A) solenoid
dle point to? (B) turbine
(A) Geographic North (C) transformer
(B) Awesomeness (D) direct current
(C) Magnetic North
5. The place on a magnet
(D) North by Northwest where the force it exerts is
the strongest is called
2. Characteristic of magnets
due to aligning atoms. (A) a magnetic pole
(A) Magnetite (B) a magnetic field line
(B) Magnetic Poles (C) a domain
(C) Permanent Magnet (D) none of above
(D) Steel 6. A magnetic force is a(n)
3. Magnets are surrounded by (A) push
an invisible area called (B) pull
(A) A Magnetic Field (C) invisible field
(B) Invisible Field (D) all of the above
(C) Newton Area 7. region surrounding a mag-
(D) Electricity net that exerts a force on
other magnets and objects
4. a cylindrical coil of wire, made of magnetic materials
used to produce a magnetic
field when an electrical cur- (A) magnetic field
rent passes through the wire (B) magnetic domain

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
460 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) magnetic pole (C) Copper

(D) magnetism (D) Nickel

8. Magnetic field lines sur- (E) Cobalt

rounding a magnet are con-
13. Current flowing through a

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ventionally drawn
wire is generating a mag-
(A) from south to north netic field. The greater the
(B) from north to south current, the the magnetic
field.
(C) either way
(A) stronger
(D) Who knows? !
(B) weaker
9. All permanent magnets
(C) faster
have two
(D) slower
(A) magnetic charges
(B) magnetic fields 14. You have two magnets.
(C) magnetic needles One is in your hand and
the other is sitting on a ta-
(D) magnetic poles ble. You move the SOUTH
pole of your magnet near
10. Which one has the shortest
the SOUTH pole of the mag-
wavelength?
net on the table. What hap-
(A) X-ray pens?
(B) microwave (A) Nothing
(C) radio (B) They repel
(D) gamma (C) They attract
11. What does electrons (D) A chemical reaction
mean?
15. A compass is
(A) negative charge and located
on the outside of the atom. (A) a magnet that is free to move
and always points east.
(B) electrons flow from one place
to another (B) not a magnet.
(C) a series of electrons that flow (C) a magnet that is free to move
from the north to the south pole and always points north.
(D) none of above (D) a magnet that does not move.

12. Which of the materials be- 16. Which of the following is

low can be attracted by a true about a bar magnet?
magnet? Check ALL that ap- (A) Its magnetic field is strongest
ply. near its center.
(A) Iron (B) It is surrounded by a magnetic
(B) Gold field.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 461

(C) The north pole is stronger electrical energy and mag-

than the south pole. netism. What is the main
(D) The south pole is stronger process that this club will in-
than the north pole. vestigate?
(A) electromagnetism
17. As in the case of unlike mag-
netic poles, unlike electric (B) electric charge
charges ? (C) electronic devices
(A) repel each other (D) electrical safety
(B) attract each other 22. What type of device can
(C) easily loses its magnetism increase and decrease volt-
age?
(D) strengthens the magnetic field
(A) Generators
18. A material that is made of
(B) Transformers
iron that is attracted to other
materials also made of iron (C) Galvanometers
(A) magnet (D) Electric motors
(B) attract 23. Magnets have a north and
(C) force a south
(D) temporary (A) shape
(B) color
19. A temporary magnet does
what? (C) pole
(A) loses its magneitsm (D) region
(B) attracts each other 24. The area around a mag-
(C) repels each other net in which magnetic forces
can act is the ?
(D) strengthens the magnetic field
(A) magnetic field
20. An electron travels due (B) magnetic poles
north through a vacuum in a
region of uniform magnetic (C) magnetism
field that is also directed due (D) lines of force
north. It will:
25. The space around a magnet
(A) be unaffected by the field where magnetic forces are
(B) speed up present is called
(C) slow down (A) magnetism
(D) follow a right-handed (B) a bar magnet
corkscrew path (C) the area of whatchagicto-
21. Kelly wants to start a sci- bruicticsytheleneijromeloucksico-
ence club that investigates nium
the interactions between (D) a magnetic field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
462 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

26. Alternating current is made (A) The current flowing in the con-
by ductor
(A) alternating current and volt- (B) Length of the conductor
age. (C) Magnetic field strength
(B) alternating the direction of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) The speed of the conductor
voltage of the power source.
(C) huge chemical batteries. 31. A magnetic is a grouping
of billions of atoms that all
(D) none of the above
have magnetic fields lined
27. Which best describes a non- up in the same way
magnetic material? (A) domain
(A) The magnetic poles of the (B) field
atoms point in different directions.
(C) pole
(B) The magnetic poles of the
atoms point in the same direction. (D) area

(C) The magnetic poles of its 32. Earth acts like a giant mag-
atoms are grouped in domains net because its center is
that point in different directions. made up MOSTLY of
(D) none of above (A) granite

28. How can you increase the (B) limestone

strength of an electromag- (C) iron
net? (Select more than one)
(D) nickel
(A) Add more coils to the wire
33. Why would a compass nee-
(B) Add a stronger battery
dle move if held near a
(C) Remove the battery current-carrying wire?
(D) Remove the coils from the wire (A) A current carrying wire will
cause any object to move
29. Magnets are made of tiny
sections of magnetic fields (B) A compass will point to any
that are aligned to pro- kind of metal
duce a larger magnetic field. (C) Both the compass needle and
These are called the current carrying wire have
(A) magnetic domains magnetic fields
(B) magnetic fields (D) none of above
(C) magnetic sections 34. What does atoms mean?
(D) electromagnets (A) positive charge located in the
30. Which of the following will center.
not influence the magnetic (B) the smallest unit of matter, ev-
force acting on a current- erything is made of atoms, 3 par-
carrying conductor? ticles make an atom..

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 463

(C) negative charge and located (A) true

on the outside of the atom. (B) false
(D) none of above (C) maybe ?
35. What is a hard magnetic (D) none of above
material?
40. The side of the magnet that
(A) Stays magnetic once magne-
points South is called
tised e.g. steel
(A) Down Under
(B) Stays magnetic once magne-
tised e.g. iron (B) Southwest
(C) Hard to break (C) The South side
(D) Looses magnetism easily e.g. (D) South Pole
iron
41. The energy that is stored in
36. Magnets are made of tiny an object or system
sections of magnetic fields (A) kinetic energy
that are aligned to pro-
(B) potential energy
duce a larger magnetic field.
These are called (C) magnetic energy
(A) frontiers (D) force
(B) domains 42. This magnet loses magneti-
(C) electromagnets zation easily
(D) electron shells (A) temporary
37. The SI unit of magnetic field (B) electromagnet
is (C) ferromagnet
(A) weber (D) permanent
(B) guass
43. material that permanent
(C) tesla magnets can be made from
(D) farad (A) soft iron
38. The magnetic field of a mag- (B) iron and cobalt
net is due to the magnetic (C) alnico
fields produced by its
(D) none of above
(A) protons
(B) neutrons 44. When current running
through a wire is placed
(C) quarks in the field of a permanent
(D) electrons magnet,

39. Just as it is easy to separate (A) solar energy is transformed

electric charges, it is rela- into light
tively easy to isolate a mag- (B) electrical energy is trans-
net’s poles. formed into sound

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
464 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) solar energy is transformed 49. Changing the current

into mechanical energy changes the of an elec-
tromagnet.
(D) electrical energy is trans-
formed into mechanical energy (A) charge

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) strength and direction
45. An ampere is a
(C) strength
(A) unit of resistance.
(D) direction
(B) unit of current.
(C) type of charge. 50. What does the first Right
Hand Rule tell you?
(D) current.
(A) Fingers point to current and
46. Material that PREVENTS the thumb points toward thumb
electric current or heat from (B) Fingers are the magnetic field
flowing. & thumb direction of current
(A) electromagnetic field (C) Fingers are current and
(B) electric current thumb is direction of magnetic
field
(C) insulator
(D) Thumbs up is the OK sign for
(D) none of above magnetic field to work
47. Which of these bests de- 51. How is Earth’s magnetic
scribes an electromagnet? field similar to that of a mag-
(A) A permanent magnet made net?
from electric currents. (A) It is hundreds of miles long
(B) A temporary magnet made (B) It has north and south poles
from electric currents.
(C) It is made in Earth’s core
(C) A temporary magnet made
from magnetic currents. (D) It is shaped like a horseshoe

(D) none of above 52. What is a difference be-

tween a magnet and a mag-
48. The primary reason a bird netic material?
can perch harmlessly on
(A) Magnets are metals and mag-
bare high voltage wires is
netic materials are not.
that
(B) Magnetic materials attract to
(A) a bird’s feet are close to-
either pole of a magnet; magnets
gether.
only attract to opposite poles.
(B) a bird has a very large electri-
(C) Magnets are attracted to mag-
cal resistance.
nets and magnetic materials are
(C) there is no potential difference repelled by magnets.
across the bird’s feet.
(D) Magnets and magnetic mate-
(D) all of the above rials are the same thing.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 465

53. A straight wire carrying a 57. Magnets produce fields.

9.0 A current is in a uni- (A) electric
form magnetic field oriented
at right angles to the wire. (B) magnetic
When 75 cm of wire is in the (C) baseball
field, the force on the wire is (D) corn
1.2 N. What is the strength
of the magnetic field (B)? 58. Earth’s magnetic field is gen-
HINT:F=I.L.B erated in the core, which is
(A) = 0.18 N made of that is constantly

(B) = 0.18 T
(A) fire, steaming
(C) = 0.18 Cm
(B) aluminum, moving
(D) = 0.18
(C) iron, moving
54. A is a current-carrying (D) none of above
coil of wire with many loops
59. A magnet can hold a piece
(A) electromagnet of paper to the door of a
(B) solenoid refrigerator. How does the
(C) magnet magnet stick without touch-
ing the door?
(D) compass
(A) Gravity attracts the magnet to
55. Surrounding a magnet is a the door.
magnetic field. Surround- (B) The magnet induces a mag-
ing an electron is an electric netic field in the paper.
field. Surrounding Earth is
(C) The magnetic force of the
(A) an alteration in space in which magnet can act at a distance.
mass experiences a force.
(D) Atoms from the magnet pass
(B) a gravitational field through the paper and touch the
(C) both of these door.

(D) neither of these 60. What is frequency mea-

sured in?
56. What does the author de-
(A) N
scribe?
(B) Hz
(A) the characteristics of magnets
and magnetic fields (C) F
(B) the reasons why some materi- (D) cm
als are attracted to magnets
61. Which of the following
(C) the different shapes, statements is NOT correct?
strengths, and sizes of magnets (A) The position of the Earth’s
(D) the ways different compasses magnetic poles has changed over
work to tell direction the course of history.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
466 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) Earth does not have magnetic (B) increasing the number of coils
poles (C) changing the direction of cur-
(C) The force of Earth’s magnetic rent flow
field is greatest at its North and (D) altering the material used to
South poles make the coils

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(D) none of above
66. Like poles on a permanent
62. What is the movement of magnet will
electrically charged parti- (A) attract each other
cles?
(B) repel each other
(A) Voltage
(C) always interact
(B) Electric Current
(D) point in the same direction
(C) Electric Resistance
(D) Magnet 67. What makes an electromag-
net different than a perma-
63. Which of the following is a nent magnet select all
property of magnets? that apply
(A) They can give you a “shock” (A) it can be turned on and off
when you touch them (B) it does not need any electricity
(B) They can push or pull objects (C) its strength can be increased
without touching them and decreased
(C) They are always peach color (D) its polarity can be reversed
and cold to touch
(D) They fall faster than other ob- 68. What are the north and
jects when you drop them south ends of a magnet
called?
64. You can cause a permanent (A) borders
magnet to lose its magnetic
field if (B) tips

(A) You forcefully vibrate the ob- (C) caps

ject, causing its domains to fall out (D) poles
of alignment.
69. A coil spins in a magnetic
(B) By rubbing an iron object with field. Of the followingwhich
a permanent magnet in the same causes an increase in the in-
direction repeatedly. duced EMF inthe coil?
(C) You freeze the object. (A) Spinning the coil faster
(D) You connect the north and (B) Removing the coil from the
south poles of two magnets. magnetic field
65. An electromagnet’s poles (C) Keeping the flux at a constant
may be reversed by: rate
(A) decreasing the voltage of the (D) Decreasing the number of
coil turns of wire inthe coil

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 467

70. What items will a magnet 75. An electron is moving north

attract? in a region where the mag-
netic field is south. The mag-
(A) Beach ball, glass
netic force exerted on the
(B) nails, paper clip electron is:
(C) book, paper (A) zero
(D) golf ball, glue (B) up
(C) north
71. An example of the best in- (D) south
sulator is
76. Three properties of mag-
(A) copper
nets are:
(B) salt
(A) attracts wood, attract or repel
(C) plastic insects, when swings freely one
end points to the south
(D) sand
(B) Crocodiles eat magnets
72. The needle of a compass (C) attract iron and materials that
lines up in a direction the contain iron, attract or repel other
field lines of the magnetic magnets, and when freely swing-
field. ing one end always points north
(A) perpendicular to (D) magnets interact with stuff
(B) parallel with 77. The reason a magnet can at-
(C) opposite to tract an unmagnetized nail
is that
(D) without regard to
(A) nails really are magnetized
(fooled you suckerz!)
73. A permanent magnet is a
material that produces a (B) nails become permanently
field without any mag- magnetized in a magnetic field
netic field being present. (C) nails become temporarily
(A) electronic, internal magnetized in a magnetic field
(D) a magnet can attract any
(B) magnetic, internal
metal object
(C) magnetic, external
78. If you drop a stone into a
(D) electronic, external hole drilled all the way to
the other side of Earth (ne-
74. pulls an object closer glect the molten core), the
(A) magnet stone will

(B) force (A) come to an abrupt stop at

Earth’s center.
(C) attract
(B) speed up until it gets to Earth’s
(D) repel center

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
468 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) speed up until it reaches (B) positive

Earth’s other side. (C) gravitational
(D) slow down until it reaches (D) electric
Earth’s center.
84. A temporary magnet

NARAYAN CHANGDER
79. Where is the force of attrac-
tion the strongest on a mag- (A) has no magnetic domains un-
net? til a magnet is near it
(A) at the poles (B) has magnetic domains
aligned only when another mag-
(B) in the middle
net is near it
(C) above the magnet
(C) has magnetic domains
(D) below the magnet aligned all the time
80. If two magnets are close to- (D) has no magnetic domains
gether, the magnetic force
will be 85. What type of current is pro-
duced in a battery
(A) smelly
(A) induced
(B) weak
(B) magnetic
(C) strong
(C) alternating
(D) positive
(D) direct
81. What are the parts of the
magnet that is attracted to 86. what is the unit of magnetic
the paper clips? flux density?
(A) the center (A) Wb
(B) the poles (B) W
(C) the equator (C) T2
(D) the horseshoe (D) Wb/m2

82. A magnet is defined as 87. What is an electric motor?

(A) the force between two oppo- (A) a device that uses an electro-
site poles magnet to convert electrical en-
(B) any material that has a mag- ergy into mechanical energy
netic field (B) a machine that converts me-
(C) the electron cloud surround- chanical energy into electrical en-
ing an object ergy

(D) none of above (C) an electronic device that in-

creases the strength of an electric
83. A magnetic field is a field signal
of force that is produced by (D) a device that increases or de-
moving charges. creases the voltage of alternating
(A) northern current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 469

88. Which item would the mag- 93. Magnetic forces work in the
netic domains be the most around a magnet.
unaligned? (A) magnetic force
(A) glass jar (B) magnetic poles
(B) steel nail (C) magnetic field
(C) bar magnet (D) magnetic field lines
(D) none of above 94. a magnet that never loses
its magnetism
89. Magnetic fields pointing
into a page are represented (A) Generator
by a(n) , while out of the (B) Magnet
page are represented by
(C) Permanent Magnet
a(n)
(D) Temporary Magnet
(A) b / c
(B) heart / flower 95. One part of a freely swing-
ing magnet always points
(C) dot / x ?
(D) x / dot (A) to Earth’s magnetic pole in the
(E) shaded region / white region Northern Hemisphere
(B) to Earth’s magnetic pole in the
90. magnetic field lines go from Southern Hemisphere
(A) north to south (C) to Earth’s magnetic field in the
(B) south to north Northern Hemisphere
(C) both ways (D) to Earth’s magnetic field in the
Southern Hemisphere
(D) east to west
96. is like a giant magnet
91. What type of charge do and it has a north and south
electrons have? magnetic poles?
(A) negative (A) Earth
(B) positive (B) Sun
(C) neutral (C) Mars
(D) nothing (D) moon

92. If the distance between two 97. John is using an electric cur-
charged objects increases, rent to produce a magnetic
the electric force between field. What will happen
them when he turns off the cur-
rent?
(A) increases
(A) The strength of the magnetic
(B) decreases
field will decrease.
(C) stays the same (B) The strength of the magnetic
(D) stops field will increase.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
470 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) The poles of the magnetic 102. Electric currents passing

field will reverse. through wires will produce
(D) The magnetic field will disap- a(n)
pear. (A) solenoid

NARAYAN CHANGDER
98. Which of the following will (B) magnet
increase the strength of an
(C) magnetic field
electromagnet?
(A) Increase the voltage of the bat- (D) insulator
tery
103. The invisible field that sur-
(B) Decrease the voltage of the rounds a magnet.
battery
(A) magnets
(C) Wrap the coils around the
core less times (B) magnetic poles
(D) none of above (C) magnetic force
99. The space around a magnet (D) magnetic fields
where the force of a magnet
can attract best is called 104. ‘Like” magnetic poles
(A) magnetism and “Opposite magnetic
poles
(B) bar magnet
(C) horseshoe magnet (A) run; stay
(D) magnetic field (B) attract; repel

100. Another unit used to mea- (C) stay; repel

sure the strength of a mag- (D) repel; attract
netic field is the
(A) gauss 105. Circuit breakers and fuses
protect
(B) ampere
(C) volt (A) devices from breaking
(D) watt (B) devices from electricuting you

101. A substance becomes (C) devices from getting wet

magnetic when (D) devices from overheating
(A) positive ions gather at one end
and negative ions at the other end 106. What type of electricity oc-
(B) positive charges line up on curs when you rub a balloon
one side and negative charges on on your sweater?
the other side (A) thermal electricity
(C) magnetic domains are cre- (B) current electricity
ated by the alignment of spinning
electrons (C) static electricity
(D) none of above (D) work electricity

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 471

107. To pull together, as oppo- 112. The magnetic behavior of

sites ? any everyday object is influ-
enced by effects at four dif-
(A) repel
ferent levels. Which of these
(B) attract is at the highest level?
(C) magnetism (A) domains
(D) core (B) particles

108. A volt is a unit of (C) atoms

(A) charge. (D) crystals

(B) electric potential. 113. In a diagram of a mag-

(C) energy. netic field, field lines
cross.
(D) work.
(A) always
109. Electric motors are devices (B) rarely
that convert energy into
energy. (C) frequently

(A) electrical; mechanical (D) never

(B) mechanical; electrical 114. Surrounding every mag-

(C) chemical; potential net is a

(D) mechanical; kinetic (A) magnetic field

(B) electrical current
110. Whether magnetic forces
pull apart or push together (C) another magnet
depends on (D) none of above
(A) magnetic force
115. Objects that are attracted
(B) magnetic poles to each other are called
(C) magnetic field (A) Nonmagnetic objects
(D) magnetic field lines (B) Metal

111. A hydrogen atom that has (C) Magnetic Objects

lost its electron is moving (D) Electric Objects
east in a region where the
magnetic field is directed 116. Which of the following
from south to north. It will does NOT incorporate a
be deflected: magnet?
(A) up (A) Telephone
(B) down (B) Bankcard
(C) north (C) Video tapes
(D) south (D) Sewing machine

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
472 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

117. The particles that collide (B) transform mechanical energy

with atoms of gases, caus- to sound
ing the atmosphere to glow, (C) transform electrical energy to
forming shimmering sheets mechanical energy
of color are called
(D) transform electrical energy to

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) auroras potential energy
(B) magnetic poles
122. The energy something has
(C) magnetic field lines because it is moving
(D) magnetic forces (A) kinetic energy
118. A force of attraction or re- (B) potential energy
pulsion between the poles (C) magnetic energy
of two magnets.
(D) force
(A) magnets
123. What is responsible for
(B) magnetic poles
the Magnetic Field around
(C) magnetic force Earth?
(D) magnetic fields (A) The Earth’s aluminium crust
119. What THREE ways are elec- (B) The Earth’s iron core
tromagnets different from (C) The Earth’s copper mantel
permanent magnets?
(D) The Sun
(A) they can be turned off and on
124. What would you do if a
(B) they can increase in strength
fuse is blown?
by increasing the current in the
wire (A) replace it with a new fuse that
has the same current
(C) they are smaller in size
(B) replace it with a new fuse with
(D) they can change which is the
a different current
north and south pole
(C) flip the circuit breaker
120. Which of the following is (D) unplug all appliances
not an application of the
magnetic force? 125. Which of these will not
(A) fuse move a domain out of line?
(B) Armature (A) dropping a magnet

(C) Galvanometer (B) hitting a magnet hard

(D) Earbud (C) heating a magnet

(D) blowing on a magnet
121. What do electric genera-
tors do 126. Which poles on the earth
(A) transform mechanical energy change?
to electrical energy (A) the North and South

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 473

(B) the magnetic poles (C) the process by which electric

(C) the geographic poles current is produced by a changing
magnetic field
(D) the telephone poles
(D) the ends of a magnet
127. A ferromagnetic material
is 131. The more loops in a coil
(A) A material that can never be a of wire around the core of
magnet an electromagnet, the the
(B) A material that can become a magnetic force.
magnet (A) weaker
(C) A material that is always a (B) stronger
magnet
(C) taller
(D) none of above
(D) shorter
128. The needle of a compass
lines up 132. This material is hard to
(A) parallel to the lines of the magnetize, but STAYS mag-
magnetic field. netized
(B) randomly. (A) temporary
(C) always pointing towards mag-
(B) permanent
netic north.
(D) perpendicular to the lines of (C) ferromagnet
the magnetic field. (D) electromagnet
129. A straight wire of length
133. materials are those that
70 cm carries a current of50
attract to magnets.
A and makes an angle of
60◦ with a uniformmagnetic (A) Physical
field. If the force on the wire
(B) Chemical
is 1.0 N what isthe magni-
tude of B? (C) Ferromagnetic
(A) 20mT (D) Subliminal
(B) 22mT
134. An electromagnet can be
(C) 30mT
strengthened if
(D) 33mT
(A) less coils are added to the iron
130. What is an electromag- core
net?
(B) the iron core is removed
(A) a bar of iron wrapped with a
coil of wire carrying an electric cur- (C) more current runs through the
rent wire
(B) the relationship between elec- (D) a nickel or cobalt iron core is
tricity and magnetism used.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
474 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

135. A is a device that has 139. Earth’s magnetism is re-

a magnet on a needle that lated to the circulation
spins freely. It is used for of molten material within
navigation because its nee- Earth’s ?
dle usually points north. (A) core

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) calculator (B) gravity
(B) ruler (C) air
(C) compass (D) oceans
(D) map
140. a magnetic iron ore, or
136. A 2.0 m long wire carry- mineral, that is capable of
ing 10 A of current moves attracting small bits of iron
through an 6.0 T magnetic (A) electromagnet
field. What is the magnetic
force acting on the wire? (B) compass
(A) 10 N (C) metal
(B) 120 N (D) lodestone
(C) 0.5 N 141. what forms when Earth’s
(D) 2 N liquid core moves
(A) south pole
137. How does a system of
magnets store potential en- (B) aurora
ergy in the magnetic field? (C) North Pole
(A) The energy used to move a (D) magnetic field
magnet with (same direction as) a
magnetic force. 142. a region in a magnetic ma-
terial in which the magnetic
(B) The energy used to move a fields all point the same di-
magnet against (opposite direc- rection
tion as) a magnetic force.
(A) magnetic domain
(C) Magnets get their potential en-
ergy from kinetic energy. (B) temporary magnet

(D) none of above (C) compass

(D) none of above
138. Magnetism is a force of
that occurs between two 143. the direction of magnetic
objects. force fields is
(A) attraction or repulsion, mag- (A) out of the north pole and into
netic the south pole
(B) external or internal, magnetic (B) out of the middle of the mag-
(C) external or repulsion, elec- net and into each pole
tronic (C) out of the south pole and into
(D) attraction or internal, elec- the north pole
tronic (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 475

144. What is the process by (A) electromagnets

which electric current is pro- (B) electrons
duced by changing mag-
netic fields? (C) electrochromic devices
(A) electromagnet induction (D) permanent magnets
(B) electronics 149. What is a magneto-
(C) generator sphere?
(D) electromagnet (A) the part of the atmosphere af-
fected by Earth’s magnetic field
145. A temporary magnet (B) the relationship between elec-
made by passing an elec- tricity and magnetism
tric current through a wire
wrapped around an iron (C) a region in which the mag-
core is? netic fields of individual atoms are
lined up
(A) magnetic field
(D) the region around a magnet
(B) electromagnetism in which magnetic forces can act
(C) electromagnet
150. An is a strong magnet
(D) attract that can be turned on and
146. The process of creating a off.
current in a circuit by chang- (A) electromagnet
ing a magnetic field is called (B) temporary magnet
(A) an electric generator. (C) superconductor
(B) an electric motor. (D) electromagnet induction
(C) electromagnetic induction.
151. The region around a mag-
(D) magnetic flux. net where the magnetic
force is exerted is known
147. Which type of magnet
as its ?
does not lose it’s magnetic
properties easily. (A) magnetic field
(A) a permanent magnet (B) magnetic domain
(B) an electromagnet (C) magnetic pole
(C) a temporary magnet (D) electromagnet
(D) a nail rubbed across the north 152. What type of device con-
pole of a magnet verts electrical energy into
mechanical energy
148. Some objects that nor-
mally aren’t magnetic can (A) electric motors
become magnetized when (B) generator
connected to a circuit. Items
that are magnetized in this (C) transformers
way are called (D) galvanometer

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
476 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

153. Can you produce current (C) circle magnet

in a wire with a magnet that (D) electromagnet
is sitting still?
158. Any object that attracts
(A) Yes; having a magnet near a
the metal iron.
wire is enough to excite the elec-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
trons (A) magnet
(B) No; the magnetic field has to (B) magnetic pole
be changing to excite the electrons (C) magnetic force
(C) No; magnets cannot create (D) magnetic field
electricity 159. Which is not a property of
(D) none of above a magnet?
(A) all magnets have two poles
154. An electromagnet can be
made stronger by (B) all magnets have a force of at-
traction or repulsion
(A) more power and an insulator
(C) all magnets are surrounded
(B) more coils and more power by a magnetic field
(C) a longer wire and more water (D) all magnets can be turned off
(D) a green wire and a switch
160. The further two magnets
155. The arrows of magnetic are apart, the the force
field lines are directed the of magnetism.
N pole. (A) stronger
(A) perpendicular to (B) weaker
(B) toward (C) same
(C) regardless of (D) none of above
(D) away from 161. What is the area of mag-
netic influence around a
156. A place on a magnet magnet?
where the force it applies is
(A) gravitational pull
the strongest.
(B) magnetic field
(A) magnet
(C) electric force
(B) magnetic pole
(D) compass
(C) magnetic force
162. Electronic devices create
(D) magnetic field magnetic fields because
157. A magnet is able to pick they
up paper clips and can be (A) are magnets
turned on and off. What (B) are compasses
kind of magnet is it?
(C) have moving particles with
(A) fridge magnet electric charge
(B) bar magnet (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 477

163. the lines of force surround- 168. Every magnet has a:

ing a magnet (A) point.
(A) magnet (B) north pole only.
(B) magnetic force (C) north pole and a south pole.
(C) magnetic pole (D) south pole only.
(D) magnetic field
169. Electromagnets and bar
164. What is potential energy? magnets are both alike be-
(A) The energy that an object has cause they
because it is moving (A) have magnetic fields
(B) The energy that is stored in an (B) use electricity
object or system (C) repel other magnets
(C) To provide evidence against a (D) have poles
claim
(D) One of the two opposite ends 170. A magnet must always
of a magnet have two poles, even if cut
in half, because
165. Moving electric charges (A) A magnet is made up of
will interact with tiny magnetic domains that are
(A) an electric field aligned.
(B) a magnetic field (B) Each pole divides in half
(C) both A and B and the magnetic field becomes
weaker.
(D) none of the above
(C) Magnetic domains are out of
166. If you break a bar magnet alignment.
in half, each half (D) none of above
(A) becomes a bar magnet with
two poles 171. the geographic pole that
Earth’s magnetic south pole
(B) becomes u nmagnetized is close to
(C) contains one magnetic pole (A) south pole
(D) says ‘hey man, what did I ever (B) aurora
do to you? !’
(C) North Pole
167. What will happen if an ob- (D) magnetic field
ject with a positive charge
is pushed toward another 172. As more lamps are put
object with a negative into a series circuit, the over-
charge? all current in the circuit
(A) They will repel each other. (A) stays the same.
(B) Thunder will occur. (B) increases.
(C) They will produce smoke. (C) decreases.
(D) They will attract to each other. (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
478 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

173. On a bar magnet, the (C) sometime behaves like a mag-

magnetic field lines are clos- net but sometimes does not
est together at the
(D) none of these
(A) poles
178. An atom is a positively

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) point 2cm away from either
end charged nucleus that is or-
bited by negatively charged
(C) half way point along the bar
(D) none of above
(A) electrons
174. The location of the (B) protons
strongest magnetic field is
the (C) neutrons
(A) magnetic fields (D) photons
(B) magnetic poles
179. What is the name of the
(C) magnetic domains man in the video?
(D) center of the magnet (A) Tim
175. a device that uses a mag- (B) Mark
net to produce electricity
(C) Dave
(A) Force
(D) Dan
(B) Magnet
(C) Generator 180. As the amount of charge
(D) Electromagnet on either of two charged ob-
jects increases, the electric
176. How are magnetic fields force between the objects
produced in an electromag- (A) increases
net?
(B) decreases
(A) A battery is placed next to the
iron core. (C) reverses
(B) Iron filings are sprinkled (D) stays the same
around the iron core.
(C) An electric current is being 181. If the north pole of one
sent through a wire magnet is brought near the
south pole of another mag-
(D) The iron core was placed next
net, the poles will
to an existing magnet.
(A) repel
177. When an electric current
is passed through a current (B) attract
carrying coil, the coil (C) not interact
(A) behave like a magnet (D) How am I supposed to know
(B) does not behave like a magnet that!

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 479

182. The strength of an electro- 187. When two magnets have

magnet can be affected by the same poles facing each
(A) changing the current in the other they will?
wire (A) attract
(B) changing the space between (B) repel
the wires (C) attack one another
(C) all of the above (D) spin
(D) none of the above
188. What is our best evidence
183. Magnetic Field lines that Earth has a magnetic
around a bar magnet: field?
(A) are perpandicular the the (A) All things fall toward Earth’s
magnet center
(B) spread out from north pole (B) A compass needle lines up
and curve to south with it
(C) Cross back and forth over ea- (C) Winds blow from east to west
chother (D) Earth’s oceans all have cur-
(D) are perfectly straight rents
189. What subject is attracted
184. materials such as iron,
to a magnet?
steel, and copper
(A) Silver
(A) compass
(B) Water
(B) lodestone
(C) Metal
(C) metal
(D) Iron
(D) magnet
190. The natural found rock
185. An electromagnet is a that contains magnetite is
magnet that known as?
(A) its strength can be varied and (A) magnets
turned on and off
(B) iron filings
(B) always has a magnetic field
around it (C) lodestone
(D) cobalt
(C) has very little strength
(D) none of above 191. What is a device that uses
an electromagnet to convert
186. a piece of iron or steel that electrical energy into me-
attracts certain metals chanical energy
(A) Electricity (A) electric motor
(B) Lodestone (B) transformer
(C) Magnet (C) generator
(D) Poles (D) amplifier

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
480 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

192. an instrument with a nee- (C) Both halves get only a South
dle that points North and Pole
used to determine direction (D) Both halves get a North pole
(A) Electromagnet and a South Pole
(B) Generator

NARAYAN CHANGDER
197. When a magnet breaks
(C) Lodestone into smaller pieces, the
pieces are
(D) Compass
(A) not magnets
193. poles repel (B) still magnets
(A) like (C) exploded
(B) north (D) turned into batteries
(C) south 198. Unlike poles (NS or SN)
(D) unlike each other
(A) attract
194. What does force mean?
(B) repel
(A) energy that can push or pull
on other objects. (C) magnify
(B) a series of electrons that (D) melt
flow from the north to the south 199. If you cut a bar magnet in
polepole-the point where the half, each half would
magnetic field begins and ends
(A) lose it’s magnetic field
on a magnet.
(B) have it’s own north and south
(C) a ferromagnetic object that
poles
produces a magnetic field.
(C) repel plastic objects
(D) none of above
(D) none of above
195. Which poles are attracted?
200. The Earth’s magnetic axis
(mark 2 correct answers)
is aligned with Earth’s ge-
(A) North and North ographic axis.
(B) South and South (A) perfectly
(C) North and South (B) not perfectly
(D) South and North (C) exactly
(E) None of these, only magnetic (D) none of above
monopoles will attract.
201. There are several modern
196. If you cut a magnet in half, uses of magnets. Magnets
what happens to the poles? allow high speed trains to
above the track. They
(A) One half gets the North Pole, go faster because without
the other half gets the South Pole touching the tracks there
(B) Both halves get only a North is no friction to slow them
Pole down.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 481

(A) collide 206. Why does the Earth have

a magnetic field?
(B) levitate
(A) Because of all the magnets on
(C) attract
the Earth’s surface
(D) repair
(B) Because the Earth is a magnet
202. In order to form an electric (C) Because the Earth is made of
circuit, you need to have copper
(A) wires or conductors to connect (D) Because Earth is orbiting
everything. around the sun
(B) a power source.
207. Which item would have
(C) a complete path for the cur- the most aligned domains?
rent. (A) a pencil eraser
(D) all of the above (B) an iron railing
203. In a magnet (C) an aluminum can
(A) all magnetic domains are (D) none of above
aligned
208. Which is not a magnetic
(B) magnetic domains are in a metal?
random order
(A) iron
(C) half of the magnetic domains
point one way and half point the (B) nickle
other (C) cobalt
(D) none of above (D) copper

204. The south pole of a mag- 209. The space in which the
net magnetic effects exists is
(A) attracts a north pole called

(B) repels a north pole (A) the magnetic field

(C) repels a paper clip (B) the magnetic equator

(D) attracts another south pole (C) the magnetic material

(D) none of above
205. Magnetic domains are
found in 210. Iron, Nickel and cobalt are
(A) All ferromagnetic materials all materials
(A) Shiny
(B) Ferromagnetic and non-
ferromagnetic materials (B) poles
(C) Only in permanent magnets (C) magnetic
(D) none of above (D) cold

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
482 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

211. what can be attracted to 216. An iron rod becomes mag-

magnets? netic when
(A) wood (A) positive charges line up on
(B) skin one side and negative charges on
the other side

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Metals such as iron, nickel
and cobalt (B) positive ions gather at one end
and negative ions at the other end
(D) none of above
(C) its electrons stop moving and
212. In an illustration, lines point in the same direction
of force are drawn
(D) the net spins of its electrons
around a magnet to il-
point in the same direction
lustrate the magnetic-
field.induction.poles.force. 217. How can you increase the
(A) field. strength of an electromag-
(B) induction. net?

(C) poles. (A) By moving the iron core to cre-

ate friction.
(D) force.
(B) By adding more coils around
213. Why does a compass nee- the iron core.
dle point north?
(C) By decreasing the amount of
(A) because north is up current in the wire.
(B) it lines up with Earth’s mag- (D) By heating up the electromag-
netic field net.
(C) because of magic
218. Law says that the
(D) the compass is programmed Induced current is propor-
to do so tional to the change of mag-
214. let you turn the mag- netic flux
netism on or off by turning (A) Lenz’
the electricity on or off. (B) Faraday’s
(A) Repel (C) Ampere’s
(B) Electromagnetic (D) none of above
(C) Forces
219. Permanent magnets can
(D) Poles
be made by
215. Which of these materials (A) placing a piece of iron near a
could you make a magnet strong electromagnet
from?
(B) placing a piece of iron in a
(A) iron strong magnetic field
(B) plastic (C) stroking material containing
(C) wood iron with a magnet
(D) glass (D) all of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 483

220. A electric charge pro- (B) Attract

duces a(n) field. (C) Repel
(A) moving, magnetic (D) Force
(B) stationary, magnetic
226. A current of 5.0 A flows
(C) moving, empty through a wire 10.0 cm
(D) stationary, empty long. The wire is in a mag-
netic field of strength 2.00
221. In un-magnetized materi- T, perpendicular to the wire.
als the domains are What is the magnitude of
aligned. the magnetic force acting on
(A) super the wire?
(B) slightly (A) 0 N
(C) randomly (B) 0.5 N
(D) always (C) 1.0 N
222. When two magnets repel, (D) 2.0 N
they
227. Which statement below
(A) change color is TRUE about electromag-
(B) pull together nets?
(C) push apart (A) They are weaker than perma-
nent magnets.
(D) get colder
(B) They can’t be turned off.
223. The object that points
(C) They do not have magnetic
North on the magnet is
fields.
called
(D) They can switch their mag-
(A) North Pole
netic poles.
(B) North side
228. The only things that stick
(C) Winter Wonderland
to a magnet are:
(D) Northwest
(A) iron, cobalt, and nickel.
224. Where would you find the (B) iron and cobalt.
circuit breaker?
(C) cobalt and nickel.
(A) fuse box
(D) iron and nickel.
(B) kitchen
(C) tool box 229. Why is permanent magnet
able to exert a force on an
(D) outlet electric charge?
225. energy that can cause (A) Electric charges have an elec-
something to be pushed or tric field
pulled (B) Electric charges have a mag-
(A) Electricity netic field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
484 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) A permanent magnet has an 234. The electric and magnetic

electric field fields in an electromagnetic
wave move the direction
(D) A permanent magnet cannot
of wave motion.
exert a force on an electric charge
(A) parallel to

NARAYAN CHANGDER
230. In a diagram of a mag- (B) perpendicular to
netic field, the stronger the
force of the magnetic field, (C) opposite to
the the field lines. (D) without regard to
(A) further apart
235. What happens when you
(B) closer cut a magnet in half?
(C) thicker (A) you have one north-pole and
one south-pole piece
(D) thinner
(B) you have one north-pole piece
231. Most of the magnets we (C) you have 2 magnets
encounter in our daily lives
contain: (D) you have one south-pole
piece
(A) iron atoms.
236. As an electron moves,
(B) carbon atoms.
what does it make or
(C) the element copper. cause?
(D) electric current. (A) an aurora
(B) ferromagnetism
232. which of the following ex-
pressions shows the correct (C) an electromagnet
relationship between 1T ( (D) a magnetic field
1 tesla) and other common
units? 237. A is when ferromag-
netic material has a mag-
(A) 1 N/(A.m) netic field for a very short
(B) 1 (N.m)/ A time.
(C) 1 N.A.m (A) permanent magnet
(D) 1A / (N.m) (B) temporary magnet
(C) flexible magnet
233. What materials do you
(D) bar magnet
need to create an electro-
magnet? 238. Magnetic domains point
(A) wire, switch, lightbulb (A) in all directions
(B) wire, nail, lightbulb (B) in varied directions
(C) wire, nail, battery (C) in one direction
(D) None of the above (D) in two directions

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 485

239. How do electric motors (A) high

and electric generators dif- (B) low
fer?
(C) no
(A) One uses a permanent mag-
net and the other ONLY uses tem- (D) none of above
porary magnets.
243. What is a solenoid?
(B) One produces electric energy.
The other produces heat energy. (A) A coil of wire with current flow-
ing through it
(C) One uses an electric current to
produce motion. The other uses (B) A type of bar magnet
motion to produce an electric cur- (C) A single straight wire
rent.
(D) One loop of a wire
(D) none of above
244. A magnet can pick up a
240. One electromagnet has a nail but not a penny be-
wood core. The other has an cause
iron core. Which is true?
(A) all metals are magnetic
(A) The wood core is stronger be-
(B) all metals are not magnetic
cause it is a ferromagnetic mate-
rial. (C) the penny is made of iron and
copper
(B) The iron core is stronger be-
cause it is a ferromagnetic mate- (D) magnets are not strong
rial. enough to pick up pennies
(C) The wood core is stronger be- 245. Which statement about
cause it is not a ferromagnetic ma- magnets is true?
terial.
(A) Magnets can only exist as
(D) The iron core is stronger be- dipoles
cause it is not a ferromagnetic ma-
terial. (B) Single magnetic poles are pos-
sible but are very rare.
241. What does protons
(C) Like poles attract and unlike
mean?
poles repel.
(A) negative charge and located
(D) Iron is the only ferromagnetic
on the outside of the atom.
material (hence the name).
(B) the process of how magnetic
fields are produced. 246. A group of atoms that has
all like poles pointing in the
(C) positive charge located in the
same direction are called
center.
(A) magnetic forces.
(D) none of above
(B) magnetic fields.
242. Electrical insulators have
resistance to the move- (C) magnetic domains.
ment of electrons. (D) magnetic poles.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
486 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

247. There are several modern (C) Is created by satilites

uses of magnets. A (D) Has never changed
can have million of mag-
nets. Each magnet points in 252. A device that converts me-
its own direction, making a chanical energy into electri-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
code. This allows an individ- cal energy
ual to make purchases. (A) electric generator
(A) Driver’s License (B) electric motor
(B) Check Book (C) electromagnetic induction
(C) Credit Card (D) mechanical generator
(D) TV 253. Permanent magnets are
made out of the following
248. The space around a mag-
materials
net where the force of the
magnet can act is called the: (A) Copper, Chromium, and
Cobalt
(A) north pole
(B) Iron, Cobalt, and Silver
(B) south pole
(C) Nickel, Cobalt, and Iron
(C) magnetic field
(D) Copper, Nickel, and Iron
(D) attraction poles
254. a magnet that can be
249. The magnetic pole that turned on and off by using
points to the north is the electricity
magnet’s
(A) Electromagnet
(A) magnetic force
(B) Magnet
(B) north pole (C) Lodestone
(C) magnetic poles (D) Poles
(D) south pole
255. The pole of a compass
(E) magnetic field which points towards the
Earth’s south geographic
250. device that uses an electro-
pole is a
magnet to measure electric
current (A) magnetic north pole
(A) galvanometer (B) magnetic south pole
(B) solenoid (C) positive charge pole

(C) transformer (D) magnetic barber pole

(D) turbine 256. What would happen if a

magnet moved through a
251. The Earths magnetic field copper wire?
(A) Protects the Earth from solar (A) The magnet would demagne-
radiation tize.
(B) Is part of the atmosphere (B) The magnet would explode.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 487

(C) Electric current would flow 261. A compass is the part of

through the wire. a compass that is magnetic.
(D) The copper wire would be- (A) bar
come magnetized. (B) dial
257. On Earth, where is Mag- (C) needle
netic North approximately (D) rose
located?
(A) The Equator 262. Bob made an electro-
magnet but it was very
(B) The North Pole weak. How can he make
(C) The South Pole it stronger?
(D) New Brighton (A) take away a d-cell
(B) wrap the wire loosely
258. What do magnets stick
to? (C) use thicker wire
(A) copper (D) use less winds
(B) wood 263. iron material you can
(C) iron magnetize to attract items
for a short period of time
(D) plastic
(A) Electromagnet
259. What is a maglev train?
(B) Magnet
(A) a train that lifts off the tracks
(C) Temporary Magnet
and uses superconductors as a
power source (D) Permanent Magnet
(B) a train that stays on the tracks 264. If two magnets are placed
and uses superconductors as a so that two poles or two
power source poles are facing each
(C) a train that lifts off the tracks other, they will repel each
and uses semiconductors as a other.
power source (A) North, South
(D) a train that lifts off the tracks (B) external, internal
and uses semiconductors as a
power source (C) positive, negative
(D) North, West
260. The force of attraction or
repulsion of magnetic mate- 265. In 1831 who discovered
rials is called: electromagnetic induction?
(A) Electromagnetism (A) Thomas Edison
(B) Electricity (B) Nikola Tesla
(C) Attraction (C) Michael Faraday
(D) Magnetism (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
488 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

266. A current that travels in (C) both attraction and repulsion

only one direction is a (D) No force, the train moves for-
(A) Direct Current ward
(B) Alternating Current 271. A(n) is a cylindrical coil

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Fancy Current of wire acting as a magnet
when carrying electric cur-
(D) none of above
rent.
267. Magnetism is caused by (A) insulator
(A) moving electric charges (B) actuator
(B) any material (C) monopole
(C) a compass needle (D) solenoid
(D) a tiny piece of iron 272. ‘Like” magnetic poles
268. What is a soft magnetic (A) run
material? (B) attract
(A) Stays magnetic once magne- (C) stay
tised e.g. steel
(D) repel
(B) Stays magnetic once magne-
tised e.g. iron 273. Half-way to the center of
a planet of uniform density,
(C) Hard to break
your weight compared to
(D) Looses magnetism easily e.g. that at the surface would be
iron
(A) one-quarter.
269. Where do the electrons (B) one-half.
come from that produce
(C) three-quarters.
heat and light in a light
bulb? (D) the same as at the surface.
(A) the power company 274. A device that converts elec-
(B) the air trical energy to mechanical
energy is a?
(C) the wall plug
(A) engine
(D) the bulb’s wire filament
(B) motor
270. Engineers are designing (C) electromagnet
new trains that use mag-
netic force to allow the train (D) superconducting magnet
to levitate (or float) above 275. Which poles repel?
the track. What force exists
between the bottom of the (A) north and south
train and track? (B) south and north
(A) attraction (C) south and south
(B) repulsion (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 489

276. Current flowing through a have many uses including the gen-
wire is generating a mag- eration of electricity in hydroelec-
netic field. The further away tric dams.
from the wire, the the
(D) none of above
magnetic field.
(A) stronger 280. In a magnet the line up
in the same direction.
(B) weaker
(C) faster (A) leaders

(D) slower (B) domains

(C) nails
277. Which of the following de-
scribes both an electromag- (D) wires
net and a permanent mag-
net? 281. How can a wire and a
magnet create an electric
(A) The magnetic force can be current?
turned off and on.
(A) The magnet moves inside the
(B) The strength of the magnetic coil of wire.
force can be controlled.
(B) The coil of wire moves through
(C) The poles can be reversed.
a magnetic field.
(D) It has a north pole and a south
(C) Both of the above
pole.
(D) None of the above
278. Which of the following
do we use as evidence of 282. Ancient people discovered
Earth’s changing magnetic magnetic rocks called lode-
field over time? (only 1 cor- stone. For what purpose did
rect answer.) they use them?
(A) Earth’s tilt on its axis. (A) starting fires
(B) The vernal equinox. (B) sculptures
(C) Iron deposits become magne- (C) compasses
tized in the direction of Earth’s
magnetic field. (D) magnetic weapons

(D) Formation of new crust at the 283. Permanent magnets are

mid-ocean ridge. made out of which materi-
als?
279. how are electromagnets
created? (A) Cobalt, Nickel, and Iron
(A) forces (B) Copper, Chromium, and
Cobalt
(B) light
(C) Gold, Silver, and Platinum
(C) an electric current running
through a surrounding coil. They (D) Copper, Nickel, and Iron

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
490 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

284. A magnetic field exerts a (B) Attract

force on a charged particle: (C) Repel
(A) always (D) Conductor
(B) never
289. Paper clips and staples

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) if the particle is moving across are attracted to magnets be-
the field lines cause paper clips and sta-
(D) if the particle is moving along ples are
the field lines (A) permanent magnets
285. Which of the following is (B) temporary magnets
true of a bar magnet? (C) magnetic materials
(A) Its magnetic field is strongest (D) magnetic domains
near its center.
290. magnetic field
(B) It is surrounded by a magnetic
(A) the space around a magnet in
field.
which magnetic forces can act on
(C) The north pole is stronger objects
than the south pole.
(B) to separate or set apart
(D) The south pole is stronger
(C) one of the two opposite ends
than the north pole.
of a magnet
286. Earth’s magnetic field is (D) to provide evidence that goes
most likely due to against a claim
(A) millions of small magnets 291. The magnetic south pole of
buried in Earth Earth is situated near
(B) a magnetized solid inner core (A) geographic south pole
of Earth
(B) geographic east
(C) convection currents in the
(C) geographic north pole
molten part of Earth’s interior
(D) geographic west
(D) rotation of Earth acting on all
of Earth’s electrons 292. which one is NOT mag-
netic?
287. An example of a tempo-
rary magnet is (A) Iron

(A) a horseshoe magnet (B) Nickel

(C) Cobalt
(B) a scissors which has been
magnetized (D) Sodium
(C) a piece of magnetite 293. In which of the following
(D) a plastic spoon situations would an electro-
magnet be more useful than
288. Where on a magnet is the a magnet?
force the strongest? (A) A jewelry store employee is re-
(A) Magnetic Pole pairing a broken bracelet clasp.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 491

(B) A little boy is linking metal (A) south magnetic pole

train cars together (B) north magnetic pole
(C) A junk yard workers is sorting (C) north geographic pole
out car parts.
(D) south geographic pole
(D) A teacher is hanging up art-
work on a metal board. 299. A(n) is the region of
magnetic force around a
294. What is a closed path magnet.
in which an electric current
travels? (A) magnetic field
(A) Electric Circuit (B) magnetic domain
(B) Electric Resistance (C) magnetic pole
(C) Magnet (D) electromagnet
(D) Voltage 300. material that temporary
magnets are usually made
295. Magnetic field lines inside
from
of a magnet are convention-
ally drawn (A) soft iron
(A) from north to south (B) iron and cobalt
(B) from south to north (C) alnico
(C) either way (D) none of above
(D) MAGNETO WINS ALL!! 301. A compass points toward
the south pole of Earth’s
296. Which of the following
magnetic field, located near
would a magnet ATTRACT?
the Earth’s geographical
(A) A copper penny
(A) north
(B) An iron nail
(B) south
(C) A piece of glass
(C) east
(D) A wood block
(D) west
297. Any material that attracts
302. Paper clips are attracted
iron and materials that con-
to magnets because they
tain iron is a:
contain
(A) Spring
(A) iron
(B) Magnet
(B) aluminum
(C) Solenoid
(C) copper
(D) Coil
(D) silver
298. If you suspend a bar mag-
net from a string, the N pole 303. The shape of a magnetic
will point to Earth’s (mark field is show with
2 answers) (A) magnetic force

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
492 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) magnetic poles (A) Zero

(C) magnetic field (B) Directed into the page
(D) magnetic field lines (C) Directed out of the page
(D) Directed to the left
304. An object that is made of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
which material is likely to be 309. A device that uses a free-
attracted to a magnet? moving magnetic needle to
(A) nitrogen show direction is a:
(B) nickel (A) lodestone
(C) paper (B) magnet
(D) plastic (C) compass
(D) magnetic field
305. There is a magnetic field
around a current-carrying 310. Which metals are at-
wire. tracted to magnets?
(A) true (A) iron, nickel, cobalt
(B) false (B) gold, silver, platinum
(C) maybe ? (C) copper, magnesium, alu-
(D) none of above minum
(D) none of above
306. The region of space sur-
rounding earth that contains 311. In order for there to be
its magnetic field. a flow of charge from one
(A) Magneto place to another, there must
be a
(B) Magnetosphere
(A) conductor, such as a wire,
(C) Magnetasphere connecting the two places.
(D) Ionosphere (B) potential difference between
the two places.
307. What type of device con-
verts mechanical energy (C) Both A and B above
into electrical energy? (D) none of above
(A) solenoid
312. What is a magnetic pole?
(B) electric motor
(A) the ends of a magnet
(C) transformer (B) a region in which the magnetic
(D) generator fields of individual atoms are lined
up
308. Two long, parallel wires
each carry the same current (C) the region around a magnet
I in the same direction. Is the in which magnetic forces can act
total magnetic field at the (D) a bar of iron wrapped with a
point midway between the coil of wire carrying an electric cur-
wires: rent

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 493

313. The direction of a gravita- (C) Iron

tional field is (D) Nickel
(A) in the same direction as gravi-
tational attraction. 318. A loop of wire is carrying
electric current, which cre-
(B) away from the center of grav-
ates a magnetic field. The
ity of an object.
magnetic field is strongest
(C) opposite to the direction of
gravitational attraction.
(A) near the wire
(D) none of above
(B) near the source of the electric
314. A can travel at over 300 current
miles per hour and levitates (C) far away from the loop
above the rails.
(D) at the center of the loop
(A) super train
319. When current passes
(B) locomotive
through a wire, a magnetic
(C) maglev train field is created around the
(D) aircar wire only if the
(A) wire is absolutely straight
315. When two same poles are
faced to each other, they (B) wire is in a curved loop
(A) Attract (C) current comes from a batter
(B) Repel (D) a magnetic field is always
present around a current carrying
(C) Attract and Repel
wire
(D) Do nothing
320. The compass’s NORTH nee-
316. A horizontal wire carries dle will always point to ge-
a current out of the page. ographic because Earth’s
When viewed from above, magnetic pole is there.
what direction is the mag-
(A) East / West
netic field?
(B) Nonsense, Earth does not
(A) Out of the page
have a magnetic field!
(B) Left
(C) West / East
(C) Clockwise
(D) North / South
(D) Counter-clockwise
321. Generators use to cre-
317. Which of the following el- ate Electricity
ements is NOT magentized
(A) Electricity
temporarily in the presence
of a permanent magnet? (B) Magnetism
(A) carbon (C) Wires
(B) Cobalt (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
494 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

322. What is the region around strength magnetic field at its

a magnet in which magnetic center?
forces can act (A) 31 x 10-4 T
(A) magnetic field (B) 62 x 10-4 T
(B) magnetic domain

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) 125 x 10-4 T
(C) magnetic pole
(D) 250 x 10-4 T
(D) electric motor
327. The electric and magnetic
323. Earth’s gravitational field fields in an electromagnetic
extends wave travel each other.
(A) only above and beyond (A) parallel to
Earth’s surface and cancels inside
(B) perpendicular to
Earth
(C) at right angles to
(B) both inside and outside Earth
and throughout the entire universe (D) in spite of
(C) neither of these 328. The presence and strength
(D) none of above of a magnetic field is de-
noted by:
324. What is electromag-
netism? (A) magnetic lines.

(A) the relationship between elec- (B) magnitude of voltage.

tricity and magnetism (C) speed of current.
(B) the process by which electric (D) number of electrons.
current is produced by a changing
magnetic field 329. Moving a permanent mag-
net through a coil of wire
(C) a bar of iron wrapped with a
will
coil of wire carrying an electric cur-
rent (A) demagnetize the magnet
(D) a device that uses an electro- (B) the wire will become an elec-
magnet to convert electrical en- tromagnet
ergy into mechanical energy (C) the magnet will become elec-
trified
325. A simple is a good ex-
ample of magnetism. (D) a current will be generated in
the wire
(A) electric field
(B) bar magnet 330. Generators are devices
that convert energy into
(C) north pole
energy.
(D) field line
(A) chemical; mechanical
326. A solenoid with 500 turns, (B) mechanical; electrical
0.10 m long, carrying a cur-
rent of 4.0 A and with a ra- (C) electrical; mechanical
dius of 1 cm will have what (D) potential; kinetic

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 495

331. A refrigerator magnet is 336. What is a machine that

an example of a: converts mechanical energy
into electrical energy
(A) magnetic material
(A) generator
(B) permanent magnet
(B) transformer
(C) horseshoe magnet
(C) amplifier
(D) temporary magnet
(D) electric motor
332. Which of the following will
not attract or repel each 337. Mark 2 correct an-
other? swers:Which is true farther
from a magnet?
(A) two magnets
(A) Field lines are closer together.
(B) a magnet and a stationary
charge (B) Field lines are farther apart.
(C) a magnet and a current- (C) The magnetic field is weaker.
carrying wire
(D) The magnetic field is stronger.
(D) two current-carrying wires
338. Magnetic force is strongest
333. A magnet has a pole at
and a pole.
(A) the north pole
(A) north, south
(B) the south pole
(B) east, west
(C) both poles
(C) positive, negative
(D) the middle of the magnet
(D) red, blue
339. the ends of a magnetic
334. Magnets can be used for object, where the magnetic
force is strongest.
(A) holding refrigerator doors
shut (A) Magnetic Force
(B) holding papers on a white (B) Magnetic Field
board
(C) Magnetic Pole
(C) holding pins for sewing
(D) Magnetic Area
(D) all of the above
340. The magnetic is the
335. A compass needle shows area around a magnet
us the magnetic field of where the force acts
(A) the sun (A) domain
(B) Earth (B) pole
(C) the moon (C) field
(D) a magnet that is near by (D) generator

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
496 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

341. Where is the magnetic by an electric current are

field the strongest on a bar one kind of
magnet? (A) gravitational force
(A) North Pole (B) gravitational field

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) South Pole (C) electromagnetic force
(C) middle (D) none of above
(D) at both poles
346. “Opposite” magnetic
342. What characteristics do poles
magnetic substances have? (A) run
(A) They can give you a “shock” (B) attract
when you touch them (C) stay
(B) They can push or pull objects (D) repel
without touching them
347. Magnetism is a type of
(C) They are always black and
cold to touch (A) force
(D) They fall faster than other ob- (B) book
jects when you drop them (C) plant

343. If an object is placed (D) animal

exactly halfway between 348. The discrepancy between
Earth and the Moon, it the orientation of a compass
would fall toward the and true north is known as
(A) Earth. the
(B) Moon. (A) radioactive effect (hulkify!)
(C) neither of these (B) magnetic declination
(D) none of above (C) magnetic effect
(D) magnetic discrepancy
344. Causing a current to flow
through a wire by changing 349. How are magnets and
the magnetic field near the electricity related?
wire is called (A) Magnets can be used to make
(A) radiation electricity.
(B) convection (B) Electricity can be used to made
a magnet.
(C) induction
(C) Both A and B are true.
(D) conduction
(D) none of above
345. The compass needles are
turned by magnetic forces 350. A material is magnetic if
caused by electric current. its are aligned.
The magnetic forces caused (A) protons

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 497

(B) neutrons 355. To reverse current direc-

(C) domains tion in a motor the con-
ducted current goes
(D) cells
(A) through the commutator to
351. Magnetic fields are the armature
strongest
(B) through the armature
(A) at both poles
(C) through the brushes to the
(B) at the north pole commutator
(C) at the south pole (D) in the direction of rotation
(D) between the poles
356. The coil of current-
352. Which of the following carrying wire with an iron
conditions are necessary for core is called a(n)
a magnet inside a wire loop
(A) ferromagnet
to produce an electric cur-
rent? (B) electromagnet
(A) The wire loop must already (C) compass
have a current running through it. (D) maglev
(B) The magnet must be in mo-
tion. 357. A plant generating electric
current
(C) The wire loop must be part of
an open circuit. (A) transmits alternating current
at high voltages, but is used at low
(D) The magnet must be station-
voltages
ary.
(B) transmits direct current at high
353. What is the name of a voltages, but is used at low volt-
magnet that stays magnetic ages
only while it touches a per-
(C) transmits alternating current
manent magnet, or one that
at low voltages, but used at high
is magnetic for a very short
voltages
time
(A) Temporary magnet (D) transmits direct current at low
voltages, but used at high voltages
(B) Permanant magnet
(C) Electromagnet 358. A permanent magnet
(D) Magnet (A) has no magnetic domains un-
til a magnet is near it
354. Which of the following are
(B) has magnetic domains
ferromagnetic elements?
aligned only when another mag-
(A) nickel net is near it
(B) iron (C) has magnetic domains
(C) cobalt aligned all the time
(D) all of the above (D) has no magnetic domains

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
498 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

359. Which material is NOT nec- (C) magnetic force

essary to make a simple mo- (D) magnetic pole
tor?
(A) Battery 364. What is the traditional
color for North on a com-
(B) Magnets

NARAYAN CHANGDER
pass?
(C) Steel nail
(A) red
(D) Copper wire
(B) white
360. Which direction does con- (C) blue
ventional current flow?
(D) black
(A) Positive to negative
365. materials that fewrromag-
(B) Negative to positive
nets may be made from
(C) Negative to Negative
(A) soft iron
(D) Positive to Positive
(B) iron and cobalt
361. Inside of magnets there (C) alnico
are tiny magnets called
(D) none of above
(A) atoms
(B) domains 366. What does neutron
mean?
(C) mini magnets
(A) negative charge and located
(D) none of above on the outside of the atom.
362. Which statements describe (B) positive charge located in the
the characteristics of a mag- center.
net? Select four options. (C) has no charge and located in
(A) A magnet attracts objects con- the center of the atom.
taining iron. (D) none of above
(B) A magnet attracts objects con-
taining aluminum. 367. Surrounding every mov-
ing electron is
(C) A magnet repels other mag-
nets. (A) an electric field
(D) A magnet attracts other mag- (B) a magnetic field
nets. (C) an electric and magnetic field
(E) A magnet aligns with Earth’s (D) none of the above
north pole.
368. Magnetic field strength is
363. Earth’s protects Earth
from charged particles from (A) strongest close to a magnet
the Sun. (B) constant everywhere
(A) magnetic field (C) strongest far from a magnet
(B) magnetic equator (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 499

369. Which materials is not (D) decreasing the number of

magnetic? loops
(A) plastic 374. Magnetism is generated
(B) iron by moving
(C) cobalt (A) protons.
(D) nickel (B) electrons.

370. Electrical resistance is mea- (C) neutrons.

sured in (D) elements.
(A) volts.
375. Which statement about
(B) amperes. Earth’s core helps explain
(C) watts. Earth’s magnetic field?
(D) ohms. (A) Earth’s core is composed of
magnets.
371. A magnet cannot not
(B) Earth’s core is composed of
move which of the follow-
iron and nickel.
ing objects?
(C) The outer core is solid.
(A) a paper clip
(D) The inner core is liquid and
(B) a nail
moving.
(C) a toothpick
376. Which factor will not affect
(D) a staple
the magbetic field strength
372. Law says that a current of a solenoid carrying an
produced by an induced emf electric current?
moves in a direction so that (A) Thikness of wire
its magnetic field opposes
(B) Number of wraps
the original change in flux
(C) strength of the current
(A) Lenz’
(D) core type
(B) Faraday’s
(C) Ampere’s 377. An electromagnet is made
by placing a within a coil
(D) none of above
of wire with an electric cur-
373. Which way will NOT in- rent.
crease the strength of the (A) magnetic core
magnetic field of an electro-
magent (B) piece of wood

(A) increasing the current (C) compass

(B) using a stronger ferromag- (D) balloon

netic core 378. Which of these can be
(C) winding the coils closer to- used to show a magnetic
gether field of a bar magnet?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
500 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(A) Compass, paper and pencil 384. What letter represents the
(B) Iron filings magnetic field?

(C) A coil of wire (A) M

(D) Lead filings (B) V

NARAYAN CHANGDER
379. a magnet’s push or pull (C) B

(A) magnet (D) i

(B) magnetic force
385. In order for two magnets
(C) magnetic pole to pull together or attract,
(D) magnetic field their poles must be:
(A) lined up.
380. Which direction do elec-
trons flow? (B) opposite.
(A) Positive to Positive (C) the same.
(B) Negative to Negative (D) sticky.
(C) Positive to Negative
386. A material that is not at-
(D) Negative to Positive
tracted to a magnet is
381. An example of a good con- (A) attract
ductor is
(B) magnetic
(A) copper
(B) sand (C) non-magnetic

(C) plastic (D) repel

(D) none of above 387. The region around a mag-
382. The needle of a compass net where the magnetic
always points to which di- force is exerted is called the
rection? (A) Magnetic region
(A) south (B) Magnetic place
(B) east (C) Magnetic force
(C) west
(D) Magnetic field
(D) north
388. magnetic field outside a
383. What type of magnet ex-
magnet runs from
hibits magnetic properties
all the time? (A) south pole to north pole
(A) paperclip (B) north pole to south pole
(B) temporary magnet (C) neither north pole nor the
(C) string south pole
(D) permanent magnet (D) any of the pole

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 501

389. Which poles repel? (mark 394. For attracting magnets,

2 correct answers) the way to increase poten-
(A) North and South tial energy within their field,
you should
(B) South and North
(A) move them closer together
(C) North and North
(B) pull them apart
(D) South and South
(C) spin them around
(E) None of these, only magnetic
monopoles will repel. (D) drop them

390. Why shouldn’t bar mag- 395. What does electrical cur-
nets be rubbed together? rents mean?
(A) It can make the magnetic field (A) the point where the magnetic
too strong. field begins and ends on a mag-
(B) It can weaken the magnetic net
field. (B) electrons flow from one place
(C) It can change the magnet’s to another
color. (C) a series of electrons that flow
(D) It can create too much oxy- from the north to the south pole
gen. (D) none of above
391. One end of a bar magnet 396. If you hold two magnets a
is referred to as its and is short distance apart and let
labeled (mark 2 answers) go, which of the following is
(A) south pole, N a possible result? CHOOSE
(B) north pole, S ALL THAT APPLY!
(C) north pole, N (A) they will snap together
(D) south pole, S (B) they will be pushed apart

392. An device with a magnetic (C) they will remain motionless

needle which spins freely (D) they will become an electric
and generally points north circuit
(A) Compass 397. Even in a magnetic ma-
(B) Magnetic Declination terial where the magnetic
(C) Thermometer fields of atoms line up to-
gether, it’s possible that one
(D) Bar magnet
chunk of the material will
393. used to create a magnetic have all its atoms lined up
field pointing one way, and an-
other chunk will have all
(A) force
its atoms pointing another
(B) generator way, and so on. What do
(C) magnetism we call these “chunks”?
(D) electricity (A) domains

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
502 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) families (B) Magnetic Pole

(C) classes (C) Voltage
(D) kingdoms (D) Electric Current

398. As more lamps are put 403. A stationary electric

NARAYAN CHANGDER
into a parallel circuit, the charge produces
overall current in the circuit (A) a magnetic field but not an
(A) increases. electric field.
(B) stays the same. (B) an electric field but not a mag-
netic field.
(C) decreases.
(C) both an electric field and a
(D) none of above magnetic field.
399. An electromagnet is a (D) neither an electric field nor a
solenoid with an core. magnetic field.
(A) copper 404. The force of magnetism is
(B) wire stronger when magnets are
(C) iron
(A) cold
(D) none of above
(B) round
400. What areas of a magnet
(C) closer together
have the strongest magnetic
effect? (D) farther apart
(A) the middle 405. Which factor will not affect
(B) the poles the magnetic force strength
of a solenoid? .
(C) the sides
(A) thickness of wire
(D) the magnetic field lines
(B) strength of current
401. What will make an electro- (C) core type
magnet stronger?
(D) number of wraps
(A) increasing the number of coils
406. How is a permanent mag-
(B) decreasing the number of
net DIFFERENT from a tempo-
coils
rary magnet?
(C) adding another battery
(A) A permanent magnet attracts
(D) adding more magnets materials made of iron.
402. What is the name of a (B) A permanent magnet has
magnet created by wrap- poles.
ping a current-carrying wire (C) A permanent magnet has a
around a ferromagnetic magnetic field.
core? (D) A permanent magnet keeps
(A) Electromagnet its magnetism for a long time.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 503

407. If a compass is placed in (B) in the middle

a magnetic field, its NORTH (C) above the magnet
seeking needle will point
(D) below the magnet
(A) Toward magnetic South
(which is geographic North on 412. Magnetic fields go out
Earth) from the pole and into the
(B) Toward magnetic North pole
(which is geographic South on (A) north; south
Earth.) (B) south; north
(C) East (C) south; north
(D) West (D) none of above
408. For Right Hand Rule #1 the 413. When two magnets at-
thumb represents the direc- tract, they
tion of the ?
(A) push apart
(A) Force (F)
(B) change color
(B) Current (i)
(C) get colder
(C) Velocity (v) (D) pull together
(D) none of above
414. is when a force pushes
409. Normally, atoms are elec- apart
trically neutral because (A) attract
there are
(B) repel
(A) more protons than electrons
(C) magnetic
(B) more electrons than protons
(D) poles
(C) equal numbers of protons
and electrons 415. Certain materials respond
to magnetic fields by becom-
(D) equal numbers of protons
ing themselves. is one
and neutrons
of these materials.
410. Which refers to the ends of (A) magnetic, Plastic
a magnet where the forces
(B) electronic, Iron
are strongest?
(C) magnetic, Iron
(A) attracting forces
(D) electronic, Plastic
(B) opposing forces
(C) magnetic fields 416. The strength of a magnetic
field inside a coil of wire can
(D) magnetic poles be increased by:
411. Where is the strongest at- (A) increasing the current through
traction force of the mag- the wire coil
net? (B) increasing the number of
(A) at the poles loops in the coil

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
504 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) wrap the coil around and iron (B) side

wood (C) end
(D) all of the above (D) top
417. What three things did we 422. are the groups of atoms

NARAYAN CHANGDER
need to make an electro- in a material that all have
magnet? their magnetic fields spin-
(A) iron core, wire, power source ning/pointing in the same
direction (N)
(B) wire, swtich, water
(A) Magnetic field
(C) iron core, lemon, wire
(B) Ferromagnetic materials
(D) power source, Olympic gold
medal, wire (C) Magnetic core
(D) Magnetic domain
418. Magnetic fields are
strongest 423. A uses fuel such as
gasoline to produce mechan-
(A) between the poles
ical energy.
(B) at the north pole
(A) motor
(C) at the south pole
(B) alloy magnet
(D) at both poles (C) guitar
419. When the north pole of (D) engine
one magnet is put near the
south pole of another mag- 424. Name the metal that is
net they magnetic?
(A) Aluminum
(A) repel
(B) iron
(B) flip
(C) gold
(C) fall
(D) silver
(D) attract
425. What are the poles in a
420. If two magnets are placed magnet?
so that a north pole and a
south pole are facing each (A) left and right
other, they will each (B) up and down
other. (C) north and south
(A) date (D) east and west
(B) spin
426. A stright wire carrying a
(C) repel current of 7.2 A, has a field
(D) attract of 8.9 X10-3 T perpendicu-
lar to it. What length of wire
421. A magnetic pole is located in the field will experience a
on each of a bar magnet. force of 2.1 N?
(A) middle (A) 2.6x 10-3 m

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 505

(B) 3.1 x 10-2 m 431. A current-carrying wire

(C) 1.3 x 10-1 m produces a field.
(A) thermal energy
(D) 3.3 x 10 1 m
(B) potential energy
427. Any attraction or repul- (C) magnetic
sion between magnets is
called (D) dark matter

(A) Electric Resistance 432. The north geographic pole

(B) Electric Current of Earth is actually near the
pole of Earth’s magnetic
(C) Magnetic Force field.
(D) Voltage (A) north

428. An electric motor converts (B) primary

electrical energy into (C) secondary
(A) magnetism (D) south
(B) motion 433. Where on a magnet
(C) gravity is the magnetic field the
strongest?
(D) friction
(A) Both magnetic poles
429. As the distance between (B) Center of the magnet
two magnets increases
(they get farther apart), the (C) Magnetic north pole
force between them: (D) none of above
(A) Increases 434. A material that exerts
(B) Decreases force on others of its kind
and attracts iron is
(C) Stays the Same
(A) ferromagnetic material
(D) none of above
(B) magnet
430. If your mass, the mass of (C) motor
Earth, and the mass of ev-
(D) none of above
erything in the solar system
were twice as much as it is 435. When you break an iron
now, yet everything stayed magnet into two pieces, you
the same size, your weight get
on Earth would
(A) two north poles and two south
(A) be the same. poles
(B) double (B) two south poles
(C) quadruple. (C) two north poles
(D) be eight times as much as (D) a piece of iron that is no
now. longer magnetic

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
506 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

436. What happens to the en- (C) oppose, connect

ergy in a system of mag- (D) none of above
nets when the magnetic
force causes two magnets to 441. What’s the most important
move? function of Earth’s magnetic

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) The potential energy in the sys- field?
tem increases. (A) Earth’s magnetic shield de-
(B) The kinetic energy in the sys- flects asteroids and meteors
tem decreases. (B) Earth’s magnetic shield keeps
(C) Some of the potential energy energy from escaping into space
is converted to kinetic energy. (C) Earth’s magnetic shield de-
(D) Some of the kinetic energy flects the solar winds from the Sun
changes to potential energy. (D) Earth’s magnetic shield helps
birds and other animals navigate
437. means a force that pulls
together 442. Which type of magnets
(A) attract are found in many cranes?

(B) repel (A) Bar magnets

(C) magnetic (B) Electromagnets

(C) Permanent magnets
(D) poles
(D) none of above
438. Magnets can exert force
over a distance because of 443. Which is NOT a property
its of a magnet?
(A) size (A) all magnets have two poles
(B) shape (B) all magnets have a force of at-
traction or repulsion
(C) magnetic field
(C) all magnets are surrounded
(D) density
by a magnetic field
439. The ability to make things (D) all magnets can be turned off
move or change
444. If the north poles of two
(A) Transfer
magnets are placed near
(B) Energy one another, there is
(C) Convert (A) attraction between them
(D) Repel (B) repulsion between them

440. Like poles each other (C) no interaction between them

while unlike poles each (D) none of these
other
445. The end of a magnet,
(A) attract, repel where magnetic forces are
(B) repel, attract greatest is the?

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 507

(A) magnetic poles (B) The magnetic field must be sta-

(B) magnetic field ble

(C) lines of force (C) The magnetic field must be

changing
(D) North and South
(D) The magnetic field must be
446. Magnetic poles that are from a permanent magnet
alike ?
(A) repel each other 451. The source of all mag-
netism is
(B) attract each other
(A) moving electric charges
(C) stregthens magnetic field
(B) ferromagnetic materials
(D) loses its magnetism
(C) tiny domains of aligned atoms
447. Within the atom, which
subatomic particle acts as a (D) tiny pieces of iron
tiny bar magnet?
452. Every magnet has both a
(A) Electron pole and a pole.
(B) Neutron (A) North, South
(C) Proton (B) East, West
(D) Lepton
(C) Positive, Negative
448. “North” and “South” are (D) Positive, South
the names of a magnet’s
two 453. Magnetic field lines
(A) energy levels. (A) Extend from the north pole to
(B) magnetic poles. the south pole
(C) isolated variables. (B) Extend from the south pole to
(D) model systems. the north pole
(C) crossover each other
449. How many poles does a
magnet have? (D) are weakest at the poles
(A) 2 454. Sometimes the north and
(B) 13 south poles of atoms in a
(C) 17 material will line up. What
is the term for the region
(D) 4 where this occurs?
450. What must occur for a (A) domain
magnetic field to induce an
(B) ferromagnetic
electric current?
(C) magnetic field
(A) The magnetic field must be re-
ally big (D) magnetic pole

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
508 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

455. If a magnet is broken into (A) Has magnetic properties for a

two pieces, what happens long time
to the magnetic poles?
(B) is magnetized by an electric
(A) One piece will have a north current
pole, while the other piece will

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) is not magnetized
have a south pole.
(B) Each piece will still have a (D) does not have a north or south
north pole and a south pole. pole

(C) Each piece will have only a 460. Magnetic domains are
north pole.
(A) regions that may or may not
(D) Both pieces will no longer be magnetized.
have any magnetic poles.
(B) clusters of atoms randomly
456. a force by which objects aligned
are attracted to other ob- (C) regions of atoms magnetically
jects or repelled by other ob- aligned
jects
(D) blocks of material
(A) attract
(B) Magnetic Fields 461. Which is NOT a type of fer-
romagnetic material?
(C) Poles
(D) Magnetism (A) aluminum
(B) iron
457. A compass needle points
north because of Earth’s (C) nickel
magnetic field unless (D) cobalt
(A) it is close to a wire with a cur-
rent 462. A current that travels back
and forth in a circuit is a
(B) it is close to any wire
(A) Direct Current
(C) it is close to a battery
(B) Alternating Current
(D) none of above
(C) Fancy Current
458. An electromagnet is
(D) none of above
(A) able to attract all metal sub-
stances 463. An electric current flows
(B) only operating when the cur- through a continuous loop
rent is on known as a

(C) made with bar magnets (A) Circuit

(D) a permanent magnet (B) Field
(C) Domain
459. What is a permanent mag-
net? (D) Switch

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 509

464. What is the difference be- (C) aluminum and lead

tween a bar magnet and an (D) copper and cobalt
electromagnet?
(A) Bar magnets are permanent, 469. In an electric generator,
electromagnets are temporary which part has some outside
force make it spin so it spins
(B) Electromagnets are perma- the generator?
nent, bar magnets are temporary
(A) Turbine
(C) Bar magnets have a current
(B) Permanent magnet
going through them, electromag-
nets do not (C) Electromagnet
(D) None of the above (D) none of above

465. poles attract. 470. What happens when the

south poles of two magnetic
(A) north
fields overlap?
(B) unlike
(A) Attract
(C) south (B) Repel
(D) like (C) Conduct
466. Which effect does the right (D) Insulate
hand rule identify?
471. A coil of wire acts like
(A) The direction of lines of force a magnet when flows
surround a current carrying con- through it.
ductor
(A) water
(B) the direction for reluctance in
a current carrying conductor (B) current
(C) voltage
(C) the direction for retentivity in a
current carrying conductor (D) food
(D) the direction for residual mag- 472. Iron, cobalt, and nickel
netism in a current carrying con- are the metals which are
ductor
(A) the three most common mag-
467. A magnet will attract scis- netic substances
sors if the scissors contain: (B) most easily melted
(A) copper (C) electric insulators
(B) aluminum (D) used in making slushies
(C) gold 473. A 3.25 A current is mov-
(D) nickel ing through a loop with 5
turns. What is the radius
468. Which two metals will be of the loop that produces a
attracted by a magnet? magnetic field of 3.4x10−4 T at
(A) iron and steel its center?
(B) gold and silver (A) 0.03 m

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
510 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) 0.25 m 479. When two magnets pull

apart or push together it is
(C) 0.50 m
called
(D) 0.75 m
(A) magnetic force
474. When two magnets repel, (B) magnetic poles

NARAYAN CHANGDER
it means that they (C) magnetic field
(A) change color (D) magnetic field lines
(B) pull together
480. The Earth produces its own
(C) push apart field.
(D) get colder (A) spectrum
(B) electric
475. What are the ends of a
magnet called? (C) magnetic
(A) magnetic pole (D) progressive

(B) magnetic field 481. What would we call a nail

(C) magnetic domain that can pick up a paperclip
because it is touching a mag-
(D) electric motor net?

476. A compass always points (A) temporary magnet

toward: (B) poles
(A) south. (C) force
(B) magnetic south. (D) detector
(C) east. 482. Permanent magnets have
(D) magnetic north. a weaker magnetic field if
(A) All of its magnetic domains
477. Electrical potential energy are aligned
per charge is electric
(B) Some of its magnetic domains
(A) force. are not aligned.
(B) power. (C) Its magnetic domains are
aligned in opposite directions
(C) potential.
(D) It has magnetic electrons in its
(D) work.
atoms.
478. Which direction does a 483. Magnetic field lines about
compass always point? a current-carrying wire
(A) north (A) extend radially from the wire
(B) south (B) circle the wire in closed loops
(C) east (C) both of these
(D) west (D) neither of these

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 511

484. What type of materials (A) attraction

are needed to create an elec-
(B) equilibrium
tromagnet?
(A) battery, light bulb, plastic (C) magnetic acceleration
straw (D) repulsion
(B) battery, coil of wire, iron core
489. The strength of a magnetic
(C) generator, iron core, switch
field generated by an elec-
(D) switch, source of electricity, tric current is
compass
(A) equal to the current
485. pushes an object away (B) not related to the current
Magnetic field-the area or
power around a magnet (C) directly proportional to the
current
(A) Attract
(B) Repel (D) inversely proportional to the
current
(C) Force
(D) Poles 490. When two objects that do
not easily conduct electricity
486. For the electromagnet to rub against each other, the
attract and then repel the friction can cause
permanent magnet in the
speaker, what has to hap- (A) Electric current
pen? (B) motion
(A) The electric current must be (C) light
turned off and on.
(D) static charge
(B) More coils must be added to
the electromagnet.
491. Which letter is the symbol
(C) Noises sent through the for the magnetic field?
speaker must be very loud.
(A) A
(D) The electric current must re-
verse directions. (B) B

487. A material that has a (C) N

strong attraction to magnets (D) U
is called a
(A) Ferromagnetic Element 492. What makes something
magnetic?
(B) Circuit
(A) its weight
(C) Conductor
(D) Insulator (B) its atoms
(C) its size
488. What are the two mag-
netic forces? (D) its shape

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
512 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

493. What happens when the 497. Which of these will magne-
north and south poles of tise a piece of iron?
two magnetic fields over- (A) Place in a coil with d.c. current
lap? flowing
(A) Attraction (B) Hammer in a strong magnetic

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Repulsion field
(C) Resistance (C) Place in a coil with a.c. cur-
rent flowing
(D) Current
(D) Hammer away from a mag-
494. What causes the magnetic netic film
field to form in an electro-
498. What causes electricity?
magnet?
(A) moving neutrons
(A) Electromagnets are only
called magnets because electric- (B) moving protons
ity is involved. (C) moving atoms
(B) The domains of the magnet (D) moving electrons
become aligned
499. What condition is neces-
(C) The magnetic field is ab- sary for an electric charge
sorbed from another magnet to have a magnetic field
(D) Electric current flowing in a around it?
wire (A) it must be in a copper wire.
(B) it must be isolated from the op-
495. the greater the distance
posite charge.
between two magnets
(C) it must be moving.
(A) the stronger the force between
them (D) it must be motionless.
(B) the weaker the force between 500. Magnets create pushing
them and pulling
(C) the force between them isn’t (A) Repel
affected (B) Attract
(D) none of above (C) Forces
496. What happens when two (D) Metal
north poles of a magnet are 501. An asteroid exerts a 360-
placed together? N gravitational force on a
(A) they repel nearby spacecraft. If the
spacecraft moves to a posi-
(B) they attract
tion three times as far from
(C) they cancel each other out the center of the asteroid,
(D) the strength of the magnet is the force will be
doubled (A) zero.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 513

(B) 40 N. (A) Fleming’s Left Hand Rule

(C) 120 N. (B) Fleming’s Right Hand Rule
(D) 360 N. (C) Right Hand Grip Rule

502. The force on an electron (D) none of above

moving in a magnetic field 506. All magnetism is caused
will be the largest when its by
direction
(A) stationary electric charges.
(A) is at an angle other than 90
degrees to the magnetic field di- (B) gravitational fields.
rection (C) moving electric charges.
(B) is perpendicular to the mag- (D) magnetic fields.
netic field
507. Earth’s magnetic field is
(C) is the same as the magnetic strongest at the and
field weakest at the
(D) is exatly opposite to the mag- (A) equator, poles
netic field (180 degrees)
(B) north pole, south pole
503. What happens when you (C) poles, equator
touch a metal doorknob af-
ter rubbing your shoes on (D) south pole, north pole
the carpet? 508. Two objects will attract
(A) The doorknob sends a burst of one another when they
electric current into your body have
(B) Millions of electrons go from (A) like charges
your finger into the doorknob (B) no charge
(C) The doorknob sends millions (C) opposite charges
of electrons into your finger
(D) the same amount of charge
(D) Your finger becomes nega-
tively charged 509. The area of magnetic force
around a magnet is known
504. The ends of a magnet as its
where the field is strongest
is called what? (A) Magnetic Field

(A) magnetic field (B) Magnetic Fan Lines

(B) dependent variable (C) Magnetic Area

(C) magnetism (D) Magnetic Location

(D) magnetic poles 510. What is kinetic energy?

505. rule can be used to (A) The energy that is stored in an

determine the direction of object or system
the induced current pro- (B) To push objects away from
duced. each other

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
514 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) The energy that an object has (A) electromagnetic field

because it is moving
(B) conductor
(D) To move from one object to
another (C) open circuit
(D) electric current

NARAYAN CHANGDER
511. What would happen if I
move a bar magnet in and
out of a coil of copper wire? 516. Mr. Garcia uses magnets
to hold a poster on a steel fil-
(A) Electric current would disap- ing cabinet because a main
pear component of steel is
(B) The magnet would explode
(A) iron.
(C) Electric current will flow
through the wire (B) carbon.

(D) It would produce a gravita- (C) plastic.

tional field (D) glass.
512. What is found at both
ends of a bar magnet? 517. Which item is magnetic?
(A) magnetic poles (A) iron
(B) magnetic coils (B) paper
(C) ferromagnets (C) plastic
(D) electromagnets
(D) pennies
513. Earth acts like a giant
magnet due to 518. The magnetic field lines
around a bar magnet
(A) gravity
(B) geothermal activity (A) are perfectly straight

(C) convection currents in the (B) are only perpendicular to the

molten core magnet
(D) solar radiation (C) spread out from one pole and
curve around to the other
514. Magnetism is produced by
the motion of electrons as (D) cross back and forth over one
they another
(A) move around the nucleus
519. A force that can act at a
(B) spin on their axes distance is called
(C) both A and B
(A) non contact force
(D) neither A or B
(B) friction
515. Material that allows elec-
(C) balanced
tric current or heat to flow
through easily. (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 515

520. If you put a small compass 524. Which element is mag-

in a magnetic field, the com- netic?
pass will (A) calcium
(A) swing randomly
(B) chromium
(B) line up in a direction parallel
(C) carbon
to the magnetic field lines
(D) cobalt
(C) line up in a direction perpen-
dicular to the magnetic field lines 525. Which material will mag-
(D) seek electrical charge concen- nets attract?
trations
(A) copper
521. What did Faraday’s exper- (B) wood
iments with magnets and
(C) iron
electromagnetic induction
demonstrate? (D) plastic
(A) Strong electromagnets make 526. What is an amplifier?
electric current.
(A) an electronic device that in-
(B) Electric current is made when
creases the strength of an electric
the magnetic field changes.
signal
(C) Strong electric current makes
(B) a machine that converts me-
electromagnets.
chanical energy into electrical en-
(D) Magnetic fields are made ergy
when the electric field changes.
(C) a device that uses an electro-
522. Which of the following is magnet to convert electrical en-
the best definition of electro- ergy into mechanical energy
magnetism? (D) a device that increases or de-
(A) The use of electrical energy to creases the voltage of alternating
create magnets current
(B) the use of magnets to gener- 527. When you bring two mag-
ate electric currents nets together, they exert a
(C) the interaction between elec- push or pull called a on
trical energy and magnetism each other.
(D) the appearance in nature of (A) polar force
objects that have both electric and
(B) air force
magnetic fields
(C) magnetic field
523. What are domains like?
(D) magnetic force
(A) auroras
(B) molecules 528. A compass taken to Earth’s
moon does not point in
(C) iron filings a specific direction on the
(D) tiny magnets moon.What is the most

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
516 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

likely reason for the differ- (C) What?

ence between how the com-
(D) none of above
pass works on Earth and on
the moon? 533. Which type of magnet
(A) The moon lacks an atmo- loses magnetism outside of

NARAYAN CHANGDER
sphere. a magnetic field?
(B) The moon contains no rocks (A) a strong magnet
that have iron.
(B) a temporary magnet
(C) The moon does not have a
(C) a permanent magnet
strong magnetic field.
(D) The moon has no bodies of (D) an electromagnet
water.
534. In magnetic materials, all
529. What material attracts of the are pointing in the
iron? same direction.
(A) magnet (A) doors
(B) magnesia (B) electrons
(C) magnetite (C) domains
(D) aurora (D) orbits
530. Magnetic fields are pro- 535. What is a generator?
duced by
(A) a machine that converts me-
(A) moving particles on earth
chanical energy into electrical en-
(B) charges at rest ergy
(C) moving particles (B) an electronic device that in-
(D) moving charged particles creases the strength of an electric
signal
531. Which best describes elec-
tromagnetism? (C) a device that increases or de-
creases the voltage of alternating
(A) the electrical component of a current
magnet
(D) a device that uses an electro-
(B) the flow of electric charges be-
magnet to convert electrical en-
tween two magnets
ergy into mechanical energy
(C) the interaction between elec-
trical energy and magnetism 536. the strongest point on a
(D) the flow of a magnetic field magnet; each magnet has a
between electrons NORTH and SOUTH pole
(A) Force
532. A compass needle acts like
a (B) Magnet
(A) Magnet (C) Pole
(B) Guide (D) Magnetic Fields

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 517

537. What is a magnetic field? 542. What is a transformer?

(A) the geographic poles of the (A) a device that increases or de-
earth creases the voltage of alternating
(B) the shape, strength, and size current
of a magnet (B) an electronic device that in-
(C) an area of magnetic force creases the strength of an electri-
around a magnet cal signal
(D) a street sign to help direct you (C) a device that uses an electro-
magnet to convert electric signal
538. The area around a mag-
net in which magnetic forces (D) a machine that converts me-
can act is? chanical energy into electrical en-
(A) motor ergy
(B) magnetic field
543. Probably the most useful
(C) magnet thing about electromagnets
(D) magnetic poles is that they can be turned
and
539. The is Earth’s magnetic
(A) on, off
field that protects us from
the sun’s harmful radiation (B) positive, negative
and solar wind.
(C) north, south
(A) Magnetosphere
(D) on, negative
(B) Biosphere
(C) Hydrosphere 544. Magnetic poles that are
(D) Heliosphere unlike and magnetic
poles that are alike
540. What is the magnetic at-
traction or repulsion of a (A) run; stay
magnet called? (B) attract; repel
(A) the magnetic domain (C) stay; repel
(B) the magnetic field
(D) repel; attract
(C) the magnetic pole
(D) the magnetic force 545. Rate this statement:No
force due to Earth’s gravity
541. What is the name for any acts on astronauts inside the
object that attracts the metal orbiting space station.
iron?
(A) always true while in orbit
(A) Magnet
(B) Circuit (B) sometimes true while in orbit

(C) Conductor (C) always false

(D) Insulator (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
518 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

546. How can we see a mag- 550. repel

netic field? (A) to push objects away from
(A) by painting the magnet red each other
and blue (B) to provide evidence that goes

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) by melting the magnet against a claim
(C) by putting the magnet into su- (C) an object, diagram, or com-
percooled fluid puter program that helps us
(D) by putting iron filings over a (D) when two objects come close
magnet together

547. What is a magnetic do- 551. The closer together a mag-

main? net’s magnetic field lines
are, ?
(A) a region in which the mag-
netic fields of individual atoms are (A) the stronger the magnetic field
lined up (B) the more attracted they are to
(B) the region around a magnet in each other
which magnetic forces can act (C) the more they repel each
(C) the force of attraction or re- other
pulsion of substances, especially (D) the more it loses its mag-
those that contain iron, due to the netism
arrangement of their electrons
552. Magnetism is caused
(D) the part of the atmosphere af-
when electrons
fected by Earth’s magnetic field
(A) decay
548. Which object would a
(B) spin and move around the nu-
magnet attract?
cleus of an atom
(A) a glass bottle
(C) remain stationary
(B) a piece of paper
(D) change into protons
(C) a metal paper clipcompass
553. What subatomic particle
(D) a rubber erasermagnetic field causes magnetism in an
549. Which of the following de- atom?
termines whether or not a (A) protons
material is magnetic? (B) neutrons
(A) the density of the material (C) electrons
(B) the weight of the material on (D) nucleus
Earth
(C) the alignment of atoms in the 554. A motor spins because of
material the combination of

(D) the number of elements that (A) Electricity and magnetic forces
make up the material (B) Metal and magnets

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 519

(C) Gears and wires 560. What is a material

(D) Batteries and electricity through which electrons can-
not move easily?
555. Magnetic force between (A) Conductor
two magnets gets weaker
the more between them. (B) Insulator
(A) distance (C) Magnet
(B) attraction (D) Circuit
(C) metal 561. The Earth’s magnetic field
(D) lightsabers is most useful for

556. The magnetic field lines of (A) deflecting solar wind

a bar magnet spread out (B) keeping track of time
from the (C) creating sunny weather
(A) north end to the south end. (D) making it look cool in front of
(B) south end to the north end. the other planets
(C) edges to the center. 562. Unlike poles of a magnet
(D) center to the edges.
557. what is the unit of mag- (A) attract
netic flux (B) repel
(A) Wb (C) cancel each other out
(B) W (D) none of above
(C) T
563. Where is the magnetic
(D) wb/m2 force on a rectangular mag-
558. What is an electronic net the greatest?
device that increases the (A) at the poles
strength of an electric sig- (B) in the middle
nal?
(C) above the magnet
(A) amplifier
(D) below the magnet
(B) generator
(C) transformer 564. On a bar magnet, where
is the strongest magnetic
(D) electric motor
force?
559. Which of these equations (A) On the ends of the bar mag-
shows the force on an indi- net
vidual charged particle?
(B) On the top of the bar magnet
(A) F = Bqv sin θ
(C) On the bottom of the bar
(B) F = BIl sin θ magnet
(C) B = µo nI (D) The bar magnet does not
(D) none of above have a magnetic field.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
520 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

565. In order to make an elec- (C) 30 V.

tromagnet, you need a (D) 60 hertz.
(A) battery, nail, and magnet
570. Ancient people discovered
(B) battery, wire, and nail magnetic rocks called lode-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) magnet, nail, and wire stone. What did they use
(D) all of the above them for?
(A) fires
566. Moving a magnet near a
wire will (B) compasses

(A) magnetize the wire (C) sculptures

(B) induce a current in the wire (D) weapons

(C) have no effect 571. A magnetic force is:

(D) cause the wire to cool (A) a force produced when mag-
netic poles interact.
567. Select the statements
(more than one) that are (B) a force produced when mag-
true. netic poles remain constant.
(A) Magnets stick to ALL metal ob- (C) a force produced when mag-
jects. netic poles attract only.
(B) Two magnets can attract and (D) a force produced when mag-
repel each other. netic poles stay the same.
(C) A magnet has either a North 572. Poles that are the same
pole or a South pole, but not both. each other.
(D) A magnet has an invisible (A) Attract
magnetic field extending from
(B) Repel
both poles.
(C) Poles
568. An asteroid exerts a 360-
(D) Connect
N gravitational force on a
nearby spacecraft. The 360- 573. Attract
N force on the spacecraft is
directed (A) To pull objects close to each
other
(A) toward the asteroid.
(B) to push objects away from
(B) away from the asteroid. each other
(C) toward the Sun. (C) to change from one type to an-
(D) none of above other

569. The frequency of AC cur- (D) an electric current

rent in North America is 574. An electric field gets
(A) 120 V. stronger as you
(B) 50 hertz. (A) get farther from a charge

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.1 Magnets and magnetic fields 521

(B) remove electrons from a neg- 579. When a compass is near a

atively charged object bar magnet, what happens
(C) add electrons to a positively to a compass needle as you
charged object move the compass around?
(D) get closer to a charge (A) The compass needle always
points north.
575. As earth’s magnetic poles
(B) The compass needle points in
move what happens to the
random directions.
magnetic declination of a
given location (C) The compass needle follows
the pattern of magnetic field lines
(A) it will always remain constant
(D) The compass needle’s north
(B) it will return to zero
pole always points to the north
(C) it will change pole of the magnet.
(D) it will always double
580. Materials which can be
576. What is known as the dif- made into magnets for a
ference between the earth’s short period of time when
magnetic pole and its geo- placed in a strong magnetic
graphic pole? field are called
(A) magnetic declination (A) gas
(B) magnetic difference (B) temporary magnets
(C) geographic decline (C) plastic
(D) geographic increase (D) conductors

577. Which poles are at- 581. What happens when two
tracted? bar magnets repel each
(A) north and north other?

(B) south and south (A) The poles of the magnets pull
toward each other.
(C) north and south
(B) The poles of the magnets push
(D) none of above away from each other.
578. Which of the following (C) The centers of the magnets
best describes a magnetic pull toward each other.
field? (D) The centers o the magnets
(A) a measure of the length of a push away from each other.
magnet
582. A is any material that
(B) the force that pushes two mag- attracts iron or objects made
nets away from each other of iron.
(C) an invisible region that sur- (A) magnet
rounds the north pole of a magnet
(B) rock
(D) a region around a magnet in
which you can measure magnetic (C) gravity
forces (D) liquid

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
522 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

583. what forms when parti- (A) electronic colonies

cles from the sun hit oxygen (B) magnetic field generators
and nitrogen atoms
(C) magnetic domains
(A) south pole
(D) polarized magnetite
(B) aurora

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) North Pole 588. What type of equipment is
used to measure the current
(D) magnetic field induced when a wire passes
584. The closer you are to a through a magnetic field?
magnetic, the the mag- (A) a transformer
netic field. (B) a galvanometer
(A) weaker (C) a generator
(B) stronger (D) an insulated wire
(C) brighter
589. Magnets always have
(D) dimmer pole(s).
585. Which of the following el- (A) one
ements are ferromagnetic? (B) two
(A) iron, nickel, and cobalt (C) three
(B) iron, aluminum, and steel (D) four
(C) iron, copper, and gold
590. What are the 2 types of
(D) platinum, lead, and alu- waves?
minum
(A) Transvese
586. In our study of electricity (B) ocean
and magnetism, we use the
RIGHT hand rule. We point (C) converse
our thumb in the direction of (D) longitudinal
the , our fingers show us
the direction of the 591. The ends of the magnets
are called
(A) current / magnetic field
(A) attract
(B) field / current
(B) repel
(C) compass / needle
(C) magnetic
(D) needle / compass
(D) poles
(E) Nonsense, there is no right
hand rule! 592. Permanent magnets can
be demagnetized by
587. In a magnetic material, them past the Curie point
whole regions of the mate- (approximately 1, 060 ◦ F).
rial in which the electrons
are aligned in the same di- (A) heating
rection are called (B) freezing

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current 523

(C) shaking (B) wind

(D) solidifying (C) sun
593. Which unit is a measure of (D) light
a magnetic field.
596. When the atoms of a sub-
(A) meter
stance align their magnetic
(B) milligram fields with each other, they
(C) telsa are called
(D) ampere (A) ferromagnetic

594. Magnetic poles that are (B) anti-ferromagnetic

unlike, do what? (C) a compass
(A) attract each other (D) a lodestone
(B) repel each other
597. Materials that allow the
(C) strenghthen the magnetic
charges of an electric cur-
fieold
rent to move freely through
(D) loses its magnetism them are called ?
595. what is the earths mag- (A) conductors
netic field useful for
(B) insulators
(A) deflecting the solar wind,
(C) electromagnet
charged particles that come from
the Sun. (D) magnetic field

4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric

current
1. how does an electric current (D) the cross-sectional area of the
produce a magnetic field? solenoid
(A) with friction 3. Which of the following are
(B) when electricity is in motion two kinds of magnets?
(C) when electrical charge is in (A) atoms, domains
motion (B) magnetic fields, magnetic
(D) with force and friction poles
(C) ferromagnets, electromag-
2. The magnetic field B inside nets
a long ideal solenoid is inde-
(D) magnesia magnets, mag-
pendent of:
netite magnets
(A) the current
4. Calculate the magnetic field
(B) the core material due to a straight conductor
(C) the spacing of the windings of infinite length carrying a

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
524 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

current of 3 A at a point 5 (A) circular

cm away from the center of (B) ellipse
conductor?
(C) parabolic
(A) 0.6 x 10-5 T
(D) straight line
(B) 1.2 X 10-5 T

NARAYAN CHANGDER
9. An Electric charge in a uni-
(C) 3 X 10-5 T
form motion produces
(D) 12 X 10-5 T
(A) An Electric Field only
5. Which of the following cor- (B) An Magnetic field only
rectly describes the mag- (C) Both Electric Field & Magnetic
netic field near a long field
straight wire?
(D) Neither of them
(A) The field consists of straight
lines perpendicular to the wire. 10. The magnitude of the force
(B) The field consists of straight on a current carrying con-
lines parallel to the wire. ductor in a magnetic field
can be increase by all of the
(C) The field consists of radial following EXCEPT
lines originating from the wire.
(A) use longer wire
(D) The field consists of concentric
(B) increase current
circles centred on the wire.
(C) use stronger permanent mag-
6. A superconducting solenoid net
is to be designed to gener-
(D) use wire with larger cross sec-
ate a magnetic field of 5.00
tional area
T. If the solenoid winding
has 1000 turns/m, what is 11. When will a current carry-
the required current? ing conductor placed in a
(A) 1000 A magnetic field experience a
zero force?
(B) 1990 A
(A) when placed parallel to mag-
(C) 3980 A
netic field
(D) 5000 A (B) when placed perpendicular to
7. What type of core is best for magnetic field
electromagnets? (C) when placed aligned with the
(A) Steel magnetic field
(B) Iron (D) when placed at an angle of
600
(C) Plastic
(D) Copper 12. A long straight cylindrical
shell carries current i uni-
8. The nature of magnetic field formly distributed over its
line passing through the cen- cross section. The magni-
tre of current carrying circu- tude of the magnetic field is
lar loop is: greatest:

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current 525

(A) at the inner surface of the shell (D) direct current motor
(B) at the outer surface of the shell 17. Solenoid A has length L
(C) inside the shell near the mid- and N turns, solenoid B
dle has length 2L and N turns,
(D) in hollow region near the in- and solenoid C has length
ner surface L/2 and 2N turns. If
each solenoid carries the
13. A straight wire of length same current, rank by the
0.5m and carrying current strength of the magnetic
1.2A is placed in uniform field in the center of each
magnetic field of induction solenoid from largest to
2T, applied perpendicular to smallest.
the length of the wire. The
(A) A, B, C
force on the wire is
(B) A, C, B
(A) 2.4 N
(C) B, C, A
(B) 1.2 N
(D) C, A, B
(C) 3.0 N
(D) 2.0 N 18. What should one do to max-
imize the magnitude of the
14. According to right hand magnetic force acting on a
thumb rule the direction of charged particle moving in a
magnetic field in a current magnetic field? I. Maximize
carrying circular coil is de- the strength of the magnetic
noted by field II. Minimize the parti-
(A) Thumb cle’s velocity III. Ensure that
(B) Middle finger the particle is moving in the
same direction as the mag-
(C) Curl finger netic field lines
(D) First finger (A) I only
15. All of the following are ap- (B) I and II only
plication of electromagnet (C) All the options
EXCEPT
(D) I and III
(A) microphone
(B) circuit breaker 19. No force acts on a current
carrying conductor when it
(C) electric bell
is placed-
(D) ear phone
(A) perpendicular to the magnetic
16. The application of catapult field
effect is (B) parallel to the magnetic field
(A) microphone (C) far away from the magnetic
(B) generator field
(C) electric bell (D) inside a magnetic field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
526 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

20. The property of current car- what distance away from

rying wire producing mag- the wire would the magnetic
netic field called ‘Magnetic field be 2.5 x 10-5 T?
effect of electric current’ (A) 0.8 m
was discovered first by

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 0.04 m
(A) Isaac Newton
(C) 0.02 m
(B) Hans Christian Oersted
(D) 4 m
(C) Richard Feynman
(E) 0.5 m
(D) Albert Einstein
25. Which statement COULD
21. Which statement about
NOT be used to describe a
magnetic monopoles is
uniform magnetic field?
false?
(A) Field lines point in the same di-
(A) A monopole is a hypothetical
rection.
separate north pole.
(B) Research scientists use them (B) Parallel field lines
for internal medical testing appli- (C) Field lines get closer together.
cations. (D) Field lines do not change di-
(C) A monopole is a hypothetical rection.
separate south pole.
26. Biot Savart law states
(D) They don’t exist.
(A) Magnetic field has a net out-
22. what current must flow in ward flow
an infinitely long straight
(B) Magnetic field has no net out-
wire to produce a magnetic
ward flow
field of 4 × 105 T at 8 cm from
the wire? (C) Magnetic field and electric
field are normal to each other
(A) 1.6 A
(D) Total magnetic flux coming
(B) 16 A
out of a surface is total current en-
(C) .16 A closed
(D) 160 A
27. Fleming’s left hand rule
23. Magnetic field inside a long used to determine
solenoid carrying current is (A) direction of electric current
(A) same at all points (uniform) (B) direction of pole
(B) different at poles and at the (C) direction of magnetic force
centre
(D) direction of magnetic field
(C) zero
(D) different at all points 28. When a current-carrying
conductor is in a magnetic
24. A long, straight wire is car- field of a permanent mag-
rying a current of 5.0 A. At net, the interaction between

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current 527

the two magnetic fields pro- 33. Who was the first to ob-
duce serve the magnetic effect of
(A) a current on the conductor electric current?

(B) a force on the conductor (A) Faraday

(C) a electricity on the conductor (B) Oersted

(D) a pole on the conductor (C) Volta
(D) Ampere
29. What advantage does an
electromagnet have over a 34. The relative strength of the
magnet? magnetic field is shown by
(A) It can be switched on and off the degree of closeness of
the field lines.
(B) It is stronger
(A) false
(C) It is easier to change shape
(B) true
(D) none of above
(C) can’t say
30. If current is passed in a
(D) none of above
spring with a weight hung
on it, then the spring 35. How do you make an elec-
(A) will be compressed tromagnet stronger?
(B) will expand (A) Add a motor and/or light-
(C) compression and expansion bulbs
both will occur (B) Add more light bulbs and/or
(D) no change in the state of the wire coils
spring (C) add more wire coils and/or a
switch
31. Moving charges, or an elec-
tric current, produces a mag- (D) add more wire coils and/or
netic field. batteries
(A) Gauss’s Law 36. A wire has current travel-
(B) Ohm’s Law ling to the right. What is
the direction of the magnetic
(C) Ampere’s Law
field above the wire?
(D) Law of Conservation of Mag-
(A) Up
netism
(B) Down
32. The magnetic field lines due
(C) Into page
to a straight wire carrying a
current are (D) Out of page
(A) straight 37. Which object would NOT at-
(B) circular tract a magnet?
(C) parabolic (A) an iron scissor
(D) elliptical (B) a steel nail

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
528 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) an aluminium wire (C) The strength of the magnetic

(D) a nickel plate field is doubled.
(D) The strength of the magnetic
38. Magnetic field produced
field decreases.
around a straight conductor

NARAYAN CHANGDER
due to current in it is given 42. Which part (s) of the DC
by motor connect the power
(A) Fleming’s right hand rule supply to the split-ring and
(B) Right hand thumb rule coil?

(C) Clock rule (A) Carbon brushes

(D) Fleming’s left hand rule (B) Magnets
(C) Commutator
39. Which of the following ac-
tions would double the mag- (D) Slip rings
nitude of the magnetic force
per unit length between two 43. In the magnetic field equa-
parallel current-carrying tion, what is the variable
wires? Choose all correct µ?
answers. (A) magnetic field
(A) Double one of the currents. (B) current
(B) Double the distance between
(C) permeability
them.
(D) radius
(C) Double both currents.
(D) None of the above 44. Calculate the magnetic field
strength of a solenoid with
40. The strength of the mag- 500 turns, 0.10 m long, car-
netic field at a point x near rying a current of 4.0 A and
a long straight current carry- with a radius of 10-2 m.
ing conductor is B. The field
at a distance x/2 will be (A) 31 x 10-4 T
(A) B/2 (B) 62 x 10-4 T
(B) B/4 (C) 125 x 10-4 T
(C) 2 B (D) 250 x 10-4 T
(D) 4 B
45. The factors on which one
41. What happens to the magnetic field strength pro-
strength of a magnetic field duced by current carrying
as you move away from the solenoids depends are
magnet? (A) Magnitude of current
(A) The strength of the magnetic
(B) Nature of core material
field increases.
(C) Number of turns
(B) The strength of the magnetic
field doesn’t change. (D) All of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current 529

46. What does the thumb indi- 51. What is meant by the term
cate in flemings left hand magnetic field line?
rule? (A) Line that shows direction of
(A) Force the magnetic force
(B) current (B) Line that shows direction a
(C) Magnetic field direction metal object will move.
(D) none of above (C) Line in between the magnetic
poles
47. Two magnetic poles that are
the same each other (D) Line that shows the flow of
electric current.
(A) Attract
(B) Repel 52. In the magnetic field equa-
(C) neutral to tion, what is the variable B?
(D) none of the above (A) radius
(B) permeability
48. The motion of a current car-
rying conductor in an mag- (C) current
netic fields can be deter- (D) magnetic field
mined by
(A) Right hand Grip Rule 53. “a region around a mag-
netic material or a mov-
(B) Fleming’s Right Hand Rule
ing electric charge within
(C) Fleming’s Left Hand Rule which the force of mag-
(D) Direction of current flow netism acts”.This is defini-
tion of
49. Application of the force on
current carrying conductor (A) magnetic field
in a magnetic field (B) magnetic charge
(A) Moving coil ammeter (C) magnet
(B) dynamo (D) electromagnet
(C) Dc motor
54. The direction of the force on
(D) electrIc bell
a current-carrying wire in
(E) Dc generator an external magnetic field is
50. What happens when
an electric current flows (A) perpendicular to the current
through a wire? only
(A) The wire begins to spin. (B) perpendicular to the magnetic
(B) Nothing happens. field only
(C) A field of gravity is created (C) perpendicular to both the cur-
around the wire. rent and the magnetic field
(D) A magnetic field is created (D) parallel to the current and to
around the wire. the magnetic field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
530 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

55. Which of the following fac- (A) 1.0x10−5 T

tors affect the strength of (B) 2.0x10−5 T
force experience by a cur-
rent carrying conduct in a (C) 3.0x10−5 T
uniform magnetic field? (D) 4.0x10−5 T

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) magnetic field strength 59. The attraction or repulsion
(B) magnitude of current in a con- created by spinning electric
ductor charges
(C) length of the conductor within (A) electric generator
magnetic field (B) magnetic force
(D) All of above (C) solenoid
56. Two long, parallel conduc- (D) electromagnet
tors carrying current liein a
60. A 5 C and 8 C charge
horizontal plane. The two
give off a force of 2.5x109
conductors attract onean-
N. What is the distance be-
other. The two currents
tween them?
must be
(A) 11 m
(A) in the same direction
(B) 12 m
(B) in opposite directions
(C) 121 m
(C) perpendicular to each other
(D) 144 m
(D) parallel to the earth’s mag-
netic field 61. Two parallel wires carry
(E) perpendicular to the earth’s current in the same direction
field attract each other because
of
57. Which rule is applied to find (A) Potential difference between
the direction of motion of them
a current carrying conductor
(B) Mutual inductance between
when placed in a magnetic
them
field?
(C) Electric forces between them
(A) right hand thumb rule
(D) Magnetic forces between
(B) clock rule
them
(C) Fleming left hand rule
62. Which particle would pro-
(D) Fleming right hand rule
duce a magnetic field?
58. Two long parallel wires 40 (A) a neutral particle moving in a
cm apart are carrying cur- straight line
rents of 10 A and 20 A in the (B) a neutral particle moving in a
opposite direction. What is circle
the magnitude of the mag-
netic field halfway between (C) a stationary charged particle
the wires? (D) a moving charged particle

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.2 Magnetic fields due to straight wire carrying electric current 531

63. What can demagnetize a 68. A solenoid of length 50 cm

magnet? and 5000 turns carries a cur-
(A) high altitudes rent of 10 A. What is the
magnetic field at the ends of
(B) high temperatures the solenoid?
(C) low altitudes (A) 0.063 T
(D) low temperatures
(B) 0.126 T
64. According to right hand (C) 0.006 T
thumb rule the direction of
magnetic field in a current (D) 0.001 T
carrying straight conductor
is denoted by: 69. Which of the following are
two effects of Earth’s mag-
(A) Thumb
netic field?
(B) Curl fingers
(A) compasspoints to geographic
(C) Middle finger north, auroras seen at both poles
(D) First finger
(B) compasspoints to magnetic
65. Some metals can be mag- north, auroras seen at both poles
netic. Which of these can be (C) compasspoints to geographic
magnetic? south, auroras seen at the equator
(A) Steel (D) compass points to geographic
(B) Copper north, auroras seenat the equator
(C) Aluminum
70. The magnetic field lines
(D) Copper near a long straight wire
carrying current are:
66. What is the unit of magnetic
field? (A) Straight lines
(A) ampere (B) Concentric rings
(B) watt (C) Spiral lines
(C) kilowatt hour
(D) Radial lines
(D) tesla
71. force on a conductor carry-
67. Magnetic field arises due to ing a current = 5.37 N, mag-
(A) flow of steady current through netic flux density = 3.91 T,
a current element current = 4.33 A, length =?
(B) flow of charges (A) 0.0851
(C) flow of steady current through (B) 1.17
an infinite wire
(C) 0.317
(D) flow of steady current through
a closed loop (D) 0.106

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
532 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

72. force on a conductor carry- 76. As electrons move, they

ing a current = 1.32 N, cur- make
rent = 4 A, length = 3.88 m, (A) electromagnetism.
magnetic flux density =?
(B) auroras.
(A) 0.0851

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) ferromagnetism.
(B) 1.17
(D) magnetic fields.
(C) 0.317
77. Name one factor that does
(D) 0.106
not affect the size of a force
73. force on a conductor carry- in on a current-carrying con-
ing a current = 2.43 N, mag- ductor placed in a magnetic
netic flux density = 2.69 T, field?
length = 8.5 m, current =? (A) Gravity
(A) 0.0851 (B) Magnetic flux density/size of
magnetic field
(B) 1.17
(C) Size of the current
(C) 0.317
(D) Length of the conductor
(D) 0.106
78. What is true about electric-
74. According to right hand rule ity and magnetic fields?
to find force exerted on a
current carrying conductor (A) Electricity is needed to create
placed in magnetic field, the any magnet.
stretched thumb indicates (B) Electricity always creates a
(A) direction of force magnetic field.
(C) Electricity is stronger than a
(B) direction of current
magnetic field.
(C) direction of magnetic field
(D) Electricity prevents magnetic
(D) direction of electric field fields from occurring.
(E) direction of motion of charge 79. A superconducting wire car-
ries a current of 104 A. Find
75. A solenoid is 3.0 cm long
the magnetic field at a dis-
and has a radius of 0.50 cm.
tance of 1.0 m from the
It is wrapped with 500 turns
wire.
of wire carrying a current of
2.0 A. The magnetic field at (A) 2x10−3 T
the center of the solenoid is: (B) 8x10−3 T
(A) 9.9 ‘ 10-8 T (C) 1.6x10−2 T
(B) 1.3 ‘ 10-3 T (D) 3.2x10−2 T
(C) 4.2 ‘ 10-2 T
80. For the right hand grip rule
(D) 16 T for a solenoid:The thumb

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field 533

points towards of the the wires are separated by

magnetic field while 0.40 cm. The magnetic field
(A) positive pole at a point midway between
the wires is:
(B) south pole
(A) 0 T
(C) north pole
(D) negative pole (B) 4.0 ‘ 10-4 T
(C) 8.0 ‘ 10-4 T
81. magnetic flux density =
0.45 T, current = 1.37 A, (D) 12 ‘ 10-4 T
length = 1.9 m, force on a
conductor carrying a current 83. What is the magnitude of
=? the magnetic force per unit
(A) 0.0851 length between a pair of
parallel wires separated by
(B) 1.17 2 m if they carry each a cur-
(C) 0.317 rent of 3 A? A.
(D) 0.106 (A) 1.8x10−6 N/m
82. Two long straight wires are (B) 9x10−7 N/m
parallel and carry current in
(C) 4.5x10−7 N/m
the same direction. The cur-
rents are 8.0 and 12 A and (D) 3x10−7 N/m

4.3 Force on current carrying wire in magnetic field

1. A charged particle is in- (D) none of above
jected into a uniform mag-
netic field such that its ve- 3. The magnetic field at a
locity vector is perpendicu- point on the axis of a long
lar to the magnetic field vec- solenoid having 5 turns per
tor. The particle will : cm length when a current of
0.8 A flows through it is
(A) move in a straight line
(A) 6.024x10-8 Wb/m2
(B) follow a spiral path
(B) 5.024x10-8 Wb/m2
(C) move along a parabolic path
(D) move along a waveform (C) 7.024x10-8 Wb/m2

(E) follow a circular path (D) 8.024x10-8 Wb/m2

2. When combining magnetic 4. What does the thumb indi-

field, same direction will cate in the right-hand palm
make the magnetic force rule?
(A) Stronger (A) Force
(B) Weaker (B) The motion of positive charge
(C) Unchanged (C) Current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
534 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(D) Magnetic field direction 8. The force exerted on a

current-carrying wirelo-
(E) The motion of negative charge
cated in an external mag-
netic field is directlypropor-
5. A 2.0 m wire segment car-
tional to which of the follow-
rying a current of0.60 A ori-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
ing? I. Current strengthII.
ented parallel to a uniform
Field strengthIII. Length of
magnetic field of0.50 T ex-
the wire
periences a force of what
magnitude? (A) I only

(A) 0 (B) II only

(C) I and II only
(B) 0.15 N
(D) I, II and III
(C) 0.30 N
9. Which of the following is the
(D) 6.7 N
function of the commutator
in a direct current motor?
6. The speed of direct current
motor can be reduced by (A) Change the direction of the
current in the coils
(A) increasing the amount of cur-
rent (B) Change the direction of the
motion of the coils
(B) increasing the strength of
(C) Produce uniform magnetic
magnet
field
(C) increasing number of turns of (D) Increase the speed of rotation
coil of the coils
(D) increasing the resistance of
10. The direction of magnetic
coil wire
field produced around a
straight conductor due to
7. A current-carrying wire of
current in it is given by
length 50 cm ispositioned
perpendicular to a uniform (A) Fleming’s right hand rule
magnetic field.If the current (B) Right hand grip rule
is 10.0 A and it is de-
termined that thereis a re- (C) Clock rule
sultant force of 3.0 N on (D) Fleming’s left hand rule
the wire due to theinterac-
tion of the current and field, 11. When combining magnetic
what is themagnetic field field, up and down direc-
strength? tion will make the magnetic
force
(A) 6.7 E-3 T
(A) Stronger
(B) 1.8 E-3 T (B) Weaker
(C) 0.6 T (C) Unchanged
(D) 1.5 T (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 4.4 Electric motor 535

12. The current in a solenoid is (A) Left hand grip rule

30A, the number of turns
(B) Right hand grip rule
per unit length is 500 turns
per metre. Calculate the (C) Fleming’s left hand rule
magnetic field if the core is (D) Fleming’s right hand rule
air.
(A) 18.84T 16. Two wires, both have cur-
(B) 18.84mT rent flowing upward. What
is the force between the
(C) 1.84mT wires?
(D) 1.84T
(A) Towards each other
13. When combining magnetic (B) Away from each other
field, opposite direction will
make the magnetic force (C) Both move left
(A) Stronger (D) Both move right
(B) Weaker
17. What does the thumb indi-
(C) Unchanged cate in Fleming’s Left Hand
(D) none of above Rule?

14. When combining magnetic (A) Force

field, down and down direc- (B) Motion
tion will make the magnetic
force (C) Current
(A) Stronger (D) Magnetic field direction
(B) Weaker 18. The unit of magnetic field is
(C) Unchanged
(A) weber
(D) none of above
(B) guass
15. How to determine the di-
(C) tesla
rection of magnetic field
around the wire or coil? (D) farad

4.4 Electric motor

1. What are the three basic (D) battery, armature, and DC
parts of an electric genera- power supply
tor?
2. Coal is burned to heat water
(A) communicator, stator, and so that the can turn tur-
motor shaft bines.
(B) armature, brushes, and bat- (A) fire
tery (B) steam
(C) stator, rotor, and commutator (C) water

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
536 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(D) heat (A) repel

3. Which of the following is (B) attract

NOT part of an electromag- (C) nothing
net?
(D) none of above

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Wire
8. What is the function of a
(B) Iron
brush?
(C) Toothpick
(A) To change the current
(D) Power source
(B) To bring the current to the com-
4. Can we use any hand for mutator
this purpose? (C) To cause a force
(A) No (D) To supply power
(B) Only with magnetic fields
9. The recommended way to
(C) Yes discharge a capacitor is to
(D) Only when current is involved
(A) place a screwdriver across the
5. This transforms mechanical
terminals
energy into electrical en-
ergy. (B) assume it will discharge itself
over a period of time
(A) Generator
(C) use a 20, 000 ohm 5 watt re-
(B) Electromagnet
sistor that has had insulated leads
(C) Motor soldered to it
(D) Circuit (D) use an ohmmeter
6. The wiring and connectors 10. Identify a factor that would
that carry the power to a INCREASE an electric motor’s
motor must be in good con- force:
dition. When a connection
becomes loose, oxidation of (A) Increasing the voltage
the copper wire occurs. The (B) Using a larger axle
oxidation
(C) Lowering the current
(A) has no effect on the electrical
(D) Using aluminum wire instead
connection
of copper
(B) acts as an electrical resistance
and causes the connection to heat 11. How could you make an
more electromagnet stronger?
(C) decreases the resistance (A) Plug it up
(D) none of the above (B) Charge it

7. Like poles of a magnet do (C) Unwrap the coils of wire

what? (D) Use a bigger battery

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 537

12. A motor has four leads out (B) electric motor

of it:two red and two black. (C) electric current
The resistance between the
red leads is 3 ohms. The re- (D) electric plasma
sistance between the black 16. A current magnetic relay
leads is 5 ohms. The black opens and closes its contacts
leads are connected to the based on the
winding.
(A) current in the start winding
(A) Start
(B) voltage across the start wind-
(B) No Answers are true ing
(C) Common (C) voltage across the run wind-
(D) Run ing
(D) current in the run winding
13. Power stations use gener-
ators to produce electricity 17. What is a common mistake
on a large scale. Mechani- technicians make when try-
cal energy is provided by ro- ing to remove drive assem-
tating turbines that can be blies?
powered by: (A) trying to spin it clockwise
(A) high-pressure steam-in coal, (B) unscrewing it counterclock-
oil, gas and nuclear power sta- wise
tions
(C) Many technicians make the
(B) wind-in wind turbines mistake of trying to drive a motor
(C) falling water-in hydroelectric shaft out of the assembly fastened
power stations to the shaft.
(D) All of them (D) doing it at the end of the day
Friday.
14. Capacitors wired in series
with the starting winding 18. Which of the following is
provide a(n) the correct explanation of
the electrical motor opera-
(A) longer starting time tion?
(B) greater starting torque (A) Electric motor uses electricity
(C) aid in starting three phase mo- (B) The operation is based on the
tors principle of electromagnetism
(D) more efficient operation at full (C) The motor converts electric en-
load speed ergy into mechanical energy
(E) (D) All of the above
15. What do we call a device 19. Two common reasons for
that converts electricity into motor failure are improper
mechanical movement? pulley alignment and
(A) electric charge (A) Motor Tension

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
538 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) Belt Tension (B) toaster

(C) Voltage Tension (C) blender
(D) Current Tension
(D) ceiling fan
20. Which of the following is a (E) electric can opener

NARAYAN CHANGDER
power source?
(A) battery 25. Fleming’s left-hand rule is
(B) solar cell used to indicate
(C) fossil fuels (A) Direction of force.
(D) all of these (B) Direction of magnetic field.
21. Hydroelectricity is when the (C) Direction of current.
energy from moving is
(D) Direction of force, magnetic
converted to electrical en-
field and current.
ergy.
(A) wind 26. Give two ways you can re-
(B) sun verse the direction of a basic
(C) water dc motor?

(D) rocks (A) Reverse the current

22. What do you call a de- (B) Keep the current the same
vice that creates a rotating (C) Reverse the magnetic field
motion using electricity and
magnets? (D) Keep the magnetic field the
same
(A) An electromagnet
(B) An electric motor 27. What are the two metal
(C) An electric generator semi circles called?
(D) An electric circuit (A) Brush
23. What do you call a wire (B) Commutator
that is wound up in a spiral
(C) Coil
or spring?
(A) A conductor (D) Electromagnet
(B) A coil
28. What is it called when hu-
(C) A bulb mans generate electricity by
(D) A magnet using the heat of the Earth?

24. There is one device listed (A) Geothermal Energy

that does not belong. Which (B) Hydroelectric Energy
one does not include a mo-
tor? (C) Radiation Energy
(A) hand mixer (D) Solar Energy

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 539

29. What must happen for an (C) an electromagnet

action to be considered (D) an electric generator
work?
(A) force applied & energy cre- 33. He was credited for his dis-
ated covery of electromagnetic
induction.
(B) force applied & distance
moved (A) Thomas Edison
(C) force applied & matter de- (B) Benjamin Franklin
stroyed (C) Nikola Tesla
(D) force applied & mass in- (D) Michael Faraday
creased
34. Which of these pairs of de-
30. What do you call a de- vices operate in reverse of
vice that generates electri- each other?
cal current when a wire coil
(A) generator and motor
is wrapped around an iron
core and rotated close to a (B) generator and electromagnet
magnet? (C) motor and electromagnet
(A) car (D) electromagnet and resistor
(B) magnet
35. In a motor, a provides
(C) motor the necessary push to make
(D) generator current flow.
(A) crane arm
31. What causes the conductor
to move? (B) copper wire
(A) The interaction between the (C) battery
current and the conductor (D) piece of iron
(B) The interaction between the
36. What do you call a de-
magnetic field around the conduc-
vice that produces an elec-
tor and the permanent magnets
tric current when a coil of
(C) The interaction between the wire is wrapped around an
force and the magnetic field iron core and rotated near a
(D) The interaction between the magnet?
magnet and the air (A) magnet
32. What device turns electrical (B) car
energy into mechanical en- (C) generator
ergy? Remember:electrical
energy is electricity, me- (D) motor
chanical energy is move- 37. A device that increases or
ment decreases the voltage of al-
(A) a solenoid ternating current is a
(B) a motor (A) generator

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
540 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) motor (B) variable resistor

(C) transformer (C) switching device
(D) turbine (D) diode
38. He was credited for dis- 43. When a wire loop is con-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
covering that electric cur- nected to a battery, is
rents create magnetic fields, produced in the loop.
which was the first connec-
(A) a “Dark Side” force field
tion found between electric-
ity and magnetism. (B) an electric field
(A) James Maxwell (C) a magnetic field
(B) Hans Christian Orsted (D) a baseball field
(C) Michael Faraday
44. What is a component?
(D) Alessandro Volta
(A) A part or element of a larger
39. This object transforms me- machine or device.
chanical energy into electri- (B) The whole machine or device
cal energy you can use.
(A) Circuit (C) A man-made magnet.
(B) Generator (D) A device that makes a rotating
(C) Motor axel using electricity and magnets.
(D) Battery
45. When a force moves an ob-
40. This type of energy is stored ject, the action is called
in a battery (A) energy
(A) chemical (B) work
(B) mechanical (C) force
(C) electrical (D) circuit
(D) thermal
46. How can the size of an in-
41. A motor’s speed is deter- duced current be increased?
mined by MARK THE WRONG AN-
SWER.
(A) size
(B) voltage (A) Increase the speed at which
the coil rotate
(C) amperage
(B) Increase the strength of the
(D) number of motor poles magnetic field
42. The positive temperature co- (C) Increase the number of turns
efficient resistor start device in the screw
is a type of (D) Increase the total area of the
(A) capacitor coil.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 541

47. What do you call an en- 51. The start windings have
ergy converting system that (A) fewer turns than the run wind-
transforms electrical en- ings
ergy into mechanical move-
ment? (B) more turns than the run wind-
ings
(A) Electric motor
(C) the same number of turns as
(B) Electric field the run windings
(C) Electric generator (D) larger diameter wire than the
(D) Electric plasma run windings
52. When an electric current
48. What are the three basic
flows throught a wire, the
parts of an electric motor?
current produces a
(A) commutator, stator, and rotor
(A) magnetic field
(B) armature, brushes, and bat-
(B) force field
tery
(C) electromagnet
(C) commutator, armature, and
brushes (D) electromagnetic pulse

(D) battery, armature, and DC 53. Which of these can apply a

power supply force without actually touch-
ing an object?
49. Most motors are powered
(A) motor
using direct current (DC),
which is produced by cells (B) generator
and batteries. (C) magnetic field
(A) False (D) turbine
(B) True 54. How is a motor used in a
(C) Only some shower?
(D) Only one (A) to power the pump that
pushes the water
50. Which of these is the com- (B) to turn the water on
mutator function in the gen-
erator? (C) to heat up water
(D) none of above
(A) Acts as a rectifier that converts
AC voltage to DC voltage within 55. Identify the MOST powerful
the winding of the armature. electric motor:
(B) Diminish the energy loss (A) A 14 amp motor with two
caused by Eddy Current. small permanent magnets
(C) Offer magnetic fields where (B) A 6 amp motor with 4 large
the coil is rotating. permanent magnets
(D) Provides electricity to the gen- (C) A 14 amp motor with 4 large
erator. permanent magnets

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
542 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(D) A 10 amp motor with two 61. An open winding in an elec-

large permanent magnets tric motor means that
(A) the winding is making contact
56. This type of circuit allows
with the motor frame
for electricity to flow

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) one winding is making contact
(A) closed
with another winding
(B) open
(C) a wire in a winding is broken
(C) both
(D) the centrifugal switch to the
(D) neither start winding is open

57. What does AC stand for? 62. When a loop of current-

(A) All Chill carrying wire turns continu-
ously in a magnetic field,
(B) Air condition is created.
(C) Alternating current (A) galvanometer
(D) Academic certification (B) motor
58. Which of the following do (C) transformer
you need in order to form a (D) voltmeter
circuit?
(A) power source 63. This device is used to open
or close a circuit
(B) conductor
(A) battery
(C) resistor/load
(B) wire
(D) all of these
(C) switch
59. The difference between syn- (D) solar cell
chronous speed and full
load speed is called 64. What component is not in-
(A) Slip cluded in an armature as-
sembly?
(B) Fall
(A) retaining clip
(C) Slip-fall
(B) commutator
(D) Skid
(C) copper wire
60. While electric current is (D) armature plates
flowing through a wire,
what surrounds the wire? 65. Generators generate
(A) a magnetic field (A) electricity
(B) a glowing light (B) mechanical energy
(C) neutrons (C) heat
(D) protons (D) chemical energy

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 543

66. An electric motor: 71. Which two forces are re-

(A) Transforms electrical energy to quired to operate with gen-
mechanical energy. erators and electric mo-
tors?
(B) Transforms mechanical en-
ergy to electrical energy. (A) electric and magnetic
(C) Transforms chemical energy (B) electric and thermal
to radiant energy.
(C) magnetic and radiant
(D) Transforms radiant energy to
chemical energy. (D) magnetic and thermal

67. The is a winding that, 72. The greater the number of

when energized, will gen- windings (the number of
erate a magnetic field as times it is wrapped around)
there will be current flowing in an electromagnet’s coil
through it.
(A) the stronger the magnet is
(A) Rotor
(B) Stator (B) the less the magnet will pick
up
(C) Pinwheel
(D) Glide (C) the more current it takes to
create the electromagnet
68. What device turns electrical
energy into mechanical en- (D) the slower the compass nee-
ergy? dle moves to the wire

(A) a solenoid 73. What do you call a device

(B) a motor that creates electricity using
(C) an electromagnet a rotating motion and mag-
nets?
(D) an electric generator
(A) An electromagnet
69. Which of the following prin-
ciples explains how an elec- (B) An electric motor
tric motor works? (C) An electric generator
(A) Magnetic force
(D) An electric circuit
(B) Magnetism
(C) Electrolysis 74. Two common reasons for
(D) Electromagnetism motor bearing failure are
improper pulley alignment
70. Opposite magnetic poles (N and
S) will repel each other.
(A) belts too loose
(A) true
(B) over-tightened belts
(B) false
(C) file for divorce (C) wrong size belts
(D) none of above (D) wrong size pulley

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
544 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

75. A permanent split-capacitor 80. Electrons flow in what direc-

motor has a tion?
(A) start and run capacitor (A) negative to positive
(B) start capacitor only (B) positive to negative

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) run capacitor only (C) right to left
(D) left to right
(D) split phase capacitor
81. An electromagnet includes
76. Which technology converts
solar energy into electric- (A) heat
ity? (B) insulators
(A) Solar panels (C) magnetism
(B) Wind Turbines (D) electricity
(C) Generator 82. When a wire with a cur-
rent is placed in a magnetic
(D) All of them
field, electrical energy can
77. In this circuit, the current be transformed into..
only has ONE path to follow; (A) Chemical energy
so if one light goes out, they (B) Mechanical energy
all go out.
(C) Radiant energy
(A) Conductor
(D) Thermal energy
(B) Insulator
83. What are huge wheels that
(C) Series rotate when pushed by wa-
(D) Parallel ter, wind, or steam?
(A) Circuits
78. What is the job of a current
carrying conductor? (B) Magnets
(C) Turbines
(A) To give train tickets
(D) Engines
(B) To activate the magnetic field
(C) To direct an orchestra 84. When John plugs in a toy
and turns it on, a marble is
(D) none of above carried up to the top of a
slide. At the top, a marble
79. When an electromagnet is
is released and it goes down
placed into a permanent
a slide. What kind of en-
magnetic field it experi-
ergy transformation occurs
ences a
to make this toy work?
(A) Force (A) chemical to heat
(B) Current (B) electrical to chemical
(C) Voltage (C) sound to electrical
(D) none of above (D) electrical to mechanical

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 545

85. When a general duty split- (C) magnetic theory

phase motor reaches ap-
(D) magnetic field
proximately 75% of its oper-
ating speed, the start wind-
ing is de-energized by a 90. What two forces are re-
quired for generators and
(A) circuit board electric motors to work?
(B) capacitor
(A) magnetic and thermal
(C) centrifugal switch
(B) magnetic and radiant
(D) dual voltage switch
(C) electric and thermal
86. What would increase the
strength of an electromag- (D) electric and magnetic
net?
(A) Increasing the amount of cur- 91. Within an electric circuit,
rent flowing through the wire. what do you call the com-
ponent that is being pow-
(B) Inserting a wooden core inside ered?
the coil
(A) The conductor
(C) Changing the direction of the
current (B) The load
(D) Decreasing the number of (C) The switch
coils of wire
(D) The Power Source
87. The flow of electric charge
in a circuit is called 92. Uranium atoms are split
(A) heat to create a tremendous
amount of heat in a
(B) electric current
power plant.
(C) sound
(A) biomass
(D) magnetic
(B) geothermal
88. Within an electric circuit,
where do the electrons come (C) nuclear
from? (D) hydroelectric
(A) The conductor
(B) The load 93. Which word best fits this
definition:the contacts be-
(C) The switch
tween the armature and the
(D) The Power Source source of power in a motor.
89. The area surrounding a (A) electromagnet
magnet that applies a force
(B) ferromagnetic
without touching the object.
(A) magnetism (C) force fie3ld
(B) magnet (D) brushes

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
546 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

94. Select two ways to increase (B) hydroelectric energy

the strength of an electro-
(C) geothermal energy
magnet:
(D) solar energy
(A) Decrease the number of coils
wrapped around the iron core.
99. The stationary portion of an

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Increase the number of coils electric motor is called the
wrapped around the iron core.
(A) Stator
(C) Decrease the size of the iron
core. (B) Rotor
(D) Increase the number of batter- (C) Glide
ies or the strength of the battery. (D) Pinwheel
95. What needs to be present
100. What causes a magnetic
for motion to occur in the
field within magnetic mate-
motor effect? Tick all that
rial?
apply
(A) Air (A) Electrons spinning in random
directions.
(B) Magnetic field
(B) Electrons spinning in the same
(C) Current direction.
(D) A conductor
(C) No one really knows.
(E) A turning force
(D) none of above
96. What is the metal center of
an electromagnet called? 101. The starting device usu-
ally used on single phase,
(A) The current
fractional horsepower mo-
(B) The coil tors requiring low starting
(C) The wire torque is the
(D) The ferromagnetic core (A) potential relay

97. What are the electrical con- (B) current relay

tacts called? (C) centrifugal switch
(A) Brushes (D) differential relay
(B) Commutators
102. Name the effect that
(C) Coils
causes a coil of current-
(D) Electromagnets carrying wire in an electric
motor to move.
98. As water flows through a
dam, a generator is turned (A) The electromagnetism effect
and creates enough electric-
(B) The magnetic effect
ity for thousands of homes.
This describes (C) The motor effect
(A) biofuels (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 547

103. This kind of circuit does 108. Three phase motors have
not allow electricity to flow
(A) open (A) three start and three run wind-
(B) closed ings for each phase
(C) both (B) one start and one run winding
(D) neither for each phase

104. How can a technician tell if (C) run windings only

a belt is slipping?
(D) a start-switch in each phase
(A) it is squealing circuit
(B) you can smell a hot smell
(C) the belt is slapping 109. A magnet is a piece of
metal that attracts (choose
(D) any of the above more than one)
105. If a motor hums but does (A) iron
not start, there is a potential
problem (B) plastic
(A) with the starting components (C) glass
(B) with an open winding
(D) steel
(C) with insufficient supply volt-
age 110. A split-phase motor that
(D) all of the above has a current relay and a
start capacitor is called a(n)
106. What is created when a motor.
magnet moves through a
coil of wire? (A) Capacitor Start, Capacitor
(A) An electric current Run (CSCR)

(B) An electromagnet (B) Capacitor Start, Induction Run

(CSIR)
(C) A solenoid
(D) A ferromagnet (C) Induction Start, Induction Run
(ISIR)
107. The direction of the force is
relative to both the (D) Permanent Split Capacitor
(PSC)
(A) direction of the the current
and the heat produced.
111. Materials that do not al-
(B) direction of the magnetic field low charges to flow easily.
and the current.
(A) Conductor
(C) direction of the the current
only. (B) Insulator
(D) direction of the magnetic field
(C) Series
only. The direction of the force is
relative to both the (D) Parallel

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
548 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

112. Which of these is NOT a (B) if a wire is moved over and

way to increase the strength away from a magnetic field, a cur-
of a DC motor rent is produced.
(A) Increase the current (C) if a insulator with no current is
(B) Increase the coils of wire moved across a magnetic field, a

NARAYAN CHANGDER
current is produced.
(C) Increase the magnetic field
strength (D) if a wire is moved across a
magnetic field, another magnetic
(D) Switch to AC current
field is produced.
113. A generator is
117. What is the best method
(A) a device that converts electri- to repair a fractional horse-
cal energyinto mechanical energy power motor that has bad
(B) a device that converts mechan- bearings?
ical energy into electrical energy (A) Replace the bearings.
(C) a device that supply energy to (B) Replace the bearings and
another device shaft.
(D) a device that changes heat (C) Add a capacitor to the circuit
into cold for added torque.
114. A coil of wire that has a (D) Replace the entire motor.
soft iron core and that acts
as a magnet when an elec- 118. the red wire signifies what
tric current is in the coil is call electrical polarity?
a(n) (A) on
(A) Ferromagnet (B) off
(B) Electromagnet (C) positive
(C) Permanent magnet
(D) negative
(D) Temporary magnet
119. A machine that converts
115. What do you call the flow electrical energy into me-
of an electric charge through chanical energy.
a conductor?
(A) Generator
(A) Magnetism
(B) Motor
(B) Rotation
(C) Parallel circuit
(C) An electric current
(D) Ohm
(D) A magnetic wave
120. A generator:
116. Explain electromagnetic
induction. (A) Transforms electrical energy to
(A) When a wire is moved across mechanical energy.
a magnetic field, a current is pro- (B) Transforms mechanical en-
duced. ergy to electrical energy.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 549

(C) Transforms chemical energy 125. gravitational potential →

to radiant energy. kinetic (water) → kinetic
(D) Transforms radiant energy to (turbine)→ electricity is what
chemical energy. kind of power plant?
(A) hydroelectric
121. Materials that allow
charges to flow easily. (B) nuclear
(A) Conductor (C) coal
(B) Insulator (D) electricity
(C) Series
126. Which of the situation be-
(D) Parallel
low shows how a basic elec-
122. All of the following use an tric motor works?
electric motor, EXCEPT (A) The energy contained in the
(A) radio batteries of the vehicle is trans-
formed into wheel rotation.
(B) blender
(C) hair dryer (B) Electrical energy converted
into blade rotation in the food pro-
(D) electricfan cessor and cut down food.
123. In this circuit, the current (C) Both A and B
only has TWO or more paths
(D) None of these
to follow; so if one light
goes out, the other will re-
127. Within an electric circuit,
main lit.
what do the electrons flow
(A) Conductor through?
(B) Insulator (A) The conductor
(C) Series
(B) The load
(D) Parallel
(C) The switch
124. The commutator is (D) The Power Source
(A) The spring-loaded connec-
tions that keep contact with the 128. What will happen if we
stator make a coil longer and
(B) the split ring that swaps the wider?
coils ends between positive and (A) the current will become
negative as the coil rotates stronger
(C) the magnets that cause the (B) the current will become
electromagnet to attract and re- weaker
pulse
(C) andrew mcgurk said its good
(D) the coil that is also known as
the armature (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
550 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

129. What is formed when a (A) protons

wire in an electric circuit (B) neutrons
is wrapped around an iron
core producing a magnetic (C) atoms
field? (D) electrons

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) electromagnet
134. Which of the following is a
(B) generator device that converts electri-
(C) magnet cal energy into mechanical
energy? ‘
(D) electric motor
(A) electric bicycle
130. A type of magnet that has
temporary magnetic effect (B) microwave oven
when electric current flows (C) rice cooker
through it. This refers to (D) all of the above
(A) Electric
135. Adding a stronger mag-
(B) Electrostatic
net to an electric motor will
(C) Electronic have what effect?
(D) Electromagnet (A) The motor will spin slower
131. This conductor allows elec- (B) The motor will spin faster
tricity to travel through a cir- (C) There will be no change
cuit
(D) The motor will explode
(A) battery
(B) switch 136. The megger

(C) bulb (A) is an ammeter that can mea-

sure very small amounts of current
(D) wire
(B) is a digital voltmeter that mea-
132. When a Capacitor Start, sures very high resistances
Capacitor Run (CSCR) motor (C) measures high voltage direct
initially starts, what is the current
total capacitance acting on
the motor? (Assume the run (D) measures very high resis-
capacitor is 5 microfarads tances
and the start capacitor is 20
microfarads, if present.) 137. Which part of a circuit
allows electrical current to
(A) 4 microfarads flow between the battery
(B) 5 microfarads and light bulb?
(C) 20 microfarads (A) load
(D) 25 microfarads (B) power source

133. Negative charged parti- (C) resistor

cles that create electricity. (D) conductor

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 551

138. What does a motor do? (C) radiant

(A) Moves up and down (D) mechanical
(B) Rotates without Electricity
143. What makes an electro-
(C) It does magnet stronger?
(D) Uses Electricity to cause mo- (A) Increase the number of wire
tion (usually, rotational motion) wraps around the iron core
139. How are electromagnets (B) decrease the strength of the
different from regular mag- power source
nets? (C) remove the source of current
(A) Their strength can be changed (D) lightning bolts hitting a tree
(B) They can be turned on and off
144. Which of the following
(C) Their polarity can be reversed
does not describe an Electric
(D) All choices are correct motor?
140. What do you call a de- (A) input is electricity
vice that converts mechani- (B) used in electric car and bike
cal movement into electric-
ity? (C) converts electrical to mechan-
ical
(A) electric field
(D) input is mechanical
(B) electric motor
(C) electric generator 145. Motors powered by mains
electricity use alternating
(D) electric plasma
current (AC). These motors
141. Which of the following is use electromagnets rather
the CORRECT description of than permanent magnets.
the operation of an electric (A) True
motor?
(B) Only two of them
(A) The electric motor uses elec-
tricity. (C) False

(B) The operation is based on the (D) Only one of them

principle of electromagnetism.
146. If the needle of an ohmme-
(C) The motor converts electric en- ter used to check a capaci-
ergy into mechanical energy. tor goes to the 0 ohms read-
(D) All of the above. ing and does not move, this
would indicate that the ca-
142. Electricity can be trans- pacitor is
formed into this type of en-
(A) Longer
ergy by connecting a circuit
to a fan (B) Shorted
(A) thermal (C) Mid-range
(B) chemical (D) Brand New

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
552 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

147. Which power plant trans- 152. What is the part of a sim-
forms energy in the follow- ple d.c. motor that re-
ing way? nuclear→ heat verses the direction of cur-
(steam)→ kinetic (turbine)→ rent through the coil every
electrical half-cycle?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) hydroelectric (A) The armature
(B) nuclear (B) The brushes
(C) coal (C) The commutator
(D) electric (D) The slip rings

148. What form of alternative 153. A coil of wire spinning

energy uses a dam? around a magnet or a mag-
net spinning around a coil of
(A) hydroelectric power wire can form
(B) geothermal power (A) a permanent magnet
(C) biomass power (B) an iron core
(D) solar power (C) a turbine
149. When energized, this be- (D) an electric current
comes an electromagnet.
154. Which is NOT a distin-
(A) terminals guishing feature of an elec-
(B) armature assembly tric generator?
(C) commutator (A) An electric generator converts
mechanical energy into electrical.
(D) permanent magnet
(B) An electric generator converts
150. What applies a force, a electrical energy into mechanical
push or pull, without actu- energy.
ally touching an object? (C) It generates electricity
(A) Electric Current (D) It is based on the principle of
(B) Chemical Reaction electromagnetic induction.
(C) Magnetic Field 155. Start windings are placed
(D) Power Source with the run windings.
(A) 180 degrees out of phase
151. We can change the direc-
tion of current by in a circuit (B) in phase
(C) slightly out of phase
(A) by increasing the current (D) in series
(B) by adding one more battery
156. Whether a material is
(C) rotating the battery 180 de- magnetic or not depends on
grees which of the following?
(D) by increasing the voltage (A) The material’s weight

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 553

(B) The material’s mass (A) 4 microfarads

(C) The type of material (B) 5 microfarads
(D) The material’s density (C) 20 microfarads

157. The leads of an ohmmeter (D) 25 microfarads

using the R x 100 scale are (E)
placed on the terminals of a
capacitor and then reversed. 161. Which is NOT a distinctive
The needle does not move. attribute of an electrical gen-
This would indicate that the erator?
capacitor is (A) Electric generator turns me-
(A) Open chanical energy into electric en-
ergy
(B) Closed
(B) Electric generator turns electric
(C) Open-Closed
power into mechanical energy.
(D) Closed-Open
(C) It provides electricity
158. What do you call a huge (D) It is based upon the electro-
wheel (associated with gen- magnetic induction theory
erators) that rotates when
driven by water, wind, or 162. Electricity is the flow of
steam? (A) electron
(A) Motor (B) protons
(B) Pipe (C) neutrons
(C) Turbine (D) atoms
(D) Magnet
163. What component provides
159. How can a technician de- the pathway to carry elec-
termine if a run capacitor tricity from component to
has overheated? component?
(A) it is swelled (A) battery
(B) it turned yellow (B) switch
(C) it’s making noise (C) wire
(D) the capacitance has increased (D) iron nail

160. When a Capacitor Start In- 164. How do AC generators

duction Run (CSIR) motor is work?
running and up to speed, (A) It uses heat to produce a cur-
what is the total capacitance rent by induction.
acting on the motor? (As-
sume the run capacitor is 5 (B) It uses rotation to produce a
microfarads and the start ca- heat wave by induction.
pacitor is 20 microfarads, if (C) It uses rotation to produce a
present.) current by induction.

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
554 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(D) It uses rotation to produce a (B) greener

current by heat. (C) larger
165. A split-phase has a (D) water
winding and a winding.
170. is compacted matter

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) start, run dug from under the Earth’s
(B) start, common surface that is used to pro-
(C) common, run vide energy by burning it.

(D) run, common (A) Hydro

(B) Coal
(E)
(C) Nuclear
166. When plugged into an out-
(D) Geothermal
let, the clock lights up to
show the time. What kind 171. If a condenser fan motor
of energy transformation is grounds out, it will usually
this?
(A) chemical to light (A) trip a circuit breaker to shut off
(B) mechanical to chemical the unit.
(C) electrical to mechanical (B) keep running as the current is
only going to ground
(D) electrical to light
(C) run a little faster because the
167. What component becomes amperage draw will increase
a temporary magnet when
(D) cause the evaporator to ice up
electricity is flowing through
the circuit? 172. Most electrical problems
(A) iron nail with an electric motor are
(B) battery (A) short circuited windings,
closed windings, and grounded
(C) copper wire
windings
(D) switch
(B) short circuited windings. open
168. Which word best fits this windings, and grounded windings
definition:The rotating part (C) none of the above
of a motor.
(D) all are correct
(A) system
173. A permanent split capaci-
(B) brush tor (PSC) motor that is run-
(C) electromagnet ning and up to speed will
(D) armature have the start winding
(A) energized
169. You can make an electro-
magnet stronger by:Having (B) de-energized
a current in the wire. (C) in series with the run winding
(A) smaller (D) removed from the circuit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.4 Electric motor 555

174. Which of the following 178. True or False:A motor can

does not describe a genera- spin in only one direction.
tor?
(A) true
(A) converts mechanical to electri-
(B) false
cal
(C) motors do not allow spinning
(B) used turbines
(D) none of above
(C) input electrical
(D) input mechanical 179. Ms. J’s students are com-
plaining that it is hot in
175. Within an electric circuit, the classroom. She plugs
what do you call the compo- in the fan and turns it on
nent that can break or con- Which energy transfor-
nect the circuit? mation occurs?
(A) The conductor (A) mechanical to electrical
(B) The load (B) electrical to mechanical
(C) The switch (C) chemical to mechanical
(D) The Power Source
(D) electromagnetic to mechani-
176. A motor will not start cal
when power is applied. If
180. What do you call a device
the belt is removed, the pul-
that transforms mechanical
ley spun, and power ap-
energy into electrical en-
plied, and the motor contin-
ergy?
ues to run, the first part to
check is the (A) electrical charge
(A) Starting Switch (B) electrical motor
(B) End Switch (C) electrical generator
(C) Wall Switch (D) electrical current
(D) Switch Plate
181. The brushes in an electric
177. What word best fits this motor
definition:A device which (A) the split rings that rotate in a
converts electrical energy motor
into mechanical energy usu-
ally through the rotation of (B) the coil that create the electro-
an electromagnet in the field magnetic field
of a stationary magnet. (C) Are spring loaded connectors
(A) armature that carry electricity to the rotor by
brushing against the commutator
(B) system as it rotates
(C) motor (D) the magnets surrounding the
(D) electromagnet rotor

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 556 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

182. What do you call a man- 185. The strength of the mag-
made magnet created by netic field of a electromag-
spinning electrons through a net can be increased by
coiled conductor? (A) Decreasing the number of
(A) An electromagnet coils.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) An automagnet (B) Increasing the number of coils
(C) A permanent magnet (C) Decreasing the current
(D) none of above (D) Increasing the resistance

183. What type of energy 186. What does the second fin-
transformation occurs in a ger represent in Flemming’s
toaster? left hand rule?
(A) force
(A) chemical to electrical
(B) current
(B) electrical to heat
(C) field
(C) sound to chemical
(D) voltage
(D) electrical to solar
187. In a DC Motor, the coil of
184. If the resistance of the run the rotor turns into an elec-
winding decreases, the tromagnet when
(A) motor probably will not start (A) the rotor rotates inside the sta-
(B) motor will draw too much cur- tor
rent while it is running (B) electricity (current) flows
(C) centrifugal starting switch will through the coil
not start the motor (C) the rotor is turned by the axle
(D) load on the motor is probably (D) the it sits int the field of the sta-
too great tor

4.5 Electromagnetic induction

1. Which object(s) have electric tor?
fields?
(A) using a larger magnet
(A) Electric Charges
(B) moving the magnet north pole
(B) Magnets first instead of the south pole
(C) Both Electric Charges & Mag- (C) moving conductor instead of
nets the magnet
(D) Electric fields do not exist (D) using a coil instead of a single
ring of wire
2. Which of the following can
be done to increase the in- 3. Which change would re-
duced current in the conduc- verse the direction of the

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 557

electric current generated (B) 0.14 m

through electromagnetic in-
(C) 4.5 m
duction?
(A) moving the magnet slower (D) 0.35 m

(B) using more loops of wire in the (E) 2.1 m

solenoid
7. A capacitor is charged to a
(C) using the opposite pole of the pd of 100V. What is its ca-
magnet pacitance if 500 J of energy
(D) using a weaker magnet is stored in it?

4. Which of the following sen- (A) 1000 F

tences is not true? (B) 10 F
(A) Motors convert electrical en-
(C) .1 F
ergy to mechanical energy
(D) .001 F
(B) Generators convert mechani-
cal energy to electric energy
8. Which will produce a mag-
(C) A generator is connected to a netic field
battery
(A) any wire with or without a cur-
(D) A generator uses slip rings rent
while the motor uses split rings
(B) a wire formed into a coil
(E) Both motors and generators
have brushes (C) a wire carrying a current

5. An ideal transformer has (D) none of above

12 V input voltage with 10
turns on the primary (input) 9. Where is the energy being
coil, The secondary (output) stored in an inductor carry-
coil has 100 turns. What is ing a steady current?
the secondary voltage? (A) In the electric field of the coil
(A) 0.12 V (B) In the circuit
(B) 1.2 V 1.20 V (C) In the power supply
(C) 12 V
(D) In the magnetic field of the
(D) 120 V coil
6. A circular conducting loop is
10. Which of the following must
placed in a magnetic field
you have in order to create
perpendicular to the plane
electromagnetic induction?
of the loop. As the magnetic
field decreases at a rate of (A) Battery & Electromagnet
0.040 T/s, an emf of 2.6 mV (B) Solenoid & Permanent Magnet
is induced in the loop. Find
the radius of the loop. (C) Battery & Copper Wire
(A) 0.02 m (D) Solenoid & Nail

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
558 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

11. An e.m.f. is induced across 15. Electromagnetic induction

a wire when it moves does not take place when
through the magnetic field
between the poles ofa mag- (A) A magnet moves close to a
net.Which electrical device coil

NARAYAN CHANGDER
operates because of this ef-
fect? (B) A coil moves close to a mag-
net
(A) a battery
(C) A coil does not move repsect
(B) a cathode-ray tube to a magnet
(C) a generator (D) The strength of the magnetic
(D) a motor field cutting through a coil is
changed
12. A wire of length 1.0 m
16. The divergence of which
moves with a speed of 10
quantity will be zero?
m/s perpendicular to a mag-
netic field .If the emf induced (A) E
in the wire is 1 V.The magni- (B) D
tude of the field is
(C) H
(A) 0.01 T
(D) B
(B) 0.1 T
17. Which describes the mag-
(C) 0.2 T netic field produced by the
(D) 0.02T current?
(A) straight lines along the wire to
13. Electric charges must in the right moving the same direc-
order to create an observ- tion of the current
able magnetic field.
(B) straight lines along the wire to
(A) exist the left moving the opposite direc-
(B) be moving tion of the current

(C) be stationary (C) circles around the wire that go

in at the bottom of the screen and
(D) disappear moves in a clockwise direction
(D) none of above
14. state the energy transfor-
mation in the generator 18. What do you need to build
(A) Electrical energy to mechani- a working electric motor?
cal energy (A) An extremely large magnet
(B) Heat energy to Sound energy (B) Fuel that can be burned
(C) Mechanical energy to Electri- (C) A wire that’s at least 5 meters
cal energy long
(D) none of these (D) A source of electricity

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 559

19. What is a possible power (E) decreasing the spacing be-

source of a generator? tween loops
(A) Fan 24. In a closed conductive cir-
(B) Plug cuit contained in an alter-
(C) Battery nating magnetic field, an in-
duction current arises, the
(D) none of above magnetic field of which is di-
20. The SI units of induced emf rected
is (A) just like an external magnetic
(A) Ohm field;

(B) Volt (B) opposite to the outer field;

(C) Henry (C) perpendicular to the outer

field;
(D) Tesla
(D) so as to counteract changes in
21. The magnetic field energy the external magnetic field.
of a coil having 500 turns is
25 J. The current in the coil 25. Tonya is modeling the dis-
is 5 A. What magnetic flux covery of electromagnetic
penetrates each coil coil? induction. Which procedure
should she use?
(A) 10 mWb
(A) moving a magnet into a coil of
(B) 1 mWb wire in a closed circuit
(C) 20 mWb (B) moving a magnet into a coil of
(D) 2 mWb wire in an open circuit

22. The relation of motional (C) bringing a compass near a

emf, when a conductor is wire that has no electric current
move in perpendicular mag- (D) none of above
netic field, is:
26. The Faraday’s law states
(A) ε = Blv about which type of EMF?
(B) ε = qBl (A) Transformer EMF
(C) ε = BlI (B) Back EMF
(D) ε = qvB (C) Generator EMF
23. Which changes will cause (D) Secondary EMF
an increase in the magnetic
field of a solenoid? Check 27. Determine the inductance of
all that apply. the coil if a 5 V self-induction
EMF occurs at a rate of
(A) using more wire loops change of current of 10 A /
(B) using fewer wire loops s.
(C) using a larger current (A) 5 H
(D) using a smaller current (B) 0, 5 H

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
560 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) 2 H 32. Which change will cause

an increase in electric cur-
(D) 0, 2 H
rent produced through elec-
28. A type of magnet that has tromagnetic induction?
temporary magnetic effect (A) using more wire loops in the

NARAYAN CHANGDER
when electric current flows solenoid
through it.This refer to (B) using the opposite pole of the
(A) Electric magnet
(B) Electronic (C) using a weaker magnet

(C) Electrostatic (D) moving the solenoid slower

(D) Electromagnet 33. The phenomenon due to

which there is an induced
29. Which of the following in- current in one coil due to the
creases frequency of alter- current in a neighboring coil
nating induced current? is?
(A) increasing number of turns on (A) Mutual induction
the coil (B) Steady current
(B) using a stronger magnet (C) Electromagnetism
(C) rotating the coil faster (D) Self induction
(D) increase area of the coil 34. A solenoid with 200 turns
and a cross-sectional area
30. The loudspeaker is an appli- of 60 cm2 has a magnetic
cation of the field of 0.60 T along its axis.
(A) Magnetic field If the field is confined within
the solenoid and changes
(B) Induced current at a rate of 0.20 T/s, the
(C) Magnetic force magnitude of the induced
potential difference in the
(D) Electric charge solenoid will be
31. Which of the following will (A) 0.004V
induce a current in aloop of (B) 0.012V
wire in a uniform magnetic
(C) 0.12V
field?
(D) 0.24V
(A) Rotating the loop about an
axis parallel tothe field 35. A coil having 500 square
loops, each of side 10 cm, is
(B) decreasing the strength of the
placed normal to a magnetic
field
field which is increasing at
(C) Moving the loop within the the rate of 1.0T per s.The in-
field duced emf is
(D) All of the above (A) 0.1 V

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 561

(B) 0.5 V 40. Vp x Ip = Vs x IsVp = 33kV,

(C) 1 V Ip = 2A, Vs = 230V, Is =? A
(D) 5 V (A) 28.7V

36. What two forces are re- (B) 3.48V

quired for electric genera- (C) 0.287V
tors & electric motors to
work? (D) 287V
(A) Kinetic & Magnetic
41. If a secondary coil has 40
(B) Magnetic & Electrical turns, and, a primary coil
(C) Kinetic & Thermal with 20 turns is charged
with 50 V of potential dif-
(D) Thermal & Magnetic
ference, then potential dif-
37. If the magnetic flux through ference in secondary coil
the circuit through the circuit would be
is increasing, then induced
(A) 50 V in secondary coil
emf acts to the magnetic
flux (B) 25 V in secondary coil
(A) Increase (C) 60 V in secondary coil
(B) Decrease (D) 100 V in secondary coil
(C) Zero
(D) None of these 42. Lenz’s Law on electromag-
netic induction is a direct re-
38. if an inductor has N sult of the conservation of
turns and is magnetic flux
through its each turn when (A) mass
current I is flowing, then self- (B) charge
inductance L is given by for-
mula: (C) energy
(A) I
Nφ
(D) momentum
(B) N φ
43. How would you reverse the
Nφ
(C) I direction of the current flow-
(D) N φ I ing through the coil in Fara-
day’s experiment?
39. Electro motive force in-
duced by motion of conduc- (A) Use a magnet of opposite po-
tor across magnetic field is larity
called (B) Move the magnet through the
(A) EMF coil faster
(B) motional EMF (C) Reverse the magnet’s direc-
(C) rotational EMF tion
(D) static EMF (D) Use a larger magnet

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
562 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

44. What is the amount of cur- (C) Gravitational

rent in an RC circuit with a (D) none of above
time constant of 2 s and a
max current of 5 A after .4 49. Why is magnetic induction
seconds? important?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) 5 A (A) Electromagnets are very versa-
tile
(B) 4 A
(B) Every electric motor uses in-
(C) 3 A
duction
(D) 2 A
(C) Because it’s an easy way to
45. A transformer has 100 produce electricity
turns in the primary coil and (D) All of the above
25 turns in the secondary
coil. When a 120 V is ap- 50. The voltage across the pri-
plied to the primary coil, mary coil of a transformer
what is the voltage in the that has 75 turns on it is
secondary coil? 100V. What is the voltage
across the secondary coil,
(A) 480V
which has 15 turns on it?
(B) 30V (A) 500 V
(C) 20V (B) 25 V
(D) 450V (C) 125 V
46. SI unit of Magnetic flux is (D) 20 V
(A) Waber 51. A generator is used to light
(B) Weber a bulb. Energy for light-
(C) Watt ing the bulb actually comes
from a
(D) Tesla
(A) coil or wire
47. The process of creating a (B) mechanical intput to the gen-
current in a circuit by chang- erator
ing a magnetic field
(C) magnet in the generator
(A) electric generator
(D) plug where the generator is
(B) electric motor connected to the wall
(C) electromagnetic induction
52. The phenomenon of induc-
(D) magnet ing voltage by changing the
magnetic field around a con-
48. Electromagnetic induction is
ductor is called
the creation of a voltage
when an electrical conductor (A) generated voltage
is passed through a field. (B) Faraday’s induction
(A) magnetic (C) transformer induction
(B) Electric (D) electromagnetic induction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 563

53. Which of Maxwell’s Equa- is the magnetic flux linked

tions describes a changing with the coil?
electric field can create a (A) 0.021 Wb
magnetic field
(B) 0.105 Wb
(A) Gauss’ Law
(C) 1050 Wb
(B) Ampere-Maxwell law
(D) 1500 Wb
(C) Faraday’s Law
(D) Gauss’ Law for Magnetism 58. When a loop of wire is
moved across a magnetic
54. What is the relationship be- field, the current is produced
tween electricity and mag- in it is called
netism? Choose the best an- (A) Induced current
swer.
(B) Photo electric current
(A) Electricity is a form of mag-
(C) Alternating current
netism.
(D) Direct current
(B) Magnetism is a form of elec-
tricity. 59. According to Faraday’s law,
(C) They are two forms of the the induced voltage is pro-
same basic force. portional to
(D) They are not closely related at (A) the product of its number of
all. loops
(B) the cross-sectional area of
55. What is used to measure
each loop
electric current?
(C) the rate at which the magnetic
(A) Doppler Radar
field changes within loops
(B) Ruler
(D) all three are correct
(C) Galvanometer
60. Electromagnetic induction is
(D) Beaker
change in
56. Thrust a magnet into a coil (A) surface area
of wire. While the magnet (B) magnetic poles
is being moved toward the
coil (C) magnetic flux
(A) becomes an electromagnet (D) none of above
(B) has a current in it 61. How could you increase the
(C) both of these voltage in electromagnetic
induction?
(D) neither of these
(A) Increase the iron core
57. A coil of area 30 and
cm2 (B) use a larger magnet
50 turns is placed perpen-
dicular to the magnetic field (C) Use a larger battery
of flux density 0.7 T. What (D) Flip the magnet around

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
564 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

62. Number of magnetic field (B) Increase the number of coils

line passes through an area (C) Increase the current
is the definition for
(D) Use a bigger magnet
(A) magnetic flux
(E) Use a stronger magnet

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) current carrying conductors
(C) induced emf 67. Faraday’s Law states that
the induced emf is propor-
(D) magnetic field tional to Hide answers
63. Which of the following fac- (A) the current
tors DOES NOT affect the self (B) the cross sectional area of the
inductance of a coil? coil
(A) The length of the coil (C) the rate of change in the flux
(B) The current flows in the coil of the coil
(C) The number of turn of the coil (D) none of above
(D) The cross sectional area of the 68. The greater the amount of
coil loops you have
64. Electromagnetic induction is (A) The less voltage
caused by the change in (B) The voltage stays the same
near a coil of wire.
(C) The greater the voltage
(A) surface area
(D) There is no change
(B) magnetic poles
69. Will a transformer work
(C) magnetic field strength (mag-
with direct current (d.c.) or
netic flux)
alternating current (a.c.)?
(D) none of above
(A) a.c. only
65. Which factors affect electro- (B) d.c. only
magnetic induction? (select
(C) Both a.c. and d.c.
ALL that apply)
(D) none of above
(A) Strength of magnet
(B) The area of the coil 70. Which object(s) produce
magnetic fields?
(C) The speed of movement
(A) Electric Charges
(D) Number of turns of coil
(B) Magnets
(E) The position of poles
(C) Both moving Electric Charges
66. How can the size of the in- & Magnets
duced voltage be increased? (D) Magnetic fields do not exist
(choose as many as are cor-
rect) 71. Self-induced EMF is some-
(A) Increase the speed of the times also known as
movement (A) induced EMF

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 565

(B) deduce EMF (B) 49 rad s-1

(C) back EMF (C) 42 rad s-1
(D) both a and b (D) 48 rad s-1

72. In generators, is the in- 77. The north pole of a bar

put and is the output. magnet is moving towards
the coil along the axis pass-
(A) Kinetic; Potential
ing through the centre of
(B) Electric; Mechanical coil and perpendicular to the
(C) Potential; Kinetic plane of coil. The direction
of induced current in the coil
(D) Mechanical; Electric when viewed from the oppo-
73. A device that converts elec- site direction of the motion
trical energy into mechani- of the magnet is
cal energy (A) Clockwise
(A) electromagnet (B) Anticlockwise
(B) electromagnetic induction (C) No current in the coil
(C) electric motor (D) Data insufficient
(D) electromagnetism 78. AC stands for current.
74. A device that is used to mea- (A) alternating
sure the amount of current (B) alternative
in a wire is called a
(C) alliterative
(A) an electric current meter (D) none of above
(B) radiometer
79. does not use electromag-
(C) galvanometer netic induction
(D) speedometer (A) Cooktop Stoves
75. A(n) converts electricity (B) Clocks
into magnetism, and back (C) Traffic Light Sensors
to electricity.
(D) ATM cards
(A) electric transformer
80. The turn ratio (r) for a step-
(B) electric generator
up transformer is
(C) electromagnet
(A) r = 0
(D) electric motor
(B) r > 1
76. Square coil of side 16 cm (C) r < 1
having 200 turns rotating in (D) r = 1
magnetic field of 0.05 T with
peak EMF of 12 V will pro- 81. Electric current flowing
duce angular velocity of through a wire produces
(A) 47 rad s-1 (A) static electricity

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
566 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) an open circuit If the cord is carrying a cur-

(C) a permanent magnet rent of 11.0 A, what mag-
netic force is acting on the
(D) a magnetic field cord?
82. What is meant by a step (A) 2.03X10-5 N

NARAYAN CHANGDER
down transformer?
(B) 0.002464 N
(A) One where the output voltage
is the same as the input voltage. (C) 2.46X107 N
(B) One where the output voltage (D) 7.86X105 N
is larger than the input voltage.
(C) One where the output voltage 87. Faraday’s Law is used to
is smaller than the input voltage. (A) deduce the direction of the in-
(D) none of above duced current.

83. Identify the phenominon by (B) deduce the magnitude of the

which an induced emf can induced e.m.f.
be generated: (C) explain how an induced e.m.f.
(A) By moving magnet towards a is produced.
coil
(D) explain how a changing mag-
(B) By rotating a coil in a magnetic netic field is produced.
field
(C) By moving a coil towards sta- 88. What would happen if you
tionary magnet broke a bar magnet into 8
pieces?
(D) emf cannot be induced
(A) You would have 8 half mag-
84. What causes magnetism? nets
(A) the sun
(B) You would have 4 complete
(B) moving neutrons magnets
(C) moving charges (C) You would have 8 complete
(D) friction magnets
85. A magnet can move in a coil (D) They wouldn’t be magnets
of wire to produce electricity anymore
in which system?
(A) Generator 89. An electric motor changes
electrical energy to en-
(B) Motor ergy.
(C) Magnet
(A) mechanical
(D) Transformer
(B) chemical
86. A 4.0 m long cord is ly-
(C) potential
ing perpendicular to Earth’s
magnetic field of 5.6X10-5 T. (D) electrical

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 567

90. The emf induced by motion (A) Switch their magnetic fields
of conductor across mag-
(B) Explode
netic field is called
(C) Be turned off
(A) Potential Difference
(D) They are both the same in ev-
(B) Electric potential
ery way
(C) Variable emf
(D) Motional emf 96. If the magnetic flux density
at the end of a long straight
91. The Flemming’s right-hand solenoid is B, the magnetic
rule is used when flux density at the centre in
(A) motion causes current the solenoid is

(B) current causes motion (A) 0

(C) current causes potential differ- (B) 1/2 B
ence (C) 1/4 B
(D) motion causes magnetic field (D) 2B
92. Which of the following is
97. What repels the magnet in
NOT a component of a basic
our hand when testing elec-
motor?
tromagnetic induction?
(A) A permanent magnet
(A) an electromagnet
(B) A rotating electromagnet
(B) a current
(C) A heat source
(C) a magnetic field
(D) A power supply
(D) a boo boo on our finger
93. The point form of Ampere
law is given by 98. The proces s of generating
(A) Curl(B) = I the current in a conductor is
called as
(B) Curl(D) = J
(A) Electro motive force
(C) Curl(V) = I
(B) Electromagnetic induction
(D) Curl(H) = J
(C) generator energy conversion
94. Which item does NOT use
(D) induced voltage
an electromagnet.
(A) A Ferris wheel 99. A device that transforms
(B) A doorbell mechanical energy to electri-
cal energy is a
(C) A galvonometer
(A) generator
(D) A handheld compass
(B) motor
95. What can electromagnets
(C) transformer
do that regular magnets
can’t? (D) magnet

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
568 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

100. Change of current of 1 A (B) the cross sectional area of the

s-1 causes EMF of 1 V to be coil
equal to (C) the rate of change in the flux
(A) 1 H of the coil
(D) none of above

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) 1 V m-1
(C) 1 A 105. A rectangular loop and a
(D) 1 J circular loop are moving out
of a uniform magnetic field
101. What might happen if region. In which loop do
transformers didn’t exist? you expect the induced emf
(A) The electricity in your house to be constant
might have an extremely high volt- (A) Circular loop
age (B) Rectangular loop
(B) Electricity could not be dis- (C) Both (a) and (b)
tributed through power lines to
(D) Neither (a) nor (b)
people’s homes
(C) Electricity could not be created 106. When an electric current
at power plants runs through a wire, a mag-
netic field is induced
(D) The direction of the electric
current in your home might switch (A) Around the wire
back and forth (B) Parallel to the wire
102. Field Induction means (C) Under the wire

(A) Cows use magnets (D) through the wire

(B) Electric and Magnetic Fields 107. What is the starting en-
are induced ergy for a motor?
(C) Magnetic Fields are induced (A) Electrical
(D) Electric fields are induced (B) Mechanical
(C) Chemical
103. If a transformer increases
AC voltage, it will also in- (D) Potential
crease 108. Which best describes the
(A) power ferromagnetic material?
(B) energy (A) The magnetic poles of the
atoms point in different directions.
(C) megnetic field strength
(B) The magnetic poles of its
(D) none of the above
atoms point in the same direction.
104. Faraday’s Law states that (C) The magnetic poles of its
the induced emf is propor- atoms are grouped in domains
tional to that point in different directions.
(A) the current (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 569

109. What does a moving 113. AC generators convert

charged particle experience energy to energy.
if it moves through a static
(A) pressure/force
magnetic field?
(A) nothing (B) mechanical/electrical

(B) an acceleration in the current (C) chemical/electrical

direction (D) kinetic/relative
(C) a deflection that is parallel to
the magnetic field 114. The Delta Symbol means
(D) a deflection that is perpendic-
ular to both the magnetic field and (A) Multiply
the current
(B) Frat Party
110. A loop of area 0.45 m2 is (C) Change
in a uniform 0.03 T magnetic
field. If the flux through (D) Divide
the loop is 1.1 x 10-2 Wb,
what angle does the plane 115. Which of Maxwell’s Equa-
of the loop make with the tions describes an electric
magnetic field? field can be created by a
changing magnetic field?
(A) 25 degrees
(A) Gauss’ Law
(B) 35 degrees
(C) 65 degrees (B) Ampere’s Law
(D) 55 degrees (C) Faraday’s Law
(E) 90 degrees (D) Gauss’ Law for Magnetism
111. Which field can acceler- 116. The magnetic flux through
ate an electron, but never an area is:
change its speed?
(A) φ = B × A
(A) Electric field
(B) magnetic field (B) φ = B · A
(C) both of these (C) φ = A × B
(D) neither of these (D) There is no magnetic flux
through an area
112. Faraday’s Law states that
the magnitude of the in- 117. A(n) electric current will
duced e.m.f. is to the rate create a changing magnetic
of change of magnetic flux field.
linkage with the solenoid.
(A) existing
(A) equal
(B) inversely proportional (B) direct
(C) directly proportional (C) alternating
(D) none of above (D) stable

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
570 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

118. A is an electrical device field B is made zero, then

that converts AC electricity motional emf is:
from one voltage level to an- (A) −Blv
other
(B) − Blv
(A) transformer

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) zero
(B) primary coil
(D) − Blv
(C) secondary coil
123. Which of the devices is not
(D) center tap based on electromagnetic in-
duction?
119. A transformer has 35 V
applied to its primary in- (A) Generator
duces 105 volts in its sec- (B) electrodynamic microphone
ondary. The secondary is (C) transformer
composed of 99 turns. What
is the number of turns in the (D) electric motor
primary? 124. Which of Maxwell’s Equa-
(A) 11 turns tions allows you to figure
out an equation for the elec-
(B) 22 turns
tric field created by a distri-
(C) 33 turns bution of charge?
(D) 44 turns (A) Gauss’ Law
(B) Gauss’ Law for Magnetism
120. Vp x Ip = Vs x IsVp =? , Ip
= 2A, Vs = 200V, Is = 0.1A (C) Faraday’s Law
(A) 0.1V (D) Ampere’s Law

(B) 10V 125. A generator is used to

light a bulb. Energy for light-
(C) 100V
ing the bulb actually comes
(D) 40V from a

121. A magnetic field of 5 mT (A) coil or wire

threads a coil with 10 turns (B) mechanical input to the gener-
and an area of 0.1 m2. The ator
field collapses to 0 mT in (C) magnet in the generator
0.20 s.Determine the EMF
(D) plug where the generator is
produced.
connected to the wall
(A) 0.0025 V
126. Who discovered electro-
(B) 0.25 V magnetic induction?
(C) 25 V (A) Hans Christian Orsted
(D) 0.025 V (B) Michael Faraday
122. If velocity of a conductor (C) James Maxwell
moving through a magnetic (D) Heinrich Hertz

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 571

127. A coil of resistance 400 131. emf is induced due to

ohm is placed in a magnetic change in:
field. If the magnetic flux
(A) Charge
linked with the coil varies
with time (t) as φ = 50t 2 + 4 . (B) Current
Current through coil at 2s is (C) Magnetic Flux
(A) 0.1 A (D) Electric Flux
(B) 0.5 A
132. Creating magnetism from
(C) 5 A electricity is called
(D) 1.5 A (A) magnetic fields
128. If a transformer reduces (B) an electric motor
voltage, it is called a (C) an electromagnetic induction
transformer.
(D) an electromagnet
(A) step left
(B) step right 133. What is one way to in-
crease the current in a
(C) step up wire?
(D) step down (A) Decrease the number of coils

129. In physics, to “induce” (B) Increase the number of coils

something is to: (C) Move the magnet slower
(A) Make it more powerful (D) Take the wire off of the mag-
(B) Create it net

(C) Turn it into something else 134. Find the Maxwell equa-
(D) Reverse its direction tion derived from Faraday’s
law.
130. A coil in a magnetic field (A) Div(H) = J
encloses a flux of 0.4 Wb
when the angle between the (B) Div(D) = I
normal to the coil and the di- (C) Curl(E) =-dB/dt
rection of the magnetic field
is 60◦ . What flux would go (D) Curl(B) =-dH/dt
through the coil if the angle
135. An inductor
were changed to 15◦ ?
(A) stores energy in electric field
(A) 0.61 Wb
(B) Provides a specific value of in-
(B) 0.38 Wb
ductance
(C) 0.52 Wb
(C) controls the current
(D) 0.77 Wb
(D) Stores energy in a magnetic
(E) 0.98 Wb field

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
572 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

136. The mutual inductance of a 141. A magnet is moved in and

no pair of coil depends on out of a coil of wire con-
nected to a high-resistance
(A) Medium
voltmeter. If the number of
(B) Size & shape coils doubles, the induced

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Proximity of the coils voltage

(D) All (A) quadruples

(B) doubles
137. A device that transforms
(C) is the same
electrical energy to mechan-
ical energy is a (D) halves
(A) generator 142. Which object(s) have mag-
(B) motor netic fields?

(C) transformer (A) Electric Charges

(D) magnet (B) Magnets

(C) Both Electric Charges & Mag-
138. How does the function of a nets
generator relate to the func-
(D) Magnetic fields do not exist
tion of a motor?
(A) They are the same 143. What benefit is gained by
the addition of the iron core
(B) They are opposites in an electromagnet?
(C) They both work the same way (A) It makes a strong magnet
(D) They are not related at all weaker
(B) It makes a weak magnet
139. Step-up transformers stronger
(A) improve the efficiency of the (C) There is no benefit at all
national grid
(D) It lets currents interact with
(B) reduce the voltage to a safe each other
level for the home
144. What is the minimum num-
(C) both
ber diodes required to con-
(D) none of above vert and alternating current
into a direct current?
140. Magnetic flux will be max-
(A) 1
imum if the angle between
magnetic field strength and (B) 2
vector area is: (C) 4
(A) 0◦ (D) 6
(B) 60◦
145. Electromagnetic induction
(C) 90◦ is due to change in
(D) 180◦ (A) surface area

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 573

(B) magnetic poles 150. Self inductance of solenoid

is:
(C) magnetic flux
(A) L = µ0 nAl
(D) electric flux
(B) L = µ0 N 2 Al
146. When current increases in (C) L = µ0 n2 Al
a coil, the induced current
(D) L = µ0 NAl
will be
(A) in the same direction 151. The induction coil works
on the principle of
(B) in the opposite direction
(A) self-induction
(C) clockwise
(B) mutual induction
(D) counterclockwise
(C) Ampere’s rule
147. If a magnet is pushed into (D) Fleming’s right hand rule
a coil, voltage is induced
across the coil. If the same 152. Electromagnetic induction
magnet is pushed into a coil occurs in a coil when there
with twice the number of is a change in
loops, (A) electric field intensity in the
coil.
(A) one-half as much voltage is in-
duced. (B) magnetic field intensity in the
coil.
(B) the same voltage is induced.
(C) voltage in the coil.
(C) twice as much voltage is in-
duced. (D) the coil’s polarity.

(D) four times as much voltage is 153. Passing a current through

induced. a solenoid will produce
(A) A magnetic field
148. A(n) converts mag-
netism into electricity. (B) An electric field

(A) electric transformer (C) A current field

(D) Nothing is produced
(B) electric generator
(C) electromagnet 154. A transformer actually
transforms
(D) electric motor
(A) voltage
149. As electrons move, they (B) magnetic field lines
create
(C) generators into motors
(A) electromagnetism (D) none of above
(B) ferromagnetism
155. Select the statements that
(C) magnetic field apply to an generator.
(D) auroras (A) Creates direct current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
574 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(B) Creates alternating current 161. No EMF is induced when?

(C) Has slip rings and brushes (A) When the wire is not moving
(D) Has a split-ring commutator
(B) When the wire is parallel to
156. If you were to make a mo- magnetic field direction

NARAYAN CHANGDER
tor stronger, what should
you do? (C) When no lines are cut by the
wire
(A) Decrease the voltage
(B) Increase the voltage (D) all of the above
(C) Disconnect the wires from the
batteries 162. An electric field is induced
in any region of space
(D) Use a wooden rod instead of
where a magnetic field is
a wire
changing with time.
157. A(n) converts electricity
into motion. (A) True

(A) electric transformer (B) False

(B) electric generator (C) Not enough information
(C) electromagnet given
(D) electric motor
(D) none of above
158. What is inside a toy car
that turns the wheels? 163. Large buildings typically
(A) generator have to create Electricity
in case the power goes out.
(B) electric motor
(C) electromagnet (A) Generators
(D) none of above (B) Electromagnets
159. Which rule is used to find (C) Solenoids
the direction of magnetic
field around a straight con- (D) none of above
ductor
(A) Flemming left hand rule 164. An electromagnetic wave
(B) Lenz law consists of an electric field vi-
brating at right angles to a
(C) Flemmings right hand rule
magnetic field.
(D) Right hand thumb rule
(A) True
160. AC generators have
(B) False
(A) 2 slip rings
(B) 1 slip ring (C) Not enough information
(C) 3 slip rings given.

(D) 4 slip rings (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 575

165. When do we have self in- 170. The mutual induction be-
duction? tween two coils depends
(A) When the magnet moves into upon:
the coil (A) area of the coils
(B) When the coil moves into the (B) distance between the coils
magnet
(C) number of turns
(C) When a constant current
(D) Does not depends on any-
passes through the coil
thing
(D) When a changing current
passes through the coil 171. Changing current in a coil
produces e.m.f in another,
166. The carbon brushes in an this phenomenon is known
electric motor are used for as
(A) Clean the dust (A) e.m.f
(B) Reduce friction (B) Self-induction
(C) Have always the same direc-
(C) Induced e.m.f
tion for the force
(D) Mutual induction
(D) Have always the same direc-
tion of rotation 172. Voltage can be induced in
a wire by
167. The S.I. unit of magnetic
flux is (A) moving the wire near a mag-
(A) Tesla net.

(B) Weber (B) moving a magnet near the

wire.
(C) Joule
(C) changing the current in a
(D) Newton
nearby wire.
168. SI unit for self inductance, (D) all of these
L is
173. A(n) converts electricity
(A) Tesla(T)
into magnetism.
(B) Weber(Wb)
(A) electric transformer
(C) Henry(H)
(B) electric generator
(D) Farad (F)
(C) electromagnet
169. What is it called when you
(D) electric motor
can use a magnetic field to
create an electric current in 174. Click all the factors affect-
a wire? ing electromagnetic induc-
(A) Electromagnetic induction tion
(B) Electromagnetic radiation (A) Strength of magnet
(C) Electromagnetic conduction (B) The area of the coil
(D) Radio waves (C) The speed of movement

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
576 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(D) Number of turns of coil 179. Passing a current through

(E) The position of poles a solenoid will produce
(A) a magnetic field
175. According to Lenz’s law
the direction of an induced (B) an electric field

NARAYAN CHANGDER
current in a conductor will (C) a current field
be that which tends to pro-
(D) nothing is produced
duce which of the following
effects? 180. In which of these situation
(A) enhance the effect which pro- will the current in a coil of
duces it wire be zero.
(B) produce a greater heating ef- (A) A magnet is moved into a coil
fect of wire.
(C) produce the greatest voltage (B) A magnet is moved out of a
(D) oppose the effect which pro- coil of wire.
duces it (C) A magnet is moved up and
down outside a coil of wire.
176. The generation of a mag-
netic field by an electric cur- (D) A magnet is held stationary in-
rent is side the coil of wire.
(A) electromagnetism 181. As the current decreases in
(B) electricity the coil from 20 A to 10 A for
0.1 s, a self-induction of 200
(C) solenoid
V. occurs in it. What mag-
(D) none of above netic flux penetrates the coil
at the instant when 15 A cur-
177. At what speed would a
rent flows through it?
0.20-m length of wire have
to move across a 2.5-T mag- (A) 450 Wb
netic field to induce an EMF (B) 30 Wb
of 10 V?
(C) 45 Wb
(A) 20 m/s
(D) 22.5 Wb
(B) 0.2 m/s
(C) 5m/s 182. A 10-turn ideal solenoid
has an inductance of 3.5 mH.
(D) none of above
When the solenoid carries a
178. What does the index fin- current of 2.0 A the mag-
ger show you in the Flem- netic flux through each turn
ming’s right-hand rule? is:
(A) Direction of current (A) 0 Wb
(B) Motion of wire (B) 3.5 x 10-4 Wb
(C) Direction of electric field (C) 7.0 x 10-4 Wb
(D) Direction of magnetic field (D) 7.0 x 10-3 Wb

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 577

183. A square of side ‘a’ me- 187. A coil carries a current

tre lies in the YZ plane in in a magnetic field. The
a region, where the mag- coil experiences a turning ef-
netic field is given by B = fect.Which device uses this
Bo (3i + 3 j − 4k) T , where Bo is effect?
constant. The magnitude (A) a d.c. motor
of flux passing through the
square is (B) an electromagnet

(A) 2Bo a2 W b (C) a relay

(B) 3Bo a2 W b (D) a transformer

(C) 4Bo a2 W b 188. In electromagnetic induc-

(D) −4Bo a2 Wb tion, what is being created?
(A) Magnetism
184. Which of the following in-
creases frequency of AC? (B) Electrical energy

(A) increasing number of turns on (C) Mechanical energy

the coil (D) Chemical energy
(B) using a stronger magnet 189. Lenz’s law of electromag-
(C) rotating the coil faster netic induction is as per law
(D) increase area of the coil of conservation of
(A) Energy
185. Which of the following
best describes EMF? (B) Angular Momentum

(A) can be thought of as the differ- (C) Charge

ence between two electrical states (D) EMF
in an electric field
190. Which pairs of materials
(B) the potential difference gener- could be used to create elec-
ated by one or more cells or a tromagnetic induction?
changing magnetic field
(A) Coiled wire, a magnet
(C) depends on the magnitude
and resistance of the current (B) Coiled wire, a battery

(D) force that causes an electric (C) A magnet, a battery

charge to flow (D) None of the above

186. An alternating current has 191. “A current carrying coil

a peak value of 50A. What placed in magnetic field ex-
is the rms value of this cur- periences force”, device that
rent? proves this law is
(A) 50A (A) DC generator
(B) 35A (B) DC motor
(C) 25A (C) AC generator
(D) 70A (D) both a and b

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
578 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

192. Magnetic flux involves 196. Which is the device in DC

and Generators that converts AC
current into DC current
(A) magnetic field and surface
area (A) brushes

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) induction and surface area (B) commutator
(C) magnetic field and induction (C) stator
(D) electromagnetic induction (D) armature
and surface area
197. What is the time constant
193. Electromagnetic induction for a 50 mF capacitor con-
occurs in a coil when there nected to a 5 Kilo Ohm re-
is a change in sistor.
(A) electric field intensity in the
(A) 250 s
coil.
(B) 10 s
(B) magnetic field intensity in the
coil. (C) 100 s
(C) voltage in the coil. (D) 25 s
(D) the coil’s polarity.
198. What is the main dif-
194. Which device uses slip ference between electric
rings? charges and magnetic
poles?
(A) a cathode-ray tube
(A) electric charges can be iso-
(B) a d.c. generator
lated, magnetic poles cannot be
(C) an a.c. generator isolated
(D) a dc motor (B) electric charges cannot be iso-
lated, magnetic poles can be iso-
195. A 60 turn square coil of lated
area 0.042 m2 and a 40
turn circular coil are both (C) electric charges both attract
placed perpendicular to the and repel, magnetic poles only at-
same magnetic field. The tract
voltage induced in each of (D) electric charges both attract
the coils is the same. What and repel, magnetic poles only re-
is the area of the circular pel
coil?
(A) 0.028 m2 199. Lenz’s law deals with:

(B) 0.063 m2 (A) Magnitude of emf

(C) 0.083 m2 (B) Direction of emf
(D) 0.034 m2 (C) Resistance
(E) 0.075 m2 (D) Direction of induced current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 579

200. rule can be used to de- (C) using the north pole of the
termine the direction of the magnet
induced current produced.
(D) setting the magnet down in
(A) Fleming’s Left Hand Rule the solenoid
(B) Fleming’s Right Hand Rule
204. the primary source is con-
(C) Right Hand Grip Rule nected to a and the sec-
(D) none of above ondary source is connected
to a
201. The voltage across the in-
put terminals of a trans- (A) galvanometer; power source
former is 110 V. The pri- (B) galvanometer; transformer
mary coil has 50 turns and
the secondary coil has 120 (C) power source; galvanometer
turns. The output voltage of (D) transformer; galvanometer
the transformer is
(A) 46 V 205. You’re going camping,
and you need a source of
(B) 55 V
electric current. So, you buy
(C) 180 V a gasoline-powered:
(D) 264 V (A) Motor
202. In which of the following (B) Generator
situations is an e.m.f. in-
duced in a conductor? (C) Inducer

(A) The conductor is connected to (D) Electromagnet

a battery.
206. EMF can be induced in a
(B) The conductor is connected to wire by
a motor.
(A) moving the wire near a mag-
(C) The conductor moves through
net.
the air.
(D) The conductor is moved in a (B) moving a magnet near the
magnetic field. wire.
(C) changing the current in a
203. Julia produces a 2 mA cur- nearby wire.
rent by moving the south
pole of a bar magnet into (D) all of these
a solenoid. The solenoid
contains 150 loops of wire. 207. power = X
Which change should Julia (A) resistance ; voltage
make to generate a larger
current? (B) voltage ; current
(A) moving the magnet slower (C) current ; resistance
(B) using more loops of wire in the (D) resistance ; energy trans-
coil formed

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
580 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

208. The direction of induced 213. Provide the correct state-

current is determine by us- ments.1. EMF self-induction
ing occurs when passing
(A) Fleming’s Left Hand Rule through a DC coil;2. Self-
induction EMF occurs when
(B) Right Hand Rule

NARAYAN CHANGDER
passing through an AC
(C) Right Hand Grip Rule coil;3. EMF self-induction
(D) none of above counteracts current flow;4.
EMF self-induction counter-
209. When there is a change acts current changes.
in the magnetic field in a
(A) 2 & 3;
closed loop of wire
(A) a voltage is induced in the (B) 2 & 4;
wire (C) 1 & 3
(B) current is made to flow in the (D) 1 & 4
loop of wire
(C) electromagnetic induction oc- 214. In electromagnetic induc-
curs tion
(D) all of these (A) magnetism causes electricity

210. The net magnetic flux (B) electricity causes magnetism

through any closed surface, (C) electricity and magnetism can-
kept in a magnetic field is cel each other out
(A) zero (D) a strong magnet creates a per-
(B) µo manent magnet
4π
µo m
(C) 4π 215. What is produced from a
µo
(D) 4π m changing electric field?
211. A device consisting of a (A) an electric field directed per-
coil that is mechanically ro- pendicularly to the changing field
tated in a stationary mag- (B) a magnetic flux
netic field is called
(C) a magnetic field directed per-
(A) a transformer
pendicularly to the changing field
(B) a motor
(D) lightning
(C) a generator
(E) an electric field directed paral-
(D) a dipole lel to the changing field
212. Creating electricity from
216. One Tesla is also equal to
magnetism is called
(A) magnetic fields (A) W b m−2
(B) an electric motor (B) W b m2
(C) electromagnetic induction (C) W b m
(D) an electromagnet (D) Has no unit

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 581

217. A metallic pendulum oscil- (A) Turbine

lating in a uniform magnetic
(B) Stationary Bike
field directed perpendicular
to the plane of oscillation (C) Air Conditioner
(A) slows down (D) Wind mill
(B) becomes faster
222. Faraday’s Law states that
(C) remains unaffected the induced emf is propor-
(D) oscillates with a changing fre- tional to
quency (A) the current
218. Suppose the number of (B) the cross sectional area of the
turns in a coil be tripled, coil
the value of magnetic flux (C) the rate of change in the flux
linked with it of the coil
(A) remains unchanged (D) none of above
(B) becomes 1/3
223. The total number of mag-
(C) is tripled
netic field lines passing
(D) none of these through an area is termed
as?
219. The d.c generator and
a.c generator make use of (A) Voltage
electromagnetic induction to (B) EMF
produce
(C) Magnetic flux
(A) force
(D) Magnetic flux density
(B) electricity
(C) energy 224. The Lenz law is in accor-
dance with the law of con-
(D) power
servation of
220. Why is a galvanometer (A) Charge
used in an electromagnetic
induction setup? (B) Mass
(A) to help the current to flow (C) Momentum
across the conductor (D) Energy
(B) to detect the flow of charges
225. An inductor is a circuit ele-
(C) to provide charges in the con- ment that can store energy
ductor in
(D) to maintain the amount of cur-
(A) Magnetic field
rent in the conductor
(B) Electric flux
221. All of the following de-
(C) Electric field
vices are examples of gener-
ators EXCEPT: (D) None

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
582 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

226. A device that uses two (D) to produce a uniform radial

coils around an iron core to field in the two coils
change the voltage across a
circuit is called a 230. Hystersis loss can be min-
imised by
(A) voltmeter

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Steel with high silicon content
(B) diode
(B) Thick wire
(C) transformer
(C) Shell type core
(D) generator
(D) All
227. A square coil, enclosing an
area with sides 5.0 cm long, 231. When there is a magnetic
is wrapped with 1500 turns flux in a closed loop of wire,
of wire. A uniform mag- which one of these does
netic field perpendicular to NOT happen?
its plane is turned on and in- (A) the poles of the magnet
creases to 0.85 T during an change
interval of 3.0 s. What av-
erage voltage is induced in (B) electromagnetic induction oc-
the coil? curs
(A) 0.25 V (C) a voltage is induced in the
wire
(B) 1.24 V
(D) electric current is made to flow
(C) 0.97 V
in the loop of wire
(D) 1.06 V
232. Which of these does the
(E) 0.55 V
galvanometer measure?
228. The unit of magnetic flux is (A) Resistance of the device
the
(B) Voltage, current, Resistance
(A) Henry and Continuity in a circuit
(B) Tesla (C) Voltage across the load
(C) Faraday (D) Current in the circuit
(D) Weber
(E) Current with the direction in
229. The most important func- the circuit
tion of the soft iron core in
233. If the magnetic flux linked
a typical transformer is
with a coil varies at the rate
(A) to lose heat generated by the of 1Wb/ minute, the emf in-
two coils duced is
(B) to improve the flux linkage be- (A) 1 V
tween the primary coil and the sec-
(B) 1/60 V
ondary coil
(C) to suppress the back e.m.f. (C) 60 V
produced in the secondary coil (D) None

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 583

234. “An induced current al- (A) generated voltage

ways flow in a direction that
(B) Fleming’s induction
opposes the change in mag-
netic flux that causes it”. (C) transformer induction
this is the statement for? (D) electromagnetic induction
(A) Fleming’s left hand rule
(B) Fleming’s right hand rule 239. What will be the direction
of the induced current in a
(C) Faraday’s law generator when the direc-
(D) Lenz’s law tion of the motion is up-
wards while the magnetic
235. Which of the following de- flux is to the right?
vices is most likely to con-
tain an electromagnet? (A) To the left
(A) gas stove (B) Upwards
(B) flashlight (C) Towards
(C) digital watch (D) Away
(D) refrigerator
240. If a transformer increases
236. An inductor coil having AC voltage, it will also in-
some resistance is con- crease
nected to an AC source .
(A) power
which of the following have
zero average value over a (B) current
cycle? (C) magnetic field strength
(A) Induced EMF in the inductor
(D) none of the above
(B) current
(C) both a and b 241. Changing the magnetic
field intensity in a closed
(D) neither a nor b
loop of wires induces:
237. To produce an induced (A) Resistance
emf, there must be a change
in (B) Voltage

(A) flux (C) Light

(B) field (D) Magnetism
(C) area
242. What is a possible power
(D) angle source of a motor?
(E) speed (A) Fan
238. The phenomenon of induc- (B) Crank
ing voltage by changing the
(C) Battery
magnetic field around a con-
ductor is called (D) Moving water

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
584 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

243. The coils a wire has the 248. In a vacuum, electromag-

current is able to be gen- netic waves travel at speeds
erated.
(A) greater than the speed of
(A) more; more light.
(B) less; more

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) equal to the speed of light.
(C) more; less
(C) less than the speed of light.
(D) less; less
(D) none of above
244. Which of these is NOT a
part of a DC Generator. 249. Electromagnetic induction
(A) Slip rings is the result of a change in
(B) commutator
(C) brushes (A) surface area

(D) stator (B) magnetic poles

245. The current in a coil varies (C) magnetic flux

at a constant rate of 2 A in (D) none of above
50 minutes. A back e.m.f.
of 4 V is induced in the coil. 250. Craig is modeling the dis-
What is the self inductance covery of electromagnetism.
for the coil? Which procedure should he
(A) 0.025 H use?
(B) 0.10 H (A) moving a magnet into a coil of
(C) 0.40 H wire in a closed circuit
(D) 40 H (B) Moving a magnet into a coil of
wire in an open circuitf
246. in a closed circuit, electric
currents are induced so as to (C) bringing a compass near a
oppose the changing mag- wire that has an electric current
netic flux as per (D) none of above
(A) Law of conservation of mass
(B) Law of conservation of charge 251. The coil has 500 turns.
When the current is changed
(C) Law of conservation of energy to 2 A, the magnetic flux
(D) Law of conservation of current through each turn changes
by 4 mWb. Determine the
247. A step-up transformer in- inductance of the coil.
creases
(A) 2 H
(A) power
(B) energy (B) 0, 2 H

(C) neither (C) 1 H

(D) both (D) 0, 1 H

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.5 Electromagnetic induction 585

252. The primary coil of a trans- 256. Unit for self induction
former has 80 turns on it,
(A) Volt
and the secondary coil has
40 turns on it. This is (B) Wb
(A) a step-up transformer (C) T
(B) a step-down transformer (D) Henry
(C) either of the above depending
on the relative input and output 257. Eddy current can be min-
currents. imised by

(D) neither step-up or step-down (A) Laminated core

253. Step-down transformers (B) Mumetal

(C) Thick wire
(A) improve the efficiency of the (D) All
national grid
(B) reduce the voltage to a safe 258. Maxwell hypothesized
level for the home that a changing electric field
would produce a magnetic
(C) both field. and edited which
(D) none of above equation:
254. Which one of the follow- (A) Gauss’s Law
ing is not one of Maxwell’s (B) Faraday’s Law
fundamental equations of
electromagnetism? (C) Ampere’s Law
(A) Gauss’ law for electricity (D) Magnetic flux through a
(B) Coulomb’s law closed loop formula

(C) Faraday’s law 259. Which of the following cor-

(D) Ampere-Maxwell law rectly, relates the units for
magnetic flux and magnetic
(E) Gauss’ law for magnetism
flux density?
255. The electricity delivered to (A) 1 Wb = 1 T m-3
our homes from power sta-
tions is transmitted at high (B) 1 Wb = 1 T m-2
voltages and low currents (C) 1 Wb = 1 T m2
because
(D) 1 Wb = 1 T m3
(A) it is safer for engineers to re-
pair the overhead cables. 260. A magnet will pick up an
(B) it is cost effective in terms of object that is made of
energy lost. (A) plastic
(C) electricity can travel faster
(B) iron or steel
along the cables.
(C) glass
(D) it reduces the resistance of the
cables. (D) copper

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
586 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

261. Which device use the con- 266. Ampere’s circuital law is
cept of mutual inductance? valid for
(A) DC generator (A) varying current
(B) Transformer (B) static current

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Working coil galvanometer (C) alternating current
(D) harmonic field
(D) Wheatstone bridge
267. In large generators in
262. Which of the following power plants, rotate in-
would be the most likely side a coil of wire to produce
power source for a genera- an electric current.
tor?
(A) Wind
(A) Light Bulb
(B) Water
(B) Turbine (C) Magnets
(C) Battery (D) Circuits
(D) Nail
268. What is the name of the
device responsible for deter-
263. Which of the following will
mining the amount of elec-
increase the strength of an
tricity produced in a motor?
electric generator?
(A) Barometer
(A) Use a Bigger Magnet
(B) Galvanometer
(B) Move the Magnet Slower
(C) Spectroscope
(C) Wrap More Coils
(D) Odometer
(D) Use a Bigger Battery
269. How can an electromag-
264. The transformer is a de- net be helpful in a junk-
vice used to the value of yard?
a voltage. (A) It can help the workers move
(A) steady around the yard.

(B) resist (B) It can covert electrical energy

into mechanical energy.
(C) change
(C) It can move heavy pieces of
(D) anchor metal.
(D) It can send out voltage waves.
265. Examples for mutual in-
duction is 270. Wire loop is rotated in
(A) Transformer magnetic field. The fre-
quency of change of direc-
(B) Generator tion of the induced emf is
(C) Both (A) once per revolution
(D) None (B) twice per revolution

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 587

(C) thrice per revolution (C) either of the above depending

on the relative input and output
(D) four times per revolution
currents.
271. Complete the following (D) none of above
statement:According to to-
day’s scientists, magnetic 274. Changing current in a coil
monopoles produces emf in the same
coil. this phenomenon is
(A) have no mass. known as
(B) have no charge. (A) Mutual induction
(C) are found in abundance in the (B) Self induction
most distant parts of the universe.
(C) induced emf
(D) do not exist anywhere in the
(D) induced current
universe.
(E) are the antiparticles for mag- 275. According to the Lenz’s
netic dipoles. law, if you pull the magnet
away, then the induced cur-
272. What is one way to in- rent will
crease the induced current in (A) change the pull
a coil close to a magnet?
(B) go with pull
(A) Decrease the number of coils
(C) oppose the pull
(B) Increase the number of coils
(D) both a and b
(C) Move the magnet slower
276. Transformers transfer elec-
(D) Take the wire off of the mag- tric power from one coil to
net another in order to
273. The primary coil of a trans- (A) Transform into electromag-
former has 80 turns on it, nets
and the secondary coil has (B) Transform from cars to robots
40 turns on it. This is
(C) Transform one value of volt-
(A) a step-up tansformer age into another
(B) a step-down transformer (D) All the above

4.6 Electric generator & A.C.

1. Carbon brush is normally 2. How is a solenoid different
made-up of: from magnets?
(A) graphite (A) solenoid is a permanent mag-
(B) coal net
(C) diamond (B) solenoid has a north and
(D) iron south pole

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
588 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) the poles of a solenoid can be 7. DC Generators give

reversed
(A) mechanical energy
(D) solenoid is a temporary mag-
net (B) Electrical energy
(C) DC Electrical energy

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(E) the magnetic field lines
around a solenoid are similar to (D) AC Electrical energy
the bar magnet
8. Machines that convert elec-
3. What would happen if I spin
trical energy to mechanical
a wire inside the magnetic
energy
field of a permanent mag-
net? (A) generators
(A) Electric current would disap- (B) motors
pear
(C) boilers
(B) The magnet would explode
(D) transformers
(C) Electric current will flow
through the wire 9. A device which converts
(D) It would produce a gravita- electricity in to kinetic en-
tional field ergy is

4. In India, the number of (A) generator

times AC changes direction (B) electromagnet
in one second is
(C) solenoid
(A) 50
(D) electric motor
(B) 100
(C) 1/100 10. The device that convert me-
chanical energy into electri-
(D) 1/50
cal energy is
5. The following are applica- (A) electrical motor
tions of electric motor EX-
CEPT (B) electrical generator
(A) Power plants (C) electrical transformer
(B) Water pumping stations (D) non of the above
(C) Food processors
11. In a DC generator the cur-
(D) Machine tools rent to the external circuit is
delivered through the
6. Lap windings is suitable for
(A) high voltage, low current (A) coils.

(B) low voltage, low current (B) battery.

(C) High current, low voltage (C) slip rings.
(D) none of above (D) split rings (commutators).

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 589

12. The essential difference be- 16. How can you increase mag-
tween an AC generator and netic field strength of field
a DC generator is that windings?
(A) AC generator has an electro- (A) adjust load resistance
magnet while a DC generator (B) adjust armature windings
haspermanent magnet.
(C) adjust carbon brush contact
(B) DC generator will generate a
higher voltage. (D) adjust field rheostat

(C) AC generator will generate a 17. A transformer has a poten-

higher voltage. tial difference of 200V, and
a current of 0.1A in the
(D) AC generator has slip rings
secondary coil. The poten-
while the DC generator has a com-
tial difference in the primary
mutator.
coil is 50V. Calculate the po-
tential difference in the pri-
13. The operation of Commuta-
mary coil.
tor in DC Generator is to
(A) 0.4A
(A) convert dc to ac
(B) 0.7A
(B) convert ac to dc
(C) 2A
(C) convert fixed dc to variable dc
(D) 1A

(D) none of above 18. The function of the field pole

is
14. if resistance wire gets short- (A) increase Flux
ened what happen !? ? ? ?
? ? !? ? !? !? !? ? !? ! (B) increase the number of con-
ductor
(A) bulb gets brighter
(C) send current to the armature
(B) blub gets dimmer
(D) spreads out the flux
(C) bulb gets dimmer
19. Which factors affect the
(D) the light gets turned off amount of induced emf in
the generator?
15. Faraday’s Law of Electro-
magnetic induction states (A) magnetic field, length of the
that a current is induced in active conductor, speed of relative
a conductor when it is ex- motion
posed to (B) magnetic field, type of magnet
(A) magnetic field used, size of the conductor
(C) speed of the relative motion
(B) changing magnetic field
and type of conductor material
(C) constant magnetic field
(D) generator form factor and
(D) heat number of coils in the armature

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
590 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

20. Where is alternating current (C) When the current causes mo-
used? tion
(A) Factory (D) When the current causes mag-
(B) Homes netic field

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Hydro-electric dams 25. What is the key working
principle of an a.c. genera-
(D) Power stations
tor?
21. Which of the following will (A) electromagnetic induction
induce the least amount of
(B) magnetic induction
voltage for the same specifi-
cations of armature conduc- (C) electrostatic induction
tor? (D) electric field
(A) 500 turns
26. Which of the following does
(B) 1000 turns not affect the magnitude of
(C) 2000 turns induced voltage?
(D) 3000 turns (A) strength of magnetic field
(B) speed of relative motion
22. Which part of an electric
motor changes the current (C) size of the commutator
direction every half-turn? (D) length of the conductor
(A) Split ring 27. The function of the arma-
(B) Slip rings ture core
(C) Brushes (A) carries the load
(D) Battery (B) convert current to dc
(C) houses the armature conduc-
23. A generator is a device that
tor
(A) convert electrical energy to
(D) none of above
mechanical energy
(B) convert mechanical energy to 28. Find the effective current
mechanical energy given that the maximum cur-
rent is 14A
(C) convert mechanical energy to √
electrical energy (A) 7 2 A
√
(D) convert electrical energy to (B) 14 2 A
electriclal energy (C) 7 ÷7 A
24. When is the Flemming’s left- (D) 0A
hand rule used? 29. Which of the following
(A) When the magnetic field source of energy is most
causes current widely use to produce elec-
(B) When the motion causes cur- tricity.
rent (A) solar

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 591

(B) steam (B) armature

(C) wind (C) commutator
(D) nuclear (D) slip ring
30. An electric generator
34. Type of generator that
(A) converts mechanical energy needs an external dc source
into chemical energy for field excitation.
(B) converts chemical energy into
(A) separately excited
electrical energy
(C) converts mechanical energy (B) Self-excited Series
into gravitational potential energy (C) Self-excited Shunt
(D) converts mechanical energy (D) Self-excited Compound
into electrical energy
35. A motor converts
31. The Ac generator is differ-
ent from DC generator (A) mechanical energy to electri-
(A) Ac generator has 3 slip rings cal energy
(B) Ac generator has one slip ring (B) electrical energy to mechani-
cal energy
(C) AC generator has commuta-
tor (C) wind energy to thermal en-
(D) AC generator has two slip ergy
rings (D) none of above
32. Why are the field wind-
36. Brushes are made from:
ing of the Series-field, Self-
Excited DC Generator usu- (A) metal
ally thicker than those in
(B) copper
Shunt Field Self Excited DC
Generator? (C) carbon
(A) to minimize winding resis- (D) gold
tance especially when higher load
current is drawn 37. The AC voltage waveform
(B) to maximize the production of is in the positive direction
magnetic field for some period of time and
in the negative direction for
(C) to reduce eddy losses in the some period of time. What
field winding is the name given to this
(D) to minimize cost of production waveform?
33. Which part of the gener- (A) alternating wave
ator where current passes (B) inverted wave
through to produce mag-
netic field? (C) hertz wave
(A) field (D) sine wave

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
592 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

38. Which ONE of the following (A) electric field

changes may lead to an in- (B) rotor
crease in the emf of an AC
generator without changing (C) magnetic field
its frequency? (D) air space

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(A) Decrease the resistance of the
coil. 43. Impedance is usually de-
noted by what letter?
(B) Increase the area of the coil.
(A) Z
(C) Increase the resistance of the
coil. (B) Y

(D) Decrease the speed of rota- (C) R

tion. (D) delta
39. The part of the DC Genera- 44. An Ac generator that deliv-
tor where the magnetic flux ers a peak potential differ-
is produced when the field ence of 202 V is connected
winding is excited to an electric heater with a
(A) poles resistance of 480 Ω . what
is the effective current in the
(B) armature
heater.
(C) carbon brush
(A) 0.298 A
(D) commutator
(B) 2.38 A
40. If the average power dissi- (C) 1.60 A
pate in a generator is 500W
whats the maximum Power (D) 3.37 A Ω
rating? 45. The direction of induced emf
(A) 500W or current is indicated by:
(B) 100W (A) Fleming’s left-hand rule
(C) 1000W (B) Fleming’s right-hand rule
(D) 250W (C) Faraday’s law of electromag-
netic induction
41. The simple loop generator
is different from DC Genera- (D) Ampere’s swimming rule
tors only in terms of
46. In Fleming’s Right Hand
(A) brushes Rule for Generators, the
(B) stator “Thumb” represent the direc-
tion of
(C) armature
(A) Force of the conductor
(D) commutator
(B) Magnetic field
42. Electrical energy is trans-
ferred through in a trans- (C) Current
former. (D) None of the above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 593

47. The key purpose of the slip (A) When the loop is vertical and
rings is to making zero degree.
(A) reverse the direction of current (B) When the loop is horizontal
in the coil every half turn. and making 90 degree.
(B) reverse the direction of the cur- (C) When the loop is in between
rent in the external circuit every horizontal and vertical position
half turn of the coil. (D) It is constant at all position
(C) allow the coil to turn continu-
ously without losing electrical con- 52. What is the voltage from an
tact with the external circuit. AC generator half a turn af-
ter maximum positive out-
(D) make the turning of the coil put?
easier.
(A) Half the maximum output
48. How can the voltage out- (B) Maximum positive output
put from an AC generator be again
doubled?
(C) Zero voltage
(A) Halve the speed of rotation
(D) Maximum negative output
but reverse the direction of rota-
tion 53. What does a galvanometer
(B) Double the speed of rotation detect?
(C) Reverse the direction of rota- (A) Magnetism
tion (B) Electric current
(D) Use half the number of coils (C) Voltage transferred
49. The yoke consist of ALL the (D) Electromagnetic induction
following EXCEPT:
54. What are the functions of
(A) lift eye an automatic voltage regu-
(B) terminal box lator? (Choose three)

(C) frame foot (A) overvoltage protection

(D) armature (B) rapid response time with volt-

age stability
50. “DC” in a DC electric gener- (C) undervoltage protection
ator stands for
(D) overheating protection
(A) divisible current
(E) power amplification
(B) direct current
55. What determines the fre-
(C) direct cable
quency of a.c. produced by
(D) divine current a generator?

51. At what position during the (A) Speed of rotation of coil

magnitude of the induced (B) The number of rotations of coil
current is maximum? in one-second

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
594 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) Both speed of rotation and (A) Decrease the Electromotive

number of rotation of coil in one- force (EMF)
second (B) Electromotive force (EMF) re-
(D) None of these mains the same
(C) Increases the Electromotive

NARAYAN CHANGDER
56. What is the typical volt-
force (EMF)
age ratings of main genera-
tors? (D) Electromotive force (EMF) be-
comes zero
(A) 440V, 60Hz
(B) 220V, 60Hz 61. Laminations of cores are of-
ten done in order to
(C) 208V, 60Hz
(A) reduce eddy losses
(D) 120V, 60Hz
(B) increase generator voltage
57. In a lap wound armature, (C) increase eddy current
the number of parallel paths
is equal to (D) increase the strength of the
generator
(A) number of poles
(B) 2 62. Power ratings of emer-
gency generators ranges
(C) number of conductors from
(D) 4 (A) 10kW to 100kW
58. Which part of the DC Gen- (B) 20kW to 200kW
erator is also called the (C) 100kW to 2MW
frame?
(D) 10kW to 100MW
(A) yoke
63. What object is needed to
(B) field make a functioning circuit
(C) armature (A) Bulbs
(D) poles (B) Crocodile Clips
59. A DC generator operates at (C) A Power Supply (Battery)
80 Hz. The number of times (D) Plastic
the output voltage reaches a
maximum in 1 second is 64. In an AC generator, the
wire loop which is mounted
(A) 40
so that it rotates within a
(B) 80 magnetic field is called the
(C) 120
(D) 160 (A) Coil
(B) Armature
60. In A.C generator, by in-
creasing the no. of turns in (C) Slip Rings
the coil, (D) Brushes

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 595

65. Who among these physi- (C) Increasing the current

cists developed the princi-
(D) Increasing the number of
ple of electromagnetic induc-
turns on the coil
tion?
(A) Hans Christian Oersted 70. What type of rotors are usu-
(B) James Clerk Maxwell ally used in large power,
high speed turbine drives?
(C) Michael Faraday
(A) cylindrical type
(D) Heinrich Hertz
(B) salient type
66. What is another name for
(C) armature type
electromagnetic induction?
(A) The motor effect (D) general purpose rotor type

(B) The generator effect 71. What is the energy involved

(C) A solenoid in spinning?
(D) A flux capacitor (A) kinetic

67. Separately excited field (B) electrical

generators has (C) chemical potential
(A) Permanent magnet (D) thermal
(B) Electromagnet
72. To find the effective value
(C) Residual magnetism
(rms),
(D) none of above
(A) multiply the peak value by
68. Which type of Self-Excited 0.707
DC Generator is character- (B) multiply the peak value by
ized by having one of its 0.636
field winding in series and
the other in parallel with the (C) multiply the peak value by
armature? 1.414

(A) series wound (D) divide the peak value by

0.707
(B) short shunt compound wound
(C) long shunt compound wound 73. What is the function of the
(D) shunt wound motor?
(A) Convert electrical energy to
69. The motion in DC motor mechanical (kinetic) energy
can be increased by the fol-
lowing factors (you may (B) Convert electrical energy to
choose more than one) thermal energy (heat)
(A) Using a stronger magnet (C) Convert mechanical (kinetic)
energy to electrical energy
(B) Increasing the potential differ-
ence (D) none of above

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
596 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

74. What does the Armature 79. Which part of the DC Gen-
do? erator allows the collection
of current from rotating com-
(A) Turns the coils around
mutator? This device slides
(B) Produces the input voltage over the commutator.

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Produce the voltage output (A) carbon brush
(D) conducts the electricity (B) armature

75. We can increase the (C) current collector

amount of current produced (D) bearing
in the generator by
80. How does a moving-coil
(A) Decrease the voltage
microphone create electrical
(B) increasing the voltage signals?
(C) moving the coil / magnet (A) An electromagnet vibrates in-
faster side a coil of wire
(D) keep the coil in a powerful (B) A coil of wire vibrates in a
field magnetic field
(C) A magnet vibrates inside a
76. Every magnet, regardless
coil of wire
of its shape, has two
(D) A small battery vibrates in a
(A) magnetic poles.
circuit
(B) magnetic charges.
81. A transformer is designed
(C) magnetic fields.
to step down 1320 V to 110
(D) magnetic needles. V. If there are 300 turns on
the primary side, how many
77. What is the peak voltage turns are on the secondary
when the maximum voltage side?
is 100V?
(A) 1200
(A) 707V
(B) 484
(B) 141V
(C) 3600
(C) 7.07V
(D) 25
(D) 120V
82. The acts as mechanical
78. generators what be they !!! rectifier, converting AC gen-
(A) Cool erated voltage into DC volt-
age.
(B) Mega Cool
(A) commutator
(C) Ultra Cool
(B) rectifier
(D) An object that generates elec-
tricity through rotational move- (C) armature
ment (D) carbon brush

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 597

83. The part of the DC Gener- 88. It describes how often or

ator that is also called the how frequently a complete
frame AC waveform is produced.
(A) yoke (A) frequency
(B) armature (B) speed
(C) poles
(C) period
(D) field
(D) time
84. AC generator converts
(A) Mechanical energy to electri- 89. Electrical generator is appli-
cal energy cation on
(B) Electrical energy to mechani- (A) magnetism
cal energy
(B) electromagnetic induction
(C) Heat energy to mechanical
energy (C) Lenz’s Law
(D) none of above (D) Faraday Law

85. Select all that apply to AC 90. Which type of Self-Excited

electric generators. DC Generator has its volt-
(A) the direction of current age output dependent on
changes the load applied?
(B) the direction of current re- (A) Permanent Magnet DC gener-
mains constant ator
(C) uses slip rings
(B) Separately Excited DC Gener-
(D) uses split rings ator
(E) the magnitude of induced cur- (C) Series Field Self Excited DC
rent is constant Generator
86. AC generators produces no (D) Shunt Field Self Excited DC
output current at Generator
(A) 0 coil position
91. Which type of Self-Excited
(B) 90 coil position
DC Generator is character-
(C) 270 coil position ized by having one of its
(D) none of above field winding in series with
the load and the other is in
87. What do Batteries do in a parallel with the armature?
circuit?
(A) series wound
(A) Nothing
(B) Provide Electricity (B) short shunt compound wound

(C) Use Electricity (C) long shunt compound wound

(D) Light Up (D) shunt wound

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
598 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

92. What energy transforma- 96. How is contact between the

tion takes place in an elec- coil and circuit maintained
tric fan’s motor? in an AC generator?
(A) Alternating current to direct (A) A split ring commutator con-
current nects to each side for half a turn

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Direct current to alternating (B) It cannot be maintained.
current (C) The alternator can only com-
(C) Mechanical energy into elec- plete one revolution and must
trical energy then be rotated in reverse
(D) Slip rings and brushes allow
(D) Electrical energy into mechan-
continuous connection
ical energy
97. At the power plant the tur-
93. Select all that apply to com- bine is connected to a ?
mutators.
(A) DC Generator
(A) converts AC to DC
(B) AC Capacitor
(B) converts DC to AC
(C) AC Generator
(C) changes current direction ev- (D) Cooling Tower
ery cycle
(D) keeps current direction con- 98. In separately excited field
stant generators, the stator pro-
duces its magnetic field
94. Simple loop generators pro- (A) by external source of dc cur-
duces no output current at rent
(A) 0 coil position (B) by current from armature
(B) 90 coil position (C) by permanent magnets

(C) 270 coil position (D) none of above

(D) none of above 99. In self excited field genera-

tors, the stator strengthens
95. When increasing the num- its magnetic field
ber of coils and number of (A) by external source of dc cur-
windings in each coil rent
(A) AC generators produce more (B) By current from armature
electricity
(C) By permanent magnet
(B) DC generators produce more
(D) none of above
electricity
(C) both AC and DC generators 100. The function of the yoke
produce more electricity (A) protective shield or mechani-
(D) neither AC nor DC generators cal protection
produce more electricity (B) South pole of magnet

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 599

(C) Armature conductor (B) rectifier

(D) Electrical shielding (C) armature
101. Magnetic field can be pro- (D) poles
duced by using? (select all
correct answers) 106. How can you increase the
amount of induced voltage
(A) permanent magnet in a generator?
(B) electromagnet (A) increase the speed of rotation
(C) transformer (rpm) of the generator
(D) rectifier (B) decrease the speed of rotation
(rpm) of the generator
102. “AC” in an AC electric gen-
erator stands for (C) use bigger bearings for the
generator
(A) alternating current
(D) use bigger commutator
(B) alternative current
(C) actual current 107. If a circuit is not complete,
(D) alternating cable what will happen?
(A) The Bulbs Glow
103. A transformer has 100
turns in a secondary coil. It (B) Will not work
steps up a potential differ- (C) 50% chance of working
ence from 50V to 250V. Cal-
(D) It will work
culate the number of turns in
the primary coil. 108. When a conductor cuts the
(A) 10 Turns magnetic flux lines at? , the
(B) 35 Turns maximum voltage will be in-
duced into the conductor.
(C) 50 Turns
(A) 60 deg
(D) 20 Turns
(B) 90 deg
104. What is the Stator in an
(C) 180 deg
A.C Generator?
(A) The moving coil thing (D) 360 deg

(B) Some sort of stationary part 109. How can the direction of
(C) The center of electrical con- an induced potential be re-
nections versed? (select 2)
(D) Output of Voltage (A) By changing the direction of
the magnetic field
105. Which of the following
(B) By using fewer coils
is/are parts of a typical DC
Generator? select all that (C) By moving the magnet faster
applies (D) By moving the magnet in the
(A) commutator opposite direction

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
600 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

110. In Fleming’s Right Hand (C) it changes direction.

Rule for Generators, the
(D) the resistance fluctuates back
“Forefinger” represent the
and forth.
direction of
(A) Force of the conductor 115. The part of the genera-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(B) Magnetic field tor where the current is in-
duced.
(C) Current
(A) field winding
(D) None of the above
(B) poles
111. What parts of the motor
(C) commutator
function to provide a force
to create the mechanical en- (D) armature
ergy?
(A) commutator and brushes 116. The direction of the in-
duced current in the coil of
(B) field magnets and armature a generator depends on the
(C) DC power source and termi-
nals (A) length of the coil.
(D) none of above
(B) speed of rotation of the coil.
112. Which principle does an (C) direction of the magnetic
AC generator work on? field.
(A) Electromagnetism (D) strength of the magnetic field.
(B) Magnetism
117. For a transformer to work
(C) Electromagnetic induction
properly, it must
(D) Induced Magnetism
(A) be connected to alternating
113. What is the name of the current.
effect caused by the wire (B) have a core made of Carbon.
when it is moved across a
magnetic field? (C) be connected to direct cur-
rent.
(A) Induced magnetism
(D) have infinite resistance.
(B) Electromagnetic induction
(C) Electromagnetism 118. It is the sudden voltage
(D) Turning effect of coil drop in the generator wind-
ings due to load current
114. Alternating current differs surges on the generator.
from direct current because (A) voltage dip
(B) voltage regulation
(A) it alternates from AC to DC.
(C) voltage terminal
(B) the current alternates between
2 A and 5 A. (D) voltage source

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 601

119. Why are all armature core 124. The strength of magnetic
laminated? field due to a solenoid can
be changed by changing
(A) to reduce the generator size
in it
(B) it is cheaper to manufacture
(A) number of turns
(C) laminating the core provides
(B) Current
more mechanical strength
(C) Both number of turns and cur-
(D) to reduce eddy current losses rent
120. The electricity generated (D) none of above
from the power plant is
125. A generator is a device
(A) Alternating Current that converts
(B) Direct Current (A) mechanical energy into electri-
cal energy.
(C) Delayed Current
(B) electrical energy into kinetic
(D) Alternating Voltage
energy.
121. Another term for ac gener- (C) mechanical energy into ki-
ator. netic energy.
(A) alternator (D) electrical energy into mechan-
ical energy.
(B) commutator
(C) armature 126. The electricity generated
from the power plant is
(D) stator
(A) Alternating Current
122. Generators are machines (B) Direct Current
that convert into
(C) Delayed Current
(A) AC, DC
(D) Eddy Current
(B) mechanical energy, electrical
energy 127. Which ONE of the energy
conversions below takes
(C) electrical energy, mechanical place when a DC motor is
energy in operation?
(D) chemical energy, electrical en- (A) Kinetic to electrical
ergy
(B) Heat to mechanical
123. In the Flemming’s left hand (C) Mechanical to electrical
rule, the thumb is represent- (D) Electrical to mechanical
ing the
128. The part of the DC Genera-
(A) Direction of magnetic field
tor that provides mechanical
(B) Direction of electric current support for the poles
(C) Motion of wire (A) yoke
(D) Turning effect of coil (B) armature

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
602 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

(C) poles 133. At no-load condition of a

(D) field separately excited dc gener-
ator, what will happen to
129. A single winding conduc- the output voltage if field ex-
tor moves through the mag- citation current increases?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
netic field as it rotated (A) increases
by a mechanical energy in-
duces a voltage. This phe- (B) decreases
nomenon is known as: (C) remains the same
(A) Lenz’s Law (D) becomes zero output
(B) Kirchoff’s Voltage Law 134. What is true of AC GENER-
(C) Faraday’s Law of Electromag- ATOR?
netic Induction (A) It works on the principle of
(D) Fleming’s Left Hand Rule electromagnetic induction
(B) The mechanical energy of the
130. In a generator armature
rotation is converted into electrical
makes one full revolution, it
energy
goes through degrees of
mechanical rotation. (C) A pair of slip rings are used in
the AC generator
(A) 0
(D) All the above
(B) 90
(C) 270 135. When a coil is held station-
ary in magnetic field, the in-
(D) 360
duced current in it:
131. The part of the the DC (A) continuously changes
Generator that gets ex-
(B) randomly changes
cited when current is passed
through it. (C) remains zero
(A) Field winding (D) becomes maximum
(B) Poles 136. A generator develops a
(C) yoke maximum potential differ-
ence of 170 V. the effective
(D) commutator potential difference is
132. In an AC generator, the (A) 120 V
contacts are made from a (B) 1004 V
soft but highly conductive
material, usually carbon, (C) 12.0 V
and are called (D) 1200.0 V
(A) Coils 137. In D.C. generators, lap
(B) Armatures wound armature is used for:
(C) Slip Rings (A) high voltage, high current
(D) Brushes (B) low voltage, high current

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.6 Electric generator & A.C. 603

(C) high voltage, low current (C) 0.05 Tesla

(D) low voltage, low current (D) 0.03 Tesla

138. When magnetic flux in- 143. A rectangular coil of cop-

creases in a coil, the induced per wires is rotated in a
current will be magnetic field. The direc-
(A) in the same direction tion of the induced current
changes once in each
(B) in the opposite direction
(A) two revolutions
(C) clockwise
(B) one revolution
(D) counterclockwise
(C) half revolution
139. what current does a motor (D) one-fourth revolution
except?
144. Super heated steam is
(A) only AC
used to turn a ?
(B) only DC
(A) Transformer
(C) both
(B) Battery
(D) none
(C) Turbine
(E) both
(D) Toothed Gear
140. how did you enjoy quiz?
145. What is an object that cre-
(A) good ates electricity from rotary
(B) good movements?
(C) good (A) generator
(D) good (B) Motzart
(E) good (C) Motor
(D) Moter
141. If the coil is placed per-
pendicular to field lines then (E) Motar
the number of lines passing
146. As a generator armature
through the coil is:
makes one full revolution, it
(A) Minimum goes through? degrees of
(B) Maximum mechanical rotation.
(C) Zero (A) 0
(D) May be maximum or mini- (B) 90
mum (C) 270
142. Which of the following (D) 360
magnetic field will induce 147. Find the effective voltage
largest amount of voltage? given that the maximum cur-
(A) 0.5 Tesla rent is 20V
√
(B) 0.3 Tesla (A) 10 2 A

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 604 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current
√
(B) 5 2A (D) 198V
(C) 20 ÷ 2 A
150. Which basic part of a gen-
(D) 0A erator distinguishes AC from
148. Find the average power DC?

NARAYAN CHANGDER
dissipated in a Generator if (A) Brushes
the maximum power output
(B) Rotor
is 500W?
(C) Commutator
(A) 500W
(B) 100W (D) Stator

(C) 1000W 151. Which ONE of the follow-

(D) 250W ing actions will NOT cause
an increase in the induced
149. A transformer has 200 emf in a coil if the coil is ro-
turns on the primary coil tated in a uniform magnetic
and 50 turns in the sec- field?
ondary coil. A potential dif-
ference of 48V is induced in (A) Rotating the coil faster
the secondary coil. Calcu- (B) Increasing the strength of the
late the potential difference magnetic field
in the Primary coil.
(C) Increasing the number of
(A) 12V turns of the coil
(B) 192V (D) Replacing the coil with a coil
(C) 100V of lower resistance

4.7 Domestic circuits

1. Tick the chemical effect of 3. If electrical power costs EUR
elecric current 0.12/kwh, and I use 9
(A) boiling x 108 Joules of electrical
energy, what will I be
(B) motion charged?
(C) electro shock (A) EUR 10
(D) Electroplating (B) EUR 20

2. According to new colour (C) EUR 30

coding the colour of live (D) EUR 40
wire is
4. The fuse rating used for ap-
(A) Brown pliances such as geysers is
(B) Black (A) 5 A
(C) Red (B) 50 A
(D) Blur (C) 220 A

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.7 Domestic circuits 605

(D) 15 A 9. As per old convention, live

wire is , neutral wire is
5. If you are available with & earth wire is
fuses with following rat-
ing250mA500 mA1A 2A (A) red, blue, green respectively
5A10AWhich one would be (B) green, black, yellow respec-
most suitable for protecting tively
T.V of power 180 W at 240 (C) red, black, green respectively
V?
(D) black, red, blue respectively
(A) 1A
10. Which of the following
(B) 5A
equations is an equation
(C) 250mA for power, involving current
(D) 10 A and resistance?
(A) P= I/V
6. M.C.B. s work on principle
of (B) P = IR
(A) Heating effect of electric cur- (C) P = IVR2
rent (D) P = I2R
(B) Chemical effect of electric cur- 11. Which of the following de-
rent scribes the common domes-
(C) Magnetic effect of electric cur- tic power supplied in India?
rent (A) 110V, 100Hz
(D) Electroplating effect of current (B) 220V, 100Hz
7. If the earth wire is damaged (C) 110V, 50Hz
(D) 220V, 50Hz
(A) The user will suffer from elec-
tric shock 12. Earth wire is used
(A) as a safety measure
(B) The appliance won’t work
(B) to prevent shock due to leak-
(C) The appliance will overheat
age of current
(D) none of above
(C) in appliances having a metal
8. If electricity costs EUR 0.15 body
per kilowatt-hour, how (D) in place of neutral wire
much does it cost to operate
a router that requires 7.5 13. What property of fuse wire
amperes of electricity and is enables it to act as a safety
used in a 120-volt electrical feature?
circuit for 2 hours? (A) it’s Boiling point
(A) EUR 0.27 (B) it’s strength
(B) EUR 0.68 (C) it’s Melting point
(C) EUR 1.75 (D) it’s Texture
(D) EUR 12.31 (E) it’s flexibility

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
606 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

14. At the time of short circuit, (C) magnetic effects of electric

the current in the circuit current
(A) reduces substantially. (D) none of these
(B) does not change. 19. Electric fuse is placed in se-

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) increases heavily. ries with the wire.
(D) vary continuously (A) live

15. Color of earth wire used in (B) parallel

household wiring is (C) neutral
(A) Blue (D) earth
(B) Green 20. Live wire is generally the
(C) Red wire with
(D) Black (A) Red Insulation
(B) Green Insulation
16. If electrical power costs EUR
0.12/kwh, and I use 250 (C) Black Insulation
kwh of electrical energy, (D) Yellow Insulation
what will I be charged?
(A) EUR 10 21. CALCULATE A FUSE FOR
A TV, WHEN VOLTAGE-
(B) EUR 20 240VOLTS AND THE POWER-
(C) EUR 30 50 WATT
(D) EUR 40 (A) 4 AMP
(B) 5 AMP
17. What is the purpose of the
Miniature Circuit Breaker? (C) 1 AMP
(A) Turn on/off electrical supply to (D) 10 AMP
the whole house.
22. For a electric appliance of 5
(B) Trips power supply when it de- A current you will use fuse
tects any leakage current of more of which rating
than 30mA in the earth wire.
(A) 7 A
(C) Cuts off power supply to a par-
ticular circuit when a large current (B) 6 A
higher than the rating s detected. (C) 4 A
(D) Stops an electrocution from (D) 5 A
happening.
23. Which is a result of over-
18. Electric fuse is based on loading of electrical appli-
(A) heating effect of electric cur- ances?
rent (A) high performance of equip-
(B) chemical effect of electric cur- ment
rent (B) inadequate current supply

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
4.7 Domestic circuits 607

(C) overheating of wires and fire (A) 1.One device is connected to

may occur the socket.
(D) none of the above (B) 2.Touching of two neutral
wires.
24. Main fuse in domestic
wiring consists of which (C) 3.Insulation break down.
type of fuse? (D) 4.Touching of two live wires.
(A) Cartridge fuse 29. Earth wires are particularly
(B) Porcelain fuse important if the case of an
(C) Radial fuse appliance is made of

(D) AC fuse (A) Metal

(B) Plastic
25. occurs when the live and
neutral wires come in the di- (C) Wood
rect contact (D) Rubber
(A) Overloading 30. The most important safety
(B) Short Circuit method used for protecting
(C) Fluctuation of current home appliances from short
circuiting or overloading is
(D) low voltage
(A) earthing
26. In our country, the potential (B) use of fuse
difference between the live
& neutral wire is (C) use of stabilizers

(A) 220 V (D) use of electric meter

(B) 110 V 31. If the local rate for electric-

(C) 50 V ity is EUR 0.13 per kilowatt-
hour, how much should
(D) 440 V the electric bill be for 120
kilowatt-hours?
27. At the time of short circuit
(A) EUR 2.50
(A) Current increases, resistance
decreases (B) EUR 6.80
(B) Current decreases, resistance (C) EUR 10.20
decreases (D) EUR 15.60
(C) Current increases, voltage de-
creases 32. A kilowatt-hour is equal to
joules.
(D) Voltage increases, current in-
creases (A) 3, 600
(B) 360, 000
28. Current in an electric circuit
can exceeds it’s maximum (C) 3, 600, 000
limit when, (D) 360, 000, 000

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
608 Chapter 4. Magnetic effects of electric current

33. Which of the following 34. In energy transformations,

wires has a potential of “wasted energy” usually
220V? takes what form?
(A) Neutral Wire (A) heat
(B) Earth Wire (B) chemical energy

NARAYAN CHANGDER
(C) Live Wire (C) light
(D) All of the above (D) sound waves

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
 Index

B Current carrying coil. . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Current carrying conductor . . . . . 421
Battery circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Current carrying solenoids . . . . . . 528
Branch parallel circuit . . . . . . . . . . 354 Current changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Bulb circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Current decreases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Current direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Current do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
C Current electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Current flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing electric field. . . . . . . . . . 563 Current flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Changing magnetic field . . . . . . . 473 Current increases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing magnetic fields . . . . . . 475 Current passes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Charge flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Current produces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Charged object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Charged objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
D
Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Circuit protection device . . . . . . . . 417 Diverge light rays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Circuit resistance decreases . . . . . 363 Domestic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Closed circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Cm length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 E
Colour light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Common circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Electric appliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Complete circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Electric cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Concave mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Electric charges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Convex mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Electric circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Convex mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Electric current flows . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Convex spherical mirrors. . . . . . . . . 80 Electric current pass . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Current = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Electric currents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
610 INDEX

Electric energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 L

Electric field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Electric field line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Large electric currents . . . . . . . . . . 294
Electric field strength. . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Larger magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Electric fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

NARAYAN CHANGDER
Electric force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Light rays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electric generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Electric light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Electric motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Electrical charge flows . . . . . . . . . . 345 M
Electrical circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Electrical circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Magic mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Energy charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Magnetic effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Equal image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Magnetic field equation. . . . . . . . . 528
Eye lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Magnetic field intensity . . . . . . . . . 573
Magnetic field strength . . . . . . . . . 462
Magnetic force fields . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Magnetic induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
F Magnetic material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Magnetic materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
F concave mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Magnetic object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Field lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Measure electric current . . . . . . . . 263
Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Flat mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Mirror forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Following objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Forming image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Mirror magnification formula . . . 158
Functioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Mirror reflect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Mirror u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Mirror use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
G Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Gravitational field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

N
Nonohmic circuit device . . . . . . . . 392
H
Headlight circuit resistance . . . . . 376
O
Household circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Object distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Observable magnetic field . . . . . . 558
I Open circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Image distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Image form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 P
Image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Parallel light rays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/
INDEX 611

Permanent magnetic field . . . . . . . 544 Stationary magnetic field . . . . . . . 580

Perpendicular magnetic field . . . . 559 Strength magnetic field . . . . . . . . . 494
Plain mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Strong electric field . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Plane mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Strong magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Strongest magnetic force . . . . . . . 519

R
T
Real image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Total circuit current . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Resistance wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

U
S
Uniform electric field . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Series circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Uniform magnetic field . . . . . . . . . 338
Shaving mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Simple circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 W
Simple series circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Small plane mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Wavelength light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Spherical concave mirror. . . . . . . . . 47 White light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Spherical mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Wire length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Spinning electric charges . . . . . . . 530 Working circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Static magnetic field . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Working electric motor . . . . . . . . . . 558

ALL ANSWERS UPLOADED ON OUR OFFICIAL WEBSITE

https://www.gatecseit.in/